PDF NEC Electra 120 Level II And Adv Install Serv Manual

Electra 120 Level II and Level II Adv Install And Service Issue 7 1998 Electra 120 Level II and Level II Adv Install And Service Issue 7 1998

NEC Electra 120 Level II and Level II Adv Install Serv Manual NEC_Electra_120_Level_II_and_Level_II_Adv_Install_Serv_Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Electra 120 Level II and Level II Adv Install And Service Issue 7 1998 The Eye | File Listing

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 843

DownloadPDF NEC Electra 120 Level II And Adv Install Serv Manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
THIS

MANUAL

The Installation
Service Manual provides the information
required to install, program,
and maintain the Electra Professional IZO/Level II/Level II Advanced systems.
This manual contains the following
Chapter

1:

chapters :

Introduction

Chapter.1 provides a top-level description of the Electra Professional lZO/Level D/Level
II Advanced systems and includes applicable FCC requirements
and UL regulatory
information.
Chapter

2:

Electra

Chapter
2 provides
Professional 120
Chapter

3:

Electra

Professional

120 Hardware

the information

required

Professional

Level

Specifications
to prepare

II/Level

II

and Installation

and install

the Electra

Advanced

Hardware

and install

the Electra

Specfications and Installation
Chapter
3 provides the information
required to prepare
Professional Level II and Level II Advanced systems.
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter

4:

Termiual

Installation

4 provides information
5:

needed to install applicable

Programming

Chapter

5 provides detailed instructions

Chapter

6:

Guide to Feature

for performing

Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
SUPPORTING
DOCUMENTS

7:

Blocks associated with a feature

that are

System Maintenance

7 provides maintenance
8:

System Programming.

Programming

Chapter 6 provides a roadmap of the Memory
either required or can be programmed.
Chapter

terminals.

Dtem Cordless

instructions

and flowcharts

for the systems.

Terminal

8 provides operating instructions

for the Dkrm Cordless Terminal.

In addition to the Installation
Service Manual, the Electra Professional
12OILevel
II/Level II Advanced systems are supported by the following technical manuals:
Electra
Manual

Professional
12O/Level
(Stock Number 722085)

IIkevel

Developed to provide a general overview
II Advanced systems, including features,
and standards.

II

Advanced

of the Electra
configuration,

General

Description

Professional 1201Level II/Level
service features, specifications,

Electra
Professional
12O/Level II/Level
II
Specifications Manual (Stock Number 722086)

Advanced

Features

and

Provides an expanded discussion of each available feature for the Electra Professional
l%O/Level II/Level II Advanced systems. In addition, the Features and Specifications
Manual provides Station Application,
Operating Procedures, and Service Conditions.

Electra Professional lZO/Level II/Level II Advanced Station Operations Manual
(Stock Number 722088)
This manual explains in detail the station
for use by installers and end users.

operations

for all station user features

and is

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced Job Specifications Manual
(Stock Number 722089)
Used in conjunction with the Installation
Service Manual, this manual is for the service
technicians who are responsible for planning the system installation,
maintaining
the
System, and keeping records of system progr anuning and configuration.
[This manual
is included with the CPU-F( l-20 KTU.1

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II
Distribution Manual (Stock Number 720236)
This manual
provides the
This manual
familiar with

Advanced

Automatic

Call

is also included with the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU ( Stock Number 7202331, and
service technician with the instructions for programming
the ACD feature.
is also for the ACD supervisor, at the customer site, to use to become
the system and take full advantage of the ACD/MIS feature.

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced Least Cost Routing Manual
This manual is included with the Least Cost Routing software (Stock No. 722309). It
provides instructions for the service technician for programming
the customer site for
Least cost Rmlting.

Electra Professional
Technician Manual

12OILevel II/Level

II

Advanced

System

Program

This manual is included with the System Program Technician
Software (Stock No.
722314). It is for use by the service technician when using the PC software to program
the Electra Professional 1201Level II/Level II Advanced systems. This manual explains
the various screens in the PC software that allow the technician to program the system
to meet the individual customer needs.

Electra Professional 120/Level II and Level II Advanced System Program EndUser Manual
This manual is included with the System Program End-User Software (Stock No.
722315). It is for use by the end-user when using PC software to make day-to-day
changes in the Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced systems program.
This manual explains the use of various screens in the PC software.

CHAPTER
ELECTRA

1

PROFESSIONAL

120/LEVEL II/LEVEL

II ADVANCED

INTRODUCTION

ELECTRA

PROFESSIONAL

12OILEVEL

II/LEVEL

II ADVANCED

INTRODUCTION
TABLE
SECTION

1

OF CONTENTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l

INTRODUCTION

1.1

Electra Professional

120

................................................................

1.2

Electra Profession1 Level II and Level II Advanced

1.3

RegulatoryInformation

l-l

.........................................

l-3

.................................................................

1.3.1

Company Notification

1.3.2

BatteryDisposal

1.3.3

IncidenceofHarm

1.3.4

Radio Frequency

1.3.5

Hearing Aid Compatibility

1.3.6

Direct Inward Dialing

1.3.7

Voice Announcement/Monitoring

1.3.8

MusicOnHold

1.3.9

Service Requirements

1.3.10

UL Regulatory

1.3.11

ICRequirements

l-4

...........................................................

l-5

................................................................

l-6

...............................................................

l-7

Interference

....................................................

l-7

.......................................................

l-7

...........................................................
Over DID Lines

l-7

..................................

l-8

..................................................................

l-8

...........................................................

Information

l-8

......................................................

l-8

................................................................

l-9

.....................................................................

1.4

EquipmentList

1.5

Equipment

General Information

1.6

Equipment

Description

l-10

........................................................

- Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

l-16
II Advanced

...............

l-16

................

1-16

1.6.1

Electra Professional

120 Key Service Units and Power Supply Units

1.6.2

Electra Professional

Level II Key Service Units and Power Supply Units

1.6.3

Electra Professional

Level II Advanced

1.6.4

Common Control Key Telephone

Unit

1.6.5

Station Interface

Units

1.6.6

Trunk Interface

1.6.7

Optional Key Telephone

1.6.8

Electra Elite Digital Multiline Terminals,Electra
Professional Multiline
Line Telephones, and Associated Equipment
......................................

1.6.9

Table of Contents

Key Telephone
Key Telephone

Single Line Telephone

Units

Adapters

Units

............

Key Service Units and Power Supply Units
............................................
..............................

1-16
...

l-17
1-17

.: ...........

l-18

............................................

l-18

..................................................

.................................................

l-20
Terminal,

Single
l-22
l-26

i

LIST OF FIGURES
l-1

Outside View of the Electra Professional

120 KSUs

l-2

Outside View of the 3Cabinet

l-3

Outside View of the Electra Profession Level II KSUs

l-4

Outside View of the Electra Professional

Electra Professional

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
120 KSUs

.................................

.........................................

Level II Advanced

KSUs

1-l

x.

l-2

:”

l-3

..............................

l-4

LIST OF TABLES
l-l
l-2
l-3
l-4
l-5
l-6
l-7
l-8
l-9
l-10
l-11
l-12
l-13

ii

FIC,REN,SOC,andJackTypesforKTUs
Battery

Types and Quantities

Electra Professional

for KSUs and KTUs

120 KSUs and PSUs

Level II KSUs and PSUs
Level II Advanced

..................
...........

...................

..................................

KSUs and PSUs

.........................

l-5
1-6
l-10
l-10

. . . . . . . . , ......................

......................
. . . . . . . . , .....................
.....................
. . . . . . . . . .....................

l-10
l-11
l-11
l-11
l-11

.....................
Level II and Level II Advanced Common Control KTUs .......................................
Electra Professional 120 Station Interface KTUs
............................................
Level II and Level II Advanced Station Interface KTUs .......................................
Electra Professional 120 Trunk Interface KTUs/Units
.......................................
Electra Professional

120 Common

Control KTUs

Interface

............

Level II and Level II Advanced

Trunk

KTUsWnits

Electra Professional

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Other Optional KTUs

Electra Professional

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Terminals

1-12

..................................

l-13

.....................

and Other Optional

Units

1-13
.......

l-14

Table of Contents

,

CHAPTER
1
INTRODUCTION
SECTION

1

INTRODUCTION
1.1

Electra

Professional

120

The Electra Professional 120 basic cabinet serves a combined total of 40 ports, consisting
of outside lines, terminals,
or other options.
This system can be expanded to
accommodate a combined total of 120 ports. The two expansion KSUs support up to 40
universal ports each. Additional
equipment (such as Single Line Telephones, external
speakers, voice mail, or facsimile machines1 can be connected to this system to enhance
its abilities. Refer to Figure l-1 - Outside View of the Electra Professional 120 KSU and
Figure l-2 - Outside View of the 3-Cabinet Electra Professional 120 KSUs.
This chapter
provides the technician,
installing
the Electra Professional
120, a
comprehensive
explanation
of the system specifications,
hardware,
and installation
procedures. The technician should understand this entire chapter before installing the
system to enable more effkient installation
and cut-over.

Figure l-l

Introduction

Outside View of the Electra Professional

120 KSU

l-l

Figure l-2
1.2

Electra

Outside View of the 3Cabinet

Professional

Electra Professional

120 KSUs

Level II and Level II Advanced

The Electra Professional Level II is a fully digital system serving a maximum
of 56
outside lines and a maximum
of 56 terminals.
The Electra Professional
Level II
Advanced system serves a maximum of 64 outside lines and a maximum of 96 terminals.
Both systems provide flexible configuration,
allowing the customer to purchase only
what is needed. The Level II basic cabinet can accommodate a combined total of 40 ports,
consisting of outside lines and/or telephones and/or other options. As customer business
grows, this system can be expanded to accommodate a combined total of 64 ports. The
Level II Advanced system basic KSU can accommodate
64 ports. Each of the two
available expansion KSUs also supports up to 64 universal ports. Additional equipment
(such as Single Line Telephones, external speakers, voice mail, or facsimile machines)
can be connected to these systems to enhance their abilities. Refer to Figure 1-3 - Outside
View of the Electra Professional Level II KSUs and Figure l-4 Outside View of the
Electra Professional Level II Advanced KSUs.

1-2

Introduction

Installation

Service M
This chapter provides the technician, installing the Electra Professional Level II or Level
II Advanced, a comprehensive
explanation
of the systems specifications,
hardware, and
The technician should understand this entire chapter before
installation
procedures.
installing the system to enable more efficient installation
and cut-over.

Figure 1-3 Outside View of the Electra Professional

Introduction

Level II KSUs

1-3

Electra Professional

Febrwe

Figure l-4
1.3

Regulatory

l%O/Level II/ Level II Advanced

Outside View of the Electra Professional

Level II Advanced

KSUs

Information

The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit this
telephone system to be directly connected to the telephone network. A jack is provided by
the telephone company. Jacks are not provided on party lines or coin lines.
The telephone company may change its teclmical operations and procedures.
If such
changes affect the compatibility
or use of this system, the telephone company is required
to give adequate notice of the changes.

l-4

Introduction

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

1.3.1

12OILevel II /Level II Advanced

1998

Company Notification
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone
information
must be provided to the telephone company:
1.

Your telephone

2.

FCC registration
l

0

the following

number.
number:

Professional

120 AY5USA-25003-KF-E

Level II System:

AY5USA-73702-KF-E

Level II Advanced:

AY5USA-74750-KF-E

If the system is to be installed
following number:
Electra

3.

network,

If the system is to be installed as a Key System (no dial access to
Trunk Groups/Route Advance Blocks), use the following number:
Electra

Professional

as a Multifunction

System,

use the

120 AY5USA-25004-MF-E

Level II System:

AY5USA-73705-MF-E

Level II Advanced:

AY5USA-74743-MF-E

Facility
Interface
Codes (FIG), Ringer Equivalence
Number
(REN),
Service Order Codes (SOC), and Jack types are shown in Table l-1 - FIC,
REN, SOC, and Jack Types for KTUs.

Table l-l
Interface

February

FIC, REN, SOC, and Jack Types for KTUs

KTU Type

IMPORTANT

NOTE

“This equipment can provide user access to interstate providers of operator
services using equal access codes. Modifications
by aggregaters to alter these
abilities may be a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Service
Improvement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of FCC Rules. ”

Introduction

1-5

1.3.2

Battery

Disposal

The Electra Professional
batteries listed in Table
KTUs. When disposing
with applicable
federal
procedures.
Table l-2

120/Level II/Level II Advanced systems include the
1-2 - Battery Types and Quantities
for KSUs and
of these batteries, KSUs, or KTUs, you must comply
and state regulations
regarding
proper disposal

Battery

Types and Quantities

for KSUs and KTUs

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU

Lithium

1

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU

Lithium

1

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

Lithium

1

NiCad

1

ETW-4R-l(BK)

IMPORTANT

TEL

SAFEGUARDS

FOR BATTERY

DISPOSAL

DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN REGULAR TRASH! THE PRODUCT
YOU PURCHASED
CONTAINS A NICKEL-CADMIUM
OR SEALED LEAD
BATTERY.
NICKEL-CADMIUM
OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE
COLLECTED,
RECYCLED,
OR
DISPOSED
OF
IN
AN
ENVIRONMENTALLY
SOUND MANNER.
The incineration,
landfilling
or mixing
of nickel-cadmium
or sealed lead
batteries with the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED
BY LAW in
most areas. Contact your local solid waste management
officials for other
information
regarding the environmentally
sound collection, recycling, and
disposal of the battery.
Nickel-cadmium
(or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state
approved nickel-cadmium
(or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where
the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive
batteries.
In
Minnesota call l-800-225-PRBA
if further disposal information
is required, or
call l-800-232-9632
for further information.
The packaging for the Electra Professional
12OILevel II /Level II Advanced
systems contains the following labels regarding the proper disposal.

l-6

Introduction

‘?.,
. . .J’

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level

II /Level II Advanced

-

February

1998

PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING

F

a

CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM
BATTERY.
MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF
PROPERLY.
MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF
IN MUNICIPAL
WASTE.

Q@

Ni-Cd

CONTAINS
SEALED
LEAD
BATTERY.
MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF
PROPERLY.
MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF
IN MUNICIPAL
WASTE.

@

w

Pb

1.3.3

Incidence of Harm
If the system malfunctions,
it may also harm the telephone network.
The
telephone system should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be
determined, and repair is made. If this is not done, the telephone company may
temporarily disconnect service.

1.3.4

Radio Frequency
In compliance

Interference

with FCC Part 15 rules, the following
IMPORTANT

statement

is provided:

NOTE

“This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the Installation
Service Manual, may
cause interference to radio communications.
This equipment has been tested and
approved for compliance with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant
to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, that are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this telephone system in a residential
area’ is likely to cause
interference, in which case, the user, at his or her own expense, is required to take
whatever measures are required to correct the interference. ”
1.3.5

Hearing Aid Compatibility
The NEC Multiline
Terminals,
Digital Multiline
Terminals, and NEC Single
Line Telephones provided for this system are hearing aid compatible.
The
manufacturer
of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must
provide notice of hearing aid compatibility
to comply with FCC rules. FCC
rules prohibit the use of non-hearing
aid compatible telephones (after August
16,1989).

1.3.6

Direct Inward Dialing
Operating this equipment in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer
supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC rules.

Introduction

l-7

Y
Februar

1998
Proper answer supervision
A.

B.

1.3.7

is provided

when either of the following

cases exist:

This equipment
returns answer supervision
to the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN) and Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls are:
0

Answered

by the called station.

l

Answered

by the Attendant.

0

Routed to a recorded announcement
that can be administered
Customer Premise Equipment
(CPE) user.

0

Routed to a dial prompt.

This equipment returns answer supervision
the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are:
0

A call is unanswered.

l

A busy tone is received.

0

A reorder tone is received.

Voice Announcement/Monitoring

by the

on all DID calls forwarded

to

Over DID Lines
CAUTION

Using the Voice Announcement
feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at
the other end of the telephone line may be illegal under certain circumstances and
laws. Consult a legal advisor before implementing
any practice involving the
monitoring or recording of a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws
require a party monitoring or recording a telephone conversation to use a beeptone(s), make notification
to, and obtain consent of all parties to the telephone
conversation. In monitoring or recording sound activities at the other end of the
telephone line using the Voice Announcement
feature, the sound of the alert tone
at the beginning of the Voice Announcement
may or may not be considered
sufficient under applicable laws. Some of the applicable laws provide for strict
penalties for illegal monitoring or recording of telephone conversations.
1.3.8

Music On Hold
IMPORTANT

NOTE

“‘In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the
American
Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers,
or other similar
organization,
if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted
through the Music On
Hold feature of this telecommunication
system.
NEC America Inc., hereby
disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.”
1.3.9

Service Requirements
If the equipment malfunctions,
all repairs should be performed by an authorized
agent of NEC America, Inc. or by NEC America, Inc. Users requiring service
must report the need for service to an authorized agent of NEC America, Inc. or
to NEC America, Inc.

1.3.10

UL Regulatory

Information

This equipment is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories
and found to comply
with all applicable requirements
of the standard for telephone equipment UL
1459.

l-8

Introduction

1.3.11

IC Requirements
Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be
directly
connected
to the telephone
network.
Prior to connecting
or
disconnecting
this telephone system to or from the telephone network, the
telephone company must be provided with the following information.
1.

Your telephone

number.

2.

IC registration

number:

3.

The Load Number

of the equipment:

9

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment.
This certification
means that the equipment
meets certain
telecommunications
network
protective operational
and safety requirements.
Industry Canada does not
guarantee the equipment to operate to user satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities
of the local telecommunications
company.
The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable connection method. In
some cases, the company inside wiring associated with a single line individual
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degrading service in some situations.
Repairs to certified
maintenance
facility
made by the user to
telecommunications
equipment.

equipment
should be made by an authorized Canadian
designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations
this equipment,
or equipment malfunctions,
may give the
company cause to request the user to disconnect the

Users should ensure for their own protection
that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water
pipe system, if present, are connected together.
This precaution may be
particularly
important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves,
contact the applicable electric inspection authority or electrician.

but should

The Load Number
(LN) assigned to each terminal
device denotes the
percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by
the device to prevent overloading.
The termination
on a loop may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement
that the load numbers
total does not exceed 100.
This equipment is listed by the Canadian Standards Association and found to
comply with all applicable
requirements
of the standard
for telephone
equipment C 22.2 No. 225.

Introduction

l-9

This equipment

meets IC requirements

Use of the LLT-F(BG)-10
off-premise extensions.

KTU

CS03.

has not been approved

by IC for support

of

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations
of Industry Canada.
and
Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques
depassant
les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques
de Classe A prescrites dans le
reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique
edicte par Industrie Canada.
1.4

Equipment

List

The following equipment
is available for use in the Electra Professional
120/Level
II/Level II Advanced systems. The maximum quantities
that can be installed in each
system are listed in the following tables.
Table 1-3
Equipment
Designation

Electra Professional

120 KSUs and PSUs

Maximum
Quantity/System

Description

ESF-H-10

KSU

3

Basic and Expansion

PSF-H-20

PSU

1 for each KSU

Power Supply Unit

2 for each KSU

For Battery

Battery

KSU with Wall Mount Brackets

Backup

Table 1-4 Level II KSUs and PSUs

I

Equipment
Designation

Maximum
Quantity/System
I

I

ESF-SB-10 KSU

1

Basic KSU with Wall and Floor Mount Brackets

ESF-SE-10 KSU

1

Expansion

PSF-S-20 PSU
Battery

1 for each KSU
I
1 2 for each KSU
Table l-5

Equipment
Designation

l-10

Description
’

KSU with Wall and Floor Mount Brackets

Power Supply Unit
1For Battery

Backup

Level II Advanced

I

KSUs and PSUs

Maximum
Quantity/System

Description

ESF-XB-10

KSU

1

Basic KSU with Wall and Floor Mount

ESF-XE-10

KSU

2

Expansion

Brackets

KSU with Wall and Floor Mount Brackets

PSF-P-20 PSU

1 for each KSU

Power Supply Unit

Battery

2 for each KSU

For Battery

Backup

Introduction

.--._
\.1
‘-’

Table 1-6 Electra
Maximum
Quantity/System

Equipment
Designation
CPU-F(

Slot
Fixed

KTU

2

Module Memory Controller
ESF-XE- 10 KSU

Fixed

for

Level II and Level II Advanced Common Control

Maximum
Quantity/System
Level II
Advanced

Level II

KTUs

Description

Slot

j-20 KTU

1

1

Central Processing Unit, PBR
4-channel, TNG, CNF, MOH/Station
BGM Mounted

Fixed

KTU

0

2

Module Memory Controller
ESF-XE-10 KSU

Fixed

MMC-F-11

Table l-8 Electra
Masimum
Quantity/System
I
t
12

Equipment
Designation
ESI-F(8)-21

KTU

SLI-F(8G)-21
LLT-F(BG)-10

KTU
KTU

Professional

for

120 Station Interface

KTU
KTU
KTU

KTUs

I

Description

I
1 Ekhannel,

2-wire Electronic

11

8-channel SLTNM
PFT (2-channel)

14

2-channel

Interface

Off-Premise

7

12

8-channel,

Interface

with RSG, MW,

Interface

Extension

6

11

8-channel SLTNM
PFT (2-channel)

6

22

2-channel

2-wire Electronic
Interface

Off-Premise

Slot

Station Interface

Table l-9 Level II and Level II Advanced Station Interface
Maximum
Quantity/System
Description
Level II
Level II
Advanced

Equipment
Designation

LLT-F(2G)-10

Description
Central Processing Unit, PBR
4-channel, TNG, CNF, MOH/Station
BGM Mounted

Equipment
Designation

SLI-F(8G)-21

KTUs

1

Table l-7

ESI-F(8)-21

120 Common Control

j-20 KTU

MMC-F-11

CPU-F(

Professional

Interface
KTUs

Slot

Station Interface

Interface

with RSG, MW,

Interface

Extension

Interface

Table l-10
KTU/Unit

1-12

Electra Professional

120 Trimk

Interface

KTUs/Units

1

Description

Introduction

Table l-11

KTUAJnit

Level II and Level II Advanced

Maximum
Quantity/System
Level II

Trunk

Interface

KTUsNnits

Description

Level II
Advanced

Slot

COI-F(4)-20

7

16

4-channel,

Loop/GND

Start Trunk

Interface

COI-F(4)-30

7

16

4-channel,

Loop/GND

Start Trunk

Interface

COI-F(8)-20

7

8

8-channel,

Loop/GND

Start Trunk

Interface

COI-F(8)-30

7

8

8-channel,

Loop/GND

Start Trunk

Interface

DID-F(4)-10

7

4-channel,

DID Line Interface

Interface

TLI-F(2)-10

7

16

2-channel,

4-wire E&M Tie Line

Interface

DTI-F(

2

3

Tl/FTl (Fractional
with Loop /Ground
Signaling ability

DTI-F(A)-20

2

3

Tl/FTl (Fractional Tl) Trunk Interface
with Loop /Ground Start Trunk, Tie line
(E&M), and DID Signaling ability Series 300 or higher

BRT-F(4)-10

4

8

ISDN Basic Rate Interface card, S/T
interface, 4 BRI to support 8 voice
channels

1

1

Tl/FTl/BRI
piggybacked

j-10

.8

kE-F-21
&F(8)-21

4

Table 1-12

8

1

Interface

Interface

IF1 -IF4 in basic and
first expansion KSU

sunchronization
unit
on CPU-F( j-20 KTU

Attaches to the COI-F(4)-30
KTWCOI-F(8)-30
KTU to detect a caller
ID signal from Caller ID trunks

Electra Professional
Maximum
Quantity/System

Tl) Trunk Interface
Start Trunk

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

CPU-F(?20

KTU

COI-F(4?:0
COI-F(8)-30

KTU/
KTU

Other Optional

I

Description

I

I 4-channel,

DTMF/Push

KTUs

Button Receiver (PBR)

Slot
Interface
Interface
Interface

Option

IMIF-F(A)-10
IMIF-F(C)-10

1

PC, SMDR, and LCR Interface

Option

1

ACD and MIS Interface

Option

This feature
feature
UCD

Introduction

KTU provides

the Caller ID

Option
Option

1-13

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

Table l-13

Electra

Professional

12OILevel II /Level II Advanced

12O/Level II/level

II Advanced

Installation

Terminals

Service Manual

and Optional Units

Maximum
Quantity/System
Equipment

Designation
Level II

Description

1201
Level II
Advanced

ETW-8-( ) (BK) TEL
ETW-8-c ) (SW) TEL

55

95

8-line non-display
with built-in speakerphone,
large
LED, eight function keys, ADA compatible, and comes
in black or soft white

ETW-16DC-(
ETW-16DC-(

1 (BK) TEL
) (SW) TEL

56

96

16-line Display Compact with built-in speakerphone,
large LED, eight function keys, ADA compatible, and
comes in black or soft white

ETW-16DD-(
ETW-16DD-(

> (BK) TEL
1 (SW) TEL

56

96

16-line Display Deluxe with built-in speakerphone,
large LED, eight function keys, 20 programmable
One-Touch keys with red LEDs, ADA compatible, and
comes in black or soft white

ETW-24DS-(
ETW-24DS-(

) (BK) TEL
1 (SW) TEL

56

96

24-line Display Special with built-in
speakerphone,
dual path ability, Large LED, eight function keys, 12
programmable
One-Touch keys, ADA compatible, and
comes in black or soft white

and comes in black or soft white

TEL
d 16 Programmable

DTU-32D-(
TEL
ADA(l)-W
ADA(l)-W

Digital Multiline
Terminal
display and 32 Programmable
color LED

) (BKY(WH)

line Keys with

two-

lectra Elite with
line Keys with two-

(BK) TEL
(SW) TEL

56

96

Ancillary Device Adapter (for connection of headset,
recording interface, or external speakerphone)
that
comes in black or soft white

ADA(B)-W (BK) TEL
ADA(2)-W (SW) TEL

16

16

Ancillary Device Adapter (for connection of an SLT,
Modem, answering
machine, or fax) that comes in
black or soft white. Additional
units may be possible
depending on traffic and number of available
PBR
circuits.

ADA-U

56

96

Electra Elite Ancillary

l-14

Device Adapter

Introduction

Table 1-13

Electra Pro essional12O/Level

II/level

II Advanced

Terminals

and Optional

Units (Continued)

Maximum
Quantity/System
Equipment

Designation

Description

1201
Level II
Advanced

Level II
I--APR-U

16

16

Electra.
Elite
Analog
Port
Ringing
Additional
units may be possible depending
and number of available PBR circuits.

rHFU-U

56

96

Electra Elite Handsfree

56

96

Electra Elite Wall Mount Unit

56

96

Wall Mount Unit that comes in black or soft white

1SLT-F(lG)-10

ADP

SLT-F(lG)-20

ADP

Introduction

55
I

55

I

95
95

Unit

I 1 - channel Single Line Telephone
l-channel

Adapter.
on traffic

Single Line Telephone

Adapter
Adapter

1-15

1.5

Equipment

General

Information

One Electra-Professional
120/Level IVLevel II Advanced Job Specifications
Manual is
included with the CPU-F( j-20 KTU All optional equipment: external amplifiers, Music
On Hold source, Background Music source, or external speakers must be locally provided.
1.6

Equipment
1.6.1

Description

- Electra

Electra Professional

Professional

l%O/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

120 Key Service and Power Supply Units

ESF-H-10 KSU
The Key Service Unit (KSU) of the Electra Professional
120 system provides
service for outside lines, Attendant
Consoles, and interconnection
of Multiline
Terminals.
The basic KSU provides 40 ports. (The 40 ports are available with
five interface slots. An application slot is also available but does not affect the
port count.) The KSU can be expanded to 120 ports by vertically stacking two
additional ESF-H-10 KSUs on the existing KSU. Each KSU provides 40 ports.
A PSF-H-20 PSU (Power Supply Unit) and backup batteries are included with
each KSU.
Fixed slots are intended for the CPU, MMC, and MIF KTUs. The remaining
interface slots are intended for 2-, 4-, or &channel KTUs: ESI, SLI, COI, DID,
TLI, PBR, VRS, ECR, LLT, BRT, and DTI.
PSF-H-20 PSU
This power supply unit is provided with both the basic and expansion KSUs. It
has a backup interface, accepts 117 Vat and outputs + 5V, -5V, and -24V to the
system.
1.6.2

Electra Professional

Level II Key Service and Power Supply Units

ESF-SB-10 KSU
The Key Service Unit (KSU) of the system provides service for outside lines,
Attendant Add-On Consoles, and interconnection
of Multiline
Terminals.
The
basic KSU provides 40 ports. (The 40 ports are available with five interface
slots. An application slot is also available but does not affect the port count.)
The KSU can be expanded to 64 ports with an expansion module. A PSF-S-20
PSU Power Supply Unit and backup batteries are included with this KSU.
Fixed slots are intended for the CPU and MIF KTUs. Theremaining
interface
slots are intended for 2-, 4-, or 8-channel KTUs: ESI, SLI, COI, DID, TLI, PBR,
VRS, ECR, LLT, BRT, DTI.
ESF-SE-10 KSU
This expansion unit provides for an additional
up to three KTUs.

24 ports that can accommodate

This KSU is designed to accommodate 2-, 4-, or 8-channel interface cards. A
PSF-S-20 PSU (Power Supply Unit) and backup batteries are included with this
KSU.

PSF-S-20 PSU
This power supply unit is provided with both the basic and expansion KSUs. It
has a backup interface, accepts 117 Vat and outputs + 5V, -5V, and -24V to the
system.

1-16

Introduction

.” .>
_r

1.6.3

Electra Professional

Level II Advanced Key Service and Power Supply Units

ESF-XB-ID KSU
The Key Service Unit (KSU) of the Electra Professional
Level II Advanced
system provides service for outside lines, Attendant
Add-On Consoles, and
interconnection
of Multiline
Terminals.
The basic KSU provides 64 ports and
can be expanded in 64-port increments up to 192 ports with expansion modules.
A PSF-P-20 PSU Power Supply Unit and backup batteries are included with
this KSU.
Fixed slots are intended for the CPU and MIF KTUs. The remaining interface
slots are intended for 2-, 4-, or 8-channel KTUs: ESI, SLI, COI, DID, TLI, PBR,
VRS, ECR, LLT, DTI. (Up to two DTIs can be installed in this KSU.)
ESF-XE-10 KSU
This Level II Advanced system expansion unit provides for an additional
64
ports that can accommodate up to 8 KTUs. Fixed slots are intended for the
MMC and MIF KTUs.
This KSU accommodates 2-, 4-, or 8-channel interface cards. A PSF-P-20 PSU
Power Supply Unit and backup batteries are included with this KSU.

PSF-P-20 PSU
This power supply unit is provided with both the basic and expansion KSUs. It
supports the 64 ports in each KSU, has a backup interface, accepts 117 Vat and
outputs + 5V, -5V, and -24V to the system.
1.6.4

Common Control Key Telephone

Unit

These units are used with the 120, Level II, and Level II Advanced systems.
CPU-F( J-20 KTU
The Central Processing Unit KTU contains a 16-bit microprocessor that has
overall control of the system. This KTU provides an advanced feature package
for the system user. Included with this KTU are six 4-party conference circuits,
four PBR circuits, TNG, MOH input, and a built-in music source. A CLK-F-21
Unit can be installed on the CPU as an option. A maximum of one CPU-F-( l-20
KTU can be installed in the system.
CLK-F-21 Unit
The CLK-F-21 (Clock) Unit provides synchronization
for a Tl and/or ISDN line
that is connected to the system. This unit is attached to the CPU-F( l-20 KTU
and works in conjunction with the DTI-F( j-10 KTU, DTI-F(A)-20 KTU, or BRTF(4)-10 KTU. A maximum of one CLK-F-21 Unit can be installed in the system.
MMC-F-11 KTU
The Module Memory Controller,
with a 4-bit microprocessor
and Controller
Unit, is required for each ESF-H-10 used in the 120 system or ESF-XE-10 KSU
used in the Level II Advanced system. It controls data transmission
between
the CPU-F( l-20 KTU and the interface cards installed in the ESF-H-10 or ESFXE-10 KSU.

Introduction

l-17

CID-F@)-21 Unit
This Unit is piggybacked on the CO1 -F(4)-30 or CO1 -F(8)-30KTU.
detect a Caller ID signal from Caller ID trunks.
This unit is not required
1.6.5

Station Interface

when the BRT-F(4)-10

It is used to

KTU is installed.

Key Telephone Units

ESI-F(8)-21 KTU
This Electronic Station Interface KTU contains eight circuits; each can support
any Multiline
Terminal, EDW-48-t 1 (BK>/(SW) Console, DCU-60-l ) (BK)/(WH)
Console, an SLT Adapter, or Dterm Cordless Terminal.
A maximum
of 12 ESI-F(8)-21 KTUs can be installed in the 12OILevel
Advanced interface slots. A maximum of seven can be installed in Level II.

II

SLI-F@G)-21
KTU
The Single Line Interface KTU can support eight Single Line Telephones and/or
voice-mail ports. This KTU provides Ringing Signal Generator (RSG), Power
Failure Transfer (PFT), and Message Waiting (MW) LED voltage to the Single
Line Telephones.
A maximum
of 11 SLI-F(8G)-21
KTUs can be installed in the 12OILevel II
Advanced system interface slots. A maximum of six can be installed in Level II.
LLT-F(BG)-10
KTU
The Long Line Telephone (LLT) KTU provides for the termination
and
operation of up to two Off-Premise Extensions (OPX). Each LLT-F(BG)-10 KTU
has a built-in ringer (RSG). Up to 1500 ohms of loop resistance (including the
Single Line Instrument)
is acceptable between the LLT-F(BG)-10 KTU and SLT.
A maximum
of 13 LLT-F(BG)-10
KTUs can be installed in the 120 system
interface slots. A maximum
of 22 can be installed in Level II advanced system,
and a maximum of six, in Level II system.
1.6.6

Trunk

Interface

Key Telephone

These units
systems

are compatible

BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

Units
with

the 120, Level

II, and Level

II Advanced

The Basic Rate Trunk Interface (BRT) KTU provides termination
of ISDN
basic-rate trunk lines. This unit supports four ISDN-BRI trunks; each trunk
supports two channels. These eight channels can be used for CO trunks.
Tip
and Ring electrical fuses are provided to comply with UL 1459 requirements.
One BRT KTU provides a maximum of two lines.
The BRT uses an S-type interface. When connecting
Network Termination
(NTl) unit is required.
A CLK-F-21

l-18

Unit must be connected to the CPU-F(

to a CO, a locally provided
j-20 KTU.

Introduction

COI-F(4)-20

KTU

This Central Office Interface
Electrical fuses (posistors) are
supports four outside (CO/PBX)
of Loop/Ground start, DTMF, or

KTU complies with UL 1459 requirements.
built into this KTU. The COI-F(4)-20 KTU
lines. The outside lines can be any combination
Dial Pulse dialing trunks.

A maximum
of 14 COI-F(4)-20
KTUs can be installed in the 120 system
interface slots. A maximum
of 16 can be installed in Level II advanced, and a
maximum of seven, in Level II.
COI-F(4)-30

KTU

This Central Office Interface
KTU complies with UL 1459 requirements.
Electrical fuses (posistors) are built into this KTU.
The COI-F(4)-30 KTU
supports four outside (CO/PBX) lines. The outside lines can be any combination
of Loop/Ground
start, DTMF, or Dial Pulse dialing trunks.
This KTU also
provides Caller ID trunk interface.
A maximum
of 14 COI-F(4)-30 KTUs can be installed in the 120 system
interface slots. A maximum
of 16 can be installed in Level II advanced, and a
maximum of seven, in Level II.
COI-F(S)-20 KTU
This Central Office Interface
KTU complies with UL 1459 requirements.
Electrical fuses (posistors) are built into this KTU.
The COI-F(S)-20 KTU
supports eight outside (CO/PBX) lines.
The outside lines can be any
combination of Loop/Ground Start, DTMF, or Dial Pulse dialing trunks.
A maximum
of eight COI-F(8)-20 KTUs can be installed in the 12OILevel II
Advanced system interface slots. A maximum of seven can be installed in Level
II.
COI-F(8)-30 KTU
This Central Office Interface
KTU complies with UL 1459 requirements.
Electrical fuses (posistors) are built into this KTU.
The COI-F(8)-30 KTU
supports eight outside (CO/PBX) lines.
The outside lines can be any
combination
of Loop/Ground Start, DTMF, or Dial Pulse dialing trunks. This
KTU also provides Caller ID trunk interface.
A maximum
of eight COI-F(8)-30 KTUs can be installed in the 120/Level II
Advanced system interface slots. A maximum of seven can be installed in Level
II.
DID-F(4)-10 KTU
The Direct Inward Dialing interface KTU complies with UL 1459 2nd Edition
requirements.
The DID-F(4)-10 KTU supports the termination
and operation of
up to four DID lines.
Electrical fuses (posistors) are built into this KTU.
Immediate start, wink start, and delay dial are accommodated.
Dial Pulse and
DTMF are supported.
A maximum of eight DID-F(4)-10 KTUs can be installed in Electra Professional
120/Level II Advanced interface slots. A maximum of seven can be installed in
Level II.

Introduction

l-19

TLI-F(2)-11
KTU
This Tie Line Interface KTU supports the termination
and operation of up to
two E&M Tie Lines (4-wire, type I and type V, and lo/20 pps Dial Pulse or
DTMF). Immediate or wink start, delay start, or second dial tone signaling is
accommodated.
A maximum
of 14 TLI-F(B)-11
KTUs can be installed in the 120 system
interface slots. A maximum of 16 can be installed in the Level II advanced
system, and a maximum of seven, in the Level II.
DTI-F( j-10 KTU
The Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) KTU provides for the termination
of a
Tl/Fractional
Tl (24 DS-0 channels or fewer) line. The DTI-F(
j-10 KTU
contains circuitry for outside ring detection, hold, dialing, and control functions.
A combination of Loop/Ground Start Trunks can be used on one DTI.
Dial Pulse dialing is also supported.

DTMF or

The two interface slots to the right of this KTU may need to be left vacant.
CLK-F-21 Unit must be connected to the CPU-BY j-20 KTU.
Three DTI-F( J-10 or -20 KTUs can be installed
system. One can be installed in Level II.

A

in the 12OILevel II Advanced

DTI-F(A)-20
KTU
This Digital
Trunk Interface
(DTI) KTU includes the functions
of the
DTI-F( j-10 KTU in addition to Tie line (E&M) and DID signaling abilities.
A combination, in groups of four, of Loop/Ground Start Trunks, Tie lines, or DID
Trunks can be used on one DTI KTU. DTMF or Dial Pulse dialing is also
supported.
The two interface slots to the right
depending on System Programming.
the CPU-F( j-20 KTU.

of this KTU may need to be left vacant
A CJLK-F-21 Unit must be connected to

Three DTI-F(A)-20
or -10 KTUs can be installed
system. One can be installed in Level II.
1.6.7

Optional

in the 12OILevel II Advanced

Key Telephone Units

ECR-F-11 KTU
The External
Control Relay (ECR) KTU provides common audible tone
signaling with relay contacts for external ringing equipment,
Eight relays are
provided, four for External Tone Ringer control, one for Night Chime, and three
for External Paging.
A maximum of one ECR-F-11
Advanced system.

l-20

KTU can be installed

in thel20/Level

II/Level

Introduction

II

- --.,;>,
i’

PBR-F(4)-11 KTU
The Push Button Receiver KTU detects and translates DTMF tones generated
by Single Line Telephones, modems, or facsimile machines.
The PBR-F(4)-11
KTU provides four circuits.
One PBR-F(4)-11 KTU can be installed in the 120/Level II/Level
system for a maximum of eight circuits per system with a CPU-F(

II Advanced
j-20 KTU.

VRS-F(4)-11 K’l’U
The Voice Recording Service KTU provides automatic answering of incoming
CO/PBX calls by a voice recorded message, the voice prompt feature, and Delay
Announcement
for the ACD and UCD features.
A maximum
of two VRS-F(4)-11
providing eight channels..

KTUs

can be installed

in interface

slots

MIF-F(S)-10 KTU
This Multipurpose Interface KTU has two abilities: it allows the connection of a
personal computer to perform system programming
and up/down System Data
loading and provides Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) to be output
through an RS-232 cable to a printer.
One MB?-F(S)-10 KTU can be installed in the option slot or any of the first four
interface slots (IFl/OPl - IF4/OP4) provided in the ESF-H-10 KSU, ESF-SB-10
KSU, or the fast ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
MIF-F(L)-10
KTU
This Multipurpose
Interface KTU has three abilities: it allows the connection
of a personal computer to perform System Programming
and up/down System
Data loading, provides Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) to be output
through an RS-232 cable to a printer, and provides Least Cost Routing (LCR).
One MIF-F(L)-10 KTU can be installed in the option slot or any of the first four
interface slots (IFl/OPl - IF4/OP4) provided in the ESF-H-10 KSU, ESF-SB-10
KSU, ESF-XB-10 KTU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
Refer to the Electra Professional 120/Level II/Level II Advanced Least Cost
Routing Manual (included with the LCR software) for LCR instructions.
MIF-F(A)-10
KTU
The MIF-F(A)-10 KTU provides the Automatic
and an interface to an MIS (ACD) terminal.

Call Distribution

(ACD) feature

One MIF-F(A)-10 KTU can be installed in the option slot or any of the first four
interface slots (IFl/OPl - IF4/OP4) provided in the ESF-H-10 KSU, ESF-SB-10
KSU, ESF-XB-10 KTU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.

Introduction

1-21

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level II /Level II Advanced

MIF-Ft.-U)-10 KTU
The I&IF-F(U)-10 KTU provides the Uniform

Installation

Call Distribution

Service Manual

WCD) feature.

One MIF-F(U)-10
KTU can be installed in the option slot or any of the first four
interface slots (IFl/OPl - IF4/OP4) provided in the ESF-H-10 KSU, ESF-SB-10
KSU, the ESF-XB-10 KTU, or the Srst ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
MIF-F(C)-10
KTU
This KTU provides the Caller ID Indication feature. A Scroll key is available
display the last 10 incoming Caller IDS. Press the scroll key repeatedly
display additional Caller ID names or numbers,.

to
to

One MIF-F(C)-10 KTU can be installed in the option slot or any of the first four
interface slots (IFl/OPl
- IF4/OP4) provided in the ESF-H-10 KSU, ESF-SB-10
KSU, ESF-XB-10 KTU, or the fast ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
1.6.8

Electra Elite Digital Multiline Terminals, Electra Professional
Terminals, Single Line Telephones, and Associated Equipment

Multiline

DTUd-(
1 (BKY(WH) TEL
This non-display Digital Multiline
Terminal has eight programmable
line keys
(each with a two-color LED), built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a Large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U,
APR-U , and HFU-U Units. This terminal comes in black or white.
A combined maximum
of 96 Electra Professional
and Electra Elite digital
terminals can be installed in the 12O/Level II Advanced system. The maximum
for Level II is 56.
DTU-164 ) (BKY(WH) TEL
This non-display
Digital Multiline
Terminal has 16 programmable
line keys
(each with a two-color LED), built-in speakerphone,
a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and
HFU-U Units. This terminal comes in black or white.
A combined maximum
of 96 Electra Professional
and Electra Elite digital
terminals can be installed in the 12O/Level II Advanced system. The maximum
h
for Level II is 56,
DTU-16D-(1
) (BKV(WH) TEL
This display Digital Multiline
Terminal has 16 programmable
line keys (each
with a two-color LED), built-in
speakerphone,
a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and
HFU-U Units. This terminal comes in black or white.
The adjustable

LCD (Liquid

Crystal

Display) has 24 characters

and 3 lines.

A combined maximum
of 96 Electra Professional and Electra Elite digital
terminals can be installed in the 120/Level II Advanced system. The maximum
for Level II is 56.
DTU-16D42
1 (BKY(WH) TEL
This display Digital Multiline
Terminal is used with Series 650 and higher and
differs from the DTU-16DW
only by the addition of four softkeys.

l-22

Introduction

DTU-324 1 (BKMWH) TEL
This non-display
Digital Multiline
Terminal has 32 programmable
line keys
(each with a two-color LED), built-in speakerphone,
a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and
HFU-U Units. This terminal comes in black or white.
A combined maximum
of 96 Electra Professional
and Electra Elite digital
terminals can be installed in the 120/Level II Advanced system. The maximum
for Level II is 56.
DTU-32D-(1)
(BKMWH) TEL
This display Digital Multiline
Terminal has 32 programmable
line keys (each
with a two-color
LED), built-in
speakerphone,
a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and
HFU-U Units. This terminal comes in black or white.
The adjustable

LCD (Liquid

Crystal Display)

has 24 characters

and 3 lines.

A combined maximum
of 96 Electra Professional
and Electra Elite digital
terminals can be installed in the 12OILevel II Advanced system. The maximum
for Level II is 56.
DTU-32D42)
(BKV(WH) TEL
This display Digital Multiline
Terminal is used with Series 650 and higher and
differs from the DTU-32D-(1) only by the addition of four softkeys.
DCU-60-C 1 (BK)/(WH) CONSOLE
The Attendant
Console has 60 programmable
line keys (each with a two-color,
red or green, LED). The first 48 line keys can be programmed as Direct Station
Selection keys or as outside line keys; the remaining
12 line keys can be
programmed for features such as Paging, Night Transfer, or Message Waiting.
An external power supply (AC Adapter) is required and is included with the
Attendant Console.
A maximum
of four consoles can be installed
in the Electra Professional
12OILevel II/Level II Advanced system. An attendant
position can have two
attached consoles. (This console cannot be installed on the Electra Professional
Level I system.)
ETW-8-t 1 (BKMSW) TEL
This Multiline
Terminal is a fully modular instrument
with tilt stand, eight
Flexible Line keys (each with a two-color, LED), eight function keys, built-in
speakerphone, ADA compatibility,
and a large LED to indicate incoming calls
and messages.
A maximum
Professional
Level II.

Introduction

of 95 ETW-8-(
) (BK)/(SW) TELs can be installed in Electra
1201Level II advanced slots. A maximum of 55 can be installed in

l-23

ETW-16DC-(
1 (BKY(SW) TEL
This Multiline
Terminal is a fully modular instrument
with tilt strand, 16
Flexible Line keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in
speakerphone,
a 16~character by two-line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), ADA
compatibility,
and a large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages.
A maximum
Professional
Level II.

of 96 ETW-16DC-(
> (BKHSW) TELs can be installed in Electra
120/Level II Advanced slots. A maximum of 56 can be installed in

ETW-16DD-(
1 (BKY(SW) TEL
This Multiline
Terminal is a fully modular instrument
with 16 Flexible Line
keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in speakerphone, a
16-character by 2-Line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 20 programmable
OneTouch keys with red LED, ADA compatibility,
and a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
A maximum
Professional
Level II.

of 96 ETW-16DD-(
) (BKY(SW) TELs can be installed.in
Electra
120/Level II Advanced slots. A maximum of 56 can be installed in

ETW-24DS-(
1 (BKY(SW) TEL
This Multiline
Terminal is a fully modular instrument
with 24 Flexible Line
keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in speakerphone,
dual path ability,a 16-character by 2-Line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 12
programmable
One-Touch keys, ADA compatibility,
and a large LED to
indicate incoming calls and messages.
A maximum
Professional
Level II.

of 96 ETW-24DS-(
> (BK)/(SW) TELs can be installed.in
Electra
12OILevel II Advanced slots. A maximum of 56 can be installed in

EDW-48-t
1 (BKMSW) Console
The Attendant
Add-On Console has a tilt stand, 48 programmable
keys with
two LEDs (red or green) and 12 function keys with red LED.
The 48
programmable
keys can be assigned as Direct Station Selection keys, outside
line keys, or function keys.
A maximum
Professional

of four EDW-48-t
1201Level II/Level

) (BK)/(SW) Consoles can be installed.in
II Advanced slots.

Electra

ETW-4R-( 1 (BK) TEL
A black ETW-4R-1 TEL, Dt erm Cordless Terminal, can be connected to the
Electra Professional 12OILevel II/Level II Advanced system using an ES1 port.
This terminal has a cordless handset, a lo-digit by 2-line LCD, dial pad, TALK
key, HOLD key, TRF key, CNF key, SPD key, MSG LED, buzzer, and four
function keys with red LED. The Dt crm Cordless Terminal can be switched to
the Multiline
Terminal that is connected to it by pressing the DESK key on the
base unit of the idle Dt- Cordless Terminal.
A maximum
recommended

of nine ETW4R-(
for any system.

> (BK) TEL

DtermCordless Terminals

is

ETJ-l-1 (SW) TEL
This Single-Line Telephone is a fully modularized terminal with a Flash key,
Redial key, three-level ring volume control, data jack, and Message Waiting

l-24

Introduction

Lamp. Each terminal requires one port of an SLI-F@G)-21
KTU, SLT-F(lG)-20 ADP, or SLT-F(lG)-10 ADP.

KTU, LLT-F(2Q-10

ETJ-lHM-1
(SW) TEL
This Single-Line Telephone is a fully modularized terminal with a Flash key,
Redial key, three-level ring volume control, data jack, Message Waiting Lamp,
and eight programmable
Feature/Speed Dial keys. Each terminal requires one
port of an SLI-F@Gl-21 KTU, LLT-F(2G)-10 KTU, SLT-F(lG)-20
ADP, or SLTF(lG)-10 ADP.
ADA(l)-W (BKNSW) Unit
This unit (Ancillary
Device Adapter) provides the Multiline
Terminal with
connection for a headset, external speakerphone, or tape recorder. This unit can
be installed in any Electra Professional Multiline Terminal.
A maximum of 96 ADA(l)-W
(BKY(SW) Units can be installed in the Electra
Professional 1201Level II Advanced slots (one per Multiline
Terminal).
A
maximum of 56 can be installed in Level II.
ADA(B)-W (BKNSW) Unit
The ADA(B)-W (BKY(SW) Unit (Ancillary
Device Adapter)
provides the
Multiline
Terminal
with connection
for a Single Line Telephone,
Fax,
answering machine or modem.
This unit can be installed in any Electra
Professional Multiline Terminal.
A maximum of 96 ADA(l)-W (BKYCSW) or ADA(B)-W (BKY(SW) units can be
installed in the Electra Professional 1201Level II Advanced slots. A maximum
of 56 can be installed in Level II. The maximum
number of ADA(B)-W
(BK)/(SW) Units installed depends on system traf?ic and the number of PBR
circuits available.
ADA-U Unit
Ancillary
Device Adapters
allow
connection
of a tape
logging/recording
telephone calls to Electra Elite Digital Multiline

recorder
for
Terminals.

The ADA-U Unit does not require an AC adapter (ACA-U).
One ADA-U
Terminal.

Unit

can be installed

on an Electra

Elite

Digital

Multiline

APR-U Unit
The Analog Port Adapter with Ringing provides an interface for installing
Single Line Telephones,
modems, and NEC VoicePointNoicePoint
Plus
Conferencing unit. The APR-U Unit also detects incoming ringing signals. By
providing ring detection, the user can install a personal fax machine or an
answering machine for convenience. Two user-adjustable
switches are provided
on the adapter: SW3 allows for 600 ohms or a complex impedance interface to
devices such as a modem or Single Line Telephone, and SW1 is set to position 2
(the Electra Professional systems do not support the B2 channel).
The APR-U requires an AC Adapter (ACA-U) that is ordered separately.
APR-U and HFU-U are both installed, only one ACA-U is required.
One APR-U
Terminal.

Introduction

Unit

can be installed

on an Electra

Elite

Digital

If an

Multiline

l-25

HFU-U Unit
The Handsfree Unit provides a solution for small office teleconferencing
by
improving
the sound quality
of speakerphone
calls using an external
microphone.
This unit is useful in a working environment
where handsfree
calling is necessary. To provide maximum
performance,
two user-adjustablt
switches are available that allow the speakerphone
to be configured for the
customer environment
(quiet room, noisy business environment,
or a room with
an acoustic echo). A push-to-mute
button on the external microphone adds
privacy for handsfree dialing.
The HFU-U requires an AC Adapter
APR-U and HFU-U are both installed,
One HFU-U
Terminal.
Note:

Unit

can be installed

(ACA-U) that is ordered separately.
only one AC Adapter is required.
on an Electra

Elite

Digital

If an

Multiline

This unit enhances the handsfree operation of a Digital Multiline
Terminal by providing an echo canceling circuit. However, this unit
is primarily
for a typical small office environment
and not for
Its
performance
should
not
be
compared
to
conference rooms.
commercial audio conference units. Also, calls may not be recorded
when using the HFU-U.

WMU-U (BKY(SW1 Unit
Wall Mount Unit accommodates
Digital Multiline
Terminal.

adapters that are installed

on the Electra

Elite

WMU-W (BKY(SW) Unit
This unit is a universal Wall Mount Unit that can be used to mount any Electra
Professional Multiline Terminal and comes in black or soft white.
1.6.9

Single Line Telephone

Adapters

SLT-F(lGl-10
ADP
This Single-Line
Telephone Adapter provides
Telephone or similar device from an ESI-F(8)-21
A maximum
Professional
Level II.
SLT-F(lGl-20

of 95 SLT-F(lG)-10
ADP adapters can be installed
in Electra
120/Level II Advanced slots. A maximum of 55 can be installed in

ADP

This Single-Line
Telephone Adapter provides
Telephone or similar device from an ESI-F(8)-21
A maximum
Professional
Level II.

l-26

an interface for a Single-Line
KTU channel.

an interface for a Single-Line
KTU channel.

of 95 SLT-F(lG)-10
ADP adapters can be installed
in Electra
lBO/Level II Advanced slots. A maximum of 55 can be installed in

Introduction

-.-,
j
:’

CHAPTER
ELECTRA
HARDWARE

2

PROFESSIONAL
SPECIFICATIONS

AND INSTALLATION

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra
/ruary Professional

ELECTRA
HARDWARE

SPECIFICATIONS

GeneralInformation

1.2

SystemBlockDiagram

1.3

System Control Capacities

1.4

CablingRequirements

AND INSTALLATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1

.................................................................

2-2
2-3

..............................................................

..................................................................

1.4.1

Cabling Specifications

1.4.2

Cabling Precautions

2-5
2-5

...........................................................

2-6

.............................................................

...................................................................

1.5.1

Power Supply Inputs

1.5.2

Power Supply Outputs Table

15.3

Power Consumption

1.5.4

Fuse Replacement

1.6

EnvironmentalConditions

1.7

OutsideLineTypes

1.8

Network

1.10

120

....................................................................

PowerRequirements

1.9

1998

OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATIONS

1.1

1.5

Chapter

SYSTEM

1

II Advanced

PROFESSIONAL

TABLE

SECTION

1201Level II/Level

2-7
2-7

............................................................
.....................................................

and Dissipation
Table

Table

2-7

........................................

2-7
2-7

.........................................................

..............................................................

2-8

.....................................................................

and Control

Specifications

2-8
2-8

......................................................

2-8

1.8.1

Transmission

...................................................................

1.82

Network

......................................................................

2-8

1.8.3

Control

......................................................................

2-8

1.8.4

Telephones

.....................................................................

2-9

Dialing

Specifications

1.9.1

Dial Pulse Address Signaling

1.9.2

DTMF Address Signaling

2-9

..................................................................
....................................................

2-9
2-10

.......................................................

.....................................................................

BatteryBackup
1.10.1

System Backup

1.10.2

2-10

................................................................

2-10

Memory Backup

...............................................................

2-10

1.11

Weights and Dimensions

...............................................................

2-11

1.12

ExternalEquipmentInterface

..........................................................
Music (via CPU)

2-13

1.12.1

Music On Hold/Station

1.12.2

Station Background

1.12.3

External

Paging (Audio)

1.12.4

External

Tone Ringer/Night

1.12.5

SMDROutput

.................................................................

2-13

1.12.6

PC Connection

.................................................................

2-13

2 - Table of Contents

Background

2-13

Music [via COI-F(

..............................

j-20 KTU or COI-F(

j-30 KTU]

.......................................................
Chime Output

.......................................

..............

2-13
2-13
2-13

i

1.12.7
1.13

SECTION

Visual and Audible

2.2

2.3

Multiline

Terminal

1.13.3

DSS/BLF

LED Indications

LED Flash Pattern

....................

2.1.1

Programming

Stations

2.1.2

Attendant

Station Equipment

2.2.2

Interface

3

..................
....................

3.2

Site Preparation

and MDF/IDF

Precautionary

Information

3.2.2

Site Survey

3.2.3

Site Limitations

3.2.4

Site Selection Conditions

3.2.5

MDF Construction

2-16

.......................................

. . ..

2-16

.......................................

.. . .

2-16

.......................................

..

2-16

.......................................

.. ..

2-17

.......................................

..

2-17

.......................................

..

2-17

.......................................

.. ..

2-22
2-23
2-23
2-23

............................................

2-23

.....................................................

2-23

...................................................................

2-23

...............................................................

2-24

.......................................................

2-25

.............................................................

the Electra Professional

3.3.1

Basic KSU (ESF-H-10

3.3.2

Opening

3.3.3

Wall Mounting

Basic Key Service Unit (KSU)

KSU)

the KSU Cover
the KSUs

Wall Mounting

2-15

. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Construction

..........................

2-26
2-26

....................................................

........................................................

2-27

.......................................................

2-27

the KSU

2-27

..............................................

Adding the Expansion

3.3.5

FloorMounting

3.3.6

Installing

a PSF-H-20 PSU in the KSUs

3.3.6.1

General Information

.................................................

2-3 1

3.3.6.2

Installing

PSU in the KSU

2-32

3.3.8

Battery

................................

................................................................

Installation

3.3,7.1

Connecting

3.3.7.2

Installing

Grounding

System

2-29

3.3.4

3.3.7

KSU to an Installed

a PSF-H-20

2-30
2-31

.........................................

.................................

2-34

............................................................
the Built-In
and Connecting

Requirements

Batteries
Expansion

.--‘\
2

2-16

..................................................................

3.2.1

Installing

....................................

..f.....................................................

KSU INSTALLATION
GeneralInformation

........

..............

KTUs

Example

...........

Equipment

Table

.................................................

...............

Station

2.2.1

Installation

Table

REQUIREMENTS

Required

2-14

...........................................................

General Information

3.3.3.1

ii

Table

HARDWARE

2- 14

.........................................................

1.13.2

3.1

3.3

Indications

Tone Patterns

Determining

2-13

.................................................................

1.13.1

2

2.1

SECTION

Relay Contact

.....................................
Batteries

.........................

2-34
2-35
2-37

.......................................................

Chapter

2 - Table of Contents

..

SECTION

INSTALLING

4

GeneralInformation

4.1

4.2

4.3

Installation

4.1.2

KTU Installation
Control

Precautions

SECTION
5.1

5.2

Chapter

(KTU)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

4.2.1

CPU-F( )-20KTU

4.2.2

MMC-F-11KTU

2-38

........................................................

2-38

..............................................................

KTUs

2-38

................................................................

2-39

..............................................................

2-39

...............................................................

2-43

InterfaceKTUs

.....................................................................

2-45

4.3.1

ESI-F(g)-21

KTU

2-45

4.3.2

SLI-F@G)-21
4.3.2.1

4.4

UNIT

...................................................................

4.1.1

Common

A KEY TELEPHONE

...............................................................

KTU

.............................................................

Power Failure
KTU

Backup

2-46

................................................

2-47

4.3.3

LLT-F(BG)-10

4.3.4

COI-F(4)-20

KTU and COI-F(4)-30

KTU

..........................................

2-50

4.3.5

COI-F(8)-20

KTU and COI-F(8)-30

KTU

..........................................

2-52

4.3.6

CID-F(8)-1

4.3.7

DID-F(4)-10

4.3.8

TLI-F(2)-10KTU

4.3.9

DTI-F(

1 Unit

............................................................

2-49

...............................................................

KTU

2-55

..............................................................

2-59

...............................................................

j-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

KTU, BRT -F(4)-10 KTU, and CLK-F-21

4.3.9.1

DTI-F(

j-10 KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

4.3.9.2

BRT -F(4)-10 KTU

4.3.9.3

CLK-F-21

4.3.9.4

Tl Considerations

4.3.9.5

ISDNCnsiderations

Unit

KTU

2-60
Unit

........

....................................

....................................................

.......................................................
....................................................
..................................................

.....................................................................

OptionalKTUs

2-61
2-61
2-66
2-69
2-71
2-79
2-79

4.4.1

PBR-F(4)-11

KTU

..............................................................

2-79

4.4.2

VRS-F(4)-11

KTU

..............................................................

2-81

4.4.3

ECR-F-11KTU

4.4.4

MIF-F(S)-10KTU

..............................................................

2-84

4.4.5

MIF-F(L)-10KTU

..............................................................

2-94

4.4.6

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU

............................................................

2-101

4.4.7

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU

............................................................

2-105

4.4.8

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

...........................................................

2-107

5

CABLE

.................................................................

CONNECTIONS

GeneralInformation

. . . .. . ... . . . .. . . . ... .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . ... . . .. . . .

.................................................................

5.1.1

Connection

5.1.2

Cabling

Wiring

Between the KSU and the MDF

5.2.1

KSUCables

2 - Table of Contents

Requirements

Precautions

....................................................

..........................................................
................................................

.................................................................

2-82

2-108
2-108
2-108
2-108
2-108
2-108

.. .
111

Februarv

SECTION

1998

Electra

5.2.2

Connecting

5.2.3

OutsideLines

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

Cables to Special Connectors

2-111

................................................................

5.2.3.1

TLI-F(2)-10

5.2.3.2

ECR-F-11

5.2.3.3

DTI-F(

5.2.3.4

SLI-F(8G)-21

KTU Cable Connections
KTU Cable Connections

j-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

2-113

...................................

Connections

for Electra Professional

5.2.5

Modular

Terminal

Connections

for Electra Elite Multiline

5.2.6

Modular Terminations
Professional System

General Information

.............................

6.2

Music On Hold/Station

Background

Music

.........

...........................

6.2.1

MusicOnHold

6.2.2

Station Background

6.3

External

Paging

6.4

External

Tone Ring/Night

Multiline

Music

.................

...............................
Chime

.................

2-115
2-116

Terminals

Terminals

When Connecting BRI (ISDN) Trunks
..........................................................
CONNECTION

.................

................................

Terminal

6.1

2-114

KTU Cable Connections

KTU Cable Connections

EQUIPMENT

2-113

..................................

Modular

OPTIONAL

Service Manual

........................................

5.2.4

6

Installation

II Advanced

.......

..............

2-116
2-117

to the Electra
2-118

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
.. . .

.......

. . . . . . . . .. . . . .

2-119

....

.......

.. .. .... ......

Z-119

.. . .

.......

.. ..

.......

....

.......

... .

.......

2-119
. . . . . . .. . . . . . .

2-121
2-122

. . ..

2-124

SECTION

7

LCD INDICATIONS

TABLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . ..s...............s.........s.....*.

2-126

SECTION

8

FEATURE

CODES

. . . . . . . . ..*............s............s.........m.

2-128

1v

ACCESS

Chapter

2 - Table of Contents

“ (BK)/(WH)

1 (BKMWH)

DTU-32-t
DTU-32D-(

ETW-8-t

1 (BK)/(WH)
1 (BKXSW)

1000

26

450

900

26

450

900

21

360

720

TEL

21

360

720

Console

102

1000

10000

61

600

1500

TEL
TEL

1 (BKY(WH)

DCU-60-t

600

TEL

) (BK)/(WH)

DTU-16D-(

I

35

TEL

) (BK)/(WH)

DTU-16-c

I

TEL

ETW-16DC-(

1 (BKY(SW) TEL

46

450

1300

ETW-16DD-(

) (BK)/(SW) TEL

37

360

820

ETW-24DS-(

) (BKY(SW) TEL

46

450

820

N/A

650

650

102

1000

2000

ETW-4R-(

1 (BK) TEL

EDW-48-c ) (BK)/(SW) Attendant
Console with AC Adapter

Add-On

SLT-F(lG)-10

ADP

61

600

1200

SLT-F(lG)-20

ADP

61

600

1200

Note 1:
Note 2:

When installing an Attendant Add-On Console, the use of an AC Adapter is required.
The length for the specified SLT Adapter is the length between the ES1 KTU and the SLT
Adapter.

Note 3:

When additional length is required between the ES1 and a Multiline
Terminal, Attendant
Add-On Console, or SLT Adaptor, use twisted 2-pair cable as shown in Figure 2-2
Connecting the ES1 to the Multiline Terminal Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable.

Electra Professional

120

2-5

Februarv

Level II/Level

1998

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Twisted 2-pair cable

Multiline
Terminal

Figure 2-2

Connecting

the ES1 to the Multiline

Table 2-4
Connected

Terminal

Single Line Telephone

Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable

Connection

Cable Length

Maximum
Loop Resistance
(24 AWG) from Connected
Equipment
to Telephone

Equipment

10 feet

(21-W (BKY(SW)

Note:

Mixing digital
recommended.

and analog ports through

The following

1.4.2

the same 25pair

types of cabling are required

cable runs is not

for the equipment

listed below:

0

Music Source (for MOH and BGM inputs):

Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable

0

External

Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable

Amplifier:

Cabling Precautions
When selecting cables and Main Distribution
Frames (MDF), future expansion
or assignment
changes should be given due consideration.
Avoid running
cables in the following places:
0

A place exposed to wind or rain.

0

A place near heat radiating
equipment
or where the quality
cable covering could be affected by gases and chemicals.

0

An unstable

of station

place subject to vibration.

‘.

2-6

Electra Professional

120

1.5

Power

Requirements

1.5.1

Power Supply Inputs
AC Input (PSF-H-20

1.5.2

PSU):

0

117 Vat f 10%

0

60 Hz + 10%

0

Single Phase

0

15A maximum

0

A dedicated

current

outlet, separately

Power Supply Outputs

fused and grounded,

is required.

Table

Table 2-5 Power Outputs

I

DC Voltage

I

-24V

Table 2-6

II

Maximum

Current

Table

Power Consumption

and Dissipation

Maximum
RMS
Current

Watts Used
(Idle)

Watts Used
(Maximum)

I

Basic

I

1.3A

I

120

1

150

I

Basic + Expansion

1

2.6A

I

240

I

300

I

Basic + 2 Expansions

I

3.9A

I

360

I

450

1.5.4

Fuse Replacement

Table

Table 2-7
Fuse No.

unit

PSF-H-20 PSU

I

5.9A

I

and Dissipation

Module

Fuse Replacement

Specifications

Description

Dimensions

Fl

125V, 4.OA

AC Input

114” x l-1/4”

F2

125V, 7.OA -

DC Input

114” x l-114”

All fuses are normal blown glass tube. Do not use slow blow fuses.

Note:

Electra Professional

Current
0.3A

I

Power Consumption

1.5.3

Minimum

I

120

2-7

1.6

Environmental
0

a
1.7

1.8

Conditions

Temperature
1.

Operating:

2.

Recommended

Operating

Outside

Long Term:

+32”F

- +104”F

+50”F

- +90”F(lO”C

- 32.2”C)

10% - 90% noncondensing

Humidity:

Line Types

0

2-v&e, Loop-Start

l

2-wire, Loop Dial, DID Lines (Dial Pulse or DTMF)

0

4-wire, E & M Tie Lines (Type I or V, Dial Pulse, or DTMF)

0

Digital Trunk
Signaling)

0

Digital

Network
1.8.1

or Ground-Start

Tl/FTl

(Loop Start

or Ground

Start,

to ESI-F(8)-21

KTU:

Tie Line

(E&M),

or DID

Specifications

Transmission
Data Length:
From Multiline

Terminal

From ESI-F(8)-21
0

KTU to Multiline

Data Transmission
Between ESI-F(8)-21

0

1.8.3

Trunks

Trunk, ISDN, Basic Rate

and Control

0

1.8.2

.- ‘.
1:
/

(0°C - 40°C)

Terminal:

23 bits
23 bits

Rates:
KTU and Multiline

Scanning Time for each Multiline

Terminal:

184K bits/set.
(voice and signaling)

Terminal:

32 ms.

Network
0

TDM Switching:

PCM (p Law)

0

TDM Clock:

2.048 MHz

0

TDM Data Bus:

8 bit

l

TDM Timeframe:

125 us.

Control
0

Control:

0

Central Processor:

16-bit microprocessor

l

Clock:

8 MHz

0

Interface

0

Optional KTUs (MIF and DTD:

&bit microprocessor

0

Multiline Terminal and
Attendant Add-On Console:

4-bit microprocessor

SLT Adaptor:

.4-bit microprocessor

0

Stored program

with distributed

KTU:

processing

4-bit microprocessor

..

2-8

Electra Professional

120

1.8.4

Telephones
0

Multiline

Terminal

and Attendant

Voltage:

-ll-

Maximum

Current:

Add-On Console:
- 26 Vdc

200 mA

Acoustical characteristics
meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.

Single Line Telephone:
Standard

2500 set:

500 type network

Nominal

Current:

35mA

Ring Signal:

56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz

Single Line Telephone

Adaptor:

Standard

2500 set:

500 type network

Nominal

Current:

3omA

Ring Signal:
APR-U(BKY(SW)

56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz
Unit:

Standard

2500 set:

500 type network

Nominal

Current:

3omA

Ring Signal:
0

56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz

ADA(B)-W(BK)I(SW)

Unit:

Standard

2500 set:

500 type network

Nominal

Current:

3omA

Ring Signal:
1.9

56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz

Dialing

Specifications

1.9.1

Dial Pulse Address Signaling
Standard

2500 set:

500 type network

Nominal

Current:

3omA

Ring Signal:
0

Electra Professional

120

APR-U(BKY(SW)

56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz
Unit/ADA(B)-W

(BK)/(SW)

Standard

2500 set:

500 type network

Nominal

Current:

30 mA Signaling

Unit:

0

Pulse Rate:

10 -t- 0.5 pps/20 t- 1.0 pps

0

Percent Break:

60 IL 1.5%

0

Interdigit

10 ~~$120 pps

Interval:

770 ms. - 830 ms.

2-9

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional
1.9.2

lBO/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

DTMF Address Signaling
l

Frequencies:
Two sinusoidal signals, one from a high group of three frequencies
from a low group of four frequencies.

l

Frequency

0

Signal level:
Nominal

deviation:

Rise time:

l

Duration

l

Interdigital

-6-

level per frequency:

Maximum
l

Less than & 1.0 percent

level per frequency:

Minimum

level per frequency

pair:

-4dBm

Low Group:

-1OdBm

High Group:

-8dBm

0 dBm
Within

of dual frequency

and one

signal:

time:

5 ms.

100 ms. default/70
70 ms. default/60

ms. minimum
ms. minimum

Nominal High Group
Frequencies (Hz)

Nominal

Low
Group
Frequencies (Hz)

1.10

Battery

Backup

The system has two battery
memory backup.
1.10.1

backup functions:

one is for system backup and a second for

System Backup
The system is backed up by a rechargeable
battery.
This battery backup
supports all of the system functions for approximately
30 minutes if power fails.

1.10.2

Memory

Backup

A backup battery is equipped on the CPU-F( j-20
MIF-F(S)-10
KTU, MIF-F(L)-10
KTU, MIF-F(A)-10
and the MIF-F(U)-10
KTU. These batteries, when
system memory after a power failure. Refer to Table
Time for the approximate backup times for the KTUs.

2-10

KTU, VRS-F(4)-11 KTU,
KTU, MIF-F(C)-10
KTU,
fully charged, retain the
2-8 - KTU Battery Backup

Electra Professional

120

-. ...-i

Table 2-8

KTU’Battery

KTUs
CPU-F(

Backup Time

Approximate

J-20 KTU

Backup

Time

14 days

VRS-F(4)-11

KTU

1 hour

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

1 month

L

1.11

Weights

and Dimensions

Table 2-9

Weights

unit

Height

Width

Depth

37 lbs. 6 oz.

14.4”

15.92”

9.2”

(17 kg)

(360 mm)

(398 mm)

(230 mm)

4 lbs. 13 oz.
(2.2 kg)

14.96”
(380 mm)

3.54”

(90 mm)

7.09”
(180 mm)

2 lbs.
(1.6 kg)

4.4”
(109.9 mm)

(177 mm)

8.8”
(223.7 mm)

2 Ibs. 3 oz.
(1 kg)

4.4”
(109.9 mm)

7.9”
(210 mm>

8.8”
(223.7 mm)

2 Ibs. 4 oz.
(1 kg)

4.4”
(109.9 mm)

7”
(177 mm)

(229 mm)

2 Ibs. 7 oz.
(1.1 kg)

4.4”
(109.9 mm)

7”
(177 mm)

8.8”
(223.7 mm)

2 lbs. 7 oz.
(1.1 kg)

4.4”
(109.9 mm)

7.9”
(201 mm)

9.1”
(229 mm)

DTU-60-t ) (BK)/(WH)
CONSOLE

3.5 lbs.
(1.6 kg)

2.9”
(74 mm)

7”
(177.4 mm)

(216 mm)

ETW-8-c

2 lbs.
(0.9 kg)

3.98”
(101 mm)

6.89”
(175 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

21bs. 3 oz.
(1 kg)

3.98”

6.89”

(101 mm)

(175 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

2 lbs. 7 oz.
(1.1 kg)

3.98”
(101 mm)

8.07”
t 205 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

ESF-H-10

KSU

PSF-H-20 PSU
DTU-8-t
DTU-16-t

1 (BKXWH)

DTU-32-t

TEL

1 (BK)/(WH)

DTU-16D-(

TEL

1 (BK)/(WH)
) (BK)/(WH)

DTU-32D-(

*

and Dimensions

TEL
TEL

1 (BK)/(WH)

TEL

1 (BK)/(SW) TEL

ETW-16DC-(
TEL

) (BKY(SW)

ETW-16DD-(
TEL

) (BK)/(SW)

Shipping weight includes the shipping

Electra Professional

120

7”

9.1”

8.5”

carton.

2-11

Table 2-9

Weights

unit

ETW-24DS-(
TEL

Height

1 (BKY(SW)

EDW-48-t 1 (BKY(SW)
CONSOLE

ETJ-lHM-1

(SW) TEL

ETE-1-2 TEL (SLT)

SLT-FUG)-20
*

2-12

Shipping

ADP
weight includes

and Dimensions

I

I

(continued)
I

Width

Depth

2 Ibs. 7 oz.
(1.1 kg)

(101 mm)

8.07”
(205 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

3 Ibs. 1 oz.
(1.4 kg)

2.72”
(69 mm)

6.89”
(175 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

3.42”
(87 mm)

5.51”
(140 mm)

7.48”
(190 mm)

3.98”
(101 mm)

6.89”
(175 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

21bs. 3 oz.
(1 kg)

3.98”
(101 mm)

6.89”
(175 mm)

8.81”
(223 mm)

1 lb. 14 oz.
(0.9 kg)

3.15”
(80 mm)

6.30”
(160 mm)

9.06”
(230 mm)

9 oz.
(0.29 kg)
the shipping

3.98”

I

7

2.36”
(60 mm)

6.30”
( 160 mm)

9.06”
(230 mm)

1.80”
(45 mm)

2.80”
(70 mm>

4.80”
(120 mm)

1.80”
(45 mm)

2.80”
(70 mm)

4.80”
(120 mm)

carton.

Electra Professional

120

1.12

External
1.12-l

1.12.2

1.12.3

1.12.4

1.12.5

Equipment

Music On Hold/Station
0

Auxiliary

0

Input Impedance:

0

Auxiliary

0

Input Impedance:

External

120

0.6V RMS Signal Level
10K Sz
Music [via COI-F(

Input:

)-20 KTU or COI-F(

(Series

600 i-2

Paging (Audio)
- 10 dBm Signal Level

0

Output Impedance:

600 S-2

a

Relay Contact Rating:

500 mA, 24 Vdc

External

)-30 KTU]

0.6V RMS Signal Level

Output Power:

Tone Ringer/Night

Chime Output

0

Output Level:

-1OdBm

0

Output Impedance:

600 i-2

0

Relay Contact Rating:

500 I&

24 Vdc

SMDR Output
Female Connector

(System Output)

Standard

RS-232C

(System Output)

Standard

RS-232C

PC Connection
Female Connector

Relay Contact
0

Electra Professional

(via CPU) (Series 500 or higher)

l

0
1.12.7

Back Ground Music

Input:

Station Background
500 or higher)

l

1.12.6

Interface

All Relay Contact Ratings:

500 mA, 24 Vdc

2-13

1.13

Visual

and Audible

1.13.1

Indications

Tone Patterns

Table

Table 2-10

‘\

Tone Patterns

,.L’

Tone

1 Frequency

Dial Tone

I

3501440
3501440

Busy Tone

4801620

Tone ( 1)

4401480

Ringback

Tone (2)

440/480

Reorder Tone

l

l
l

Tone

Patterns

~-~

IJ

Tone

Ringback

l
l

1

120 IPrd

Second Dial Tone

Call Waiting

(Hz)

Psec.ON
I

4801620

Attendant/Tone
Override
Camp-On Tone
Call Alert Notification
Call Forward
Call Forward

1 sec. ON

Alert Tone
Confirmation

440
0.23 sec. ON x 2 - :I bursts

3501440

Tone

0 Confirmation
a LCR Dial Tone

440

Error Tone Burst

620

J

60 IPM

Recall Tone

I

1024

Iti

CO/PBX Ring Tone (1)

I

4801606

I

2sec.ON
61) IPM

4801606

CO/PBX Ring Tone (2)

1

4 sea. OFF

r

I

Internal

Ring Tone

Attendant

Ring Tone

Tone Burst
Howler Tone

1 sec. ON

4801606
0.5sec.

4801606

1 sec. ON

440

J-l

2400

DIT Alert Tone

4801620

CO Ring Transfer

4801606

Continuous

16 Hz modulation

II.5sec.ON
1.0sec.ON
-

‘.
i’

2-14

Electra

Professional

120

1.132

Multiline
Tabie 2-11

Condition

LED

ILine Key

Etiicrophone
.I :CM

ILarge LED

hspeaker

I-Use
Busy
Incoming Call
I-Hold
Call Hold
Hold Recall
Transfer Recall

Terminal
Multiline

LED Flash Pattern Table
Terminal

Color

14nswer

Ii’unction

1LNRBPD

Green

-

i

!-I

!I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I

I
I

I
I

!-

!-

-

I

ICM Incoming Call
Voice Over Broker

Red
Red

Incoming Internal Call
Incoming Outside Call
Message from Attendant
Voice Mail Message

Red--+-+-+-+-

----i--G

Green Green 7
Red
-

Red
Red

b
I

-

Callback Set
Auto Repeat Set
ON (to set function)
Call FWD -All Call Set

Red
Red
Red
Red

Other Tenant
CO Line Key Seized
Exclusive Hold

Green

Use, Hold

1DSS Key

DND, Call FWD-All Calls
set
Special Mode
While pressing FNC key
or going off-line)

Green

.

-

Red

r

120

+-

b
I
+

-

&

I
I
I

I

!

i

+
I
k-i--

!-

I
+
c
i--+-

L

-

-b

I
I
I

I

I
+
I
I

I
II

+

-

-

I-

I

I
t

-

-,-- I

!
!
!

!

!
!
!

I

I

I

I

!

f
f

1
i

I
:

1

I
I

I
I

I
I

!

L-

i
i
!
I

i
r!

!i

I1

!-

f

0.5

I-

fI

1.0

I-

i
I

-

i-

I

+
-

-

I
I
I

I

Red
Red

+-ml---f-----

I

I

-

-

!-I

I

I
--,-I--,-i---i--.-I---

0

Electra Professional

-

-

-

!
+

H

I

Green
Red
Green -

+
I

I
I
I

b

Red--+-+-+---

B

II
1
I
I

I
I
I

-

+
+

-

I
I
I

i

Incoming Trunk
Exclusive Hold
User Ringing Line Preference
Voice Over with Broker’s Call

Red
Red
Red

B

&
I_
i-

I

Red
Red

I
I
I
If

l

-

Conference in Progress
All Conference
Circuits Used
Hold Conference Call
ICM Call Hold
SPD Confirmation

1BLF or

I

I
I
I
I
II

-

-

I
I

(Zonference

I

I
I
I
I
I!

!I
f
!

I
I

Red

System Data Entry

Patterns

Green 1
Red
Red GWXl
Red
Green -

I-Use

ON

Flash
I
I

I
I

Red

ON

LED Flash Patterns

-

-

I-

lr
II

1.5

2-15

1.13.3

DSS/BLF

LED Indications

Table 2-12

Table

DSS/BLF LED Indications

Red

CO line in use

SECTION

2

HARDWARE
2.1

General

I

REQUIREMENTS
Information

Before configuring
the system, complete the
lBO/Level IULevel II Advanced Job Specifications
equipment,
timeouts,
and feature
options
worksheets.
System Programming
must be
worksheets. (Refer to Chapter 5 - Programming
Note:

ON

worksheets in the Electra Professional
Manual. Make sure all types of station
are considered
when completing
the
understood to properly complete these
in this manual.)

One Electra Professional
1201Level IULevel II Advanced
Manual is included with the CPU-F( )-20 KTU.

Job Specifications

The Electra Professional 120 Basic KSU has five interface slots and each Expansion KSU
has five interface slots. Each slot supports up to eight ports. The hardware requirements
dictate the number of ports available for installing station equipment.
When possible, the same type KTUs should be paired together within a cable binder
(25pair cable binders to the MDF should be used.) This will simplify MDF wiring.
2.1.1

Programming

Stations

A maximum
of three programming
positions are available in the system.
Station equipment, connected to the first two ports of the first ES&F@)-21 KTU,
are automatically
programming
positions and must be ETW-16DC-(
)
(BK)/(SW) TEL, ETW-16DD-(
) (BK)/(SW) TEL, ETW-24DS-( ) (BK)/(SW) TEL,
DTU-16D- ( )(BK)/(WH) TEL, or DTU-32D- ( )(BK)/(WH) TEL.
A third programming
position becomes available when an MIF-F(S)-10 KTU or
MIF-F(L)-10
KTU, and the Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced
System Program Technician software are installed.

2.1.2

Attendant

Station

A maximum of four Attendant positions can be installed in a system with DCU60-( )(BK)/(WH) or EDW-48(
) (BK)/(SW) Console. Each Attendant
Add-On
Console must be supported by an ESI-F(8)-21 KTU.
A maximum
of four
Consoles csn be installed in each system.

2-16

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

2.2

Electra Professional

Determining
2.2.1

Required

1201Level II/Level

II Advanced

February

1998

Equipment

Station Equipment
Determine the type and quantity of station equipment
of station equipment that is available includes:

being installed.

The type

DTU-8-t ) (BKY(WH) TEL
DTU-16-t ) (BKY(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-( 1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32-t 1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-( 1 (BKY(WH) TEL
ETW-8-l 1 (BK)/(SW) TEL
ETW-16DC-( ) (BK)/(SW) TEL
ETW-16DD-(
) (BKY(SW) TEL
ETW-24DS-( ) (BK)/(SW) TEL

(8-line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16~line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(8-line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(24-line Multiline
Terminal with LCD and
built-in Dual Path Adapter)
Single Line Telephone with Message Wait Lamp
Single Line Telephone without Message Wait Lamp
DCU-60-c ) (BKY(WH) Console
EDW-48-c 1 (BKY(SW) Console
ADA-U Unit
Ancillary Device Adapter interface
APR-U Unit
Analog Port Ringer interface
HFU-U Unit
Handsfree unit
WMU-U Unit
Wall mount unit with Multiline Terminal
ADA(l)-W (BKY(SW) Unit
ADA(B)-W (BKY(SW) Unit
WMU-W Unit
SLT-F(lG)-10 ADP or SLT-F(lG)-20 ADP

2.2.2

Interface
A.

Slot and System Port Numbers are shown in Figure
Professional 120 Interface Slots and System Port Numbers.
Note:

Electra Professional

120

KTUs
2-3 - Electra

The two fixed slots and the first four slots in KSU3 are not
labeled with the OP designation
in Figure 2-3 - Electra
Professional 120 Interface Slots and System Port Numbers.
This
is only to show that an MIF-F( j-10 KTU cannot be installed in
these slots. The actual KSUs are labeled with OP.

2-17

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

-

KSU3

II Advanced

Installation

136

144

152

160

168

135

143

151

159

167

134

142

150

158

166

P

133

141

149

157

165

s

132

140

148

156

164

U

131

139

147

155

163

130

138

146

154

162

129

137

145

153

161

IF1

IF2

IF3

IF4

IF5

-

72

80

88

96

104

71

79

87

95

103

70

78

86

94

102

P

0

69

77

85

93

101

S

P

68

76

84

92

100

U

B

67

75

83

91

99

66

74

82

90

98

65

73

81

89

97

KSUZ

-

-

-

-

IF5

-

8

16

24

32

40

7

15

23

31

39

6

14

22

30

38

P

0

C

5

13

21

29

37

S

P

P

4

12

20

28

36

U

B

U

3

11

19

27

35

2

10

18

26

34

1

9

17

25

33

KSUI

-

Service Manual

-

-

2-18

II/Level

-

-

Figure 2-3

120/Level

-

-

IFl/OPl

Electra Professional

IF2/OP2

120 Interface

IF3/OP3

IF4/OP4

IF5

Slots and System Port Numbers

Electra

Professional

120

Installation

Service M
B.

Telephone

and CO Port Numbers

Telephone and CO Ports Numbers are available in the system. The port
numbers are used to count the number of station numbers and trunk
numbers when programming
System Data. (Refer to Figure 2-4 - Interface
Slots and System Port Numbers.)
In Table 2-13, the KTUs

installed

in each slot of an Electra

Professional

120are:

Table 2-13 Telephone

and CO Port Number

Slot

Example
KTU

IFl/OPl

DTl-F(

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

IF2/OP2

OPEN

IF3/OP3

OPEN

IF4/OP4

ESI-F(8)-21

KTU

IF5

TLI-F(2)-10

KTU

IF1

DTl-F(

IF2

OPEN

IF3

OPEN

IF4

DID-F(4)-10

IF5

OPEN

KTU

KSUl

KSU2

Electra Professional

120

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU

KTU

2-19

KSU2

C36

c39

C51

c35

c40

c50

c34

c41

c49

C32

c40

C48

C58

c31

c39

c47

c57

c30

C38

C46

c54

c29

c37

c45

c53

IF1

IF2

IF3

IF4

C8

Cl6

C24

T8

c7

Cl5

C23

T7

C6

Cl4

c22

T6

C5

Cl3

c21

T5

c4

Cl2

c20

T4

c3

Cl1

Cl9

T3

c2

Cl0

Cl8

T2

C26

Cl

c9

Cl7

Tl

c25

IF1

IF2

IF3

IF4

IF5

KSUl

c=

IF5

CO Port Number
Telephone Port Number

T=
Note 1:
Note 2:

The TLI KTU has four available channels, but only two are used.
The DID KTU has eight available channels, but only four are used.

Figure 2-4

C.

Interface

Interface

Slots and System Port Numbers

KTUs

To determine the quantity of interface
Number of Required Interface KTUs.

2-20

/’

KTUs required,

refer to Table 2-14 -

Electra Professional

120

Table 2-14 Number
~

KTU

COI-F(4)-20
COI-F(4)-30

KTU
KTU

COI-F(8)-20
CO!-F(8)-30

KTU
KTU

ESI-F(S)-21

KTU

SLI-F(8G)-21

KTU

PBR-F(4)-11

KTU

of Required

Interface

Calculations/Comments

KTUs
I Maximum
KTUs per
120
I
System

Divide the number of CO/PBX/Centrex
lines being used by 4.

14

~IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4
and IF5

8

Divide the number of CO/PBX/Centrex
lines being used by 8.

8

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4
and IF5

8

Divide number of Multiline
Terminals,
Attendant Add-On Consoles, SLT
Adapters being used by 8.

12

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

Divide the number of Single Line
Telephones and/or Voice Mail ports
being used by 8.

11

PBR Requirements (Refer to Section
D - PBR Requirements on next page .)

1

8

4

DID-F(4)-10

KTU

4

TLI-F(2)-10

KTU

2

Divide the number
being used by 4.

of DID trunks

Divide the number

of.Tie lines being

j-10 KTU

DTI-F(A)-20
ECR-F-11

24

and IF5

and IF5
IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4
and IF5
IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4
and IF5

3

See Note 1

Required when installing multiple
zones for external paging, tone ring
an&or chime.

1

IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4

of Tl/FTl

channels being

used.

KTU
8 Relays

KTU

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

14

The number

and IF5

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU

Required when connecting an SMDR
printer and/or when using System
Program Technician Software.

1

OP and/or
IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

Required if connecting SMDR printer,
using scroll and dial CID feature,
and/or if using System Program
Technician Software and/or LCR.

1

OP and/or
IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

Required for the ACD feature.

1

OP and/or
IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

Required for the Caller ID feature.

1

MIF-F(A)-

10 KTU

MIF-F(C)-10

-1

and IF5

used by 2.
DTI-F(

Allowed
~ Insertion
Slots

KTU

OP an&or
IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

VRS-F(4)- 11 KTU
BRT-F (41-10 KTU

Note 1:

Use slot IFl/OPl

Electra Professional

120

4
4

Required for the UCD feature.

1

OP and/or
IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4

Automated Attendant,
DISA, Voice
Prompt and/or Delay Announcement.

2

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

Allows connection of up to 4 BRI
circuits. Each BRI provides 2 voice
channels. Divide BRI trunks by 8.

8

and/or IF4/OP4 in the Basic KSU, and IFl/OPl

and IF5
in basic
and first expansion
KSU

IFl-IF4

in the First Expansion

KSU.

2-21

PBR Requirements

D.

The Electra Professional 120 system has four channels of built-in PBR
circuits in the CPU-F(
j-20 KTU.
The PBR circuit can detect DTMF
signals from a Single Line Telephone, facsimile, modem, and voice mail
ports. Incoming DTMF signals can also be detected from a CO trunk by an
Automated Attendant
and DISA feature. An optional PBR-F(4)-11 KTU
can only detect DTMF signals from Single Line Telephones, facsimiles,
modems, and voice mail.
The quantity
of PBR-F(4)-11
KTUs that are needed depends on the
number of Single Line Telephones, modems, facsimiles, voice mail ports,
and whether Automated
AttendantDISA
trunks are connected to the
system. Up to 24 Single Line Telephones or Automated
Attendant/DISA
trunks can be supported by one PBR circuit.
2.3

Installation

Example

The following example aids in understanding
some of the requirements
when configuring
an Electra Professional
120 system.
Refer to Table 2-15 - System Configuration
Example. The equipment used in this example includes:
0

12 CO Lines

0

12 Multiline

l

Analog Voice Mail Connection

0

SMDR

0

External

Terminals,

DTU-32D-(

SMDR

2-22

(4 ports)

Paging

Table 2-15

External

) (BK)/(SW) TEL only

System Conilguration

MIF-F(S)-10
Paging

ECR-F-11

KTU
KTU

Example

1
1

Electra Professional

120

,
‘j
*’

Installation
nv

Service Manual

SECTION

3

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

1998

KSU INSTALLATION
3.1

General

Information

This section provides the requirements for installing the system.
familiar with this section before installing the system.
3.2

Site Preparation

and MDFllDF

The installer

should be

Construction

The technician
should plan the installation
before actual work begins.
Advanced
planning
minimizes
time, cost, and disruption
of customer
business. activities.
Additional
benefits include flexibility for changes and expansion, efficient maintenance,
and increased customer satisfaction.
3.2.1

3.2.2

Precautionary

Information

The following

warnings

shall be observed

during

installation:

1.

Never install telephone wiring

during a lightning

2.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations
designed for wet locations.

3.

Never touch uninsulated
telephone
wires or terminals
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

4.

Use caution when installing

or modifying

storm.

unless the jack is specifically

telephone

unless

the

lines.

Site Survey
In most cases, a
placement of the
may be necessary
cable lengths, and

survey of the customer premise is needed to determine the
Main Distribution
Frame (MDF). A second visit to the site
to obtain the exact dimensions of the area selected for MDF,
possible IDF (Intermediate
Distribution
Frame) locations.

Collected information
about the job site generally permits the MDF to be
partially assembled at the technician shop, which helps to minimize time spent
at the customer premise.
3.2.3

Site Limitations
In selecting a permanent
site for the MDF, the technician
problems such as, but not limited to, the following:
0

Limited

space is available

and must be used regardless

0

The available
environmental

0

The proposed location has limitations
lack of a suitable ground for grounding

space may
hazards.

be adequate

but

may

may encounter

of its suitability.
pose one or more

such as insufficient
the KSUs.

lighting

or the

Whatever the nature of the adversities encountered, the technician must make
the necessary decisions to arrive at the best possible solution for installing the
equipment.
This document cannot cover all possible situations,
precautions,
and actions,

Electra Professional

120

2-23

3.2.4

Site Selection
KSU Installation
The following
unit (KSU).

Conditions
Site:
conditions

should be met at the site selected for the key service

l

KSUs are normally

wall mounted

to protect against

accident or flooding.

0

The KSU should not be located directly beneath pipes, due to the
possibility
of leaks or condensation
causing damage to the Electra
Professional 120 system equipment.

0

The area where the KSU is to be located must be free of corrosive and
inflammable
gases, excessive chemical or industrial
dusts, and other
materials
that could cause a hazard to personnel
or to the proper
functioning
of the equipment.

0

Operating ambient temperature
and humidity must be within
specified in Section 1.6 - Environmental
Conditions.

0

The operation of the system is virtually
noiseless and allows a wide
selection of installation
sites, care should be taken to ensure the KSUs do
not present a hazard to ofice traffic. For economy, a central location to
minimize cabling is often used.

0

The KSU must be located at a site where it can be easily connected to one
to three AC power sources depending on the quantity of KSUs.

l

The Electra Professional 120 KSUs weigh approximately
Therefore, select a strong wall for mounting purposes.

l

Place the KSU according to the following

40 lb. - 70 lb.

spacing specifications:

Space distance between the KSU and the ceiling:
Space distance on both sides of the KSU:
Space distance on front of KSU:

20 in. or more
12 in. or more
20 in. or more

0

Avoid connection of the KSU to an AC receptacle used in common with any
other device (computer, facsimile machine, copier, etc.).

0

Be sure that there is enough space on the wall to accommodate
mount bracket for any future system expansion.

Teleohone

Installation

The following
Terminals.

2-24

the limits

the wall

Site:

conditions

should

be met at the site selected

for Multiline

l

Ensure the cable length and line resistance (loop), between the KSU and
the telephones,
comply with the specifications
shown in Table 2-3
- Multiline
Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length and Table 2-4
- Single Line Telephone Connection Table Length.

l

Some devices require an external power supply.
can be easily connected to an AC outlet.

Select a place where they

Electra Professional

120

‘xi
ai

3.2.5

MDF Construction
The Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) consists of two different types of standard
quick-connect
terminal
blocks that are mounted
on a 3/4-inch plywood
backboard.
Mounting
these blocks on standoffs for ease of access is
recommended.
The recommended
blocks are: 66B50, for termination
of the
MDF Cable Assembly and 66M50, for termination
of the station cables.
The Intermediate

Distribution

Frame (IDF) requires only the 66M50 blocks.

Both the MDF and IDF use standard bridging clips for each type of terminal
block. The bridging clips are used to mate the left half of the terminal block
(terminated cable run) to the right half of the terminal block (crossconnection
wire) to the terminal block (crossconnection
wire). The bridging clips are also
useful during
trouble
shooting
to help isolate
the cable runs and
terminals/telephones
from the central
equipment
and the Central Office
Network from the system. Refer to Figure 2-5 - Typical Full MDF Layout. Also
refer to Section 3.3.3 - Wall Mounting the KSUs.

I

66B50
TYPE

mll

66M50

rlli

TELCO
RcJZlX

0

0

0

Figure 2-5

Electra Professional

120

Typical Full MDF Layout

2-25

Electra Professional

<<
Febru
3.3

Installing

the Electra

Before installation

12WLevel II/Level II Advanced
Professional

120 Basic Key Service

Installation

Service Manual

Unit (KSU)

and cabling of the KSU, observe these precautions:

0

Before starting the work, be sure the PSU power switch is OFF and disconnect
power cord from the AC outlet.

l

Do not directly

3.3.1

the

touch the soldered surfaces of the KTUs with your hands.

Basic KSU (ESF-H-10

KSU)

The ESF-H-10 KSU is the basic system cabinet. There are two fixed slots for the
CPU and MIF KTUs, one PSU slot, a battery installation
space, and five
interface slots for the installation
of telephones, CO/PBX lines, Tie lines, VRS,
DID, Digital Trunk (Tl), BRI trunks (ISDN), PBR, and ECR KTUs. The KSU
can be wall mounted. Refer to Figure 2-6 - Electra Professional 120 Basic KSU.

Figure 2-6

2-26

Electra Professional

120 KSU

Electra

Professional

120

.

Installation

February

Serviiced
3.3.2

Opening the KSU Cover
Before wall mounting

1.

the KSU, the KSU cover must be removed.

Loosen the four cover screws and remove
Figure 2-7 - Removing the KSU Cover.

Figure 2-7
3.3.3

Wall Mounting
3.3.3.1

the front

cover.

Refer to

Removing the KSU Cover

the KSUs

Wall Mounting

the KSU

Before wall mounting
the KSU, the wall mount bracket
Using 3/4-inch fire retardant
attached
to plywood.
backboard is recommended.
1.

Wall

2.72”

Mount

Bracket

1998

&
be
plywood

Using four screws (locally provided), attach the wall mount
bracket to the wall. Refer to Figure 2-8 - Attaching
the Wall
Mount Bracket of the KSU to the Wall.

Dimensions

(69 mm)

mm)

Figure 2-8 Attaching

Electra Professional

120

the Wall Mount Bracket

of the Level II Basic KSU to the Wall

2-27

2.

Holding the Basic ESF-H-10 KSU, lower the two hooks that
protrude from the rear of the KSU over the wall mount bracket.
Refer to Figure 2-9 - Attaching
the KSU to the Wall Mount
Bracket.

Figure 2-9
3.

the KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket

Using the two provided bolts, secure the KSU to the wall mount
bracket from the bottom.
Refer to Figure 2-10 - Securing the
KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket.

Figure 2-10

2-28

Attaching

Securing the KSU to the Wall Mount

Bracket

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual
3.3.4

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

Adding the Expansion
1.

KSU to an Installed

120

System

the KSU Cover

Turn the PSU power switch, on the base KSU, to the OFF position and
disconnect the KSU from the power source.
NOTE:

Electra Professional

1998

Loosen the four screws on the front cover and remove the cover panel.
Refer to Section 3.3.2 - Opening the KSU Cover and to Figure 2-11
- Removing the KSU C over.

Figure 2-l 1 Removing
2.

Februarv

II Advanced

The expansion and basic KSU are identical

units.

3.

Loosen the screws for the cable access panel at the top and bottom of all
KSUs.

4.

Mount the expansion KSU wall mount bracket to the wall. Note that when
properly mounted the base and expansion wall mount brackets mate
together.

6.

Attach the expansion KSU to the wall mount bracket.

6.

Install the MMC-F-11 in its assigned slot, and connect the ribbon cable to
the CPU-F(
l-20. Connect the ground plates that are included in the
expansion kit between the lower and upper KSUs. The adjustable slot
connects to the low KSU.

7.

Connect the expansion KSU batteries

8.

Install the plate and spring included with the expansion kit to the KSU
covers as shown in Figure 2-12 - Installing
the Plate and Spring on the
KSU Covers.)

and the AC power.

2-29

Floor Mounting
This unit cannot be floor mounted.

Front Cover

e,! I

Plate( 1)

66

B
I
&

-

Spring( 1)

Ii

------------_---__
!E --------------a---

3

\
Front Cover

Figure 2-12

2-30

Installing

the Plate and Spring on the KSU Covers

Electra Professional

120

‘3.36

Installing

a PSF-H-20 PSU in the KSUs

3.3.6.1

General Information
This power supply unit is provided with both the basic and expansion
KSUs. It has a backup interface, accepts 117 Vat and outputs + 5V,
- 5V, and - 24V to the system.
Fuse Renlacement:
To replace the fuse(s) in this PSU, first remove the PSU from the
KSU. (Refer to Figure 2-13 - PSF-H-20 PSU Fuse Locations.)
Fuse
Fl is a 125V, 4A fuse for AC input. Fuse F2 is a 125V, 7A fuse for DC
input.
F2
(DC Input)

7-i&i&

Figure 2-13

Electra Professional

120

PSF-H-20 PSU Fuse Locations

2-31

3.3.6.2

Installing

a PSF-H-20 PSU in the KSU

1. Mount the PSF-H-20 PSU into the left slot of the KSU and secure
using the two provided bolts. Refer to Figure 2-14 - Installing
the PSF-H-20 PSU into the KSU.

Figure 2-14

Installing

the PSF-H-20

‘\,

PSU in the KSU

,’

2-32

Electra

Professional

120

2. Using the provided clamp and screw, attach the PSU cable to the
KSU as shown in the following diagram.
Refer to Figure 2-15
- Attaching the PSU Cable to the KSU.

Cable Clamp
Figure 2-15

Electra Professional

120

Attaching

the PSU Cable to the KSU

2-33

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998
3.3.7

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Battery Installation
3.3.7.1

Connecting

the Built-In

Batteries

1. Connect the two batteries
in series.
Refer
- Connecting the Two PSF Built-In Batteries.
RedCord
Black Cord

+
-+

to Figure

2-16

“‘k-,

@
8
CAUTION

Be careful not to reverse the @ and 8 of the batteries.

t
Black
Figure 2-16 Connecting

the Two PSF Built-In

Batteries

2. Mount the battery hold-down plate and tighten the screw. Refer
to Figure 2-17 - Placing the Batteries in the KSU.

Battery Hold Down Plate

Figure 2- 17

2-34

Placing the Batteries

-.:

in the KSU

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra

Professional
3.

12O/Level II/Level

1998

Connect the cord to the DC IN connector of the power supply unit.
Refer to Figure 2-18 - Connecting
the Batteries to the Power
Supply Unit.

Figure 2-18
3.3.7.2

Februarv

II Advanced

Installing

Connecting

and Connecting

the Batteries
Expansion

to the Power Supply Unit

Batteries

1. Take out the original batteries and disconnect the cords from the
batteries. Refer to Figure 2-19 - Connecting Expansion Batteries.

Bliick

Figure 2-19

Electra Professional

120

Connecting

Expansion

Batteries

2-35

Febr uarv 1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

the expansion batteries

Installation

Service Manual

3.

Install

4.

Connect the cord to the DC IN on the power supply unit of the
KSU. Refer to Figure 2-20 - Connecting the Expansion Batteries
to the Power Supply.

Figure 2-20

outside of the KSU.

Connecting the Expansion
Power Supply

Batteries

to the

CAUTION

2-36

l

Make sure the cord connected to the DC IN, on the power supply
unit, is disconnected before connecting the batteries.

l

Be careful not to reverse the @ and 8 polarities

l

When the batteries are connected, be sure the batteries
contact with any metal on the KSU.

on the batteries.
are not in

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual
3.3.8

Electra

Professional

Grounding

120/Level II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

Requirements

The KSUs

must be properly
grounding methods.
used on a system.
redundant

The KSU is provided with two
grounded.
However, only one grounding method should be

1.

A dedicated AC outlet.

2.

Provide a suitable cold water pipe ground
operating telephone company procedures.

3.

If no water pipe ground is available, a ground rod should be installed
accordance with the local operating telephone company procedures.

4.

A grounding terminal is provided on the ESF-H-10 KSU. Connect the
grounding conductor to the hexagonal screw with the green colored head
terminal.
Refer to Figure 2-21- KSU Grounding.

Note:

in accordance with the local
in

The provided ferrite core should be wrapped with the ground cable.

FG Terminal

Ferrite Core

Figure 2-21

Electra Professional

120

KSU Grounding

2-37

Februarv

1998

SECTION

4

Electra Professional

120/Level

INSTALLING

A KEY TELEPHONE

4.1

General

Information

4.1.1

Installation

UNIT

II Advanced

Service Manual

(KTU)

.:
_J.:l

of the KTUs observe these precautions:

0

To prevent accidental damage to equipment, power should be OFF during
installation
and maintenance,
unless this seriously inconveniences
the
user.

0

The KTUs used in this system make extensive use of CMOS technology.
CMOS technology is very susceptible to static; therefore, extreme care
must be taken to avoid static discharge when handling KTUs.

KTU Installation
1.

Make any connections and switch settings on the KTUs before inserting
them in the KSU.
Refer to Sections 4.2 - Common Control KTUs,
4.3 - Interface KTUs, and 4.4 - Optional KTUs for the switch settings for
individual KTUs.

2.

A switch (MB) is provided on the KTUs (except the CPU and MMC KTUs)
to protect circuitry from any damage during installation.
When the
system power is ON (while installing
KTUs), ensure the MB switch is
OFF. Refer to Figure 2-22 - KTU Positions on the KSU.

Figure 2-22

2-38

Installation

Precautions

Before installation

4.1.2

II/Level

KTU Positions on the KSU

Electra Professional

120

3.

The component side of all KTUs must face the left side of the KSU when
installed.
Ejector tabs are always on the top. Refer to Figure 2-23 Removing a KTU from the KSU.
CAUTION
When a unit is mounted or removed, make sure the power switch of the
KSU is OFF or that the MB switch of the KTU is OFF.

Figure 2-23

Common

4.2

4.2.1

Control
CPU-F(

Removing

a KTU from the KSU

KTUs
j-20 KTU

The CPU-F(
l-20 KTU is the central processing unit (CPU).
A 16-bit
microprocessor executes the programs stored on the ROM ICs to control the
whole system, while transferring
data to and from other KTUs.
This KTU consists of a main control section and a Time Division Switch (TDSW)
section.
It also has a built-in
external hold tone interface circuit.
Other
capabilities include CNF (six, 4-party) circuits, internal MOH source, DTMF
receivers (PBR), and KF (Key Function 1 and MF (Multi-Function)
registration.
The RAM memory, on the CPU, is backed up with a rechargeable
retains the memory for approximately
14 days.
This KTU must be installed in the CPU slot of the ESF-H-10
CPU-%( j-20 KTU can be installed in the system.

Electra Professional

120

battery,

KSU.

which

Only one

2-39

Switch Settinvs
Before programming
System Data, the BTS switch must be ON to allow
memory retention if a power failure or brownout occurs. Failure to activate the
backup-battery
circuit (BTS ON) results in System Data reset to the default
values, the status of all stations reset to the default values, and the data
programmed on the station to clear, if a power failure or brownout occurs. Refer
to Chapter 5 - Programming
in this manual for instructions,
if programming
using a Multiline Terminal.
Refer to the Electra Professional 1 ZO/Level II/Level
II Advanced System Program Technician Manual (included with the System
Program Technician) for instructions,
if programming
using a PC.
Anytime a CPU-F( j-20 KTU is installed in the system, the clock/calendar
be set. This also applies when battery backup fails for any reason.

must

When the CPU-F( l-20 KTU is removed for long term storage, set the BTS
switch to OFF. This prevents the battery from constantly discharging.
The
fully charged battery retains memory contents for approximately
14 days.
Switch RES is the reset switch. When pressed, this switch interrupts all service
in progress, causing a Second Initialization.
This switch should not be used
in an operating
system unless absolutely
necessary.
MOHS INTLEXT selects the MOH source from either an internal or external
source. When the built-in music is used for the MOH source, set this switch to
INT. If an external MOH source is connected, set this switch to EXT. Refer to
Figure 2-24 - CPU-F( l-20 KTU Switch Settings and Table 2-16 - CPU-F( l-20
KTU Adjustments.
IMPORTANT
DIP switch position C is used to set KF or MF mode of operation.
Be sure
to set this switch in the desired position before powering
up the system.

2-40

Electra Professional

120

A--.._
,?
..

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv

1998

Battery
/
v

4
/

7
-’

DIP SW

-

BTS

P
CN2

I

/ LED 1

CNlOl

- RES

II
CN4

0

,TPl
TP2

GNDoY
+ 5vot
_ 5voFcp

f

-TP3
-

MOHV
MOHS
MOHlSTATlON
BGM IN

The operation verification
LED (LED11 always flashes when the’
system is in normal operation, and is on steady when the system is
reset.

Figure 2-24

Electra

Professional

120

CPU-F(

l-20 KTU Switch Settings

2-41

Table 2-16
I
Name of
Switch

T

Adjustment

Item

Memory Backup

BTS

CPU-F(

j-20 KTU Adjustments
I

,
Adjustment
Should be set to ON to retain system data.

OFF

Note:

_

Set the switch

to ON before

inserting

the unit.

MOH INT/EXT

MOHS

INT

Set the switch to EXT when an external
source (MOH) is to be used. (Note 1)

MOH Volume
Control

MOHV

Center

To adjust the volume of MOH.

DIP SW A (1)

OFF

Not Used

DIP SW C (3)
CN2
CN4

Connector

TP

Note

1:

Not Used

DIP SW B (2)

DIP Switch

Internal

hold tone

OFF:
ON:

OFF
ON
1NIA
I
N/A

I

Multifunction
Key Function

System
System (Note 2)

Not Used

1

For connecting

the CLK-F-21

Unit.

CNlOl

N/A

TPl

N/A

TP2

I N/A

I + 5V voltage check terminal

I

TP3

I N/A

1 - 5V voltage check terminal

I

MOH has two melodies.

Ground voltage check terminal

Select by System Programming

melodies:

1. Melody Fair
2. LetItBe
Note 2:

Refer to Section 1.3.1- Company Notification.
change this switch status.

A First Initialization

is required

to

..

2-42

Electra

Professional

120

4.22

MMC-F-11

KTU

The MMC-F-11 KTU is the Module Memory Controller.
A 4-bit microprocessor
and controller unit are required for each Expansion KSU. This KTU controls
data transmission
between the CPU-F(
j-20 KTU and the interface cards
installed in the expansion ESF-H-10 KSU where it is installed.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

LED1 on this KTU continuously
flashes indicating
it is receiving power. The
RES button allows this KTU to be reset. This resets the entire KSU where it is
installed. Refer to Figure 2-25 - MMC-F-11 KTU Switch Settings.

-

Figure 2-25

Electra Professional

120

M&!-F-11

RES

-

LED1

3

TPl-3

KTU Switch Settings

2-43

The MMC-F-11 KTU is installed in a fixed MMC slot on the Expansion KSU.
The mounted ribbon cable is then connected to the CPU-F( j-20 KTU, located on
the Basic KSU. Before installing the MMC-F-11 KTU in the ESF-H-10 KSU,
install the ferrite core to the ribbon cable as shown below. Two ferrite cores are
included in the expansion accessory kit and are to be installed at each end of the
MMC-F-11 ribbon cable. Refer to Figure 2-26 - Ferrite Core Installation
to
MMC-F-11 KTU Ribbon Cable.

Figure 2-26

Ferrite

Core Installation

to MMC-F-11

~,.,.,,
.”

KTU Ribbon Cable

CAUTION
This procedure can only be performed

when the system power is off.

If a second expansion cabinet is to be installed, the ribbon cable of the MMC-F11 KTU in this KSU must be attached to the MMC-F-11
KTU in the first
expansion cabinet. Refer to Figure 2-27 - MMC-F-11 KTU and CPU-F( j-20
KTU Installation.
FERRITE CORE
(INCLUDED
IN
‘EXPANSION
ACCESSORY
Km)

FERRITE

CORE

CPU

‘.

Figure 2-27

2-44

MMC-F-11

KTU and CPU-F(

j-20 KTU InstalIation

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual
4.3

Electra Professional

Interface

4.3.1

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

February

1998

KTUs

ESI-F(8)-21

KTU

This KTU is an interface for Multiline
Terminals, Attendant Add-On Consoles,
and SLT Adapters, SLT-F(lG)-10
ADP. The ES1 allows connection of any
combination of eight Multiline
Terminals, Attendant
Add-On Consoles, or SLT
Adapters.
A maximum

of 12 ESI-F(8)-21

Switch Settings/LED

KTUs can be installed.

Indications

When the green LED2 is on, the ES1 KTU is receiving power. The red LED1
indicates one or more of the eight circuits of the KTU is in use. Switch MB is the
ON/OFF switch for this KTU. Refer to Figure 2-28 - ESI-F(8)-21 KTU Switch
Layout.

TP3
-24V
GND
+5v

’

-

l

-

/TP2
-s

TPl

a-

LED1
(Red)
/
/

ON
OFF Ii&

&E”,

-

MB
\
..

CH8
<

:

CH7
<

:

CH6
<

:
I
.
:

CHS
I
\
CH4
<

:
.
.
:

CH3
<
CH2
<

;

CHl
/

Figure 2-28

Electra Professional

120

ESI-F(8)-21

KTU Switch Layout

2-45

February

Electra Professional

1998
4.3.2

SLI-F(8G)-21

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

KTU

The SLI-F@G)-21 KTU is an interface for Single Line Telephones.
It has a
built-in ringing generator (RSG) and can support eight Single Line Telephones
or Voice Mail ports. If connecting Voice Mail to an SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU, it must
be assigned in System Programming.
The Single Line Telephone Interface ,Unit (SLI) provides circuitry for loop
status detection, talk battery, sending ringing signal from the RSG unit to
SLTs, and message waiting.
Note:

A maximum

The PBR circuits in the CPU-F( j-20 KTU or the PBR-F(4)-11 KTU
are required with Voice Mail or Push Button Single Line Telephone
connection.
of 11 SLI-F(8G)-21

Switch Settings/LED

KTUs can be installed.

Indications

An SLI can support up to eight Single Line Telephones, modems, Voice Mail
ports, or fax ports. This SLI is required when power failure transfer of CO lines
(two maximum
per KTU) and/or message wait signaling
to Single Line
Telephones is used in the system.
When the green LED1 is on, the SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, one or more of the eight circuits of the KTU are in use.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 2-29 - SLIF(8G)-21 KTU Switch Layout.

LED2
(Red)
LED1
(Green)

-

Figure 2-29

2-46

SLI-F(8G)-21

MB

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

120

4.3.2.1

Power Failure
Oneration

Backup

if Power Fails

If power fails, the built-in batteries provide full backup of system
operation for 30 minutes.
Backup can be longer if using external
(locally provided) batteries
(the time depends on the system
configuration
and service conditions).
If a power failure transfer
(PFT) Single Line Telephone Interface Unit (up to two channels can
be connected to the SLI-F(8G)-21
KTU) is connected, the unit
connects a Single Line Telephone directly to a CO/PBX line to allow
origination and termination
of calls. Refer to Figure 2-30 - Power
Failure Backup Flowchart.

LT-l
Power Failure

Full system
backup
provided
during
battery
operation.
(Note 1)
I

I

I

I

YES

CO line and power failure
transfer
Single Line Telephone
directly
connected.
(Calls can
be originated
and terminated.)
(Note 2)

NO
System

When
ended,

failure
(no calls
originated).

can be

input power failure
has
the system
automatically
restores
service.
(Note 3)

Note 1: The backup period for the
approximately
30 minutes’(with
batteries added).

Electra
built-in

Professional
120 system is
batteries) or longer (external

Note 2: All calls in progress are interrupted when switchover is made to connect
the power failure transfer Single Line Telephone directly to a CO/PBX
line. This occurs after backup batteries expire.
Note 3: If the power switch of the
automatically
restore service.
Figure 2-30

Electra Professional

120

KSU

Power Failure

is OFF,

the

system

does not

Backup Flowchart

2-47

Oneration

When Input Power Failure

Has Resumed

When input power is resumed, the system is automatically
reset and
restores service. A call in progress by the PFT Single Line Telephone
is disconnected.
Single Line Telephone

for Power Failure

Only a Single Line Telephone
telephone.

Transfer

can be used as a power failure

transfer

Connections:
Connect a CO line and Single Line Telephone for power failure
transfer via the SLI-FBG)-21
KTU to the COI-F(4)-20 or COI-F(8)-20
KTU. A 4-conductor cable (locally provided) is required to connect
the SLI-F(SG)-21 KTU to the 66 Ml50 block. Refer to Figure 2-31
- Connecting CO Line and Single Line Telephone for Power Failure
Transfer.
Note:

When selecting a Single Line Telephone for power failure
transfer, make sure it matches the dialing type of the CO line
(10 pps, 20 pps, or DTMF) where it will be connected.
If
Ground Start trunks are used, a Single Line Telephone with a
ground button must be used.

PFT WITH

SLI KTU

CO/PBX
Channels

Figure 2-31

2-48

Connecting

CO Line and Single Line Telephone

l&2

for Power Failure

Transfer

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual
4.3.3

Electra Professional
LLT-F(2G)-10

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv

1998

KTU

The Long Line Telephone (LLT) KTU provides for the termination
and
operation of up to two Off-Premise Extensions (OPX). Each LLT-F(BG)-10 KTU
has a built-in ring supply generator (RSG). Up to 3000 ohms of loop resistance
(including the Single Line Telephone) is acceptable between the LLT-F(BG)-10
KTU and a Single Line Telephone.
The LLT-F(BG)-10
KTU does not support
message waiting.
A maximum

of 14 LLT-F(BG)-10

Switch Settings/LED

KTUs can be installed

in the interface

slots.

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the LLT-F(2G)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, one or more of the two circuits of the KTU are in use. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 2-32 - LLT-F(BG)-10
KTU Switch Layout.
Note:

PBR in the CPU-F( j-20 KTU or PBR-F(4)-11
Push Button SLT Connection.

KTU is required

LED2
(RED)
LED1
(GREEN)

/

4P
01

ON

OFF I@

with

/
-

MB

CN3

CN2

I

Figure 2-32

Electra Professional

120

LLT-F(BG)-10

KTU Switch Layout

2-49

4.3.4

COI-F(4)-20

KTU and COI-F(4)-30

KTU

The Central Office Line Interface Unit (COB contains
detection, holding, dialing, and control function.

circuitry

for outside ring

Each COI-F(4)-( 1 KTU provides four identical circuits to support up to four CO
trunks which can be any mix of Loop Start or Ground Start, DTMF or Dial Pulse
dialing. In addition, Tip and Ring electrical fuses (posistors) PST101 - PST402
are provided to comply with UL 1459 requirements.
In addition,
the
COI-F(4)-30 has two connectors for mounting the CID-F(8)-21.
A maximum

of 14 CO1 KTUs can be installed.

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

The COI-F(4)-20 KTU contains four switches (SW1 - SW4) for the selection of
Loop or Ground Start. Each switch is associated with an individual circuit. Red
LEDs (101-401)
indicate the status of the circuit.
Refer to Figure 2-33 COI-F(4)-20 KTU Switch Layout.
The COI-F(4)-30 KTU contains four switches that are designated SW1 - SW4
for the selection of trunk type (Loop or Ground Start). Each switch is associated
with an individual circuit.
The LEDs are located on the back of this CO1 KTU.
Red LEDs (l-4)
indicate the status of the circuit.
Refer to Figure 2-34
- COI-F(4)-30 KTU Switch Layout.
When a Loop Start trunk is connected to a circuit, its associated switch must be
set to LP. If a Ground Start trunk is connected, the switch must be set to GS.
When the green LED (LED11 is on, the CO1 is receiving
the ON/OFF control for this KTU.

power.

Switch MB is

:;
., ’
:

2-50

Electra Professional

120

LED1
(Green)
/

0’
ON

-

MB

OFF

LP

I

17

GS

PST 402

SW4
0

SW3

CH3
SW2
CH2
CHl
SW1
.

Figure 2-33

Electra Professional

120

COI-F(4)-20

LED
101

U’I
PST101

/

I(TU Switch Layout

2-51

)

CN5

PST 402

I
LP

I

m

GS

SW3

SW2

LP

El

m

CN4

GS

SW1

Figure 2-34
4.3.5

COI-F(8)-20

COI-F(4)-30

KTU and COI-F(8)-30

I=======

KTU Switch Layout
KTU

The Central Office Line Interface Unit (COD contains
detection, hold, dialing, and control function.

circuitry

for outside ring

Each CO1 KTU provides eight identical circuits to serve up to eight CO trunks
which can be any mix of Loop Start or Ground Start, DTMF or Dial Pulse
dialing.
Tip and Ring electrical fuses (posistors) PST101 - PST802 are
provided to comply with UL 1459 2nd Edition requirements.
In addition, the
COI-F(S)-30 has two connectors for mounting the CID-F(8)-21.
A maximum

2-52

of eight CO1 KTUs can be installed.

Electra Professional

120

Switch Settings/LED

Indications:

The COI-F(8)-20 CO1 KTU contains eight switches (SW1 - SW8) for the
selection of Loop or Ground Start. Each switch is associated with an individual
circuit. LEDs (101 - 801) indicate the status of each circuit. Refer to Figure 235 - COI-F(8)-20 KTU Switch Layout.
The COI-F(8)-30
CO1 KTU contains eight switches that are designated
SW1 - SW8 for the selection of trunk type (Loop or Ground Start). Each switch
is associated with an individual circuit. LEDs (1 - 8) indicate the status of each
circuit. The LEDS are located on the back of the COI-F(8)-30 KTU. Refer to
Figure 2-36 - COI-F(8)-30 KTU Switch Layout.
When a Loop Start trunk is connected to a circuit, its associated switch must be
set to LP. If a Ground Start trunk is connected, the switch must be set to GS.
When the green LED (LEDl) is on, the CO1 is receiving
the ON/OFF control for this KTU

;
PST802

power.

Switch MB is

L
LED2
(Red)
LED1
(Green)

LP IlGS
SW6

i

LP ImiGS

MB

\

SW5
\

\
SW4
\

SW3

SW2

J’

SW1

Figure 2-35

Electra Professional

120

COI-F(8)-20

KTU Switch Layout

2-53

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

LED2
I..

0
Y
\

I

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

...

,-

PST 802
Gs

Y
I

i

9

GS

I 01
SW8
m

I

/’

LP

LP

SW7

GS

Gs

CH8

I I31
SW6

LP

m

LP

I

SW5
CH7
GS

fl

I

LP

SW4
CH5

I
GS

El

CH4

CB

LP

SW3

CH3

GS

El

131

LP

SW2

CH2
CHl

GS

I

IX

LP

SW1

Figure 2-36

COI-F(B)-30

/

/

KTU Switch Layout

_.

2-54

Electra Professional

120

4.3.6

CID-F(8)-11

Unit

The CID unit detects Caller ID signal from Telco through COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU
for Caller ID trunks connected to the system. This unit works in conjunction
with the COI-F(4/8)-30
KTU and MIF-(0-10
KTU and is piggybacked on the
COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU.
One CID-F(8)-11 Unit can beinstalled on each COI-F(4/8)-30
of eight CID-F(8)-11 Units can be installed.
Switch Settings/LED

KTU;

a maximum

Indications

The CID unit has three switches

- SWl-3) and two LEDs. Switches
used and should be off. When switch SWl-1
is on (default setting), the system does not detect the time when caller ID is sent
from the Telco. When switch SWl-1 is off, the system does detect this time.
LED1 is currently
not being used. When LED2 flashes red, the CID is
communicating
with the CPU. Refer to Figure 2-37 - CID-F(8)-11 Unit Switch
Layout.
(SWl-1

SWl-2 and SWl-3 are not currently

0

-

LED

11

1 LED

2

SW1

3

1
EEE I
-

Figure 2-37

Connection

to COI-F(4/8)-30

CID-F(8)-11

Unit Switch Layout

KTU

To connect the CID-F(8)-11

- Connecting

Electra Professional

120

Unit to the COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU, refer to Figure 2-38
the CID to the COI, and make the following connections:

l

CO1 CN4 to CID CNl

l

CO1 CN5 to CID CN2

2-55

Figure 2-38

Connecting

the CID to the CO1

Caller ID Considerations
General
Caller ID service provides the name and telephone
to the called party on a loop start trunk.

number

of the calling

party

Installation
Caller ID is user sensitive; the customer can activate or deactivate this service
by dialing the proper access code and receives a confirmation
announcement
from Stored Program Control Switching @PCS). The SPCS is the Central Office
switching system.
The customer can enter several different access codes to access various functions
and features.
If an improper access code is dialed, the customer receives a
reorder tone or special announcement.
Caller ID can be denied on a
class-of-service basis.
Caller ID can be provided
signaling.

2-56

to customers

that

use either

DTMF

or dial pulse

Electra Professional

120

Electrical

Specifications

ASCII-coded information
is sent from the SPCS to the Customer Premises
Equipment (CPE) on the tip and ring leads of a standard local loop at 1200 bps.
Other parameters are as follows:
Link Type:

simplex,

Transmission

Scheme:

two wire

analog, phase coherent frequency

Logical 1 (Mark):

1200 AZ12Hz

Logical 0 (Space):

2200 + 22Hz

Transmission

1200 bps

Application

Rate:
of Data:

serial, binary,

shift keying

asynchronous

Bit Error Rate:

less than 1 in 100,000,000

Phase Continuity:

maintained

Transmission

-13.5 + 1 dB at point of application
load of 900 ohms

Level:

Bit Duration:

833 tduration)

from initial

50 psec

bits (at switch interface)
service to end of message

(start/stop

bit

to resistive
has

standard

The asynchronous protocol should consist of a start bit, an &bit data byte, and a
stop bit. Caller ID is transmitted
to the CPE in this lo-digit format. Possible
future options may allow Personal Identification
Number (PIN) instead of
Caller ID.
Information
should be sent in either a single or multiple
to Figure 2-39 - Data Message Format.)

data message.

(Refer

Single (used for providing Calling Number ID only)

Channel
Seizure
Signal (1)

Carrier
Signal (2)

Message
Type
Word (3)

Message
Length
word (4)

Data

Checksum
Word (6)

Word(s)
(5)

1
Parameter
Multiple

Parameter

N

(used for providing both Calling Number ID and Calling Name ID)

Channel
Seizure
Signal

Mark
Signal

Mark
Bits
(0 - 10)

-

Message
Type
Word

Parameter
Word

Mark
Bits
(0 - 10)

Message
Length

Parameter
Type

Mark
Bits
(0 - 10)

Parameter
Length

More
Parameter
Words

More
Parameter
Messages

Mark
Bits
(0 - 10)

More
Messages

Checksum

Figure 2-39

Electra Professional

1

120

Data Message Format

2-57

A description
1 Channel
2 Carrier

of each parameter
Seizure Signal

in the message format follows:

30 continuous
bytes of 01010101
detectable alerting signal to CPE.

provides

a

150 ms of logical 1 for line conditioning.

Signal

3 Message Type Word

For example, Caller ID is message type 4; message
waiting is message type 10.

4 Message Length Word

Specifies number
include checksum.

5 Data Word(s)

Data to be transmitted.
Caller ID form
WWXXYYZZ followed by the Caller ID, where

of bytes

to follow;

does not
is

WW = Month
XX = Day
YY = Hour (24-hour clock)
ZZ = Minute
6 Checksum

Word

This is the modulo
the message.

7 Parameter

Type Word

For example,
name.

8 Parameter

Length

Specifies
parameter

Required

Word

Table 2-17

2-58

parameter

number
only.

1 is time; parameter

of bytes

to follow

7 is

for

this

Equipment

Refer to Table 2-17 - Required

Equipment

256 sum of all other words in

Equipment

Required

for Caller ID.

Equipment

for Caller ID

Description

Quantity

COI-F(4)-30
COI-F(8)-30

KTU
KTU

Caller ID trunk interface board -4-channel board or &channel board

lor2-8

CID-F@)-11

Unit

Caller ID signal-detection

1 per COI-F(4/8)-30

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU

Provides Caller ID feature

board

KTU

1 per system

Electra Professional

120

4.3.7

DID-F(4)-10

KTU

-The DID KTU provides for the termination
and operation of up to four DID
lines. Wink start, delay start, or immediate
start are accommodated.
Dial
Pulse and DTMF are supported.
A maximum

of eight DID-F(4)-10

Switch Settings/LED

KTUs can be installed.

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the DID-F(4)-10 KTU is receiving power. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. LEDs 101 - 401 represent the four
individual circuits and their status. A busy line indication lamp (LED 101 LED 401) lights when the associated line (CHl - CH 4) is busy. Refer to Figure
Z-40 - DID-F(4)-10 KTU Switch Layout.

Piggyback

A
/LED 201
/LED 101
,LEDl
(Green)

LED 301
LED 401

ON
OFF

I

-

MB

CNI
CH2
CHI

This KTU includes a piggybacked

Figure 2-40

Electra Professional

120

package

DID-F(4)-10

and cannot

be separated.

KTU Switch Layout

2-59

Electra Professional

Febr
m
4.3.8

TLI-F(2)-10

12O/Level II/Level

Installation

II Advanced

Service Manual

KTU

The TLI KTU provides for the termination
and operation of up to two E&M Tie
lines (4-wire E&M, Type I or Type V, 10 or 20 pps, Dial Pulse, or DTMF).
Immediate
start, wink start, delay start, and second dial tone signaling are
provided.
A maximum

of 14 TLI-F(2)- 10 KTUs can be installed.

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

Switches SW101 and SW201 allow selection of Type I or Type V for channels 1
and 2, respectively.
Red LEDs 101 and 201 indicate the status of the two associated circuits.
When the green LED (LEDl) is lit, the TLI-F(2)-10
KTU is receiving power.
Switch
MB
is the ON/OFF
control
for this
KTU.
Refer
to
5.2.3.1 - TLI-F(2)-10 KTU Cable Connections and to Figure 2-41 - TLI-F(B)-10
KTU Switch Layout.

J/

LED
201

g;
m
ON

- MB

OFF

CH2
SW 201
I

Figure 2-41

2-60

CN2

0

Type

1

Type

V

Type

SW 101
a
I
1
Type

V

TLI-F(2)-10

CH 1

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

120

4.3.9

DTI-F(
4.3.9.1

j-10 KTU/DTI-F(A)-20
DTI-F(

KTU, BRT-F(4)-10

j-10 KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

The Digital
of a Tl/FTl,

Trunk Interface
24 DS-0 (Digital

KTU,

and CLK-F-21

Unit

KTU
(DTI) KTU provides for the termination
Service - Level O), or fewer line.

A combination of Loop and Ground Start signaling
DTI-F( j-10 KTU. DTMF or Dial Pulse dialing is
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU also supports Tie lines (E&M)
(Series 300 or higher).
Refer to F&n-e 2-43Switch Layout.

can be used on one
also supported. The
and DID signaling
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU

Up to three DTI KTUs can be installed in the Electra Professional
120 system and must be installed in the IFl/OPl
or IF4/OP4 slots of
the Basic KSU or the IFl/OPl slot of the first Expansion KSU that is
installed.
If a DTI KTU is used, the interface slot(s) adjacent to the
DTI interface slot may need to be left vacant. The number of slots
that must remain vacant depends on the number of DTI channels
being used. To use this KTU, a CLK-F-21 synchronization
unit must
be connected on the CPU-F(
l-20 KTU.
Refer to Figure 2-49 Installing
the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the ESF-H10 KSU and Table 2-22 - Required Slots for DTI-F( l-10 KTU or DTIF(A)-20 KTU Installation.
When using a second DTI KTU in the Electra Professional
120
system, this KTU must be connected to the first DTI KTU installed in
the system. A third DTI KTU is then connected to the second DTI
KTU that is installed.
Refer to Figure 2-51 - Connecting the Cable
Between the DTI-F( l-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20 KTUs and the CLKF-21 Unit.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED11 is on, the DTI KTU is receiving power. LEDs
1 - 8 indicate various statuses depending on the switch setting. The
red LED9 is the operation verification lamp. LED 9 flashes when the
system is operating normally; it is on steady when the system is reset.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 2-42
- DTI-F( l-10 KTU Switch Layout, Figure 2-43 - DTI-F(A)-20
KTU
Switch Layout, Table 2-18 - DTI-F(
j-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20
KTU
Switch Settings for MB and SWl, Table 2-19 - DTI-F( j-10 KTU/DTIF(A)-20 KTU Switch Settings for SW2, and Table 2-20 DTI-F( l-10
KTUIDTI-F(Aj-20
KTU LED Indications.

Electra Professional

120

2-61

Piggyback

III

SW1

’

LED9

i

::

SW2

LED6
?

LED5
LED4

17CN4
IIICN5
0 CN6

LED3
s

LED2

i

LED1 1
(Green)

LED1

-MB

CN4

q
Figure 2-42

DTI-F(

l-10 KTU Switch Layout

LED9
LED8
LED7
LED6
LED5

Piggyback

LED4
LED3
LED2

ON

LED1

OFF

LED11
(Green)
MB

CN5
CN6
CL’”

\ I
Figure

2-62

2-43

DTI-F(A)-20

II
II
n

‘-+

CNl

KTU Switch Layout (Series 300 or higher)

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Table 2-18

Switch
Position

Switch

MB

SW1

Electra Professional

DTIIF(

12O/Level II/Level

)-LO KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Settings

Initial
Setting
(O=OFF
l=ON)

February

II Advanced

1998

for MB and SW1

Adjustment
Power supply to the KTU must be ON during operation.

N/A

OFF

1

OFF:

0

2

OFF:

0

3

OFF:

0

4

OFF:

0

5
6

OFF:
OFF:

0
0

7

OFF:

0

8

OFF:

0

Loop Back Setting
SWl-1
SWl-2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

No Loop Back
Future Use
Line Loop Back ON
Not Used

Not Used (Must be 0 when operating.)

Note 1:

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (also known as blue signal) is provided by the Central Office to
ensure continuity of the output signal. AIS is applied to ensure that no more than 80 consecutive
zeros are transmitted.
When a valid signal is available, the AIS may be removed. The AIS is an
unframed, all ones signal. Either the Central Of&e or far end equipment may busy out an entire
DS-1 facility by sending an AIS. If an AIS is received (and since it is unframed), the Yellow
Alarm is transmitted to the far end.

Note 2:

Explanation
l

of Switch Positions:

SWl-1 = 0 and SWl-2 = 0
This position is used for normal operation

l

SWl-1 = OandSWl-2
Future Use

l

SWl-1 = 1 and SWl-2 = 0
This position is used to receive patterns,
accommodate embedded equipment that
is set, the data signals that are received
These data signals are regenerated, by
removing any bipolar violations.

l

Electra Professional

SWl-1 = landSWl-2
Not Used

120

(talking,

idle, etc.).

= 1

listed for inband line loopback, without framing, to
sends unframed control signals. When this position
by the system are transmitted
back to the network.
the system, without changing the framing format or

= 1

2-63

Table 2-19

Switch

SW2

Note:

2-64

Switch
Position

DTI-F(

j-10 KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

Initial
Setting
(O=OFF
l=ON)

KTU Switch Settings

for SW2

Adjustment

NIA

OFF

1

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
of the Tl(24 DS-0) channel.

the status of CH 1 - 8

2

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
of the Tl(24 DS-0) channel.

the status of CH 9 - 16

3

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
17 - 24 of the Tl(24 DS-0) channel.

the status of CH

4

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
from the Tl trunk.

the status of the alarm

5

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
from the Tl trunk.

the status of the alarm

6

OFF:

0

7

OFF:

0

8

OFF:

0

Not Used (Must be 0 when operating.)

If multiple switches are set to ON, the lower numbered
to sw2-1 - sw2-5.)

switch has the highest priority.

(This applies

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

Table 2-20

DTI-F(

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

j-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

1998

KTU LED Indications

LED5

CH5

CH13

CH21

CRC detection

LED6

CH6

CH14

CH22

BPV detection

LED7

CH7

CH15

CH23

SLIP detection

LED8

CH8

CH16

CH24

Note 1:

SW2-1 - SW2-3 indicate the status of Tl(24

Note 2:

SW2-4 - SW25 indicate the status of the Tl trunk alarm.

Note 3:

Explanation

of Alarm

Februarv

DS-0) channels.

Conditions:

Alarm (LSA) Detection
LEDl: Line Synchronization
If the Tl trunk has lost frame synchronization,
the LED lights red.
LED2: Alarm Indication
If the system is receiving

Signal (AIS) Detection
AIS from the Tl trunk,

the LED lights red.

LEDS: Out-of-Frame
Condition (OOF) Detection
If two of the four or five data framing bits that are received are in error, this LED lights
red.
LED4: Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) Detection
If the remote alarm signal is received, this LED lights red.
LED5: Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Error Event Detection
If a CRC error has occurred, the LED lights red.
LEDG: Excessive Bipolar Violations (BPV) Detection
If an excessive bipolar violation condition is detected, the LED lights red.
LED7: Controlled Slip Event (Slip) Detection
If the difference between the timing of a synchronous receiving
received signal exceeds the buffering capability of the synchronous
lights red.
Note 4:

and the
the LED

SW2-5 = 1
l
l
l

Electra Professional

terminal
terminal,

120

LEDl: Transmit Short Circuit (TSC) detection
LED2: Jitter Attenuator
Alarm (ESA) detection
LED3: Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection
If the Tl signal from the trunk is not received, the LED lights red.

2-65

4.3.9.2

BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

This KTU provides four identical circuits to support up to four ISDN
Basic Rate trunks, (S/T Interface, 8 voice channels).
Tip and ring
electrical fuses (posistors) PTCl through
PTC16 are provided to
comply with UL 1459 requirements.
A maximum
of eight BRT KTUs
Professional 120 system.
This KTU has one, 4-position
This KTU can be installed
expansion KTUs.

can be installed

connector for interface

in IF1 -IF4/0Pl-OP4

A CLK-F-21 Unit must be installed
the BRT KTU.

7,.
..’ /’

in the Electra
to the MDF.

slots of basic and first

on the CPU-F ( j-20 KTU to use

When any other trunk KTU such as COI-F(4/3)-20
KTU, COIF(4/8)-30 KTU, TLI-F(B)-10
KTU, or DID-F(4)-10
KTU is
installed in slots to the left of the BRT-F(4)-10 KTU, the BRTF(4)-10 KTU is assigned before the other trunk KTU on a first
power on.
Multipoint
connection is not allowed in conjunction
with the
BRT-F(4)-10 KTU. Connectors CNll, CN21, CN12, CN22,CN13,
CN23, CN14, and CN24 are set between pin 1 and pin 2 as default
and should be set as is.
If DTI KTU is installed, use the clock cable interconnection
required for Tl circuits. Ensure that CLK-F-21Unit
jumper Sl is
set for 1.5M. For this case, the BRT KTU is installed without
CLK Unit considerations; clocking is derived from the Tl.
To connect the BRT KTU and the CLK Unit:
Connect BRT-F-(4)-10 KTU CN2 to CLK-F-21 Unit CN3 using the
Refer to Figure 2-44
cable provided with the CLK-F-21 Unit.
Connecting the Cable Between the BRT-F(4)-10 KTU and the CLKF-21 Unit.
It is unnecessary to connect the second and succeeding
the CLK-F-21 Unit.
l

Clock cable is not required

l

The BRT KTU connected to the CLK-F-21
connected to live ISDN Basic Rate trunks.

BRT KTUs to

between 1st and 2nd BRT KTUs.
Unit

must

be

I

2-66

Electra Professional

120

CNl

BRT-F(4)-10

NT1

KTU

CNl

ISDN

NT1

Line
t-n

2nd BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

CNl

NT1

q
ISDN
Line

1st BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

TOCLK

User

Provided

CN2

Ferrite
(wrap

CPU KTU

Core
cable 2 turns)

/
CLK UNIT
FM DTI
CN4

CN4

Figure 2-44

Electra

Professional

120

Connecting the Cable Between the BRT-F(4)-10
CLK-F-21 Unit

KTU and the

2-67

Switch Settin&LED

Indications

Refer to Figure 2-45 - BRT-F(4)-10 KTU Switch Layout. The BRTF(4)-10 KTU has two switches, SW1 and SW2. SW1 is the ON/OFF
control for the KTU. SW2 has four individual
switches that are set
OFF as default, and must be left OFF for operation.
Red LEDs 1 to 8 indicate status of four associated circuits. LED1 and
LED5 indicate status of first BRT line. LED1 is on after the layer 2
link is established.
LED5 is on when the voice path is established on
Bl channel, B2 channel, or both Bl and B2 channels. LED2 and LED
6 provide the same indications as LED1 and LED6 for the second BRT
line, LED3 and LED7 provide these indications
for the third BRT
line, and LED 4 and LED8 provide them for the fourth BRT line.
Green LED9 is on when the BRT KTU is receiving
CLK-F-21

Unit for the BRT-F(4)-10

The CLK-F-21
Unit
connected to thesystem.

power.

KTU

provides sunchronization
For additional information,

for ISDN lines
refer to 4.393.

f

DIP
SWITCH

6W2)
a
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1

ON
OFF

4b

ON
OFF

Figure 2-45

2-68

ml

CN 24

ml

CN14

ml

CN 23

ml

CN13

ml

CN 22

ml

CN 12

ml

CN 21

ml

CNll

BRT-F(4)-10

- MB (SWl)

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

120

‘:
;

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional
Install

1201Level II/Level
BRT-F(4)-10

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

KTU

1. Install the BRT-F(4)-10 KTU in slots IFl/OPl to IF4/OP4 in first
and second cabinets of the 120/LevelIl Advanced system.
2.

Connect cable between NT1 and BRT KTU. as shown in Figure 386 BRT-F(4)-10 KTU Interconnect.

3.

Install cable between
interface).

4.

Connect BRT U interface

to the MDF.

5.

Connect BRT U interface

from MDF to the NTl.

6.

Use two twisted-pair
cables to connect cable from
interface output) to BRT KTU CNl as shown below.

Pin
16
15

4.3.9.3

NT1

and ISDN

Basic Rate Trunk

(U

NT1 (S/T

Name
RB4
RA4

l

The BRT KTU cannot be connected directly to a Telco providing
the Basic Rate Trunk U interface.
An ISDN Termination
Adapter NT1 (locally provided by the customer) must be installed
between Telco and BRT-F(4)-10 KTU.

l

The maximum distance from the BRT-F(4)-10
feet, using 22 AWG twisted pair cable.

CLK-F-21

KTU to NT1 is 300

Unit

The CLK Unit provides synchronization
for Tl and ISDN lines
connected to the system. This unit works in conjunction with the
DTI-F(
l-10 KTU, DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, or BRT-F(4)-10 KTU and is
piggybacked on the CPU-F( j-20 KTU.
Only one CLK-F-21

Electra Professional

120

Unit can be installed

in either system.

2-69

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

LED1 lights if the 1.5 MHz clock is not provided from the Tl or ISDN
trunk. LED2 lights if the output clock to the CPU-F( j-20 KTU (16
MHz) is not provided from the CLK-F-21 Unit. Refer to Figure 2-46
- Mounted CLK-F-21 Unit.

TOP View

CPU-F( )-20 KTU

r

I

TST

“1
~‘1’.
h-4
TPl

1.5M
BRT
I . . . . . . . . . . . . a I 1”
-.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . -..a
51
CNl
n

LED1 0
LEDZD

.‘I’.

CN2

CLK-F-21 Unit

Figure 2-46

2-70

Mounted

CLK-F-21

l

.

I.

.

.

q

CN4:

CN3

’
f
I..
:
..I

Unit

Electra Professional

120

_..
1:;

Connection:
To connect the CPU-F(
following connections:

4.3.9.4

j-20 KTU and the CLK-F-21

l

CLK CNl and CPU CNlOl

l

CLK CN4 and CPU CN4

Unit make the

Tl Considerations
IMPORTANT

NOTE

Before installing
the CLK-F-21 unit in the CPU-F( j-20 KTU, the
Sl strap on the CLK-F-21 unit must be moved from the BRT
setting to the 1.5M setting.
General
Tl/FTl
referred

is a physical communications
facility (circuit)
to as Tl/FTl pipe with 1.544 mbps of bandwidth.

commonly

The Tl/FTl
pipe can be divided into 24 channels, each rated
(Digital Signal, Level 0). This is equivalent
to 24 or more
circuits and/or multiple data channels (leased lines). Each DS-0
kbps of bandwidth.
The carrier uses 8 Kbps of Tl/FTl bandwidth
network supervision and diagnostics, leaving 1.536 mbps for
data.
Electrical

Specifications

The electrical
specifications
describe the Tl/FTl
Tl/FTl cross-connect interface, and the characteristics
received from and transmitted
to the Tl/FTl facility.
1. Support Digital
2.

DS-0
voice
is 64
for
user

Trunk Type:

Support Trunk Signal Type:

interface,
the
of the signals

Tl, FTl
DTI-F( j-10 KTU:
CO/FX/WATS,
Loop and
Start
(Determined
in
Programming)

Ground
System

DTI-F(A)-20 KTU:
CO/FX/WATS,
Loop and Ground
Start,
Tie
line
(E&M),
DID
(Determined
in
System
Programming)
ZCS or B8ZS Method (Determined
in System Programming)

3.

Support Line Coding:*

4.

Output Characteristics:
Line Bate:
Line Impedan’ce:
Pulse Amplitude (Base to Peak):

5. Input Characteristics:
Line Bate:
Pulse Amplitude (Base to Peak):
Frame Synchronization: *
Input Jitter:

Electra Professional

120

1.544 mbps + - 50 bps
100 Q
CCITT G. 703
1.544 mbps + - 200 bps
1.W - 3V
12-Multiframe
*
24-Multiframe
*
CCITT G. 743

2-71

Cable Length from Electra
Professional 120 to CSU:

Maximum
655 ft. (with
AWG)
Channel Service Unit

csu:
*

22
..\
/

Refer to Notes for explanation.

Notes:
Line Coding
If zero data is being continuously
transmitted
over a Tl/FTl
trunk,
the end equipment cannot operate normally because there is no clock
synchronization.
EWTIA-464-A
specifies two line coding methods
for normal operation.
1. Zero Code Suppression (ZCS)
2. Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution
(B8ZS)
This method depends on the LXC (Local ExchangeVIXC
(Interexchange).
The installer
must ask the LXCIXC
to
determine
whether the configuration
is ZCS or B8ZS.
The
installer
must
assign
this
configuration
using
Electra
Professional 120 System Programming.
Frame Synchronization
According to EIA/TIA-464-A
for 24-channel transmission,
there are
two frame con&orations:
12-multiframe
and 24-multiframe.
This
method depends on the LXCAXC.
The installer
must ask the
LXCIXC
to determine
whether
the configuration
is 12- or
24-multiframe.
The installer must assign this configuration
using
Electra Professional 120 System Programming.
1%Multiframe
This frame has 12-Multiframes
and each Multiframe
has a
24-channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel)
and an F bit (Super Frame
Bit). Refer to Figure 2-47 - 12-Multiframe
Configuration
and Bit
Assignment.

b
FRAME
,i (......-...-..-.
I
125~s

~

1
), :
’
Figure 2-47

2-72

----------

12-Multiframe

Configuration

and Bit Assignment

Electra Professional

120

24-Multiframe

This frame has 24-Multiframes
and each Multiframe
has a
24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel)
and an F bit (Super Frame
Bit). Refer to Figure 2-48 - 24Multiframe
Configuration
and Bit
Assignment.

CHl
F

CH2

1234567812345678

I, (- .......... ...-), I
8
125~s

’

Figure 2-48

24-Multiframe

Configuration

and Bit Assignment

Installation
Table 2-21 - Equipment
Required
equipment required for Tl.

Table 2-21

Equipment

Required

j-10 KTU
-ORDTI-F(A)-20 KTU

24 channels Tl/FTl

CLK-F-21

Tl/FTl

DTI-F(

Unit

board

1,2, or 3

1

Unit

Connection cable between DTI and CLK package
(4 MHz clock)

Cable

Twisted pair transmission

cable between

Electra Professional

Interface

120

equipment

between Tl Trunk

1 per DTI KTU and CLK interface
(included with DTI KTU)
-OR1 per DTI KTU and DTI KTU
interface

DTI and MDF

Connection cable between DTI and CLK
(1.5 MHz clock)

csu

shows the

Quantity

trunk interface

Clock Synchronization

Installation

for Tl Installation

Description

Equipment

Installation

for Tl

1 per CLK Unit
(included with CLK Unit)
and DTI KTU

1 per DTI KTU

2-73

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

To install:

1. Install
the DTI-F(
j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU and the
CLK-F-21 Unit in the ESF-H-10 KSU. Refer to Figure 2-49 Installing the DTI-F( l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the ESFHB-10 KSU.
To install the DTI-F(
a-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU use
interface slots IFl/OPl or IF4/OP4 slots on the ESF-H-10 KSU or
the IFl/OPl slot on the first two ESF-H-10 KSUs installed.
Refer
to Figure 2-50 - Installing the DTI-F( l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU in the first two ESF-H-10 KSUs.
Note:

If the DTI KTU is used, the interface slot(s), adjacent to
the DTI interface slot, can be used. The number of slots
that must remain empty depends on the number of DTI
channels being used.

ESF-H-10

KSU

P*Clll
:

DTI-F(

Figure 2-49

2-74

p

rJ

:
A//
0
P
1

:

:

I
I

I

:

E

/

0
P
2

0
P
3

l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

0

1

KTU

Installing the DTI-F( l-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the ESF-H-10
KSU

Electka Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra
I_ Professional

120/Level II/Level

DTI-F(

ESF-H-10

ESF-H-10

)-lo KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

OM
!iPM:
U
B
C

KSU

KSU

P

OCI

:

E

Table 2-22

/+1998

KTU

I
1
//
0
P
1

5
0
P
2

I
1
F
//
0
P

E

DTI-F(

Figure 2-50

II Advanced

:
0
P

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

Installing the DTI-F(
two ESF-H-10 KSUs

Required Slots for DTI-F(

KTU

l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

No. of DTI-F( l-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU Channels
Used

1

9 - 16
17 - 24

2.

b.

Electra Professional

120

2
3

I

Install the cable between the Tl/FTl
KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU.
a.

KTU Installation

Required
Slots for DTI-F( j-10 KTU
or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU Installation

l-8

I

KTU in the first

trunk

I

and the DTI-F(

Connect the Tl/FTl trunk to the MDF.
Refer to Table 2-36 - Connection Information/Connection
Port Relationships.

l-10

and

Connect the Tl trunk from the MDF to the CSU.

2-75

c.

d.

2-76

To connect the cable from the CSU to CN1 on the DTI-F(
KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU:

j-10

(1)

Wrap the cables, provided with the DTI-F( l-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, twice (two turns) around a ferrite
core.

(2)

Connect the cable from the CSU to CNl on the
DTI-F( J-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, using the MDF
Cable Assembly.
Refer to 2-51 - Connecting the Cable
Between the DTI-F( j-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20
KTUs
and the CLK-F-21 Unit.

Note 1:

The maximum
or DTI-F(A)-20
22 AWG.

Note 2:

The customer must purchase
to install the Tl trunk.

To connect the DTI-F(
CLK-F-21 Unit:

.xj.,
’
x-

distance from the DTI-F( j-10 KTU
KTU to the CSU is 655 feet, using

the CSU equipment

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU and the

(1)

Wrap the cables, provided with the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, twice (two turns) around a ferrite
core.

(2)

Connect CN6 and CN4, on the DTI-F(
j-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, to CN2 and CN3, on the CLK-F-21
Unit, using the provided cable with the DTI-F(
l-10
KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU.
Refer to Figure 2-51
- Connecting the Cable Between the DTI-F( j-10 KTUs
or DTI-F(A)-20 KTUs and the CLK-F-21 Unit.

(3)

When connecting
a second DTI-F(
j-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU,
connect
CN6
on the second
DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
to CN5 on the first
DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU after wrapping
this cable [provided with the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTIF(A)-20 KTU] twice (two turns) around a ferrite core.

(4)

When installing
a third
DTI-F(
j-10 KTU
or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU, follow the same procedure in step 3
for connection between the third and second DTI-F( j-10
KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU.
Refer to Figure 2-52
- Example of Three DTI-F( l-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20
KTUs Attached to the CLK-F-21 Unit.

Electra

Professional

120

.

CNl

CN6

DTI KTU

CNl

CN6

DTI KTU

CN5

CNl

DTI KTU

TOCLK

CN6

I

I

_.-

I

i.
..--I -.-.

I

i

i
.
J

1

4 hfHz clock
from CLK Unit

h
I

CN5
TOCLK

CN4

-.A

1.5 MHz clock
to CLK Unit

Ferrite
(wrap

Core
cable 2 turns)

e: If a BRT KTU is inst.&led, set CLK
unit jumper to 1.5 (Tl). Cable
connection to BRT KTU from CLK Unit
is not required if both DTI and BRT
KTUs are installed.
Figure 2-51

Electra Professional

120

Connecting the Cable Between the DTI-F( j-10 KTUs or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTUs and the CLK-F-21 Unit

2-77

Februarv

1998

Figure 2-52

2-78

Electra Professional

Example

of Three DTI-F(

lZO/Level

II/Level

j-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20

II Advanced

KTUs Attached

Installation

Service Manual

to the CLK-F-21

Electra

Unit

Professional

120

4.3.9.5

ISDN Considerations
ISDN trunks connected to the ElectraProfessional
120/Level II/Level
II Advanced system require clock signals the same as Tl trunks.
BRT Without

Installed

DTIs

If ISDN KTU is installed in a system without DTI KTUs, connect the
clock cable from CN3 on the CLK unit to CN2 on first BRT KTU in
the system. CLK unit CN2 is not used. CLK unit jumper is set to
BRT.
BRT With Installed

DTIs

In this configuration,
the ElectraProfessional
1201Level II/Level II
Advanced system derives clocking from the Tl. Use connection
scheme in Figure 2-51. CLK unit jumper is set to 1.5M. Cable
connection is not required between the BRT KTU and the CLK unit
or any DTI KTU.
4.4

Optional

4.4.1

KTUs
PBR-F(4)-11

KTU

The Push Button Receiver (PBR) KTU detects and translates DTMF tones
generated by Single Line Telephones, modems, or facsimile machines.
This
KTU is required if the four built-in PBR channels (CPU) are not enough to
support all single line devices of the system.
Only one PBR-F(4)-11
Switch Setting/LED

KTU can be installed.
Indications

When the green LED1 on
power. When red DTMF
signal receiver circuits are
control for this KTU. Refer

Electra Professional

120

the PBR-F(4)-11 KTU is on, the KTU is receiving
signal-indication
LED2 is on, one or more DTMF
receiving DTMF signals. Switch MB is the ON/OFF
to Figure 2-53 - PBR-F(4)-11 KTU Switch Settings.

2-79

-54

LED2
/c&Y)
/(Green)

-

53

-

s2

-

51

-L

Figure 2-53

PBR-F(4)-11

KTU Switch Settings

If adjustment to the DTMF signal detection level is required, adjust using strap
wire Sl - S4. Refer to Table 2-23 - DTMF Signal Adjustments.

Table 2-23

DTMF Signal Adjustments
Adjustment

of -34 dBm - -4 dBm DTMF signals. To
increase the receiving gain, cut the strap
wires (-42 dBm - - 12 dBm DTMF signals
can be received).
Sl: Channel 1 receiving gain
S2: Channel 2 receiving gain

2-80

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manu

sional2O/hvel
4.4.2

II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

KTU

VRS-F(4)-11

The VRS-F(4)-11
KTU provides record/playback
of voice messages for the
Automated Attendant, Voice Prompt, and Delay Announcement
features.
A maximum

of two VRS-F(4)-11

KTUs can be installed.

Each VRS-F(4)-11 KTU has four record/playback
channels.
The maximum
recording time of each channel is 240 seconds. The recording time for each
channel can be divided as follows:
0
0
l

15 sec.
30sec.
6Osec.

*
*
*

16 messages
8 messages
4 messages

=
=
=

240 sec.
240 sec.
240 sec.

a

120 sec.

*

2 messages

=

240 sec.

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

SW 1, on both the Main and Expansion PCBs, controls battery power for memory
backup. These must be turned ON for retention of VRS memory for this KTU if
power fails.
Note:

Do not separate the Main or Expansion

PCBs.

LEDs 1 and 2 (on the Main PCB) represent channels 1 and 2. LEDs 1 and 2
the Expansion PCB) represent channels 3 and 4. These LEDs light red when
use (recording or playing messages). When the green LED 3 on the VRS-F(4)KTU is on, the KTU is receiving power. Switch MB is the ON/OFF control
this KTU . Refer to Figure 2-54 - VRS-F(4)- 11 KTU Switch Layout.

Electra Professional

120

(on
in
11
for

2-81

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

EXPANSION

lSO/Level II/Level

PCB

MAIN

II Advanced

Service Manual

PCB
LED1
(Red)

CH4
CH3

Installation

4

*
. MB

.. *..

Switlh

1

Expansion
Battery

PCB

4.4.3

VRS-F(4)-11

Main

PCB

PCB

\

Main PCB
Battery

Figure 2-54

Expansion

Switch

1

KTU Switch Layout

ECR-F-11 KTU
The ECR-F-11 KTU provides two RCA jacks and eight relay contacts. Three of
the eight relays are used for External Paging contact, one is used for Night
Chime contact, and the other four are used for External Tone Ringer. One of the
two RCA jacks is used for External Tone Ringer/Night
Chime audible output.
The other RCA jack is used for External Paging audible input/output.
Refer to
Figure 2-55 - ECR-F-11 KTU Switch Layout and Table 2-24 - ECR-F-11 KTU
Connectors/Adjustments.
Only one ECR-F-11

KTU can be installed

Switch Setting/LED

Indications

in either

system.

When the green LED1 on the ECR-F-11 KTU is on, the KTU is receiving power.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 2-55 - ECR-F11 KTU Switch Layout and Table 2-25 - ECR-F-11 KTU Optional
Device
Connection Terminals.

2-82

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

February

II Advanced

.

JK2 (For External

,

JKl (For External
Tone
Ringer/Night
Chime)

\

1

1998

Paging)

MB Switch

\LEDl

CN4

For Maximum Volume of External
Turn VRl Counterclockwise

Figure 2-55

Electra Professional

120

Ringer Output:

ECR-F-11

KTU Switch Layout

2-83

Table 2-24
Adjustment
Item

I

I

Tone Ringer

I

Paging

External
External

ECR-F-11

Name of
Switch

I

I

External Tone
Ringer/Night
Chime
Volume Control

Table 2-25

KTU Connectors/Adjustments
Initial
Setting

JKl

Adjustment

N/A

To connect the External Speaker for
External Tone Ringer/Night
Chime

JK2

N/A

To connect the External
External Paging

VRl

Center

I

ECR-F-11

Pin No.

To adjust the External

KTU Optional

Terminal

16

8RM

15

8RC

14
13

7RC

Name

Device Connection

I

I

Speaker for
Tone Output Level

Terminals

Function
External

Tone - Ringer 4

External

Tone - Ringer 3

12
11
10
9
8
Night Chime

7

4.4.4

6

3RM

5

3RC

4

2RM

3

2RC

2

1RM

1

1RC

MIF-F(S)-10

External

Paging - Zone C

External

Paging - Zone B

External

Paging - Zone A

KTU

The MIF KTU serves two purposes:
it allows the connection of a personal
computer to perform System Programming
and up/down loading of System
Data, and it provides Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) to be output
via the RS-232 cable to a printer. Refer to Figure 2-59 - SMDR Print Formats.
These two functions can be operated at the same time.
__’

2-84

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

Only one MIF-F(S)-10
KTU can be installed in either system. Refer to the
Electra Professional 1 BO/Level II/Level II Advanced System Program Technician
Manual
(included
with the System Program
Technician
software)
for
programming
instructions using a PC.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 flashes, the MIF is exchanging data communications
with the
system CPU. When the red LED3 is on, the SMDR function is outputting
a call
record. Refer to Figure 2-56 - MIF-F(S)-10 KTU Switch Layout. Switch MB is
the ON/OFF control for the KTU. Also refer to Table 2-26 - MIF-F(S)-10 KTU
Switch (SW3) Settings for PC and MNP Modem Connections,
Table 2-27 MIF-F(S)-10 KTU Switch (SW41 Settings for Prints, Table 2-28 - MIF-F(S)-10
KTU - DTE PC or Printer Connections, and Table 2-29 - MIF-F(S)-10
KTU DCE MNP Modem Connections.

Battery
Backup
Switch

Battery
Backup

ww

/

ON
OFF

/(Green)
-

MB

OFF

SW3

SW4

ON
OFF
123

456

123

78

456

78

.Di

.

cl lal

Switch
&inter),

skDei%:
Computer/Modem)

CNB

e

Cable
Connection
(onlyforSMDR
Output)

CN 10
lal

CN7

1

(coco~~o&
Modem)

Figure 2-56

Electra Professional

120

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU Switch Layout

2-85

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

Table 2-26

MIF-F(S)-10

12O/LeveI II/Level
-

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

KTU Switch (SW3) Settings for PC and MNP Modem Connections

Description

2-86

Electra Professional

120

Table 2-27
Switch
Position
(SW41

ON/OFF
Setting

Description

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Mode Setting:
0: Operation Mode
1: Test Mode:
Note:
Operation of MIF stops when set
to the Test Mode.

2

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

3

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

4

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Data Bits (RS-232C for Printer)
0: 8-bit
1: 7-bit

5

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Parity and Stop Bits:

7

8

120

KTU Switch (SW41 Settings for Printers

1

6

Electra Professional

MIF-F(S)-10

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

0
1

0
1

0
1

sw4-5

SW4-6

Parity

Stop

Bits

0

0

None

2

1

0

None

1

0

1

Even

1

1

1

Odd

1

Baud Rates:
sw4-7

sw4-8

RS-232C

0

0

4800

bps

1

0

24p

bps

0

1

1200bps

1

1

300 bps

2-87

see
Februar

Manual

1998

Table 2-28

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU - DTE PC or Printer

Connections
PC or Printer

DTR(ER)

7

+

6

(DR)DSR

6

SG(SG)

8

---m-m

7

(SGEG

7

DSR(DR)

2

t

20

(ER)DTR

20

--- <---

20 (ER)DTR

t

8

(CD)DCD

8

_-- < ---

8

DCD(CN1O)
Note:

The arrows show the direction

Table 2-29

---mm-m 7

(DR)DSR
(SG)SG

(CD)DCD

of data flow during operation.

Reverse
RS-232
Cable

MIF Cable
Assembly

+
1 ------

1

(FG)FG

----__-

I +-

2

(SD)TXD

2 1

3

(RD)RXD

MNP Modem
(FG)FG

---<---

I1
13

3 1

--->---

12

(SD)TXD

(RD)RXD

RXD(RD)

5

TXD(SD)

4

CTS(CS)

6

I+

4

(RS)RTS

4 1

---<---

15

(CS)CTS

RTS(RS)

3

I-+

5

(CS)CTS

5 1

--->-

I4

(RS)RTS

DTR(ER)

7

I-

6

(DR)DSR

6 1

--- > -_-

(ER)DTR

z$Nlo,

8

1-,-

I20

7

(SGBG

7r

----__-

r- 7

(SG)SG

8

(CD)DCD

8 1

--- < ---

I8

(CD)DCD

20

(ER)DTR

20 1

--<---

16

(DR)DSR

DSR(DR)
Note:

2-88

6

MIF-F ‘S)-10 KTU - DCE MNP Modem Connections

MIF (CN7)
FG(FG)

-__> ---

2

---I

+-

The arrows show the direction

of data flow during operation.

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

February

1999

Installation
The MIF-F(S)-10 KTU can be installed into an Option Slot COP) or into one of
- IF4/OP4), in the ESF-H-10 KSU.
the four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
This KTU is shipped with two cable assemblies (MIF cable assembly). One end
The other end of the cable
of each cable has an RJ45 @-pin) connector.
terminates at an RS-232 connector. This connector must be mounted on one of
the above mentioned KSUs.
After installing the KTU, connect the RJ45 pin connectors to CN8 or CN? into
the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU. When connecting a PC, connect the small connector on
the MIF Cable Assembly to CNlO on the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU, then remove the
RS-232 connection bracket from the KSU and attach the RS-232, on the MIF
Cable Assembly, to the RS-232 connection bracket using the screws on the
RS-232 connectors. Refer to Figure 2-57 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU to the ESF-H-10 KTU.

Figure

Electra Professional

120

2-57

Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU

and the MIF-F(S)-10

2-89

Printer

Connection

for SMDR

Required Equipment:
1.

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU with the NEC provided

2.

RS-232 Straight

3.

Standard

MDF Cable Assembly

Cable

Printer

To install:
1.

Set SW4 DIP switch to adjust for the printer

2.

Install the MIF-F(S)-10

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN8 on the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU and the
Basic KSU. Refer to Figure 2-57 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the standard printer

5.

Turn the MB switch, on the MIF-F(S)-10

6.

Program

Memory

13,14,25,

on the MIF-F(S)-10

KTU.

KTU into the KSU.

Blocks:

using the straight

RS-232 cable.

KTU, to the ON position.

System Mode (LKl)

SMDR/LCR

(LK5) No. 02,

and 26.

PC or MNP Class 5 Modem Connection
Program Technician Software:

for Electra

Professional

120 &stem

The information
given in this section is a basic overview
of System
Programming
using a PC. For specific information,
refer to the Electra
Professional
12WLevel IVLevel II Advanced
System Program
Technician
Manual (included with the Electra Professional System Program Technician
software). Also, refer to Figure 2-58 - MIF-F(
) -10 KTU Direct and Remote
Connections, Figure 2-59 - SMDR Print Formats, and Figure 2-60 - SDMR Print
Formats Item Numbers.
Required Equipment:
KTU with NEC provided

1.

MIF-F(S)-10

2.

RS-232 straight
connection)

3.

IBM@ or IBM compatible

MIF Cable Assembly

cable (for direct connection)

or reverse

cable (for remote

PC with 286 or higher and MS-DOS@ Version

3.3

or higher1
4.

NEC Electra Professional
Technician Software

Level II and Level II Advanced

5.

Standard dot matrix
station labels)

6.

MNP Modem Class 5 or higher (required

printer

(if required

for printing

System Program

job specifications

or

for remote connection)

To install:

1

2-90

The following

are registered

trademarks

1.

Set SW3 DIP switch to adjust for a PC or modem on the MIF-F(S)-10

2.

Install the MIF-F(S)-10

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN7 and CNlO on the MIF-F(S)-10
KTU and the KSU. Refer to Figure 2-57 - Connecting
the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU.

of the following mmpanies:

IBhI of International

KTU.

KTU into the KSU.

Business Machines.

hfS.DOS of Microsoft

Corporation

Electra

Professional

120

4.

Connect the PC using a straight
using a reverse RS-232 ckble.

5.

Place the MB switch, on the’MIF-F(S)-10

Direct Connection:

RS-232 cable or connect the MNP modem
KTU, to ON.

PC and System

Basic KSU
OP Slot or
IF1 - IF4
MIF Cable
Assembly

MIF-F( )-lo KTU

CN7
CNlO 0 -

Straight

Cable

Remote Connection:

MNP Modem

Used

Basic KSU

PC

‘

-4
OP Slot or
IF1 - IF4

MIF-F( j-10 KTU

120

Straight

I

Figure 2-58

Electra Professional

El P

MIF Cable
Assembly

MIF-F(

j-10 KTU Direct and Remote Connections

2-91

1.

Outgoing

Call

07/03/92
A

09 :oo

B

00: 15:32
G
2.

Outgoing

08-05-12
C

OG
D

123
E

08-05-12
C

OG
D

123
E

102885167537000
H

Call (LCR)

07/03/92
A

09 :oo
B
102885167537000
H

00:X:32
G

LCR
-ii3. Incoming

Call

07/03/92
A
00: X:32
G
4.

DISA (Both incoming
07/03/92
A

05-12
C

09 :oo
B

IC
5-

123
E

IC
D

999
E

OG
D

999
E

9727517622
H
and outgoing

are printed)
05-12
C

09 :oo
B

234
F

00: 15:32
G
DlOO
J
07/03/92

A
00: X:32
G
1234567890
I

08-05-12
C

09 :oo

B
102885167537000
H
DlOO
J

Note 1:

Example number 4, above, is the SMDR output format when the incoming caller hangs up first.
If the called party hangs up first, the SMDR output information
is reversed.

Note 2:

A - K are the printout item numbers. The temporary station number is 999.
Refer to Figure 2-60 - SMDR Print Formats Item Numbers.
Figure 2-59

2-92

SMDR Print Formats

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

The following

provides an explanation

A.

Start
07
03
92

B.

Start Time:
09 = hour
03 = minute

C.

Trunk Information:
OS-0508 = Route Advance Block
05 = TrunkGroup
12 = Trunk Number

D.

Type
IC
OG
ICC
OGC
IT
OT
ITC
OTC

E.

F.

Date:
= month
= day
= year

of
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Transferred
Station Number:
This number depends on whether
Programming.
CallDuration:
00: 15:32
00 = hour
15 = minute
32 = seconds

H.

Number

number

12

Call
Call

the system is set as 2-, 3-, or 4-digit station number

in System

234
the system is set as 2-, 3-, or 4-digit station number

in System

102885167537OOO(outgoingcalI)
Caller ID: 972 7517622 (incoming
of characters is 24.

call)

Account Code Entry:
1234567890
Maximum number of characters is 16.
Forced

Account

Code:

A1234567890

If Account Code and Forced Account Code are entered, SMDR Prints:
Maximum
J.

Station

number
Number

Maximum
K.

1998

09:oo

12 3
Station Number:
This number depends on whether
Programming.

Maximum

February

of each item that appears on the SMDR printout.

Call:
Incoming Call
Outgoing Call
Conference on Incoming Call
Conference on Outgoing Call
Transferred Incoming Call
Transferred Outgoing Call
Conference on Transferred Incoming
Conference on Transferred Outgoing

Dialed:

II Advanced

07/03/92

G.

I.

1201Level II/Level

LCR
LCR =

number

12345678$JO

Al234567890

of characters is 13.
of the DISA Caller
of characters is 4.

Least Cost Routing
Figure 2-60

Electra Professional

120

SMDR Print Formats Item Numbers

2-93

4.4.5

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

The MIF-F(L)-10
KTU allows the connection of a personal computer to perform
System Programming
and up/down loading of System Data, provides Station
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) to be output via the RS-232 cable to a serial
printer, provides Least Cost Routing (LCR) ability, and supports scroll and dial
out using Caller ID.
Only one MIF-F(L)-10
KTU can be installed in either system. Refer to the
Electra Professional 12WLevel II/Level II Advanced Least Cost Routing Manual
(included with the Electra Professional lBO/Level II/Level II Advanced Least
Cost Routing software) for LCR instructions.
Refer to the Electra Professional
lBO/Level IVLevel II Advanced System Program Technician Manual (included
with the Electra Professional
System Program Technician
software) for
programming
instructions using a PC.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(L)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is flashing, the MIF is exchanging data communications
with the
system CPU. When the red LED3 is on, the SMDR function is outputting
a call
record. Refer to Figure 2-61 - MIF-F(L)-10
KTU Switch Layout. Switch MB is
the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Also refer to Table 2-30 - MIF-F(L)-10 KTU
Switch (SW3) Settings for PC and MNP Modem Connections,
Table 2-31
- MIF-F(L)-10
KTU Switch (SWU Settings for Printers, Table 2-32 - MIF-F(L)10 KTU - DTE PC or Printer Connections, Table 2-33 - MIF-F(L)-10
KTU - DCE
MNP Modem Connections.

2-94

Electra Professional

120

‘:
,i

Battery
Backup

RAM-F(

Bat&
Swil

Backup

Pm

)-1 1 UNIT

MB

SW3

SW4

ON
OFF
123

456

76

123

456

78

\

DIP Switch
(Printer)

.

DIP Switch
(Personal
Computer/Modem)

CN7

\

/
2-Pin

MIF Cable

Connector

Figure 2-61

Electra Professional

120

Connection

Cable
Connection
(only for PC or
Modem)

(For Modem)

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch Layout

2-95

Table 2-30

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch (SW3) Settings

for PC and MNP Modem Connections
‘..

Switch
Position
(SW3)

2-96

ON/OFF
Setting

.’

Description

1

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Connection to CN7
0: PC Direct
1: MNP Modem Connected

2

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

3

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

4

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

5

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Parity and Stop Bits:

6

OFF:
ON:

0
1

OFF:
ON:

0
1

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Baud Rates:

Electra

Professional

120

O/Level II/Level

Table 2-31
Switch
Position
(SW4)

1

120

Description

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Mode Setting:
0: Operation Mode
1: Test Mode:
Note:
Operation of MIF stops when set
to the test mode.

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Data Bits (RS-232C for Printer)
0: a-bit
1: 7-bit

OFF:

0

ON:

1

Parity

and Stop Bits:
sw4-5

SW4-6

Parity

Stop

Bits

0

0

None

2

OFF:

0

1

0

None

1

ON:

1

0

1

Even

1

1

1

Odd

1

sw4-7

SW4-8

RS-232C

0

0

4800

1

0

2400 bps

0

1

1200 bps

1

1

300 bps

0
1

OFF:

0

ON:

1

1998

KTU Switch (SW4) Settings for Printers

ON/OFF
Setting

OFF:
ON:

Electra Professional

MIF-F(L)-10

Februarv

II Advanced

Baud Rates:

bps

2-97

Table 2-32
MIF (CN7 & CN8)

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU - DTE PC or Printer

Straight
RS-232
Cable

MIF Cable
Assembly

--,

Connections
PC or Printer

->

CTS(CS)

6

t

4

(RS)RTS

4

RTS(RS)

3

4

5

(CSXTS

5

DTR(ER)

7

4

6

(DR)DSR

6

SG(SG)

8

---_--

7

(SGEG

7

DSR(DR)

2

t

20

(ER)DTR

20

t

8

(CD)DCD

8

DCD(CN10)
Note:

The arrows show the direction

Table 2-33

MIF-F(L)-10

MIF (CN7)

Note:

2-98

The arrows show the direction

of data flow during operation.

KTU - DCE MNP Modem Connections
MIF Cable
Assembly

Reverse
RS-232
Cable

MNP Modem

of data flow during operation.

Electra Professional

120

Februarv

s

1998

Installation
The MIF-F(L)-10 KTU can be installed into an Option Slot (OP) or into one of
- IF4/OP4), in the ESF-H-10 KSU.
the four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
This KTU is shipped with two cable assemblies (MIF cable assembly). One end
The other end of the cable
of each cable has an RJ45 (&pin) connector.
terminates at an RS-232 connector.
This connector must be mounted in the
KSU. Refer to Figure 2-62 - Conn+cting the MIF Cable Assembly and the MIFF(L)-10 KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU.

Figure 2-62

Electra Professional

120

Connecting the MIF Cable.Assembly
to the ESF-H-10 KSU

and the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

2-99

Printer

Connection

Required

for SMDR

Equipment:

1.

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU with the NEC provided MDF Cable Assembly

2.

RS-232 Straight

3.

Standard

>
Ad

Cable

Printer

To install:
1.

Set SW4 DIP switch on the MIF-F(L)-10

2.

Install

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN8 on the MIF-F(L)-10 KTU and the
KSU. Refer to Figure 2-62 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly and the
MIF-F(L)-10 KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the standard

5.

Turn the MB switch on the MIF-F(L)-10

6.

Program Memory Blocks:
13,14,25, and 26.

the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU to adjust for the printer.

KTU into the KSU.

printer

using

the straight

System Mode

RS-232 cable.

KTU to the ON position.
(LKl)

SMDR/LCR

(LK5) No. 02,

PC or MNP Class 5 Modem Connection for Electra Professional
II/Level II Advanced Svstem Program Technician Software:
The information
given in this section is a basic
Programming
using a PC. For specific information,
Professional
lBO/Level IVLevel II Advanced
System
Manual (included with the Electra Professional 12OILevel
System Technician software).

120/Level

overview
of System
refer to the Electra
Program
Technician
II/Level II Advanced

Required Equipment:
1.

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU with NEC provided MIF Cable Assembly

2.

RS-232 straight

cable (for direct connection)

or reverse cable (for remote

CoMection)

3.

IBM or IBM-compatible
higher

PC with 286 or higher

4.

NEC Electra Professional
Technician Software.

5.

Standard dot matrix
station labels)

6.

MNP Modem Class 5 (required for remote connection)

12O/Level II/Level

printer

(if required

and MS-DOS Version
II Advanced

for printing

3.3 or

System Program

job specifications

or

To install:

2-100

1.

Set SW3 DIP switch on the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU to adjust for a PC or modem.

2.

Install the MIF-F(L)-10

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN7 and CNlO on the MIF-F(L)-10
KTU and the KSU. Refer to Figure 2-62 - Connecting the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(L)-10 KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the PC using a straight
using a reverse RS-232 cable.

5.

Place the MB switch on the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU into the KSU.

RS-232 cable or connect the MNP modem
KTU to ON.

Electra Professional

120

4.4.6

MIF-F(A)-

10 KTU

The MIF-F(A)-10

KTU allows an interface

to an MIS (ACD) temird.

Only one MIF-F(A)-10 KTU can be installed.
Refer to the Electra Professional
lZO/Level II/Level IIAdvanced
Automatic Call Distribution
Manual for detailed
instructions for the MIF-F(A)-10 KTU.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, the MIF is exchanging
data communications
with the
system CPU. Refer to Figure 2-63 - MIF-F(A)-10
KTU Switch Layout, Table 234 - MIF-F(A)-10
KTU Switch (SW31 Settings for PC Connection, and Table 235 - MIF-F(A)-10
KTU - DTE PC Connections.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF
control for this KTU.

Battery

Battery
Backup
/

/(Green)
ON

0’
-

MB

OFF

ON

ON

OFf

OFF
123

456

78

123

456

78

’

\

I3 l-al
CNlO

(Not

Dip Switch
ujed for this

KTU.)

Dip Switch
(Personal
Computer
I Modem)
Cable
Connection

CNB

/

(z$+;fpr

IQI

Figure 2-63

Electra Professional

120

MIF-F(A)-

10 KTU Switch Layout

2-101

Table 2-34

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU Switch (SW3) Settings

for PC Connection
‘\

Description

Forward

“j
1:

- No Answer

.:
.:

2-102

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

lSO/Level II/Level

Table 2-35

MIF-F(A)-10

Straight
RS-232
Cable

PC or Printer

1

(FG)FG

1

-------

1

(FG)FG

1 RXD(RD)

5

c

2

(SD)TXD

2

--- <---

2

(SD)TXD

ITXD(SD)

4

+

3

(RD)RXD

3

--- > --_

3

(RD)RXD

1 CTS(CS)

6

t

4

(RS)RTS

4

--- < ---

‘4

(RS)RTS

IRTS(RS)

3

(CS)CTS

5 1 --->---

15

(CS)CTS

r- ~

+

DTR(ER)

7

+

6

(DR)DSR

6

--- >---

6

(DR)DSR

ISG(SG)

8

7

(SG)SG

7

e-_---v

7

(SG)SG

c

20

(ER)DTR

20

__-< ---

20 (ER)DTR

t

8

(CD)DCD

8

--- < ---

8

Note:

__----

I5

The arrows show the direction

1998

KTU - DTE PC Connections

MIF Cable
Assembly
-_--_-

Februarv

II Advanced

of data fiow during

(CD)DCD

operation.

Installation
The MIF-F(A)-10
KTU can be installed into an Option Slot (OP) or into one of
the four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
- IF4/OP4), in the fast two ESF-H-10
KSUs. The MIF-F(4)-10 KTU is shipped with two cable assemblies (MIF cable
assembly). One end of each cable has an RJ45 (8-pin) connector. The other end
of the cable terminates
at an RS-232 connector.
This connector must be
mounted on the KSU.
Refer to Figure 2-64 - Connecting the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU to the ESF-H-10 KSU.

Electra Professional

120

2-103

-Februar

Installation

1998

Service Manual

r/!

Figure 2-64

2-104

Connecting the MlF Cable Assembly and the MIF-F(A)-10
to the ESF-H-10 KSU

KTU

Electra Professional

120

MIS Terminal

Connection

for ACD:

Required Equipment:
1.

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU with NEC provided

2.

RS-232 Straight

3.

IBM or IBM compatible

MDF Cable Assembly

Cable
PC with 286 or higher

To install:

4.4.7

1.

Set SW3 DIP switch to adjust for the PC connection
KTU.

2.

Install the MIF-F(A)-10

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN7 and CNlO on the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU and the KSU. Refer to Figure 2-64 - Connecting the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(A)-10 KTU to the ESF-HB-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the MIS Terminal

5.

Turn the MB switch on the MIF-F(A)-10

6.

Program Memory Block(s): l-8-25, ACD Group Agent Assignment;
l-12-00, ACD Group Pilot Number Assignment;l-12-01,
ACD Group
Overflow Destination
Assignment;
and l-12-02, ACD Overflow Timer
Selection.

MIF-F(C)-10

on the MIF-F(A)-10

KTU into the KSU.

to use the straight

RS-232 cable.

KTU to the ON position.

KTU

The MIF-F(C)-10

KTU provides the Caller ID feature

Only one MIF-F(C)-10
Switch SettinPs/LED

KTU can be installed

in either system.

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(C)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, the MIF is exchanging
data communications
with the
system CPU. Refer to Figure 2-65 - MIF-F(C)-10 KTU Switch Layout. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU.

Electra Professional

120

2-105

Battery
Backup

,

Battery
Backup
Switch

wm

RAM-F(

)-11 UNIT
/

(Green)

0,

ON

MB

OFF Iill

SW3

SW4

ON
OFF
123

456

78

123

456

78

’

(Not

\

Dip Switch
used for this

Dip Switch
used forthis

(Not

KTU.)

KTU.)

Cable
Connection
lzl

l-al

CN 10

Figure 2-65

MIF-F(C)-10

Ct.484

CN7
\

(N$$-&;yr

CoZ!Fion
(Not used for
this KTU.)

KTU Switch Layout

Installation
The MIF-F(C)-10
KTU can be installed into an Option Slot (OP) or into one of
the four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
- IF4/OP4), in the ESF-H-10 KSU, or
first Expansion KSU. This KTU is shipped with two cable assemblies (MIF
cable assembly).
One end of each cable has an RJ45 @-pin) connector.
This
cable is not needed for Caller ID.

2-106

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual
4.4.8

Electra Professional
MIF-F(U)-10

1201Level II/Level

1998

KTU

The MIF-F(U)-10

KTU provides the Uniform

Only one MIF-F(U)-10
Note:

February

II Advanced

KTU can be installed

MIF-F(A)-10 KTU and MIF-F(U)-10
the same system.

Switch Settings/LED

Call Distribution

(UCD) feature.

in the system.
KTU cannot both be installed

in

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(U)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, the MIF is exchanging data communications
with the
system CPU. Refer to Figure 2-66 - MIF-F(U)-10
KTU Switch Layout.
Installation
The MIF-F(U)-10 KTU can be installed in an Option Slot COP) or in one of the
- IF4/OP4), of the first two ESF-H-10
four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
KSUs.

I
a

LED3

I’
/(Green)

l?
Ir&
I

SW3

MB

SW4

ON
OFF
123

456

78

123

45676

lzl la-l
CN 10
Figure 2-66

Electra Professional

120

MIF-F(U)-10

>

(Limited

CN8

-

CN7

-

Dip Switch
use with this

KTU.)

Cable
Connection
(Not used for
this KTU.)

KTU Switch Layout

2-107

SECTION

5

CABLE
5.1

CONNECTIONS
General

Information

5.1.1

Connection

Requirements
;

The KSU is connected with each of the Multiline
Terminals,
Single Line
Telephones, optional equipment, CO/PBX, DID, 4-wire E&M Tie lines (Types I
and V), and digital trunhs (TlIFTl) by a ‘separate twisted-pair
cable through the
MDF.
The 4wire E&M Tie lines are Tl/FTl
lines and require multiple
twisted-pair
cabling.
51.2

Cabling Precautions
When selecting cables and the MDF, future expansion or assignment changes
should be given due consideration.
Avoid running cables in the following
places:

5.2

Wiring
52.1

0

A place exposed to wind or rain [except the LLT-F(BG)-10

0

A place near heat radiating
equipment
or where
covering could be affected by gases and chemicals.

0

An unstable

Between

KTUI.

the quality

of PVC

place subject to vibration.

the KSU and the MDF

KSU Cables
The KSU is equipped with two MDF Cable Assemblies. NEC recommends that
the MDF Cable Assembly be used to connect the Multiline
Terminals, Single
Line Telephones (except PFT), CO/PBX, and DID lines. Refer to Figure 2-67 MDF
Cable
Assembly
Diagram
and
Table
2-36
- Connection
Information/Connection
and Port Relationships.
When installing 4-wire E&M
Tie lines, Single Line Telephones with PFT, and other optional equipment with
the ECR-F-11 KTU, NEC provides the connector; however, the cabling must be
locally provided.
Refer to Section 5.2.2 - Connecting
Cables to Special
Connectors.

2-108

Electra Professional

120

.: .’

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv

1998

nR=A

3

25-pair

cable

CABLE COLORS

Figure 2-67

Electra Professional

120

MDF Cable Assembly

Diagram

2-109

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional
Table 2-36

nectars

A

II Advanced

Information/Connection

Installation

Service Manual

and Port Relationships

Multiline Terminals, Attendant
Add-On Console, SLT Adaptor, or
DigitalVoice
Mail

-2

CO&

Connection

12OKevel II/Level

No.

Cable

Cable

FunCclOnS

‘i,

C;aoIe

b”
Line

26
1

WH-BL
BL-WH

BK
YIJ

GN
RD

R
T

GN
&II

T
R

27
2

WH-OR
OR-WH

BK
n

GN

RD

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

28

WI-I-GN

BK

GN

R

GN

T

(z=&
0

Did,fim
LLT

T
R

D’lJ

./

T
R

B

D

E

F

2-110

Note 1:

SLI PFT required assembly
of one I-position
connector
PFT connection.
Refer to Section 4.3.2.1Power Failure

by the installer.
Only the first
Backup
for connector
assembly.

Note 2:

The TLI-F(P)-10
Refer to Section

KTU

KTU,
5.2.3

BRT-F(4)-10
KTU,
-Outside
Lines.

and ECR-F-11

require

assembly

two

channels

provide

for
::.

of the connectors

by the

installer.

Electra Professional

,,i

120

Installation

Service Manual
5.2.2

Electra Professional
Connecting

lSO/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Febv

1998

Cables to Special Connectors

If installing a TLI-F(B)-10 KTU, ECR-F-11 KTU and/or an SLI-F@G)-21 KTU
with PFT, the cables must be connected to the provided connectors, in the KTU
packing box. The following instructions explain this procedure.
1.

Cut the four cables the same length and insert them into the connector.
Ensure that all four cables have been inserted all the way to the end of the
cover. Refer to Figure 2-68 - Attaching the Cables to the Connector.

Make sure that no burrs are left
behind on the cut ends.

Special Connector
Cover
Cover End

&h

Cable

Adaptable

ICT Cable

0.50 mm.
0.65 mm.

Figure 2-68

Electra Professional

120

Attaching

Cable

0.80 mm.
1.20mm.

+O

the Cables to the Connector

2-111

2.

Lightly hold the connecter with the pliers. In this case, make sure that the
crimping portion is held between the lower portion of the jaws of the plier.
Refer to Figure 2-69- Holding the Connector with the Pliers.

Wrong Way

Figure 2-69

3.

Holding

Right Way

the Connector

with the Pliers

Squeeze the pliers to crimp the cables. If the cover is loose, press the cover
again with the pliers.
Note:

If sufficient pressure cannot be applied when the screw of the
pliers is in the center position, change the position of the screw
that allows the jaws of the pliers to close. Be careful when
squeezing the hands of the pliers; excessive pressure could cause
damage to the connector. Refer to Figure 2-70 - Positioning the
Screw of the Pliers.

Screw

Figure 2-70

2-112

Positioning

in

center

positior

the Screw of the Pliers

Electra Professional

_.

120

Installation

Service Manual
5.2.3

Electra Professional

120ILevel II/Level

February

II Advanced

1998

Outside Lines
The FCC authorized connector for the connection of CO lines is an RJBlX. The
CO lines are connected in sequence in this termination
block. Therefore, the
lines must be ordered in the appearance order best suited to the user. Refer to
Table 2-36 - Connection
Information/Connection
& Port Relationships
for
information
about the MDF Connector Assembly Cable positions, the cable
number, and lead functions.
Ground Start and/or Loop Start, Loop Dial, DID, 4-wire E&M Tie lines (Types I
and V), and Tl can be connected to this system. Using only twisted-pair wiring
to crossconnect the lines from the RJ21X termination
block to the MDF is
recommended.
Half-tapping
or parallel
to the system.
5.2.3.1

TLI-F(B)-10

connections

KTU Cable Connections

Channel

Electra Professional

120

must not be used on outside lines connected

Pins

Note 1:

TLI-F(B)-10 KTU contains
assembly by the installer.

one, 4-position

connector

for

Note 2:

The
six NEC-provided
4-position-connector
cables
CANNOT be used to support this KTU. Refer to Figure 267 - MDF Cable Assembly Diagram.

Note 3:

Connector pins l-16 are counted from the bottom to the
top of the KTU when it is installed into an interface slot.

2-113

5.2.3.2

ECR-F-11

KTU Cable Connections

External

Paging - Zone C

External

Paging - 2 one B

External

Paging - Zone A

1RM
1RC

Note 1: ECR-F-11 KTU contains
two RCA plugs.

one, 4-position

connector

and

Note 2: The six NEC-provided
4-position-connector
cables
CANNOT be used to support this KTU. Refer to Figure
2-67 - MDF Cable Assembly Diagram.
Note 3: Connector pins 1 -16 are counted from the bottom to the
top of the KTU when it is installed in an interface slot.
Note 4: External
provided.
Note 5: External

speakers

and

amplifiers

must

be locally

speakers must be 600 S2.

..
._ .’

2-114

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Februarv

Electrrd
5.2.3.3

DTI-F(

j-10 KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

1998

KTU Cable Connections

To install
the cable between
the
DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU:

TlLFTl

trunk

and

the

1.

Connect the Tl/FTl trunk to the MDF.
2-71- MDF Trunk Connection.

2.

Connect this cable from the MDF to the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU by twisted-pair
cable. Refer to Figure 2 -71
- MDF Trunk Connection.

I

t

DTI-F(

1

j-10 KTU

I

I

I
I

1

t

1

1

I

Refer to Figure

DTI-F(A)-20
I

1

I
I

KTU

TA

6
7
8

16

Note 1: The maximum distance from the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU to CSU is 655 feet, using 22 AWG.
Note 2: CSU is recommended
for maintenance
(loop back or
alarm function) or surge protection. The customer needs
to purchase and install the CSU.

--------

r....q
.
.

--------

DTI i
..
..
..
...
..
-....a

csu
csu
RB 4)
Rf3
4)--------------- itRB
itRB

I

Maximum

655 feet

Figure 2-71

Electra Professional

120

(200 meters)

MDF Trunk

Connection

2-115

5.2.3.4

SLI-F@G)-21

KTU Cable Connections
Channel

Pins
t

5.2.4

Modular

16

1

T4

1

Note 1:

SLI-F@G)-21 KTU contains
providing eight channels.

Note 2:

Channels 1 and 2 can be used for PFT. If PFT is to be
used, the six NEC-provided
4-position connector cables
CANNOT
be used for channels l- 4. However, they
can be used for channels 5 - 8. Refer to Section 4.3.2.1
- Power Failure Backup.

Terminal

Connections

two, 4-position

for Electra Professional

Multiline

connectors

Terminals

When connecting Multiline
Terminals,
Attendant
Add-On Consoles, or SLT
Adapters to the MDF or IDF, individually
twisted l-pair cabling must be used.
Information/Connection
and Port
Refer to Table
2-36 - Connection
Relationships
for lead functions.
Refer to Figure 2-72 - Modular Terminal for
Connection of Electra Professional Multiline
Terminals and Attendant
Add-On
Consoles for station modular jack (RX 3CW) connection.

STATION

Figure 2-72

2-116

Modular
Multiline

Terminal
Terminals

for Connection
and Attendant

of Electra Professional
Add-On Consoles

Electra Professional

120

5.2.5

Modular

Terminal

Connections

for Electra Elite Multiline

Terminals

When connecting Multiline
Terminals, Attendant
Add-On Consoles, or SLT
Adapters to the MDF or IDF, individually
twisted l-pair cabling must be used.
Information/Connection
and Port
Refer to Table 2-36 - Connection
Relationships
for lead functions.
Refer to Figure Z-73 - Modular Terminal for
Connection
of Electra Elite Multiline
Terminals
and Attendant
Add-On
Consoles for station modular jack (RJ13CiW) connection.

STATION

Figure 2-73

Modular Terminal for Connection
Terminals and Attendant Add-On

of Electra
Consoles

Elite Multiline

One-pair cabling is required; twisted pair cabling is recommended.
Refer to
Table 2-36 - Connection Information/Connection
and Port Relationships for lead
functions. Refer to Figure 2-74 - Simplified Schematic of Single Line Telephone
Connection for station termination.

STATION

CABLE
R (BIN

T-frI

,

SINGLE

Figure 2-74

Electra Professional

120

Simplified

LINE

TELEPHONE

Schematic of Single Line Telephone

Connection

2-117

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12OILevel II/Level

Installation

II Advanced

For additional
CO line connections to additional
similar crossconnections should be made.

Service Manual

Single

Line

Telephones,

If dialing during power failure is required, Single Line Telephones should be
equipped with DP/DTMF dialing to match the outside lines. If trunks are
Ground Start, Single Line Telephones must be equipped with a ground button.
When Single Line Telephones are installed, they can operate as power failure
Refer to Figure 2-75 telephones,
by crossconnection
on the MDF.
Crossconnection of Single Line Telephones.
Note:

Single Line Telephones used for Power Failure
supported by an SLI-F@G)-21 KTU.

co3
TIP RING e_____)

Figure 2-75
5.2.6

Modular Terminations
Professional System.
Refer to Figure

SLI-F@G)

When Connecting

2-76 Simplified

BRT-F(4)-10

must be

$g

PT d-------PR +-------

Crossconnection

Transfer

TIP
RING

of Single Line Telephones

BRI (ISDN)

Trunks

to the Electra

Schematic for BRI Connection.

KTU

Telco

cl

Telco

Modular

MODULAR

JACK

Yellow

3FtAx
2 TBX

RJ45

1TAX

2-118

Simplified

-

Black

4 RBX

Figure 2-76

Jack

Schematic

for BRI Connection

Electra Professional

120

SECTION

6

OPTIONAL

EQUIPMENT

General

6.1

CONNECTION

Information

The system can support the following:
a
0
0
6.2

External
External
External

Music

Music On Hold
Paging
Tone Ring/Night

On Hold/Station

Chime

Background

Music

Provision has been made to allow connection of a locally provided external music source
to provide Music On Hold (MOH) for held calls and Station Background Music (BGM).
(Station Background Music is available with Series 500 or higher software.)

6.2.1

Music On Hold
Music source input is made using the MOH jack located on the CPU-F( )-20
KTU.
For music source input level and impedance,
refer to Section
l.l2,1- Music On Hold/Station
Background Music (via CPU), in this chapter.
To install:
1.

On the cable to be connected to the MOH jack (12 inches from the plug
end), make a slit in the cable insulation approximately
l-1/2 inches long.
Take special care not to cut into the shield wire and inner wire
insulation.

2.

Make a circular

3.

Pull the cut insulation from the cable to expose the shield for the length of
the slit and cut the insulation off.

4.

Bend the cable near the middle of the exposed shield and separate the
shield from the inner insulation in preparation
for soldering.
Refer to
Figure 2-77 - MOH Cable Shield Ground Exposed.

cut in the cable insulation

Figure 2-77

5.

Electra Professional

120

at one end of the slit.

MOH Cable Shield Ground Exposed

Connect a ring tongue connector at one end opf a a ‘I-inch length
AWG stranded wire.

of 20-24

2-119

Strip a l/2 inch of insulation from the other end of the 7-inch wire. Solder
this end to the shield previously exposed in step 3. Place tape around this
connection to prevent possible short circuits.

6.

7.

Connect the plug end into the CPU-F(
Figure 2-78 - Music Source Connection.

CPU

P,

MOH

-

IN
I

I

To MOH
Source

Cable

output

Music

J

L

Refer to

Source

POW3
Terminal

I

Music Source Connection

Route the cable down and to the right side of the KSU to avoid interference
with the insertion and the removal of KTUs. Exit the other end of the
cable at the right rear side of the KSU. Refer to Figure 2-79 - MOH Cable
Route.

*

L

Figure 2-79

2-120

Shielded

MOH jack.

I

Figure 2-78

8.

Audio

j-20 KTU

MOH Cable Route

Electra Professional

120

---,.‘,
,-,/:

6.2.2

Station Background

Music

Station Background Music can be provided by using a COI-F( j-20 KTU or a
COI-F( j-30 KTU. When station Background Music is provided using the COI-F
KTU, Music On Hold and Station Background Music are separated and are
provided by two independent sources.
To install Background
1.

In Memory
Input.

2.

Connect a locally provided Valcom V-9941A or equivalent device to the
CO1 Background Music port. Refer to the audio specifications in section
1.12.2 - Station Background Music via COI-F( j-20 KTU or COI-F( j-30
KTU.

3.

Connect a locally provided Background Music source to the V-9941A (or
equivalent device). Refer to Figure 2-80 - Music Source Connection and to
Table 2-36 - Connection Information/Connection
and Port Relationships.

)-20

KTU

i

Block l-l-79,

BGM Port Assignment,

AudioShieldedCable
A

-24 Vdc

=

?

f-

COI-F( 7-30 KTU

R

set the CO1 port to BGM

The Valcom V-9941A is a device that provides: loop connect
referred to as talk battery) to the CO1 KTU, couples the
source onto the loop current, and isolates the loop current
the music source. Any device that fits this criteria along
impedance of the C 01 KTU and music source is suitable.

Note:

co,-F(

Music using a COI-F KTU:

Music

(also
audio
from
with

Source

J

J

Audio

Shielded

Cable

output

I

I
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Screw Terminals
Valcom V-9941 A
(or equivalent device)

Figure 2-80

Electra Professional

120

Music Source Connection

2-121

Februarv

1998

Electra
6.3

External

Professional

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Paging

The ECR-F-11 KTU provides audio output for External Paging
JK2 on the ECR-F-11 KTU) and three contact closures (one
paging with Meet-Me Answer. These contacts are labeled 1RC
3RC and 3RM. Refer to Section 5.2.3.2 - ECR-F-11 KTU
maximum of one ECR-F-11 KTU can be installed in a system
paging zones.

(available at phone jack
per zone) for use in zone
and lRM, 2RC and 2RM,
Cable Connections.
A
providing a total of three

The audio output must be connected to a locally provided amplifier and speaker(s), that
are connected to the output of the amplifier.
If the amplifier is a 2-way amplifier, 2-way
paging is available.
Shielded audio cable should be used for external paging audio
connections.
This audio cable, from JK2 to the external amplifier,
should be wrapped
three turns around a ferrite core. For connection information
to a locally provided
amplifier, refer to Figure 2-81 - Connecting ExternaI Paging. For external paging audio
output level and impedance, refer to section 1.12 - External Equipment Interface, in this
chapter.
When External Paging is answered by Meet-Me Answer, the external paging audio
circuit and the control circuits in the ECR-F-11 KTU are released to allow access for
another page.

2-122

Electra Professional

120

.
,,:

Zone

ECR-F-11 KTU

A

1 RC
7

B

nl

1 RM
Zone

B

2 RC

n’

2RM
Zone

C

n3
3RM

\
1
/\
4

J-j”

External
Amplifier

Paging

I

Night Chime

j--J’
I

P
6

External Tone Ringer

Impedance
600 i-2

JK2 2-Way Voice Path
for Paging

(wrap

Ferrite
Core
cable 3 turns)

Figure 2-81

Electra Professional

120

Connecting

External

Paging

2-123

6.4

External

Tone Ring/Night

Chime

The
External Tone Ring/Night
Chime is available when the ECR-F-11 KTU is installed.
ECR-F-11 KTU provides a continuous
tone source for external tone ringing.
The
These patterns are selected in
external tone can be set to any of five ringing patterns.
System Programming.
Refer to Chapter 5 - Programming,
Manual System Mode (LKl),
ESP (LK7) No. 07, in this manual.
The audio output for external tone .ringing appears at the phone jack JKl on the
ECR-F-11 KTU. The level is adjustable with the volume control VRl on the ECR-F-11
KTU.
Shielded-audio cable is required for this feature. The ECR-F-11 KTU provides five relay
contacts for External Tone Ring/Night
Chime. Refer to Section 5.2.3.2 - ECR-F-11 KTU
Cable Connections.
These contacts are labeled as follows:

4RC and 4RM

}

Night Chime

5RC and 5RM
6RC and 6RM
External

Tone Ring

7RC and 7RM
8RC and 8RM

Refer to Figure 2-82 - Connecting External
Tone Ring/Night
Chime for connecting
locally provided amplifiers
and speakers and Section 1.12 - External
Equipment
Interface for audio output specifications.

2-124

Electra Professional

120

..i,
:?
.,..;”

Installation

Service Manual

Electra

Professional

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv

1998

ECR-F-11 KTU

4n

2RC
2RM

f)
Zone

C

11/\/
b
L

Paging

n3

3RM

I

4

External
Amplifier

Night Chime

26
1
External Tone Ringer

Impedance
600 i-2

JK2 2-Way Voice Path
for Paging

(wrap

Ferrite
Core
cable 3 turns)

Figure 2-82

Electra Professional

120

Connecting

External

Tone Ring/Night

Chime

2-125

SECTION

LCD INDICATIONS

7

TABLE
Table 2-37

Display
12:24 AM WED 10

Location

I

I

All Stations with
LCD

FWD 100->
[ I
ALL FWD CANCLD
FWD

1 I

Originator

FWD RESET [ 1
BUSY lOO-->
[- I
FWD BUSY CANCLD
NOANS 100 - > r 1
FWDNA CAN&DFWDBNA> [ I
FWD BNA CNCL
BACK 13/r)
. . . . 33.99
. ....
MESSAGE

ALARM AM 00 : 00
ALARM PM 00 : 00
ALL ALARM CANCLD
SET TIME REMINDER
DND SET
SAVE & REPEAT
INT ALL PAGE

I

Clock/Calendar

Set Call Forward - All Calls
Cancel DNDXall
Forward - All Calls System-Wide
Cancel DND/Call Forward - All Calls At Individual
Stations
Set Call Forward - All Calls From Forward To
Extension
Reset Call Forward - All Calls From Forward To
Extension
Set Call Forward - Busy
Cancel Call Forward - Busy
Set Call Forward - No Answer
Cancel Call Forward - No Answer
1Set Call Forward Busy - No Answer
Cancel Call Forward Busy - No Answer
Set Customized Message
Cancel Customized Message System-Wide or From
Individual Station
Night Mode Switch
Reset Night Mode
Set Night Mode For Tenant
Cancel Callback System-Wide
Reset FNC LED
Telephone Password (1)
1Telephone Password (2)

I

CLEAR

NIGHT MODE SET
NIGHT MODE RESET
NT TENANT
CALLBACK
CANCLD
FNC LAMP OFF
CURRENT PASSWORD ?
NEW PASSWORD ?

Definition

I

I

CANCL

FWDSET

LCD Indications

Originator
1Originator

Originator
Originator
Originator

Set Alarm For A.M.
Set Alarm For P.M.
Cancel Alarm System-Wide
Set Timed Alarm for SLT
Set Do Not Disturb
Save and Repeat Number Is Stored
Internal All Zone Paging
(continued

2-126

Electia

on next page)

Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

Location

Display
INT PAGE [ A I.
TENT [ 1
SPKR [Al

Originator

TRF SET CO =
TRF CNCL CO =
TRF TO CO =
TRNS TO N/A
00 : EMPTY
00: 0123456789
NO SMDR
ERROR
BUSY
PRINTER TROUBLE
SPKR [A,B,Cl
LINE IDLE
TRUNK QUE SET
LNR[#l/SPD[
1
TRUNK QUE CANCLD
RCL: 01.02.03.04
120<-[llol
TRANSF
120= =[llOl
TRANSF
OVD>[
1
OVD->CO[
1
100 < - TIE LNXX
100 < - DID LNXX
DATA ENTRY
Tl ALARM
MUSIC SET
MUSIC RESET
CO 1 LAYER 1 DOWN
CO 1 LAYER 2 DOWN
CO 1 SPID ERROR

Originator
Originator
Destination

Port 01 and 02
Originator
Originator
Port 01
Port 01
Port 01
Port 01

CO 1 SLIP ERROR

Electra Professional

Originator
Originator
Originator

120

Februarv

12O/Level H/Level II Advanced

1998

Definition
Group Paging
Tenant Paging
External Speaker
Set Automatic Tandem Trunk

Transfer

IN/OUT

Reset Automatic Tandem Trunk Transfer
Set or Confirm Transferred Trunk of Automatic
Tandem Trunk Transfer
Transfer Trunk Not Assigned
No Speed Dial Number Entered
Speed Dial Number Confirmation
Station Message Detail Recording Not Available
Error Message
Busy Message
Printer Problems
External All Paging
Trunk Queuing; CO/PBX Trunk Idle
Trunk Queuing Set
Press LNR/SPD Key
Trunk Queue Canceled
Hold Recall
Ring Transfer
Automatic Ring Transfer
Barge-In On.CO/PBX Line (1)
Barge-In On CO/PBX Line (21
Tie Line Answer
DID Answer
Enter Data Using System Programming
Tl Transmission Difficulty
Background Music Enabled
:
Background Muisc Disabled
ISDN Trunk Ll Down Difficulty
ISDN Trunk L2 Down DifScultv
ISDN Trunk SPID Error Difficulty
ISDN Trunk Asynchronous
Communication
Difficulty (More than 50 times)

2-127

SECTION

8

FEATURE

ACCESS

CODES

Some codes are set as system defaults and some codes have no default defined but are
The table is divided according to the status of the
programmable
in System Programming.
telephone. An explanation
of the notes column is listed below, these are referenced throughout
the table. Refer to Table 2-38 - Access Codes Tables.
Explanation

of Notes Column:

Installation:

Operates only on telephones

Single Line Only:
Single Line OK:

Operates only on Single Line Telephones.
Operates on Multiline Terminals or Single Line Telephones.

Note 1:

The controls in parentheses are not necessary for your own telephone
own tenant.
Operates only when the Speed Dial number is set to 2 digits (90 mode).

Note 2:
Note 3:

Enter the new values in the Access Code Table.
No system default is defined; this code must
Programming.

Note 4:

Table 2-38
When the telephone

Set Call Forward

is idle (handset

- All Calls

specified during installation.

be assigned

or

in System

Access Code Tables

is on-hook):

FNC + Dial 60 + Dial XXX

+ FNC

Installation

XXX = Station number where call is to be forwarded.

(continued

2-123

on next page)

Electra Professional

120

..i/
,,

Operation

Notes

FNC + Dial 61 -+ Dial XX + FNC

Installation

Function
Set Auto Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Mode

XX = Incoming

Trunk

Port

Number

(01 - 64;

00 = All Trunks)

Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
to Outside Mode

FNC + Dial 62 + Dial XX -+ FNC

Set Auto Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Outgoing Trunk

FNC + Dial 63 + Dial XX + Dial # + Dial YY --Y + FNC

XX = Incoming

Trunk

KX = Incoming
YY-Y

Port

Trunk

= Transfer

Port

Number

(01-64;

Number

Telephone

00 = All Trunks)

(01 - 64;

Number

Installation

Installation

00 = All Trunks)

(maximum.24

digits)

Confirm Transfer Number
for Auto Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer

FNC + Dial 64 -+ Dial XX

Cancel Call Forward
Calls by System

FNC -Dial68

-+ FNC

Installation

Cancel Do Not Disturb/Call
Forward - All Calls

FNC += Dial69

--, FNC

Installation

Set Customized
Display

FNC 4 Dial 70 + Dial * + Dial # + [ Dial XX:XX, YY:YY
4 FNC

- All

Message

XX = Trunk

Port

Number

FNC

4

Installation

(01-64)

1

* = SelectsDisplay
# = Sets

Display

XX:XX

= Date

YY:YY

= Time

Operations

of Return
of Return

enclosed in [ I are optional.

Cancel Customized
Message Display by System

FNC -+ Dial 78 + FNC

Cancel Customized
Message Display

FNC +

Set/Cancel Night Mode
Switch (System)

FNC + Dial 80 + FNC

Set Automated
AttendantJDISA

Dial79

Installation

+ FNC
Installation
Attendant
Only
Installation

FNC += Dial 81 + Dial XX + FNC
Mode

XX

= Incoming

Trunk

Port

Number

(01 -

64; 00 = All Trunks)

Installation

Cancel Automated
Attendant/DISA
Mode

FNC -+ Dial 82 + DialXX

+ FNC

XX

(01 - 64; 00 = All Truqks)

Set/Cancel
Mode

FNC --* Dial84
(Series 700 or Higher)

Installation
Attendant
Only

Set/Cancel Night Mode
Switch (Tenant)

FNC + Dial 85 3 Dial XX + FNC

Installation

Set/Cancel Weekend Mode
Switch (Tenant)

FNC

Set Relocation

XX

XX

= Incoming

= Tenant
4

= Tenant

Trunk

Port

Number

Dial 86
Number

Number

(00 - 47)
4

DialXX

4

FNC

Installation

(00 - 47)

(continued

Electra Professional

120

on nextpage)

2-129

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

120/Level

Music On/Off

Cancel Callback
System

Message by

Program System Speed Dial
Buffer Number

FNC + LNlUSPD
ZZ-Z
+ [HOLD
XXX

Installation

+ FNC
+ Dial XXX -+ Dial YYYY +
+Dial
xx-xl
+ FNC

Dial

Buffer

Number

(00 - 89 / 000 - 999)

(Series

100 - 450)

Buffer

Number

(00 - 79 IO00

(Series

500 or higher)

= Access

Operations

Code

(maximum
Number

of Other

=

Speed

Dial

(Series

4 digits)
(maximum

Party

Buffer

Dial

xx - x = Name

Operations

Buffer

of Other

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

Number

(80 - 99).

(Series

Party

Speed

Speed

Dial

Dial

(Series

digit.

500 or higher)

13 letters)

---, DialXXX

Buffer

Buffer

Number

Number

(00 - 89 ! 000 - 999)

(90 - 99).

Enter

(Series

100 - 450)

0 - 9 for last digit,

100 - 450)

+ DialXXX

XX

Number

Series

0 - 9 for last

Note 2

24 digits)

(maximum

FNC + LNRJSPD

= Speed

--, Dial

enclosed in [ I are optional.

CNF + LNR/SPD

=

13 letters)

+ Dial X X += Dial YYYY
-,Dialxx-xl
+FNC

= Access Code (maximum
4 digits)
Z = Telephone
Number
(maximum

=

24 digits)

(maximum

100 - 450)

Speed
YYYY
ZZ -

- 999)

enclosed in [ 1 are optional.

FNC + LNR/SPD
ZZ-Z
*[HOLD

XX

Installation

Dial

xx - x = Name

XX

Dial

Speed

ZZ - Z = Telephone

Number

Notes

= Speed

YYYY

Cancel System Speed Dial
Number

Service Manual

FNC + Dial 88 + FNC
FNC + Dial99

Confirm System Speed Dial
Number

Installation

FNC -+ Dial 26 3 FNC

Cancel FNC LED

Program Station Speed Dial
Buffer Number

II Advanced

Operation

Function
Background

II/Level

Dial

Buffer

(90 - 99).

3 FNC

Enter

0 - 9 for last

digit.

100 - 450

(continued

2-130

on nextpage)

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level II/Level

Operation

.Function
Confirm Last Number
Memory
Place a Call Using
Store & Repeat/Save
Repeat

Februarv

II Advanced

Dialed

CNF + LNR/SPD
LNIUSPD

1998

Notes

+ Dial *

+ Dial #

&

Set/Cancel Answer Preset
(Ringing Line Preference)

FNC + ANS

Last Number Dialed Memory
to a Station Speed Dial
Buffer Number

FNC + LNWSPD

+ Dial X X + LNRJSPD

XX

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

Number

(80 - 99).

(Series

= Speed

Dial

(Series

0 - 9 for last

Note 2

digit.

100 - 450)

Speed

Program Feature Access
Keys,(for DSWBLF)
(Series 100 - 450)

Buffer

+ FNC

Dial

Buffer

500 or higher)

FNC + LNWSPD + Feature AccessKey +
Dial 1 + Dial YYYY + [Dial 11 + FNC
YYYY

= Station

number

(2,3,

Installation
Note 2

or 4 digits)

Operations enclosed in [ I are optional (when the digit 1 is dialed,
the call is switched from Voice to Tone or from Tone to Voice).
Program Feature Access
Keys (for DSS/BLF)
(Series 500 or higher)

FNC + LNR/SPD ---, Feature Access Key 3 Dial 1 +=
Dial YYYY --, [Dial 11 + FNC
YYYY

= Station

number

(2,3,

Installation
Note 2

or 4 digits)

Operations enclosed in 1. I are optional (when the digit 1 is dialed,
the call is switched from Voice to Tone or from Tone to Voice).
Program Feature Access
Keys (for Station Speed Dial)

FNC + LNWSPD + Feature Access Key 3
Dial 0 + Dial Y + Dial ZZ - Z + [HOLD + Dial XX - X*3 3
FNC
Y = CO/F’BX

Access

ZZ - Z = Telephone
XX - X =

Name

Operations

Code

(maximum

Number
to be stored

4 digits)

to be stored
using

(maximum

the Character

16 digits).
Code

(maximum

13 characters).

enclosed in [ I are optional.
(continued

Electra Professional

120

Installation
Note 2

on nextpage)

2-131

Function

Operation

Program Feature Access
Keys (for Nesting Dial)

Notes

FNC + LNRBPD
+ Feature Access Key +
Dial 0 3 Dial Y + ANS -+ Dial ZZ + [ANS + ZZ (repeat
up to 3 timed1 + [HOLD + Dial XX - Xl 3 FNC
Y = COPBX Access Code (maximum 4 digits)
ZZ = System or Station Speed Dial Buffer Number (00 - 99)
XX - X = Name to be storedusing the Character Code (maximum

Operations
Program Feature Access
Keys (for Feature Access)

Installation
Note 2

- ‘.\

2

13 cbaractels).

enclosed in [ 1 are optional.

FNC + LNRJSPD + Feature Access Key +
Dial # + Dial YY + FNC

Installation
Note 2

YY = Feature Access Code

Confirm Feature Access Key

FNC + Feature Access Key

Note 2

Cancel Feature Access Key

FNC + LNWSPD

Note 2

Place a Call with Feature
Access Key

Press the Feature Access Key programmed
feature.

Program One-Touch
(for DSS/BLF)

FNC -+ LNRJSPD
[Dial 11 + FNC

Keys

+ FNC

+ One-Touch

Key

for the desired

Note 2

+ Dial 1 + Dial YYY +

YYY = Station number (2,3, or 4 digits)

Operations enclosed in 1 1 are optional (when the digit 1 is dialed,
the call is switched from Voice to Tone or from Tone to Voice).
Program One-Touch Keys
(for Station Speed Dial)

FNC + LNWSPD --, One-Touch
Dial ZZ - Z + FNC
Y = CO/PBX Access Code (maximum

Key

-+ Dial 0 + Dial Y +

4 digits)

Y = COPBX Access Code (maximum 4 digits)
ZZ = System or Station Speed Dial Buffer Number (00 - 99)

bntinued

on next page)

,’

2-132

Electra Professional

120

Operation

Function
FNC + LNRBPD
FNC

Program One-Touch Keys
(for Feature Access)

YY = Feature

Confirm

Access

+ One-TouchKey

Operation

4

Key { ---, FNC }

in { } is required

Cancel One-Touch Key

FNC

Place Call with One-Touch
Key

Press the One-Touch

4

+ Dial # + Dial YY

Code

FNC + One-Touch

One-Touch Key

Notes

LNIWPD

4

only if the arrow is displayed.

One-Touch Key
key programmed

4

FNC

for the desired feature.

L

While the extension is being seized (handset is lifted or the SPKR key is pressed
Note:
The default setting for the Access Codes are shown in this table.

and ICM lamp is lit):

-

Function

Operation

(Default)

I

Notes

Trunk

Group 1

Dial 9

CO/PBX
Trunk
(Outgoing)

Trunk

Group 2

Dial 8

Tie Trunk
(Outgoing)

Trunk

Group 3

Dial 70

Trunk Group 4

Dial 71

Trunk Group 5

Dial 72

Trunk Group 6

Dial 73

Trunk Group 7

Dial 74

Trunk Group 8

Dial 75

I
I

I
I

I
I

I
I

(continued

Electra Professional

120

I

on nextpage)

2-133

Februarv

Electra ProfessionalBO/Level

1998

H/Level II Advanced

Operation

Function

Installation

Service Manual

(Default)

Notes
Note 4

Call Pickup CO/PBX!Tie
Line for Another Tenant

Dial

fl q

Call Pickup Internal
Same Tenant

Dial

•I q

Note 4

Dial

q q

Note 4

Specify CO/PBX Line
Seizure

Dial

q •I + Dial XX

Note 4

Set Trunk

Dial 78 + Hang Up

Call Transfer
Tenant

in

in Same

Queuing

Queuing

Installation
Note 4
Installation
Note 4

Dial 79 += Hang Up

XX = Tenant Number

(00 - 47)

(continued

2-134

.,K

XX = CO/PBX Line Number (01 - 64)

Note: When busy tone is heard.
Cancel Trunk

‘x

Electra

on nextpage.)

Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level

II/Level

Operation

Function

Februarv

II Advanced

(Default)

Notes

Dial5

#

Dial

q q

Notes3&4

Dial

•I q

Notes3&4

DSS 1 Call

Dial

•I [3

Note 4

DSS 2 Call

Dial

•I EI

Note 4

Special Station Access
Code (00 - 23)

Dial

•I q

Note 4

Timed Alarm

Dial

•I q + Dial XXXX

XXXX

= Station

number

W:YY

= Time

(according

External
Trunk

Meet-Me
Group (9 - 32)

Route Advance

Timed Alarm
SLTs
Station
Set

(1 - 16)

Set at SLTs

Cancel at

Outgoing

Lockout

Station
Cancel

Outgoing

Lockout

q q + Dial XXXX

XXXX

= Station

Dial

00

Station Outgoing Lockout
Cancel from Attendant

00

Installation
Note 4

+ Dial 9 9 9 9 + Hang Up

-X

(maximum

10 digits)

X = Old Password

YY-

Y = New

10 digits)

+

(maximum

Password

Note 4

+ Hangup

+ DialXX-X

XX-

Installation
Note 4

+ Hangup

(maximum

•I q + Dial XXX

Dial

clock)

DialYY-Y
10 digits)

(maximum

Dial

[3 o + Dial XXXX

XXXX

= Station

Installation
Note4

+ Hangup

10 digits)

Installation
Note 4

+ Hangup

number

Installation

Dial 40 + Hang Up

Set Do Not Disturb
Set Call Forward
Calls

+ DialXX

= Password

Installation
Note 4

+ Hang Up

number

X = Password

Dial
XXX

Station Outgoing Lockout
Password Change

to 24-hour

Dial

XX-

+ Dial YYzYY

- All

XXXX

Cancel Call Forward
Calls/Do Not Disturb
Set Call Forward
Answer

Dial41

- All

- No

Cancel Call Forward
Answer
Set Forced/Verified
Account Code from
Attendant
Position

-No

+ Dial XXXX
= Station

number

Installation

+ Hangup

of forward

destination

Dial 42 + Hang Up

Installation

Dial

•I CI + Dial XXXX

Installation

XXXX

= Station

Dial

•I o + Hang Up

Dial

q o + Dial XXX +

number

of forward

XXX

= Forced

Account

Number

YYY

= Forced

Account

Code

destination

Installation
Installation
Note 4

Dial YYY --, ANS + Hang Up
001 - 500

(maximum

10 digits)

(continued

Electra Professional

120

1998

on nextpage)

2-135

cFeb

1998
.

9X

=

Speed

Dial

(Series
SpeedDial

9X

=

SpeedDial
(Series

Single Line Telephone

9X

=

SpeedDial

Buffer

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

0 - 9 for last

digit.

Buffer

Number

030 - 99).

(Series

Buffer

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

0 - 9 for last

digit.

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

0 - 9 for last

digit.

100 - 450)
500 or higher)

100 - 450)

Buffer

(Series

100 - 450)

= Tie

(24-hour

Single Line Telephone
XXzXX

clock

in 5 minute

increments)

(continued

2-136

on nextpage)

Electra Professional

120

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level II/Level

Operation

Function
FNC +

Barge-In by Station
Number

XXXX

XX

Transfer to Call Park System
Answer or Retrieve
Park - System

Call

Voice Prompt Message
(Record/Confirm/Erase)

X = Call

Trunk

Park

Number

Dial
’

Park

Number

Installation

(01 - 64) to be interrupted

(0 -

9)

(0 -

9)

•I •I 3 Dial X + Dial 1 + Dial Y + Dial
1

Z

Note 4

i 1 :rlL

=

3 = Erase

Y

=

Enter

Z

=
=

1 = Day
2 = Night

=

3 = WeekendMode

Automated

Attendant

Number

(1 - 8)

Made
Made

Dial q •I + Dial X + Dial 2 += Dial Y
x = 1 = Record
=

2 = confirm

=

3 = Erase

=

1 = Message

for Dial

Tone

2 = Message

for Call

Waiting

Note 4

Tone

Dial q q + Dial X + Dial 3
x = 1 = Record
=

2 = Confilm

=

3 = Erase

Note 4

/

13 •I 3 Dial XXXX 3 Dial YYYYY

XXXX

=

Station

number

YYYYY

=

Station

Password

Installation
Note 4
Series 700 01
Higher

to be exchanged

an extension:
Notes

Operation

Function

Callback

Number

FNC

Dial 4 # + Dial X

Dial

Set Relocation

Tone/Voice

to be interrupted

Dial 0

Call

While calling

Installation

+ FNC

Dial 4 * +. Dial X

Y

Delay Announcement
(Record/Confirm/Erase)

number

Notes

CNF + Dial * 3 Dial XX i

= CO/PBX

X = Call

Automated Attendant
Message
(Record/Confirm/Erase)

CNF + Dial XXXX

= Station

FNC +

Barge-In by Trunk
Number

Attendant

Februarv1998

II Advanced

Switching
Message

Handset Receive Volume

Dial 1
Dial #

Installation

FNC + Dial 2

Installation
(continued

Electra Professional

120

on nextpage)
2-137

Februar v 1998

Electra Professional201Level

While a call is waiting

(when

Function
Automatic

calling - an extension

Dial 1

Tone Override

Dial *

Callback Message

Dial #

Voice Over

Dial 6

and Call Waiting - Tone is heard):

FNC + Dial 1

Seized Outside Line
Number Display

FNC + Dial 3

Drop Key

FNC + Dial 5

Store and Repeat (Store)

FNC + Dial 7

Save and Repeat (Save)

FNC + Dial 9

Exclusive

FNC + Dial HOLD
FNC + Dial 6 *

Store/Save & Repeat
(Dial)

LNRSPD

Unsupervised

Press CNF (during conference)

Last Number
Account

Redial

Code Entry

Quick Transfer
Mail

to Voice

Note

I

Drop Trunk and Seize
Internal Line

Redial

I
I

ON/OFF

Automatic

I

Line:
I
Operation

Conference

Notes

Series 500 or
higher

I

Hold

I

Installation

Function
Microphone

Service Manual

Dial 7

to Voice

a COA?BX

Installation

Dial 0 -+ Hangup

Step Call

While seizing

II Advanced

Operation

I

Callback

Quick Transfer
Mail

II/Level

IFNC

+ Dial #

-+ LNRSPD

LNRSPD

Series 500 or
higher

(Speaker Mode)

+= Dial *

FNC + Dial 66

Series 300 or
higher

FNC + Dial 86

Series 500 or
I higher

Voice Over Split
(Whisper Page\
Group Listening

2-138

Speaker (during off-hook)

Electra Professional

120

CHAPTER
ELECTRA
LEVEL

PROFESSIONAL

II & LEVEL

HARDWARE

3

II ADVANCED

SPECIFICATIONS

AND INSTALLATION

I

ELECTRA

CHAPTER

3

LEVEL

II AND

PROFESSIONAL

HARDWARE

SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE

SECTION

1

SYSTEM
General Information

1.2

SystemBlockDiagram

1.3

System Control Capacities

1.4

CablingRequirements

1.5

Power Requirements

...............................................

.............................

PowerSupplyInputs

1.5.2

Power Supply Outputs Table

1.5.3

Power Consumption

1.5.4

Fuse Replacement

Network

.

..............

Table

.

.:. .....

Table

..

..

..

...............................

and Control Specifications

*.

3-1

. . . 3-4

. .. . ..

. . . 3-5

.. . . . .

. . . 3-5

.... ..

. . . 3-6

.............................

.............................

....

3-6

.*.*

3-6

....

3-7

....

3-7

....

3-7

. . _ . 3-8

.............................

.............................

................

.

.... ..

.............................

........................

.

. . . 3-2

.............................

...................

I .

.. . . . .

.............................

...............

and Dissipation

Conditions

.............................

....

3-8

....

3-8

1.8.1

Transmission

3-8

1.8.2

Network

......................................................................

3-8

1.8.3

Control

......................................................................

3-8

1.8.4

Telephones

.....................................................................

3-9

Dialing

Specifications

1.9.1

Dial Pulse Address Signaling

1.9.2

DTMF Address Signaling

Battery

Backup

...................................................................

..................................................................

3-9
3-9

....................................................

3-9

........................................................

3-10

1.10.1

......................................................................
System Backup ................................................................

1.10.2

Memory Backup

...............................................................

3-10

...............................................................

3-l 1

1.11

Weights

and Dimensions

1.12

External

Equipment

Chapter

.............................................

1.5.1

1.8

1.10

....................................................

Cabling Precautions

Outside Line Types

... . . . .

................................................

1.4.2

1.7

1.9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-l

...................................................

Cabling Specifications

Environmental

AND INSTALLATION

......................................................

1.4.1

1.6

II ADVANCED

OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATIONS

1.1

LEVEL

Interface

3-10

3-12

..........................................................

1.12.1

Music on Hold/Station

1.12.2

Station Background Music using COI-F ( j-20 KTU or COI-F ( j-30 KTU (Series 500 or
higher)
.....................................................................

3-12

1.12.3

External

Paging (Audio)

3-12

1.12.4

External

Tone Ringer/Night

3 - Table of Contents

Background

Music through

CPU (Series 500 or higher)

........................................................
Chime Output

.......................................

.......

3-12

3-12

i

sional120/Level

1.13

SECTION

SMDROutput

1.12.6
1.12.7

2.2

PC Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................

..

.

3-12

Relay Contact

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................

..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................

..

. 3-12
_ 3-13

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . . ..................

..

.

3-13

. . . . . ‘. . . . . ..................

..

.

3-14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................

..

.

3-15

Indications

1.13.2

Multiline

1.13.3

DSS/BLF LED Indications

Table

Terminal

HARDWARE

LED Flash Pattern
Table

REQUIREMENTS

General Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........

2.1.1

Programming

Stations

2.1.2

Attendant

. . . . . . . . .............

.. .. .

3-15

. . . . ........

. . . . . . .............

. . . ..

3-16

. . . . . . . . . . ........

. . . . . . .............

.. .....

3-16

. . . . . . . . _ . . . . . ........

. . . . . . . . .............

. . .. .

3-16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........

. . . . . . .............

. . . . .. .

3-21

Equipment

KTUs

KSU INSTALLATION

Site Preparation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~................

3-22

. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . ... . . . ..

3-22

and MDF/IDF

3.2.1

Precautionary

3.2.2

Site Survey

3.2.3

Site Limitations

3-15

. . . . . . . . , . . ........

Interface

3.2

. . . . .. .

3-15

2.2.2

GeneralInformation

. . . . . . ..

Construction

Information

3-22

............................................

3-22

.....................................................

3-22

...................................................................

3-22

3.2.4

...............................................................
Site Selection Conditions
.......................................................

3-23

3.2.5

MDF Construction

3-24

Installing

.............................................................

the Level II Key Service Unit (KSU)

3-25

...........................................

3.3.1

Basic KSU (ESF-SB-10 KSU)

3.3.2

Expansion

3.3.3

Opening the KSU Cover

3-26

3.3.4

Wall Mounting

3-27

3.3.5

KSU (ESF-SE-10

3-26

........................................................
the Basic and/or Expansion KSUs .................................

Wall Mounting

the Basic KSU

3.3.4.2

Wall Mounting

the Expansion

Floor Mounting

3-25

...................................................
KSU) ..............................................

3.3.4.1

........................................
KSU ....................................

the Basic an&or Expansion

3.3.5.1

Floor Mounting

the Basic KSU

3.3.5.2

Floor Mounting

the Expansion

3.3.6

Adding the Expansion

3.3.7

Installing

KSU to an Installed

KSUs

‘- ‘:,.,
i’
,.-’

3-15

. . . . .. .

Station Equipment

Example

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a.................

. . . . . . .............

2.2.1

Installation

Table

_ . . . . . , ........

Station

Required

3.1

3.3

ii

3-12

Tone Patterns

3

Service Manual
.

Determining

2.3

Installation

..

1.13.1

2

II Advanced

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................

Visual and Audible

2.1

SECTION

1.12.5

II/Level

................................

KSU

...................................
System ................................
KSUs

3-29
3-32
3-32

........................................

a PSF-S-20 PSU in the Basic and Expansion

3-27

......................

3-32
3-35

. :.

3-37

’

Chapter 3 -Table of Contents

3.3.8

Installing

a PSF-S-20 PSU in the Basic KSU

3.3.7.3

Installing

a PSF-S-20 PSU in the Expansion

Installation

KSU

.......................

3-38

the Built-In

3-40

Connecting

3.3.8.2

Installing

Batteries

3.3.8.3

Cable Routing

........................................................

3-42

Grounding

Requirements

.......................................................

3-43

and Connecting

the Level II Advanced

Opening the KSU Cover

3.4.4

Wall Mounting

... ., ..................................

Expansion

Batteries

Key Service Unit (KSU)
KSU)

KSU (ESF-XE-10

KSU)

.................................

the Basic KSU

3.4.4.2

Wall Mounting

the Expansion

KSUs

KSU

KSUs

3.4.5.2

Floor Mounting

the Expansion

Installing

a PSF-P-20 PSU in the Basic and Expansion

3.4.6.1

General Information

3.4.6.2

Installing

a PSF-P-20 PSU in the Basic KSU

3.4.6.3

Installing

a PSF-P-20 PSU in the Expansion

Grounding

General Information
Installation

4.1.2

KTU Installation

4.2.1

CPU-F(

4.2.2

MMC-F-11

KSU

KSUs

.......................

3-51
3-51
3-52

............................
KSU

.......................

3-53

the Built-In

3-54

Batteries

and Connecting

......................................

Level II Advanced

Expansion

Batteries

.......................................................
UNIT

...................

.........................
...........................

KTU

3-50

....................................

..................................................

A KEY TELEPHONE

)-20 KTU

3-49

3-54

Precautions

Control KTUs

3-49

........................................

..............................

4.1.1

3-47

............................................................

Requirements

INSTALLING

4

3-46

.................................

the Basic KSU

Installing

3-46

....................................

Floor Mounting

3.4.7.2

3-45

.................................

3.4.5.1

Connecting

3-44

.........................................

the Basic and/or Expansion

3.4.7.1

3-44
3-44

........................................................

Wall Mounting

Installation

3-41

..............................................

3.4.4.1

Battery

.........................

...................................................

the Basic and/or Expansion

Floor Mounting

Common

3-38

............................

3.3.8.1

3.4.3

SECTION

3-37

3-40

Expansion

3.4.8

..................................................

............................................................

3.4.2

3.4.7

4.3

Installing

Basic KSU (ESF-XB-10

3.4.6

4.2

3.3.7.2

3.4.1

3.4.5

4.1

General Information

Battery

3.3.9
3.4

3.3.7.1

........

3-56
3-57

(KTU)

..........................

3-58

. . . . . . . .........................

. . 3-58

.........................

. . 3-58

.........................

. . 3-58
. . 3-59

.........................

. . 3-59
. . 3-63

..........................

InterfaceKTUs

................................

. . 3-65

4.3.1

ESI-F(8)-21

KTU

. . 3-65

4.3.2

SLI-F(8G)-21
4.3.2.1

........................

Power Failure

4.3.3

LLT-F(BG)-10

4.3.4

COI-F(4)-20

Chapter 3 - Table of Contents

KTU

..........................

KTU

Backup

. . 3-66
...........

. . 3-67

.......................

KTU and COI-F(4)-30

. . 3-69
KTU

.....

. . 3-70

. ..

111

4.4

SECTION

COI-F(8)-20

4.3.6

CID-F(8)-11

KTU and COI-F(8)-30 KTU .........................................
Unit
..............................................................

3-72
3-75

4.3.7

DID-F(4)-10

KTU

3-79

4.3.8

TLI-F(B)-10

KTU

4.3.9

DTI-F(

4.3.9.1

DTI-F(

)-lo KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

4.3.9.2

BRT-F(4)-10

4.3.9.3

CLK-F-21Unit

4.3.9.4

Tl Considerations

4.3.9.5

ISDNConsiderations

KTU

KTU

3-80

Unit

........

3-81
3-81

....................................

3-86

....................................................

......................................................

3-89
3-91

....................................................
................................................

3-100
3-100

4.4.1

...................................................................
PBR-F(4)-11KTU
............................................................

3-100

4.4.2

VRS-F(4)-11

3-102

4.4.3

ECR-F-11

4.4.4

MIF-F(S)-10KTU

............................................................

3-105

4.4.5

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

............................................................

3-116

4.4.6

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU

............................................................

3-124

4.4.7

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU

............................................................

3-128

4.4.8

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

..............................................................

3-130

KTU

............................................................

KTU

CABLE

CONNECTIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131

Connection

5.1.2

Cabling Precautions

Requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131

Wiring Between the KSU and the MDF
52.1

KSUCables

5.2.2

Connecting

5.2.3

OutsideLines

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 3-131

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Cables to Special Connectors

KTU Cable Connections

5.2.3.1

TLI-F(2)-10

5.2.3.2

ECR-F-11

5.2.3.3

DTI-F(

5.2.3.4

SLI-F(8G)-21
Terminal

KTU Cable Connections

j-10 KTUDTI-F(A)-20

Modular

5.2.5

Modular Terminations
ProfessionalSystem
OPTIONAL

6.1

GeneralInformation

6.2

Music On Hold/Station
MusicOnHold

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136

5.2.4

6

3-103

...............................................................

5.1.1

6.2.1

iv

..............................................................
)-lo KTUIDTI-F(A)-20
KTU, BRT-F(4)-10 KTU, and CLK-F-21

General Information

5.2

..............................................................

Optional KTUs

5

5.1

SECTION

4.3.5

. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .

3-136

. . .. . .. . ... . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .

3-137

KTU Cable Connections

.. . . . .. . . .. . . . .

3-138

.. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. ... . . . . . .

3-139

. . .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .
When Connecting BRI (ISDN) Trunks to the Electra
.. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. ... . . . . . .. . . .. . .. .. . . . .. . .

3-139

KTU Cable Connections

Connections

EQUIPMENT

CONNECTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._........
Background

3-141

.

3-142

Music

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...,_..
. . . 3-142

Chapter 3 -Table of Contents

:’

6.2.2

Station Background

6.3

ExternalPaging

6.4

External

Music

....................................................

...................................................................

Tone Ring/Night

Chime

.....................................................

3-143
3-144
3-146

SECTION

7

LCD INDICATIONS

TABLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .

3-148

SECTION

8

FEATURE

CODES

. .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . ... ..

3-150

Chapter

3 - Table of Contents

ACCESS

V

LIST OF FIGURES
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37

vi

System Block Diagram
Connecting

.....................................................................

the ES1 to the Multiline

Level II Interface

Terminal

Using ‘I%sted

Slots and System Port Numbers

Level II Advanced Interface

Example

Attaching

the Wall Mount

Attaching

the Level II Basic KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket

the Level II Expansion

of the Level II Expansion

Hooking
Bolting

KSUs Together

Brackets

the Level II Basic and Expansion
the Level II Expansion

Removing

Bracket
KSUs

the Two PSF Built-In

Connecting

Expansion

Connecting

the Batteries

Cable Connections

KSUs

3-33

.........................

....................................................
........................................

3-35

.......................................

3-36

KSU

3-38

..................................

to the Power Supply
KSU

3-39
3-40
3-40
3-41

..........................................

Batteries

3-38
3-39

...................................................

to the Original

for the Expansion

.......................................

.................................................

to the Power Supply Unit
Batteries

3-37

..................................................

Batteries

3-34
3-35

.......................................................

in the Level II KSU

3-31
3-32

........................................

the PSF-S-20 PSU in the Level II Expansion

the Batteries

...........................

3-31

3-33

Installing

Connecting

.........................

....................................

the PSF-S-20 PSU in the Level II Basic KSU

Placing the Batteries

3-30

.............................................................

the PSU Cable to the KSU

3-30

KSUs Together

on the Level II Basic KSU

Securing the PSU Cable Using a Tie Wrap

3-29

3-32

the KTUs from the Level II Basic KSU

the Slide Bracket

..................

1 ...................................

Installing

Connecting

KSU to the Wall

............

KSU to the Basic KSU

the Level II Basic KSU Cover

PSF-S-20PSUFuseLocations

Attaching

3-29

the Cable Between the Level II Basic and Expansion

Disconnecting

3-28

................................................

the Level II Basic KSU Side Panel

Removing

3-28

........................................

the Cable Between Level II Basic and Expansion

Connecting

3-27

.................................

....................................

KSU to the Wall Mounting

Bottom View of the Floor Mounting
Removing

.......................

........................................

KSU to the Basic KSU

the Level II Expansion

Connecting

3-26

....................................................

..................................................................

the Wall Mount Bracket

Attaching

3-26

Bracket of the Level II Basic KSU to the Wall

Hooking the Level II Basic and Expansion
Bolting

3-24
3-25

the Level II Basic KSU Cover

Removing the Side Panel

_ 2’

3-19

..................................................................

Securing the Level II KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket

3-5
3-18

...........................................

Removing

Attaching

..................................

.......................................................................
KSU

......

3- 16

.................................................................

Level II Basic KSU
Level II Expansion

......................

...........................................

Slots and System Port Numbers

Level II Telephone and CO Port Number
TypicalFuIlMDFLayout

2-Pair Cable

3-3

....................................

...............................................

3-41
3-42

..................................................

3-43

Chapter

3 -Table of Contents

..
..

3-38

KSUGrounding

..........................................................................

3-43

3-39

Level II Advanced

Basic KSU

3-44

3-40

Level II Advanced

Expansion

3-41

Removing

the Level II Advanced Basic KSU Cover

3-42

Attaching

the Wall Mount Bracket

3-43

Attaching

the Level II Advanced

3-44

Removing

the Front and Top Panels

3-45

Attaching

the Wall Mount

3-46

Securing the Level II Advanced Expansion

3-47

Attaching

Each Level II Advanced

3-48

Attaching

the Floor Mount Bracket

to Basic KSU

3-49

Attaching

the Floor Mount Bracket

to the Floor

3-50

Removing

the Level II Advanced

Basic KSU Top Panel

3-51

Removing

the Level II Advanced

Expansion

3-52

Attaching

Each Level II Advanced

3-53

PSF-P-20 PSU Fuse Locations

3-54

Installing

3-55

Connecting

3-56

Installing

3-57

Connecting

the PSUs in the Level II Advanced

3-58

Connecting

the Two PSF Built-In

3-59

Placing the Batteries

3-60

Connecting

the Battery

3-61

Connecting

the Expansion

3-62

Connecting

the External

3-63

Level II Advanced

3-64

KTU Positions on the KSU

3-65

RemovingaKTUfromtheKSU

3-66

CPU-F(

3-67

MMC-F-11

3-68

Ferrite

3-69

MMC-F-11

3-70

ESI-F(8)-21

3-71

SLI-F(8G)-21

3-72

Power Failure

3-73

Connecting

Chapter

3 - Table of Contents

..............................................................
KSU

.........................................................

3-45

...........................................

of the Level II Advanced Basic KSU to the Wall
Basic KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket

Bracket

.............

........................

3-47

of the Level II Advanced Expansion
KSU to the Wall Mount

Expansion

KSU

Expansion

KSU to the Wall

Bracket

....................

3-49

.......................................

3-50

.................................

3-50

..........................................

3-51

.............................................................
Board

3-52

Batteries

in the Battery

Box

Expansion

KSUs

KSU

3-53

.........................

3-53

...............................

3-54
3-54

....................................................

Cable and Battery

Board

3-55

.........................................

3-55

................................................

to the Terminal

KSU Grounding

3-52

..................................................

Cable to the Terminal

Battery

.............................

........................................

the PSF-P-20 PSU in the Level II Advanced Expansion

Board

3-56

......................................

3-56

.........................................................

3-57

.....................................................

1 ...........

............................................................

j-20 KTU Switch Settings
KTU Switch Settings

j-20 KTU Installation

KTU Switch Layout
KTU Switch Layout
Backup Flowchart

J. ...................

...........................................................
KTU Ribbon Cable

....................................

3-64

..........................................

3-64
3-65

.... : .....................................................

3-66

...........................................................
for Power Failure

3-61
3-63

............................................................

CO Line and Single Line Telephone

3-58
3-59

.....................................

to MMC-F-11

3-48
3-49

............................................

KSU

3-47

3-48

..............................................

the PSF-P-20 PSU to the Terminal

KTU and CPU-F(

.........

..........................................

KSU Front Panel

3-46
3-46

........................................................

the PSF-P-20 PSU in the Level II Advanced Basic KSU

Core Installation

3-45

3-67
Transfer

....................

3-68

vii

Cvanced
Februar

Installation

1998
.......................

3-69

.: ................................

3-74

LLT-F(2G)-10

3-75

COI-F(4)-20

KTU Switch Layout

...........................................................

3-71

3-76

COI-F(4)-30

KTU Switch Layout

...........................................................

3-72

?

3-77

COI-F(B)-20

KTU Switch Layout

....

3-73

-._-”

3-78

COI-F(B)-30

KTU Switch Layout

...........................................................

3-79

CID-F(B)-11

Unit Switch Layout

........................................

3-80

Connecting

the CID to the COI .............................................................

3-81

DatsMessageFormat

3-82

DID-F(4)-10

KTU Switch Layout

.............................................

3-83

TLI-F(B)-10

KTU Switch Layout

...........................................................

3-80

3-84

DTI-F(

j-10 KTU Switch Layout

...........................................................

3-82

3-85

DTI-F(A)-20

(Series 300 or higher)

3-82

3-86

Connecting

3-87

BRT-F(4)-10KTUSwitchLayout

3-88

MountedCLK-F-21Unit

3-89

12-Multiframe

Configuration

and Bit Assignment

...........................................

3-93

3-90

2PMultiframe

Configuration

and Bit Assignment

...........................................

3-93

3-91

Installing

3-92

Installing the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the ESF-XB-10
orESF-XE-10KSU
.......................................................................

3-93

KTU Switch Layout

Service Manual

, ......................................................

3-75

, ..................

3-76
3-77

.....................................................................

KTU Switch Layout

the Cable Between the BRT-F(4)-10

the DTI-F(

3-74

3-79

, .............

......................................

KTU and the CLK-F-21

Unit

..................

3-87
3-88

..........................................................
. ....

.............................................................

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU in the ESF-SB-10 KSU

.......

_ ...........

3-90

3-95

KSU
3-96

Connecting the Cable Between the DTI-F( l-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20
...................................................................
andtheCLK-F-21Unit

KTUs

3-94

Example

to the CLK-F-21

3-95

PBR-F(4)-11

KTU Switch Settings

3-96

VRS-F(4)-11

KTU Switch Layout

3-97

ECR-F-11

3-98

MIF-F(S)-10

3-99

Connecting

the MIF Cable Assembly

and the MIF-F(S)-10

KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU

........

3-110

3-100

Connecting

the MIF Cable Assembly

and the MIF-F(S)-10

KTU to the ESF-XB-10

... , ....

3-111

3-101

MIF-F(

3-102

SMDRPrintFormats

3-103

SMDR Print Formats

3-104

MIF-F(L)-10KTUSwitchLayout

3-105

Connecting

the MIF Cable Assembly

and the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU

........

3-121

3-106

Connecting

the MIF Cable Assembly

and the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU to the ESF-XB-10

........

3-122

3-107

MIF-F(A)-10

3-108

Connecting

the MIF Cable Assembly

and the MIF-F(A)-10

KTU to the ESF-SB-10

KSU

........

3-127

3-109

Connecting

the MIF Cable Assembly

and the MIF-F(A)-10

KTU to the ESF-XB-10

KSU

........

3-127

3-110

MIF-F(C)-10

...

vlll

of Three DTI-F(

J-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Layout

KTUs Attached

3-98
Unit

3-101

.........................................................

3-103
3-104
3- 106

.........................................................

) -10 KTU Direct and Remote Connections

KSU

3-113

..........................................

3-114

....................................................................
Item Numbers

KTU Switch Layout

3-99

........................................................

............................................................

KTU Switch Layout

KTU Switch Layout

.....

3-115

......................................................

8-117

.........................................................

KSU

3-124

.........................................................

3-129

.........................................................

Chapter

3 -Table of Contents

.- ....

3-111

MIF-F(U)-10

3-112

MDF Cable Assembly

3-113
3-114
3-115
3-116
3-117
3-118
3-119
3-120
3-121

Attaching

3-122
3-123
3-124
3-125
3-126

MusicSourceConnection

Chapter

Holding

KTU Switch Layout
Diagram

........................................................
...........................................................

the Cables to the Connector
the Connector

Positioning

Modular

with the-Pliers

the Screw of the Pliers

MDFTrunkConnection
Terminal

Simplified

Simplified

....................................................

.........................................................

.................................................................
for Connection

Schematic

Crossconnection

....................................................

of Multiline

of Single Line Telephone

of Single Line Telephones

Schematic

for BRI Connection

MOH Cable Shield Ground Exposed

MOHCableRoute
MusicSourceConnection

and Attendant

Connection

................................................
..................................................

......................................................

......................................................................
................................................................

External

Paging

Connecting

External

Tone Ring/Night

.............................................................
Chime

Add-On Consoles

.................................

................................................................

Connecting

3 - Table of Contents

Terminals

.............................................

.....

3-130
3-132
3-134
3-135
3-135
3-138
3-139
3-140
3-140
3-141
3-142
3-143
3-143
3-144
3-145
3-147

ix

LIST
3-l

Abbreviations

3-2

OF TABLES

...........................................................................

3-2

....

System Control Capacities

3-4

,ti2

3-3

Multiline

3-5

3-4

Single Line Telephone

3-5

PowerOutputs

3-6

Power Consumption

3-7

FuseReplacement

3-8

KTU Battery

3-9

Weights and Dimensions

3-11

3-10

TonePatterns

3-13

3-11

Multiline

Terminal

3-12

DSSBLF

LED Indications

3-13

Number

3-14

System Configuration

3-15

CPU-F(

3-16

Required Equipment

3-17

DTI-F(

l-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Settings for MB and SW1

3-18

DTI-F(

j-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Settings for SW2

3-19

DTI-F(

)-lo KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

KTU LED Indications

3-20

Equipment

3-21

Required

3-22

DTMF Signal Adjustments

3-101

3-23

ECR-F-11

3-105

3-24

ECR-F-11 KTU Optional

3-25

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU Switch (SW31 Settings

3-26

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU Switch (SW4) Switch Settings

3-27

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU - DTE PC or Printer

3-28

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU-DCE

3-29

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch (SW31 Settings

3-30

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch (SW41 Switch Settings for Printers

3-31

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU - DTE PC or Printer

3-32

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU - DCE MNP Modem Connections

3-120

3-33

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU Switch (SW31 Settings

.........................................
for PC Connection
.................................

3-125

3-34

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU - DTE PC Connections

3-126

3-35

Connection

..................................................
and Port Relationships
.................................

3-36

LCD Indications

3-37

X

.................................................................
Loop Resistance and Cable Length
........................................

Terminal

Connection

Cable Length

..............................................

3-6

...........................................................................

3-7

and Dissipation

........................................................
.........................................................................

Backup Time

3-7
3-7
3-10

................................................................

..................................................................
..........................................................................

of Required

LED Flash Patterns

3-14

....................................................

3-15

.................................................................
Interface KTUs
.......................................................
Example

3-20
3-21

............................................................

l-20 KTU Adjustments

Required

3-62

............................................................
for Caller ID ..........................................................

3-78
3-83

.........................

3-84

.................................

........................................

3-85

for Tl Installation

.....................................................
j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU Installation

Slots for DTI-F(

3-94
.........................

3-96

...............................................................
KTU Connectors/Adjustments
..................................................
Device Connection

Terminals

.....................................
for PC and MNP Modem Connections
for Printers

Connections

MNP Modem Connections

Information/Connection

3-105
................

3-107
3-108

................................

.........................................

3-109

..........................................

3-109

for PC and MNP Modem Connections

Connections

,’

................

................................

3-118
3-119
3-120

.........................................

.........................................................................
AccessCodeTables
......................................................................

3-133

.- :,,

3-148

-,:

3-150

Chapter

3 -Table of Contents

CHAPTER
3
ELECTRA
PROFESSIONAL
LEVEL II AND LEVEL II ADVANCED
HARDWARE
SPECIF’ICATIONS
AND INSTALLATION
SECTION

1

SYSTEM
1.1

SPECIF’ICATIONS

General

Information

The following diagrams and tables show specifications for the Electra Professional Level
II and Level II Advanced systems. The technician should review these carefully before
attempting to install the systems.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-l

c

Electra Professional
1.2

System Block

12OILevel II /Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Diagram

The system-block diagram is a conceptual representation
of an installed system. Refer to
Figure 3-l - System Block Diagram. Table 3-1 contains a list of abbreviations used in the
system block diagram.

_;, /
,’

Table 3-l

3-2

VMU

Voice Mail Unit

VRS

Voice Recording

Abbreviations

Service

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

I
I
COI (8)
I

4w
9-r

DIDTrunk

i

2w

SLI (BG)

VMU

I
:
i
I

---------------------------------~

: -----““-““-‘---‘----------~

i
I

I
I

r--l-

I
I
i
I
I
:-

1

I

CLK

11

MMC

t~-=~=-~-]=/=-

.--------------------------

---mm-

MPU

-

ROM/RAM/RTC

Numbers

in ( ) designate

the number

rc

Electra Professional

.

Music

of channels supported

Figure 3-1
Level II and Level II Advanced

/

--““‘I,,,-,,--,---_,,_,_,,_,,,_,,___,,-----,
MIF (5)

External

CpU

when using the equipment

listed,

System Block Diagram
3-3

System

1.3

Control

Capacities

The control capacities of the system are shown in Table 3-2 - System Control Capacities.
Table 3-2 System Control Capacities
I
I
I
1 Level11 Advanced
1
Item

Slot

Multiline
Attendant

’

Basic

Basic + 2
Expansions

Interface

5

8

8

24

Application

1

1

2

4

32

56

56

64

Number of Outside Lines

I

Basic f
Expansion

Basic

CO/PBX

I

32

56

I

I

56

I

64

unit

N/A
I

co1

Terminal
Add-On Console

SLT

4

4

4

4.

24

48

48

88

ES1
SLI
I

3LT Adapter
Dierm Cordless

External

Speaker

31

I

9

I3

55

I

I

9

55

95

9

9

ES1
1

ES1

I3

I3

I3

1

ECR

I8

I8

1

PBR

DTMF Receiver

i

8

18

48

1

48

1

48

1

48

1

N/A

Trunk Group

1
1

32

1

32

1

32

1

32

1

NIA

Route Advance Block

1

16

1

16

1

16

I

16

1

NIA

System Speed Dial

1000/90

1000/90

1000/90

1000/90

NIA

System Speed Dial (Series 500 or higher)

lOOOl80

1000/80

1000/80

1000/80

WA

Note 1:
Note 2:

3-4

Terminal

I

The number of Attendant Add-On Consoles is included in the number
Four of the eight channels are accommodated in the CPU.

Electra Professional

of Multiline

Terminals.

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.4

Cabling

Requirements

1.4.1

Cabling Specifications
The KSU is connected to each Multiline Terminal and Single Line Telephone by
a separate twisted l-pair cable or Z-pair cable (only for Multiline
Terminals).
Table 3-3 - Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length and Table 3-4
- Single Line Telephone Connection Cable Length show the cables used for
wiring between the KSU and individual terminals or adapters.
Table 3-3

Terminal

ETW-8-t

) (BK)/(SW)

Multiline

Terminal

Loop Resistance and Cable Length
I
I
I
Maximum
Iioop
Resistance
(Ohms)

or Adapter

TEL

I

61

I

600

I

1500

I

46

I

450

I

1300

ETW-16DC-(

) (BK)/(SW) TEL

ETW-16DD-(

) (BK)/(SW)

TEL

37

360

820

ETW-24DS-(

) (BK)/(SW)

TEL

46

450

820

N/A

650

650

ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL
DCU-60-t

) (BK)/(WH)

Console

EDW-48-c ) (BK)/(SW) Attendant
Console with AC Adapter

102

I

I

102

Add-On

SLT-F(lG)-10

ADP

I

61

SLT-F(lG)-20

ADP

I

61

Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:

An AC Adapter

is required

II

to install an Attendant

1000

I
I

1000

I

10000
2000

600

I

1200

600

I

1200

Add-On Console.

The length for the specified SLT Adapter is the distance between the ES1 KTU and the SLT
Adapter.
When additional length is required between the ES1 and a Multiline
Terminal, Attendant
Add-On Console, or SLT Adapter, use twisted 2-pair cable as shown in Figure 3-2
Connecting the ES1 to the Multiline Terminal Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable.

Twisted 2-pair cable

Multiline
Terminal

Figure 3-2

Electra Professional

Connecting

the ES1 to the Multiline

Level II and Level II Advanced

Terminal

Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable

3-5

Table 3-4
Connected

Single Line Telephone

Connection

Maximum
Loop Resistance
(24 AWG) from Connected
Equipment
to Telephone

Cable

Equipment

Cable Length

300 ohm

SLI-F@G)-21

KTU

Twisted

LLT-F(2G)-10

KTU

Twisted l-pair

SLT-F(lG)-10

ADP

Twisted

l-pair

7SLT-F(lG)-20

ADP

Twisted

l-pair

Twisted

l-pair

10 feet

Twisted

l-pair

50 feet

ADA(2)-W
Unit

1

(BKY(SW)

1500 ohm
300 ohm
300 ohm

1

I

APR-U
Note:

l-pair

Mixing digital
recommended.

and analog ports through

The following

1.4.2

the same 25pair

cables are required

cable runs is not

for the equipment

listed below:

0

Music Source (for MOH and BGM inputs):

Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable

0

External

Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable.

Amplifier:

Cabling Precautions
When selecting cables and Main Distribution
Frames (MDF), future expansion
or assignment changes should be considered.
Avoid running
cables in the
following places:

1.5

Power
1.51

0

A place exposed to wind or rain.

0

A place near heat radiating
equipment or where the quality
cable covering could be affected by gases and chemicals.

0

An unstable

of station

place subject to vibration.

Requirements
Power Supply Inputs
AC Input (PSF-S-20 PSU or PSF-P-20 PSU):

3-6

0

117Vac

k 10%

l

60 Hz t- 10%

0

Single Phase

0

15A maximum

l

A dedicated outlet, separately

current

Electra

fused and grounded,

Professional

is required.

Level II and Level II Advanced

Power Supply Outputs Table

1.5.2

Table 3-5

Power Outputs

Level II
DC
Voltage

1.5.3

Minimum
Current

Maximum
Current

Minimum
Current

Maximum
Current

-24V

0.3A

5.9A

0.3A

7.5A

+ 5v

0.3A

4.3A

0.3A

6.5A

-5V

OA

0.8A

OA

1.2A

Power Consumption

and Dissipation

Table 3-6

Level II
Advanced

1.5.4

PSF-P-20 PSU
Note:

Electra Professional

Watts Used
(Idle)

Watts Used
(Maximum)

Basic

1.3A

120

150

Basic + Expansion

1.9A

180

220

Basic

1.9A

180

220

Basic + 2 Expansions

5.7A

540

660

Fuse Replacement

Fuse No.

PSF-S-20 PSU

and Dissipation

Maximum
RMS
Current

Table

Table 3-7
unit

Table

Power Consumption

Module

Level II

Level II Advanced

Fuse Replacement

Specifications

Description

Dimensions

Fl

125V, 4.OA

AC Input

l/4” x l-1/4”

F2

125V, 7.OA

DC Input

l/4” x l-1/4”

Fl

125V, 6.3A

AC Input

l/4” x l-1/4”

F2

25OV, 12.OA

DC Input

l/4” x l-1/4”

All fuses are normal blown glass tube. Do not use slow blow fuses.

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-7

1.6

Environmental
0

0
1.7

1.8

Conditions

Temperature
1.

Operating:

2.

Recommended

Operating

Outside

+32”F
Long Term:

(O’C - 40°C)

+ 50°F - + 90°F (10°C - 32.2”C)

Humidity:

10% - 90% noncondensing

Line Types

l

2-v&e,

a

2-wire, Loop Dial, DID Lines (Dial Pulse or DTMF)

l

Cwire, E & M Tie Lines (Type I or V, Dial Pulse, or DTMF)

l

Digital Trunk
Signaling)

0

Digital

Network
1.8.1

Loop-Start

or Ground-Start

Tl/FTl

(Loop Start

Start,

Tie Line

E&M,

or DID

Transmission
Data Length:
Terminal

From ESI-F(S)-21
0

0

to ESI-F(S)-21 KTU: 23 bits

KTU to Multiline

Data Transmission
Between ESI-F(8)-21

1.8.3

or Ground

Specifications

From Multiline

1.8.2

Trunks

Trunk ISDN Basic Rate

and Control

0

Terminal:

23 bits

Rates:
KTU and Multiline

Scanning Time for each Multiline

Terminal:

Terminal:

184K bits/set.
(voice and signaling)
32 ms.

Network
0

TDM Switching:

PCM (p Law)

0

TDM Clock:

2.048 MHz

l

TDM Data Bus:

8 bit

l

TDM Timeframe:

125 us.

Control
0

Control:

0

Central

0

Clock:

0

Interface

0

Optional KTUs (MIF and DTI):

S-bit microprocessor

l

Multiline
Attendant

4-bit microprocessor

0

3-8

- +104”F

Stored program

with distributed

Processor:

processing

16-bit microprocessor
8 MHz

KTU:

4-bit microprocessor

Terminal and
Add-On Console:

SLT Adapter:

4-bit microprocessor

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.8.4

Telephones
0

Multiline

Terminal

and Attendant
-ll-

Voltage:
Maximum

Current:

Add-On Console:
- 26 Vdc

200 mA

Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.
0

Single Line Telephone:
Standard 2500 set:
Nominal Current:
Ring Signal:

0

Single Line Telephone Adapter:
Standard 2500 set:
Nominal Current:
Ring Signal:

0

ADA(B)-W(BKY(SW)

Dialing

Specifications

1.9.1

Dial Pulse Address Signaling

0

1.9.2

500 type network
3omA
56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz-U

Standard 2500 set:
Nominal Current:

500 type network
3omA

Ring Signal:

56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz

(BK)/(SW) Unit

ADA(B)-W (BKY(SW) Unit:
Standard 2500 set:
Nominal Current:

a
0
0

500 type network
3omA
56 Vat RMS @ 20 HZ.

APR-U (BK)/(SW) Unit
Standard 2500 set:
Nominal Current:
Ring Signal:

1.9

500 type network
3omA
56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz

Unit:

Standard 2500 set:
Nominal Current:
Ring Signal:
0

500 type network
35mA
56 Vat RMS @ 20 Hz

Pulse Rate:
Percent Break:
Interdigit Interval:

500 type network
30 mA Signaling
10 &. 0.5 pps/20 + l.Opps
60 I!I 1.5%
10 pps/20 pps 770 ms. - 830 ms.

DTMF Address Signaling
l

Frequencies:
Two sinusoidal signals, one from a high group of three frequencies
from a low group of four frequencies.

l

Electra Professional

Frequency

deviation:

Level II and Level II Advanced

and one

Less than -I- 1.0 percent

3-9

0

Signal level:
Nominal
Minimum

Maximum
l

Rise time:

l

Duration

l

Interdigital

level per frequency:

-4dBm

-6-

level per frequency:

level per frequency

pair:

Low Group: ’

-1OdBm

High Group:

-8dBm

0 dBm
Within

of dual frequency

5 ms.

signal: , 100 ms. default/70

time:

70 ms. default/60
Nominal

ms. minimum
ms. minimum.

High Group

Fres tencies (Hz)
1336 I 1477
Nominal

Low
Group
Frequencies (Hz)

2

3

+ 5

6

8 I 9
0 I #

1.10

Battery

Backup

Both systems have two battery
for memory backup.
1.10.1

backup functions:

One is for system backup and a second

SystemBackup
The system is backed up by a rechargeable
supports all system functions for approximately

1.10.2

battery.
This battery backup
30 minutes if power fails.

Memory Backup
A backup battery is equipped on the CPU-F( l-20 KTU, VRS-F(4)-11 KTU, MIFF(S)-10 KTU, MIF-F(L)-10
KTU, MIF-F(A)-10
KTU, MIF-FOX-10 KTU, and the
MIF-F(U)-10
KTU.
These batteries, when fully charged, retain the system
memory after a power failure. Refer to Table 3-8 - KTU Battery Backup Time
for the approximate backup times for the KTUs.
Table 3-8
KTUs
CPU-F(

3-10

KTU Battery

Backup Time

Approximate

j-20 KTU

Backup

Time

14 days

VRS-F(4)-11

KTU

1 hour

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU

1 month

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

1 month

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.11

Weights

and Dimensions
Table 3-9

unit

sw2gsyf

Height

Width

Depth

ESF-SB-10 KSU

37 lbs. 6 oz.
(17 kg)

14.96”
(380 mm)

15.67”
(398 mm)

9.06”
(230 mm)

ESF-SE-10 KSU

26 Ibs. 8 oz.
(12 kg)

14.96”
(380 mm)

11.54”
(293 mm>

9.06”
(230 mm)

ESF-XB-10

KSU

42 Ibs. 11 oz.
(19.4 kg)

18.31”
(465 mm)

24.80"
(630 mm>

10.67"
(271 mm)

ESF-XE-10

KSU

21 lbs. 5 oz.
(9.7 kg)

11.81”
(300 mm)

24.80"
(630 mm)

10.67"
(271 mm)

PSF-S-20 PSU

4 Ibs. 13 oz.
(2.2 kg)

14.96”
(38Omm)

3.54"
(90 mm)

7.09”
(180 mm)

PSF-P-20 PSU

3 lbs. 8 oz.
(1.6 kg)

14.96”
(380 mm)

3.54"
(90 mm>

7.09”
(180 mm)

2 lbs.
(0.9 kg)

3.98”
(101 mm)

6.89”
(175 mm)

8.81"
(223 mm)

2 lbs. 3 oz.
(1 kg)

3.98”
(101 mm)

6.89”
(175 mm)

8.81"
(223 mm)

ETE-1-2 TEL (SLT)

1 lb. 14 oz.
(0.9 kg)

3.15"
(8Omm)

6.30"
(16Omm)

9.06”
(230 mm)

ETE-lHM-2

1 lb. 10 oz.
(0.7 kg)

2.36"
(60 mm)

6.30"
(160 mm)

9.06”
(230 mm)

ETW-8-t

*

Weights and Dimensions

>(BKY(SW) TEL

ETW-16DC-(
TEL

1 (BKY(SW)

ETW-16DD-(

1 (BKNSW)

TEL (SLT)

SLT-F(lG)-10

ADP

9 oz.
(0.29 kg)

1.80"
(45 mm)

2.80"
(70 mm>

4.80"
(120 mm)

SLT-F(lG)-20

ADP

9 oz.
(0.29 kg)

1.80"
(45 mm)

2.80"
(70 mm)

4.80"
(120 mm)

Shipping weight includes the shipping

x’* Electra Elite KSU, PSU, and Digital
and Dimensions.

Electra Professional

carton.
Multiline

Level II and Level II Advanced

Terminals

are included in Chapter

2, Table 2-9 - Weights

3-11

l..pZ

External
1.12.1

1.12.2

1.12.3

1.12.4

1.12.5

Equipment

Music On Hold/Station
0

Auxiliary

0

Input Impedance:

0

Auxiliary

0

Input Impedance:

External

CPU (Series 500 or figher)

0.6V RMS Signal Level

Music using COI-F(

Input:

)-20 KTU or COI-F(

)-30 KTU (Series

0.6V RMS Signal Level
600 Q

Paging (Audio)
- 10 dBm Signal Level

0

Output Impedance:

600 Sz

0

Relay Contact Rating:

500 mA, 24 Vdc

External

‘%,
-i
/
.:

10K !J

Output Power:

Tone Ringer/Night

Chime Output

0

Output Level:

-1OdBm

0

Output Impedance:

600 !2

a

Relay Contact Rating:

500 mA, 24 Vdc

SMDR Output
Female Connector

(System Output)

Standard

RS-232C

(System Output)

Standard

RS-232C

PC Connection
Female Connector

Relay Contact
0

3-12

Music through

0

0
1.12.7

Background

Input:

Station Background
500 or higher)

0
1.12.6

Interface

All Relay Contact Ratings:

500 mA, 24 Vdc

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.13

Visual

and Audible

1.13.1

Indications

Tone Patterns

Table

Table 3-10
Tone

Tone Patterns

Frequency

Dial Tone

3501440

Second Dial Tone

35OJ440

Busy Tone

4801620

Call Waiting

Tone

44Ot480

Ringback

4401480

Tone (2)

Reorder Tone
l

l
l

Tone

J

1 see. ON

2s.~.ON
I
WI IPhi

4801620

Attendant/Tone
Override
Camp-On Tone
Call Alert Notification
Call Forward
Call Forward

Alert Tone
Confirmation

Patterns

440

Ringback Tone ( 1)

l
l

(Hz)

440

0.isec.

3501440

Tone

0 Confirmation
l LCR Dial Tone

440

Error Tone Burst
Recall Tone

620
1024
2 sec. ON

CO/PBX Ring Tone (1)

4801606

CO/PBX Ring Tone (2)

4801606

Internal

480/606

Ring Tone

I

1sec.ON

Ring Tone

Attendant

4 sees. OFF

I

I

4801606

lsec.ON

Tone Burst

440

Howler Tone

2400

DIT Alert Tone

4801620

CO Ring Transfer

4801606

-l-l

Continuous
0.5sec.ON

16 Hz modulation

1.0sec.ON
1.0 sec. OFF

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-13

Multiline

1.132

Table 3-11

I

Line Key

Microphone
ICM

Large LED

Speaker

Conference

Answer

Function

LNR/SPD

IBLF

or
DSS Key

L
3-14

Condition

LED

[-Use
Busy
[ncoming Call
I-Hold
Sal1 Hold
Hold Recall
Transfer Recall
ON
I-Use
[CM Incoming Call
Voice Over Broker
Incoming Internal Call
Incoming Outside Call
Message from Attendant
Voice Mail Message

Terminal
Multiline

LED Flash Pattern
Terminal

LED Flash Patterns

Color
Green
Red
Red
Green
Red
Green

’
.
.
.
-

Green

-

Flash Patterns
1
I
I
I

I
I
I

I

I

I

-

L!
L
f

;!
f
I--

-

i

:
7-t
I

I
I
I
I

-

Red
Red
Red--!-!-!-!-

Red

Table

1

I
I

I

I
I
I!
I
I

-

-

I
i
LB
!
!
I
I-

I
I

!-I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
I

I
I

I
i

I

-

-

l

---I-m
I
I

A-

--I--~~~a-

I

I

Red--~-~-~-~-

Green Green r

Red

-

&I
t

-

-

&

-

I

&

-

&
I

i-

i

I-I

i-

I

I

II

I

I

I

I

I

t
I
!
I
I-

I
I
!
!
i-

I
I
II
:,--I-

1
I
!
I

+

-

I

ON
System Data Entry
Conference in Progress
All Conference
Circuits Used
Hold Conference Call
[CM Call Hold
SPD Confirmation
hmming Trunk
Exclusive Hold
User Ringing Line Preferenc
Voice Over with Broker’s Ca

Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Red
Green

Callback Set
Auto Repeat Set
ON (to set function)
Call FWD - All Call Set

Red
Red
Red
Red

Other Tenant
CO Line Key Seized
Exclusive Hold

Green

Use, Hold
DND, Call FWD-All Calls
Set
Special Mode
OVbiIe pressing FNC key
or going off-line)

-

-

--i
---

+ -“-I--!-I
+--

-

I
I

&!
I
I

'+-,-i---L--

I--

5 I
!

k--

i
!_

I
J

u

i

i

L

,--i--,-i--,-~---I---

i

i

I
i

I
f

i

I-I

I

Green

f

Red
Red

I

I

I

I

i

i

i

i

I

I

!

I

I

l-

iI-

I-

I-

I-

Red

2.0sec.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.13.3

DSS/BLF LED Indications
Table 3-12

Table

DSSBLF

LED Indications

Function
Attendant

Talking

Message

(Other)

Hold

2

Color

I

Status

I

Green

I

ON

I

-

I

OFF

Red

ON

Red

ON

FWD All (DND)

Red (Flashing)

ON

Other Use (Multiline Terminal is off-line, station user
is programming
Feature Access/One-Touch keys, etc.)

Red (Flashing)

ON

Incoming

Red (Flashing)

ON

Call

CO line in use

SECTION

I

Red

HARDWARE

REQUIREMENTS

2.1

Iuformation

General

ON

Before configuring
the system, complete the worksheets in the EZectra Professional
lBO/Level IDLevel II Advanced Job Specifications
Manual.
Make sure all station
equipment,
timeouts,
and feature
options are considered
when completing
the
worksheets.
System Programming
must be understood to properly complete these
worksheets. Refer to Chapter 5 - Programming
in this manual.
Note:

One Electra Professional
120/Level IVLevel II Advanced
Manual is included with the CPU-Ft j-20 KTU.

Job Specifications

The Level II Basic KSU has five interface slots and the Expansion
KSU has three
interface slots. The Level II Advanced Basic KSU and Expansion KSU each have eight
interface slots. Each slot supports up to eight ports. The hardware requirements
dictate
the number of ports available for installing station equipment.
When possible, the same type KTUs should be paired together in a cable binder (25pair
cable binders to the MDF should be used.) This simplifies MDF wiring.
2.1.1

Programming

Stations

A maximum
of three programming
positions are available
in the system.
Telephones, connected to the first two ports of the first ESI-F(8)-21 KTU, are
automatically
programming
positions and must be ETW-16DC-(
) (BKV(SW)
TEL, ETW-16DD-(
1 (BKY(SW) TEL, DTU-16D-(
) (BKY(WH) TEL, ETW24DS-( ) (BKY(SW) TEL, or DTU-32D-( > (BKY(WH) TEL.
A third programming
position becomes available
MIF-F(L)-10
KTU and the Electra Professional
software are installed.
2.1.2

Attendant

when an MIF-F(S)-10 KTU or
System Program Technician

Station

A maximum
of four Attendant
positions can be installed in a system with
EDW-48-(
1 (BKY(SW) or DCU-60-( ) (BKY(WH) Consoles. Each Attendant
Add-On Console must be supported by an ESI-F(8)-21 KTU. A maximum of four
EDW-48-( ) (BKY(SW) Consoles can be installed in each system.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-15

February

1998

Electra Professional
2.2

Determining

2.2.1

Required

1201Level IX /Level XI Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Equipment

Station Equipment
Determine
the type and quantity
Available station equipment includes:

of station

equipment

being

installed.

_.I

DTU-8-c ) (BKY(WH) TEL
DTU-16-t ) (BKY(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-( 1 (BKY(WH) TEL
DTU-32-t 1 (BKY(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-( 1 (BKY(WH) TEL
ETW-8-t 1 (BKY(SW) TEL
ETW-16DC-(
1 (BK)/(SW) TEL
ETW-16DD-(
1 (BKY(SW) TEL
ETW-24DS-( ) (BKY(SW1 TEL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

2.2.2

(&line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(8-line Multiline Terminal without LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD)
(24-line Multiline
Terminal with LCD and
built-in Dual Path Adapter)
Single Line Telephone with Message Wait Lamp
Single Line Telephone without Message Wait Lamp
DCU-60-t 1 (BKY(WH) Console
EDW-48-t ) (BKY(SW) Console
ADA-U Unit
Ancillary Device Adapter interface
APR-U Unit
Analog Port Ringer interface
HFU-U Unit
Handsfree unit
WMU-U Unit
Wall mount unit with Multiline Terminal
ADA(l)-W (BKY(SW) Unit
ADA(B)-W (BKY(SW) Unit
WMU-W Unit
SLT-F(lG)-10 ADP or SLT-F(lG)-20
ADP.

Interface
A.

KTUs

Slot and System Port Numbers for the Level II system are shown in Figure
3-3 - Level II Interface Slots and System Port Numbers.
BASIC

-

EXPANSION

KSU

8

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

7

15

23

31

39

47

55

63

6

14

22

30

38

46

54

62

c

5

13

21

29

37

45

53

61

S

P

4

12

20

28

36

44

52

60

U

U

3

11

19

27

35

43

51

59

2

10

18

26

34

42

50

58

1

9

17

25

33

41

49

57

IF4/OP4

IF5

11 IF6

IF7

IF8

-

IFl/OPl

IF2/OP2

Figure 3-3

3-16

KSU

P

-

IF3/OP3

Level II Interface

Slots and System Port Numbers

Electra

‘.. ->>

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

B.

Slot and System Port Numbers for the Level II Advanced system are
shown in Figure 3-4 - Level II Advanced Interface Slots and System Port
Numbers.
Note:

Electra Professional

The two fixed slots and the first four slots in KSU3 are not
labeled with the OP designation in Figure 3-4 - Level II Advanced
Interface Slots and System Port Numbers.
This is only to show
that an MIF-F( )-10’KTU cannot be installed in these slots. The
actual KSUs are labeled with OP.

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-17

February

KSU3

1998

Electra Professional
~

Installation

Service Manual

136

144

152

160

168

176

184

192

135

143

151

159

167

175

183

191

134

142

150

158

166

174

182

190

M

133

141

149

157

165

173

181

189

s

M

132

140

148

156

164

172

180

188

U

C

131

139

147

155

163

171

179

187

130

138

146

154

162

170

178

186

129

137

145

153

161

169

177

185

IF1

IF2

IF3

IF4

IF5

IF6

IF7

IF8

8

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

7

15

23

31

39

47

55

63

6

14

22

30

38

46

54

62

5

13

21

29

37

45

53

61

SPPP

4

12

20

28

36

44

52

60

UABU

3

11

19

27

35

43

51

59

2

10

18

26

34

42

50

58

1

9

17

25

33

41

49

57

IF3/OP3

IF4/OP4

IF5

IF6

IF7

IF8

0

0

c

IFl/OPl

Figure 3-4

3-18

II / Level II Advanced

P

P
KSUl

120/Level

IF2/OP2

Level II Advanced

Interface

Slots and System Port Numbers

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

C.

Telephone

and CO Port Numbers

Telephone and CO Port Numbers are available in the system. The port
numbers are used to count the number of station numbers and trunk
numbers when programming
System Data. Refer to Figure 3-5 - Level II
Telephone and CO Port Number Example.
In the following
slot are:

example of a Level II system, the KTUs installed

Slot
IFl/OPl
...........
. .. .
IFZ/OPZ ...........
.. . .
IF3/OP3
...........
.. . .
IF4/OP4
...........
.. . .
IF5 . . . . ...........
.. . .
IF6 . . . . ...........
.. . .
IF7 . . . . ...........
.. . .
IF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BASIC

EXPANSION

KSU

KTU

KSU

C8

Cl6

C24

T8

C36

~ T16

c7

Cl5

C23

T7

c35

T15

C6

Cl4

c22

T6

c34

T14

C5

Cl3

c21

T5

c33

T13

c4

Cl2

c20

T4

C32

T12

C42

c3

Cl1

Cl9

T3

c31

Tll

c41

C2

Cl0

Cl8

T2

C26

c30

TlO

C38

Cl7

Tl

c25

c29

IF5

IF6

Cl

c9

IFl/OPl

IF2/OP2

c=
T=

Note 2:

Figure 3-5

D.

IF3/OP3

1 IF4/OP4

T9
IF7

c37
IF8

C 0 Port Number
Telephone Port Number

Note 1:

Electra Professional

KTU
DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
OPEN
OPEN
ESI-F(8)-21 KTU
TLI-F(2)-10 KTU
COI-F(8)-20 KTU
SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU
DID-F(4)-10 KTU

in each

The TLI KTU has four available channels, but only two are
used.
The DID KTU has eight available channels, but only four are
used.
Level II Telephone and CO Port Number

Interface KTUs
To determine the quantity of interface KTUs that
Table 3-13 - Number of Required Interface KTUs.

Level II and Level II Advanced

Example

are required,

refer to

3-19

February

Electra Professional

1998

Table 3-13
Circuits
per
KTU

KTU

120/Level

Number

II / Level II Advanced

of Required

Interface

Installation

KTUs
Maximum
KTUs
per System

Calculations/Comments
Level II

Level

II

Service Manual

Allowed
Insertion
Slots

Advanced

COI-F(4)-20
COI-F(4)-30

KTU
KTU

4

Divide the number of CO/PBX/Centrex
lines being used by 4.

7

16

IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4
and IF5 - lF8

COI-F(8)-20
COI-F(8)-30

KTU
KTU

8

Divide the number of CO/PBX/Centrex
lines being used by 8.

7

8

IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4
and IF5 -IF8

ESI-F(8)-21

KTU

8

Divide number of Multiline Terminals,
Attendant Add-On Consoles, SLT
Adapters being used by 8.

7

12

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4
and IF5 -IF8

8

Divide Single Line Telephones and/or
Voice Mail ports being used by 8.

6

11

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4
and IF5 -IF8

SLI-F(8W21

KTU

PBR-F(4)-11

KTU

4

PBR Requirements
Refer to Section
E - PBR Requirements on next page.

1

1

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4
and IF5-IF8

DID-F(4)-10

KTU

4

Divide the number
being used by 4.

of DID trunks

7

8

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4
and IF5 -IF8

TLI-F(B)-10

KTU

2

Divide Tie lines being used by 2.

7

16

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4
and IF5 -IF8

24

The Tl/FTl

1

3

See Notes 1 and 2

1

1

IFl/OPl-IF4/OP4

DTI-F( )-10KTU
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU
ECR-F-11

KTU

MIF-F(S)-10

8 Relays

channels being used.

Required when installing

multiple

KTU
IFl/OPl

-IF4/OP4

IFl/OPl-IF4/0P4

Note 1:
Note 2:

3-20

For the Level II system, use slot IFl/OPl in the Basic KSU.
For the Level II Advanced system, use slot IFl/OPl
and/or IF4/OP4 in the Basic KSU, and IFl/OPl
the First Expansion KSU.

Electra

Professional

in

Level II and Level II Advanced

E.

PBR Requirements
The Electra Professional Level II and Level II Advanced systems have four
channels of built-in PBR circuits in the CPU-F(
j-20 KTU. The PBR
circuit can detect DTMF signals from a Single Line Telephone, facsimile,
modem, or voice mail ports. Incoming DTMF signals can also be detected
from a CO trunk by an Automated
Attendant
and DXSA feature.
An
optional PBR-F(4)- 11 KTU can only detect DTMF signals from Single Line
Telephones, facsimiles, modems, and voice mail.
The number of PBR-F(4)-11 KTUs needed depends on the number of Single
Line Telephones, modems, facsimiles, voice mail ports, and whether
Automated Attendant/DISA
trunks are connected to the system. Up to 24
Single Line Telephones or Automated
Attendant/DISA
trunks can be
supported by one PBR circuit.

2.3

Installation

Example

The following example aids in understanding
some requirements
when co&guring
an
Electra Professional Level II system.
Refer to Table 3-14 - System Configuration
Example. The equipment used in this example includes:
0

12 CO Lines

0

12 Multiline

0

Voice Mail Connection

0

SMDR

0

External

Terminals

Electra Professional

(BKNSW)

TEL only]

(4 ports)

Paging

Table 3-14

Multiline

[ETW-16DD-1

System Configuration

Example

Terminal

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-21

SECTION

3

KSU INSTALLATION
3.1

General

Information

This section provides the requirements
for installing the system.
familiar with this section before installing the system.
3.2

Site Preparation

and MDF/IDF

The installer

should be

Construction

The technician
should plan the installation
before actual work begins.
Advanced
of customer
business activities.
planning
minimizes
time, cost, and disruption
Additional
benefits include flexibility
for changes and expansion, efficient maintenance,
and increased customer satisfaction.
3.2.1

3.2.2

Precautionary

Information

The following

warnings

shall be observed

telephone

wiring

during

installation:

1.

Never install

during a lightning

2.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.

3.

Never touch uninsulated
telephone
wires or terminals
telephone line is disconnected at the network interface.

4.

Use caution when installing

or modifying

storm.

telephone

unless

the

lines.

Site Survey
In most cases, a survey of the customer premise is needed to determine the
placement of the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF). A second visit to the site
may be necessary to obtain the exact dimensions of the area selected for MDF,
cable lengths, and possible IDF (Intermediate
Distribution
Frame) locations.
Collected information
about the job site generally permits the MDF to be
partially assembled at the technician shop and helps to minimize time spent at
the customer premise.

3.2.3

Site Limitations
In selecting a permanent
site for the MDF, the technician
problems such as, but not limited to, the following:
0

Limited

space is available

and must be used regardless

0

The available
environmental

0

The proposed location has limitations
lack of a suitable ground for grounding

space may
hazards.

be adequate

but

may

may encounter

of its suitability.
pose one or more

such as insufficient
the KSUs.

lighting

or the

Whatever the nature of the adversities encountered, the technician must make
the necessary decisions to arrive at Zhe best possible solution for installing the
equipment.
This document cannot cover all possible situations,
precautions,
and actions.

3-22

Electra

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3.2.4

Site Selection Conditions
KSU Installation
The following
unit (KSU).

Site:
conditions

should be met at the site selected for the key service

KSUs are normally

wall mounted

to protect against accident or flooding.

The KSU should not be located directly beneath pipes, due to the
possibility
of leaks or condensation
causing damage to the Electra
Professional Level II system equipment.
The area where the KSU is to be located must be free of corrosive and
inflammable
gases, excessive chemical or industrial
dusts, and other
materials
that could cause a hazard to personnel or to the proper
functioning of the equipment.
Operating ambient temperature
and humidity must be within
specified in Section 1.6 - Environmental
Conditions.

the limits

The operation of the system is virtually
noiseless and allows a wide
selection of installation
sites. Take care to ensure the KSUs do not present
a hazard to office traffic.
For economy, a central location to minimize
cabling is often used.
The KSU must be located at a site where it can be easily connected to an
AC power source.
The Level II KSUs (Basic and Expansion) weigh approximately
40 lb. - 70
lb.
The Level II Advanced KSUs (Basic and Expansion)
weigh
approximately
40 lb. 100 lb. Therefore,
select a strong wall for
mounting.
Place the KSU according to the following

spacing specifications:

Space distance between the KSU and the ceiling:
Space distance on both sides of the KSU:
Space distance on front of KSU:

20 in. or more
12 in. or more
20 in. or more

Avoid connection of the KSU to an AC receptacle used in common with any
other device (e.g., computer, facsimile machine, or copier).
Telephone Installation
The following
Terminals.

Electra Professional

Site:

conditions

should

be met at the site selected

for Multiline

0

Ensure the cable length and line resistance (loop), between the KSU and
the telephones,
comply
with the specifications
shown in Table
3-3 - Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length and Table 3-4
- Single Line Telephone Connection Table Length.

0

Some devices require an external power supply.
can be easily connected to an AC outlet.

Level II and Level II Advanced

Select a place where they

3-23

3.2.5

MDF Construction
The Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) consists of two different types of standard
quick-connect
terminal
blocks that are mounted
on a 3/4-inch plywood
backboard.
Mounting
these blocks on standoffs
for ease of access is
.recommended.
The recommended
blocks are: 66B50, for termination
of the
MDF Cable Assembly and 66M50, for termination
of the station cables.
The Intermediate

Distribution

Frame (IDF) requires

only the 66M50 blocks.

Both the MDF and IDF use standard bridging clips for each terminal block. The
bridging clips mate the left half of the terminal block (terminated
cable run) to
the right half of the terminal block (crossconnection wire) to the terminal block
(crossconnection
wire).
The bridging
clips are also useful during trouble
shooting to help isolate the cable runs and terminals/telephones
from the
central equipment and the Central Office Network from the system. Refer to
Figure 3-6 - Typical Full MDF Layout.
Also refer to Section 3.3.4 - Wall
Mounting the Basic and/or Expansion KSUs.

66B50
TYPE

mlllll

AK

66M50

mm

TELCO

Ti

'4
3'

El
31

Figure 3-6

3-24

Typical Full MDF Layout

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installing

the Level II Key Service

Before installation

Unit (KSU)

and cabling of the KSU, observe these precautions:

0

Before starting the work, be sure the PSU power switch is OFF and disconnect
power cord from the AC outlet.

0

Do not directly touch the soldered surfaces of the KTUs with your hands.

3.3.1

the

Basic KSU (ESF-SB-10 KSU)
The ESF-SB-10 KSU is the basic system cabinet. There are two fixed slots for
the CPU and MIF KTUs, one PSU slot, a battery installation
space, and five
interface slots for the installation
of telephones, COPBX lines, Tie lines, VRS,
DID, Digital Trunk (Tl), PBR, and ECR KTUs. The KSU can be either floor
mounted or wall mounted. Refer to Figure 3-7 - Level II Basic KSU.

Fixed
Slots

Figure 3-7

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Interface
Slots

Level II Basic KSU

3-25

3.3.2

Expansion

Ksu(ESF-SE-10

KSU)

The ESF-SE-10 KSU is the expansion
PSU slot, battery installation
space,
one expansion KSU can be installed
mounted with the ESF-SB-10 KSU.
KSU.

Figure 3-8

3.3.3

cabinet that provides the system with one
and three additional interface slots. Only
with the system- This KSU is floor or wall
Refer to Figure 3-8 - Level II Expansion

Level II Expansion

KSU

Opening the KSU Cover
The cover must be removed before floor or wall mounting
1.

the KSU.

Loosen the four cover screws and remove the front cover. Refer to Figure
3-9 - Removing the Level II Basic KSU Cover.

Figure 3-9

3-26

~..+j

Removing

the Level II Basic KSU Cover

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

‘,
.,’

Installation

Service Manual
3.3.4

Electra Professional
Wall Mounting
3.3.4.1

12O/Level II / Level II Advanced
the Basic and/or Expansion

Wall Mounting

Februarv

1993

KSUs

the Basic KSU

Before wall mounting the basic KSU, the wall mount bracket e
be
attached
to plywood.
Using 3/4-&h
fire retardant
plywood
backboard is recommended.
1. Using five screws (locally provided), attach the wall mount
bracket to the wali. Refer to Figure 3-10 - Attaching the Wall
Mount Bracket of the Level II Basic KSU to the Wall.

Figure 3-10

Electra Professional

Attaching

the Wall Mount Bracket

Level II and Level II Advanced

of the Level II KSU to the Wall

3-27

2.

Holding the Basic ESF-SB-10 KSU, lower the two hooks that
protrude from the rear of the KSU over the wall mount bracket.
Refer to Figure 3-11 - Attaching the Level II Basic KSU to the
Wall Mount Bracket.
,/i

Figure 3-11

3.

Using the two provided bolts, secure the KSU to the wall mount
bracket from the bottom.
Refer to Figure 3-12 - Securing the
Level II KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket.

Figure 3-12

3-28

Attaching the Level II Basic KSU to the Wall
Mount Bracket

Securing the Level II KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Cal

120/Level II / Level II Advanced
3.3.4.2

Wall Mounting

the Expansion

Februarv

1998

KSU

1. Remove the side panel (four screws) from the Basic KSU before
installing the expansion KSU. Refer to Figure 3-13 - Removing
the Side Panel.

Figure 3-13

Removing

the Side Panel

2. Attach the ESF-SE-10 KSU wall mount bracket to the existing
ESF-SB-10 KSU wall mount bracket and secure it to the wall
Refer to Figure
using two (locally
provided)
screws.
3-14 - Attaching
the Wall Mount Bracket
of the Level II
Expansion KSU to the Wall.

KSU
Bottom
Position
Expansion

Figure 3-14

Electra Professional

Wall

Attaching

Mount

Bracket

Dimensions

the Wall Mount Bracket of the Level II Expansion

Level II and Level II Advanced

KSU to the Wall

3-29

3.

Lift the Expansion
KSU and attach it to the Basic KSU by
placing the hook through the slot. Refer to Figure 3-15 - Hooking
the Level II Basic and Expansion KSUs Together.

Basic

Figure 3-15 -

4.

/ .I

Hooking the Level II Basic and Expansion
KSUs Together

Bolt the Expansion
KSU to the Basic KSU using the four
Refer to Figure 3-16 - Bolting the Level II
provided bolts.
Expansion KSU to the Basic KSU.

Figure 3-16

3-30

Expansion

Bolting the Level II Expansion
Basic KSU

Electra Professional

KSU to the

Level II and Level II Advanced

:’

marud

Februarv

Elecd
5.

1998

Using the provided bolts, attach the ESF-SE-10 KSU to the
expansion wall mounting
bracket from the bottom.
Refer to
Figure 3-1’7 - Attaching the Level II Expansion KSU to the Wall
Mounting Bracket.

Basic

Figure 3-17

Expansion

Attaching the Level II Expansion
Wall Mounting Bracket

KSU to the

6. Attach the ribbon cable, mounted
on the Expansion
KSU,
through the opening between the Basic and Expansion KSUs.
Refer to Figure 3-18 - Connecting the Cable Between the Level II
Basic and Expansion KSUs.

Basic

Figure 3-18

Expansion

Connecting the Cable Between Level II Basic
and Expansion KSUs

7. Attach the side panel (taken from the Basic KSU) to the right
side of the Expansion KSU.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-31

*Februar

1998
8.

3.3.5

Install
the front covers and tighten
the screws after the
installation
of the PSU, batteries, grounding cable, and KTUs is
complete.

Floor Mounting

the Basic and/or Expansion

Floor Mounting

3.3.5.1

.._:,

KSUs

the Basic KSU

1. Attach the two provided fioor mounting brackets to the underside
of the Basic KSU. Refer to Figure 3-19 - Bottom View of the Floor
Mounting Brackets.

ra3

CT3
1
z

/
Floor

Floor

Mounting
Bracket

Figure 3-19
2.

3.3.5.2

Bottom View of the Floor Mounting

Brackets

Set the Basic KSU on a level surface, near an AC outlet and
against a wall. Using two screws (locally provided) attach the
KSU to the floor.

Floor Mounting

the Expansion

KSU

1. Remove the side panel on the Basic KSU.
Refer
3-20 - Removing the Level II Basic KSU Side Panel.

Figure 3-20

3-32

Mounting
Bracket

Removing

to Figure

the Level II Basic KSU Side Panel

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

.>

2.

Lift the Expansion KSU and attach it to the Basic KSU by
placing the hook through the slot. Refer to Figure 3-21- Hooking
the Level II Basic and Expansion KSUs Together.

Basic

Expansion

h\’
--K

i?
0
0

Figure 3-21

Hooking the Level II Basic and Expansion
KSUs Together

3. Bolt the Expansion
KSU to the Basic KSU using the four
provided bolts.
Refer to Figure 3-22 - Bolting the Level II
Expansion KSU to the Basic KSU.

Figure 3-22

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Bolting the Level II Expansion
Basic KSU

KSU to the

3-33

4.

Attach the ribbon cable, mounted
on the Expansion
KSU,
through the opening between the Basic and Expansion
KSUs.
Refer to Figure 3-23 - Connecting the Cable Between the Level II
Basic and Expansion KSUs.

Basic

Figure 3-23

Expansion

Connecting the Cable Between the Level II
Basic and Expansion KSUs

5. Attach the side panel (taken from the Basic KSU) to the right
side of the Expansion KSU using the four screws.
6.

3-34

Install
the front covers and tighten
the screws after the
installation
of the PSU, batteries, grounding cable, and KTUs is
complete.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

‘.

3.3.6

Adding the Expansion
1.

KSU to an Installed

Loosen the four screws on the front cover and remove the cover panel.
Refer to Section 3.3.3 - Opening the KSU Cover and to Figure
3-24 - Removing the Level II Basic KSU Cover.

Figure 3-24

Removing

the Level II Basic KSU Cover

2.

Place the PSU power switch on the Basic KSU in OFF, and disconnect the
KSU from the power source.

3.

Disconnect the connectors from the KTU(s). When disconnecting, note the
Refer to Figure
position of the special connectors on the KTU.
3-25 - Disconnecting the KTUs from the Level II Basic KSU.

Figure 3-25

Electra Professional

System

Level II and Level II Advanced

Disconnecting

the KTUs from the Level II Basic KSU

3-35

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional
4.

12O/Level II / Level II Advanced

3-36

Service Manual

Remove the slide bracket, on the Basic KSU, and pull the cable through
the opening.
Refer to Figure 3-26 - Removing the Slide Bracket on the
Level II Basic KSU.

Figure 3-26
5.

Installation

Removing

the Slide Bracket

on the Level II Basic KSU

If wall mounting
Expansion KSU.

the system, refer to Section 3.3.4.2 - Wall Mounting

the

If floor mounting
Expansion KSU.

the system, refer to Section 3.3.5.2 - Floor Mounting

the

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual
3.3.7

Electra Professional

120/Level II / Level II Advanced

February

Installing

a PSF-S-20 PSU in the Basic and Expansion

3.3.7.1

General Information

1998

KSUs

This power supply is provided with both the Basic and Expansion
KSUs. It has a backup interface, accepts 117 Vat and outputs + W,
- 5V, and - 24V to the system.
Fuse Replacement:
To replace the fuse(s) in this PSU, first remove the PSU from the
KSU. Refer to Figure 3-27 - PSF-S-20 PSU Fuse Locations. Fuse Fl
is a 125V, 4A fuse for AC input. Fuse F2 is a 125V, 7A fuse for DC
input.

c

r

(AC Input)

Figure

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-27

PSF-S-20 PSU Fuse Locations

3-37

ed
3.3.7.2

Installing

Installation

Service Manual

a PSF-S-20 PSU in the Basic KSU

1. Install the PSF-S-20 PSU in the left slot of the Basic KSU and
Refer to Figure
secure using the two provided
bolts.
3-28 - Installing the PSF-S-20 PSU in the Level II Basic KSU.

Figure 3-28

3.3.7.3

Installing

.‘\
i

Installing the PSF-S-20 PSU in the Level II
Basic KSU

a PSF-S-20 PSU in the Expansion

KSU

1. Mount the PSF-S-20 PSU in the left slot of the Expansion KSU
Refer to Figure
and secure using the two provided bolts.
3-29 - Installing
the PSF-S-20 PSU in the Level II Expansion
KSU.

Figure 3-29

3-38

Installing the PSF-S-20 PSU in the Level II
Expansion KSU

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

- -.

2. Attach a tie wrap (locaily provided) 5 feet from the plug.
Figure 3-30 - Securing the PSU Cable Using a Tie Wrap.

Plug

PSU Cable

Refer to

Tie Wrap
I

J

I
u

I

Figure 3-30
3.

Securing the PSU Cable Using a Tie Wrap

Using the provided clamp and screw, attach the PSU cable to the
KSU as shown in the following
diagram.
Refer to Figure
3-31 -Attaching
the PSU Cable to the KSU.

PSU

Battery

Clamp

Figure 3-31

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Tie Wrap

Attaching

the PSU Cable to the KSU

3-39

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998
3.3.8

Battery
3.3.8.1

Installation

lBO/Level II / Level II Advanced

Service Manual

Installation
Connecting
1.

the Built-In

Batteries

Refer
Connect
the two batteries
in series.
3-32 - Connecting the Two PSF Built-In Batteries.
Red Cord
Black Cord

+
+

to

Figure

@
8
CAUTION

Be careful not to reverse the @ and 8 of the batteries.

Figure 3-32

2.

Connecting

Batteries

Install the battery hold-down plate and tighten the screw. Refer
to Figure 3-33 - Placing the Batteries in the Level II KSU.

\
Figure 3-33

3-40

the Two PSF Built-In

Battery

Hold-Down

Placing the Batteries

Electra Professional

Plate

in the Level II KSU

Level II and Level II Advanced

c

Februarv
3.

1998

Connect the cord to the DC IN connector of the power supply unit.
Refer to Figure 3-34 - Connecting
the Batteries to the Power
Supply Unit,

Power Supply Unit

Figure 3-34
3.3.8.2

Installing

Connecting

and Connecting

1. Remove the original
batteries.

the Batteries
Expansion
batteries

to the Power Supply Unit

Batteries
and disconnect the cords from the

2. Using the provided cords, connect the pairs of built-in batteries
and expansion batteries in parallel with each other. Refer to
Figure 3-35 - Connecting
Expansion Batteries to the Original
Batteries.

Original

Battery
\
Expansion

’

Figure 3-35

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Connecting
Batteries

Battery

Black

Expansion

Batteries

to the Original

3-41

---

Electra Professional

12O/Level II / Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

3.

Mount the original
batteries into the KSU
expansion batteries outside of the KSU.

4.

Connect the cord to the DC IN on the power supply unit of the
KSU. Refer to Figure 3-36 - Connecting the Batteries to the
Power Supply.

Figure 3-36

Connecting

the Batteries

and install

the

to the Power Supply

CAUTION

3.3.8.3

l

Ensure that the cord connected to the DC IN, on the power supply
unit, is disconnected before connecting the batteries.

l

Do not reverse the 63 and 8 polarities

l

When the batteries are connected, ensure that they are not in
contact with any metal on the KSU.

Cable Routing
The cable
connections
Connections

3-42

on the batteries.

routing
(with only the Basic KSU) and the cable
for built-in batteries are shown in Figure 3-37 - Cable
for the Expansion KSU.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.,,
-.;

To AC
Battery
Backup

Cable Connections

Figure 3-37
3.3.9

Grounding

for the Expansion

KSU

Requirements

The KSUs must be properly
redundant grounding methods.
used on a system.

The KSU is provided with two
grounded.
However, only one grounding method should be

1.

A dedicated AC outlet.

2.

Provide a suitable cold water pipe ground
operating telephone company procedures.

3.

If no water pipe ground is available, a g-round rod should be installed
accordance with the local operating telephone company procedures.

4.

A grounding terminal is provided on the ESF-SB-10 KSU. Connect the
grounding conductor to the hexagonal screw with the green colored head
terminal.
Refer to Figure 3-38 - KSU Grounding.

Note:

in accordance with the local
in

The provided ferrite core should be wrapped with the ground cable.

Ferrite Core

Figure 3-38
Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

KSU Grounding
3-43

3.4

Installing

the Level II Advanced

Observe these precautions
0

before

Key Service
installation

Unit (KSU)

and cabling of the KSU:

Be sure the PSU power switch is OFF, and disconnect
outlet.

the power cord from the AC

./I’

Do not touch the soldered surfaces of the KTUs with your hands.

l

3.4.1

Basic KSU (ESF-XB-10

KSU)

The ESF-XB-10 KSU, the basic system cabinet, has three fixed slots for the
CPU and MIF KTUs, one PSU slot, a battery installation
space, and eight
interface slots for the installation
of telephones, CO/PBX lines, Tie lines, VRS,
DID, Digital Trunk (TN, PBR, and ECR KTUs. The KSU can be either floor
mounted or wall mounted. Refer to Figure 3-39 - Level II Advanced Basic KSU.

Figure 3-39

3.4.2

Expansion

KSU (ESF-XE-10

Level II Advanced Basic KSU

KSU)

The ESF-XE-10 KSU is the expansion cabinet that has three fixed,slots for the
MMC and MIF KTUs, one PSU slot, and eight additional interface slots. A
maximum of two expansion KSUs can be installed with the system. This KSU
is installed on the Basic KSU as a building block. Refer to Figure 3-40 - Level II
Advanced Expansion KSU.

3-44

Electra Professional

)

Level II and Level II Advanced

Figure 3-40

3.4.3

Level II Advanced

Expansion

KSU

Opening the KSU Cover
The cover must be removed before floor or wall mounting
1.

the KSU.
Refer to Figure
Loosen the eight cover screws, and remove the front cover.
3-4l- Removing the Level II Advanced Basic KSU Cover.

Figure 3-41

Removing

the Level II Advanced

Basic KSU Cover

3-45
Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3.4.4

Wall Mounting
3.4.4.1

the Basic and/or Expansion

Wall Mounting

KSUs

the Basic KSU

Before wall mounting the basic KSU, the wall mount bracket must be
Using 3/4-inch fire retardant
psod
attached
to plywood.
backboard is recommended.

/

‘:
,

1. Using seven screws (locally provided), attach the wall mount
bracket to the wall using the template.
Refer to Figure
the Wall Mount Bracket of the Level II
3-42 - Attaching
Advanced Basic KSU to the Wall.
96.25

96.25

Expressed in mm

Figure 3-42

2.

of the Level II

Holding the Basic ESF-XB-10 KSU, lower the two hooks that
protrude from the rear of the KSU over the wall mount bracket
and secure to the wall mount bracket from the side using the two
provided bolts. Refer to Figure 3-43 - Attaching
the Level II
Advanced Basic KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket.

Figure 3-43

3-46

Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket
Advanced Basic KSU to the Wall

Attaching the Level II Advanced Basic KSU to
the Wall Mount Bracket

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

‘.

Installation

Service Manual

Electra

Professional

3.4.4.2

12O/Level II / Level II Advanced

Wall Mounting

the Expansion

February

1998

KSU

1. Remove the the front and back panels from the Basic KSU before
installing the expansion KSU. Refer to Figure 3-44 - Removing
the Front and Top Panels.

Figure 3-44

Removing

the Front and Top Panels

2. Using the seven screws (locally provided) attach the wall mount
Refer to Figure
bracket to the wall using the template.
the Wall Mount Bracket of the Level II
3-45 - Attaching
Advanced Expansion KSU to the Wall.

96.25

96.25

I

Expressed in mm

I

Figure 3-45

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket of the Level II
Advanced Expansion KSU to the Wall

3-47

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

120/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

3. Holding the Expansion KSU, lower the two hooks that protrude
from the rear of the KSU over the wall mount bracket and secure
to the wall mount bracket from the side using the two provided
bolts. Refer to Figure 3-46 - Securing the Level II Advanced,
Expansion KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket.

-TV.:
;’

Securing the Level II Advanced Expansion
KSU to the Wall Mount Bracket

Figure 3-46

4. Attach each Expansion KSU and top panel using the provided
screws. Refer to Figure 3-47 - Attaching Each Level II Advanced
Expansion KSU.

I
Figure 3-47

3-48

Attaching

_,
Each Level II Advanced

Electra Professional

Expansion

KSU

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual
3.4.5

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

Floor Mounting
3.4.5.1

the Basic an&or Expansion

Floor Mounting

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

KSUs

the Basic KSU

1. Attach the Floor Mounting
Bracket to the bottom side of the
Refer to Figure
Basic KSU, using the bolts provided.
3-48 - Attaching the Floor Mount Bracket to Basic KSU.

Figure 3-48

Attaching

the Floor Mount Bracket

2. Attach the Floor Mounting Bracket
locally provided.
Refer to Figure
Mount Bracket to the Floor.

Figure 3-49

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Attaching

to Basic KSU

to the floor using the screws
3-49 - Attaching
the Floor

the Floor Mount

Bracket

to the Floor

3-49

3.4.5.2

Floor Mounting
1.

the Expansion

KSU

Remove the top panel on the Level II Advanced Basic KSU . Refer
to Figure 3-50 - Removing the Level II Advanced Basic KSU Top
Panel.

Figure 3-50

Removing
Panel

the Level II Advanced Basic KSU Top

2. Remove the front panel from the Level II Advanced Expansion
KSU. Refer to Figure 3-51 - Removing the Level II Advanced
Expansion KSU Front Panel.

Figure 3-51

3-50

Removing the Level II Advanced Expansion
KSU-Front Panel

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

,,i
”
/.

3.

Attach each KSU and top panel using the provided screws. Refer
to Figure 3-52 - Attaching Each Level II Advanced Expansion
KSU.

Figure 3-52

3.4.6

Attaching

Each Level II Advanced Expansion

Installing

a PSF-P-20 PSU in the Basic and Expansion

3.4.6.1

General Information

KSU

KSUs

This power supply is supplied with both the Basic and Expansion
KSUs. It has a backup interface, accepts 117 Vat, and outputs + 5V,
- N, and - 24V to the system.
Fuse Replacement:
To replace the fuse(s) in this PSU, first remove the PSU from the
KSU. Fuse Fl is a 125V, 4A fuse for AC input. Fuse F2 is a 125V, 7A
fuse for DC input.
Refer to Figure 3-53 - PSF-P-20 PSU Fuse
Locations.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-51

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

120/Level II /Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

.--.._
‘,
;,i
2

Fl

Figure 3-53 - PSF-P-20 PSU Fuse Locations
3.4.6.2

Installing
1.

a PSF-P-20 PSU in the Basic KSU

Install the PSF-P-20 PSU in the left slot of the Level II Advanced
Basic KSU and secure using the two provided bolts. Refer to
Figure 3-54 - Installing
the PSF-P-20 PSU into the Level II
Advanced Basic KSU.

Figure 3-54

3-52

Installing the PSF-P-20 PSU in the Level II
Advanced Basic KSU

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

’ 2.

Connect the PSU cord to the terminal board. Refer to Figure 3-55
- Connecting the PSF-P-20 PSU to the Terminal Board.

Figure 3-55
3.4.6.3

Installing

Connecting

the PSF-P-20 PSU to the Terminal

a PSF-P-20 PSU in the Expansion

Board

KSU

1. Install the PSF-P-20 PSU in the left slot of the Expansion KSU
Refer to Figure
and secure using the two provided bolts.
3-56 - Installing
the PSF-P-20 PSU into the Level II Advanced
Expansion KSU .

Figure 3-56

Installing the PSF-P-20 PSU in the Level II
Advanced Expansion KSU

3-53
Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12O/Level II/Level

Installation

II Advanced

Service Manual

2. Connect the AC IN and AC OUT and the DC IN and DC OUT of
the respective PSUs. Refer to Figure 3-5’7 - Connecting the PSUs
in the Level II Advanced Expansion KSUs.

To
of lower cabinet

To AC OUT

of lower cabinet

Figure 3-57

3.4.7

Battery
3.4.7.1

Connecting the PSUs in the Level II Advanced
Expansion KSUs

Installation
Connecting

the Built-In

Batteries

Refer
1. Connect
the two batteries
in series.
3-58 - Connecting the Two PSF Built-In Batteries.
RedCord
Black Cord

-+

to

Figure

@
+= 8
CAUTION

Do not reverse the @ and 8 of the batteries.
Black

Figure 3-58

3-54

Connecting

the Two PSF Built-In

Electra Professional

Batteries

Level II and Level II Advanced

2.

Install the battery hold-down plate and tighten the screw. Refer
to Figure 3-59 - Placing the Batteries in the Battery Box.

Figure 3-59
3.

in the Battery

Box

Connect the battery cord to the terminal board. Refer to Figure
3-60 - Connecting the Battery Cable to the Terminal Board.

Figure 3-60

Electra Professional

Placing the Batteries

Level II and Level II Advanced

Connecting

the Battery

Cable to the Terminal

Board

3-55

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional
3.4.7.2

120/Level

Installing
1.

II /Level II Advanced

and Connecting

Installation

Level II Advanced

Service Manual

Expansion

Batteries

Connect the external battery cable to the battery. Refer to Figure
3-61- Connecting the Expansion Cable and Battery.

Red

Figure 3-61
2.

the Expansion

Cable and Battery

Connect the external battery to the terminal board. Refer to
Figure 3-62 - Connecting the External Battery to the Terminal
Board.

Figure 3-62

3-56

Connecting

Connecting
Board

the External

Electra Professional

Battery

to the Terminal

Level II and Level II Advanced

<

3.4.8

Grounding

Requirements

-

The KSUs must be properly grounded.
The KSU is provided with redundant
grounding methods. However, only one grounding method should be used on a
system.
1.

A dedicated

2a.

Provide a suitable cold water pipe ground
operating telephone company procedures.

2b.

If no water pipe ground is available, a ground rod should be installed
accordance with the local operating telephone company procedures.

2c.

A grounding terminal is provided on the ESF-XB-10 KSU. Connect the
grounding
conductor to the hexagonal bolt with the green colored head
terminal,
Refer to Figure 3-63 - Level II Advanced KSU Grounding.

Note:

AC outlet.

The provided ferrite

in accordance

with the local
in

core should be wrapped with the ground cable.

FG Terminal
./

Figure 3-63

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Level II Advanced

KSU Grounding

3-57

SECTION

4

INSTALLING

A KEY TELEPHONE

4.1

General

Information

4.1.1

Installation

(KTU)

Precautions

Before installing

4.1.2

UNIT

\

KTU, observe these precautions:
accidental damage
and maintenance,

. i

0

To prevent
installation
user.

to equipment, power must be OFF during
unless this seriously inconveniences
the

0

The KTUs used in this system make extensive use of CMOS technology
that is very susceptible to static; therefore, extreme care must be taken to
avoid static discharge when handling KTUs.

KTU Installation
1.

Make any connections and switch settings before inserting KTU in the
KSU. Refer to Sections 4.2 - Common Control KTUs, 4.3 - Interface
KTUs, and 4.4 - Optional KTUs for the switch settings for individual
KTUs.

2.

The MB switch on the KTUs (except the CPU and MMC KTUs) protects
circuits from damage during installation.
If the system power is ON
(during KTU installation),
ensure the MB switch is OFF. Refer to Figure
3-64 - KTU Positions on the KSU.

Figure 3-64

KTU Positions on the KSU
‘.

3-58

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3.

The component side of all KTUs must face the left side of the KSU when
installed.
Ejector tabs are always on the top. Refer to Figure 3-65 Removing a KTU from the KSU.
CAUTION
When a unit is installed or removed, make sure the power switch of the
KSU is OFF or that the MB switch of the KTU is OFF.

Figure 3-65

4.2

Common
4.2.1

Control

Removing

a KTU from the KSU

KTUs

CPU-F( j-20 KTU
The CPU-F(
j-20 KTU is the central processing unit (CPU).
A 16-bit
microprocessor executes the programs stored on the ROM ICs to control the
whole system, while transferring
data to and from other KTUs.
This KTU has a main control section and a Time Division Switch (TDSW)
section. It also has a built-in
external hold tone interface circuit.
Other
abilities include CNF (six, 4-party) circuits, internal
MOH source, DTMF
receivers (PBR), and KF (Key Function 1 and MF (Multifunction)
registration.
The RAM memory, on the CPU, is backed up with a rechargeable
retains the memory for approximately
14 days.

Electra Professional

battery,

that

This KTU must
ESF-XB-10 KSU.

be installed
in the CPU slot of the ESF-SB-10 KSU or
Only one CPU-F( j-20 KTU can be installed in the system.

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-59

Switch Settings
Before programming
System Data, the BTS switch must be ON to allow
memory retention if a power failure or brownout occurs. Failure to activate the
backup-battery
circuit (BTS ON) results in System Data reset to the default
values, the status of all stations reset to the default values, and the data
programmed
on the station to clear, if a power failure or brownout occurs. Refer
to Chapter 5 - Programming
in this manual for instructions,
if programming
using a Multiline
Terminal.
Refer to the Electra Professional Level II and Level
II Advanced System Program Technician Manual (included with the System
Program Technician Software 1 for instructions, if programming
using a PC.
Anytime a CPU-F( j-20 KTU is installed in the system, the clock/calendar
be set. This also applies when battery backup fails for any reason.

must

When the CPU-F( j-20 KTU is removed for long term storage, set the BTS
switch to OFF. This prevents the battery from constantly discharging.
The
fully charged battery retains memory contents for approximately
14 days.
Switch RES is the reset switch. When pressed, this switch interrupts all service
in progress, causing a Second Initialization.
This switch should not be used
in an operating
system unless absolutely
necessary.
MOHS INTEXT
selects the MOH source from either an internal or external
source. When the built-in music is used for the MOH source, set this switch to
INT. If an external MOH source is connected, set this switch to EXT. Refer to
Figure 3-66 - CPU-F( j-20 KTU Switch Settings and Table 3-15 - CPU-F( l-20
KTU Adjustments.
IMPORTANT
DIP switch position C is used to set KF or MF mode of operation.
Be sure
to set this switch in the desired position before powering
up the system.

3-60

Electra

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Battery

\
a
- /

DIP SW

. -

BTS

-

CN2
4

-

I

L

,LEDl

CNlOl

- RES

CN4

cl
q
EXT 0

GNDe
+ 5vw
- 5vI3

/TPl
-TP3
45 -

lNT+

ID-

-

TP2
MOHV
MOHS
MOHISTATION
BGM IN

The operation verification
LED (LEDl) always flashes when the
system is in normal operation, and is on steady when the system is
reset.

Figure 3-66

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

CPU-F(

j-20 KTU Switch Settings

3-61

Table 3-15

Memory

CPU-F(

l-20 KTU Adjustments

Should be ON to retain

Backup

MOH Volume

DIP Switch

Connector

TP

Note

1:

Internal

CN4

NIA

CNlOl

N/A

TPl

N/A

Ground voltage check terminal

TP2

N/A

+ 5V voltage check terminal

TP3

N/A

- 5V voltage check terminal

MOH has two melodies.

For connecting

the CLK-F-21

Select by System Programming

Unit.

melodies:

1. Melody Fair
2. LetItBe
Note 2:

3-62

Refer to Section 1.2.1- Company Notification.
change this switch status.

A First Initialization

Electra Professional

is required

to

Level II and Level II Advanced

Februarv
4.2.2

MM&F-11

1998

KTU

The MMC-F-11 KTU is the Module Memory Controller.
A $-bit microprocessor
and controller unit are required for each ESF-XE-10 KSU used in the Level II
This KTU controls data transmission
between
the
Advanced
system.
CPU-F(
j-20 KTIJ and the interface cards installed in the ESF-XE-10 KSU
where it is installed.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

LED1 on this KTU continuously
flashes indicating
it is receiving power. The
RES button allows this KTU to be reset. This resets the entire KSU where it is
installed. Refer to Figure 3-67 - MMC-F-11 KTU Switch Settings.

-

Figure 3-67

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

MMC-F-11

RES

-

LED1

3

TPl-3

KTU Switch Settings

3-63

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

lZO/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Installation
The MMC-F-11 KTU is installed in a fixed MMC slot on the ESF-XE-10 KSU.
The mounted ribbon cable is then connected to the CPU-F( l-20 KTU, located on
the ESF-XB-10 KSU. Before installing the MMC-F-11 KTU in the ESF-XE-10
KSU, install the attached ferrite core to the ribbon cable as shown below. Refer
to Figure 3-68 - Ferrite Core Installation
to MMC-F-11 KTU Ribbon Cable.

Figure 3-68

Ferrite

Core Installation

to MMC-F-11

KTU Ribbon Cable

CAUTION
This procedure can be performed

only when the system power is off.

If a second expansion cabinet (ESF-XE-10 KSU) is to be installed, the ribbon
cable of the MMC-F-11 KTU in this KSU must be attached to the MMC-F-11
KTU in the first expansion cabinet. Refer to Figure 3-69 - MMC-F-11 KTU and
CPU-F( j-20 KTU Installation.

FERRITE
EXPANSION

FERRITE

CORE

CORE

INCLUDED

IN

ACCESSORY

KIT

----b

CPU

Figure 3-69

3-64

MMC-F-11

KTU and CPU-F(

Electra Professional

j-20 KTU Installation

Level II and Level II Advanced

__
I‘:
”

Installation

Service Manual
4.3

Electra Professional

Interface
4.3.1

Februarv

lSO/Level II /Level II Advanced

1998

KTUs
ESI-F(8)-21

KTU

This KTU is an interface for Multiline Terminals, Attendant
Add-On Consoles,
and SLT Adapters [SLT-F(lG)-10
ADPI.
The ES1 allows connection of any
combination of eight Multiline Terminals, Attendant Add-On Consoles, or SLT
Adapters.
A maximum of seven ESI-F(8)-21 KTUs can be installed
and a maximum of 12 in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

in the Level II system

Indications

When the green LED (LED2) is on, the ES1 KTU is receiving power. The red
LED (LED11 indicates one or more of the eight circuits of the KTU is in use.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF switch for this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-70 ESI-F(8)-21 KTU Switch Layout.

-24V
GND

.

-

l

-

A-

TP3

/TP2
-TPl

+5v*-

LED1
(Red)
/
/

LED2
(Green)

-

MB

:
.
:
.
:

CH8
<
CH7
<
CH6
<

..

CH5
/
\

:

CH4
<

:

CH3
<

:
.
:

7’

Figure 3-70

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

ESI-F(8)-21

CH2
<
CHl
,

KTU Switch Layout

3-65

4.3.2

SLI-F@G)-21

KTU

The SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU is an interface for Single Line Telephones that has a
built-in ringing generator (RSG) and can support eight Single Line Telephones
or Voice Mail ports. If connecting Voice Mail to an SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU, it must
be assigned in System Programming.
The Single Line Telephone Interface Unit (SLI) provides circuitry for loop
status detection, talk battery, sending ringing signal from the RSG unit to
SLTs, and message waiting.
Note:

The PBR circuits in the CPU-F( j-20 KTU or the PBR-F(4)-11 KTU
are required with Voice Mail or Push Button Single Line Telephone
connection.

A maximum of six SLI-F(8G)-21
KTUs can be installed
and a maximum of 11 in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

in the Level II system

Indications

An SLI can support up to eight Single Line Telephones, modems, Voice Mail
ports, or fax ports. This SLI is required when power failure transfer of CO lines
(two maximum
per KTU) and/or message wait signaling
to Single Line
Telephones is used in the system.
When the green LED1 is on, the SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, one or more of the eight circuits of the KTU are in use.
Switch MI3 is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-71 - SLIF(8G)-21 KTU Switch Layout.

LED2
(Red)
LED1
(Green)

-

MB

CN2

1

Figure 3-71

3-66

SLI-F(8G)-21

Electra

KTU Switch Layout

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

:--?,
.si

Power Failure

4.3.2.1

Operation

Backup

if Power Fails

If power fails, the built-in batteries provide full backup of system
Backup can be longer if using locally
operation for 30 minutes.
provided
external
batteries
(the time depends on the system
configuration
and service conditions).
If a power failure transfer
(PFT) Single Line Telephone Interface Unit (up to two channels can
be connected to the SLI-F@G)-21
KTUJ is connected, the unit
connects a Single Line Telephone directly to a CO/PBX line to allow
origination
and termination
of calls. Refer to Figure 3-72 - Power
Failure Backup Flowchart.

I--

Power Failure

I

YES

Full system
backup
provided
during
battery
operation.
(Note 1)

NO

When
ended,

input power failure
has
the system
automatically
restorff
service.
(Note 3)

Note 1: The backup period for the Electra Professional Level II and Level II
Advanced systems is approximately
30 minutes (with built-in batteries)
or longer (external batteries added).
Note 2: All calls in progress are interrupted when switchover is made to connect
the power failure transfer Single Line Telephone directly to a CO/PBX
line. This occurs after backup batteries expire.
Note 3: If

the power switch of the
automatically
restore service.
Figure 3-72

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

KSU

is OFF,

the

system

does not

Power Failure Backup Flowchart

3-67

Electra Professional

Februarv1998

Installation

120/Level II /Level II Advanced

Operation

When Input Power Failure

Service Manual

Has Resumed

When input power is resumed, the system is automatically
reset and
restores service. A call in progress by the PFT Single Line Telephone
is disconnected.
Single Line Telephone for Power Failure
Only a Single Line Telephone

Transfer

can be used for power failure

transfer.

Connections:
Connect a CO line and Single Line Telephone for power failure
transfer via the SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU to the COI-F(4)-20 or COI-F(8)-20
KTU. A 4-conductor cable (locally provided) is required to connect
Refer to Figure
the SLI-F(8G)-21
KTU to the 66 Ml50 block.
3-73 - Connecting CO Line and Single Line Telephone for Power
Failure Transfer.
Note:

When selecting a Single Line Telephone for power failure
transfer, make sure it matches the dialing type of the CO line
(10 pps, 20 pps, or DTMF) where it is connected.
If Ground
Start trunks are used, a Single Line Telephone with a ground
button must be used.

PF’T WITH

SLI KTU

T
CO/PBX

COI

Figure 3-73

3-68

----JJ

R

Connecting

Channels

CO Line and Single Line Telephone

Electra

l&2

for Power Failure

Professional

Transfer

Level II and Level II Advanced

...\
;,i:

Installation

Service Manual
4.3.3

Electra Professional
LLT-F(2G)-10

120/Level

II /Level II Advanced

Februarv

1998

KTU

The Long Line Telephone
(LLT) KTU provides for the termination
and
operation of up to two Off-Premise Extensions (OPX). Each LLT-F(2G)-10 KTU
has a built-in ring supply generator (RSG). Up to 3000 ohms of loop resistance
(including the Single Line Telephone) is acceptable between the LLT-F(2Q-10
KTU and a Single Line Telephone.
The LLT-F(2G)-10
KTU does not support
message waiting.
A maximum of six LLT-F(BG)-10 KTUs can be installed in the interface slots of
the Level II system and a maximum of 22 in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the LLT-F(2G)-10 KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, one or more of the two circuits of the KTU are in use. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-74 - LLT-F(BG)-10
KTU Switch Layout.
Note:

PBR in the CPU-F( l-20 KTU or PBR-F(4)-11
Push Button SLT Connection.

KTU is required

with

LED2
(RED)
LED1
(GREEN)

/
/
ON
OFF

-

MB

CN3

Figure 3-74

Electra

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

LLT-F(BG)-10

KTU Switch Layout

3-69

4.3.4

COI-F(4)-20

KTU and COI-F(4)-30

KTU

The Central Office Line Interface Unit (CO11 contains circuitry
detection, holding, dialing, and control function.

for outside ring
‘..

Each COI-F(4)-( ) KTU provides four identical circuits to support up to four CO
trunks that can be any mix of Loop Start or Ground Start, DTMF or Dial Pulse
dialing.
Tip and Ring electrical fuses (posistors) PST101 - PST402 are
provided to comply with UL 1459 2nd Edition requirements.
The COI-F(4)-30
also has two connectors for mounting the CID-F(8)-21.
A maximum
of seven CO1 KTUs can be installed
maximum of 16 in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

in the Level II system and a

Indications

The COI-F(4)-20 KTU contains four switches (designated as SW1 - SW4) for
the selection of trunk type (Loop or Ground Start). Each switch is associated
with an individual
circuit.
Red LEDs (101-401)
indicate the status of the
circuit. Refer to Figure 3-75 - COI-F(4)-(20) KTU Switch Layout.
The COI-F(4)-30 KTU contains four switches (designated SW1 - SW4) for the
selection of trunk type (Loop or Ground Start). Each switch is associated with
an individual
circuit. The LEDs are located on the back of this CO1 KTU. Red
LEDs
(l-4)
indicate
the status
of the circuit.
Refer to Figure
3-76 - COI-F(4)-(30) KTU Switch Layout.
When a Loop Start trunk is connected to a circuit, its associated switch must be
set to LP. If a Ground Start trunk is connected, the switch must be set to GS.
When the green LED1 is on, the CO1 is receiving
ON/OFF control for this KTU.

3-70

Electra Professional

power.

Switch

MB is the

Level II and Level II Advanced

?
!
.:x’

J-

LED1
(Green)

QJ r’
ON
OFF

LP

m

I

GS

/

I- - MB
I

PST 402

SW4

-L
SW3

SW2

LP

I

17

GS

SW1

Figure 3-75

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

COI-F(4)-20

KTU Switch Layout

3-71

1

/

CN5

,.:
,i

PST 402

LP

m

I

GS

SW4

SW3

LP

I

m

GS

SW2

4ti
PST 101

Figure 3-76
4.3.5

COI-F(8)-20

L
a:
L:D

LPImps

CN4

I===f==:)

SW1
/

COI-F(4)-30

KTU and COI-F(8)-30

KTU Switch Layout
KTU

The Central Office Line Interface Unit (COI) contains
detection, hold, dialing, and control functions.

circuitry

for outside ring

Each CO1 KTU provides eight identical circuits to serve up to eight CO trunks
that can be any mix of Loop Start or Ground Start, DTMF or Dial Pulse dialing.
Tip and Ring electrical fuses (posistors) PST101 - PST802 are provided to
comply with UL 1459 2nd Edition requirements.
The COI-F(8)-30 also has two
connectors for mounting the CID-F(8)-21.
A maximum of seven CO1 KTUs can be installed in the interface slots in the
Level II system and a maximum of eight in the Level II Advanced system.

3-72

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Switch Settings/LED

Indications:

The COI-F(8)-20 CO1 KTU contains eight switches (designated SW1 - SW8) for
the selection of trunk type (Loop or Ground Start). Each switch is associated
with an individual circuit. LEDs (101 - 801) indicate the status of each circuit.
Refer to Figure 3-77 - COI-F(a)-20 KTU Switch Layout.
The COI-F(8)-30 CO1 KTU contains eight switches (designated SW1 - SW8) for
the selection of trunk type (Loop or Ground Start). Each switch is associated
with an individual circuit. LEDs (1 - 8) indicate the status of each circuit. The
LEDS are located on the back of the COI-F(8)-30 KTU. Refer to Figure 3-78 COI-F(8)-30 KTU Switch Layout.
When a Loop Start trunk is connected to a circuit, its associated switch must be
set to LP. If a Ground Start trunk is connected, the switch must be set to GS.
When the green LED1 is on, the CO1 is receiving
the ON/OFF control for this KTU.

power.

Switch

MB is

a

I
SW8

LED2
(Red)
LED1
(Green)

SW7

SW6

i

MB

\
SW5
\

SW4

0
LED
401

\
\

\

SW3

SW1

Figure 3-77

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

COI-F(8)-20

KTU Switch Layout

3-73

Februaw

Electra Professional

1998

f
)

..
1..
1.
LED2
(Red)
LED1
(Green)

CH7
CH6
CH5

CH4
CH3
CH2
CHl

Service Manual

PST 802

s.
I-I

Figure 3-78

3-74

Installation

\

\

CH8

12O/Level II /Level II Advanced

COI-F(8)-30

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

4.3.6

CID-F(8)-11

Unit

The CID unit detects Caller ID signal from Telco through COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU
for Caller ID trunks connected to the system. This unit works in conjunction
with the COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU and MIF-(C)-lO KTU and is piggybacked on the
COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU.
One CID-F(8)-11 Unit can be installed on each COI-F(4/8)-30 KTU; a maximum
of seven CID-F(8)-11
Units can be installed in the Level II system and a
maximum of eight, in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

The CID unit has three switches (designated SWl-1 - SWl-3) and two LEDs.
Switches SWl-2 and SWl-3 are not currently used and should be off. When
switch SWl-1 is on (default setting), the system does not detect the time when
caller ID is sent from the Telco. When switch SWl-1 is off, the system does
detect this time. LED 1 is currently not being used. When LED2 flashes red, the
CID is communicating
with the CPU. Refer to Figure 3-79 - CID-F(8)-11 Unit
Switch Layout.

II
LED

II

1 LED

2

SW1
1

3
EB
i

Figure 3-79

Connection

to COI-F(4/8)-30

CID-F(8)-11

Unit Switch Layout

KTU

To connect the CID-F(8)-11 Unit to the COI-F(4/8)-30
KTU, refer to Figure
3-80 - Connecting the CID to the COI, and make the following connections:

Electra Professional

0

CO1 CN4 to CID CNl

0

CO1 CN5 to CID CN2

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-75

February

1998

Electra

Professional

12OILevel II /Level II Advanced

Figure 3-80

Connecting

Installation

Service Manual

the CID to the CO1

Caller ID Considerations
General
Caller ID service provides the name and telephone
to the called party on a loop start trunk.

number

of the calling

party

Installation
Caller ID is user sensitive; the customer can activate or deactivate this service
by dialing the proper access code and receives a confirmation
announcement
from Stored Program Control Switching @PCS). The SPCS is the Central Office
switching system.
The customer can enter several different access codes to access various functions
and features.
If an improper access code is dialed, the customer receives a
reorder tone or special announcement.
Caller ID can be denied by
class-of-service.
Caller ID can be provided to customers that use either DTMF or dial pulse
signaling.
If Caller ID is to be installed, the SPCS may need new transmission
equipment and should be equipped with Common Channel Signaling (CCS) to
send data to other SPCSs.
Each SPCS keeps data records of all customers connected to it.
include: Traffic, Maintenance, Billing, and other measurements.

3-76

Electra Professional

Data records

Level II and Level II Advanced

Electrical

Specifications

ASCII-coded information
is sent from the SPCS to the Customer Premise
Equipment (CPE) on the tip and ring leads of a standard local loop at 1200 bps.
Other parameters are as follows:
simplex, two wire

LinkType:
Transmission

Scheme:

analog, phase coherent frequency

Logic 1 (Mark):

1200 + 12Hz

Logic 0 (Space):

2200 k 22Hz

Transmission

1200 bps

Application

Rate:
of Data:

serial, binary,

asynchronous

Bit Error Rate:

less than 1 in 100,000,000

Phase Continuity:

maintained

Transmission

-13.5 * 1 dB at point
load of 900 ohms

Level:

Bit Duration:

shift keying

from initial

833 * 50 psec
duration)

bits (at switch interface)
service to end of message
of application

(start/stop

bit

to resistive
has

standard

The asynchronous protocol should have a start bit, an &bit data byte, and a stop
bit. Caller ID is transmitted
to the CPE in this lo-digit format. Possible future
options may allow Personal Identification
Number (PIN) instead of Caller ID.
Information
should be sent in either a single or multiple
Figure 3-81- Data Message Format.

data message. Refer to

Single (used for providing Calling Number ID only)

Channel

Carrier

Message

Message

Data

Seizure
Signal (1)

Signal (2)

Tspe
Word (3)

Length
word (4)

Word(s)
(5)

Parameter
Multiple

Parameter

N

(used for providing both Calling Number ID and Calling Name ID)

Channel
Seizure
Signal

Mark
Signal

Mark
>- Bits
(0 - 10)

Message
Type
Word

Parameter
Word

Mark
Bits

Message
Length

Parameter
Type

More
Parameter
Messages

Mark
Bits
(0 - 10)

Mark

1Parameter

1

(0 - 10)

More
Parameter
Words

Figure 3-81

Electra Professional

1

Checksum
Word (6)

Level II and Level II Advanced

More
Messages

Checksum

Data Message Format

3-77

A description

of each parameter

1 Channel
2 Carrier

Seizure Signal

in the message format

follows:

30 continuous
bytes of 01010101
detectable alerting signal to CPE.

provides

a

150 ms of logical 1 for line conditioning.

Signal

3 Message Type Word

For example, Caller ID is message type 4; message
waiting is message type 10.

4 Message Length

Specifies number
include checksum.

Word

5 Data Word(s)

of bytes

to follow;

does not

Data to be transmitted.
Caller ID form
WWXXYYZZ followed by the Caller ID, where

is

WW = Month
XX = Day
YY = Hour (24-hour clock)
ZZ = Minute
6 Checksum

Word

This is the modulo
the message.

7 Parameter

Type Word

For example,
name.

8 Parameter

Length

Specifies
parameter

Required

Word

parameter

number
only.

1 is time; parameter

of bytes

to follow

for

7 is
this

Equipment

Refer to Table 3-16 - Required Equipment
Table 3-16

3-78

256 sum of all other words in

Required

Equipment

Electra

for Caller ID.
for Caller ID

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

-s
2’
-U

4.3.7

DID-F(4)-10

KTU

The DID KTU provides for the termination
and operation of up to four DID
lines. Wink start, delay start, and immediate
start are accommodated.
Dial
Pulse and DTMF are supported.
A maximum of seven DID-F(4)-10 KTUs can be installed in the Level II system
and a maximum of eight in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the DID-F(4)-10 KTU is receiving power. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. LEDs 101 - 401 represent the four
individual
circuits and their status. A busy line indication lamp (LED 101 LED 401) lights when the associated line (CHl - CH 4) is busy. Refer to Figure
3-82 - DID-F(4)-10 KTU Switch Layout.

Piggyback

I

I

/LED
201
/LED
101
‘/LED1
(Green)

LED 301
LED 401

ON

-

MB

OFF

CN2
CH2

I

I

This KTU includes a piggybacked

Figure 3-82

Electra Professional

package and cannot

DID-F(4)-10

Level II and Level II Advanced

L

CHl

be separated.

KTU Switch Layout

3-79

February

Electra _ Professional

1998
4.3.8

TLI-F(B)-10

12OILevel II /Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

KTU

The TLI KTU provides for the termination
and operation of up to two E&M Tie
lines (4-wire E&M, Type I or Type V, 10 or 20 pps, Dial Pulse, or DTMF).
Immediate
start, wink start, delay start, and second dial tone signaling are
provided.
A maximum of seven TLI-F(2)-10 KTUs can be installed
and a maximum of 16 in the Level II Advanced system.
Switch Settings/LED

in the Level II system

Indications

Switches designated SW101 and SW201 allow selection of Type I or Type V for
channels 1 and 2 respectively.
Red LEDs 101 and 201 indicate the status of the two associated circuits.
When the green LED1 is on, the TLI-F(Z)-10 KTU is receiving power. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to 5.2.3.1 - TLI-F(B)-10 KTU
Cable Connections and to Figure 3-83 - TLI-F(2)-10 KTU Switch Layout.

LED

- MB

-L
CH2

SW201
I
Type

CN2

0
1

Type

V

CH 1

I’

Type 1 Type V

.

Figure 3-83

3-80

TLI-F(B)-10

/

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

,.,_
-;
.’

Installation

Service Manual
4.3.9

Electra Professional
DTI-F(
4.3.9.1

lZO/Level II /Level II Advanced

)-lo KTUIDTI-F(A)-20
DTI-F(

KTU, BRT-F(4)-10

j-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

The Digital
of a Tl/FTl,

Trunk Interface
24 DS-0 (Digital

February
KTU, and CLK-F-21

1998

Unit

KTU

(DTI) KTU provides for the termination
Service - Level 0) or fewer, line.

A combination of Loop and Ground Start signaling can be used on one
DTI-F( j-10 KTU. DTMF or Dial Pulse dialing is also supported. The
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU also supports Tie lines (E&M) and DID signaling.
Refer to Figure 3-85 - DTI-F(A)-20 KTU Switch Layout (Series 300 or
higher).
Only one DTI KTU can be supported in the Level II system and must
be installed in the IFl/OPl
slot. Up to three DTI KTUs can be
installed in the Level II Advanced system and must be installed in
the IFl/OPl or IF4/OP4 slots of the Basic KSU or the IFl/OPl slot of
the first Expansion KSU that is installed.
If a DTI KTU is used, the
interface slot(s) adjacent to the DTI interface slot may need to be left
vacant. The number of slots that must remain vacant depends on the
number of DTI channels being used. To use this KTU, a CLK-F-21
synchronization
unit must be connected on the CPU-F( l-20 KTU.
Refer to Figure 3-91 - Installing the DTI-F( l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU in the ESF-SB-10 KSU and Table 3-21 - Required Slots for
DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU Installation.
When using a second DTI KTU in the Level II Advanced system, this
KTU must be connected to the first DTI KTU installed in the system.
A third DTI KTU is then connected to the second DTI KTU that is
installed.
Refer to Figure 3-93 - Connecting the Cable Between the
DTI-F( l-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20 KTUsand the CLK-F-21 Unit.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED11 is on, the DTI KTU is receiving power. LEDs
1 - 8 indicate various statuses depending on the switch setting. The
red LED9 is the operation verification lamp. LED 9 flashes when the
system is operating normally; it is on steady when the system is reset.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-84
- DTI-F( j-10 KTU Switch Layout, Figure 3-85 - DTI-F(A)-20
KTU
Switch Layout, Table 3-17 - DTI-F( j-10 KTU!DTI-F(A)-20
KTU
Switch Settings for MB and SWl, Table 3-18 - DTI-F( l-10 KTU/DTIF(A)-20 KTU Switch Settings for SW2, and Table 3-19 DTI-F( l-10
KTUDTI-F(A)-20
KTU LED Indications.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-81

/
0
0
I

Piggyback

El

I

SW1

’

LED9

:

LED7

LED8

SW2

LED6

I

:

LED4
LED3

7 CN4
0

5

LED2
LED1

CN5

>

ON

cl

LED5

CN6

OFF

LED1 1
(Green)

-MB

CN4

:I

cl

I
/

Figure 3-84

DTI-F(

I
j-10 KTU Switch Layout

LED9

J-

LED8
LED7
LED6

Piggyback

Figure 3-85

3-82

DTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Layout (Series 300 or higher)

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Table 3-17

Switch
Position

Switch

DTI-F(

l-10 KTUIDTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Settings

Initial
Setting
(O=OFF

Adjustment

l=ON)
MB

SW1

N/A

OFF

1

OFF:

0

2

OFF:

0

3

OFF:

0

4

OFF:

0

5

OFF:

0

6

OFF:

0

7

OFF:

0

8

OFF:

0

for MB and SW1

Power supply to the KTU must be ON during operation.
Loop Back Setting
PSWl-1
-SWl-2
0
:
1
i
1
1

No Loop Back
Future Use
Line Loop Back ON
Not Used

Not Used (Must be 0 when operating.)

Note 1:

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (also known as blue signal) is provided by the Central Office to
ensure continuity of the output signal. AIS is applied to ensure that no more than 80 consecutive
zeros are transmitted.
When a valid signal is available, the AIS may be removed. The AIS is an
unframed, all ones signal: Either the Central Office or far end equipment may busy out an entire
DS-1 facility by sending an AIS. Ifan AIS is received (because it is unframed), the Yellow Alarm
is transmitted
to the far end.

Note 2:

Explanation
l

of Switch Positions:

SWl-1 = 0 and SWl-2 = 0
This position is used for normal operation

l

SWl-1
Future

l

SWl-1 = 1 and SWl-2 = 0
This position is used to receive patterns,
accommodate embedded equipment that
is set, the data signals that are received
These data signals are regenerated, by
removing any bipolar violations.

l

Electra Professional

= OandSWl-2
Use

(e.g. ,talking,

or idle).

= 1

listed for inband line loopback, without framing, to
sends unframed control signals. When this position
by the system are transmitted
back to the network.
the system, without changing the framing format or

SWl-1 = 1 and SWl-2 = 1
Not Used

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-83

mle

Switch

Switch
Pas&ion

3-18

DTI-F(

j-10 KTIYDTI-F(A)-20

KTU Switch Settings

Initial
Setting
(0 = OFF

Adjustment

l=ON)
MB

SW2

Note:

3-84

If multiple
priority,

for SW2

N/A

OFF

1

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
of the Tl(24 DS-01 channel.

the status of CH 1 - 8

2

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
of the Tl(24 DS-0) channel.

the status of CH 9 - 16

3

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
17 - 24 of the Tl(24 DS-0) channel.

the status of CH

4

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
from the Tl trunk.

the status of the alarm

5

OFF:

0

If this switch is ON, LED 1 - 8 indicates
from the Tl trunk.

the status of the alarm

6

OFF:

0

7

OFF:

0

8

OFF:

0

Not Used (Must be 0 when operating.)

switches are set to ON, the lower numbered

switch (SW21

Electra Professional

- SW2-5.) has the highest

Level II and Level II Advanced

Table 3-19

DTI-F(

I-10 KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

KTU LED Indications

1

c

SW2-2 ON
(Note 1)

SW2-3 ON
(Note 1)

SW2-4 ON
(Notes 2 and 3)

LED

SW2-1 ON
(Note 1)

LED1

CHl

CH9

CH17

LSA detection

TSC detection

LED2

CH2

CHlO

CH18

AIS detection

ESA detection

LED3

CH3

CHll

CH19

OOF detection

LOS detection

LED4

CH4

CH12

CH20

RAI detection

LED5

CH5

CH13

CH21

LED6

CH6

CH14

CH22

LED7

CH7

CHX

CH23

LED8

CHS

CH16

CH24

Note 1:

SW2-1 - SW2-3 indicate the status of Tl(24

Note 2:

SW2-4 - SW2-5 indicate the status of the Tl trunk

Note 3:

Explanation

of Alarm

SW2-5 ON
(Notes 2,3, and 4)

DS-0) channels.
alarm.

Conditions:

LEDl:
Line Synchronization
Alarm (LSA) Detection
If the Tl trunk has lost frame synchronization,
the LED lights red.
LEDB: Alarm Indication
If the system is receiving

Signal (AIS) Detection
AIS from the Tl trunk,

the LED lights red.

LED3: Out-of-Frame Condition (OOF) Detection
If two of the four or five data framing bits that are received are in error, this LED lights
red.
LED4: Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) Detection
If the remote alarm signal is received, this LED lights red.
LED5: Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Error Event Detection
If a CRC error has occurred, the LED lights red.
LEDG: Excessive Bipolar Violations (BPV) Detection
If an excessive bipolar violation condition is detected, the LED lights red.
LED7: Controlled Slip Event (Slip) Detection
If the difference between the timing of a synchronous
receiving terminal
and the
received signal exceeds the buffering ability of the synchronous terminal, the LED lights
red.
Note 4:

SW2-5 = 1
l
l
l

Electra Professional

LEDl: Transmit Short Circuit (TSC) detection
LEDB: Jitter Attenuator
Alarm (ESA) detection
LED3: Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection
If the Tl signal from the trunk is not received, the LED lights red.

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-85

4.3.9.2

BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

This KTU provides four identical
Basic Rate Trunks (S/T Interface,
electrical fuses (posistors) PTCl
comply with UL 1459 requirements.

circuits to serve up to four ISDN
8 Voice channels).
Tip and Ring
through PTC16 are provided to

-..,,
‘:
2

A maximum of four BRT -F(4)-10 KTUs can be installed in Level II
system, and a maximum
of eight can be installed in the Level II
Advanced system.
This KTU has one, 4-position

connector for connection

This KTU can be installed in IFl/OPl,
slots of basic KSU and first Expansion
CLK-F-21 Unit must be installed
BRT-F (41-10 KTU.

to the MDF.

IF2/OP2, IF3/OP3,
KSU.

on the CPU-F(

or IF4/OP4

j-20 KTU to use the

l

When any other trunk KTU such as COI-F(4/8)-20
KTU, COIF(4/8)-30 KTU, TLI-F(2)-10
KTU, or DID-F(4)-10
KTU is
installed in slots to the left of the BRT-F(4)-10 KTU, the BRT F(4)-10 KTU is assigned before the other trunk KTU on a first
power on.

l

Multipoint
connection is not allowed in conjunction
with the
BRT-F(4)-10 KTU. Connectors CNll, CN21, CN12, CN22,CN13,
CN23, CN14, and CN24 are set between pin 1 and pin 2 as default
and should be set as is.

l

If DTI KTU is installed, use the clock cable interconnection
required for Tl circuits. Ensure that CLK-F-21Unit
jumper Sl is
set for 1.5M. For this case, the BRT KTU is installed without
CLK Unit considerations; clocking is derived from the Tl.

To connect the BRT KTU and the CLK Unit:
Connect BRT-F-(4)-10 KTU CN2 to CLK-F-21 Unit CN3 using the
cable provided with the CLK-F-21 unit.
Refer to Figure 3-86 Connecting the Cable Between the BRT-F(4)-10 KTU and the CLKF-21 Unit.
It is unnecessary to connect the second and succeeding
the CLK-F-21 Unit.

BRT KTUs to

l

Clock cable is not required between 1st and 2ndBRT KTU.

o

The BRT KTU connected to the CLK-F-21
connected to live ISDN Basic Rate trunks.

Unit

must

be

I

3-86

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

CNl

ISDN
Line

L

BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

ISDN

NT1

Line

2nd BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

CNl

ISDN

NT1

Line

I

1st BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

User

h
to CLK

TOCLK

CN2

Provided

Unit

Ferrite
(wrap

Core
cable2

turns)

CLK UNIT
FM DTI

Figure 3-86

Electra Professional

Connecting the Cable Between the BRT-F(4)-10
CLK-F-21 Unit

Level II and Level II Advanced

KTU and the

3-87

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

Refer to Figure 3-87 - BRT-F(4)-10 KTU Switch Layout.
The BRTF(4)-10 KTU has two switches, SW1 and SW2. SW1 is the ON/OFF
control for the KTU. SW2 has four individual
switches that are set
OFF as default, and must be left OFF for operation.

‘:
..,’

Red LEDs 1 to 8 indicate status of four associated circuits. LED1 and
LED5 indicate status of first BRT line. LED1 is on after the layer 2
link is established.
LED5 is on when the voice path is established on
Bl channel, B2 channel, or both Bl and B2 channels. LED2 and LED
6 provide the same indications as LED1 and LED6 for the second BRT
line, LED3 and LED7 provide these indications
for the third BRT
line, and LED 4 and LED8 provide them for the fourth BRT line.
Green LED9 is on when the BRT KTU is receiving
CLK-F-21

Unit for the BRT-F(4)-10

power.

KTU

The CLK-F-21
Unit provides
sunchronization
connected to the system. For additional information,
4.3.9.3 CLK-F-21 Unit.

for ISDN lines
refer to Section

DIP
SWITCH

(SW2)

DN

01
-

OFF

MB (SWl)

CN 24

ml

CN 22

ml

CNl2

CH4
CH3
7
CH2

CN21

ml

Figure 3-87

BRT-F(4)-10

CHl

CNll

KTU Switch Layout

_’

3-88

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Install

BRT-F(4)-10

KTU

1. Install the BRT-F(4)-10 KTU in slots IFl/OPl to IF4/OP4 in first
and second cabinets of the Level II Advanced system or first
cabinet of Level II system.
2.

Connect cable between NT1 and BRT KTU. as shown in Figure 386 BRT-F(4)-10 KTU Interconnect.

3.

Install cable between
interface).

4.

Connect BRT U interface

to the MDF.

5.

Connect BRT U interface

from MDF to the NTl.

NT1

and

ISDN

Basic Rate Trunk

6. Use two twisted-pair
cables to connect cable from
interface output) to BRT KTU CNl as shown below.

4.3.9.3

(U

NTl(S/T

l

The BRT KTU cannot be connected directly to a Telco providing
the Basic Rate Trunk U interface.
An ISDN Termination
Adapter NT1 (locally provided by the customer) must be installed
between Telco and BRT-F(4)-10 KTU.
)

l

The maximum distance from the BRT-F(4)-10
feet, using 22 AWG twisted pair cable.

CLK-F-21

KTU to NT1 is 300

Unit

The CLK Unit provides synchronization
for Tl and ISDN lines
connected to the system. This unit works in conjunction with the
DTI-F(
j-10 KTU, DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, or BRT-F(4)-10 KTU and is
piggybacked on the CPU-F( j-20 KTU.
Only one CLK-F-21

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Unit can be installed

in either system.

3-89

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

LED1 is off if the 1.5 MHz clock is provided from the Tl or ISDN
trunk.
LED2 is off if the output clock to the CPU-F( )-20 KTU (16
MHz) is provided from the CLK-F-21
Unit.
Refer to Figure
3-88 - Mounted CLK-F-21 Unit.

--“i
./

Top View
/
7

CPU-F( )-20 KTU

C
1.1
TST

.‘I’.

l

1.5M
BRT
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . I “1
l
.

.a-

.

LED1 0
LED2 a
*. I,
CN4:
:
. . II

.‘I’.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ram*

TPl

51

CNl

CLK-F-21 Unit

c

CN2 i

’
4

CN3 :
L. I

1
/

Figure 3-88

Mounted

CLK-F-21

c
0 LED1
0 LED2
. . .
: CN4
. . .
.
: CN2
m. .
: CNZ
. . .

Unit

’

3-90

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

To connect the CPU-F(
following connections:

4.3.9.4

)-20 KTlJ and the CLK-F-21

l

CLK CNl and CPU CNlOl

l

CLK CN4 and CPU CN4

Unit make the

Tl Considerations
IMPORTANT

NOTE

Before installing
the CLK-F-21 unit in the CPU-F( j-20 KTU, the
Sl strap on the CLK-F-21 unit must be moved from the BRT
setting to the 1.5M setting.
General
Tl/FTl
refers to a physical communications
facility
(circuit)
commonly referred to as Tl/FTl pipe with 1.544 mbps of bandwidth.
The Tl/FTl pipe can be divided into 24 channels, each rated
(Digital Signal, Level 0). This is equivalent
to 24 or more
circuits and/or multiple data channels (leased lines). ‘Each DS-0
kbps of bandwidth.
The carrier uses 8 Kbps of Tl/FTl bandwidth
network supervision and diagnostics, leaving 1.536 mbps for
data.
Electrical

DS-0
voice
is 64
for
user

Specifications

The electrical
specifications
describe the Tl/FTl
Tl/FTl crossconnect interface, and the characteristics
received from and transmitted
to the Tl/FTl facility.
1. Support Digital

Trunk Type:

2. Support Trunk Signal Type:

interface, the
of the signals

Tl, FTl
DTI-F( )-lo KTU:
CO/FXWATS,
Loop and Ground
Start
(Determined
in
System
Programming)
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU:
CO/FX/WATS,
Loop and Ground
start,
Tie
line
(E&M),
DID
(Determined
in
System
Programming)

3.

Support Line Coding:*

4.

Output Characteristics:
Line Bate:
Line Impedance:
Pulse Amplitude (Base to Peak):

ZCS or BSZS Method (Determined
in System Programming)

5. Input Characteristics:
Line Bate:
Pulse Amplitude (Base to Peak):
Frame Synchronization:*

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

1.544 mbps + - 50 bps
100 51
CCITT G. 703
1.544 mbps + -200 bps
1.5V - 3V
12-Multiframe
*

3-9 1

Input Jitter:
Cable Length from Electra
Professional Level II to CSU:
csu:
*

24-Multiframe
*
CCITT G. 743
Maximum
655 ft. (with
AWG)
Channel Service Unit

22

-.:.\

Refer to the notes for an explanation.

Notes:
Line Coding
If zero data is being continuously
transmitted
over a Tl/FTl
trunk,
the end equipment
(Electra Professional
Level II system, Level II
Advanced system, or digital PBX) cannot operate normally because
there is no clock synchronization.
EIA/TIA-464-A
specifies two line
coding methods for normal operation.
1. Zero Code Suppression (ZCS)
2. Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution (BSZS)
This method
depends on the LXC (Local ExchangeYIXC
(Interexchange).
The installer
must ask the LXCIXC
to
determine
whether the configuration
is ZCS or BSZS.
The
installer
must assign this configuration
using the Electra
Professional
Level
II and Level
II Advanced
System
Programming.
Frame Synchronization
According to EIA/TIA-464-A
for 24-channel transmission,
there are
two
types
of frame
configurations:
12-multiframe
and
24-multiframe.
This method depends on the LXC/IXC.
The installer
must ask the LXC/IXC to determine whether the configuration
is 12or 24-Multiframe.
The installer must assign this configuration
using
the Electra Professional
Level II and Level II Advanced System
Programming.
12-Multiframe
This frame has 12-Multiframes
and each Multiframe
has a
24-channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel)
and an F bit (Super Frame
Bit). Refer to Figure 3-89 - 12-Multiframe
Configuration
and Bit
Assignment.

.:

3-92

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

CHl
F

CH2

1234567812345678

___

I
I
I

1-1
--- ___-a---

Figure 3-89

12-Multiframe

Configuration

_____-----

and Bit Assignment

24-Multiframe

This frame has 24-Multiframes
and each Multiframe
has a
24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel)
and an F bit (Super Frame
Bit). Refer to Figure 3-90 - 24-Multiframe
Configuration
and Bit
Assignment.

CHl
F

CH2

1234567812345678

----mJ

II

__e---

Figure 3-90

24-Multiframe

Configuration

___-----

__-----

and Bit Assignment

Installation
Table 3-20 - Equipment
Required
equipment required for Tl.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

for Tl

Installation

shows the

3-93

Table 3-20

Equipment

Required

for Tl Installation

Description
DTI-F(

J-10 KTU

DTI-F(A)-20
CLK-F-21

24 channels Tl/FTl

Quantity

trunk interface

1,2, or 3

board

KT
Unit

Tl/FTl

Clock Synchronization

Unit

Connection cable between DTI and CLK package
(4 MHz clock)

Installation

Cable

Twisted pair transmission

cable between

1 per DTI KTU and CLK interface
(included with DTI KTU)
-OR1 per DTI KTU and DTI KTU
interface

DTI and MDF

Connection cable between DTI and CLK
(1.5 MHz clock)

1 per CLK Unit
(included with CLK Unit)

Interface

1 per DTI KTU

equipment

between Tl Trunk and DTI KTU

To install:
1. Install the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU and the CLK-F21 Unit in the Level II ESF-SB-10 KSU. Refer to Figure 3-91 Installing
the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the ESFSB-10 KSU.
To install the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the Level
II Advanced system use interface slots IFl/OPl
or IF4/OP4 slots
on the ESF-XB-10
KSU or the IFl/OPl
slot on the first
ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
Refer to Figure 3-92 - Installing
the
DTI-F( l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU in the ESF-XB-10 KSU or
ESF-XE-10 KSU.
Note:

3-94

If the DTI KTU is used, the interface slot(s), adjacent to
the DTI interface slot, can be used. The number of slots
that must remain empty depends on the number of DTI
channels being used.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

p: 0p
1.

ESF-SB-10 KSU

C

rJ

:
1
0
0
P
1

I
5
/
0

I
E

I
;
0
0

2’

ESF-SE-10 KSU

-

-

3’

P
:

-

GEt

DTI-F(

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

Figure 3-91

KTU

Installing the DTI-F(
the ESF-SB-10 KSU

l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

2. Install the cable between the Tl/FTl
KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU.
a.

b.
c.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

trunk

KTU in

and the DTI-F(

j-10

Connect the Tl/FTl trunk to the MDF.
Refer to Table 3-35 - Connection Information/Connection
Port Relationships.

and

Connect the Tl trunk from the MDF to the CSU.
To connect the cable from the CSU to CNl on the DTI-F(
KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU:

j-10

(1)

Wrap the cables, provided
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU, twice
core.

with the DTI-F( j-10 KTU or
(two turns) around a ferrite

(2)

Connect the cable from the CSU to CNl on the
DTI-F( j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU, using the MDF
Cable Assembly. Refer to Figure 3-93 - Connecting the
Cable Between the DTI-F( j-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20
KTUs and the CLK-F-21 Unit.

Note 1:

The maximum
or DTI-F(A)-20
22 AWG.

distance from the DTI-F( j-10 KTU
KTU to the CSU is 655 feet, using

Note 2:

The customer must purchase
to install the Ta.

the CSU equipment

3-95

yFebruar

1998

Electra Professipj

120/Level II /Level IImced

DTI-F(

ESF-XE-10

KSU

0
5’
i
U

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

0

Installation

Service Manual

KTU

I

Yl
C
1
:

1

:

/
0
P
1
=
0

ESF-XB-10

KSU

5’
U

1

0

I
:
1

1

5

/
0
P
1

DTI-F(

Figure 3-92

Table 3-21
DTI-F(A)-20

3-96

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU

Installing the DTI-F( l-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
ESF-XB-10 KSU or ESF-XE-10 KSU

Required Slots for DTI-F(
KTU Channels

j-10 KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU in the

KTU Installation

Used

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

d. To connect the DTI-F(
CLK-F-21 Unit:

)-lo KTU or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU and the

(1) Wrap the cables, provided with the DTI-F(
DTI-F(A)-20
core.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

KTU,

twice

(two turns)

)-lo KTU or
around a ferrite

(2)

Connect CN6 and CN4, on the DTI-F(
)-lo KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU, to CN2 and CN3, on the CLK-F-21
Unit, using the provided cable with the DTI-F(
)-lo
KTU
or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU.
Refer to Figure
3-93 - Connecting the Cable Between the DTI-F(
)-lo
KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20 KTUsand the CLK-F-21 Unit.

(3)

When connecting
a second DTI-F(
)-lo KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU in the Level II Advanced system,
connect CN6 on the second DTI-F(
)-lo KTU
or
DTI-F(A)-20 to CN5 on the first DTI-F(
)-lo KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU after wrapping this cable [provided
with the DTI-F( )-lo KTU or DTI-F(A)-20
KTUI twice
(two turns) around a ferrite core.

(4)

When installing
a third
DTI-F(
)-lo
KTU
or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU in the Level II Advanced system,
follow the same procedure in step 3 for connection
between the third and second DTI-F(
)-lo KTU or
DTI-F(A)-20
KTU. Refer to Figure 3-94 - Example of
Three DTI-F(
)-lo KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20
KTUs
Attached to the CLK-F-21 Unit.

3-97

CNl

CN6

DTI KTU

i

CNl

..-

CN6

DTI KTU

I

i

i
i

.--(-.-.J

CN5

i
i

I

i

I

1

csu

DTI KTU

TOCLK

CN6

I

i
-L
1.5 MHz clock
to CLK Unit

CN5
TOCLK

I

4 MHz clock
from CLK Unit

1

CN4

Ferrite
(wrap

Core
cable 2 turns)

CLK UNIT
FhfDTI

Figure 3-93

3-98

CN2
CN4

r

CN4

.

Note: If a BRT KTU is installed, set CLK
unit jumper to 1.5 (Tl). Cable connection to
BRT KTU from CLK Unit is not required if
both DTI and BRT KTUs are installed.

Connecting the Cable Between the DTI-F( j-10 KTUs or
DTI-F(A)-20 KTUs and the CLK-F-21 Unit

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

~~&ion

fhvice

Manual

Electra hfessionallZOILeve1

II/Level

II Advanced
Februarv

ll
J-C-

Figure 3-94

Example

of Three DTI-F(

I-

I-10 KTUs or DTI-F(A)-20

KTU
9

Atta ceh d t 0 th e
CLK-F-21

Unit

1998

4.3.9.5

ISDN Considerations
ISDN trunks connected to the ElectraProfessional
Level II/Level
II Advanced system require clock signals the same as Tl
BRT Without

Installed

If an ISDN KTU
connect the clock
BRT KTU in the
CLK unit jumper

--.._
\
.,i

DTIs

is installed in a system without DTI KTUs,
cable from CN3 on the CLK unit to CN2 on first
system. The CLK unit CN2 is not used. The
is set to BRT.

BRT With Installed

DTIs

In this configuration,
the ElectraProfessional
Level II/Level II
Advanced system derives clocking from the Tl. Use connection
scheme in Figure 2-49. The CLK unit jumper is set to 1.5M. A
cable connection is not required between the BRT KTU and the
CLK unit or any DTI KTU.
4.4

Optional

4.4.1

KTUs

PBR-F(4)-11

KTU

The Push Button Receiver (PBR) KTU detects and translates DTMF tones
generated by Single Line Telephones, modems, or facsimile machines.
This
KTU is required if the four built-in PBR channels (CPU) are not enough to
support all of the single-line devices of the system.
Only one PBR-F(4)-11
Advanced systems.
Switch Setting/LED

KTU

can be installed

in the Level II and Level

II

Indications

When the green LED1 on the PBR-F(4)-11 KTU is on, the KTU is receiving
power. When the red DTMF signal-indication
LED2 is on, one or more DTMF
signal receiver circuits are receiving DTMF signals. Switch MB is the ON/OFF
control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-95 - PBR-F(4)-11 KTU Switch Settings.

3-100

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Jnstallation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Fm

-54

LED2
#AzYd)
/(Green)

-

53
MB

-

s2

-

51

PBR-F(4)-11

Figure 3-95

KTU Switch Settings

If adjustkent
to the DTMF signal detection level is required, adjust using strap
wire $1 - $4. Refer to Table 3-22 - DTMF Signal Adjustments.
Table 3-22

Option
DTMF signal
receiving
gain

Electra Professional

DTMF Signal Adjustments

Strap
Wire
Settings

Default
Settings

Strap wires:

Strapping
wires
zonnected

$1 - $4

Level II and Level II Advanced

Adjustment
Default settings are done to allow reception
of -34 dBm - -4 dBm DTMF signals. To
increase the receiving gain, cut the strap
wires (-42 dBm - - 12 &Em DTMF signals
can be received).
$1: Channel 1 receiving gain
$2: Channel 2 receiving gain
$3: Channel 3 receiving gain
$4: Channel 4 receiving gain

3-101

4.4.2

VRS-F(4)-11

KTU

The VRS-F(4)-11 KTU provides record/playback
of voice messages for the
Automated Attendant, Voice Prompt, and Delay Announcement
features.
A maximum

of two VRS-F(C)-11

KTUs can be installed

in either system.

.- . ?
!
,,’

Each VRS-F(4)-11 KTU has four record/playback
channels.
The maximum
recording time of each channel is 240 seconds. The recording time for each
channel can be divided as follows:
0
0
l

15sec.
30 sec.
60 sec.

*
*
*

16 messages
8 messages
4messages

=
=
=

240 sec.
240 sec.
240 sec.

0

120sec.

*

2 messages

=

240 sec.

Switch Settings/LED

Indications

SW 1, on both the Main and Expansion PCBs, controls battery power for memory
backup. These must be turned ON for retention of VRS memory for this KTU if
power fails.
Note:

Do not separate the Main or Expansion

PCBs.

LEDs 1 and 2 (on the Main PCB) represent channels 1 and 2. LEDs 1 and 2 (on
the Expansion PCB) represent channels 3 and 4. These LEDs light red when in
use (recording or playing messages). When the green LED 3 on the VRS-F(4)-11
KTU is on, the KTU is receiving power. Switch MB is the ON/OFF control for
this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-96 - VRS-F(4)-11 KTU Switch Layout.

_’

3-102

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

EXPANSION

PCB

MAIN

PCB
LED1
(Red)

CH4
CH3

- MB

ON
.

ON

;
.: :-1. :
‘..

OFF

!
OFF

(

h.

.

.
[.....I

1

Expansioh
Battery

PCB

4.4.3

l

*-...

VRS-F(4)-11

L

Expansion
PCB

Main
PCB

\

Main PCB
Battery

Figure 3-96

l

.

I

T

I

s
ra

Ia

Switch

.

c-

, . . . . . ,

Switch

1

KTU Switch Layout

ECR-F-11 KTU
The ECR-F-11 KTU provides two RCA jacks and eight relay contacts. Three of
the eight relays are used for External Paging contact, one is used for Night
Chime contact, and the other four are used for External Tone Ringer. One of the
two RCA jacks is used for External Tone Ringer/Night
Chime audible output.
The other RCA jack is used for External Paging audible input/output.
Refer to
Figure 3-97 - ECR-F-11 KTU Switch Layout and Table 3-23 - ECR-F-11 KTU
Connectors/Adjustments.
Only one ECR-F-11

KTU can be installed

Switch Setting/LED

Indications

in either system.

When the green LED1 on the ECR-F-11 KTU is on, the KTU is receiving power.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Refer to Figure 3-97 - ECR-F11 KTU Switch Layout and Table 3-24 - ECR-F-11 KTU Optional Device
Connection Terminals.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-103

nal12O/Level

n/Level

Installation

II Advanced

0
0

Service Manual

e

JK2
\

JK2 (For

External

Paging)

,

JKl (For External
Tone
Ringer/Night
Chime)

JKl

VRl

CNl

31

\

\

MB Switch
LED1

-

For Maximum Volume of External
Turn VRl Counterclockwise

Figure 3-97

Ringer Output:

ECR-F-11

KTU Switch Layout

..

3-104

Electra

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Table 3-23
Adjustment
Item

I

ECR-F-11

Name of
Switch

KTU Connectors/Adjustments
Initial
Setting

I

Adjustment
I

External

Tone Ringer

JKl

N/A

To connect the External Speaker for
External Tone Ringer/Night
Chime

External

Paging

JK2

N/A

To connect the External
External Paging

VRl

Center

External Tone
Ringer/Night
Chime
Volume Control

Table 3-24
PinNo.

ECR-F-11
,1

To adjust the External

KTU Optional Device Connection

Terminal

16

8RM

15

8RC

Name

1

Speaker for
Tone Output Level

Terminals

Function
External

Tone - Ringer 4

I

I

4.4.4

14
13

7RM
7RC

External

Tone - Ringer 3

12
11

6RM
6RC

External

Tone - Ringer 2

10
9

5RM
5RC

External

Tone - Ringer 1

8

4RM

7

4RC

6
5

3RM
3RC

External

Paging - Zone C

4
3

2RM
2RC

External

Paging - Zone l3

2
1

1RM
1RC

External

Paging - Zone A

MIF-F(S)-10

Night Chime

KTU

The MIF KTU allows the connection of a personal computer to perform System
Programming
and up/down loading of System Data and provides Station
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) to be output using the RS-232 cable to a
printer. Refer to Figure 3-102 - SMDR Print Formats. These two functions can
be operated at the same time.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-105

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Only one MIF-F(S)-10
KTU can be installed in either system. Refer to the
Electra Professional Level II and Level II Advanced System Program Technician
Manual
(included
with the System Program
Technician
software)
for
programming
instructions using a PC.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF:F(S)-10 KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 flashes, the MIF is exchanging data communications
with the
system CPU. When the red LED3 is on, the SMDR function is outputting
a call
record. Refer to Figure 3-98 - MIF-F(S)-10 KTU Switch Layout. Switch Ml3 is
the ON/OFF control for the KTU. Also refer to Table 3-25 - MIF-F(S)-10 KTU
Switch (SW3) Settings for PC and MNP Modem Connections,
Table 3-26 MIF-F(S)-10 KTU Switch (SW4) Settings for Printers, Table 3-27 - MIF-F(S)-10
KTU - DTE PC or Printer Connections, and Table 3-28 - MIF-F(S)-10
KTU DCE MNP Modem Connections.

3
0’

ON
OFF

SW3

.

MB

la

SW4
ON

ON

OFI

OFF
123

456

78

123

456

78

.

lzl

9k”,:s%;:
Computer/Modem)

CNB

e

Cable
Connection
(only for SMDR
Output)

CN,lO
El

Figure 3-98

3-106

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

‘y,

Table 3-25

MIF-F(S)-10

Switch
Position
(SW31

I
I
I

ON/OFF
Setting

for PC and MNP Modem Connections

Description

1

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Connection to CN7
0: PC Direct
1: MNP Modem Connected

2

OFF:
I ON:

0
1

Not Used

3

OFF:
I ON:

0
1

Not Used

4

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

5

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Parity and Stop Bits:

6

7

8

Electra Professional

KTU Switch (SW31 Settings

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

0
1

0
1

0
1

Level II and Level II Advanced

sw3-5

SW3-6

0

0

1

Parity
::ti

Stop

Bits

None

2

0

None

1

0

1

Even

1

1

1

Odd

1

SW3-7

sw3-8

RS-232C

0

0

9600

bps

1

0

4800

bps

0

1

2400

bps

1

1

1200

bps

Baud Rates:

3-107

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

Table 3-26

lZO/Level
_

II/Level

MIF-F(S)-10

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

KTU Switch (SW4) Settings for Printers

Description

0: Operation Mode
1: Test Mode:
Operation
Note:

of MIF stops when set

Parity and Stop Bits:

3-108

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Februarv

Table 3-27

MIF-F(S)-10
I
I

I

1

RXD(RD)

5

TXD(SD)

4

CTS(CS)

6

RTS(RS)

3

DTR(ER)

7

SG(SG)

8

DSR(DR)

2

Note:

1

(FG)FG

2

_-- < -__

2

(SD)TXD

(RD)RXD

3

--- > ---

3

(RD)RXD

14

(RS)RTS

4 1

---<---

4

(RS)RTS

-+

5

(CS)CTS

5

--- > ---

5

(CS)CTS

+

6

(DR)DSR

6

--- > ---

6

(DR)DSR

7

(SG)SG

7

-------

7

(SG)SG

20

(ER)DTR

20

--- < ---

20 (ER)DTR

8

(CD)DCD

8

--- < ---

8

1 1

c

2

(SD)TXD

-+

3

c
ICI

The arrow shows the direction

MIF-F(S)-10

(CD)DCD

operation.

KTU - DCE MNP Modem

Connections

Reverse
RS-232
Cable

MNP Modem

1

(FG)FG

1

-------

1

(FQFG

t

2

(SDJTXD

2

--- < ---

3

(RD)RXD

4

--,

3

(RD)RXD

3

--->---

2

(SD)TXD

6

t

4

(RS)RTS

4

--- < ---

5

(WCTS

1

RXD(RD)

5

I’XD(SD)
r=TS(CS)

--_---

3

1 --,

1 5

(CS)CTS

5 1

---> ---

14

(RS)RTS

1

7

I ---,

I 6

(DR)DSR

6 I

---> ---

I20

(ER)DTR

I

8

1 ------ 1 7

(SGBG

7 1

-------

17

(SG)SG

1

1+

18

(CD)DCD

8 1

--- < ---

18

(CD)DCD

1

1 t

1 20

(ER)DTR

20 1

--- < ---

16

(DRjDSR

1

DCD(CN10)
DSR(DR)

of data flow during

MIF Cable
Assembly

*

FG(FG)

DTR(ER)

Electra Professional

-m----m

(FG)FG

-_____

MIF (CN7)

PC or Printer

I

1

1 t

Table 3-28

Note:

I

--__-_

DCD(CN10)

COI nections

Straight
RS-232
Cable

MIF Cable
Assembly

+

MIF (CN7 & CN8)
FG(FG)

KTU - DTE PC or Printer
I

1998

2

The arrow shows the direction

Level II and Level II Advanced

of data flow during

operation.

3-109

Installation
The MIF-F(S)-10 KTU can be installed in an Option Slot (OP) or in one of the
four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl - IF4/OP4), in the ESF-SB-10 KSU, ESF..‘:I;
XB-10 KSU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
This KTU is shipped with
two cable assemblies (MIF cable assembly). One end of each cable has an RJ35 _.;.;;”
(8-pin) connector. The other end of the cable terminates at an RS-232 connector.
This connector must be mounted on one of the above mentioned KSUs.
After installing the KTU, connect the RJ35 pin connectors to CN8 or CN7 in the
MIF-F(S)-10 KTU. When connecting a PC, connect the small connector on the
MIF Cable Assembly to CNlO on the MIF-F(S)-10
KTU, then remove the RS232 connection bracket from the KSU and attach the RS-232, on the MIF Cable
Assembly, to the RS-232 connection bracket using the screws on the RS-232
This same connection procedure must also be performed on the
connectors.
ESF-XB-10 KSU or ESF-XE-10 KSUs. Refer to Figure 3-99 - Connecting the
MIF Cable Assembly and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU and
Figure 3-100 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU
to the ESF-XB-10 KSU.

Figure 3-99

Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU

and the MIF-F(S)-10

. ...
.s

3-110

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

Figure 3-100

Electra Professional

Connecting
ESF-XB-10

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

the MIF Cable Assembly
KSU

Level II and Level II Advanced

and the MIF-F(S)-10

Februarv

1998

KTU to the

3-111

Printer

Connection

Required

for SMDR

Equipment:

1.

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU with the NEC provided MDF Cable Assembly

2.

RS-232 Straight

3.

Standard

,,‘

Cable

Printer

To install:
1.

Set SW4 DIP switch to adjust for the printer

2.

Install

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN8 on the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU and the
Basic KSU. Refer to Figure 3-99 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the standard

5.

Place the MIF-F(S)-10

6.

Program Memory Blocks:
13,14,25, and 26.

the MIF-F(S)-10

on the MIF-F(S)-10

KTU.

KTU in the KSU.

printer

using the straight

RS-232 cable.

KTU MB switch ON.
System Mode (LKl)

SMDR/LCR

(LK5) No. 02,

PC or MNP Class 5 Modem Connection for Electra Professional
Level II Advanced &stem Program Technician Software:

Level II and

This section is a basic overview of System Programming
using a PC. For
specific information,
refer to the Electra Professional
120/Level II/Level II
Advanced System Program
Technician Manual (included with the Electra
Professional System Program Technician software). Also, refer to Figure 3-101
- MIF-F( > -10 KTU Direct and Remote Connections, Figure 3-102 - SMDR Print
Formats, and Figure 3-103 - SDMR Print Formats Item Numbers.
Required

Equipment:

1.

MIF-F(S)-10

KTU with NEC provided MIF Cable Assembly

2.

RS-232 straight
connection)

3.

IBM@ or IBM compatible
or higher1

4.

NEC Electra Professional

5.

Standard dot matrix
station labels)

6.

MNP Modem Class 5 or higher (required

cable (for direct

connection)

or reverse cable (for remote

PC with 286 or higher
System Program

printer

(if required

and MS-DOS@ Version 3.3

Technician
for printing

Software
job specifications

or

for remote connection)

To install:
1.

Set SW3 DIP switch to adjust for a PC or modem on the MIF-F(S)-10

2.

Install

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN7 and CNlO on the MIF-F(S)-10
KTU and the KSU. Refer to Figure 3-99 - Connecting the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(S)-10 KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the PC using a straight
using a reverse RS-232 cable.

5.

Turn the MB switch, on the MIF-F(S)-10

the MIF-F(S)-10

KTU.

KTU in the KSU.

RS-232 cable or connect the MNP modem
KTU, to ON.
,’

1

The following areregistered

3-112

trademarks

of the following companies:

IBM of Itiernatianal

Business Machines.

MS-LOS of Microsoft

Electra Professional

Corporation.

Level II and Level II Advanced

Direct Connection:

PC and System

Basic KSU
OP Slot or
IF1 - IF4
MIF-F( j-10 KTU

MIF Cable
Assembly

CN7
CNlO 11

C

(RS-232)
Straight
Cable

Remote Connection:

MNP Modem Used

Basic KSU

PC

I Printer

OP Slot or
IF1 - IF4
MIF-F()-10

CN7
CNlOn

KTU

MIF Cable
Assembly

Straight
Cable

L
(RS-232)
Reverse Cable

Figure 3-101

Electra Professional

MIF-F(

u

j-10 KTU Direct and Remote Connections

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-113

1. Outgoing Call
07/03/92
A
00: X:32
G
2.

Outgoing

09 :oo
B

08-05-12
c

OG
D

123
E

08-05-12
C

OG
D

123
E

-4
,/

102885167537000
H

Call (LCR)
09 :oo
B

07/03/92
A
00: 15:32
G

102885167537000
H
LCR
K

3. Incoming

Call

07/03/92
A
00: 15:32
G
4.

DISA (Both incoming
07/03/92
A

09 :oo
B

05-12
C

Ic
D

123
E

05-12
C

Ic

D

999
E

08-05-12
C

i-32
D

999
E

9727517622
H
and outgoing

are printed)

09 zoo
B

234
F

00: 15:32
G
DlOO
J
07/03/92
A
00: 15:32
G
1234567890
I

09 :oo

B
102885167537000
H
DlOO
J

Note 1:

Example number 4, above, is the SMDR output format when the incoming caller hangs up first. If
the called party hangs up first, the SMDR output information
is reversed.

Note 2:

A - K are the printout item numbers. The temporary station number
Refer to Figure l-103 - SMDR Print Formats Item Numbers.

Figure 3-102

3-114

is 999.

SMDR Print Formats

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

The following

provides an explanation

A.

Start
07
03
92

B.

Start Time:
09 = hour
03 = minute

c.

Trunk Information:
08-05-12
08
= Route Advance Block
05
= TrunkGroup
12 = TrunkNumber

D.

Type
IC
OG
ICC
OGC
IT
OT
ITC
OTC

E.

F.

Date:
= month
= day
= year

of each item that appears on the SMDR printout.

of
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

07/03/92

09:oo

Call:
Incoming Call
outgoing Call
Conference on Incoming Call
Conference on Outgoing Call
Transferred Incoming Call
Transferred Outgoing Call
Conference on Transferred Incoming
Conference on Transferred Outgoing

Station Number:
12 3
This number depends on whether
Programming.
Transferred
Station Number:
This number depends on whether
Programming.

G.

CaIlDuration:
00:15:32
00
= hour
15 = minute
32
= seconds

H.

Number Dialed:
Maximum number
Caller ID Number:

I.

Account

in System

234
the system is set as 2-, 3-, or 4-digit station number

in System

102885167537000
of characters is 24.
9727517622

Code:

A1234567890

If Account

Code and Forced Account Code are entered,

Maximum

number

Station

Number

Maximum
K.

the system is set as 2-, 3-, or 4-digit station number

Account
Code Entry:
1234567890
Maximum number of characters is 16.
Forced

J.

Call
Call

number

of characters
of the DISA
of characters

SMDR Prints:

1234567890

A1234567890

is 13.
Caller
is 4.

LCR ( Least Cost Routing)
Figure 3-103

Electra Professional

SMDR Print Formats

Level II and Level II Advanced

Item Numbers

3-115

4.4.5

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU

The MIF-F(L)-10 KTU allows the connection of a personal computer to perform
System Programming
and up/down loading of System Data, provides Station
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) to be output via the RS-232 cable to a serial
printer, provides Least Cost Routing (LCR), and supports scroll and dial out
using Caller ID.
Only one MIF-F(L)-10
KTU can be installed in either system. Refer to the
Electra Professional 120/Level IVLevel II Advanced Least Cost Routing Manual
(included with the Electra Professional Level II and Level II Advanced Least
Cost Routing software) for LCR instructions.
Refer to the Electra Professional
lBO/Level II/Level II Advanced System Program Technician Manual (included
with the Electra Professional
System Program
Technician
software) for
programming
instructions using a PC.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(L)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is flashing, the MIF is exchanging data communications
with the
system CPU. When the red LED3 is on, the SMDR function is outputting
a call
record. Refer to Figure 3-104 - MIF-F(L)-10 KTU Switch Layout. Switch MB is
the ON/OFF control for this KTU. Also refer to Table 3-29 - MIF-F(L)-10
KTU
Switch
(SW31 Settings
for PC and MNP Modem
Connections,
Table
3-30 - MIF-F(L)-10
KTU Switch (SW4) Settings
for Printers,
Table
3-31 - MIF-F(L)-10
KTU - DTE PC or Printer
Connections,
Table
3-32 - MIF-F(L)-10 KTU - DCE MNP Modem Connections.

3-116

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

-.
‘:
-J’

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

lZO/Level II/Level

February

II Advanced

1998

Battery
Backup
Switch(SW2)

Battery
Backup

A-

RAM-F(

)-1 1 UNIT
/(Green)

-

SW3

MB

SW4

ON
OFF
123

456

123

78

45678

. DIP switch
(Printer)

-L !I
.

DIP Switch
(Personal
Computer/Modem)

I:I lal
CN 10

Z-Pin MIF Cable

Connector

Figure 3-104

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Connection

CN7

\

Cable
Connection
(only for PC or
Modem)

(For Modem)

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch Layout

3-117

Table 3-29

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch (SW31 Settings for PC and MNP Modem Connections

Description

0:

PC Direct

Parity and Stop Bits:

3-118

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Table 3-30
Switch
Position
(SW41
1

5

6

7

8

Electra Professional

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU Switch (SW4) Settings for Printers

ON/OFF

Description

Setting
OFF:
ON:

0
1

Mode Setting:
0: Operation Mode
1: Test Mode:
Note:
Operation of MIF stops when set
to the test mode.

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Data Bits (RS-232C for Printer)
0: &bit
1: 7-bit

OFF:

0

ON:

1

Parity and Stop Bits:
sw4-5

sw4-6

Parity

Stop

Bits

0

0

None

2

OFF:

0

1

0

None

1

ON:

1

0

1

Even

1

1

1

Odd

1

sw4-7

sw4-8

RS-!zxX

0

0

4800

1

0

2400 bps

0

1

1200 bps

1

1

300 bps

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

Level II and Level II Advanced

0
1

0

Baud Rates:

bps

1
’

3-119

February

1998

Electra

Professional

120/Level II/Level

Table 3-31

MIF-F(L)-10

II Advanced

Installation

KTU - DTE PC or Printer

Service Manual

Connections
PC or Printer

XR(DR)

2

XD(CN10)
Note:

c

20

(ER)DTR

20

--- < ---

20 (ER)DTR

c

8

(CD)DCD

8

-_- < ---

8

The arrow shows the direction

Table 3-32

MIF-F(L)-10

of data flow during

(CD)DCD

operation.

KTU - DCE MNP Modem Connections
MNP Modem

Note:

The arrow shows the direction

of data flow during operation.

\
::

3-120

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation
The MIF-F(L)-10 KTU can be installed in an Option Slot (OP) or in one of the
four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl - IF4/OP4), in the ESF-SB-10 KSU, ESFXB-10 KSU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
This KTU is shipped with
two cable assemblies (MIF cable assembly). One end of each cable has an RJ35
(8-pin) connector. The other end of the cable terminates at an RS-232 connector.
This connector must be mounted in the KSU. This same connection procedure
must be performed on the ESF-XB-10 KSU or ESF-XE-10 KSUs. Refer to
Figure 3-105 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly and the MIF-F(L)-10
KTU
to the ESF-SB-10 KSU and Figure 3-106 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
and the MIF-F(L)-10 KTU to the ESF-XB-10 KSU.

Figure 3-105

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU

and the MIF-F(L)-10

3-121

Figure 3-106

Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
KTU to the ESF-XB-10 KSU

and the MPF-F(L)-10

.

3-122

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Printer

Connection

Required

for SMDR

Equipment:

1.

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU with the NEC provided

2.

RS-232 Straight

3.

Standard

MDF Cable Assembly

Cable

Printer

To install:
1.

Set SW4 DIP switch on the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU to adjust for the printer.

2.

Install the MIF-F(L)-10

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CNS on the MIF-F(L)-10 KTU and the
KSU. Refer to Figure 3-104 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly and the
MIF-F(L)-10 KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the standard

5.

Place the MIF-F(L)-10

6.

Program Memory Blocks:
13,14,25, and 26.

KTU in the KSU.

printer

using the straight

RS-232 cable.

KTU MB switch ON.
System Mode

PC or MNP Class 5 Modem
Promam Technician Software:

Connection

(LKl)

SMDRJLCR

for Electra

(LK5) No. 02,

Professional

System

This section is a basic overview of System Programming
using a PC. For
specific information,
refer to the Electra Professional
lZO/Level II/Level II
Advanced System Program Technician
Manual (included with the Electra
Professional System Program Technician software).
Required

Equipment:

1.

MIF-F(L)-10

KTU with NEC provided MIF Cable Assembly

2.

RS-232 straight
connection)

3.

IBM or IBM-compatible
higher

4.

NEC Electra Professional

5.

Standard dot matrix
station labels)

6.

MNP Modem Class 5 (required

cable (for direct connection)

or reverse cable (for remote

PC with 286 or higher and MS-DOS Version 3.3 or
System Program

printer

(if required

Technician
for printing

Software.
job specifications

or

for remote connection)

To install:

Electra Professional

1.

Set the MIF-F(L)-10

KTU SW3 DIP switch to adjust for a PC or modem.

2.

Install

3.

Connect the MD? Cable Assembly to CN7 and CNlO on the MIF-F(L)-10
KTU and the KSU. Refer to Figure 3-105 - Connecting the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(L)-10
KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the PC using a straight
using a reverse RS-232 cable.

5.

Place the MIF-F(L)-10

the MIF-F(L)-10

Level II and Level II Advanced

KTU in the KSU.

RS-232 cable or connect the MNP modem

KTU MB switch ON.

3-123

4.4.6

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU

The MIF-F(A)-10

KTU allows an interface to an MIS (ACD) terminal.

Only one MIF-F(A)-10
KTU can be installed in either system. Refer to the
Electra Professional 120/Level IVLevel II Advanced Automatic Call Distribution
Manual for detailed instructions for the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU.
Switch Settings/LED

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, the MIF is exchanging
data communications
with the
system CPU. Refer to Figure 3-107 - MIF-F(A)-10 KTU Switch Layout, Table 333 - MIF-F(A)-10
KTU Switch (SW3) Settings for PC Connection, and Table 334 - MIF-F(A)-10
KTU - DTE PC Connections.
Switch MB is the ON/OFF
control for this KTU.

Battery

Battery
Backup

a

OFF

LED3

T

MB

SW3

SW4
I

ON

F

OFF
123

45678

123

456

78

’

(Not

\

Dip Switch
used for this

KTU.)

Dip Switch
(Personal
Computer
/ Modem)
Cable
Connection

CNB

Figure 3-107

3-124

MIF-F(A)-10

/

‘N$;,“,$:“r

KTU Switch Layout

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

--. ‘\
-,,“

Table 3-33
Switch
Position
(SW3)

MIF-F(A)-10

ON/OFF
Setting

Description

1

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

2

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Forward - No Answer
0: Allow
1: Deny

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Not Used

OFF:
ON:

0
1

Parity and Stop Bits:

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

OFF:
ON:

Electra Professional

KTU Switch (SW3) Settings for PC Connection

Level II and Level II Advanced

0
1

0
1

0
1

sw3-5

SW3-6

Parity

Stop

Bits

0

0

None

2

1

0

None

1

0

1

Even

1

1

1

Odd

1

Baud Rates:
sw3-7

SW3-8

RS-232C

0

0

9600

bps

1

0

4800

bps

0

1

2400

bps

1

1

1200 bps

3-125

Table 3-34
MIF (CN7 & CN8)

MIF-F(A)-10

MIF Cable
Assembly

+
I

KTU - DTE PC Connections

I

--___- 1 1

FG(FG)

1

(FG)Fk

1

RXD(RD)

5

c

2

(SD)TXD

2

TXD(SD)

4

--,

3

(RD)RXD

3

CTSWS)

6

c

4

(RS)RTS

4

RTS(RS)

3

+

5

(CS)CTS

5

DTR(ER)

7

+

6

(DR)DSR

6

SG(SB

8

-m-e__ 7

(SGBG

7

DSR(DR)

2

DCD(CN10)
Note:

c

20

(ERJDTR

20

--- < _--

20 (ER)DTR

c

8

(CD)DCD

8

_-- < _--

8

The arrow shows the direction

(CD)DCD

of data flow during operation.

Installation
The MIF-F(A)-10
KTU can be installed in an Option Slot (OPf or in one of the
four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
- IF4/OP4), in the ESF-SB-10 KSU, ESFXB-10 KSU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
This KTU is shipped with
two cable assemblies (MIF cable assembly). One end of each cable has an RJ35
@-pin) connector. The other end of the cable terminates at an RS-232 connector.
This connector must be mounted on the KSU. This same connection procedure
must be performed on the ESF-XB-10 KSU of ESF-XE-10 KSUs.
Refer to
Figure 3-108 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly and the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU
to the ESF-SB-10 KSU and Figure 3-109 - Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
and the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU to the ESF-XB-10 KSU.

3-126

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Figure 3-108

Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU

Figure 3-109

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Connecting the MIF Cable Assembly
KTU to the ESF-D-10
KSU

and the MIF-F(A)-10

and the MU?-F(A)-10

3-127

MIS Terminal

Connection

for ACD:

Required Equipment:
1.

MIF-F(A)-10

KTU with NEC provided MDF Cable Assembly

2.

RS-232 Straight

3.

IBM or IBM compatible

Cable
PC with 286 or higher

To install:

4.4.7

1.

Set MIF-F(A)-10

2.

Install

3.

Connect the MIF Cable Assembly to CN7 and CNlO on the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU and the KSU. Refer to Figure 3-108 - Connecting the MIF Cable
Assembly and the MIF-F(A)-10
KTU to the ESF-SB-10 KSU.

4.

Connect the MIS Terminal

5.

Place the MIF-F(A)-16

6.

Program Memory
Block(s): l-8-25, ACD Group Agent Assignment,
l-12-00, ACD Group Pilot Number Assignment,
l-12-01, ACD Group
Overflow Destination
Assignment,
and l-12-02, ACD Overflow Timer
Selection.

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU SW3 DIP switch to adjust for the PC connection.

the MIF-F(A)-10

KTU in the KSU.

to use the straight

RS-232 cable.

KTU MB switch ON.

KTU

The MIF-F(C)-10

KTU provides the Caller ID feature

Only one MIF-F(C)-10
Switch Settings/LED

KTU can be installed

in either system.

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(C)-10 KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, the MIF is exchanging data communications
with the
system CPU. Refer to Figure 3-110 - MIF-F(C)-10 KTU Switch Layout. Switch
MB is the ON/OFF control for this KTU .

3-128

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

LED3

RAM-F(

)-11

UNIT

ON
OFF

ON
OFF
123

456

78

123

456

78

’

(Not

\

Dip Switch
used for this

Dip Switch
used for this

(Not

KTU.)

KW.)

Cable
Connection
lzl

lal

CN 10

CNB

4

CN7
1

(N$;s”;$fpr

(~&c&l,
this

Figure 3-110

MIF-F(C)-10

KTU.)

KTU Switch Layout

Installation
The MIF-F(C)-10
KTU can be installed in an Option Slot (CP) or in one of the
four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
- IF4/OP4), in the ESF-SB-10 KSU, ESFXB-10 KSU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
This KTU is shipped with
two cable assemblies (MIF cable assembly). One end of each cable has an RJ35
@-pin) connector.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-129

MIF-F(U)-10

KTU

The MIF-F(U)-10

KTU provides the Uniform

Only one MIF-F(U)-10
Note:

Call Distribution

KTU can be installed

^ ‘-a.I
:,
/

in either system.

MIF-F(A)-10
KTU and MD?-F(U)-10
the same system.

Switch Settings/LED

(UCD) feature.

KTU cannot both be installed

in

Indications

When the green LED1 is on, the MIF-F(U)-10
KTU is receiving power. When
the red LED2 is on, the MIF is exchanging
data communications
with the
system CPU. Refer to Figure 3-lllMIF-F(U)-10
KTU Switch Layout.
Installation
The MIF-F(U)-10
KTU can be installed in an Option Slot COP) or in one of the
four Interface/Option
Slots (IFl/OPl
- IF4/OP4), in the ESF-SB-10 KSU,
ESF-XB-10 KSU, or the first ESF-XE-10 KSU installed.
Battery
Sackup

Battery
R;ldClltl

:EJ

r

u

LED3
/(Red)

I
1

OFF

SW3

/

LED2

tf!Fl

SW4
ON

ON

OFF

OFF
123

456

78

123

456

78

CN 10

Figure 3-111

MIF-F(U)-10

CN7

-

LOUIC
Connectior
(Not used fc br
this KTU.)

KTU Switch Layout
_,’

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

SECTION

5

CABLE
5.1

CONNECTIONS
General

Information

5.1.1

Connection

Requirements

The KSU is connected with each Multiline
Terminals, Single Line Telephone,
optional equipment, CO/PBX, DID, 4-wire E&M Tie lines (Types I and V), and
digital trunk (Tl/FTl) by a separate twisted-pair
cable through the MDF. The
4-wire E&M Tie lines are Tl/FTl
lines and require multiple twisted-pair
cabling.
5.1.2

Cabling Precautions
When selecting cables and the MDF, future expansion or assignment
should be considered. Avoid running cables in the following places:

5.2

Wiring
5.2.1

0

A place exposed to wind or rain [except the LLT-F(BG)-10

0

A place near heat radiating equipment
or where
covering could be affected by gases and chemicals.

0

An unstable place subject to vibration.

Between

changes

KTUI.

the quality

of PVC

the KSU and the MDF

KSU Cables
The Level II Basic KSU has two MDF Cable Assemblies and the Expansion
KSU has one MDF Cable Assembly.
Each Level II Advanced Basic and
Expansion KSU has three MDF Cable Assemblies.
NEC recommends that the
MDF Cable Assembly be used to connect the Multiline
Terminals, Single Line
Telephones (except PFT), CO/PBX, and DID lines. Refer to Figure 3-112 - MDF
Cable Assembly Diagram and Table 3-35 - Connection Information/Connection
and Port Relationships.
When installing
4-wire E&M Tie lines, Single Line
Telephones with PFT, and other optional equipment with the ECR-F-11 KTU,
NEC provides the connector; however, the cabling must be locally provided.
Refer to Section 5.2.2 - Connecting Cables to Special Connectors.

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

3-131

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

25pair

FLL(&--’

cable

NEC provided

D

Cable

Assembly
r

1 ft. 10 in.

CABLE COLORS
A
1
2
3

---__I_

4
5
6

1 WH-BL
1
1
--

B

C
-I_-

---1
1

WH-SL
----

D

1

RD-BR
-----

E

----_
1

BK-GN

----

1

--

Figure 3-112

3-132

YL-OR
__
__--

F
--_-I-

__
_--

MDF Cable Assembly

Diagram

Electra Professional

,-

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

Table 3-35

Connectors

B

C

D

E

1

F

1:

Note 2:

Electra Professional

II Advanced

Information/Connection

Multiline
Terminals,
Attendant
Add-On
Console, SLT Adaptor, or
Digital Voice Mail
Station
Lead
Cable
Functions

Februarv

1998

and Port Relationships
Others
Lead Functions

$?$?
No.

Rg$y”

26
1

WH-BL
BL-WH

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

i

27
2

WH-OR
OR-WH

BK
n

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

26
3

WH-GN
GN-WH

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

29
4

WH-BR
BR-WH

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

30
5

WI-I-SL
SL-WI-I

BK
n

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

T
R

RT
RR

31

RD-BL
BL-RD

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

i

T
R

z

3:
7

RD-OR
OR-RD

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

33
8

RD-GN
GN-RD

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

34

9

RD-BR
BR-RD

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
i

T
ii

RR

35
10

RD-SL
SL-RD

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

;

Tr
TR

36
11

BK-BL
BL-BK

BK
YL

R
T

GN
FtD

T
R

z

37
12

BK-OR
OR-BK

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

33
13

BK-GN
GN-BK

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

ii

ii

T
R

z

39
14

BK-BR
BR-BK

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
R

T
R

T-r
TR

:P

BK-SL
SL-BK

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

i

41
16

YL-BL
BL-YL

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

ii

42
17

YL-OR
OR-YL

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

ii

T
R

T
R

RT
RR

43
18

YL-GN
GN-YL

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

T
ii

T-r
TR

44
19

YL-BR
BR-YL

BK
YL

R
T

GN
Ff.D

T
R

T
R

45
20

YL-SL
SL-YL

BK
YL

R
T

GN
l2D

T
R

T
R

R
T

GN
RD

RT

1

T
R

T

I
1

R
T

GN
ti

1
t

T
1R

46
21
47
22

1
i
1

VI-BL
BL-VI
VI-OR
OR-VI

1
1
1

BK
YL
BK
YL

CO
Line

F%F

I
1

46
23

VI-GN
GN-VI

BK
YL

R
T

GN
RD

T
R

BK
YL

R
T

T

1

VI-BR
BR-VI

r,N

I

49
24

I

50

I
1

VI-SL
SL-VI

1 25
Note

Connection

1201Level II/Level

II
I
1

N/C

II
I
1

R
T

II
I
1

iiD

N/C

I

I
1

R
N/C

$~‘~,
T
R

1

1

1
1

R.T

,R

R
N/C

KTU,
5.2.3

KTU

Level II and Level II Advanced

7-r
iii

T

I

The TLI-F(P)-10
Refer to Section

assembly

I

I

by the installer.
Only
the first
Backup
for connector
assembly.
require

T
R

RT
RR

T
R

assembly
of one 4-position
connector
Refer to Section
4.3.2.1Power Failure
and ECR-F-11

DTI

T
ii

1

T
R

1

SLI PFT required
PFT connection.

BRT-F(Q)-10
KTU,
-Outside
Lines.

Di:$$D

of the

two

channels

connectors

provide

for

by the installer.

3-133

5.2.2

Connecting

Cables to Special Connectors

If installing
a TLI-F(B)-10 KTU, ECR-F-11 KTU and/or an SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU
with PFT, the cables must be connected to the provided connectors, in the KTU
packing box. The following instructions explain this procedure.
1.

Cut the four cables the same length and insert them into the connector.
Ensure that all four cables are inserted all the way to the end of the cover.
Refer to Figure 3-113 -Attaching
the Cables to the Connector.

Make sure that no burrs are left
behind on the cut ends.

Special Connector
Cover
Cover End

,

Adaptable

Figure 3-113

3-134

Attaching

Cable

the Cables to the Connector

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

\I
-”

2.

Lightly hold the connecter with the pliers. In this case, make sure that the
crimping portion is held between the lower portion of the jaws of the plier.
Refer to Figure 3-114- Holding the Connector with the Pliers.

Wrong Way

Figure 3-114

3.

Right Way

Holding the Connector

with the Pliers

Squeeze the pliers to crimp the cables. If the cover is loose, press the cover
again with the pliers.
Note:

If sufficient pressure cannot be applied when the screw of the
pliers is in the center position, change the position of the screw
that allows the jaws of the pliers to close. Be careful when
squeezing the hands of the pliers; excessive pressure could cause
damage to the connector. Refer to Figure 3-115 - Positioning the
Screw of the Pliers.

Screw
in center
position
where
jaws
open
when
handles are squeezed.

Figure 3-115

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Positioning

the Screw of the Pliers

3-135

Electra Professional
-_

Febr uarv 1998
5.2.3

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Outside Lines
The RJ2lX is the FCC authorized connector for the connection of CO lines. The
CO lines are connected in sequence in this termination
block. Therefore, the
lines must be ordered in the appearance order best suited to the user. Refer to
Table 3-35 - Connection Information/Connection
and Port Relationships
for
information
about the MDF Connector Assembly Cable positions, the cable
number, and lead functions.
Ground Start and/or Loop Start, Loop Dial, DID, 4-wire E&M Tie lines (Types I
and V), and Tl can be connected to this system. Using only twisted-pair
wiring
to crossconnect the lines from the RJ21X termination
block to the MDF is
recommended.
Half-tapping
or parallel
to the system.
5.2.3.1

TLI-F(B)-10

connections

KTU Cable Connections

Channel

Pins
1

3-136

must not be used on outside lines connected

16

i

T12

1

Note 1:

TLI-F(B)-10 KTU contains
assembly by the installer.

Note 2:

The
six NEC-provided
4-position-connector
cables
CANNOT
be used to support this KTU. Refer to Figure
3-112 - MDF Cable Assembly Diagram.

Note 3:

Connector pins 1-16 are counted from the bottom to the
top of the KTU when it is installed in an interface slot.

Electra Professional

one, $-position

connector

for

Level II and Level II Advanced

.. . ..
‘;
.-r’

5.2.3.2

ECR-F-11

KTU Cable Connections

Pin
No.
16

Terminal
Name
I
8RM
I

Function

--++E13

1

7RC

12

6RM

11

6RC

7

1

4RC

6

3RM

5

3RC

4

2RM

3

2RC

2

1RM

1

1RC

External

Tone - Ringer 4

External

Tone - Ringer 3

External

Tone - Ringer 2

External

Tone - Ringer 1

Night

Chime

External

Paging - Zone C

External

Paging - Zone B

External

Paging - Zone A

Note 1: ECR-F-11 KTU contains
two RCA plugs.

one, 4-position

connector

and

Note 2: The six NEC-provided
4-position-connector
cables
CANNOT be used to support this KTU. Refer to Figure
3-112 - MDF Cable Assembly Diagram.
Note 3: Connector pins 1 -16 are counted from the bottom to the
top of the KTU when it is installed in an interface slot.
Note4

External
provided.

Note 5: External

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

speakers

and

amplifiers

must

be locally

speakers must be 600 Sz.

3-137

5.2.3.3

DTI-F(

)-lo KTU/DTI-F(A)-20

KTU Cable Connections

To install
the cable between
the
DTI-F( )-lo KTU or DTI-F(A)-20 KTU:

Tl/FTl

1. Connect the Tl/FTl
trunk to the MDF.
3-116 - MDF Trunk Connection.
2.

trunk
Refer to

Connect this cable from the MDF to the DTI-F(
DT’I-F(A)-20
KTU’ by twisted-pair
cable.
Figure 3-116 - MDF Trunk Connection.
DTI-F(

j-10 KTU

and

DTI-F(A)-20

Figure

j-10 KTU or
Refer to

KTLJ

Note 1: The maximum distance from the DTI-F( j-10 KTU
DTI-F(A)-20 KTU to CSU is 655 feet, using 22 AWG.
Note2:

CSU is recommended
for maintenance
alarm function) or surge protection.
should purchase and install the CSU.

r....q

or

(loop back or
The customer

TB

.

.

l--=--l

Maximum

655 feet

Figure 3-116

3-138

the

(200 meters)

MDF Trunk

Connection

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

,;

5.2.3.4

SLI-F(IIG)-21

KTU Cable Connections
Channel

Pins

rJzJ?q
I

5.2.4

Modular

i

Note 1:

SLI-F@G)-21 KTU contains two, 4-position
providing eight channels.

Note 2:

Channels 1 and 2 can be used for PFT. If PFT is used,
the six NEC-provided
4-position
connector cables
CANNOT
be used for channels I- 4. However, they
can be used for channels 5 - 8. Refer to Section 4.3.2.1
- Power Failure Backup.

Terminal

connectors

Connections

When connecting Multiline
Terminals,
Attendant
Add-On Consoles, or SLT
Adapters to the MDF or IDF, individually
twisted l-pair cabling must be used.
Refer to Table
3-35 - Connection
Information/Connection
and Port
Relationships
for lead functions. Refer to Figure 3-117 - Modular Terminal for
Connection of Multiline
Terminals and Attendant
Add-On Consoles for station
modular jack (RJ13C/W) connection.

VL - 2% ----

#.------

STATION

I

1
I

I
I

f
I
I

I
I
I
I
I

CABLE

Y
@

I
:
I

MODULAR
TERMINAL

Figure 3-117

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Modular Terminal for Connection
and Attendant Add-On Consoles

of Multiline

Terminals

3-139

Feb ruarv 1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

Installation

II Advanced

Service Manual

One-pair cabling is required; twisted pair cabling is recommended.
Refer to
Table 3-35 - Connection Information/Connection
and Port Relationships for lead
functions.
Refer to Figure 3-118 - Simplified
Schematic
of Single Line
Telephone Connection for station termination.

STATION

CABLE

R(RJX

SINGLE

Figure 3-118

Simplified

R
LINE

Schematic

T
TELEPHONE

of Single Line Telephone

For additional
CO line connections to additional
similar crossconnections should be made.

Single

Connection

Line

Telephones,

If dialing during power failure is required, Single Line Telephones should be
equipped with DPlDTMF dialing to match the outside lines. If trunks are
Ground Start, Single Line Telephones must be equipped with a ground button.
When Single Line Telephones are installed, they can operate as power failure
Refer to Figure
telephones,
through
crossconnection
on the MDF.
3-119 - Crossconnection of Single Line Telephones.
Note:

Single Line Telephones used for Power Failure
supported by an SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU.

co3
Tip _____)
RING-----------,

Figure 3-119

3-140

SLI-F(8G1
PT +-------PR +-------

Crossconnection

Electra Professional

Transfer

must

be

&J
TIP
RING

of Single Line Telephones

Level II and Level II Advanced

-x‘:
,,I,

February
Modular Terminations
Professional System

5.2.5

When Connecting

Refer to Figure 3-120 Simplified

BRT-F(4)-10

Schematic

RI34

15

FtA4

14

TEt4

13

TA4

Trunks

to the Electra

for BRI Connection.

U

KTU

I33
16

BRI (ISDN)

1998

NT1

Telco

Telco

Mod.

Jack

Modular

MODULAR

Jack

JACK
Yellow

3RAX
2 TBX

RJ45

1TAX
Black

4 RBX

Figure 3-120

Electra Professional

Simplified

Level II and Level II Advanced

NT1

Schematic

for BRI Connection

3-141

SECTION6

OPTIONAL
6.1

General

EQUIPMENT

CONNECTION

Information

-- ..,
‘i
.j

The system supports the following:

6.2

0

External

Music On Hold

0

External

Paging

0

External

Tone Ring/Night

Music

On Hold/Station

Background

‘,

Chime
Music

Provision has been made to allow connection of a locally provided external music source
to provide Music On Hold (MOH) for held calls and Station Background Music (BGM).
Station Background Music is available with Series 500 or higher software.
6.2.1

Music On Hold
Music source input is made using the MOH jack located on the CPU-F( l-20
KTU.
For music source input level and impedance,
refer to section
1.12.1- Music On Hold/Station
Background Music (using CPU), in this chapter.
To install:
1.

On the cable to be connected to the MOH jack (12 inches from the plug
end), make a slit in the cable insulation approximately
l-1/2 inches long.
Take special care not to cut into the shield wire and inner wire
insulation.

2.

Make a circular

3.

Pull the cut insulation from the cable to expose the shield for the length of
the slit and cut the insulation off.

4.

Bend the cable near the middle of the exposed shield and separate the
shield from the inner insulation
in preparation
for soldering.
Refer to
Figure 3-121- MOH Cable Shield Ground Exposed.

cut in the cable insulation

at one end of the slit.

Cable

Figure 3-121

3-142

MOH Cable Shield Ground Exposed

Electra

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

,’

5.

Get a 7-inch 20-24 AWG stranded
connector at one end.

6.

Strip l/2 inch of insulation
from the other end of the 7 inch wire. Solder
this end to the shield exposed in step 3. Place tape around this connection
to prevent possible short circuits.

7.

Connect the plug end into the CPU-F(
Figure 3-122 - Music Source Connection.

CPU

T\

MOH

Shielded

j-20 KTU

Cable

IN

MOH jack.

output

1

Music

type

Refer to

Source

POW.3
Terminal

J

Figure 3-122

8.

Audio

wire and connect a ring tongue

Music Source Connection

Route the cable down and to the right side of the KSU to avoid interference
with the insertion and the removal of KTUs. Exit the other end of the
cable at the right rear side of the KSU. Refer to Figure 3-123 - MOH Cable
Route.

To MOH
Source

Figure 3-123

6.2.2

Station Background

MOH Cable Route

Music

Station Background Music can be provided by using a COI-F( l-20 KTU or a
COI-F( J-30 KTU. When station Background Music is provided using the COI-F
KTU, Music On Hold and Station Background Music are separated and are
provided by two independent
sources.
To install Background
1.

Electra Professional

Music using a COI-F KTU:

In Memory Block l-l-79,
Input.

Level II and Level II Advanced

BGM Port Assignment,

set the CO1 port to BGM

3-143

2.

3.

Connect a locally provided Valcom V-9941A or equivalent
device to the
CO1 Background Music port. Refer to the audio specifications
in Section
1.12.2 - Station Background Music using COI-F( l-20 KTU or COI-F( l-30
KTU.
Connect a locally provided Background Music source to the V-9941A (or
equivalent device). Refer to Figure 3-124 - Music Source Connection and
to Table
3-35 - Connection
Information/Connection
and Port
Relationships.
Note:

co,-F(

)-20

KTU

COI-F( y-.30 KTU

T

Audio

R

Shielded
n
I

The Valcom V-9941A provides: loop connect (also called
battery) to the CO1 KTU, couples the audio source onto the
current, and isolates the loop current from the music source.
device that fits this criteria along with impedance of the
KTU and music source is suitable.

Cable

=

-24Vdc

q

/\,

Music

talk
loop
Any
CO1

Source

J

J

Audio

Shielded

Cable

output

I
123456789

Screw Terminals
Valcom V-9941 A
(or equivalent device)

Figure 3-124

6.3

External

Music Source Connection

Paging

The ECR-F-11 KTU provides audio output for External Paging
JK2 on the ECR-F-11 KTU) and three contact closures (one
paging with Meet-Me Answer. These contacts are labeled 1RC
3RC and 3RM. Refer to Section 5.2.3.2 - ECR-F-11 KTU
maximum of one ECR-F-11 KTU can be installed in a system
paging zones.

(available at phone jack
per zone) for use in zone
and lRM, 2RC and 2RM,
Cable
Connections.
A
providing a total of three

The audio output must be connected to a locally provided amplifier and speaker(s), that
are connected to the output of the amplifier.
If the amplifier is a 2-way amplifier, 2-way
paging is available.
Shielded audio cable should be used for external paging audio
connections.
This audio cable, from JK2 to the external amplifier,
should be wrapped
three turns around a ferrite core. For connection information
to a locally provided
amplifier, refer to Figure 1-125 - Connecting External Paging. For external paging audio
output level and impedance, refer to Section 1.12 - External Equipment
Interface, in this
chapter.
When External Paging is answered by Meet-Me Answer, the external paging audio
circuit and the control circuits in the ECR-F-11 KTU are released to allow access for
another page.

3-144

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

‘-‘1,i

ECR-F-1 1 KTU
Zone

A

1 RC

v

nl

1 RM
Zone

I

B

2 RC

n’

2RM
Zone

I

Paging

C

n3
3RM

I

j--l”

External
Amplifier

Night Chime

j-J5
I

External Tone Ringer

n8
Impedance
600 S-8

JK2 2-Way Voice Path
for Paging

(wrap

Ferrite
Core
cable 3 turns)

Figure 3-125

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Connecting

External

Paging

3-145

6.4

External

Tone Rig/Night

Chime

External Tone Ring/Night
Chime is available when the ECR-F-11 KTU is installed.
The
ECR-F-11 KTU provides a continuous
tone source for external tone ringing.
The ,_ ..i,
:,;,:
external tone can be set to one of five ringing patterns.
These patterns are selected in
.’
System Programming.
Refer to Chapter 5 - Programming,
Manual System Mode (LKl),
ESP (LK7) No. 07, in this manual.
The audio output for external tone ringing appears at the phone jack JKl on the
ECR-F-11 KTU. The level is adjustable using volume control VRl on the ECR-F-11
KTU.
Shielded-audio cable is required for this feature. The ECR-F-11 KTU provides five relay
contacts for External Tone Ring/Night
Chime. Refer to Section 5.2.3.2 - ECR-F-11 KTU
Cable Connections. These contacts are labeled as follows:

}

4RC and 4RM

Night Chime

5RC and 5RM
6RC and 6RM
External

Tone Ring

7RC and 7RM
8RC and 8RM

>

Refer to Figure 3-126 - Connecting External
Tone Ring/Night
Chime for connecting
locally provided amplifiers
and speakers and Section 1.12 - External
Equipment
Interface for audio output specifications.

3-146

Electra

Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

ECR-F-11 KTU

1 RC
1 RM

2RC
2RN

3RC
3RM

--I

Paging

-l
Night Chime

External
Amplifier

5

I!5

6
5
Externa I Tone Ringer
7
5

8RM
Impedance

JKl Tone Ringer

Figure 3-126

Electra Professional

Connecting

Level II and Level II Advanced

External

Tone Ring/Night

Chime

3-147

SECTION

LCD INDICATIONS

7

TABLE

Table 3-36
Display

I

12:24 AM WED

Location

I

All Stations
LCD

10

FWD 100->
[ 1
ALL FWD CANCLD
FWD CANCL

Originator

FWDSET

Originator

[ I

FWD RESET [ 1
BUSY loo-->
[- 1
FWD BUSY CANCLD
NOANS 100 - > [ 1
FWDNA CANCLD
FWDBNA> [ 1
FWD BNA CNCL
BACK ??I?? ??:??
MESSAGE

CLEAR

NIGHT MODE SET
NIGHT MODE RESET
NT TENANT
CALLBACK
CANCLD
FNC LAMP OFF
CURRENT PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD ?
ENTER PASSWORD
RESTRICT SET
CALL DENIED
RESTRICT CANCLD
CANCEL
TEL ???
RLY 0 ON
RLY 0 OFF
ALARM AM 00 : 00
ALARM PM 00 : 00
ALL ALARM CANCLD
SET TIME REMINDER
DND SET
t SAVE & REPEAT
LINT ALL PAGE

?

Originator
Originator
Originator
Originator
Originator
Originator

-1

I Originator
Originator
I Originator

with

LCD Indications
Definition

I

Clock/Calendar
Set Call Forward - All Calls
Cancel DND/Call Forward - All Calls System-Wide
Cancel DNDKall Forward - All Calls At Individual
Stations
Set Call Forward - All Calls From Forward To
Extension
Reset Call Forward - All Calls From Forward To
Extension
Set Call Forward - Busy
Cancel Call Forward - Busy
Set Call Forward - No Answer
Cancel Call Forward - No Answer
Set Call Forward Busy - No Answer
Cancel Call Forward Busy - No Answer
Set Customized Message
Cancel Customized Message System-Wide or From
Individual
Station
1Night Mode Switch
Reset Night Mode
Set Night Mode For Tenant
Cancel Callback System-Wide
Reset FNC LED
Telephone Password (1)
Telephone Password (2)
Set Password (CO/PBX Restriction)
After Setting Password
Display on Station Outgoing Restricted Telephone
After Cancelincr Outgoing Call Restriction
xncel
Restriction on Another Telephone
Relay Off
Set Alarm For A.M.
Set Alarm For P.M.
Cancel Alarm System-Wide
Set Timed Alarm for SLT
Set Do Not Disturb
1 Save and Repeat Number Is Stored
1Internal All Zone Paging
(continued

3-148

Electra

Professional

I

I
on nextpage)

Level II and Level II Advanced

Location

Display
INT PAGE
TENT [ 1
SPKR [Al

[A 1
Originator

TRF SET CO =
TRF CNCL CO =
TRF TO CO =
TRNS TO N/A
00 : EMPTY
00: 0123456789
NO SMDR
ERROR

I

I CO 1 LAYER 1 DOWN
~CO 1 LAYER 2 DOWN
CO 1 SPID ERROR
CO 1 SLIP ERROR

Electra Professional

Port 01
Port 01
Port 01
Port 01

Level II and Level II Advanced

Definition
Group Paging
Tenant Paging
External Speaker
Set Automatic Tandem Trunk Transfer IN/OUT
Trunk
Reset Automatic Tandem Trunk Transfer
Set or Confirm Transferred Trunk of Automatic
Tandem Trunk Transfer
Transferred Trunk Not Assigned
No Speed Dial Number Entered
Speed Dial Number Confirmation
I Station Message- Detail Recording Not Available
Error Message

I

ISDN Trunk Ll Down Diffkulty
ISDN Trunk L2 Down Difficulty
ISDN Trunk SPID Error Difficulty
ISDN Trunk Asynchronous Communication
Difficulty (More than 50 times)

3-149

SECTION

8

FEATURE

ACCESS

CODES

Some codes are set as system defaults and some codes have no default defined but are
The table is divided according to the status of the
programmable
in System Programming.
telephone. An explanation of the notes column is listed below; these are referenced throughout
the table. Refer to Table l-37 - Access Codes Tables.
Explanation

of Notes Column:

Installation:
Single Line Only:
Single Line OK:
Note 1:
Note 2:

Operates only on telephones specified during installation.
Operates only on Single Line Telephones.
Operates on Multiline Terminals or Single Line Telephones.
The controls,in parentheses are not necessary for your own telephone
own tenant.
Operates only when the Speed Dial number is set to 2 digits (90 mode).
Enter the new values in the Access Code Table.
No system default is defined; this code must
Programming.

Note 3:
Note 4:

Table 3-37
When the telephone

Set Call Forward

is idle (handset

- All Calls

be assigned

or

in System

Access Code Tables

is on-hook):

FNC + Dial 60 + Dial XXX --, FNC

Installation

XXX = Station number where call is to be forwarded.

(continued

3-150

Electra

Professional

on nextpage)

Level II and Level II Advanced

,.\
;
.:’

Function
Set Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk
Mode

FNC *Dial61
Transfer

XX

Operation

Notes

+ FNC

Installation

-+DialXX

= Incoming

Trunk

Port

Number

(01 - 64; 00 = All Trunks)

Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
to Outside Mode

FNC + Dial 62 -+ Dial XX + FNC

Set Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Outgoing Trunk

FNC + Dial 63 + Dial XX + Dial # + Dial YY-Y

XX

XX

= Incoming

Trunk

= Incoming

YY-Y

Port

Trunk

= Transfer

Port

Number

(01 - 64; 00 = All Trunks)

Number

Telephone

Installation

-+ FNC

Installation

(01 - .W, 00 = All Trunks)

Number

(maximum

24 digits)

Confirm Transfer Number
for Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer

FNC -+ Dial 64 + Dial XX + FNC

Cancel Call Forward - All
Calls by System

FNC + Dial 68 + FNC

Installation

Cancel Do Not Disturb/Call
Forward - All Calls

FNC 3 Dial 69 + FNC

Installation

Set Customized
Display

FNC + Dial 70 + Dial *
+ FNC

Message

XX

= Trunk

Port

Number

Installation

(01 - 64)

4

Dial # + [ Dial XXXX,

YY:YY 1

* = SelectsDisplay
# = SetsDisplay
XX:XX
= Date
YY:YY

= Time

Operations

of Return
of Return

enclosed in [ 1are optional.

Cancel Customized
Message Display by System

FNC + Dial 78 + FNC

Cancel Customized
Message Display

FNC + Dial 79 + FNC

Set/Cancel Night Mode
Switch (System)

FNC + Dial 80 + FNC

Set Automated
Attendant/DISA

FNC + Dial 81 ---f Dial XX +B FNC
Mode

XX

= Incoming

Trunk

Port

Number

Installation

/

(01 -

FNC + Dial 82 --, Dial XX + FNC

Set/Cancel
Mode

FNC + Dial84
(Series 700 or higher)

Set Relocation

Set/Cancel Night Mode
Switch (Tenant)

XX

Set/Cancel Weekend Mode
Switch (Tenant)

XX

= Incoming

Trunk

FNC + Dial85

Port

Number

Installation

(01 - 64; 00 = All Trunks)

Installation
Attendant
Only
+ FNC

Installation

FNC + Dial 86 + Dial XX + FNC

Installation

= Tenant

= Tenant

Number

Number

+ DialXX

Installation

64; 00 = All Trunks)

Cancel Automated
Attendant/DISA
Mode

XX

(00 - 47)

(00 - 47)

(continued
Electra Professional

Installation
Attendant
Only

Level II and Level II Advanced

on nextpage)
3-151

XXX

= Speed

Dial

Buffer

Number

(00 - 89 ! 000 - 999)

(Series

100 - 450)

Speed

Dial

Buffer

Number

(00 - 79 1000

(Series

500 or higher)

YYYY

= Access

Code

(maximum

ZZ - Z = Telephone
xx - x = Name

XX

=

Speed

of Other

Dial

4 digits)
(maximum

Party

Buffer

24 digits)

(maximum

13 letters)

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

Speed Dial Buffer
Number
= Access Code (maximum

(80 - 99).
4 digits)

(Series

(Series
YYYY

Number

- 999)

ZZ - Z = Telephone
xx - x = Name

0 - 9 for last

digit.

100 - 450)

Number

of Other

(maximum

Party

500 or higher)

24 digits)

(maximum

13 letters)

tions enclosed in

Number
XX

=

Speed
Series

Number

%ncel Station Speed Dial
Number

XXX

=

Speed

Dial

Buffer

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

0 - 9 for last

digit.

100 - 450

Dial

Buffer

FNC + LNR/SPD

Number

(00 - 89 / 000 - 999)

(Series

100 - 450)

+= Dial X X + FNC
Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

0 - 9 for last

digit.

(continued

3-152

Electra Professional

on nextpage)

Level II and Level II Advanced

Operation

Function
Confirm Last Number
Memory
Place Call Using
Store & Repeat/Save
Repeat

Dialed

CNF += LNR/SPD
LNR/SPD

Notes

-+ Dial *

+ Dial #

&

Set/Cancel Answer Preset
(Ringing Line Preference)

FNC -+ ANS

Last Number Dialed Memory
to a Station Speed Dial
Buffer Number

FNC + LNR/SPD

+ Dial X X ---, LNR/SPD

XX

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

(Series 100 - 450)
Speed Dial Buffer
Number

(80 - 99).

(Series

Program Feature Access
Keys (for DSS/BLF)
(Series 100 - 450)

= Speed

FNC 4
Dial 1
9X

4

Dial

FNC

0 - 9 for last

Note 2

digit.

500 or higher)

LNR/SPD + Dial 9X += Feature Access Key +
Dial YYYY + [Dial 11 4 FNC

= Speed

YYYY

Buffer

4

Dial

Buffer

= Station

Number

number

(90 - 99).

(2,3,

Enter

Installation
Note 2

0 - 9 for last digit.

or 4 digits)

Operations enclosed in E I are optional (when the digit 1 is dialed,
the call is switched from Voice to Tone or from Tone to Voice).
Program Feature Access
Keys (for DSS/BLF)
(Series 500 or higher)

FNC 4 LNRJSPD + Feature Access Key + Dial 1 +
Dial YYYY 4 [Dial 11 + FNC
YYYY

= Station

number

(2,3,

Installation
Note 2

or 4 digits)

Operations enclosed in [ I are optional (when the digit 1 is dialed,
the call is switched from Voice to Tone or from Tone to Voice).
Program Feature Access
Keys (for Station Speed Dial)

FNC 4 LNR/SPD
Dial 0 + Dial Y 4
FNC
9X
* =

= Speed
Omit

Dial
this

Y = CO/pBX

Buffer
step

XX

- X =

Operations

Name

Dial 9 X* + Feature Access Key 4
Dial ZZ - Z + [HOLD 4 Dial XX - X*1 --,

Number

(SO - 99).

for for Series

Access

ZZ - Z = Telephone

4

Code

to be stored

0 - 9 for last

digit.

500 or higher.

(maximum

Numberto

Enter

4 digits)

be stored
using

(maximum

the Character

16 digits).
Code

(maximum

13 characters).

enclosed in [ 1are optional.
(continued

Electra Professional

Installation
Note 2

Level II and Level II Advanced

on nextpage)

3-153

-Electra
Febr

Professional

Keys (for Nesting

Dial)

BOILeve

II /Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Dial 0 + Dial Y + ANS 3 Dial ZZ + [ANS + ZZ (repeat
+ [HOLD + Dial XX -Xl 3 FNC
9X = Speed Dial Buffer Number (90 - 99). Enter 0 - 9 for last digit.
l
= Omit this step for for Series 500 or higher.
Y = CO/PBX Access Code (maximum 4 digits)
ZZ = System or Station Speed Dial Buffer Number (00 - 99)
XX - X = Name to be stored using the Character Code (maximum 13 characters).

9X = Speed Dial Buffer Number (90 - 99). Enter 0 - 9 for last digit.
* = Omit this step for for Series 500 or higher.

Confirm

Feature Access Ke

Program One-Touch
(for DSQBLF)

Keys

FNC + Feature Access Ke

FNC + LNRSPD
[Dial 11 + FNC

+ One-Touch Key

+ Dial 1 --, Dial YYY +

YYY = Station number (2,3, or 4 digits)

Program One-Touch Keys
(for Station Speed Dial)

Program One-Touch
(for Nesting Dial)

FNC + LNRBPD + One-Touch Key
Dial ZZ - Z + FNC

+ Dial 0 + Dial Y +

Keys

Y = CO/PBX Access Code (maximum 4 digits)
ZZ = System or Station Speed Dial Buffer Number (00 - 99)

Operations

enclosed in [ I are optional.
(continued

3-154

Electra Professional

on nextpage)

Level II and Level II Advanced

Operation

Function
Program One-Touch Keys
(for Feature Access)

FNC + LNBJSPD
FNC
W

Confirm

One-Touch

Key

= Feature

Key

Place Call with One-Touch
Key

+ One-Touch Key

Notes

-+ Dial # + Dial YY +

Code

FNC -+ One-Touch Key{ + FNC }
Operation

Cancel One-Touch

Access

I

in { } is required only if the arrow is displayed.

FNC --* LNWSPD

3 One-Touch Key + FNC

Press the One-Touch key programmed

for the desired feature.

While the extension is being seized (handset is lifted or the SPKR key is pressed
Note:
The default setting for the Access Codes are shown in this table.
Function

Operation

and ICM lamp is lit):

(Default)

Notes

Trunk

Group 1

Dial 9

CO/PBX
Trunk
(Outgoixlg)

Trunk

Group 2

Dial 8

Tie Trunk
(outgoing)

Trunk Group 3

Dial 70

Trunk

Group 4

Dial 71

Trunk Group 5

Dial 72

Trunk Group 6

Dial 73

Trunk

Group 7

Dial 74

Trunk

Group 8

I
(continued

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

I
on nextpage)

3-155

Electra Professional
I

Febr uarv 1998

12O/Level II/Level

Operation

Function

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

(Default)

Nqtes
;..
‘,

I

Call Pickup CO/PBX/Tie
Line for Another Tenant

Note 4

Dial

q q

Dial

o •I

Note 4

in Same

Dial

0 q

Note 4

Specified CO/PBX Line
Seizure

Dial

IJ q + Dial XX

Note 4

XX = CO/PBX Line Number

Set Trunk Queuing

Dial 78 *

Call Pickup Internal
Same Tenant
Call Transfer
Tenant

in

I

Note:
Cancel Trunk

Queuing

v-

(01 - 641
Installation
Note 4

Hang Up

When busy tone is heard.

Installation
Note 4

Dial 79 + Hang Up
lDi~nn

Note 4

---, DialXX

XX = Tenant Number

(00 - 47)

Call Pickup - Directed

Dial 67

Intra-Tenant

Dial 68

Note 4

Call Pickup (Tie) in Same
Tenant

Dial

CI q

Note 4

Call Pickup (PBX) in Same
Tenant

I
I

Dial

0 u

Note 4

Dial

CI q

Note 4

Internal Emergency
All Call Paging

Dial

o •I

All Internal

Dial 51

Call Pickup

Call Pickup (CO) in Same
Tenant

Zone Paging

Internal

Zone A Paging

Dial 52

Internal

Zone B Paging

Dial 53

Internal

Zone C Paging

Dial 54

Internal

Meet-Me

Dial 5 *

All External

Zone Paging

1Dial 55

IExternal

Zone A Paging

I Dial 56

IExternal

Zone B Paging

1Dial 57

Zone C Paging

Dial 58

I

IExternal

r-----

All Call Paging

I

I

1

I

Dial 59
(continued

3-156

Electra Professional

on next page.)

Level II and Level II Advanced

.-,

Operation

Function
External

(Default)

Notes

Dial 5 #

Meet-Me

Trunk Group (9 - 32)

Dial

0 •I

Notes 3 & 4

Route Advance

Dial

q q

Notes 3 & 4

DSS 1 Call

Dial

q q

Note 4

DSS 2 Call

Dial

q q

Note 4

Special Station Access
Code (00 - 23)

Dial

q q

Note 4

Timed Alarm

Dial

q q +

XXXX

= Station

number

YEYY

= Time

(according

Timed Alarm
SLTs

(1 - 16)

Set at SLTs

Cancel at

Station Outgoing
Set

Lockout

Lockout

= Station

Dial

•I q + Dial XX - X 3 Hang Up

Dial

Dial
XX-

Set Do Not Disturb
Set Call Forward
Calls

- All

+ Dial 9 9 9 9 + Hang Up

X = Password

(maximum

= Password

00

(maximum

+ DialXX-X

X = Old Password

XXXX

= Stationnumber

Dial 40 i

Hangup

Dial 41

Dial XXXX

= Station

DialYY-Y

Installation
Note 4

10 digits)

+ Hang Up

Installation
Note 4
Installation

number

+ Hang Up

of forward

/

Hang Up

q q

XXXX

= Station

Dial

[3 q + Hang Up

Dial

q •I -+ Dial XXX += Dial YYY

4

4

Installation

Dial XXXX
number

Installation

of forward

XXX

= Forced

Account

Number

YYY

= Forced

Account

Code

destination

Installation

4

ANS 4 Hang Up

Installation
Note 4

001 - 500
(maximum

10 digits)

(continued

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

Installation

destination

Dial

Set Forced/Verified
Account Code from an
Attendant Position

+ Hangup

10 digits)

(maximum

q q -+ Dial XXXX

4

+

(maximum

Password

Note 4

10 digits)

Set CallForward
Answer

-No

Installation
Note 4

•I •I + Dial XXX --, Hang Up

Dial 42

Cancel Call Forward
Answer

Installation
Note 4

10 digits)

Cancel Call Forward - All
Calls/Do Not Disturb
- No

Installation
Note 4

number

Dial

XXXX

-+ Hang Up

clock)

XXXX

YY - Y = New

Station Outgoing Lockout
Cancel from Attendant

to 24-hour

~3q + Dial XXXX

XXX

Station Outgoing Lockout
Password Change

3 Dial yY:YY

Dial

XX-

Station Outgoing
Cancel

Dial XXXX

on nextpage)

3-157

ard destination

Zalls from Destination

XXX

= Station

number

of transfer

XXX

= Station

number

of forwarding

origin

party

Dial 44 + Hang Up

Dial Buffer Number by
Single Line Telephone

9X

=

Speed

Dial

(Series

Buffer

SpeedDial
YYYY

Buffer

= Access

Code

ZZ - Z = Telephone

9X

=

SpeedDial
(Series

9X

=

Number

(maximum
Number

Buffer
Buffer

SpeedDialBuffer
(Series

(90 - 99).

Enter

(80 - 99).

(Series

0 - 9 for last

digit.

500 or higher)

4 digits)
(maximum

24 digits)

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

Number

(80 - 99).

(Series

Number

(90 - 99).

Enter

0 - 3 for last

digit.

100 - 450)

SpeedDial

Place Call Using a Speed
Dial Buffer Number by
Single Line Telephone

Number

100 - 450)

500 or higher)

0 - 3 for last digit.

100 - 450)

Last Number Dialed by
Single Line Telephone

(continued

3-158

Electra Professional

on nextpage)

Level II and Level II Advanced

Operation

FUIlCtiOIl

F’NC + CNF + Dial XXXX

Barge-In by Station
Number

XXXX

XX

= COiPBX

X = Call

Call

Dial
’

Trunk

Number

Number

Installation

(01 - 64) to be interrupted

(0 -

Park

Number

9)

(0 - 9)

IJ q 4 Dial X 3 Dial 1 -+ Dial Y + Dial
1

i T- rT?ation
0

=

3 =Erasing

Y

=

Enter

Z

=

1 = Day

=

2 = Night

=

3 = WeekendMode

Automated

Attendant

Number

Z

Note 4

(1 - 8)

Mode
Mode

Dial q q 4 Dial X 3 Dial 2 3 Dial Y
x = 1 = Recording

Y

=

2 = Confirmation

=

3 = Erasing

=

1 = Message

for Dial

2 = Message

for Call Waiting

Dial q o -+ Dial X
x = 1 = ~cording

Delay Announcement
(Recording/Confirmation/
Erasing)

.=

2 = Confirmation

=

3 = Erasing

Note 4

Tone
Tone

Dial 3

4

Note 4

Installation

Dial 0

Call

Dial

Set Relocation

q q += DialXXXX

XXXX

= Station

number

YYYYY

= Station

Password

+ DialYYYYY

Note 4
Series 700 or
higher

to be interrupted

an extension:

Function

ICallback

be interrupted

+ DialX

X = Call

Voice Prompt Message
(RecordingKonBrmationl
Erasing)

Tone/Voice

Park

Dial4#

Automated Attendant
Message
(Recording/Confirmation/
Erasing)

While calling

Installation

Dial 4 * + Dial X

Transfer to Call Park System

Attendant

numberto

3 FNC

FNC + CNF ---, Dial * + Dial XX ‘+ FNC

Barge-In by Trunk
Number

Answer or Retrieve
Park - System

= Station

Notes

Operation

I

Switching

1Handset Receive Volume

#

1 FNC -+ Dial 2

1Installation

1

I Installation

1

(continued

Electra Professional

Notes

Dial 1

I Dial

Message

I

Level II and Level II Advanced

on nextpage)

3-159

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

While a call is waitine

(when

calling

120/Level

an extension

II Advanced

and Call Waiting

Callback

Dial0

Installation

Service Manual

Tone is heard):

Operation

Function
Automatic

II/Level

I

Notes
Installation

+ Hangup

Step Call

Dial 1

Single Line
OK (only for
DP type
telephones)

Tone Override

Dial *

Installation

I Dial #

I Installation

Callback Message
Voice Over

Dial 6

Quick Transfer to Voice
Mail

Dial 7

While seizing

a COIPBX

Series 500 or
higher

Line:
I
Operation

Function
Microphone

ON/OFF

1 FNC + Dial 1

Seized Outside Line
Number Display

1FNC += Dial 3
FNC + Dial 5

Drop Key
Store and Repeat (Store)

I FNC + Dial 7

Save and Repeat (Save)

I FNC + Dial 9

Exclusive Hold

1 FNC + Dial HOLD

DropTrunk
and Seize
Internal Line

I FNC + Dial 6 *

Store/Save & Repeat
(Dial)

I LNRBPD

Unsupervised
Automatic

Note

Conference

Redial

Last Number

Redial

Account Code Entry
Quick Transfer
Mail

*

Dial #
Series 500 or
higher

Press CNF (during conference)

IFNC

+ LNRBPD

LNRSPD

(Speaker Mode)

+ Dial *

FNC + Dial 66

Series 300 or
higher
Series 500 or
higher

to Voice

Voice Over Split
(Whisper Page)

FNC + Dial65

Series 400 or
higher

Group Listening

Speaker (during off-hook)

Series 700 or
higher

3-160

Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

CHAPTER
TERMINAL

4

INSTALLATION

CHAPTER
TERMINAL

4

INSTALLATION

TABLE

OF CONTENTS

SECTION

1

GENERAL

INFORMATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SECTION

2

ELECTRA

PROFESSIONAL

MULTILINE

4-1

ETW-8-c ) (BK)/(SW)

2.2

ETW-16DC-(

> (BK)/(SW)

TEL

..........................................................

4-2

2.3

ETW-16DD-(

) (BKY (SW) TEL

...........................................................

4-2

2.4

ETW-24DS-(

) (BK)/(SW)

2.5

Connect a Multiline

2.6

Install the Designation

Card, Plastic Panel, and Labels on a Multiline

2.7

Tilt Stand Adjustment

..................................................................

2.8

Connect the EDW-48(

) (BK)/(SW)

2.9

Install the Plastic Panel on an Attendant

TEL

3.2

Wall Mount the SLT-F(lG)-10

SECTION

4

to the System

Add-On Console

ADP and SLT-F(lG)-20

MOUNTING

UNIT

4.2

install

the Electra Professional

4.3

Install

the Electra

Elite WMU-U

Unit

5

DIGITAL

MULTILINE

TERMINALS

5.2

DTU-16-(

5.3

DTU-16D-(

5.4

DTU-32-(

5.5

DTU-32D-(

5.6

DCU-60-(

SECTION

6

) (BK)/(WH)

TEL

) (BK)/(WH)

TEL

) (BK)/(WH)
) (BK)/(WH)
) (BK)/(WH)
) (BK)/(WH)

6.2.2

Connecting

(BK)/(SW) Unit

4-9
..................................

.........................................

4-9
4-11
4-19

4-22

...........................................................

4-23

......................................................

DEVICE

CONNECTION

4-24

.......................................

...................................................................
Unit

Unit on a Digital

Multiline
Unit

Terminal

4-25
............................

...........................................
..............................................

................................................................

Install an APR-U Unit on a Digital

Multiline

Terminal

4-25
4-25

....................................................

Cables to the ADA-U

Unit

4-8
4-9

..................................................

SwitchSettingsontheADA-UUnit

4 - Table of Contents

................................

............................................................

TEL

an ADA-U

Install the APR-U

ADP

4-21

Install the Electra Elite ADA-U
Install

4-7

...........................................................

6.2

6.2.1

4-7

4-20

General Information

6.3.1

....................................

............................................................

6.1

6.3

4-7

4-19

CONSOLE

ANCILLARY

.6.2.3

..................................

.............................................................

TEL
TEL

4-4

4-6

....................................................................
WMU-W

..............

.................................

.....................................................

GeneralInformation

DTU-8(

T’reminal

......................................................................

WALL

5.1

ADP

4-3
4-5

Console to the System

4.1

SECTION

4-3

..............................................

ADP AND SLT-F(lG)-20

Connection

4-l

...........................................................

Terminal

SLT-F(lG)-10

3

...............................................................

3.1

Chapter

.......................

2.1

SECTION

TEL

TERMINALS

4-26
4-28
4-31
4-33

............................

4-33

i

TABLE

OF CONTENTS

(Continued)
‘,

6.3.2
6.4

Switch Settings

InstalltheHFU-Unit
6.4.1 Installing

6.5

ii

.............................................................

4-36

...............................................................
an HFU-U Unit on a Digital

Multiline

4-37
Terminal

........................

Install the Ancillary Device Adaptor Unit [ADA(l)-W (BKY(SW) or ADA(2)-W
in the Multiline Terminal
...........................................................

4-38
(BK)/(SW)]
4-40

Chapter 4 - Table of Contents

__,j

LIST
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8

ETW-S-(

) (BK)/(SW)

TEL Multiline

OF FIGURES

Terminal

................................................

4-l

ETW-16DC-(

) (BK)/(SW)

TEL Multiline

Terminal

............................................

4-2

ETW-16DD-(

) (BK)/(SW)

TEL Multiline

Terminal

.............................................

4-2

ETW-24DS(

) (BK)/(SW) TEL Multiline

Terminal

............................................

4-3
4-3

Connecting

a Multiline

Terminal

to the System

Installing

the Designation

Unfolding

the Legs on the Tilt Stand

Card, Plastic Panel, and Labels on a Multiline

Folding the Legs on the Tilt Stand
) (BK)/(SW)

...............................................

Console

EDW-48-(

4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18

Connecting

an Attendant

.........................................................

Connecting

a Single Line Telephone

4-5
4-6

.......................................

using the SLT-F(lG)-(

) ADP

the Screws from the SLT-F(lG)-(

) ADP

Attaching

the SLT-F(lG)-(

...................................................

4-8
4-8
4-9

.................................................................

the WMU-W

(BK)/(SW) Unit to the Wall

Installing

the Multiline

Terminal

on the WMU-W

Hanger

............................................................

the Handset

4-7

............................................

Fastening

Positioning

4-6

..............................

Removing

) ADP to a Wall

4-4
4-5

..............................................................

Add-On Console to the System

Preparation

..............

...........................................................

4-9

Wall Mounting

Terminal

4-10

..........................................
(BK)/(SW) Unit

.............................

4-10
4-l 1

RemovingtheBaseUnit

...................................................................

4-11

4-19

RemovingtheKnockout

...................................................................

4-12

4-20
4-21
4-22

Attaching

Plugging

in the Line Cord Using a Wall Jack

4-23
4-24

Plugging

in the Line Cord Using a Modular

Attaching

the Bottom Tabs of the Digital

4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28

Attaching

the Top Tabs of the Digital

4-29

Leading

4-30
4-31
4-32

Attaching

the Wall Mount

Attaching

the Digital

Multiline

Terminal

to the WMU-U

Removing

the Digital

Multiline

Terminal

from the Base Unit or WMU-U

4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36

DTU-8-c

Chapter

the Base Unit to the Wall

Wall Mounting

Installed

Using a Modular

Wall Mount Unit

Jack

the Tabs from the Adapter

Removing

the Tabs from the WMU-U

......................................................

DTU-16-c
DTU-16D-(

) (BK)/(WH)
) (BK)/(WH)
) (BK)/(WH)

4 - Table of Contents

Jack

Multiline

4-13

.............................................
Terminal

Terminal

4-14

to the Base Unit

to the Base Unit

.......

) ..........

.....................

Unit

4-16

..............................................

4-17

..................................................
Unit

4-15

4-16

..................................................
Unit

4-14

4-15

.......................................................

Unit to the Wall

TEL

4-13

................................................

Multiline

the Line Cord out of the WMU-U

) (BK)/(WH)

4-12

.................................................................

Removing

DTU-32-c

........................................................

4-17

................................
Unit

..................

4-18
4-18

.................................................................

4-19

................................................................

4-20

TEL
TEL

..............................................................

4-21

TEL ................................................................

4-22
...

111

LIST

OF FIGURES

(Continued)
-..\
\:’

4-37

DTU-32D-(

) (BK)/(WH)

TEL

4-38

DCU-60-t

4-39

Removing

4-40

Unlatching

4-41

Opening the Cover on the Digital

4-42

Attaching

4-43

Leading the Telephone

4-44

ADA-UUnit

4-45

Attaching

4-46

ADA-U

4-47

APR-UUnit

4-48

Raising the Tilt Panel

) (BK)/(WH)

4-23

..............................................................

Console

4-24

.............................................................
the Tilt Panel on the Digital Multiline Terminal
...................................
the Cover on the Digital

the ADA-U

Multiline

Multiline

Unit to the Digital

Terminal
Terminal

Multiline

Cord out from the ADA-U

...............................
Cables to the ADA-U

Unit

4-26
4-26

.....................................
........................................

Terminal

4-27
4-27

.................................

Unit

4-28

.......................................
. ..........................................

4-28
4-29

.......................................................

Unit Switch Settings

4-31

..............................................................
..........................................................................

4-33
4-33
4-34

4-50

.....................................................................
Unlatching the Cover on the Digital Multiline Terminal
.....................................
Attaching the Unit to the Digital Multiline Terminal
........................................

4-51

Leading the AC Adapter

4-35

4-52

Closing the Tilt Panel Cover

4-53

Ferrite

4-54

APR-U Unit Switches

4-36

4-55

HFU-UUnit

.....................................................................
..........................................................................

4-38

4-56

MicrophonewithMute

....................................................................

4-38

4-57

Attaching

a Microphone

to a Digital

4-39

4-58

Removing

the Knockouts

4-59

ADA(l)-W

(BK)/(SW) Unit or ADA(2)-W

4-49

Core Installation

Cord out from the Unit

4-34

.............................................

4-35

...............................................................

4-36

..................................................................

Multiline

to Install ADA(l)-W

Terminal

.....................................
(BK)/(SW) Unit or ADA(B)-W (BK)/(SW) Unit

(BKY(SW) Unit Installation

_ :.?

.........................

....

4-40
4-41

_:

iv

Chapter 4 - Table of Contents

LIST
4-l

ADA-U

Cable Connections

4-2

ADA-U

Unit Switch Settings

4-3

APR-UUnitSwitchSettingsforSWlandSW3

4-4

HFU-U

4-5

ADA(l)-W

(BKNSW) Unit Cable Connection

4-6

ADA(2)-W

(BKMSW) Unit Cable Connection

Unit Switch Settings

Chapter 4 - Table of Contents

OF TABLES

....................................................

............

4-30

............

4-32

............

4-37

............

4-39

...................................

............

4-41

...................................

............

4-41

..................................................
..........

. ......................

..................................................

v

cFeb

1998

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY

vi

LEFT BLANK.

Chapter

4 - Table of Contents

CHAPTER
4
TERMINAL
INSTALLATION
SECTION

1

GENERAL

INFORMATION

The system has four models of Electra Professional Multiline Terminals for the Level II/Level II
Advanced system, five models of Electra Elite Digital Multiline
Terminals for the 120 system,
Attendant Add-On Console for Level II/Level II Advanced, Attendant Add-On Console for 120,
an SLT Adapter that allows connection of Single Line Telephones, an ADA connection for a
headset, external speakerphone or other ancillary device for Electra Professional terminals, an
ADA-U ancillary device for the Electra Elite terminal, an APR-U analog port adapter with
ringing for Electra Elite terminals, and an HFU-U handsfree unit that enhances small office
teleconferencing
for Electra Elite terminals.
WMU-U and WMU-W wall mounts for Electra
Elite and Electra Professional terminals, respectively, are also described.
SECTION

2

ELECTRA

PROFESSIONAL

MULTILINE

TERMINALS

This section describes multiline
terminals for Level II/Level II Advanced system and provides
the instructions
for wall mounting
a Multiline
Terminal and installing
the plastic panels
provided with the telephones.
2.1

ETW-8-c

1 (BKY(SW)

TEL

This Multiline Terminal is a fully modularized instrument with tilt stand, eight Flexible
Line keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in
speakerphone,
Ancillary Device Adapter (ADA) compatibility,
and a large LED to indicate incoming
calls and messages. Refer to Figure 4-l- ETW-8-t ) (BKY(SW) TEL Multiline Terminal.
A maximum of 55 ETW-8-t
1 (BK)/(SW) TEL terminals can be installed
system and a maximum of 95 in a 120/Level II Advanced system.

Figure 4-l

Terminal

Installation

ETW-8-l

) (BK)/(SW) TEL Multiline

in a Level II

Terminal

4-1

2.2

ETW-16DC-(

1 (BKV(SW)

TEL

This Multiline
Terminal is a fully modularized
instrument
with tilt stand, 16 Flexible
Line keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in speakerphone,
16character by 2-line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), ADA compatibility,
and a large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages. Refer to Figure 4-2 - ETW-16DC-(
) (BK)/(SW)
TEL Multiline Terminal.
A maximum of 56 ETW-16DC-(
) (BKY(SW) TEL terminals can be installed
system and a maximum of 96 in a 12OILevel II Advanced system.

Figure 4-2 ETW-16DC-(
2.3

ETW-16DD-(

) (BK)/(SW)

1 (BK)/(SW)

TEL Multiline

in a Level II

Terminal

TEL

This Multiline
Terminal is a fully modularized
instrument
with tilt stand, 16 Flexible
Line keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in speakerphone,
a 16character by 2-line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 20 programmable
One-Touch keys
with red LEDs, ADA compatibility,
a large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages.
Refer to Figure 4-3 - ETW-16DD-( ) (BK)/(SW) TEL Multiline
Terminal.
A maximum of 56 ETW-16DD-(
) (BKNSW) TEL terminals can be installed
system and a maximum of 96 in a 1201Level II Advanced system.

Figure 4-3

4-2

ETW-16DD-(

1 (BK)/(SW) TEL Multiline

in a Level II

Terminal

Terminal

Installation

_.

:‘>,

.-- ,’

2.4

ETW-24DS-(

1 (BKMSW)

TEL

This Multiline Terminal $ a fully modular instrument
with tilt stand, 24 Flexible Line
keys (each with a two-color LED), eight function keys, built-in speakerphone,
built-in
dual path ability, 16-character by 2-line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 12 programmable
One-Touch keys, ADA compatibility,
and a large LED to indicate incoming calls and
messages. Refer to Figure 4-4 - ETW-24DS-( ) (BKY(SW) TEL Multiline
Terminal.
A maximum of 56 ETW-24DS(
> (BK)/(SW) TEL terminals can be installed
system and a maximum of 96 in a 12O/Level II Advanced system.

Figure 4-4
2.5

Terminal

Installation

1 (BKY(SW) TEL Multiline

Terminal

Connect

a Multiline

1.

Plug a telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of the Multiline
Terminal. Refer to Figure 4-5 - Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System.

2.

Lead the cord out through

Figure 4-5

Terminal

ETW-24DS(

in a Level II

to the System

the cord groove.

Connecting

a Multiline

Terminal

to the System

4-3

2.6

Install
1.

the Designation

Card,

Place the designation
Figure 4-6 - Installing
Multiline Terminal.

Plastic

Panel, and Labels

Terminal

card over the keys on the Multiline
Terminal. Refer to
the Designation
Card, Plastic Panel, and Labels on a

2.

Insert the top hooks of the clear plastic panel in the applicable holes on the
Multiline
Terminal, then place the bottom hooks in the Multiline
Terminal.
Snap the plastic panel into place to secure it.

3.

Remove the station number

4.

Remove the Directory

label and place on the handset hook.

Card from the sheet and put it on the Directory
With

Without

Figure 4-6

4-4

on a Multiline

Tray.

DSSlBLF

DSSlBLF

Installing the Designation Card, Plastic Panel, and
Labels on a Multiline Terminal

Terminal

Installation

-3/
-.j

2.7

Tilt Stand Adjustment
1.

To unfold the legs on the tilt stand:
a.

Turn the Multiline

Terminal

b.

Unfold the legs until they lock. Refer to Figure 4-7 - Unfolding
the Tilt Stand.

Figure 4-7
2.

Installation

Unfolding

the Legs on

the Legs on the Tilt Stand

To fold the legs on the tilt stand:
a.

Turn the Multiline

Terminal

b.

Press the mold under the legs.

C.

Fold the legs toward the body of the
4-8 - Folding the Legs on the Tilt Stand.

Figure 4-8

Terminal

upside down.

upside down.

telephone.

Refer

to Figure

Folding the Legs on the Tilt Stand

4-5

2.8

Connect

the EDW-48-t

1 (BKY(SW) Console

to the System

The Attendant
Add-On Console has 48 programmable
keys with two LEDs (red and
green), 12 function keys with one-color LED (red), and a tilt stand. Refer to Figure
4-9 - EDW-48-c ) (BKY(SW) Console.
A maximum

of four EDW-48-t

1 (BKHSW)

Figure 4-9

consoles can be installed

EDW-48-c

in the system.

1 (BK)/(SW) Console

The EDW-48-c ) (BK)/(SW) Console may be associated with any of the following
Terminals:
ETW-16DC-(
> (BK)/(SW) TEL, ETW-16DD-(
) (BK)/(SW)
ETW-24DS-( > (BKY(SW) TEL.
1.

Plug a telephone
On Console.

2.

Lead the cord out through the cord groove. Refer to Figure 4-10 - Connecting
Attendant Add-On Console to the System.

Figure 4-10
3.

4-6

cord in the modular

Connecting

Plug the AC/DC Adapter
Console.

jack on the bottom

Multiline
TEL, or

an Attendant

of the Attendant

Addan

Add-On Console to the System

in the jack on the bottom

of the Attendant

Terminal

Add-On

Installation

\ ‘:

2.9

SECTION

3

Install

the Plastic

Panel on an Attendant

Add-On

Console

1.

Place the Designation

2.

Insert the bottom hooks of the clear plastic panel in the applicable
Attendant Add-On Console and snap the panel into place.

SLT-F(lG)-10

Card over the keys on the Attendant

ADP AND SLT-F(lG)-20

Add-On Console.
holes in the

ADP

This adapter provides an interface for a Single Line Telephone or similar
21 KTU port and includes a built-in ringing signal generator (RSG) .

devices to an ESI-F( 8)-

One cable, with RJll connection at both ends, is provided with this unit to connect the adapter
to an ESI-F(8)-21 KTU port. Another cable with RJll connectors connects an SLT or other
similar device.
3.1

Connection
Figure 4-11 - Connecting a Single Line Telephone using the SLT-F(lG)-(
the connection from an ES1 -F(8)-21 KTU port to a Single Line Telephone
F(lG)-( ) ADP.
SLT-F( 1G)-( ) ADP

) ADP, shows
using the SLTSingle Line
Telephone

ESI Port

[I

T-t&q&

SLT-F(1 GM ) ADP

RI11
I

(2-wire)

SLT

Figure 4-11

Terminal

Installation

Connecting

a Single Line Telephone

using the SLT-F(lG)-(

) ADP

4-7

3.2

Wall Mount

the SLT-F(lG)-10

ADP and SLT-FUG)-20

ADP

There are two ways to wall mount this adapter.
1.

-c.,
j

Use the wall mount location on the rear with one screw.
-OR-

1.

Remove the two screws from the top to open the SLT-F(lG)-(
) ADP.
Figure 4-12 - Removing the Screws from the SLT-F(lG)-(
) ADP.

Figure 4-12
2.

Removing

1ADP

Use the two provided wood screws to attach the unit to the wall. Close the unit
and secure with the two screws previously removed. Refer to Figure 4-13 Attaching the SLT-F(lG)-(
1 ADP to a Wall.

Figure 4-13

4-8

the Screws from the SLT-F(lG)-(

Refer to

Attaching

the SLT-F(lG)-(

1 ADP to a Wall

Terminal

Installation

Februarv1998

9
SECTION

4

WALL
4.1

MOUNTING
General

Information

The WMU-W
4.2

Install

UNIT
(BE/SW) Unit is a universal

the Electra

The WMU-W
the system.

Professional

WMU-W

Unit can be connected

Unit
Professional

1.

Remove the station number

2.

Slide the hanger out. Face the projected side upward,
original position. Refer to Figure 4-14 - Wall Mounting

3.

Installation

(BKXSW)

to any Electra

plate and designation

Figure 4-14

Terminal

Wall Mount Unit.

Reinstall

the station number

Wall Mounting

plate and designation

Multiline

Terminal

in

strip.
and install it back in the
Preparation.

Preparation

strip.

4-9

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional
4.

12OLevel

Fasten the optional WMU-W (BKHSW) Unit to the wall using the two provided
screws. Refer to Figure 4-15 - Fastening the WMU-W (BK)/(SW) Unit to the
Wall.

Figure 4-15

5.

Fastening

(BK)/(SW)

Unit to the Wall

Install the Multiline
Terminal on the wall mounting
unit by aligning the
notches on the bottom of the Multiline
Terminal with the rails on the wall
mounting unit. Refer to Figure 4-16 - Installing
the Multiline
Terminal on the
WMU-W (BK)/(SW) Unit.

Figure 4-16

4-10

the WMU-W

Installing the Multiline
Terminal
WMU-W (BKY(SW) Unit

on the

Terminal

Installation

4.3

Install

the Electra

Elite WMU-U

Unit

Any Electra Professional 120 Digital Multiline Terminal can be mounted on a wall using
the base unit that comes with the terminal or using the WMU-U Unit to accommodate
adapters that are installed on the terminal.
4.3.1

Remove and Remount

the Handset Hanger

Slide the hanger out of the slot. Place it back in its original position so that the
hanger protrudes providing a rest for the handset. (This procedure applies when
using either the base unit or the WMU-U
Unit.) Refer to Figure 4-17
Positioning
the Handset Hanger for the steps to remove and remount the
handset hanger.

2

Figure 4-17 Positioning

4.3.2

the Handset Hanger

Wall Mount Using the Base Unit
1. Remove the base unit by pressing the tabs on each side of the base plate and
lifting upward. Refer to Figure 4-18 Removing the Base unit

Figure 4-18 Removing

Terminal

Installation

the Base Unit

4-l 1

_
Febr
uarv1998

Electra Professional
2.

1201Level II/Level

Installation

Service Manual

Remove the knockout on the base unit with nippers. The shaded area in Figure
4-19 Removing the Knockout is the knockout.

Figure 4- 19 Removing

3.

II Advanced

the Knockout

Attach the base unit to the posts on the locally provided wall plate. Using
locally provided screws, secure the base unit to the wall. Place the screws in the
nodes provided on the base unit. (Place the wider end of the base unit down.)
Attach the base unit to the wall plate as shown in Figure 4-20 Attaching the
Base Unit to the Wall.

Nodes

Posts

Figure 4-20 Attaching

4-12

the Base Unit to the Wall

Terminal

Installation

If using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, put the modular jack inside the
base unit as shown in Figure 4-21 Wall Mounting Using a Modular Jack. Use
the locally provided screws to attach the base unit directly to the wall.

Modular
Terminal

Figure 4-21 Wall Mounting

4.

Installation

Jack

Plug the line cord in the jack on the wall plate, wrap the extra cord and secure it
with a tie wrap, and lead the line cord out through the groove in the side of the
base unit.

Figure 4-22 Plugging

Terminal

Using a Modular

in the Line Cord Using a Wall Jack

4-13

If using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, plug the line cord in the modular
jack, wrap the extra cord and secure it with a tie wrap, and lead the line cord out
through the groove in the side of the base unit.

Figure 4-23 Plugging

5.

in the Line Cord Using a Modular

Jack

With the base unit attached to the wall, hook the two bottom
in the tab slots on the Digital Multiline
Terminal.

tabs on the base unit

Base Unit

S-A

f&F

Terminal

Wall

Tab Slot;

Figure 4-24 Attaching

4-14

the Bottom Tabs of the Digital

Multiline

Terminal

to the Base Unit

Terminal

Installation

6.

Push up on the terminal and lock the top tabs on the base unit in the tab slots on the
Digital Multiline
Terminal.
Refer to Figure 4-25 Attaching
the Top Tabs of the
Digital Multiline Terminal to the Base Unit.

Digital
Multiline
Terminal

Line Cord

Base Unit

Figure 4-25 Attaching

7.

the Top Tabs of the Digital

Installation

Terminal

to the Base Unit

When properly installed,
the wall mounted Digital Multiline
Terminal
similar to the one shown in Figure 4-26 Installed Wall Mount Unit.

Figure 4-26 Installed

Terminal

Multiline

looks

Wall Mount Unit

4-15

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

1201Level
II/Level
_

Install the Wall Mount
the WMU-U Unit

4.3.3

Installation

II Advanced

Unit and Mount

the Digital

Multiline

1. Remove the line cord and the tilt leg from the terminal.
in Figure 4-27 Removing the Tabs from the Adapter.

Figure 4-27 Removing

2.

DTU-B-(
) (BK)I(WH)
TEL
DTU-16-(
) (BK)/(WH)TEL
DTU-16D-(
) (BK)/(WH)
TEL
DCU-604
) (BK)I(WH)
TEL

Service Manual
Terminal

using

Cut off the tabs shown

the Tabs from the Adapter

Remove the tabs from the WMU-U Unit as shown in Figure 4-28 Removing
Tabs from the WMU-U Unit for the applicable digital terminal.

the

cut
t

DTU-32-(
DTU-32D-(

Figure 4-28 Removing

4-16

the Tabs from the WMU-U

) (BK)/(WH)
TEL
) (BK)/(WH)TEL

Unit

Terminal

Installation

.
‘i
,Y

Februarv
3. Bundle the cord from the modular jack leaving
tie wrap to secure the bundled cord.
4.

approximately

1998

8 inches. Use a

Place the bundled line cord in the space between the WMU-U Unit and the wall.
Lead the line cord out through the slits as shown in Figure 4-29 Leading the
Line Cord out of the W’MU-U Unit.

Figure 4-29 Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-U

Unit

5. Attach the WMU-U Unit to the posts on the locally provided wall plate. Using
locally provided screws, secure the WMU-U Unit to the wall. Place the screws in
the nodes on the WMU-U Unit.

Nodes

Posts

Nodes’

Figure 4-30 Attaching

Terminal

Installation

the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall

4-17

6.

Connect the line cord to the Digital

7.

With the WMU-U Unit attached to the wall, hook the two bottom tabs on the
WMU-U Mount Unit in the tab slots on the terminal. Then push the two top
tabs on the WMU-U Unit in the tab slots on the terminal. If the adapter has a
power supply. lead the AC adapter cord out through the opening at the bottom of
the terminal. Refer to Figure 4-31 Attaching the Digital Multiline Terminal to
the WMU-U Unit.

Figure 4-31 Attaching

5.3.4

the Digital

Remove the Digital

Multiline

Multiline

To remove the terminal,
WMU-U Unit.

Figure 4-32 Removing

the Digital

Multiline

Multiline

Terminal

Terminal

to the WMU-U

.,<,.,
!
../

Unit

from the Base Unit or the WMU-U

pull up on the bottom

Terminal

Terminal.

Unit

and lift it from the base unit or

from the Base Unit or WMU-U

Unit
.

4-18

Terminal

Installation

Installation

SECTION

Service Manual

5

DIGITAL

Electra Professional

MULTILINE

lSO/Level II/Level

II advanced

Februarv

1998

TERMINALS

This section describes different Electra Elite digital multiline terminals and the digital
attendant console for all Electra Professional systems. Each terminal comes with a cable
with an RJll connector at both ends with one end already connected to the LINE
receptacle. A green number display card and an adapter to connect it to the terminal are
also included. The Electra Professional telephones with displays also have softkeys.
5.1

D W-8-(

1 (BKY(WH)

TEL

This non-display digital multiline terminal has eight programmable
line keys (each with
a two-color LED), built-in speakerphone, headset jack, a Large LED to indicate incoming
calls snd messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
Refer to Figure 4-33 - DTU-8-( ) (BK)/(WH) TEL.
A combined maximum of 96 Electra Professional and Electra Elite digital terminals can
be installed in the Electra Professional 1201Level II Advanced system. The maximum for
Level II is 56.

Figure

Terminal

Installation

4-33

DTU-8-(

1 (BK)/(WH)

TEL

4-19

5.2

DTU-16-C

1 (BKMWH)

TEL

This non-display digital multiline terminal has 16 programmable
line keys (each with a
two-color LED), built-in speakerphone, a built-in headset jack, a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U
Units. Refer to Figure 4-34 - DTU-16-C 1 (BK)/(WH) TEL.
A combined maximum of 96 Electra Professional
be installed in the Electra Professional 120/Level
Level II is 56.

Figure 4-34

4-20

DTU-16-t

and Electra
II Advanced

1 (BK)/(WH)

Elite digital terminals can
system. The maximum for

TEL

Terminal

Installation

Installation

Service Manual
5.3

Electra Professional

DTU-16D-(

1 (BKMWH)

1201Level II/Level

II advanced

Februarv

1998

TEL

This display digital multiline terminal has 16 programmable
line keys (each with a twocolor LED), built-in speakerphone, a built-in headset jack, a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U
Units.
This terminal comes in black or white. Refer to Figure 4-35 - DTU-16D-(
)
(BKMWH) TEL.
The adjustable

LCD (Liquid

Crystal Display’) has 24 characters

Four softkeys are provided with the DTU-16D-(1)

(BK)/(WH)

A combined maximum of 96 Electra Professional
be installed in the Electra Professional 120/Level
Level II is 56.

and Electra Elite digital terminals can
II Advanced system. The maximum for

Figure 4-35

Terminal

Installation

and 3 lines.

DTU-16D-(

1 (BKMWH)

TEL.

TEL

4-21

5.4

DTU-3%(

) (BKMWH)

TEL

This non-display digital multiline terminal has 32 programmable
line keys (each with a
two-color LED), built-in speakerphone,
built-in headset jack, a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U
Units. Refer to Figure 4-36 - DTU-32-( ) (BK)/(WH) TEL.
A combined maximum of 96 Electra Professional,
be installed in the Electra Professional 120/Level
Level II is 56.

Figure 4-36

DTU-32-(

and Electra
II Advanced

) (BKMWH)

S-,,
,/

Elite digital terminals can
system. The maximum for

TEL

;

4-22

Terminal

Installation

5.5

DTU-32D-(

1 (BKMWH)

TEL

This display digital multiline
terminal has 32 programmable
line keys (each with a twocolor LED), built-in
speakerphone,
built-in
headset jack, a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, and compatibility
with the ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U
Units.
This terminal comes in black or white.
Refer to Figure 4-37 - DTU-32D-(
)
(BKMWH) TEL.
The adjustable

LCD (Liquid

Crystal Display) has 24 characters

Four softkeys are provided with the DTU-32D-2

(BKMWH)

A combined maximum of 96 Electra Professional
be installed in the Electra Professional 120/Level
Level II is 56.

Figure 4-37

Terminal

Installation

DTU-32D-(

and 3 lines.

TEL.

and Electra Elite digital terminals can
II Advanced system. The maximum for

) (BK)/(WH)

TEL

4-23

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998
5.6

DCU-604

) (BKMWH)

lSO/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

CONSOLE

The Attendant
Console has 60 programmable
line keys (each with a two-color LED). The
first 48 line keys can be programmed as Direct Station Selection keys, or as outside line
keys; the remaining
12 line keys can be programmed
as features such as Paging, Night
Transfer, or Message Waiting. An external power supply (AC Adapter) is required and is
included with the console. Refer to Figure 4-38 - DCU-60-t ) (BK)/(WH) Console.
A maximum of four consoles can be installed in any Electra Professional system. An
Attendant Position can have two attached consoles. (This console cannot be installed on
the Electra Professional Level I system).

Figure 4-38

4-24

DCU-60-c

) (BKY(WH)

Console

Terminal

Installation

......-.
,j
.. ’

SECTION

6

ANCILLARY

6.1

DEVICE

General

CONNECTION

Information

ADA-U

Unit

This ancillary device adapter allows connection of a tape recorder to log/record telephone
calls to Electra Elite Multiline
Terminals.
Dedicated input connectors are also provided
for a recording tone to inform parties that a call is being recorded.
A maximum
ADA(l)-W

of 96 ADA-U
(BK)/(WH)

units can be installed in the 120 system.

Unit

This ancillary device adapters provides the multiline
terminal
with connection for a
headset, external speakerphone,
or other ancillary devices. An ADA(l)-W
(BK)/(SW)
Unit can be installed in any Electra Professional multiline terminal.
A maximum of 96 ADA(l)-W (BK)/(WH) Units can be installed in the Level II Advanced
system. A maximum of 56 can be installed in the Level II system
ADA(Z)-W

(BK)/(SW) Unit

This ancillary device adapter provides the Electra Professional multiline terminal with a
single-line telephone interface.
An ADA(Z)-W (BK)/(SW) Unit can be installed in any
Electra Professional multiline terminal and allows connection of a single-line telephone,
cordless telephone, fax, modem, an automatic dialer (that generates DTMF tones for
dialing), or an answering machine.
The maximum
distance between the ADA(Z)-W
(BK)/(SW) Unit and the equipment is 10 feet, using 24 AWG. An AC/DC adapter is
required for power supply to the ADA(2)-W (BKXSW) Unit. The ADA(B)-W (BK)/(SW)
Unit has a built-in RSG. Hookflash detection, Message Wait, and disconnect signal are
not supported.
The recommended
maximum
is 16 ADA(B)-W (BK)/(SW) Units, however, additional
units can be installed depending on system traffic and the number of PBR circuits
available.
6.2

InstaIl

the Electra

Elite

ADA-U

Unit

Install the Electra Elite Digital Multiline Terminals using the green/red
pair at the
wall jack instead of the yellow/black
pair used with the Electra Professional Multiline
Terminals.
When installing
an ADA-U Unit, connect the cable to the ADA-U Unit, set the dip
switches, and then install the ADA-U Unit on the terminal.
The ADA-U Unit does not
require an AC Adapter.

Terminal

Installation

4-25

6.2.1

Install

an ADA-U

Unit on a Digital

1.

Unplug

the telephone

2.

Press both the left and right
terminal and remove it.

Figure 4-39 Removing

3.

M&line

Terminal

cord from the terminal.
ends of the tilt

the Tilt Panel on the Digital

panel

Multiline

on the back of the

Terminal

Unlatch
the cover by pressing the areas indicated
in Figure 4-40
Unlatching
the Cover on the Digital Multiline Terminal.
Using a straight
blade screwdriver,
press the blade between the cover and the base to
release the tabs.

Screwdriver

Figure 4-40 Unlatching

the Cover on the Digital

Multiline

‘%>;
\ .g

, -.
:,
_.I

Blade

Terminal

,..

4-26

Terminal

Installation

4.

Open the cover to allow access to the ADA receptacle.

Figure 4-41 Opening the Cover on the Digital

5.

Installation

Terminal

Plug the ADA-U Unit connector in the receptacle connector on the back of the
terminal (Connector in the diagram>. Snap the ADA-U Unit between Hooks on
the diagram to secure it.

Figure 4-42 Attaching

Terminal

Multiline

the ADA-U

Unit to the Digital

Multiline

Terminal

4-27

6.

Lead the Telephone
telephone cord.

Figure 4-43 Leading

6.2.2

Connecting

cord out through

the Telephone

the groove on the tilt panel.

Cord out from the ADA-U

Cables to the ADA-U

Plug in the

Unit

Unit

Cable terminal connectors are located on the right side of the ADA-U Unit.
Cables should be connected on this unit before installing the unit on the Digital
Multiline Terminal.

o

o
o
T4
o
T2

n--II
Figure 4-44 ADA-U

4-28

OT9

0-I-7
0%

Terminals

/

07-3
oT1

Unit

Terminal

Installation

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120kevel

II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv

1998

1.

Cut off the plug on one end of the cable.

2.

Locate the adapter
ADA-Unit.

3.

Remove the cap on the adapter terminal to expose the metal receptacle. Push the
cable in the applicable receptacle and replace the cap. Be sure to line up the slot on
the cap with the slot on the metal receptacle to ensure proper contact. Refer to
Figure 4-45 Attaching Cables to the ADA-U Unit.

terminals

Figure 4-45 Attaching

4.

Insulate

on the right

side of the unit shown in Figure 4-44

Cables to the ADA-U

Unit

the end of the cable that needs to be shielded with insulating

Table 4-1 ADA-U Cable Connections provides
ADP terminals and describes the specifications

tape.

a list of cable connections
for the terminals.

to ADA-U

Table 4-l
Terminal
Number
Tl

T2

ADA-U

Cable Connections
._

Cables

Terminal

to Connect

Input Terminal:

Connect to T3 and T4.

Tl and T2 are input from-a recording
# input generator. They are input-only
and provide an audio path to the
recording device when connected to
T3 and T4.)

Specifications

:
.,i’
.-

Terminal is enabled only
when DIP switches 3 and 4
are OFF.

If switches 3 and 4 are ON, a humming sound
may be recorded due to impedance mismatch.
Input Impedance:

1OOK Sz

Input Level: -15 dB - 40 dB (approximately)
Connect the audio recording
way path).

cable (2-

T3

Connect the shielded end of the audio
recording cable (2-way path).

Line jacks or other similar (600 Sz)devices:
Input/Output
Level: -15 dl3 - 40 dB
(approximately)
Mic jacks or other similar low impedance
Input/Adapter
Level: -40 dB - 60 dB
(approximately)

T4

T5

Input/Output
Terminal:
To switch between line jack and the mic jack on
the recorder, place impedance DIP switches 5 and
6 ON.

Connect the bare end of the control
cable.

devices:

When a Digital Multiline Terminal is idle, this
contact is open. When the terminal goes off-hook
(using the handset, headset, or built-in
speakerphone), this contact is closed.
With the open contact, use both T5 and T6.

-.

4-30

Terminal

Installation

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

Februarv

12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

1998

Notes:
*
When the built-in microphone is used to record, a low recording level may occur for the transmit
part of the conversation.
*
When recording in the handsfree (half-duplex) mode using the built-in speakerphone, the record
notice tone may not be audible to the far-end party and/orspeech may be interrupted
or distorted
when the tone is generated.
*
The transmit
recording level is lower than the receiving voice level for intercom calls. The
transmit

recording

levels for CO calls are matched.

*

If the record tone generator is separate from the recorder, a separate pair of cables is required. For
this configuration,
connect the record notice tone cables to input terminals Tl and T2 on the ADAU. (T3 and T4 are used as the tape recorder input.)

*

If a remote control terminal is provided on a recorder and a control cable is used, the record
start/stop control is provided by connecting the terminal to T5 (or T7) and T6 on the ADA-U.
(Connecting to T5 or T7 is determined by the specifications of the recorder.)
If a Beep Tone is provided from the recording equipment, the Beep Tone should be input using T3
and T4 on ADA-U ADP. (Do not use Tl and T2 to input Beep Tone.)
Single Line Telephones
the ADA-U Unit,
6.23

connected to an APR-U Unit cannot be used to record conversations

Switch Settings

on the ADA-U

via

Unit

The DIP switch, located at the bottom center of the ADA-U Unit, allows a
technician to configure the board to specific settings. Figure 4-46 ADA-U Unit
Switch Settings shows the default settings.

Terminals

87654321

DIP Switch

Default

Figure 4-46 ADA-U

Terminal

Installation

Settings

Unit Switch Settings

4-31

The following
switch settings should be made on the ADA-U Unit to
enable or disable the record start notice tone. Switch settings should be
made before installing the ADA-U Unit in the Digital Multiline
Terminal.
Refer to Table 4-2 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings.

Table 4-2

Unit Switch Settings
Description

Switch

Setting

SWl-1

ON

Enables the relay control at T5, T6 or T6, T7.

SWl-2

OFF

N/A

SWl-3

SWl-4

ON
SWl-3
and
sw1-4

SWl-5
and
SW l-6

Note:

4-32

ADA-U

ON

SWl-3

SWl-4

OFF

OFF

SWl-5

SWl-6

ON

Beep Tone provided by the recording
connected by T3 and T4.
(Do not connect Tl and T2)

Beep Tone provided by an external
connected by Tl and T2

device,

devices,

Input impedance

for T5 and T6 are set to 600 Q.

Input impedance

for T5 and T6 are set to 30 Sz.

ON

SWl-5

SWl-6

OFF

OFF

SWl-7

ON

Enables the record tone input

SWl-8

OFF

N/A

Do not connect Tl and T2 when switches 3 and 4 are ON.

Terminal

Installation

‘-?
-:
/’

6.3

Install

the APR-U

Unit

The Analog Port Adapter with Ringing provides an interface to install Single Line
Telephones, modems, and NEC VoicePointNoicePoint
Plus Conferencing
units. The
APR-U Unit also detects incoming ringing signals. By providing ring detection, the user
can install a personal fax machine or an answering machine for convenience. Two useradjustable switches are provided on the adapter; SW3 allows for 600 ohms or a complex
impedance interface to devices such as a modem or Single Line Telephone, and SW 1 is set
to position 2 (the Electra Professional System does not support the B2 channel). The
APR-U requires an AC Adapter, that is ordered separately. If an APR-U and HFU-U are
both installed, only one AC Adapter is required.

(AC Adapter)

Figure

Install

6.3.1

4-47 APR-U Unit

an APR-U Unit on a Digital
the telephone

Multiline

Terminal

1.

Unplug

cord from the terminal.

2.

On the back of the terminal, press the areas indicated
the inner area of the tilt panel.

in the diagram

to raise

Figure 4-48 Raising the Tilt Panel

Terminal

Installation

4-33

3.

Unlatch the cover by pressing the areas indicated by arrows in Figure 4-49
Unlatching
the Cover on the Digital Multiline
Terminal. Press a straight-blade
screwdriver blade between the cover and the base to release the tabs. When both
tabs are released, lift the cover.

Figure 4-49 Unlatching

4.

Multiline

Terminal

Plug the receptacle connector on the unit in the receptacle connector inside the
tilt panel on the terminal. Refer to Figure 4-50 Attaching the Unit to the Digital
Multiline Terminal.

Figure 4-50 Attaching

4-34

the Cover on the Digital

the Unit to the Digital

Multiline

Terminal

Terminal

Installation

-.._
X.>
,,z:

5.

Plug the cord of the ACA-U Unit in the jack on the APR-U Unit. The ACA-U
Unit is a separate unit that can be purchased from NEC. Lead the AC Adapter
cord out through the groove in the base as shown in Figure 4-51 Leading the AC
Adapter Cord out from the Unit.
When connecting the AC Adapter (ACA-U Unit), connect it to the device in the
left side of the adapter bay to allow the ACA-U Unit to supply power to all
devices installed in the adapter bay

Figure 4-51 Leading the AC Adapter
6.

Cord out from the Unit

Close the tilt panel cover, lead the AC Adapter
snap the cover in place.

cord out through

the hole and

Figure 4-52 Closing the Tilt Panel Cover

Terminal

Installation

4-35

February

Electra Professional

1998

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

7. Plug in the power cord on the AC Adapter
8. Install

Take

the

loop

back

cord

ferrite

core

APR-U

Unit.

through

to the starting
again

core and

end and come

to lead the

cord

then

through

out when

using

Figure 4-53 Ferrite

6.3.2

and the telephone

the ferrite core one inch from the Digital

the ferrite

make

Installation

Multiline

Service Manual

cord in the jack.
Terminal.

a

the
an

Core Installation

Switch Settings
There are two switches on the APR-U Unit.

Figure 4-54. APR-U Unit Switches

4-36

Terminal

Installation

Table 4-3 lists the switch settings for SW 1 and SW 3.

Table 4-3

APR-U Unit Switch Settings

Switch

SWl-1

for SW1 and SW3

Description
A Single Line Telephone
used simultaneously.

and Digital

Multiline

Terminal

are

The Digital Multiline Terminal uses the Bl channel and the
APR-U Unit would use the B2 channel if it were supported.

SWl-2

A Single Line Telephone
used alternately.

and Digital

Multiline

Terminal

are

The Digital Multiline Terminal and the APR-U Unit share
the Bl channel. Position 2 must be selected because the
Electra Professional system does not now support the B2
channel.
sw3-1

Sets impedance to 600 R for devices such as modems or
facsimile machines

SW3-2

Used for complex impedance
Telephones

6.4

Install

the HF’U-U

devices such as Single Line

Unit

The Handsfree Unit enhances small office teleconferencing
by improving
the sound
quality of speakerphone
calls using an external microphone. This unit is useful in a
working environment
where handsfree calling is a necessity. To provide maximum
performance, two user-adjustable
switches are available that allow the speaker phone to
be configured for the customer environment
(quiet room, noisy business environment,
or
a room with an acoustic echo).
Note:

Terminal

Installation

This unit provides an echo canceling circuit. However, it is primarily
for a
typical small office environment
and not for conference rooms. Performance
should not be compared to commercial audio conference units. Calls may not be
recorded when using the HFU-U.

4-37

Electra Professional

lZO/Level

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

‘.
. .._.
,’

Figure 4-55 HFU-U

6.4.1

Installing

Unit

an HFU-U Unit on a Digital

Multiline

Terminal

An external microphone can be installed on the HFU-U Unit. These instructions
apply to the external microphone included with the HFU-U Unit. This microphone
has a push-to-mute button.

Minimum

2

Feet f rom
Multiline
Terminal

Figure 4-56 Microphone

4-38

with Mute

Terminal

Installation

Installation

Service Manual
1.

Electra Professional

Februarv

lZO/Level II&eve1 II Advanced

1998

Plug the microphone cord in the jack on the HFU-U Unit as shown in Figure 4-57
Attaching a Microphone to a Digits1 Multiline Terminal.

Minimum
Feet

2

from

Multiline
Terminal

Figure 4-57 Attaching

2.

Set the switches
Settings.

a Microphone

on the HFU-U

Table 4-4

Terminal

Installation

to a Digital

Multiline

Unit as indicated

Terminal

in Table 4-4 HFU-U

Unit Switch

HFU-U Unit Switch Settings

4-39

9
Febru

Electra Professional

6.5

lZO/Level II/Level

Install the Ancillary
Device Adapter
(BK)/(SW)] in the Multiline
Terminal

Unit

[ADA(lbW

The ADA(l)-W
(BK)/(SW) Unit or ADA(B)-W (BKV(SW)
Electra Professional multiline terminal in the system.

Service Manual

(BKY(SW)

or ADA(2bW

Unit can be connected

1.

Unplug the line and handset cords.

2.

Turn the multiline

3.

Remove the knockout (second from the top) on the bottom of the multiline
Refer to Figure 4-58 - Removing the Knockouts to Install ADA(l)-W
Unit or ADA(B)-W (BKY(SW) Unit.

Figure 4-58

4-40

Installation

II Advanced

terminal

to any

upside down and place it on a dry surface.

Removing the Knockouts to Install ADA(l)-W
Unit or ADA(B)-W (BKHSW) Unit

terminal.
(BK)/(SW)

(BKY(SW)

4.

Plug the CNl connector from the ADA(l)-W
(BKY(SW) Unit or ADA(B)-W
(BK)/(SW) Unit in the CN 4 jack on the main board. Refer to Figure 4-59 - ADA(l)W (BK)/(SW) Unit or ADA(B)-W (BK)/(SW) Unit Installation,
Table 4-5 - ADA(l)-W
(BK)/(SW) Unit Cable Connection,
and Table 4- 6 - ADA(B)-W (BKV(SW) Unit
Cable Connection.

5.

Install the ADA(l)-W
(BK)/(SW)
down) using the screw provided.

6.

Connect the external device (e.g., fax, modem
information provided in ETIs.

Unit

in the multiline

terminal

or answering

(component

machine)

Terminal

side

using the

Installation

-.._
._.,:

I[/Level

II/Level

Figure 4-59

ADA(l)-W (BKMSW)
Unit Installation

Table 4-5

I
Table 4-6

7a.

For ADA(2)-W

(BKMSW)

Februarv

II Advanced

Unit or ADA(B)-W

ADA(l)-W (BKMSW)
Connection

CNl

I

ADA(B)-W (BKMSW)
Connection

1998

(BK)/(SW)

Unit Cable

CN4

I

Unit Cable

Unit only:

Plug the AC/DC adapter in the jack on the side of the unit.

Terminal

Installation

7b.

Plug in the handset and line cords.

8.

Test operation
device.

of the multiline

terminal

and then test operation

of the external

4-41

~Febr uarv1998

Electra_ Professional

THIS

4-42

PAGE

l%O/Level II/Level

LEFI? BLANK

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

INTENTIONALLY

Terminal

Installation

CHAPTER

5

PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER
5
PROGRAMMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

1

.....................................................................

5-l
5-l

1.2

Introduction
...........................................................................
Using this Chapter
......................................................................

5-1

1.3
1.4

Entering the Programming
System Data Programming

5-2
5-2

1.1

SECTION

2

3

SystemMode

LK6
LK7
LK8
LK9
LK 10
LK11

LKS

Chapter

PROGRAMMING

....................................................

5-3

..............................................................................

SYSTEM

LK3
LK4
LK5

LK5
LK6
LK7

.............................................................

5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
..........................

5-5
5-8

Page&itching
............................................................
2.5.3
DataCopy
2.5.4
.................................................................
Data Entry Selection
2.5.5
.......................................................
2.5.6
Confirmation
.............................................................
Test
................................................................................

LKl
LK2

LK3
LK4

........................................................

..................................................................
Preparation Before Programming
........................................................
Writing of System Data .................................................................
ProgrammingMethods
.................................................................
2.51
Initializing
the System
.....................................................
2.5.2
How to Use the Multiline
Terminal for Programming

2.6

LK2

Mode

System Programming

2.3
2.4
2.5

LKl

SYSTEM
Features

2.1
2.2

SECTION

GENERAL

DATA

LIST

5-9
5-9
5-12
5-12

..........................................................

5-13

........................................................................
COLine
..................................................................

5-13
5-13

ICM

5-16

......................................................................

SLT ......................................................................
Transfer/Automated
Attendant
(A.A.) .......................................
SMDR/LCR
...............................................................
DSS .......................................................................
ESP .........................................................
PBRJMiscellaneous
........................................................
DISA .....................................................................
CAR .....................................................................
DTI

......................................................................
LK 12
ACDAJCD
................................................................
TenantMode
........................................................................
CO/PBXLineMode
..................................................................
Telephone
Mode .....................................................................
Trunk Group Mode
..................................................................
CopyMode
..........................................................................
KTU Mode ...........................................................................
Special Mode
........................................................................

5 - Table of Contents

5-17
5-18
5-19
5-19
.‘. ...........

5-19
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-26
5-28
5-28
5-28
5-29

i

February

1998

SECTION

4

Electra Professional
PROGRAMMING

12O/Level II/Level

PROCEDURES
MEMORY

Service Manual
5-30
-..:,
, .’.:

BLOCKS

LK 1 System

l-l-00

Pause Time Selection

l-l-01
l-l-02
l-l-03

DP Interdigit Time Selection ...........................................................
Hookflash Time Selection ..............................................................

l-l-64
l-l-05
l-l-06

Installation

.. . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. ..

Data No.

Mode

LKl

II Advanced

COLine

..................................

. ..............................

5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35

Hold Recall Timer Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold) .......................................
Automatic RediaI Time Selection .......................................................
Start Timer Selection
.................................................................
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection ........................................
Tie/DID Line Delay Ringing Timer Selection
............................................
Manual Pause Selection ...............................................................

5-36

System Transfer/Camp-On

....................................................
Station Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer Selection
.......................................
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
....................................................

5-40

5-43

l-l-25
l-l-26
l-l-27

CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
......................................................
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant ................................................
PBXCTX Access Code Assignment I ....................................................
PBXCTX Access Code Assignment II ...................................................
Off-Hook Ringing Selection ............................................................
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment
.................................

l-l-28

Distinctive

l-l-07
l-l-09
1-1-11
1-1-12
l-l-13
1-1-14
l-l-18
l-l-24

l-l-29
l-l-30
l-l-32

5-37
5-38
5-39

Selection

5-41
5-42

Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection ........................................
..............................................................
PrivateLineAssignment

l-l-33
l-l-34
l-l-35

Route Advance Block Assignment
......................................................
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection
....................................
Speed Dial Number/Name
Display Selection .............................................
Tie/DID Line First Ring Pattern Selection ...............................................
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
...........................................................

l-l-36
l-l-37
l-l-46

CO/PBX Call Forward -All Calls Selection ..............................................
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection ......................................................
Access Code U-Digit) Assignment
......................................................

l-l-47
l-l-48
l-l-49

Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment

l-l-50
l-l-51
l-l-52

PBX Line First Ringing Pattern

Selection

l-l-56

...............................................
Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection ..............................................
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern
............................................
CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection .....................................................

l-l-57

CO/PBX Prepause Timer Selection

ii

5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58

......................................................
......................................................
Networking
Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
...................................
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
...............................................
CO Line First Ringing Pattern Selection
................................................

l-l-53
l-l-54

5-44
5-46
5-47

5-59
5-63
5-64
5-66
5-67
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-71
5-72

.....................................................

5-74

Chapter

5 - Table of Contents

__
_Ij’

Installation

Service Manual

l-l-60

1-1-61
l-l-62
l-l-63
l-l-64
l-l-65
l-l-66
l-l-67
l-l-68
l-l-69
l-l-70
1-1-71
l-l-72
l-l-73
l-l-74
l-l-75
l-l-76
l-l-77
l-l-78
l-l-79

a-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment
......................................
OCCTableAssignment
................................................................
a-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment
........................................

5-75
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-79
5-80
5-81
5-82
5-83

Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
...................................................
Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set ..................................
First Delay Anuouncement
Start Time Selection
.........................................
First Delay Announcement
Repeat Selection .............................................
First to Second Delay Announcement
Interval Time Selection
.............................

5-87
5-88
5-89

Second Delay Announcement

5-90

Repeat Selection

...........................................

Second Delay Announcement
Repeat Interval Time Selection ..............................
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
.......................................................
Delayed Ringing Timer Assignment (CO) ................................................

5-91
5-92

Caller ID Display Assignment

5-94

for System Mode

..........................................

.................................................................

ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit

Selection

5-93
5-95

..............................................

5-96

......................................................
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection ...............................................
Automatic Callback Release Timer Selection .............................................

5-97

LK 1 System

l-2-00
l-2-01
l-2-02
l-2-03
l-2-04
l-2-08
l-2-09-18
1-2-19
l-2-20
l-2-22
l-2-23
l-2-24
l-2-25
l-2-26

Fehuaw1998

5-84
5-85
5-86

BGMPortAssignment

l-l-80

Internal

Mode

Paging Timeout

LK2

1CM

Selection

2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection .............................................
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
....................................................
Specified Station Access Code Assignment
.............................................
Absence Message 1 u 10 Assignment
...................................................
Intercom Ring Pattern Selection
......................................................
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
........................................................
Call Forward No Answer Timer Selection ..............................................
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
...............................................
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
............................................
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection ..................................................
Delayed Ringing Timer Assignment (ICM) .............................................
LK 1 System

Chapter

lZO&evel IULevel II Advanced

LK 1 CO Line (continued)
LK 1 System Mode
Synchronous Ringing Selection
.........................................................
a-Digit Matching Table Assignment
....................................................
a-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment
.............................................
System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection ...........................................
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
: ...................................
..............
Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer Selection
.....................
Class Allow/Deny Selection
............................................................

l-l-59

l-3-01
l-3-02
l-3-03

Electra Professional

Mode

LK3

5-99
5-100
5-101
5-102
5-103
5-104

5-105
5-106
5-107
5-108

5-109
5-110

SLT

Bounce Protect Time Selection ........................................................
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
......................................................
First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection ...............................................
5 - Table of Contents

5-98

5- 111

5-112
5-113
. ..

111

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12OILevel H/Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

l-3-07
l-3-08
l-3-09

LK 3 SLT (continued)
Selection
.......................................................
Hookilaah Start Time Selection
.......................................................
Hookilaah End Time Selection
........................................................
............
Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
.........................................
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Timer Selection ................
.' ..............................
Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection ..................................................

5-114
5-115
5-116
5-117
5-118

l-3-10

Voice Mail DTMF Duration5terdigit

5-120

l-3-04
l-3-05
l-3-06

LK 1 System Mode
Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash

Time Selection

Tandem Transfer Automatic

Disconnect

Attendant

(A.A)

Timer Selection

l-4-00
l-4-01
l-4-02

Automated
Automated

Attendant
Attendant

l-4-03

Automated

Attendant

l-4-04
l-4-05
l-4-08

Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension Assignment
...................................
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode Selection
.....................................
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response Selection
.................................

l-4-09
1-4-11

Automated
Automated

Attendant
Attendant

PBR Start Time Selection ........................................
Message Day/Night Mode Selection ...............................

1-4-12
1-4-13

Automated
Automated
Automated

Attendant
Attendant
Attendant

Message to Tenant Assignment
...................................
Answer Delay Time Assignment
..................................
Message Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment
........................

Automated

Attendant

Message Access Code (2-Digit)

Automated

Attendant

Message Repeat Selection

1-4-14
1-4-15
1-4-16

LK 1 System Mode

l-5-02
l-5-13
l-5-14
l-5-24
l-5-25
l-5-26

SMDRPrintFormat
Printer Connected

l-6-01
l-6-03
l-6-05

Assignment

Attendant

External
External

5-122
5-123
5-124
5-125
5-126
5-127
5-128
5-129

5-130
5-131
5-132
5-134
5-135

........................................

LK 5 SMDR/LCR
.................................................................

(Alarm) Selection

: ........

..........................................

Mode

LK6

5-140
5-141
5-142

DSS

Add-On Console to Telephone

Mode

5-137
5-138
5-139

Port Assignment

...............................

DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection ..................................................
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
..............................................

External
External

5-121

........................

SMDR Valid Call Timer Assignment
..................................................
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing
Print Selection
.............................................

LK 1 System

l-7-02
l-7-03
l-7-06
l-7-07

................................
First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection
..........................
Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection
.........................
No Answer Disconnect Time Selection
............................

Printer Line Feed Control Selection
...................................................
DISA ID Code Digit Selection
.........................................................

LK 1 System

5-119

...................................

LK 4 Transfer/Automated

LK 1 System Mode

.‘;;
i’

5-143
5-144
5-145

LK 7 ESP

Speaker Connection Selection
................................................
Paging Alert Tone Selection ..................................................
Paging Timeout Selection5 ...................................................
Ring Relay Cycle Selection ...................................................

5-147
5-148
5-149

5-150
._

iv

Chapter

5 - Table of Contents

.”

LK 1 System

l-8-01
l-8-02
l-S-04
l-B-07
l-8-08
l-8-09
l-B-10
1-8-11
l-8-12
1-8-13
l-8-15
l-8-16
l-B-17
l-8-18
l-8-25
l-8-26
l-8-27

Mode

SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA
to PBR Selection
...................................
PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA
.........................
Time Display (12h/24h) Selection
.....................................................
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 ........................................
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ...........................................
Music On Hold Pattern Selection
.....................................................
PBR Interdigit Release Timer Selection
...............................................
System Refresh Timer Assignment
....................................................
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
...............................................
VRS Message Function Assignment
...................................................
ToneAssignment
...................................................................
Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment
....................................................
PC Progra mming Password Assignment
...............................................
..............................................................
SiteNameAssignment
ACD/UCDGroupAgentAssignment
..................................................
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Assignment
...................................
Forced Account Code Length Assignment
LK 1 System

l-9-00
l-9-02

Mode

l-11-00
l-11-01
l-11-02
l-11-03
l-11-04
l-11-05
l-11-06
l-11-07

LK 9 DISA

DISAIDCodeAssignment
DISA Password Effectivalid
LK 1 System

l-10-01
l-10-02
l-10-03
l-10-04
l-10-05
l-lo-06

LK 8 PBR/Misc.

Call Arrival
Call Arrival
Call Arrival
Call Arrival
Call Arrival

Mode

..............................................
Feature

.. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . ... . . . .. . . . . ... . .. . .. . . . ... . . .. .
Selection
. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. .. ..

................................................
Selection .......................................
Key Hunt Number Forward Assignment
...................................
Key Port Name Assignment
..............................................
Key to Call Appearance Block Assignment
.................................

Caller ID Display Assignment

for Call Arrival

Key

.....................................

LK 1 System

Mode

LK 11 DTI

Signal Format

Selection

.. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. .. . ..

Clear Channel Selection
.. . .. , . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . ..
Line Length Selection
. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . ... . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . ... . ..
Robbed Bit Signaling Channel Selection . . . . . . . , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTIMaintenanceSelection
. . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. ..
Tl Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SignalingSelection
. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . ... . . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. ..

Chapter 5 - Table of Contents

5-175
5-176

LK 10 CAR

Key Number Assignment
Key Master Hunt Number

DTITrunkTypeAssignment

5-151
5-152
5-153
5-154
5-157
5-161
5-162
5-163
5-164
5-165
5-166
5-168
5-169
5-170
5-171
5-172
5-173

. .. . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. ..

5-177
5-178
5-179
5-180
5-181
5-182

5-183
5-184
5-185
5-186
5-187
5-188
5-189
5-190

V

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

LK 1 System
l-12-00
l-12-01
l-12-02

Mode

LK

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Service Manual

12 ACDRJCD

ACDAJCD

Group Pilot Number

ACD/UCD
ACDNCD

Group Overflow Destination
Overflow Timer Selection
..................................................

LK 2 Tenant

Installation

Assignment

............................................
Assignment
....................................

5-191
5-192

“.‘\,

5-132

ri’

Mode

2-01
2-05

Trunk to Tenant Assignment
.........................................................
Line Key Selection ...................................................................

5-195
5-197

2-06
2-07
2-08

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ...................................................
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
................................................
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
.....................................................

5-198

LK 3 CO/PBX
3-00
3-02
3-03
3-04
3-05
3-06
3-07
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17

5-200
5-201

Line Mode

Telephone Number to Trunk or Directory Number to ISDN Trunk Assignment
TrunkStatusSelection
...............................................................
Trunk-to-Trunk
Group Assignment
...................................................
Trunk-to-Trunk

Transfer

Yes/No Selection

.............................................
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
...............................................
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
................................................
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
..................................................

............

5-203
5-204
5-205
5-206
5-207
5-208
5-209
5-210
5-211

Tie/DID Line Type Assignment
........................................................
Trunk DTMF Duratiodnterdigit
Selection
............................................
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
.....................................................
Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection
Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection

5-212
5-213

3-20
3-21

................................................
................................................
Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection ................................
Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection ................................................
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection
..............................................

3-22
3-23

Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection
..............................................
Tie Line Outgoing Timeout Selection
..................................................

5-218
5-219

3-24

Tie Line Incoming

3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28

Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout
Tie Line Outgoing Guard Time Selection
...............................................

5-220
5-221

3-18
3-19

3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32

Interdigit

Timeout

Selection

.........................................
Selection
...................................

Receive Pad Selection

3-33
3-38
3-40
3-41

Delay Announcement

vi

Tie Line External
Tie Line External

Assignment

5-217

5-225
5-226

................................................

Transmit Pad Selection ..............................................
Receive Pad Selection
...............................................
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
................................................
Automated Attendant Message to Trunk Selection
......................................
Automatic Release Signal Detection Time Selection .....................................

5-215
5-216

5-222
5-223
5-224

Tie Line Dial Tone Selection
..........................................................
Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection .......................................................
Tie Line Internal Transmit Pad Selection
..............................................
Tie Line Internal

5-214

5-227
5-228
5-229
5-230
5-231
5-232

.....................................................

Chapter

5 - Table of Contents

3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-91
3-92

LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (continued)
....................................................................
DIT Assignment
ANA Assignment
...................................................................
.......................................
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line
......................................................
Live Recording Trunk Selection
ISDN Line Internal
ISDN Line Internal

Transmit Pad Selection
............................................
Receive Pad Selection
.............................................
...........................................
ISDN Line External Transmit Pad Selection
............................................
ISDN Line External Receive Pad Selection
........................................................
ISDNLineSPIDAssignment
.................................................
ISDN Line Ringing Pattern Selection
TrunkTypeSelection
................................................................
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
................................................
LK 4 Telephone

4-01
4-02
4-07
4-08
4-09
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-23
4-24
4-26
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
Chapter

Mode

CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)

COrPBX Ring Assignment

(Night Mode)

................................................

...............................................
(Day Mode) ........................................
(Night Mode) .......................................

Code Restriction Class Assignment
Code Restriction Class Assignment
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
.....................................................
.........................................................
Station Number Assignment
....................................................
Ringing Line Preference Selection
Line Key Selection for Telephone

................................................
...........................................
CO/PBX Busy Forward Station Assignment
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection ..............................................
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment
...................................

Mode

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
........................................
...........................................................
StationNameAssignment
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
..........................................................
..................................
Off-Hook Voice Announcement
Terminal Assignment
Prime Line/Hot

Line Assignment

SLT Hookflash

Assignment

.....................................................

..........................................................

DISA ID Number Station Assignment
.................................................
Bilingual LCD Indication Selection
...................................................
HFUSelection
......................................................................
HoWTransfer
Recall Display Selection .........................

i ......................

Receiving Internal/All
Call Page Selection .............................................
Trunk Digit Restriction
..............................................................
Fax Indication Station Assignment
...................................................
Fax Indication Networking Assignment
...............................................
Voice MaiUSLT Selection
............................................................
VoicePromptSelection
..............................................................
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
.....................................
Extension

Line Key Ring Assignment

5 - Table of Contents

5-233
5-234
5-235
5-236
5-237
5-238
5-239
5-240
5-241
5-242
5-243
5-244

(Night Mode)

....................................

5-245
5-246
5-247
5-248
5-249
5-250
5-251
5-252
5-254
5-255
5-256
5-257
5-258
5-259
5-260
5-261
5-262
5-263
5-264
5-265
5-266
5-267
5-268
5-269
5-270
5-271
5-272
5-273
5-274
vii

LK 4 Telephone
Mode (continued)
ADA (2) Ring Mode Assignment
.......................................................

4-39
4-40
4-4i
4-42

5-275
5-276

LCRClasaSelection
..................................................................
SlEKARRinging
Line Preference Selection ............................................
Call Forward-Busy
Immediately/Delay
Selection
.......................................

5-277
5-278

4-43
4-44
4-90

Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment
..........................................
Caller ID Outgoing CO Selection
......................................................
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
...................................................

4-91
4-92

Telephone Ringing Variation Selection
................................................
Receiving Volume Selection
..........................................................
Internal Zone Paging Selection ........................................................

5-283
5-284

3-Minute

5-285

4-93
4-94
4-95

DTMF/DP

Alarm

5-279
5-280
5-281
5-282

Selection

............................................................
SLT Type Selection
........................................................

5-286

5-02
5-03

LK 5 Tnmk Group Mode
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking
.................................................
Tie Line Networking
Tandem Connection Assignment
..................................
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment
....................................
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment
........................................

6-2

LK 6 Copy Mode
Tenant Mode Copy Assignment

6-3
6-4

CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment

6-5

Trunk

7-l

LK 7 KTU Mode
Card Interface Slot Assignment

5-00
5-01

7-2
7-3-00

7-3-03

MIF (UCD) Assignment

7-3-04

MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
LK 8 Special

Mode

ROM Version

Confirmation

.......................................................

5-295
5-297
5-298

.............................................................

5-299
5-300

..............................................................

5-301
5-302

..........................................................

SecondInitialization
.................................................................
Clock/Calendar
Setting ...............................................................

5-306
5-307

FUNCTIONTIMER

SECTION

6

CODE

.. .

5-293
5-294

5-303

5

vlll

5-292

...........................................................
System Speed Dial Memory Clear .....................................................
Station Speed Dial Memory Clear .....................................................

SECTION

6.1

5-289
5-290

5-291

.......................................................

..........................................................
..............................................................
...............................................................

7-3-01
7-3-02

8-2
8-3
8-8-8800

........

Type Assignment

MIF (ACD) Assignment
MIF(LCR)Assignment
MIF(SMDR)Assignment

8-1

5-287
5-288

......................................................
....................................................
Group Mode Copy Assignment
..................................................

Telephone

General

RESTRICTION

CHART

......
1;
“’

5-304
5-305

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.................~...............

5-309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~~.............

5-313

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-313

Chapter

5 - Table of Contents

‘I-.
,’

................................................................
DefaultAssignments
MemoryBlocks
.....................................................................
Memory Block Description
...........................................................
6.4.1
General ....................................................................

6.2
6.3
6.4

6.4.2
6.4.3

6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8

OCC Assignment/Operation
.................................................
S-Digit Matching Table Assignment/Operation
................................
System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection (Memory Block 1-1-62)

Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment (Memory Block l-l-69) ...................
Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set (Memory Block l-l-70)
Trunk Digit Restriction Assignment (Memory Block 4-32) ......................
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) (Memory Block 4-07) ............
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) (Memory Block 4-08) ...........

6.4.9
Code Restriction Tables (Default Values)
6.5.1 OCC Tables with Default Values

6.5

.,

..............................................

.............................................
6.5.2
B-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values ..................................
Code Restriction Alogrithm
..........................................................

6.6
SECTION

7

CHARACTER

SECTION

8

DISPLAY

Chapter

...........

5 - Table of Contents

CODE TABLES
ABBREVIATIONS

5-313
5-314
5-314
5-314
5-314
5-315
5-316
5-316
5-316
5-317
5-317
5-317
5-317
5-317
5-318
5-323

. .. . . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . .

5-325

. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . .

5-327

ix

-.
.\

4

THIS

X

PAGE INTENTIONALLY

LEFT

BLANK

Chapter

5 - Table of Contents

CHAPTER 5
PROGRAMMING
SECTION

1

GENERAL
1.1

Introduction
The Electra Professional systems are stored-program
controlled.
When these systems
are initially powered up, the CPU-F(
I-20 KTU scans each possible interface slot to
The systems store this information
and the
determine
the hardware configuration.
default values in Resident System Program memory.
After the system is initially
powered up, a trained technician can change the Resident System Program to meet the
specific needs of the individual
customer.
Before
should
Copies
office.
Manual

attempting
to program
these systems, the Job Specifications
Worksheets
be completed. These worksheets help organize the customer programming
needs.
of the worksheets should be retained at the job site and on file at the technician
Refer to the Electra Professional 12WLevel II/Level II Advanced Job Specifications
included with the CPU-F( I-20 KTU.
WARNING

The battery on the CPU-F( j-20 KTU must be on. Failure to ensure the battery
before programming
begins, may result in the loss of data if a power outage occurs.
1.2

Using

This Chapter

This chapter has the following
Section 1 - General
Gives a general overview

sections:

of System Programming.

Section 2 - System Programming
Presents in outline format the terms and structure that the technician
with before attempting
to program the Electra Professional systems.
Section 3 - System Data List
Presents a complete list of Data Numbers,
and Timing values.

Timer and Function

Section 4 - Programming
Procedures
Gives detailed instructions and procedures for programming

should be familiar

Names, Default

Section 6 - Code Restriction
Defines the parameters of dial restrictions
Section ‘7 - Character Code Tables
Defines Setting Data for some functions

values,

all Memory Blocks.

Section 5 - Function Timer Chart
Presents the parameters of the various timers used in the Electra Professional

systems.

that can be assigned per station.
available

in the Electra Professional

Section 8 - Display Abbreviations
Defines abbreviations used in the Electra Professional

Programming

is on,

systems.

systems.

5-l

1.3

Entering

the Programming

Mode

To program information
in the system, an ETW-16DC(
) (BKY(SW), ETW-16DD-(
)
(BK)/(SW) or ETW-24DS-(
1 (BKXSW) Multiline
Terminal
or any digital multiline
terminal for the Electra Professional 120 system can be used as programming
stations.
Two stations, ports 01 and 02 are automatically
assigned as programming
stations.
Before you enter any programming,

the programming

_.-_
:,
-1’

station must be OFF-LINE.

TO GO OFF-LINE

1.
2.

Press the FNC key, then the HOLD
Dial #, 0, * in sequence.

After step 2 is completed,

I
While OFF-LINE,

1.4

key.

the LCD on the Multiline
PROGRAM

---------------------------TIME

The off-line mode does not timeout.

System

Data Programming

l

I

terminal

Note:

0
0

displays:

MODE

DISPLAY

the programming

System Data Programming

Terminal

cannot be signaled by any system station.

may be required for the following

reasons:

When the system is installed for the first time.
When components of an existing system are replaced.
When functions of an existing system are changed.

Refer to Figure 2-l- Programing

Flowchart.

New Installation
1

Existing

I

System
Function

I

I
1

System Data
Programming

(Note

1)

Installation

I

Fi

I

(Note

2)

Fi

I
TEST

1

I

(Note

I
I

TEST

Change

I

1

I
I

3)

TEST

I

Note 1: For new installations,
system default values are assigned when the power is
turned on. Therefore, program only the System Data to be changed.
Note 2: For component replacements, program the relevant System Data.
Note 3: For function changes, program the System Data to be revised.
Figure 2-l Programming
Flowchart

5-2

Programming

,’

Installation
SECTION

Service Manual
2

SYSTEM
2.1

Electra Professional

Februarv

II Advanced

1998

PROGRAMMING

Features
0
0
0
0
0

2.2

120/Level II/Level

The system operates from a default pro am after initial power up. Program only
the parameters that need to be changed $rom the default assignments.
The System Programming
characters are displayed on the LCD.
Several types of System Programming
can be entered at the same time.
Data rogrammed
for one telephone (e.g., Tenant Mode, CO/PBX Line Mode, or
Telep f one Mode) can be copied to another telephone.
Two multiline
terminals, connected to Ports 01 and 02, can be used to program at
the same time.

System Programming
System Programming
has eight modes and some modes have submodes.
Modes and
submodes for the Level II and Level II Advanced systems include the following:
Mode
LKl

LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6

Tenant Mode
CO/PBX Line Mode
Telephone Mode
Trunk Group Mode
Copy Mode

LK7

KTU Mode

LK8

Programming

System Mode

Special Mode

Sub-Mode
LKl
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK9
LK 10
LKll
LK 12

CO Line
ICM
SLT
Transfer/Automated
SMDR/LCR
DSS
ESP
PBR/.Miscellaneous
DISA
CAR
DTI
ACD/UCD

LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5

Tenant Mode Copy Assignment
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment
Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment

LKl
LK2
LK 3-00
LK 3-01
LK 3-02
LK 3-03
LK3-04

Card Interface Slot Assignment
Telephone Type Assignment
MIF (ACD) Assignment
MIF (LCR) Assignment
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
MIF WCD) Assignment
MIF (CID) Assignment

LKl
LK2
LK3
LK8

ROM Version Confirmation
System Speed Dial Memory
Station Speed Dial Memory
Second Initialization

Attendant

(A.A.)

Clear
Clear

5-3

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998
2.3

Preparation
1.

Before

120/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Programming

Check Points:
l

Confirmation
version

of ROM -----

Available
features
depends on the ROM
version.
Refer to Memory Block 8-l (ROM
Version Confirmation).

----0

Confirmation
Number

?;
I ,”

Port
numbers
are
used
for
System
Programming.
Refer to Memory Block 7-1
(Card Interface Slot Assignment).

of Port

To confirm station numbers
from display terminals, press:

4

Port Number
1

Station Number
2.

2.4

Preliminary

Points:

0

Selection of System
Programming

0

Prepare System
Programming
sheet -------

Writing

of System

_______

Refer to Section
1.4
Programming
to select
programmed.

- System
the data

Refer to Section 4 - Programming
to enter the data.

Data
to be

Procedures

Data

After turning the system power on, programming
System Data can be performed from a
multiline
terminal connected to Port 01 or 02 (the terminal must be idle). Although
System Programming
can be performed while other multiline
terminals are in use, some
data is written in memory immediately
after the programming
process, while other data
is not written until the stations or trunks are idle.
In the latter case, the programming
programming
process is completed,
underway.
When the in-use stations
displays only the time.
The following
0

System Programming

When telephones

station displays DATA ENTRY even after the
indicating
the System Programming
is still
become idle, the data is written and the station

is not written

are in use: Memory

while certain equipment

Block 2-01 (Trunk

is in use:

to Tenant Assignment)

Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key Selection)
Memory Block 2-07 (System Speed Dial Display
Assignment)
Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone
l

When PBR is in use:

to Tenant Assignment)

Memory Block l-8-01 (SLT or Automated
Attendant/DISA
to PBR Selection)
Memory Block l-8-02 (PBR Receive Level Assignment
for Automated Attendant/DISA)

5-4

Programming

; -I,
;

2.5

Programming
2.51

Methods

Initializing

the System

Turn the Key Service Unit (KSU) power supply
system operates with system default values.
2.5.2

How to Use the Multiline

Terminal

After

30 seconds, the

for Programming

Perform
System Programming
using
connected to station ports 01 or 02.
Key operations, LED indications,
described below.

on.

a multiline

terminal

(with

and the display for System Programming

Message Waiting

Yr-

l!!

LCD)
are

LED

Display (LCD)
CO/PBX LED

&&&a
6

Selection

B

MIC LED
ICM LED
RECALL Key
Next Page

\

FNC Key
Previous Page
CNF Key
Next number (Tenant
number etc. )

\

ANSKey
Mode Return

Data Write
Clear Data, Pause
/

DIALKey
*

:

#
o-9

:
:

Figure 2-2

Programming

Cursor movement (to the left)
Cursor movement (to the right)
Data input (from dial pad)
Electra Professional

Level II and Level II Advanced

System Multiline

Terminal

5-5

Key Functions:
(&q-

RECALL

cl-

- - - -- ----

--- - - - - - - -

Flexible Line keys specify a mode or submode when selecting
or select programming
data for input.

(s

----------

0

!l’RF

ANS

0

page in registering

----------

-----------

------^----

---------s---------m

System

mode (go back on-line).

Use to move the cursor left. The cursor moves one character
each time * is pressed.

8

HOLD

to the preceding

Each time the CNF key is pressed, Memory Block item changes are as
follows:
l
Tenant Mode: The tenant number increments by one.
l
CO/PBX Line Mode: The CO/PBX line number increments by one.
l
Telephone Mode: The telephone port number increments by one.
l
Trunk Group Mode: The Trunk Group number increments by one.
Use to exit the programming

0#

Use to move the cursor right.
right each time # is pressed.

space to the left

The cursor moves one character

space to the

Use to write data. After entering data, press TRF, the data is written
memory, and the Memory Block Data No. increments by one.
Use to select another mode. Press ANS to switch modes as follows:
l
Mode or SubMode selection: Returns to PROGRAM MODE.
l
Data No. Mode:
Returns to a Mode or Submode selection,
PROGRAM MODE (if no Submode exists).
The HOLD key enters a pause in Speed Dial Programming
data in System Programming
Mode.
The LNRlSPD

into

or

Mode or clears

key enters a pause, hyphen, f, and #.

After pressing the LNR/SPD
key (the Message Waiting LED turns
and turns off after pressing * or #), the desired selection is entered.
Use to enter data from the dial pad and to specify a Memory
each input mode.

5-6

“.T+,
i

Use this key to proceed to the next page in System Programming.
Use the FNC key to return
Programming.

CNF

a memory block

on

Block location in

Programming

.

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

120/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv

1998

LED Indications (MIC and ICM)
These LED indications for mode selection status indicate the following:
MIC
0
0
0

Off-Line
A.

ICM
0
0
0

Program

Both
Only
Both
when

LEDs off:
MIC LED
LEDs on:
a mode is

Waiting for mode selection.
on: Mode selected. Waiting for submode selection.
Submode selected. (If no submode exists, both LEDs light
selected.)

Mode:

To go off-line, press: ---After the
entered,the

B.

(,LK1)
LK

= Line

is

PROGRAM
MODE
_-----------------------------TIME DISPLAY

Selecting Memory Block locations
System Mode

off-line
mode for programming
following items are displayed

SYSTEM
r----------------------------- BASE
TIME DISPLAY

I

1

I

Key

2fl~~pA~~~~~~
--------_TIME DISPLAY

Tenant Mode

@T-2)

00 / 00 : NOT USED
------------------------------TIME DISPLAY

CO/PBX Line Mode

&,LK3)

01 I
------------------------------TIME DISPLAY

Telephone

pi)

Mode

01 / 01 : RINGDY
101
------------------------------TIME DISPLAY

Trunk Group Mode

01 / 00 : ADD/ DEL 000
__________-__________1__________
TIME DISPLAY

Copy Mode

I-----------------------------COPY
MODE

I

TIME DISPLAY
r

\

+ cJJK2) 2E!T-z ------- - ---___z-----

I

TIME DISPLAY

KTU Mode
TIME DISPLAY
Special Mode

SPECIAL
-------------------------------MODE
TIME DISPLAY

+ @I

-SP1,11,
-------illCE_o_1_---1 - oc : CPU = 1.00

Page Switching

2.5.3

To select System Programming
data, COIPBX
numbers, use the Flexible Line keys.

line numbers,

or tenant

In Memory Block 1-1-18 (System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant) tenant
numbers 00-07 are assigned to the Flexible Line keys on the first page.
Tenant numbers OS-15 are assigned to the Flexible Line keys on the
second page. The tenant number corresponding
to Flexible Line key 1 of
the current page is displayed at the right side of the display.
Example:

CO/PBX line keys on each page and corresponding
numbers.

24-Key Multiline
(Flexible

(Display)

Terminal

16-Key Multiline
(Flexible

Line Keys)

-.::
/

tenant

Terminal

Line Keys)

Page 1

Page 2

5-1

08

08

09

10

11

12

13 14

15

16

17 18

19

20

21 22

23

For System Programming,
a value (data) is assigned to each Flexible Line
key. When there are more value assignments than Flexible Line keys,
entering value assignments can continue on the following page. The page
number is displayed at the right side of the display.
Example:

Flexible Line keys and corresponding
10 data entries).
16 Kev Multiline
(Flexible

(Display)
Page 1

Page 2

Note:

5-8

m

El

data on each page (with

Terminal

Line Key)

01

02

Data9

Data

10

Press the RECALL
key to advance to the next page.
return the previous page.

Press the FNC key to

Programming

:

2.5.4

Data Copy
Data entry for a multiline
terminal in CO/PBX Line Mode, Tenant Mode, or
Trunk Group Mode can all be copied simultaneously
to another multiline
terminal.
Refer to Section 4 -Programming
Procedures ( LK6 Copy Mode).

2.5.5

Data Entry Selection
System Programming
is performed by using the keys on multiline
terminals
connected to Ports 01 and 02. During programming,
System Data is shown on
the LCD of the off-line terminal.

4*,------G=)

(SystemMode)

+G=)

(CO/PBXLine)

(System Mode) +

@===

(ICM)

(System Mode) -+

@)

(SLT)

(System Mode) +

(TRF/A.A.)

(System Mode) +

(SMDRLCR)

(System Mode) -+

G=)

(DSS)

(System Mode) -+
(PBRMiscel1aneou.s)

(System Mode) +
Increment
Memory Block
[tern Number By
One

(System Mode) +

(System Mode) -+

(Continued

Programming

(DISA)

B

(DTI)

t System Mode) +
(System Mode) +

Select Another
Memory Block

@=]

LLK2)

(Tenant Mode)

bLK3)

(COIPBX Line Mode)

@i-)
L@-]

(Telephone
(Trunk

(ACD/UCD)

Mode)

Group Mode)

on next page.)

5-9

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

Eontinued)
IX 6

lZO/Level

II/Level

Installation

Service Manual

(Copy Mode)

+

p-2)

(Tenant Mode Copy>

(Copy Mode)

*

@iJ

(CO/PBX Line Mode Copy)

&iY;

(Copy Mode) +

LX>

(Telephone

@ii-)

(Copy Mode) b

p-5)

0’runk

@Y--7)

(KTU Interface

GZ8)

(Special Mode) +

@G--

@i)

(Special Mode) -b

p-)

Mode Copy)

Group Mode Copy)

Mode)

(Special Mode) +

I

II Advanced

(ROM Version
Cotirmation)
System Speed Dial
Memory Clear
Station Speed Dial
Memory Clear

(Use dial pad)

END

5-10

Programming

Installation

Service Manual

Example:

Memory

Electr

Block l-2-02

Automatic
3 minutes

(Key)
Off-Line Programming
Procedure

Callback Release Timer Selection
(default) 3 1 minute
(Display)

(LED)

0

---

(Goeson)

FNC
HOLD

#

i

-@(

LED
Flashing

FNC

l

(Goesoff)

Jl
&&

FNC

LED
Flashing

PROGRAM
MODE
------------------------------TIME DISPLAY
SYSTEM
BASE
---^--------------------------TIME DISPLAY

Memory Block---Selection

_____

0 (Goes on)
MIC

0

(Goeson)

00: PAGING
--,,,,-,,,,,,-,,-,,---,,--------

90s

-----------------------------

90s

ICM

System Programming
Setting

(Use dial pad)

1

A

02: CALL
BACK
-----------------------------

30m

92: CALL
BACK
-----------------------------

10m

1

2

CO/PBX

DataEntry------------

I

LK 2

0
COLPBX

Write -----------..----

TRF
8

3DGT

2

l
COLPBX

03 : STA. NO.
-,--,-,-,-,,--,,----,-------------

(Goes on)

(Goes off)
2

1

End-----------------SPKR

Programming

0

0

MIC

ICM

(Goesoff)

5-11

2.5.6

Confirmation
To confirm programmed
the off-line programming
shown on the display.

data, select the desired Memory Block after entering
mode and enter the Data Entry Number. The data is

Enter System Data No.
I

rl

END

2.6

Test
After completion
operation.

5-12

of programming,

test the functions

of System Programming

for proper

Programming

,. .:

-‘

SECTION

3

1LK 1 System
LKl

SYSTEM

LIST

Mode

CO Line

Data
No.
00

DATA

Function

Default

Name

13 sec.
Pattern B

I Pause Time Selection

01
02

DP Interdigit

03

Hookflash

Time Selection
Time Selection

Programming
1 sec.

3 sec.

Pattern

A. Pattern

Value

B

600 ms.

Page 1: 20ms.,40ms.,60ms.,80ms.,
100 ms., 140 ms., 160 ms., 200 ms
Page 2: 400 ms., 600 ms., 800 ms., 1 sec.,
1.5 sec., 2 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec.

Hold Recall Timer Selection
(Non-Exclusive
Hold)

25 sec.

25 sec., 45 sec., 90 sec., No Limit

04

Automatic

Table 1 30 sec.
Table 2 60 sec.
Table 3 ‘2 times

Table 1
Table 2
Table 3

05
~~

Start Timer Selection

20 sec.

2 sec., 10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec.,
40 sec., 50 sec., 60 sec., 70 sec.,

No Limit

10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., No Limit

No Limit

10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., NoLimit

No

No, Yes

Yes

No, Yes

45 sec.

25 sec., 45 sec., 90 sec., NoLimit

Redial Time Selection

I

I

Ringing

Alarm

1 - 100 sec.
1 - 100 sec.
1 - 255 times

06

CO/PBX Incoming
Time Selection

07

Tie/DID Line Delay Ringing
Selection

09

Manual

11

System Transfer/Camp-On
Selection

12

Station Transfer/Camp-On
Timer Selection

13

CO Transfer
Selection

Ring Pattern

Pattern

14

CO Transfer

Ring Tone Selection

Tone A

Tone A- H

18

System Speed Dial Restriction
Tenant

Not Restricted

LED ON:
LED OFF:

9-

Up to six digits (three numeric,
pauses)

three

S-

Up to six digits (three numeric,
pauses)

three

Yes

Yes, No

Not Specified

Day/Night

Tel

Tel, CO

Timer

Pause Selection

27

Automatic
Switching

28

Distinctive Ringing
or CO Selection

29

Private

Recall

by

Day/Night Mode
Time Assignment
by Telephone

Line Assignment

C

Not Specified

Tone Off, Tone On, Pattern(s)

A- H

Not Restricted
Restricted,

Mode Start Time (24 hours)

CO/PBX Line Number,
two lines

Tel Port Number,

UD to

30

Route Advance

Programming

Block Assignment

All Block 00 (not set)

~Prioritv

Trunk

Croun Number

5-13

LK 1 CO Line hontinued)
Function

Name

Programming

Default
Sunday e Saturday
= Pattern 1

Pattern

1, Pattern

1Dialed Number

Number

or Name

Tie/DID Line First Ring Pattern
Selection

Pattern

Pattern 1, Pattern
ICM, Voice

35

Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

100 memories

36

CO/PBX Call Forward
Selection

No

37

Trunk Queuing Timeout
Selection

10 sec.

Access Code (l-Digit.1
Assignment

Refer to Memory Block

Access Code (ZDigit)
Assignment

Refer to Memory

Access Code (&Digit)
Assignment

All Dial 000 (Not Used)

Networking Trunk Group/Route
Advance Assignment

Not Specified

32
33

46
47
48

Automatic Day/Night Mode by
of Week Selection
Speed Dial Number/Name
I Display Selection

- All Calls

3

I 100 memories,

Value

2

2, Pattern

3, Pattern 4,

1000 memories

No, Yes
10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., 60 sec.
I
I
Block
I
I

Not Specified
Ring Pattern

A

Pattern A-H,

Nil

Pattern A-H,

Nil

Pattern A-H,

Nil

I

I

PBX Line First Ringing Pattern
Selection

Ring Pattern

53

Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern
Selection

Ring Pattern

54

Automated Attendant
Ring Pattern

56

CO/PBX Ringing
Selection

52

B
1
D

Transfer

Pattern

CO/PBX Prepause Timer
Selection
59

1 Synchronous

60

I
I

61

5-14

Ringing

Selection

Yes

Yes, No

a-Digit Matching
Assignment

Table

Refer to Memory

Block

a-Digit Matching
Assignment

Table to Class

Refer to Memory

Block

Programming

L:

1 CO Line (continued)

Data
No.

Function

Name

Default

System Speed Dial Override
Class Selection

63

Hold Recall Time Selection
(Exclusive)

1 min.

0.5 min.
3min.

1 min.
5min.

1.5 min.
8 min.

2 min.
No Limit

64

Attendant Add-On Console
Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer
Selection

1 min.

0.5 min.
3 min.

1 min.
5 min.

1.5 min.
8 min.

2 min.
10 min.

65

Class Allow/Deny

Class 01-04 Allow
Class 05- 14 Deny

I

B-Digit Matching Table to
Normal Dial Assignment

Tables 00- 14
Used
Table 15
Unused

I

OCC Table Assignment

Tables 00- 15 Blank
Table 16
10xXx

I

67

Override

Selection

(YS)

Value

62

66

by

Programming
No = No Override
Yes = Override

I

B-Digit Matching Table to OCC
Table Assignment

Refer to Memory Block

Tie Line Code Restriction
Assignment

(YS) Restriction

70

Code Restriction Class
Assignment When Lockout is Set

Class 15

71

First Delay Announcement
Time Selection

20 sec.

0 sec. 10 sec. 20 sec. 30 sec.
40 sec. 50 sec. 60 sec.

72

First Delay Announcement
Repeat Selection

1 Time

1,2,3,4,

73

First to Second Delay
Announcement
Interval
Selection

68
69

I
No Restriction

(NO),

Restriction

I

Start

5,6, 7,8 times

Time

74

Second Delay Announcement
Repeat Selection

75

Second Delay Announcement
Repeat Interval Time Selection

20 sec.

76

Barge-In

Yes

Yes =
No =

77

Delayed Ringing Timer
Assignment (CO)

15 sec.

00-99

78

Caller ID Display Assignment
System Mode

Not Specified

Combination No. = 1 or 2
Tel Port No. =
01-90

79

BGM Port Assignment

80

ISDN DTMF Duration
Interdigit Selection

Programming

(YES)

Alert Tone Assignment

for

No
and

10 sec. 20 sec. ,30 sec.
4Osec. 50sec. 6Osec. NoLimit

I 0 sec.

I

Send Alert Tone
Do not send Alert Tone

I 00-64

100/70

I

100/70,400/100,600/100,900/200
I
I

II

5-15

LK2

ICM
Function

Name

Programming

Value

5 min., 10 min., 20 min., 30 min.

Call Arrival

Key Block

No CAR Blocks are

11) Business Trip

A maximum of 13 characters.
Character Code Table.)

(Refer to

ard No Answer Timer

25

Internal Paging Alert Tone
Selection

Tone Y S

Tone Y S
Tone No

26

Delayed Ringing Timer
Assignment (EM)

10 sec.

00-99

5-16

Programming

LK3

SLT

bata

Function

X0.

01

Name

Bounce Protect Time Selection

Default
300 ms.

Programming

Value

Page 1: 0 ms., 100 ms., 200 ms., 300 ms.,
400 ms., 500 ms., 600 ms.,
700 ms.
Page 2: 800 ms., 900 ms., 1000 ms.,
1100 ms., 1200 ms., 1300 ms.,
1400 ms., 1500 ms.

Hold

Hold, Flash

First Digit PBR Release Timer
Selection

10 sec.

10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., 40 sec.,

04

Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash

Yes

Yes, No

05

Hookflash

300 ms.

Page 1: 100 ms., 150 ms.,
250 ms., 300 ms.,
400 ms., 450 ms.,
Page ‘2: 500 ms., 550 ms.,
650 ms., 700 ms.,
800 ms., 850 ms.

02

SLT Hookflash

03

Signal Selection

Selection

Start Time Selection

07

Voice Mail Digit Add
Assignment

All Blank

08

Voice Mail DTMF Delay Timer
Selection

lsec.

0 sec., 1 sec., 2 sec., 3 sec.,4 sec.,
5 sec.,6 sec., 8 sec.

09

Voice Mail Disconnect
Selection

1.5 sec.

0.6 sec., 1 sec., 1.5 sec., 2 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec.

10

Voice Mail DTMF
DurationIInterdigit
Selection

100/70 Ins.

70/60 ms., 100/70 ms., 400/100 ms.,
600/100 ms., 900/200 ms.

Time

Refer to Memory

600 ms.,
750 ms.,

Hookflash

Time

HST + 700ms.

200 ms.,
350 ms.,

06

Programming

End Time Selection

50sec.,60sec.

Block

5-17

cFeb

1998

T.K 4 TraneferlAlltnmntnd
--

Data
No.

*

Attendant

--CI---,--L-------

Function

---------

(A.A.‘I
\____

Name

-_,

Default

Programming

Value
I

00

Tandem Transfer Automatic
Disconnect Timer Selection

lhr.

30 min., 1 hr., 2 hr., 3 hr.

01

Automated Attendant First Digit
PBR Release Timer Selection

20 sec.

10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., 40 sec.,

02

Automated Attendant Transfer
Delayed Ringing Time Selection

No limit

10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., No Limit

03

Automated Attendant No
Answer Disconnect Time
Selection

2min.

lmin.,2min.,3min.,4min.

04

Tandem Transfer SMDR Print
Extension Assignment

999

2-digit
3-digit
4-digit

5-18

50 sec., 60 sec.

= 99
= 999
= 9999

Programming

Ll ; 5 SMDR/LCR

..\F
Data
No.

/

02

F
I

Function

I

Mask

Printer Connected
Selection

14

Printer Line Feed Control
Selection

Yes

24

DISA ID Code Digit Selection

3-digit

2-d@,

25

SMDR Valid Call Timer
Assignment

40 sec.

O-990 sec. (in 10 second increments)

26

SMDR Incoming/Outgoing
Selection

Outgoing

All, Outgoing,

(Alarm>
Yes, No
I

Print

3-digit,

Data
No.

Function

1

Name

Incoming

Add-On Console to
Port Assignment

Attendant
Selection

Refer to Memory Block

Tone, Voice

I

ESP

.-

Function

Default

Name

Programming

02

External Speaker Connection
Selection

All Speakers (A-C)

Yes, No

03

External Paging Alert Tone
Selection

Yes

Yes, No

06

External Paging Timeout
Selection

5.0 min.

0.5 min.

External Ring Relay Cycle
Selection

Pattern

Programming

Value

Refer to Memory Block
Voice

Add-On Console Key

Programming

Default

DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal
Selection

Data
No.

07

4-digit

DSS

LK7

I
I

Value

13

Attendant
Telephone

I

IAll,

SMDR Print Format

LK6

I

Programming

Default

Name

3 min.
3

1 min.
5min.

Refer to Memory

Value

1.5 min.

8 min.

2 min.

No Limit

Block

5-19

LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous

I

Default

Programming

(OFF)

;

.--x_
\
.;

Value

Off = Single Line Telephone

Single Line Telephone

On = Automated

’ - 36.1 dBm

Attendant/DISA

Refer to Memory Block
I

1

12 hr. Display
Refer to Memory Block

Class of Service (Attendant)
Feature Selection 1
08
09
10

11

I

Class of Service
Selection 2
Music On Hold
PBR Interdigit
Selection
System Refresh
1 Assignment

(Station)

12 hr. Display,

24 hr. Display

I

I

Refer to Memory Block

Feature

Pattern Selection
Release Timer
Timer
15 sec. / 16 messages

15 sec.116 messages, 30 sec.18 messages,
60 sec./4 messages, 120 sec.12 messages

No Message
Tone A

Refer to Memory Block

Refer to Memory Block
Class 1,2 All Blank
Site Name Assignment
ACDAJCD Group Agent
Assignment

I

No Assignment
~Not Specified

Agent Extension
Groun Number

Number

and ACDAJCD

, Not Specified
10 Digits

LK9
Data
No.

DISA
Function

Default

Name

I O0IDISA ID Code Assignment
02

1 - 13 Digits

DISA Password Effect/Invalid
Selection

I

Refer to Memory Block
DISA Password Effect
(YES)

Programming

Value

I
DISA Password Invalid
DISAPassword
Effect

’

5-20

Programming

Installation

Service Manual

I I
Data
No.

Function

Electra

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Name

Februarv

Programming

Value

Programming

Value

1993

1

Not Specified

Call Arrival
Assignment

02

Call Arrival Key Master Hunt
Number Selection

No

03

Call Arrival Key Hunt Number
Forward Assignment

Not Specified

04

Call Arrival
Assignment

Key Port Name

Not Specified

05

Call Arrival
Appearance

Key to Call
Block Assignment

All CARS assigned to
Block (00)

06

Caller ID Display Assignment
Call Arrival Key
LKll

Key Number

(000)

01

for

No, Yes
(000)

Not Specified

DTI
Function

Name

16State

05

TI Channel

Selection

06

Signaling

07

DTI Trunk Type Assignment

(A, B, C, and D)

Refer to Memory Block

Selection

Loop start

Loop Start, Ground Start

CO

co

E&M

DID

LK 12 ACDAJCD

I 00I
Data
No.

Function

Name

ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number
Assignment

I

I

I I

Default

ACD/UCD Group Overflow
Destination Assignment

Not Specified

02

ACD/UCD
Selection

60 sec.

Programming

Timer

Value

Not Specified

01

Overflow

Programming

m, 10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec., 60 sec., 120 sec.
180sec., 240sec.

5-21

Februarv

,K 2 Tenant
Data
No.
01
05

06
07
08

Electra Professional

1998

I

Default

Name

Trunk to Tenant Assignment

I

Refer to Memory

I

Telephone

Line Key Selection

Line Key Selection for Tenant
I Mode
System Speed Dial Display
ECR Relay to Tenant
I Assignment

LK 3 CO/PBX

Programming
Block

Service Manual

I

Mode

Refer to Memory

Value

I
Tenant-Wide

Mode, Telephone

Mode

I

I

All Speed Dial
Allowed
I Confirmation

I

All Tenant
I No Assignment

I

I

I

Line Mode

terdigit

Selection

I

Block

A

5-22

‘Installation

II Advanced

Mode
Function

I

12OILevel II/Level

maximum

of

13

digits

(numbers,

600 ms. - 100 ms.

Programming

LK 3 CO/PBX
bata

Line Mode (continued)
Function

WO.

Name

Default

Programming

Value

17

Tie Line Answer Detect Time
Selection

520 ms.

0 ms.
390 ms.
780 ms.
1170 ms.
1560 ms.
1950 Ins.

130
520
910
1300
1690

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

260
650
1040
1430
1820

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

18

Tie Line Release Detect Time
Selection

520 ms.

OmS.
390 Ills.
780 ms.
1170 ms.
1560 1119.
1950 ms.

130
520
910
1300
1690

ms.
111s.
ms.
Ins.
ms.

260
650
1040
1430
1820

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming
Signal Detect Time Selection

Refer to Memory

20

Tie Line Loop Off-Guard
Selection

2 sec.

0 sec.
1.5 sec.
4 sec.
7 sec.
10 sec.
13 sec.

0.5 sec.
2 sec.
5 sec.
8 sec.
11 sec.

21

Tie Line Length of Wink Signal
Selection

180 ms.

30
120
210
300
390
480

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

60
150
240
330
420

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

90
180
270
360
450

ms.
ms.
ms.
1119.
1115.

22

Tie Line Length of Delay Signal
Selection

300 ms.

0 ms.
900 ms.
1800 ms.
2700 ms.
3600 ms.
4500 ms.

300
1200
2100
3000
3900

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

600
1500
2400
3300
4200

ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.
ms.

23

Tie Line Outgoing
Selection

12 sec.

1 sec.
3 sec.
6 sec.
9 sec.
12 sec.
15 sec.

24

25

Time

Timeout

Tie Line Incoming Interdigit
Timeout Selection

6 sec.

Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal
Detect Timeout Selection

7 sec.

Programming

Block

2 sec.
4 sec.
7 sec.
10 sec.
13 sec.
No Limit

1 sec.
3 sec.
6 sec.
9 sec.
12 sec.

5 sec.
8 sec.
11 sec.
14 sec.

1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
5 sec.
6 sec.
7 sec.
10sec. 11 sec. 12 sec.
15 sec.
No Limit

4 sec.
8 sec.
13 sec.

9 sec.
14 sec.

1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
5 sec.
6 sec.
7 sec.
10sec. 11 sec. 12 sec.
15 sec.
No Limit

4 sec.
8 sec.
13 sec.

9 sec.
14sec.

5-23

~llation
Febr

1998

LK 3 COIPBX
Data
No.

Service Manual

Line Mode

(continued)

Function

27

Tie Line Dial Tone Selection

Yes

28

Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection

Sending (Yes)

29

Tie Line Internal
Selection

Transmit

Page 1 = 2dB
Page 2 = OdB

2dB
8dB
Sl

4dB
12dB
s2

6dB
16dB
OdB

30

Tie Line Internal
Selection

Receive Pad

8dB

2dB
8dB
Sl

4dB
12dB
s2

6dB
16dB
OdB

Tie Line External
Selection

Transmit

2dB

2dB
8d.B
Sl

4dB
12dJ3
s2

6dB
16dB
OdB

Tie Line External
Selection

Receive Pad

2dl3

2dB
8dB
Sl

4dB
12dB
s2

6dB
16dB
OClB

Recognition

I

Automated Attendant
to Trunk Selection

3 sec.

Pad

Pad

Message

Automatic Release Signal
Detection Time Selection

41

Delay Announcement

1 sec.
5 sec.
9 sec.
13 sec.

2 sec.
6 sec.
10 sec.
14 sec.

3 sec.
7 sec.
11 sec.
15 sec.

1Yes, No
Sending (Yes)

.3 sec.

Time

40

0.02 sec.
4 sec.
8 sec.
12 sec.

Value

Tie Line Outgoing
Selection

Disconnect
Selection

Guard Time

Programming

26

33

I

Default

Name

0 sec.
.3 sec.
.6 sec.
.9 sec.
1.2 sec.
1.5 sec.

Not Sending (No)

.l
.4
.7
1.0
1.3

sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.

.2 sec.
.5 sec.
.8 sec.
l.lsec.
1.4 sec.

Message 1
350 ms.

Refer to Memory

0 ms.
200 ms.
4OOms.
600 ms.

50 ms.
250ms.
450ms.
650 ms.

100 ms.
150 ms.
300ms.
350ms.
5OOms.
550ms.
‘700 ms. No Limit

Block

I
42

DIT Assignment

No Assignment

43

ANA Assignment

No Assignment

44

Caller ID Display Assignment
CO/PBX Line

5-24

for

Not Specified

Programming

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

,K 3 CO/PBX

Data
No.

Februarv

12O/Level IVLevel II Advanced

Line Mode (continued)

Default

Func~on Name

Programming Value

No

No = No
Recording

Transmit

2dB

OdB,2dB,4dB,6dI3,8dB,12dB,16dB,
and-3dB

ISDN Line Internal
Selection.

Receive Pad

2dB

OdB,2dB,4dB,6dl3,8dB,12dB,16dB,
and-3dB

48

ISDN Line External
Pad Selection

Transmit

2dB

OdB,2dB,4dB,6dB,8dB,12dB,16dl3,
and-3dB

49

ISDN Line ExternalReceive
Selection

2dB

OdB,2dB,4dB,6dB,8dB,12dB,16dJ3,
and-3dB

91

Trunk Qpe Selection

co

CO, PBX, Tie/DID

92

Trunk (Installed,
Selection

MF

Nil, DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps, MF

45

Live Recording Trunk

46

ISDN Line Internal
Pad Selection

47

Programming

1998

Selection

DP/DTMF)

Pad

Live

Recording,

Yes= Live

line

5-25

LK 4 Telephone

Mode

Data
No.

Function

I I
01

Default

Name

COrPBX Ring Assignment
Mode)

(Day

I I
02

10

12

CO/PBX Ring Assignment
(Night Mode)

Refer to Memory Block

Code Restriction Class
Assignment (Day Mode)

All Stations Class 00

Code Restriction Class
Assignment (Night Mode)

All Stations Class 00

Telephone

All Telephones

to Tenant Assignment

1 Station Number

11

Refer to Memory Block

Assignment

Ringing Line Preference
Selection
Line Key Selection for Telephone
I Mode

Tenant 00

I4;IGng,

Immediate

Ring,

Delayed 1

Tenant Number

Refer to Memory Block
No
Refer to Memory Block
Not Specified
No

I I
I I
I II
15

Intercom Master Hunt Number
Forward Assignment

All Telephones
Not Snecified

17

Station to Class of Service
Feature Assignment

Refer to Memory Block

l%ation

Name Assignment

19

Trunk

20

Off-Hook
Terminal

23

Outgoing

Restriction

Voice Announcement
Assignment

1Prime Line/Hot

Line Assignment

Not Snecifled
Not Restricted
No

No = Off-hook Voice Deny
Yes = Off-hook Voice Allow

Not Specified

Up to 10 digits

Hold

Hold, Disconnect

Refer to Memory Block

I I
28

1

29

[ -30

5-26

English

~English, Japanese

1 HFU Selection

No

?

~~&ZrRecallDisplay

Yes

i-Yes, No

Bilingual
Selection

LCD Indication

I

Programming

LK 4 Teleuhone

Mode (continued)

I

Function

Data
No.
31

Receiving
Selection

Default

Name

Internal/All

Call Page

Programming

Yes

Yes, No

No

No, Yes
No, Yes

Value

32
33
34
35

Voice MaWSLT

36

Voice Prompt Selection

No

37

Extension Line Key Ring
Assignment (Day Mode)

All Telephones:

No Ring

No Ring,
Ring

Immediate

Ring,

Delayed

38

Extension Line Key Ring
Assignment (Night Mode)

All Telephones:

No Ring

No Ring,
Ring

Immediate

Ring,

Delayed

39

ADA (2) Ring Mode Assignment

Station Number

(only)

No Ring, Station Number
Ring

40

LCR Class Selection

Class 0

Class O-Class

41

SIE/CAR Ringing Line
Preference Selection

Yes

Yes, No

42

Call Forward - Busy
Immediately/Delay
Selection

Yes

No = Immediately
Yes = Delay

43

Station to Call Appearance
Assignment

44

Caller ID Outgoing

90

SLT Data Line Security
Assignment

SLT Norm

SLT Norm - SLT Data

91

Telephone
Selection

Ringing Variation

Medium

Medium (Ml, Low (L),
High (H)

92

Receiving

Volume Selection

Down

93

Internal

94

3-Minute

95

1DTMF/DP

i

c

1

Programming

Selection

Block

CO Selection

Zone Paging Selection
Alarm Selection
SLT Type Selection

(only), All

4

All stations are assigned
Call Appearance Block 00
Not Specified

No
No
1 DTMF

(M)

I Down, Up

T No, Zone~ A, Zone B, Zone C
I No, Yes

IDP, DTMF

5-27

LK 5 Trunk

Group

Data
No.

Mode

Function

Default

Name

Programming

Value

00

Digit Add/Del For Tie Line
Networking

No Add and Delete = 000

Delete up to two digits, add up to two
digits

01

Tie Line Networking
Tandem
connection Assignment

All Trunk

On = Yes (Enabled)
Off = No (Disabled)

02

&Digit Matching Table to Trunk
Group Assignment

Enabled

On = Use (Enabled)
Off = Not Used (Disabled)

Use All Tables

On = Use (Enabled)
Off = Not Used (Disabled)

1 I
03

OCC Table to Trunk
Assignment

Group

Groups

LK 6 CODV Mode

I I
Data
No.

Function

Name

I

Default

Programming

2

Tenant Mode Copy Assignment

N/A

N/A

3

CO Line Mode Copy Assignment

N/A

N/A

4

Telephone Mode Copy
Assignment

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

I I
5

Trunk Group Mode Copy
Assignment

Value

LK 7 KTU Mode

No Assignment
3-04

5-28

MIF (CALLER

ID) Assignment

No Function

(00)

(00)

Programming

LK 8 Special
Data
No.

Mode
Function

Name

Default

1

ROM Version Confirmation

N/A

2

System Speed Dial Memory
Clear

N/A

3

Station Speed Dial Memory
Clear

N/A

Second Initialization

N/A

Clock/Calendar

N/A

8800

Programming

Setting

Programming

Value

5-29

February

1998

Electra Professional

12OILevel II /Level II Advanced

Section 4 contains detailed instructions
for programming
System Data.
of programming
procedures for each data item (Memory Block) function.
PAUSE

TIME

SELECTIONI---

The example

2.

CO Line

PC Programming

Go off-line.
Enter:

Service Manual

below describes the format

System

~=~n’Block

oPERATIoIuz

1.

Installation

USER

Mode

Syste
a

Sub-Mode

I

COLinh3

Data No.

Guide

0 MIC
l ICM)r

LKl

-“‘x,>
__J’

L

I

TECH refers to the System Program
Technician
Manual
to be
used by the Technician for PC Programming
Procedures.
USER refers to the System Program
End-User
Manual
to be
used by the End-User for PC Programming Procedures.
NOTES:

\

Data No.
Es!
Data No.
Title
IQ 0 : PAUSE
---------------------------TIME

3.

’

The NOTES section alerts
programming.

the Technician

of exceptions

to

Status indication LEDs
When COlpBX line key 1 (System Mode) is pressed, the
MIC LED lights. When CO/PBX line key 1 is pressed a
second time (CO line), the ICM LED lights.

DISPLAY

Press th$ corresponding
change ata entry.

The OPERATIONS are for guiding the Technician through
procedures for programming a specific Memory Block.

the

Press these keys in this sequence.

Display

I

I
COiPBX line key

Data assignedto associated CO/PBX line keys.

To change Pause Time
second, press CO/PBX
4. Press the TRF key to write
5. Press the SPKR key to go
l

n

Additional

from
line
the
back

3 seconds to 1
key 1.
data.
on-line.

In some instances, additional
data must be programmed
before or after a specific Memory Block can be programmed
This table contains those additional Memory Blocks.

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
l-l-09
Manual Pause Selection
l-l-24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assimunent
l-l-25
~PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment
3-91
1Trunk Type Selection

Required
If additional information is needed on this page, some or all of
the notes in the NOTES section continue on the next page.
I
II

glbpf
oc.

description

of the function(s)

of a specific Memory

/

c .I.l.L.l.-.l.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PAUSE

TIME

1
.

SELECTION

.i A pause may be inserted between digits dialed on CO/PBX and Tie lines. This Memory Block specifies the length of the pause tha’
.,‘,
1 automatically
inserted following a behind a CO/PBX Access Code (e.g., 9) by registering Memory Blocks 24 and 25 for CO line in tnr , ”
mSystem Mode.
I .1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
;

5-30

Programming

PAUSE

TIME

1

SELECTION

I

System
1

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

System

I:,“:

Sub-Mode

CO Line

F]

(Dial

3.

Title

Setting

Press the corresponding
change data option.
a

I

Guide

USER

inserted following a
behind CO/PBX Access Code (e.g., 9) by
programming
CO/PBX lines as PBX in Memory
Block 3-91, Trunk
Type Selection,
and
l-1-24/25, PBXCTX Access Code Assignments
I/II.

Pad)
Data

COPBX

I

I

1

1. A pause is automatically

line

2. Manual pauses can be stored to be used when
dialing
outside lines by the Last Number
Redial or Save/Store and Repeat features when
Memory Block l-l-09, Manual Pause Selection,
is programmed.

key to

3. Pauses can be stored as part of System and
Station Speed Dial buffers when needed.

To change Pause Time from 3 seconds to 1
second, press CO/pBX line key 1.

t

B:C:C:D

1 DataNo.
00
I

NOTES:

,” g:

Data No.

No.

I

CO Line
1

PC Programming

v

Data

1

I

I

I
CO/PBX

line

keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-01, DP Interdigit
Time Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming
Memory

l-l-09

Manual

Pause

Block

Name

Selection

l-l-24

PBX/CTX

Access

Code

Assignment

I

l-l-25

PBWCTX

Access

Code

Assignment

II

3-91

Trunk

Type

Selection

4

..1.-.-.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~.
GENERAL
INFORMATION
- PAUSE TIME SELECTION
ai
:
i A pause can be inserted
. length of the pause.

Programming

between

digits

dialed on CO/PBX and Tie lines.

This Memory

i

Block specifies the i
.

5-31

DP INTERDIGIT

System

TIME SELECTION

CO Line

1

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

: .,;

Guide

USER

B:C:C:B

NOTES:

v

Sub-Mode

..-..

0 MIC
l ICM

System

Mode

1

PC Programming
TECH

Data No.
01

CO Line

[=I

0

Data No.

m

,” gi

This Memory Block is used when CO/PBX or
Tie lines are assigned in Memory Block 3-92

1

(Dial Pad)
Setting Data

Data No.

3.

Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
To change Pattern B to Pattern A, press
l
CO/PBX line key 1.

LK6

LK5

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance
to Memory
Block
l-l-02,
Hookflash Time Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional

Memory
Block No.
3-92

Ianimum

Pause Tiie

Dial Signal

@@B Default
m

4.

n

Dial Signal

>

*<

*4

LK8

LK7

CO/pBX line keys

e

Programming
Memory
Trunk (Installed,

Block Name
DPID’IMF)

Required

Selection

,.-.1.1.1.-.-.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- DP INTERDIGIT

i The DP Interdigit
Time is the minimum pause time interval
. Pattern B can be selected.
..l.~.l.~.l.l.l.~.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~,~.~.~.~..
5-32

between

i

TIME SELECTION
Dial Pulse dialing.

Either

Pattern

A or i
.

Programming

‘j_
..I_

HOOKFLASH

System
1

TIME SELECTION

CO Lie
1

Data No.
02

b
PC Programming

OPERATION
1.

TECH

B:C:C:C

Guide

USER

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Mode

System

I

CO Line

m

Sub-Mode

0 MIC

LKl

l

ICM

v

NOTES:

1 Ei
1. A l- or
Memory
2-Digit)
to send
(default:

v
Data No.
(Dial
Data

No.

Title

n

Setting

Pad)

Page

Data

2.

InI
Q 2:
FLSH
---------------------------TIME

600 ms.

I

Hookflash from the Single-Line
Telephone can
put an existing call on hold or send a hookflash
signal on the CO/PBX line.

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

COIPBX

line key to

To change 600 ms. to 140 ms.
Press the RECALL key to go to page 1.
Press CO/PBX line key 6.

l
l
l

?aFe

2

2-digit Access Code can be assigned in
Block l-l-46147, Access Code Cl-Digit/
Assignment, for Single Line Telephones
a hookflash signal on a CO/PBX line
6 #I.

1
LKl

LK2

LK3

20 ms.

40 ms.

60 ms.

LK5

LK6

I

1OOms.

LK4
80 ms.

LK7

I

140ms.

LK8

I

1

160ms.

200ms.

I
CO/PBX

1.5sec.

line keys

I

2sec.

I

3sec.

’

I

RECALL

key

:

Next page.

1 FNC

1 key

:

Previous page.

5 sec.

I

I

4.

5.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-03, Hold Recall
Timer Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold).
Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Additional

Programming

Memory
Block
No.

Memory

Block

Name

l-l-46

Access

Code

(l-Digit)

Assignment

l-l-47

Aczess

Code

(S-Digit)

Assignment

l-3-02

SLTHooMash

Signal

SLT

Assignment

4-24

- HOOKFLASH

Hookflash

Required

Selection

TIME SELECTION

! This Memory Block specifies the break time for a hookflash signal (that breaks the DC loop of a COIPBX line) !
I sent to the CO or PBX when the RECALL
key on a multiline
terminal is pressed, or an SLT generates a I
i hookflash, and the system is assigned to send the hookflash.
i
*1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
Programming

5-33

System
1

HOLD RECALL TIMER SELECTION
(NON-EXCLUSIVE
HOLD)

COLine
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
03

- . b,,
,.,;’

Guide

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

NOTES:

0 MIC
l
ICM

System
v

Sub-Mode

COLine

II

Calls put on Exclusive Hold recall using the data
selected in Memory Block l-l-63,
Hold Recall
Time Selection (Exclusive).

2.

Calls placed on Hold on call appearance
recall using this Memory Block.

3.

Calls parked in System Call Park locations recall
using Memory Block l-2-23, System Call Park
Recall Time Selection.

4.

In series 500 or lower, the timer values are:
LKl = 1 minute, LK.2 - 2 minutes, LK3
minutes, LK4 = No Limit.

z Ez

v

In
0

Data No.

1.

3

(Dial Pad)
Settiag Data

Title
Data No.
-I
I
I
HOLD RBCL
0 3:
---------------------------DISPLAY
TIME

25s

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

CO/PBX

keys

= 4

line key to

To change 25 seconds to 45 seconds, press
CO/PBX line key 2.

l

I
II

I
I

I

I

CO/PBX line keys

.,@$$
A

I

Default

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance
to Memory
Block
l-l-04,
Automatic Redial Time Selection.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional
Memory

Block No.
l-l-63
l-2-23

1

i

Programming
Memory

Block Name

Required

Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
System Call ParkRecall Time Selection

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.

GENERAL

1

INFORMATION
- HOLD RECALL TIMER SELECTION
(NON-EXCLUSIVE
HOLD)

i This Memory Block specifies the time interval of a Non-Exclusive
generated. IfNo Limit is selected, no hold alarm tone is generated.
1 .1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

held outside call until

i.

a recall tone is 1

l

i
Programming

-,’

AUTOMATIC

REDIAL

TIME

System
1

SELECTION

OPERATION:
1.

PC Programming

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

co Line
1

System

I

0

LKl

l

B:J:A-C

MIC
ICM

COLine

FLKl(

,” $

1.

v
Data No.
(Dial
Title

Table

REDIAL
--------------__-----------TIME

( l/2/3

Data

No.

I

I

Setting

Pad)

030

DISPLAY

Use the dial pad to enter the table number
Setting Data.
-m,
Dial pad

q -+

: Tomovecursor.

a-191:

To enter data.

and

4.

After entering data for Table 3, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block l-l-05, Start Timer Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional
Refer

Setting Data (Allowed)
Table 1: Calling Time
Table 2: Call Waiting Time
Table 3: Call Attempts

(001-100
(001-100
(001-255
times)

sec.)
sec.)

(000 cannot be entered.)
3.

\

Definitions:
Calling Time:
The time that the system
automatically
rings the busy CO/PBX number.
After the specified time limit
is reached,
ringing stops.

Call Attempts: The number of times the system
redials the busy CO/PBX number.
2.

3.

USER

Call WaitinP Time: The time the system waits
before redialing the called party number.

Data

III
)

Guide

NOTES:

v

Sub-Mode

Data No.
04

If call Pickup
Memory
Block
Assignment, the
the same Tenant
Trunk to Tenant
work.

groups are assigned using
4-09, Telephone
to Tenant
CO limits must be assigned to
Group in Memory Block 2-01,
Assignment, for this feature to

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

.1,-.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
t
.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- AUTOMATIC

REDIAL

TIME

SELECTION

!

I
. When the called party is busy, the station user dials an Access Code and restores the handset. As programmed !
I in this Memory Block, the system automatically
redials the busy CO/l?BX number. After the specified number I
i of call attempts with no answer, the system stops dialing.
i
.-~1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-,-.

Programming

5-35

START

TIMER

System
1

SELECTION

COLiue
1

Data No.
05

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

B:I:C

-~
.-’,’

Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

I

0 ME
l ICM

LKl

NOTES:

v

Sub-Mode

CO Line

0 bat
l ICM

I LKl

1.

This timer is used for three different features.
and their function that are described below:

v

Data No.

III

0

l

Elapsed Call Timer: The time needed after
dialing until the Elapsed Call Timer is
displayed and started.

l

SMDR Start Timer: The time needed after
dialing until the SMDR Valid Call Timer is
started.
Refer to Memory Block l-5-25,
SMDR Valid Call Timer Assignment.
For
outgoing calls, both timers (SMDR Start
Timer and SMDR Valid Call Timer) must
elapse before a call record is generated.

l

Talk Start Timer:
The time needed after
dialing on a CO/PBX line to establish a
Trtito-Trunk
transfer. (Software version
V2.25 or V2.77 or lower.)

5

(Dial Pad)
Title
Data No.
I
I
0 5:
CALL START
--------------------_^______
TIME
DISPLAY

Setting Data

-n

3.

20s

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

CO/PBX line key to

To change 20 sec. to 10 sec., press CO/PBX
line key 1.
2.

5Osec

I
I

1

60sec.

I

70 sec.

I

2 sec.

In series 500 and lower version
= 80 seconds.

software,

LK8

I
I

I

COlpBX

4.

line keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-06, CO/PBX
Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

H

Additional

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
l-5-25
1SMDR Valid Call Timer Assignment

Required
I

I

r .-.-.1.-.1.-.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
i. This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

I

- START

TIMER

1

SELECTION

Memory Block specifies the time needed after dialing for the system to start the Elapsed Call Timer,. i
I SMDR Start Timer and/or Talk Start Timer. Refer to the notes above for a description of each timer.
I
.

1 .-.-.I.-.l.l.L.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.

5-36

i

Programming

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

COlPBX

INCOMING
RINGING
TIME SELECTION

12O/Level II /Level II Advanced

System
1

ALARM

TECH

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

System

Sub-Mode

CO Line

0 mc
l ICM

0

ul

6

(Dial Pad)

COLPBX lines assigned
activate this feature.

3.

Tie/DID
lines assigned for Delayed Ringing
follow this assignment after the delayed ringing
starts.

4.

This feature uses the same ringing tone (Low,
Medium, High) that can be selected in Memory
Blocks
3-07,
CO/PBX
Ringing
Variation
Selection,
and
4-91,
Telephone
Ringing
Variation Selection. If High is selected in those
Memory Blocks, this feature does not function.

5.

Selection of No Limit

*I

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

To change No Limit
line key 1.

I

4.

5.

line key

to

to 10 sec., press CO/PBX

for DIT/ANA

do not

(Q))disables this feature.

I

I
COPBX

CO/l?BX

S:G

2.

----------------------------

3.

Guide

Memory Blocks 4-01 and 4-02, CO/PBX Ring
Assignment (Day Mode/Night
Mode), must be set
to RING.

Setting Data

Title

Data No.

Data No.
06

1.

v

Data No.

USER

1998

NOTES:

v
LKl

I

B:I:F

0 MIC
l ICM

I LKl

Mode

CO Line
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Februarv

line keys

g y’.;
, . Default
m

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-07, Tie/DID Line
Delay Ringing Timer Selection.
Press the SPKR key to go back cm-line.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

m

Additional

Progmmming

Memory
n’ - -‘- No. I

BlOCK
-ix

I
1

Memory

D-7Tie/DID Line
ISelection
3-07
4-01
402
4-91

Block Name

I

Delay Ringing Timer

ICO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
COIPBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
COIPBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
Teleohone Rimine Variation Selection

- CO/PBX INCOMING
TIME SELECTION

Required

RINGING

I
1

I
I
d
d

ALARM

i, This

Memory Block specifies the time interval from the incoming of a COPBX call until the ringing tone !
1 changes to a higher pitch ringing tone if the call is not answered. If No Limit is selected, the ringing tone does 1
;not change.
.I.L.I.-.l.l.l,l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
i

Programming

5-37

Februarv

I998

Electra Professional

TIE/DID

LINE DELAY RINGING
SELECTION

120/Level II/Level

Installation

System
1

TIMER

TJZCH A:D:C:B

Mode

Svstem

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

I

Q 7:

“>
,I,;

Guide

USER

-

Title
I

Data No.
07

IFi

Data No.

No.

CO Line
1

Example:

1. Go off-line.

Data

Service Manual

PC Programming

OPERATION:

2. Enter:

II Advanced

I

TL

---------------------------TIME

Setting
I

Data
03

DLYRNG

DISP’LAY

Tii

Elapsed

-

Systems 1 and 2 are connected to each other.

-

Station A (ext. 100) and Station C (ext. 102) are
assigned to ring on the Tie line in Memory Blocks
4-01 and 4-02, CO/PBX
Ring Assignment
(Day/Night) Mode.
NOTES:

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

To change No Limit
line key 1.

CO/PBX

line

key to
1. When station user D wants to speak to station
user A ,dial ext. 100.

to 10 sec., press CO/PBX

1. At Station A:
a. The KM
LED blinks and a ring tone
different
from the normal ringing
tone is
heard.
b. The call can be answered by lifting
the
handset.
c. In this instance, Station B and C cannot
answer the call by pressing the line key on
the Multiline Terminals.

I
CO/PBX

4.

line

keys

3. If station user
specified time:
a. The ringing
and Station
b. Any Station
by pressing

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-09, Manual Pause
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Memory
Block No. I

I

Memory

l-l-34

Tie/DID

Line

4-01

CO/PBX

Ring

4-02

CO/PBX

Rine: - Assiznment
-

4-12

(Line

Key

First

Ring

Assignment

Selection

I

Required

Block Name
Pattern
(Day
(Night

for Telephone

I

Selection
Mode)
Mode)
Mode

d
I

1

A does not answer

within

the

tone changes to the normal tone
C starts ringing.
(A, B, or 0 can answer the call
the flashing line key.

4. After timeout,
the system uses the Day and
Night
Ringing
Assignment
and rings
the
assigned station.
5. Selection of No Limit (a) disables this feature.

4
I

c.1.-.1.1.1~-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
- TIE/DID LINE DELAY RINGING TIMER
i.
SELECTION

1

i.

! This Memory Block specifies the delay interval between the time a telephone (accessed by a ringing call on a !
1 Tie line) is not answered (within a specsed time) and the time other telephones (assigned to ring on that Tie I
; line) start ringing. Refer to the example and the notes above.
.1.1.1.1.1~-.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.
i
5-38

Programming

MANUAL

PAUSE

1

System
1

SELECTION

COLine
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

B:B:A:G

Data No.
09
Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

NOTES:

System

r=l:Ei
1.

Sub-Mode

0 MIC

CO Line

If you dial 907-4000
seizing a CO/PBX line:

LNR/SPD

12345

after

ICM

l

When manual pause is not specified.
Data No.
(Dial

Data

-

TIME

(Data in Speed Dial buffer 12.)

P-v

Q 9:
MAN PAUSE
I ----------------------------

NO

I

When manual pause is specified.

DISPLAY

+
3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

LK5

4.

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change NO to YES, press CO/PBX
key 2.

l

dialed number 907 4000 XXX 345 is sent out.
-7

Title

No.
I

I

+

Pad)

LK6

line

LKS

LK7

dialed number 907 4000

12345 is sent out.
T
(Pause)
2. The pause is inserted if Last Number Redial,
Save and Repeat, or Store and Repeat is used to
redial the number,
3. When this feature is allowed, Multiline Terminal
users cannot use consecutive Speed Dial using
the LNR/SPD key.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block l-1-11,
System
Transfer/Camp-On
Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
W

Additional
Refer

1

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

GENERAL

..

INFORMATION

- MANUAL

PAUSE

SELECTION

1.

! This Memory Block specifies either Pause Insertion or Last Number Dialed/Speed Dial to be executed using !
e LNR/SPD
key if it is pressed after one or more digits of a dialed number are entered. Refer to the notes I
dove.
1 .1.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

Programming

5-39

SYSTEM

System
1

TRANSFER/CAMP-ON
SELECTION

PC Programming
TECH

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

CO Line
1

0 Mxc
ICM

LKl

Mode

System

I

Sub-Mode

COLine

II

Data No.
11

,

OPERATION:
1.

-

l

B:B:A:I

Guide

..!.:

r ,-

USER

NOTES:
Il.

,” gi

I

v

Transfers/Camp-Ons
from
Attendant
Consoles are also activated by this Memory

Add-On 1
Block.
1

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Title

Data No.
I
I

I

-

11:

f-9
YS

R.WGTRF
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

I

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

To change
key 1.

CO/PBX

line key to

YES to NO, press CO/PBX

line

I
COlpBX

4.

line keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block l-l-12,
Station
Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
BlockNo.
1-1-12

Programming
Memory

Block

Station Transfer/Camp-On
Selection

Name

Required

Recall Timer

..l.l.-.l.-.-.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SYSTEM

TRANSFER/CAMP-ON

SELECTION

i

i This Memory Block allows or denies system-wide station users the ability to perform a Ring Transfer or :
. Station Camp-On. If allowed, multiline terminal users can perform a Ring Transfer by pressing the TRF key
L.l.-.l.-.-.l.l.l*l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.._ :.

5-40

Programming

Installation

Service Manual

STATION

Electra Professional

TRANSFER/CAMP-ON
TIMER SELECTION

1201Level II/Level

System
1

RECALL

Februarv

II Advanced
CO Line
1

PC Programming

OPE&ATION:
TECH

1998

Data No.
12
Guide

B:I:H

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

1

0 MIC
l ICM

LKl

NOTES:
1. When a station with an Attendant Add-On
assigned to it transfers or camps on a call
call goes unanswered, the call recalls using
Block
l-l-64,
Attendant
Add-On
Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer Selection.

w

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

0

LKl

l

MIC
ICM

‘I
Data No.

ul

1

(Dial
Data

3.

2. In series 500 or lower version software, the timer
values are: LKl = 30 seconds, LK2 = 60 seconds
(default), LK3 = 120 seconds, LK4 = 240 seconds.

Pad)

No.

Press the corresponding
change data option.

CO/PBX

line

key

to

To change 45 sec. to 90 sec., press CO/PBX
line key 3.

l

I
II

I
I
CO/PBX

; 4.

2

Console
and the
Memory
Console

I
line

I

I
I

keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-18, System Speed
Dial Restriction by Tenant.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
W

Additional

I

Memory
Block
No.

Programming
Memory

I

l-1-11

1System

l-6-01

Attendant
Add-On
Port Assignment

l-S-08

Class of Service
Selection
2

Block

Transfer/Camp-On

Required

Selection

Console
(Station)

I

Name

!

I
I

to Telephone
Feature

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.

! GENERAL
I.

INFORMATION

- STATION
TRANSFER/CAMP-ON
SELECTION

RECALL

TIMER

1
I.

-” 71is Memory Block specifies the time interval before a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On from a station 1
lthout an Attendant Add-On Console recalls back to the originating station if the call is not answered.
L .1.-.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.
j

Programming

5-41

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12OLevel II/Level

Installation

II Advanced
System

CO TRANSFER RING PATTERN
SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

CO Line

1 DataNo.

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

1

Service Manual

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

CO

Guide

0 hm
l ICM
v
1 3
ul
(Dial Pad)

Data No.

NOTES:
This feature
higher.

Il.

1

requires

version

OS
:
:

2s
*
.

4.0 software

or I

---------------------------pattem

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

COPBX

I

Page 2
LKl
PattemG
I
LK5

LK2

LK2
I
1I PattemH
I
LK6

I

I
1
I

LK3

I

I

LK4

LK7

I

LKi3

B

LK4

3s.
:
:

4.i.
.
.

E

LK?

F

LK8

5q.

6s.

.

.

.

.

1

G
H

m

:

.

:
:

.

..

LK2
(Page 2)

.

.. -. .. .. .. .. r..
n. ni. . . . . .r

LKl

(Page2)

.

:

.
l-j

.
:
!-Inn

.

Default

CO/PBX line keys

key

:

Next page.

1 key

:

Previous page.

RECALL

LK4

LK3

I

4.

line key to

LKl

1s
.
.

To change Pattern C to Pattern A, press
COLPBX line key 3.

Page 1
LKl
I

1 FNC

T:“ff’

Line
Key

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and ’
advance to Memory Block 1-1-14, CO Transfer
Ring Tone Selection.

r

AdditionalPm@-i~
Refer to Guide to Feature Progmmming

in this manual,

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-,-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i GENERAL

INFORMATION

-CO RING TRANSFER

This Memory Block selects a Ring Pattern
L.I.I.I.-.I.I.-.I.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

l

5-42

when CO Transfers

RING PATTERN

SELECTIOF

,:;;
,> .. /.
ml

are made.

Programming

CO TRANSFER

RING TONE

SELECTION

I

System
1

1

co
1

I

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH[B:C:A:K

1.

kJSER

1 DataNo.
14
I

I

Guide
i

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

CO

0 MIC
l ICM

NOTES:
I

0 MIC
l ICM

LKl

1 1. The available

tones are shown below.

v

Data No.
(Dial Pad)

Data No.
I
I
14:

Title
I
TRF TONE

---------------------------TIME

3.

4.

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

(480/606):
(480/606):
(1024/1285)
(1024)
(500)
(1024/1285):
(600/700):

Modulation
Modulation

(16 Hz)
(8 Hz)

Modulation (16 Hz)
Modulation (16 Hz)
Envelope 2 sec.

(1024):

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

setiF?b
A

Tone A
ToneB
Tone C
Tone D
ToneE
Tone F
Tone G
Tone H

CO/PBX

line key to

2. This feature requires
higher.

version 4.0 software

or

To change Tone A to Tone .B, press COLPBX
line key 2.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-22, Call Forward
No Answer Timer Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

r. .1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL
INFORMATION
-CO TRANSFER
‘his Memory Block selects a ring tone for CO Transfers.
L.l.l.l.-.-.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

RING TONE

SELECTION

!
I
i

5-43

SYSTEM

SPEED

DIAL RESTRICTION
TENANT

System
1

BY

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

CO Line
1

System

rn,“FZ

CO Line

m

A:A:M

Data No.
18

.

Guide

/,’

USER

v
Sub-Mode

,” zi
Page Switching:

v

m
1

Data No.

Tenant
key.

8

Number

(00-47)

corresponds

to CO/PBX line

(Dial Pad)

DataNo.
I
I
1 8:

Title

nnn

SPEED

---------------------------TIME

Speed Dial
Tenant No.
x1IYO.
in groups
ox-xx
of 8
(QX,

loo

I

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
each tenant.

CO/PBX

line

-1

key

: Next page.

II

key

: Previous page.

key for

CH ,q e : To movecursor.
q -p?J: To enter data.
Dial pad

4.

The LED indication
changes to indicate the
option entry each time the CO/l?BX line key is
pressed.

5. After entering all pages of Access Code OX, press
the TRF key to display the next 1X.
6. Use the dial pad to change the Access Code.
7. After entering all pages of 8X, press the TRF key
to write the selected data and advance to Memory
Block l-l-24, PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment
I.
8. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

I

36

I

37

I

Pam 6 (Tenants 40-47)
LKl
LK2
40
LK5
I

4

I

41
LK6
45

38
LK3

I

42
LK7
46

39
LK4
43
LK8
47

I

I

,
1

CO/PBX line keys

(Continued

5-44

I

on next page. J

Programming

‘,

SYSTEM

SPEED

DIAL RESTRICTION
(continued)

System
1

BY TENANT

System Speed Dial Number
Access Code Tables

51

1

70-

1

80-89

I

8X

ox

I
I

lo1

1I

1.

Speed Dial buffers have nine groups. Refer to
System Speed Dial Number Access Code Table.

2.

One or more tenants can be enabled to use each of
the groups.

3.

This Memory Block determines
can use each group.

4.

When Speed Dial is set to 1000,900
be restricted.

799

1

800 -899

19

which

5’. X in each Access Code is displayed
not entered.
6.

X = any digit O-9.

7.

With Series 500 or higher,
buffers are available.

tenants

- 999 cannot
even if it is

80 System Speed Dial

100 - 199
.r

60-69
70-79

I

600-699
700-799

N/A

1

800 -899

I

Additional

1
I

1

I

Programming

I

Memory
Block No. I

Memory

l-l-33

Speed Dial
Selection

l-l-35

Speed

4-09

700-

I-

7x
8X

n

1

Series 500
Speed Dial Number
80 Codes
1000 Codes
00-09
000 - 099

Access Code

1x
r
6X

79

Data No.
18

NOTES:

Series loo-450

7x

CO Line
1

Dial

Telephone

Block

Number/Name
Buffer
to Tenant

Name

I

Required

I

Display

Allocation
Assignment

.-.-.L.-.l,l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.

f GENERAL

INFORMATION

-‘his Memory Block specifies whether
..l.l.-.l.l*l.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

- SYSTEM

SPEED

DIAL

RESTRICTION

or not System Speed Dial is enabled for each tenant.

BY TENANT

:
i

5-45

1998

Electra Professional

PBXKTX

ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT

Februarv

12O/Level II/Level

Installation

II Advanced
System
1

I

Service Manual

CO Line
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
24
x“>I:

Guide

2

USER

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

System

Mode

I

0

LKl

l

MIC
ICM

NOTES:
1. Features,
such as Code Restriction,
do not
operate properly
unless a behind PBXCTX
Access Code is specified
(Only PBX lines
assigned in Memory Block 3-91, Trunk Type
Selection).

v

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

0 MIC
l ICM

LKl

Data No.
(Dial

Data

Setting

Title

No.

2. A pause is not inserted in the number
outgoing call on a CO line.

Pad)
Data

3.

Up to three numeric
can be ape&led.

characters

4.

A pause cannot be inserted
consecutive digits.

of an

and three pauses
as the first

or as

Example:
3.

Enter data by using the dial pad.
Example:
To program
91 pause, dial:
LNRBPD.
(Use the LNR/SPD
key to insert a pause.)

11

key

: To insert a pause.

key

: To clear all data.

5.

Press the SPKR

PBX

Line

CO Line

key to go back on-line.

Programming

Memory

Block Name

I

3-91

II

: To enter data.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block l-l-25,
PBXCTX
Access Code Assignment II.

Additional

Level
Line

: To move cursor.

4.

n

Professional
Intercom

Cm, q -+
Dial pad aq
LNWSPD

Electra

1Tnmk

Type

I

Required

I

Selection

e.-.1.1.1.-.1.1~1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PBX/CTX ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT

i This Memory Block specifies a CO line PBXKTX Access Code together
. station of the system that is connected behind a PBX or Centrex.

5-46

with pauses for outgoing

I
calls from.

Programming

i
*:.
m.:

PBXKTX

ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT

System
1

II

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

Data No.
25

COLine
1

B:G:F

Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

System

Mode

I

NOTES:

0 Imc
ICM

LKl

l

1.

v

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

0

LKl

l

MIC
ICM

Data No.
(Dial
Data

Title

No.

Setting

2. A pause is not inserted in the number
outgoing call on a C 0 line.

Pad)
Data

(?gGgfq

3. Enter option by using the dial pad.
Example:
To program
81 pause, dial:
LNR/SPD.
(Use the LNR/SPD key to insert a pause.)

-m, q e
q q

Dial pad

0

1 HOLD-

4.

3.

Up to three numeric
can be specified.

4.

A pause cannot be inserted
consecutive digits.

and three pauses
as the first

or as

81

Electra

Professional
Intercom

-

characters

of an

Example:

: To movecursor.

Level

II

PBX

Line

Tie Line

Line

: Toenterdah

key

LNR/SPD

Features,
such as Code Restriction,
do not
operate properly
unless behind a PBWCTX
Access Code is specified
(Only PBX lines
assigned in Memory Block 3-91, Trunk Type
Selection).

1 key

:

To insert a pause.
(Cannot be inserted as
first digit.)

:

To clear all data.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance
to Memory
Block
l-l-26,
Off-Hook Ringing Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional

Programming

Memory
Block
No.
3-91

Memory
!lhnk

Type

Block

Name

Required

Selection

,.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PBXCTX ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT

- “his Memory Block specifies a Tie line PBX/CTX Access Code, together
ation of the system that is connected behind a PBX or Centrex.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

Programming

with pauses for outgoing

II

i

calls from a i
.

5-47

OFF-HOOK RINGING

System

SELECTION

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

System

I LKl

l

Sub-Mode

CO Line

II

z Ez

2

\
I
_C’

Guide
I

NOTES:

v

El

Data No.
26

B:B:A:H

0 MIC
ICM

Mode

Data No.

CO Liue
1

1

1.

Off-hook ring tone volume is lower than on-hook
ring volume.

2.

Off-hook ringing

selection is made system-wide

.

6

(Dial Pad)

I

Data No.
I

1 2. 6:

Title

Setting Data

-n
YS

OFF RING

I ---------------------------1

DISPLAY

TIME

3.

Press the corresponding
COIPBX line key to
change the data option.
l
To change YES to NO, press CO/PBX line
key 2.

I
COfPBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance
to Memory
Block
l-l-27,
Automatic
Day/Night
Mode Switching
Time
Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
4-01
4-02

Programming
Memory

Block Name

CO/‘PBX Rig Assignment
CO/FBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)
(Night Mode)

Required
d
4

C.‘.‘.‘.-.“‘.‘.‘.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- OFF-HOOK RINGING

i This Memory Block specifies whether or not a ringing
. ring-assigned CO/PBX line at a station that is off-hook.
..l.l.-.l.l.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

5-48

tone is generated

SELECTION

to a station

i .,

for calls coming to

.:
.

Programming

System
1

AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MODE
SWITCHING TIME ASSIGNMENT

Data No.
27

COLine
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

Guide

B:J:EIF

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

CO Line

0 MIC
l ICM

I LKl
I/

NOTES:
1. The system can be placed in Day or Night Mode
anytime from a terminal assigned this feature.

,” gg

2. The start times of Day Mode and Night Mode can
be specified
in System
Programming
to
automatically
switch modes at the specified
times.

‘I

MLI

Data No.

(Dial Pad)
Day Mode
p$oFm Start Time
(1 or 2) Setting Data

Data
No.
In27:l
_:
-------------L-------------1
TIME
DISPLAY

3.

3. A start time for Day Mode only or Night
only cannot be programmed.

Night Mode
Start Time
Setting Data
>

4, Day
Mode
and Night
Mode
cannot
programmed to have the same start time.

6. The first time input is when Day Mode begins.
The second time input is the beginning of Night
Mode.

Example: To switch Time number
OS:00 and 20100.

q+

cm,
Dial pad

L-l

q-

m

:
:

1, enter

H

Tomovecursor.

Additional

Memory
Block No.
l-l-32

To enter data.

key

HOLD

1 l-Q-05

Data No. position.

l-8-07

c
4.

be

5. The time is entered in 24-hour time only.

Enter data by using the dial pad.
l

Mode

Programming
Memory

Block Name

Require<

Automatic Day/Night Mode By Day of
Week Selection
1Automatic Tandem Trunk By Night Mode 1
Selection
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Selection 1

Code Restnct~on Class Assqnment

(Night

Press the TRF key to write the data.
a

Number

2 Switching

Time is displayed.

4-17

5. Use dial pad to change Time numbers.

4-37

6. Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance
to Memory
Block
l-l-28,
Distinctive
Ringing
by Telephone
or CO
Selection.

4-38

Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
(Day Mode)
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
(Night Mode)

7. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
~.1.-.1.1.1.-.1~1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION
SWITCHING

. &is Memory Block allows automatic
~.-.-.-.-.l.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

Programming

switching

- AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT
TIME ASSIGNMENT
of the system between

MODE

Day Mode and Night
Mode.
-

i.
II
.

5-49

Februarv

Electra

1998

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

DISTINCTIVE
RINGING BY TELEPHONE
OR CO SELECTION

I

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

1

System

I

CO Line

I[

0 Mrc
l ICM

LKl

I

l

Data No.

Setting

Title

No.
I

Pad)

Data

l

II
DST

----------------------------

TEL

RING

‘_ “,
IJ
J

Mode.

The ringing
tone is specified
for each
telephone in Memory Blocks 4-01 and 4-02,
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day/Night Mode),
or 4-91,
Telephone
Ringing
Variation
Selection.

2. CO refers to CO/PBX
Data

Guide

USER

1. TEL refers to Telephone
,” $!i

(Dial

1 Data No.
28
I
I

NOTES:

v

I

CO Line
1

TECH B:B:A:E

v
Sub-Mode

System
1

Service Manual

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Installation

II Advanced

Line Mode.

The ringing tone is specified for each CO/PBX
line in Memory Block 3-07, CO/l?BX Ringing
Variation Selection.

DISPLAY

3.

Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line key to
change the data option.
l
To change TEL to CO, press CO/PBX line
key 2.

I

CO/‘PBX

line

keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-29, Private
Line Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

H

Additional

Programming

CO/PBX

Ringing

CO/PBX

Ring

Telephone

Variation
Assignment

Ringing

Variation

Selection
(Night

Mode)

Selection

.1,1.1.-.-.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

:

GENERAL

INFORMATION

,i This Memory Block assigns distinctive

- DISTINCTIVE RINGING
SELECTION
ringing

tones per-telephone

BY TELEPHONE

or per-CO/PBX

OR CO :
I -_

line.

.
J

1 .1.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-~-.-.-.-.-.

5-50

Programming

PRIVATE

LINE

System
1

ASSIGNMENT

CO Line
1

Data No.
29

OPERATION:
PC Programming

A. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

System

I

TECH

0 ME
l ICM

LKl
v

Sub-Mode

CO Line

II
In2

9

(Dial

Pad)

1. Two Private Lines can be assigned to one station
or one Private Line can be assigned to two
stations.
2. If a Private Line is assigned to a Single-Line
Telephone,
the Single-Line
Telephone cannot
access the line by dialing the Trunk Group
Access Code.
However,
the Single-Line
Telephone can access the line by dialing the
Specified Line Seixure Access Code if assigned in
Memory
Blocks
l-1-46/1-1-47,
Access Code
(l-Digit/Z-Digit)
Assignment
(Function No. 063
or 064).

Combination
No. (l-2)

nn

III

A

2 9:
Pl
-_-------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

T=

c=-

Enter options by using the dial pad.

3. If a station is allowed (Barge-In originate) and a
second station is allowed (Barge-In
receive),
Barge-In is not allowed on a Private Line unless
both stations share the Private Line.

Example:
CO line 5 is assigned as Private
Line of Tel Port Number 11.

l

-a ,q -t
Dial pad q m q

:

To move cursor.

:

i&ennrDtro.

key

:

To clear all data when
cursor is at CO No. or
Setting Data.

r HOLD

;

Tel Port No.
(01 - 96)

CO No.
(01 - 64)

NO. Title

Data

4.

USER

NOTES:

,” gi
v

Data No.

B:C:A:H/I

Guide

and

Press the TRF key to write the data.
l

Data for the second line is displayed.

l

Move the cursor to change the data.

5. Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-30, Route
Advance Block Assignment.
6.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

I

Memory
Block
No.

Programming
I

Memory

Block

I

Name

2-06

Line

Key

Selection

for Tenant

4-12

Line

Kev

Selection

for Teleohone

Required

I

Mode
Mode

..1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

GENERAL

i

INFORMATION

- PRIVATE

LINE

ASSIGNMENT

‘his Memory Block assigns an outside line for use as a Private Line. The Private
_ ,her telephone, and no LED indication is provided to other terminals.
..l.-.l.l.l.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

Programming

i

Line cannot be seized by any i
.

5-51

ROUTE

ADVANCE

BLOCK

System
1

ASSIGNMENT

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECH(B:CLA:F

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

CO Line
1

Mode

System

I-4

: Eiz

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I1

,” gg

Guide

IUSER I

NOTES:

v

1.

If 00 (not set) is programmed,
accessed for this priority setting.

2.

If Route Advance Block Numbers are assigned,
and a line key is pressed, or an Access Code is
dialed, the system starts searching for an idle
line in a specified group (beginning
with the
Trunk Group assigned priority 1).

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Block No.

no trunks

are

3. If all CO/PBX lines are in use, the line with the
next highest priority is seized.

Title
Data No.
In
RT ADV 01 - 1 = 00
3 0:
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

Block
3. Enter option by using the dial pad.
l
Example:
To select Trunk
Group
priority 1 for block 1.

Data No.
30

No.

Priority

05 as

No.

Set Data

Priority

1

Trunk Group No. 01-32

Priority

2

Trunk

Group No. 01-32

Priority

3

Trunk

Group No. 01-32

Priority

4

Trunk

Group No. 01-32

Block 1
tm

, I#I-

Dialpad

a-191

:

Tomovecursor.

:

To enter Setting Data.
I

4.

Press the TRF key.
l
Data for priority 2 - 4 is displayed
successively.
l
After entering the data for priority 4,
press the TRF key.
l
Data for priority 1 in the next block is
displayed.
l
After entering the data for priority 4.

I
1

I

Priority

I
1

k

1I Trunk

Group No. 01-32

Trunk

Group No. 01-32

Trunk

Group No. 01-32

I Trunk

Group No. 01-32

I

Priority

2

Priority

3

Priority

4

1
i

Block 16
I

I

1

I

I

I

5. After entering data for Block 16, press the
TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-32, Automatic
Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection.
6.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional Programming

Memory
IBlock
No. I

IRequired I

1

I

3-03

ITrunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment

,.1,1.-.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- ROUTE

ADVANCE

BLOCK

’ This Memory Block assigns priority levels (l-4) to each Trunk Group in Memory
! Group Assignment.
The system has 16 blocks that can be specified.
..I.I.L.-.I.I.I.I.I.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-~-

5-52

ASSIGNMENT
Block 3-03, Trunk-to-M

Programming

i
x~

Installation Service Manual

February 1998

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MODE BY DAY
OF WEEK SELECTION

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

32

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH B:J:D

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

n

LKl

CO Line

11

I.

,” gi

l

(Dial Pad)
Title

By designating two time settings in Memory
Block l-l-27,
Automatic
Day/Night Mode
Switching Time Assignment, one of the two
settings can be assigned to each day of the week.
Example:

Data No.

Data No.

S:D

NOTES:

Q MIC
ICM

l

v_

Sub-Mode

USER

SettingData

SUN

To specify Day/Night Mode automatic
switching time 1 for Monday-Friday, and
Day/Night Mode automatic switching time 2
for Saturday and Sunday, press CO/PBX line
keys 1 and 7.
MON

TUE

3. Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change the day of week.
l

The LED indication changes to indicate
the data set when a CO/PBX line key is
pressed.

I
CO/PBX line keys

n

AdditionalProgramming

Memory
Block No.
l-l-27

4. Pressthe TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-33,
Dial Number/Name Display Selection..

Speed

/I

Memory Block Name
AutomaticDay/NightModeSwitching
TimeAssignment

Required
4

Classof Service(Attendant)Feature

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
,.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~‘~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.,

i

GENERAL INFORMATION - AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MODE
BY DAY OF WEEK SELECTION

_ I’his Memory Block specifies automatic switching between Day Mode and Night Mode by day of the week.

Programming

i
i
.

5-53

SPEED DIAL NUMBER/NAME
SELECTION

DISPLAY

System
1

CO Line

Data No.

1

33

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH B:H:B

._.
.‘..

Guide

2’

USER

I

off-line.

1.

Go

2.

Enter: Mode

System

I

0 MIC

LKl

NOTES:

l ICM

1. If a message (the name of the dialed party) has
not been entered, only the dialed number is
displayed regardless of programming in this
Memory Block.

v
Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

.“z:

‘I
Data No.

I

3

3

(Dial Pad)
mtle

Data No.

. I

II

Setting Data

I

I I

33:
DIAL
SPD
____________________~~~~~~~~
TIME

3.

Title

I
DISP

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
To change Dialed Number to Name, press
CO/PBX line key 2.

l

,

I

I

I

I

I

I

I
Default

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-34, Tie/DID
Line First Ring Pattern Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional Programming

Memory
IBlock
No. I

c

Memory Block Name

1-1-18

System SpeedDial Restriction by Tenant

l-l-35

Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

IRequired I

.~.1.1.~.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

i

.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SPEED DIAL NUMBER/NAME
SELECTION

DISPLAY

I

I This Memory Block specifies whether the dialed number or name is displayed first on the LCD of th
originating station when an outgoing call is made using Speed Dial.
1

l

5-54

1

Programming

.:

System
1

TIE/DID LINE FIRST RING PATTERN
SELECTION

Go.off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

I

TECH A:D:B:D

LKl

0 MIC
l ICM

v

Sub-Mode CO Line

I

1.

.“z;

Data No.

I

Title

3.

13141

.r
Pattern 4

5. Internal Ring (Signal Tone)
6.

Setting Data

Voice Announce

2. If Voice is selected, switching from Voice to Tone
is not allowed, Memory Block l-l-07, Tie/DID
Line Delay Ringing Timer Selection is not used
and Handsfree Answerback is not allowed at the
receiving station.

PAT 3

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.

I

To change Pattern 3 to Pattern 2, press
CO/PBX line key 2.

l

Specify one of the following ringing tones fo1
incoming calls on Tie lines.
I
4.

--

3 4:
TLI RNG
___--_______________-------TIME
DISPLAY

Pattern

I

OS

1s

2s

2

:

*

hhil

:

3

1
LK6

ICM

VOICE

LK7

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-35, Speed Dial
Buffer Allocation.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

,

Memory
Block No.
l-l-07

,

Memory Block Name

.

.

5s

.

Same as Internal Rig

6

Voice Announce

I

.

.

.

.

5

6s

r

i 2 sec:On
: 4 sec.?

I
:

I

I

4s

.

LK8

COlpBX line keys

.

3s

1
r

LK5

USER

1. Pattern 1

(Dial Pad)

,

34

I

NOTES:

v
Data No.

I

1 DataNo.

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

CO Line
1

1

(See M.B. 1-2-19.)

Required

Tie/DIDLineDelay Ringing Timer
Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection

COlpBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

’ GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TIE/DID LINE FIRST RING PATTERN

Ahis Memory Block allows specific ringing tones for incoming calls on Tie lines.
L ,1.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

Programming

SELECTION

1
;

5-55

SPEED DIAL BUFFER ALLOCATION

Data No.

1

35

System

I

CO Line

0

NOTES:

0 M.Ic
l ICM

LKl

series

v
Sub-Mode

0 Mu2
l ICM

LKl

Dial memories
memories.

m
3

2.

5

(Dial Pad)
Setting Data

Title

Data No.

and

10 Station

Speed Dial

The 1000 code option does not allow for Station
Speed Dial memories.

peries 500 or hipher
1. The dial code option allows for 80 System Speed
Dial memories and 20 Station Speed Dial
memories.
‘I

a”,:,.
____________________--------

2.
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l

100-450

1. The 100 code option allows for 90 System Speed

v
Data No.

USER 1

TECH B:H:A

Go off-line.

2. Enter: Mode

3.

CO Line

1

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

System

The 1000 code option does not allow for Station
_Speed Dial memories.

To change 100 to 1000, press COIPBX line
key 2.

I

I

I

I
I

I

I
I
I

COIPBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-36, CO/PBX
Call Forward - All Calls Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.

r

i

Memory Block Name

1-1-18

System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant

l-l-33

SpeedDial Number/Name Display
Selection

Required

.~.1.1.1.1.~.1.1.1~1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SPEED DIAL BUFFER ALLOCATION

‘.,
._

;This Memory Block specifies either the 100 memories or 1000 memories allocation.
.1.1.~.~.1.~.1.1.1.1.~.~.-.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

5-56

“I
d

Programming

Installation Service Manual

Electra Professional lZO/Level II /Level II Advanced

CO/PBX CALL FORWARD
SELECTION

-ALL CALLS

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

36

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

Februarv 1998

TECH B:C:A:B

USER

System

Sub-Mode

CO Line

3
ul

Data No.

Terminal or Single-Line Telephone, the second
telephone rings instead of the first telephone.

6

(Dial Pad)
Title

Data No.

I

I

Setting Data

II

3 6:
CO
FWDG
____________________~~~~~~~~
TIME
DISPLAY

3.

NO

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change NO to YES, press CO/PBX line
key 2.

I

I

I
COlpBX line keys

,

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-37, Trunk
Queuing Timeout Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional Programming

Memory

I

Memory Block Name

Block No. I

Required

4-01

COlpBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)

4

4-02

CO/PBX Riu Assiment

d

! GENERAL

(Night Mode)

INFORMATION

I

I

- COlPBX CALL FORWARD-ALL

CALLS SELECTION

‘his Memory Block determines whether or not incoming CO/PBX calls follow a Call Forward - All Calls!

Programming

!

System

TRUNK QUEUING TIMEOUT SELECTION

1_

I

CO Line
I

1

Data No.
I

37
--

I

I

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

TECH
0 MIC
ICM

LKl

I

l

v
Sub-Mode COLine

II

,” gi

v

Data No.

^ j.

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

m
3

7

B:I:K

USER

I

NOTES:
1. When all trunks in a particular Trunk Group are
busy, the station user can dial an Access Code to
queue onto the busy Trunk Group. When a
Trunk (in that group) becomes idle, the queued
station is signaled.

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
I
1

Title

QUE
TRUNK
2 7:
____________________-------TIME
DISPLAY
3.

Setting Data

II
10s

Press the corresponding COIPBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change 10 sec. to 30 sec., press CO/PBX
line key 3.

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-46, Access
Code (l-Digit) Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

..~.~.1.~.1.1.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..
GENERAL INFORMATION _ TRUNK QUEUING TIMEOUT SELECTION
i

i

. automatically canceled.

_

i This Memory Block determines the time that a station, where Trunk Queue was set, rings before the queue ;
..l.l.~.~.l.l.l.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.*

5-58

Programming

.-’

ACCESS

CODE (l-DIGIT)

ASSIGNMENT

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

46

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH

B:G:A

Go off-line.
Enter: Mode

System

Sub-Mode CO Line

I

LKl

I

LKl

NOTES:

0 MIC
l ICM

1. The assigned Access Code can be dialed after
lifting the handset or after the SPKR key is
pressed.

0 MIC
l ICM

2. Select options from the list of function numbers
in Memory Block l-l-46, Access Code (l-Digit)
Assignment, and assign a number (from O-9, *
or #) to each selected function.

‘I
4
ul

Data No.

6

(Dial Pad)
Data No.

3.

Title

Dial No.
6-6, #, * Function No.

,

:

Data:

When a function is assigned a l-digit Access
Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same
first digit become invalid (i.e., if a function is
assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes
50-59,5*, and 5# cannot be used.)

3. To enter # or * as part of an Access Code: Press
LNR/SPD then # or *.
4. This Memory Block is used when 2- or 3-Digit
Station Numbering Plan is programmed.

To dial digit 1 for Call Forward
enter the Function Number 030.

q+ :
Dial pad q- q
+-m

Tomove cursor.

Default
Dial
No.

To enter data.

Function Number:
000-132,140~143,
176-199,201-216,
250~253,301-304,401-416,501-503.
Dial Number:
O-9, *, # (LNRSPD,

4.

l

Enter option using the dial pad.
Example:

*, #)

Press the TRF key; data of dial 2-9, * , and #
are displayed successively.

5.

Enter the Function Number for the Dial
Number to be assigned.

6.

Press the TRF key; next data is displayed.

USER

I
I

0

Function No.

I

176

Function Name
I

Specified Intercom Call

l-3

001

Station Number

4-7

000

Not Used

8

102

Trunk Group 2

9
*

101

Trunk Group 1

096

Last Number Redial

026

Callback Message Answer

1 #

1

I

7. Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-47, Access
Code C2-Digit)Assignment.
8.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Continued on nextpage.

Programming

5-59

ACCESS CODE (I-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

46

(continued)

-3

Note: This table applies to Data Numbers 46,47 and 48.
Default
Dial No.

I
II

Function
No.

I I

I
Function Name

000

Not Used

1,2,3

001

Station Number

002

Not Used

I

I

019

Not Used

020

Call Forward No Answer Set

021

Call Forward No Answer Cancel

022

Call Forward Busy Set

023 TCall

I

024

I

I

4,5,6,7

43

Function Name

I

1

~1
1

60

1

Forward Busy Cancel

1call Forward Busy/No Answer Set

044

I

049

I Timed Alarm Set at SLTs

I

Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for Single

I Volume/LCDControl~

~-

--I

050

Specified Tenant on COIPBXICentrex Line
Seizure (l-digit)

051

Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/Centrex Line
Seizure (2digit)

052

Call Pickup COiPBX by Tenant (l-digit)

053

Call Pickup CO/PBX/Centrex by Tenant
(2-d&t.)

44

025

Call Forward Busy/No Answer Cancel

#

026

Callback Message Answer

6#

027

SLT Hookflash

054

Specified Tenant Internal Paging (l-digit)

028

Not Used

055

Specified Tenant Internal Paging (2digit)

029

Not used

056

Internal Emergency All Call Paging

030

Call Forward All Call Set

057

Intra-Tenant Call Pickup

I

058

I Night ChimeCall Pickup

l
I

059

1 NotU.sed

060

I Call Pickup CO/J?BX for other Tenants

41

I

40
42

I
I

I
I
I

11

68

032
033

69

I I
I Call Forward All CaWDND Cancel
I Call Forward All Call Set from Destination II

~~

~~~

I
~

034

Call Forward All Call Cancel from
Destination

061

IntemaUCO/PBX Transfer Call Pickup in
Same Tenant

035

Station Outgoing Lockout Set

062

SLT Park to Non-Exclusive Hold

036

Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel

063

037

Change Password

Specified COIpBWCentrex Line Seizure
(l-digit)

064

Specified COfPBXfCentrex Line Seizure
(2digW

065

Not Used

066

Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant

067

Call Pickup (Tie only) in Same Tenant

068

Call Pickup (PBX only) in Same Tenant

069

Call Pickup (CO only) in Same Tenant

038

from
IReset Password
~
~ Attendant ---I

039

I Fax Status Indication (T~~/DIDlines)

040

Log - ON/OFF (Series &IOor higher]
Account Code Entry (Series 300 or higher)

6*

I
I

Continued on next page.

5-60

Programming

*’

Installation Service Manual

Februarv 1998

Electra Professional 12OLevel X/Level II Advaked

ACCESS CODE (l-DIGIT) MWGNMENT
(continued)

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

46

Note: This table applies to Data Numbers 46,47 and 48.
Function Name

Function Name

Call Arrival K

Key (Series 250 or higher)

Dial Programming (Single

Continued on nextpage.

Programming

5-61

Electra Professional 12OILevel II/Level II Advanced

Februarv1998

Installation Service Manual

System
1

ACCESS CODE (l-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT
(continued)

CO Line

Data No.

1

46

Y_
‘\

Note: This table applies to Data Numbers 46,47 and 48.
Default
Dial No.

Function
No.

Function Name

Default

Function

Dial No.

No.

Function Name

--1

r

182

1SGed

Station Access Code

06

1 1

1

254

I Not Used

I

183

I Specified Station Access Code

0’7

I I

l

255

I Not Used

184

Specified Station Access Code

08

185

Specified Station Access Code

09

186

Specified Station Access Code

10

187

Specified Station Access Code

11

188

Specified Station Access Code

12

I

I

401

I Closed Number Block 01

189

Specified Station Access Code

13

190

Specified Station Access Code

14

416

Closed Number Block 16

I 191-I-SpeciSed Station Access Code

15

I

501

16

I

VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase
(Voice Prompt, Automated Attendant)

502

Voice Mail Message Set

503

Voice Mail Message Cancel

I

192

I Specified StationAccessCode

193

Specified Station Access Code

17

194

Specified Station Access Code

18

195

Specified Station Access Code

19

196

Specified Station Access Code

20

197

SpeciEed Station Access Code

21

198

Specified Station Access Code

22

Station Access Code
~~~

23

I- 199

Ged

I

I Route Advance Block 01

201

Note:

-1

For Series 106 software, these Default Dial Numbers

I

Default

Function

Dial No.

No.

Function Name

I

Call Forward-Off Premise relates to the following
functions: 020 -025,030,032,

252

LISA

I

253IOnlYf

l

have the following settings:

Note:

1

~~

Password Reset (Attendant only)

140-143.

1

DISA Password Confirmation (Attendant

GENERAL

I

INFORMATION

-ACCESS

CODE (l-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT

This Memory Block allows assignment of a l-digit number as an Access Code or station number.

5-62

Programming

ACCESS CODE (2-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

47

4

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH B:G:B

USER

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter: Mode

0 MIC
ICM

System

4.

l

v

Sub-Mode CO Line

The order of Dial No. to be displayed.
U-19,10
-?J 21-29,20
J* 91-99,90
+ Ol-09,oo

I:::

v
4

Data No.

ul

7

(Dial Pad)
Data No.

3.

Title

Dial No.
00-99,
*,#

FunctionNo.

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:

)

To enter data.

Memory

Memory Block Name

Block No.

1
.

Press the TRF key; next data is displayed.

7.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to memory block l-l-48, Access
Code (3-D&$) Assignment.

8.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

2. Select options from the list of function numbers
in Memory Block l-l-46, Access Code (l-Digit)
Assignment, and assign an Access Code (from
00-99 including * and #) to each selected
function.

Function Number:
000-132,140~143,176-199,201-216,
250-253,401-416,501~503.

l

When a function is assigned a l-digit Access
Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same
first digit become invalid (i.e., if a function is
assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes
50-59,5*, and 5# cannot be used.)

3. To enter # or * as part of the Access Code: Press
LNFVSPD,then # or *.

AdditionalProgramming

l-l-46

6.

1. The assigned Access Code can be dialed after
lifting the handset or after the SPKR key is
pressed.

Tomovecursor.

Dial Number:
O-9, *, # (LNR/SPD, *, #I

n

DialOO.

NOTES:

:

Data:

5.

Enter 030 (Call Forward) on dial
11 using dial pad.

q+ :
Dial pad q- q
+w

Press the TRF key; data of the next Dial No. is
displayed successively.

Required

4.

AccessCode(l-Digit)Assignment

This Memory Block is used when 4-Digit Station
Numbering Plan is programmed.

.~.1.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- ACCESS

CODE (20DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT

his Memory Block allows assignment of a 2-digit number as an Access Code.

1

;
I
.

ACCESS

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System
COLine

TECHlB:G:C

I

LKl

I]

,” Ei

!.

Select options from the list of function numbers
in Memory Block l-l-46, Access Code (l-Digit)
Assignment, and assign a s-digit Access Code.

(Dial Pad)

Data No.

Title

, 1

’ DialNo.
, ;-,% :I,”

When a function is assigned a l-digit Access
Code, S-digit Access Codes with the same
first digit become invalid (i.e., if a function is
assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes
50-59,5*, and 5# or 5XX cannot be used.)

l

Fu;;

nn

(0) =
3 8:
3DG ! 01
____________________~~~~~~~~

3.

-000

DISPLAY

TIME

Enter option using the dial pad.
Example: Enter 101 (Trunk Group 01) on
Table No. 01.
+-m

Dial

pad

, a+

: Tomovecursor.

q q To enter data.
Em : LNB+*,#.
_

:

Data:

USER

1. The assigned Access Code can be dialed after
lifting the handset or after the SPKR key is
pressed.

Data No.
01-04

Guide

NOTES:

0 MIC
l ICM

v
=.feD”

48

PC Programming

‘I
Sub-Mode

Data No.

1

1

OPERATION:
1.

CO Lie

System

CODE (3-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT

3. A Station Number
Memory Block.

is not assigned

in this

&. To enter # or * as part of the Access Code: Press
LNR/SPD, then # or *.
5. All items except function number 001 (Station
Number) in l-digit Assignment are valid in this
Memory Block.
5. Four groups of Access Codes can be used (O-9, *
and # on four Tables).
7. Before using this function, assign function
numbers 301-304 (table number for third digit)
in Memory Block l-l-47, Access Code (2-Digit)
Assignment.
3. To program this Memory Block, refer to the
following example:
Example:
g

k

Thethirddigit

The first two digits

l

Press the TRF key; numbers 2-9 and 0 are
displayed successively.

5.

Dia104.

6.

Press the TRF key; next data is displayed.

w

7.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-49,
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance
Assignment.

Memory
Block No.

8.

5-64

Assign function number 301 (Third Digit
[Make the
Table Number 01) to 81.
assignment using Access Code (2-Digit)
Assignment.1

4.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional Programming

Memory Block Name

l-l-46

Access Code Cl-Digit) Assignment

l-l-47

Access Code (Z-Digit) Assignment

Required

Continued on next page.

Programming

i.

.-L.

ACCESS CODE (3-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT
(continued)

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

48

NOTES:
l

The third digit number automatically
corresponds to one of the numbers (00-09) in
Set the applicable function
Table 01.
number.
Example: To set Access Code 811 for Trunk
Group 02.

l

Refer to Memory Block l-l-47,
(2-Digit) Assignment.

I

Access Code

304 (3rd dgt Table No. 04)

34

0 Numbering Plan (3-digit)
3rddgt Table No. 01
Dial No.

II

O

1

Function Number

1 101 (Trunk Gmup 01)

1

102 (Trunk Gmup 02)

2

103 (‘Trunk Gmup 03)

3

104 Chunk Gmup 04)

_I-

I

9

I
I

_I1 110 Uhdc

Gmup 10)

I

r.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.,

.
.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- ACCESS

CODE (3-DIGIT) ASSIGNMENT

his Memory Block allows assignment of a 3-digit number as an Access Code.
.~,1.1.~.1.1.1.1.~.1.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

Programming

i

i

5-65

NETWORKING TRUNK GROUP/ROUTE
ADVANCE ASSIGNMENT

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

49

TECH

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

Data No.

A:D:B:E

4

9

(Dial Pad)

JSlOcK

EIlteT

01-16
Data No.

%tFi%F:
I

J-l

1

4 9:
01 = RT
____________________~~~~~~~~
TIME
DISPLAY

1

Use the dial pad to enter the Function No. of
the Trunk Group or Route Advance Block to be
used.

-~pJ-+
Dial pad

1 HOI;D

q- q

1

key:

:

To move cursor.

:

To enter data.

:

To clear all data.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-50, CO/PBX
Outgoing Digit Add Assignment.

5.

Press SPKR to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1~1.~.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~~.~.~.~.~.~.

1
i

.

2

USER

FunctionNumber 101-132 (Trunk Group l-32
216 (Route Advance Block
1- 16 respectively) is assigned to Closed Number

ul

Clos@_Nymber

3.

i
.:

System

Sub-Mode CO Line

I

._

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

GENERAL INFORMATION - NETWORKING TRUNK GROUP/ROUTE
ADVANCE ASSIGNMENT

1
i
.

I This Memory Block assigns the number of the Trunk Group to be used when connecting an Electra.1 ,_
Professional Level II or Level II Advanced system to another system or to CO/PBX/CTX lines.
1 .1.-.1~1.1~-.-.-.-.1.~.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~
1/1

l

5-66

Programming

1

CO/PBX OUT-GOING DIGIT ADD
ASSIGNMENT

Gooff-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

TECH

1 LKl

1

0

MIC

l

ICM

1 LKl

1

0 MIC
l ICM

v
Data No.

Data No.

I

3.

I

Dial pad
’

q+

/eimm
II

: To movecursor.
:

lzl-lzl
,

q:

key:

I

2. System 1

DISPLAY

,

1. Digits are added when the Access Code is dialed
from Internal Dial Tone.
1

Memory Block l-l-46, Access Code (l-Digit)
Assignment 1 --f 082 (System ID Number for Tie
Line Networking).

(max. 10 digits)

r-b,

Use the dial pad to enter the digits to be added.
cm

:

To enter data.

l-l-46, Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment 2 +=
401 (Closed Number Block 01).
3. System 1
l- 1-49,
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance
Assignment Block 01 + 102 (Trunk Group 02).

4. System 1
To enter Add Digits.

l-l-50, CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
Cl-Digit) Block 013 Assign 2.

To clear all data.

Station 100
Dials 200

4.

Guide

USER

1. System 1

Add Digit

5 0:
Ol=
_
____________________-------TIME

I

1

50

To assign the following in System Programming:

(Dial Pad)

I

A:D:B:E

1 DataNo.

Example:

lz_lz_l

ClosedNumber
Block
01-16

I

CO Line
1

NOTES:

v

Sub-Mode CO Line

1

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

System
1

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-51, CO Line
First Ringing Pattern Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Add
0200

100
Trunk
Group 02

*I\I/
Station 200
Ris

m

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

!

in this manual.

GENERAL INFORMATION

- CO/PBX OUTGOING DIGIT ADD ASSIGNMENT

! ThisMemory Block allows an additional 10 digits (maximum) to be specified when a Trunk in the Trunk

!
!

‘7roup or Route Advance Block assigned in Memory Block l-l-49, Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance I
,ssignment, is seized and a number is dialed.

Programming

5-67

CO LINE FIRST RINGING
SELECTION

PATTERN

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

51

TECH

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

Sub-Mode

5
m

Data No.

l ICM

1

2.

(Dial Pad)
Setting Data
l-h

n-

I
I1

1:
A
co PTN
____________________~~~~~~~~

5

3.

Do not program this Memory Block if Memory
Block l-l-59, Synchronous Ringing Selection, is
assigned YES.

Page No.

Title

TIME

DISPLAY

To change Ring Pattern A to Ring Pattern
B, press CO/PBX line key 2.

RECALL

‘Fi’

key

:

Next page.

key

:

Previous page.

Ringing

LK5

L

LK6

I

Block

s = second(s)

I

Pattern

I

OS

1s

2s

3s

4s

.
.

.
.

.
:

.
.

.
.

.

.

.

.

.

:

I

I

IDIll
E

Page 2
LK2

.

L

.

1

LK4

LK3

G
LK6

LK8

LK7

Nil

5.

6s

F

NIL

4.

5s

LKS

LK7

Ring Pattern
Ring Pattern
Ring Pattern
F
G
I
I
- H

COlpBX line keys

LK5

hlemory

Ring patterns are as follows:

I

LKl

Pattern

specified
in this

Page 1

Ring Pattern
E

Pattern Detection

First Ringing Pattern

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change Setting Data option.
l

I

1. After an actual ringing pattern is detected,
ringing in the pattern specified in Memory Block
l-l-56, CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection, is
used.

0 MIC

LKl

I

_:,’

USER

NOTES:

v

Data No.

B:C:A:A

r:.o:

CO Line

_. -.
‘\.:

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-52,PBX
Line First Ringing Pattern Selection.
Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

No Ring

I

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
l-l-56

Memory Block Name

Required

COlPBX Ringing Pattern Selection

.1.1.1.1.1.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.

;
l

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CO LINE FIRST RINGING PATTERN

SELECTION
.

This Memory Block selects an initial ringing pattern for incoming calls on a CO line.

I .1.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~~.~.

5-68

‘I
J

Programming

_’
z_

Installation Service Manual. Electra Professional 12OILevelII /Level II Advanced
System
1

PBX LINE FIRST RINGING PATTERN
SltLECTION
Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

I

I

1

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

LKl

5
III

USER

NOTES:
0 MIC
l ICM

1. After an actual ringing pattern is detected,
ringing in the pattern specified in Memory Block
l-l-56, CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection, is
used.

2

2.

(Dial Pad)

Do not program this Memory Block if Memory
Block l-l-59, Synchronous Ringing Selection, is
assigned YES.

Setting Data

+
Press the corresponding COIPBX line key to
change data entry.
To change B to F, press CO/PBX line key 6.
key

-‘-/‘key

:

Next page.

:

Previous page.

52

I

l ICM

v
Data No.

1 DataNo.

0 MIC

LKl

v

RECALL

CO Line

TECH B:C:A:E

1.

l

1

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

3.

Februarv 1993

4

First Ringing Pattern

Pattern Detection

Ringing Pattern
speciried in this Memory Block.

Ringing Pattern
spedfed in Data No. 56.

Ring patterns are as follows:
s = second(s)

Pattern

OS

1s

2s

3s

.

.

.

4s

5s

6s

Page 1

Ring Ppem

Ring Pattern Ring Pattern

Ring Pattern
F

H

G

I
COlpBX line keys
Page 2

I

LKl

I

LK2

I

LK3

r

LK4

I

NIL
LK5

LK6

LK7

LK8

.

I

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-53, Tie/DID
Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Nil

x

No Ring

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No. II
l-l-56

Memory Block Name

I

I

I

1

Required

I

CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection

.1.1.~.1.~.~.1.1.1.-.~.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~‘~.-.~.~.~.~.~.

r GENERAL INFORMATION - PBX LINE FIRST RINGING PATTERN SELECTION ;
. _nis Memory Block selects an initial ringing pattern for incoming calls on a PBX line.

Programming

5-69

Installation Service Manual

Electra Professional 12O/Level II /Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

TIE/DID IJN’E DELAY RING PATTERN

System
1

TECH

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

I

CO Line
1

1 DataNo.

53

I

1
1

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

1

LKl

I

0
l

A:D:B:C

_yx

.. _, I
I

USER

MIC
ICM

v

Sub-Mode COLine

ELI(1I

Data No.

ccl

5

0 MIC
ICM

l

3

(DialPad)
SettingData
Page No.

Stle

Data No.

n-

I--%

Ring patterns are as follows:

I
I1

5 3:
TLIF’TN’
D
___L________________~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY
TIME

s = second(s)
1Pattern 1

3.

1s

2s

3s

4s

6s

.
.

.
.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

OS

6s

I

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
To change D to F, press CO/PBX line key 6.

l

RECAu
‘Fj’

key

:

Next page.

key

:

Previous page.
E

Pace 1

I

Ring Pattern RingPattern RingPattern RingPattern
H
G
F
E
Nil
I

No Ring

I

Default

CO/PBXline keys
Page 2
I

LKl

I

LK2

I

LK3

I

LK4

I

n

AdditionalProgmmming

NIL
LK5

4.

5.

LK6

LK7

LK8

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-54,
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern.

I

4-02

_

_

_

I

(CO/PBXRing Assignment(NightMode)

1

I

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

~.~.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..

; GENERAL INFORMATION -TIE/DID LINE DELAY RING PATTERN SELECTION ;
i This Memory Block selects a ringing pattern for incoming calls on a Tie line after the Timeout set in Memor
. Block l-l-07, Tie/DID Line Delay Ringing Timer Selection.

5-70

;

_

Programming

System

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT TRANSFER
RING PATTERN

1 CO Line

1 DataNo.

1

I

1

I

54

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
‘IECH

A:I:N

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter: Mode

System

0

LKl

0

MIC

l ICM

NOTES:

v

1. If Nil pattern is specified in this Memory Block,

0 MIC

II

Sub-Mode CO Line

l ICM

V

ul

Data No.

5

2.

Ringing patterns are shown below.

4

(Dial Pad)
Setting

Page

Ring patterns are as follows:

5

4:
AAPTN
C
_____-___-__________~~~~~~~~
TIME

3.

s = second(s)

I1

DISPLAY

Pattern

OS

1s

2s

3s

4s

5s

6s

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change the data entry.
l

To change Ring Pattern C to Ring Pattern
D, press COIPBX line key 4.

?age 1

I

COlpBX line keys
Page 2

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-56, CO/PBX
Ringing Pattern Selection.

’

AdditionalProgramming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

r

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.~.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

i

.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

-AUTOMATED
PATTERN

ATTENDANT

TRANSFER

RING

1

I
.
his Memory Block specifies the ringing pattern sent to the multiline terminal when an incoming call is 1

eceived at the Automated Attendant and transferred.
1 .~.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.~.-.-*-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

i

CO/PBX RINGING PATTERN
SELECTION

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

56
1

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH B:C:A:C

USER

--i.,
-:

i’
,I-x

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter: Mode
Sub-Mode

0 MIC
ICM

LKl

System

I

CO Line

I*1

l

0 MIC
l

ICM

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to the next Ring Pattern.

5.

After all Ring pattern data has been entered,
press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-57, CO/FBX
Prepause Timer Selection.

6.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

v

5
ul

Data No.

6

(Dial Pad)
Time No.
(1 - 7)

Setting Data

Data No.

NOTES:
I

3,

1. Ringing Tone for calls on CO/PBX lines are sent
to the telephones as is.

3. Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
To change Ring Pattern H on Time No. 1 to
Ring Pattern G, press CO/PBX line key 7.

l

-1

key

:

Next page.

I[

key

:

Previous page.

I
COiPBX line keys

Page 2
LKl

u

3.

Ringing Tones A-H are available.

4.

Continuous ringing time is divided into sever.
ranges (l-7).
Refer to the Ringing Time Range
Table on the following page.

I
Default shown on next page

n

LK2

LK3

LK4

NIL
LK5

The default value shown is for Time No. 1 only.
Default ring patterns are also assigned to Time
No. 2-7.
Refer to the Default Table on the
following page for a complete list of defaults.

5. If a ringing pattern is not specified in this
Memory Block, a ringing tone that has been
specified in l-l-51, CO Line First Ringing
Pattern Selection, or l-l-52, PBX Line First
Ringing Pattern Selection, is used, even after the
continuous ringing time is detected.

Page 1

1

2.

LK6

LK?

LK8

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No. I

I

I

Required

Memory Block Name

1-1-51

CO Line First Ringing Pattern Selection

l-l-52

PBX Line First Ringing Pattern Selection

Continued on nextpage.

5-72

Programming

I

_,-I

COIPBX RINGING PATTERN SELECTION
(continued)

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

56

defaults for Continuous Ringing Time are as follows:
contimlous
Ring Time

Default
Continuous Ringing
Time Range

Time No.

I

I

Ringing Time
Pattern

I4

0.10

- 0.3Osec. 1

2

0.30

- 0.45 sec.

G

3

0.45

- 0.65 sec.

E

4

0.65

- 0.90sec.

E

Ringing Time

5

0.90

-

1.5osec.

B

I-

6

1.50

- 2.5osec.

A

1

7

Detection
I

Specified Ringing Tone Pattern in -w
Memory Block l-l-51
or l-l-52.
(When specified as NO in this
Memory Block.)

A

over 2.5 sec.

Patterns for ringing tones are as follows:
s = second(s)

I

r

-attern

I

OS
.

2s

3s

4s

5s

6s

.1.~.1.1.~.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~~

GENERAL

i

INFORMATION

- CO/PBX RINGING PATTERN

SELECTION

i

:

1s
.

- This Memory Block selects a continuous ringing pattern (A-H)
1.1.1.1.1.1.~.1.1.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.
,

Programming

for incoming calls on a CO/PBX line.

i
i

.
J

5-73

CO/PBX PREPAUSE TIMER SELECTION

System
1

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

Data No.

1

57

PC Programming Guide
TECH

System

CO Lie

,’/

USER

0 MIC

LKl

I

B:C:C:A

‘-^‘.-.,.,

l ICM

v

Sub-Mode

CO Line

I

0 MIC

LKl

l ICM

‘I

5
ul

Data No.

(Dial Pad)

Setting
Data No.

Data

Title

Page No.

n-n

n

3 7:
PREPAUSE
1S
____________________~~~~~~~~
TIME

3.

7

I

1

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
To change 1 sec. to NONE, press CO/pBX
line key 1.

l

Page 1

I

4 sec.

I

5 sec.

I

6 sec.

I

7 sec.

I

I

COlpBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-59,
Synchronous Ringing Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

..~.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..

GENERAL INFORMATION _ CO/PBX PREPAUSE TIMER SELECTION

i

i

i This Memory Block allows an assignment of a pause time to be set before dialed digits can be sent over a i
. CO/PBX line (after the trunk is seized by a system user).

..~.~.l.l.l.l.l.-.l.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~

5-74

.;
.*’

Programming

SYNCHRONOUS

RINGING SELECTION

System

I

CO Line

&

LKl

0 MIC
ICM

l

0 MIC
l

ICM

v

15191

Data No.

(Dial Pad)

I

1

1

59

USER

NOTES:
1. Synchronous Ringing is supported only with the
following:
COI-F(8)-20 KTU
COI-F(4)-20 KTU
ESI-F(8)-21 KTU
SLI-F(8G)-21 KTU
2. Synchronous Ringing does not apply to incoming
DID calls, off-hook ringing calls, or CO/PBX ring
transfer calls.

Function No.

Title

Data No.

I

Data No.

TECH B:C:A:G

1. Go.off-line.

Sub-Mode

COLine

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

2. Enter: Mode

System

II

SYNCHRONUS
59 :
_______________________~____
DISPLAY
TIME

YS

3. Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change YES to NO, press CO/PBX line
key 2.

I
.

I

I

I

I

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-60, &Digit
Matching Table Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

c
i

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.1.1~~.-.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SYNCHRONOUS

RINGING SELECTION

~This Memory Block specifies whether or not COIPBX calls follow Synchronous Ringing.

1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,

Programming

1
i

i

5-75

System
1

S-DIGIT MATCHING TABLE ASSIGNMENT

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

TECH

I

Q MIC
ICM

LKl

4.

l

v

Sub-Mode

CO Line

[=I

,” g.

L

3.

60

I

USER

I
‘.
I

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to the next Dial Code. After all
Dial Codes have been entered, press the TRF
key to advance to Memory Block 1-1-61,
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment.

NOTES:

-

1. There are 16, &Digit Matching Tables. Each
Table contains 16 Dial Codes. Each Dial Code
can be assigned a maximum of eight digits,
including *, #, X, P, and N.

1

Dial Digit
(max. 8)

Code

2.

NANP = North American Numbering Plan.

Use the dial pad to enter the data.
em,

1#1+

Dial pad

q- q

Operation Data

Data:

Tomove cursor.

:

: To enter data.

Dial
Number

X
P
N
*

o-9,*,#

#

#

o-1
2 -9,

*

Matching Table:
Dial Code:
Dial Digit:

HOLD key:
Operation Data:

1

A:A:E

I

Dial

tiTEby

1

(Dial Pad)

Title

go :
SDIGIT TABLE
____________________-------00 I oo=
911

uu
S-Diet

I

1 DataNo.

5. Press the SPER key to go back on-line.

Data No.
Data No.
I

CO Line

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

1

Operation
LNWSPD key
LNRJSPD key
LNRSPD key
LNR/SPD key
LNWSPD key

+
+
+
+
+

7
8
9
*
#

00 - 15 C&digit)
00 - 15
0 - 9, *, #,
NANP = X, P, N
(Maximum eight digits)
Data Clear
(Move cursor to the left)

n

Matching Table

Dial Code

Setting Data

00

00

911

11

00

0

12

00

976

13

00
01
02

1800
1888
1877

14

00

1x

15

00

X

Additional Programming
Refer tn Section 6 -Code Restriction in this chapter.

.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL INFORMATION - &DIGIT MATCHING TABLE ASSIGNMENT
!
i, This Memory Block assigns the outgoing dial digit for Code Restriction (except OCC Dial Digit-Normal Dial). !
I This assignment can be programmed in two ways: a) If the user dials a digit(s) and there is a match, the I
i system can allow free dialing or deny dialing by disconnecting. This is programmed in Memory Block l-l-61, i
. &Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment. bf If the user dials a digit(s) and there is no match, the system.
I can allow free dialing or deny dialing by disconnecting. This is programmed in Memory Block l-l-65, Class I
.
iAllow/Deny Selection.
.1.1.~.1.~.-.~~1.1.1.~.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-

5-76

Programming

f&DIGIT MATCHING TABLE TO CLASS
ASSIGNMENT

I

1

I

TECH

‘1. Go off-line,
System

1

LKl

0

MIC

l

ICM

A:A:F

CO Line

CO? 2

1 LKl

6

In

61

USER

01
02

1

03

(Dial Pad)

T$leF5o.

I

0 MIC
1
l ICM

‘I

Data No.

1 DataNo.

Table

v

Sub-Mode

CO Line
1

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

2. Enter: Mode

System

04
05
06
b7
08

3. Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.

09

Data: Class:
&digit matching table:

11

10

01-14

12

00-15 *

13

*

Class 00 and 15 cannot be programmed.
ClassOO: No Restriction (Allow)
Class 15: Restricted Outgoing (Deny)
Setting Data: YS
= Allow
NO
= Deny
NON = Not Assigned

LK5

I

LK7

LK6

I

I

I

LKS

I

14

-0

I

I
COlpBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to the next Table.

x

Additional Programming
Refer to Section 6 - Code Restriction in this chapter.

5. Press the TRF key to advance to Memory
Block l-l-62 (System Speed Dial Override by
Class Selection).
6.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

.1.~.1.~.1.1.~.1.1.~.~.-.-.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

1

GENERAL

INFORMATION - S-DIGIT MATCHING
CLASS ASSIGNMENT

i
.
- Fach &Digit Matching Table can be programmed to Allow or Deny per-class.
nonprogrammable). Classes 01 - 14 can be programmed.
b.~.~.l.~.~.l.l.l.l.-.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.

Programming

TABLE TO

=I
i
.

Class 00 and 15 are fixed 1
i

5-77

Installation Service Manual

Electra Professional lZO/Level II /Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL OVERRIDE BY
CLASS SELECTION

System

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

62

TECH1A:A:L

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

0 MIC
ICM

System

Sub-Mode

COLine

‘2,

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

,” Ei

I

NOTES:

l

I=(

IUSER 1

-1,;

1. At system default, all stations are set to Class 00
(allows Override for System Speed Dial).

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Data No.
1
1

-nn

Class
01
14

Title

5 2:
SPDOVR
(01)
____________________~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~

Setting Data
=

YS

DISPLAY

TIME

3. Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l
To change YS to NO, press CO/PBX line
key 1.
Data:

Class 01 - 14

Setting Data:

NO =
YS =

I

COlpBX line keys

4.

No Override
Override

$$$&f Default
n....v.v.....

Press the TRF key to advance to the next
Class.

5. After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block l-l-63, Hold Recall Time
Selection (Exclusive).
6. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
1-1-18

‘M~mnwvRlnot

Ron%&.&

Namta

System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant

1

~.1.1.1.1.~.1.~.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~

i

GENERAL INFORMATION - SYSTEM SPEED DIAL OVERRIDE BY CLASS
SELECTION

i
.ThisMemory Block specifies whether or not a user can override System Speed Dial per-Class.

5-78

Programming

I

;
_’

HOLD RECALL TIME SELECTION
(EXCLUSIVE)

I

SIvstem

1

CO Line

I

1

I

1

1 DataNo.
I

I

63

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH B:I:E

USER S:F

1. Go off-line.
Enter: Mode

2.

0

System

l

Sub-Mode CO Line

I{

Data No.

In

6

MIC
ICM

NOTES:
1. When an Exclusive Hold call recalls, the held call
switches to a Non-Exclusive Hold call.

,” $$

I

3

(Dial Pad)
Setting Data

Title

Data No.

)I

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.

CO/PBX line key to

To change 1 min. to 1.5min., press CO/PBX
line key 3.

l

LKl

LK3

LK4

0.5min.

1.5min.

2min.

LK5
3min.

I
1

LK6
5min.

!
1

LK8

LK’7
8min.

1

No Limit

I

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-94, Attendant
Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On Recall Timer
Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

I Memory

I

Required

Block No. I
l-l-03

Hold Recall Timer Selection
(Non-Exclusive Hold)

1-2-23

System Call Park Recall Time Selection

I

..~.1.1.~.~.~.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..

;

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- HOLD RECALL

TIME SELECTION

(EXCLUSIVE)

i

*%is Memory Block specifies the time interval for Exclusive Hold Recall tone. If No Limit is selected, no i
xclusive Hold Recall tone is provided.
.

Programming

5-79

ATTENDANT
ADD-ON CONSOLE
TRANSFER/CAMP-ON
RECALL TIMER
SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System
CO Line

l

II

,” g:

6

Data No.

ul

2.
4

(Dial Pad)

Setting Data

Title

Data No.

;f

USER S:L

I

This timer is valid only for stations assigned with
an Attendant Add-On console in Memory Block
l-6-01, Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone
Port Assignment.
Both the TRF key on the
station and the Transfer key on the console are
affected.

1.0

To change 1 min. to 1.5 min., press
CO/PBX line key 3.
LKl

o.smin,~

:$.&$.yqy..
1.....$.~)>)y,):
:p$$t&&,$~g~~~
....:,>z$,. LK3
..x.*.:
... rr.......... ..k
1.5min.
$

LK5

I

LK6

I

LK?

3min.

I

5min.

I

8 min.

LK4
2 min.
LK8

I

10min.

I
CO/pBXfinekeys

I
H

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.

5.

.~\

Press the corresponding COIPBX line key to
change data option.
l

4.

64

II

DSS RECL
5 4:
___-________________-------DISPLAY
TIME

I

1

1. When a station without an Attendant Add-On
Console assigned to it transfers or camps on a call
to a station, and the call goes unanswered, the
call recalls using Memory Block 1-1-12, Station
Transfer/Camp-On Recall Timer Selection.

0 MIC
ICM

LKl

I

‘I

3.

1

NOTES:

Sub-Mode

I

Data No.

TECH B:I:I

v

I

CO Line

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

1.

System

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-65, Class
Allow/Deny Selection.
Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Required

Memory Block Name

1

l-1-11

lSystem Transfer/Camp-On Selection

~[~

I

1

l-1-12

IStation Transfer/Camp-On Recall Timer
Selection

l

I

l-6-01

Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone
Port Assiment
Class of Service (Station) Feature

I
i

.

.1.1.~.~.1.~.1.~.~.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL INFORMATION
TRANSFER/CAMP-ON

-ATTENDANT
ADD-ON CONSOLE
RECALL TIMER SELECTION

1
i
.

‘,
I This Memory Block specifies the time interval before a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On from a station wit
, _:._.
’ an Attendant Add-On Console recalls back to the originating station if the call is not answered.
1 .1.-.~.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.~~~~~.

5-80

Programming

CLASS ALLOW/DENY

SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

65

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

System

TECH A:A:A

System

I

LKl

I

LKl

0 MIC
ICM

NOTES:

0 MIC
l ICM

1. If no match is found or a duplicate match is made
in opposite Allow/Deny &Digit Matching Tables,
the system uses this Memory Block. If the Class
is assigned as Allow, the call is allowed and if the
Class is assigned as Deny, the call is denied.

v
Data No.
Data No.

Data:
3.

1

Title

(Dial Pad)

Class
01-14

USER

l

v
Sub-Mode CO Line

Guide

Function

2.

If the interdigit time duration of
party exceeds 10 seconds, while
station user is dialing on an outside
system is searching the assigned
system automatically drops the call.

the dialing
a restricted
line and the
tables, the

Class: 01 - 14

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
LK1

LK2

Allow (YS)

Deny (NO)

LK5

LK6

I

I

I

I

LK3

LK4

LK7

LK8
I

I

I
COlpBX line keys

Class 05-14

Deny (No)

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-l-66, &Digit
Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

x

Additional Programming
Refer to Section 6 -Code Restriction in this chapter.

c.

.1.~.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CLASS ALLOW/DENY

SELECTION

1
.

! This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction Classes (01-14) as Allow or Deny. This assignment is used !
.hen there is no match or when there is an overlap (duplicate numbers in tables with opposite Allow/Deny I
assignments) of numbers in the &Digit Matching Tables.
c .1.~.-.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-=-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.
i

Programming

5-81

System

B-DIGIT MATCHING TABLE TO NORMAL
DIAL ASSIGNMENT

1

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

TECH

System

0

LKl

I

l

MIC
ICM

COLine

1

I

l

ICM

v

Data No.

66

Guide

I
’ .-i,
/

USER

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-67, OCC Table
Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

0 MIC

Izl
-

A:A:G

1 DataNo.

4.

v

Sub-Mode

I

PC Progr&nming

OPERATION:
1.

1 CO Line

16161

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
n-

II

S 6:

Setting Data
-

NORMAL DIAL

I1

I

____________________~~~~~~~~

1

NOTES:

DISPLAY

TIME

3.

Title

Press the corresponding
change data option.

Fpe 1

LKl

The following selections are defined as:

CO/PBX line key to

LK2

Table 00

Table 01

Table 02

Table 03

LK5

LK6

LK7

LKB

Table 04

Table 05

Table 06

Table 07

COlpBX line keys

RECALL

‘Fl’
CO LED

I
I

key

:

Next page.

key

:

Previous

H

Data

r
i

Off
UNUSED

page.

lo

Oil

I

I

USED

I

I

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Section 6 -Code Restriction in this chapter.

a

1

.1.1.~.1.1~~.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION
- B-DIGIT MATCHING
TO NORMAL DIAL ASSIGNMENT

TABLE

i

i. This Memory Block assigns the &Digit Matching Table by class basis for normal dialing as used or unused. If, i
1 the &Digit Matching Table is assigned as unused, the system does not check during normal dialing even ”

; Memory Block l-l-61,8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment, is programmed.
.1.1.1.~.1.1.~.-.~.~.~.-.-.~.~.~~~.~.~~~.~.~.~,~.~~~.~~~.~

5-82

Programming

OCC TABLE ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:

CO Line

Data No.

1

1

67

PC Programming Guide
TECH A:A:I

1. Go off-line.
System

2. Enter: Mode

I

LKl

Sub-Mode

CO Line

Data No.

Fi

0 MIC
ICM

4.
,” g$
)

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to the next OCC Table.

5. After data for all OCC Tables has been
entered, press the TRF to advance to Memory
Block l-l-68, &Digit Matching Table to OCC
Table Assignment.

klL.l
(Dial Pad)

6.

OCC Table
(01 -

USER

l

v

Data No.

System

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Setting Data

16)

____________________~~~~~~~~

3. Use the dial pad to change data option.

q* :
Dial pad q- q
-B,

:

Dial
Operation
Data
I Number

I

1

Tomovecursor.
To enter data.

Operation

I

X

0 - 9, *, #

LNR/SPD key + 7

P

0. 1

LNR/SPD kev + 8

1

N

2-9

1 LNR/SPDkey+9

*

*

LNRISPD key + *

#

#

LNR/SPD kev + #

Data:

OCC Table:
Setting Data:

IHoLD key:

01-16
O-9, *, #, X, P, N
(maximum 8 digits)

Set Data Clear

Operation Data:
n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Section 6 -Code Restriction

in this chapter.

,.1.1.1.~.1.1.1.~.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~~.
GENERAL INFORMATION - OCC TABLE ASSIGNMENT
i

i

This Memory Block allows an OCC code (maximum of eight digits) to be assigned in this table. Up to 16 OCC i
_ j#$jj;\

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-03,2-, 3-, or 4-Digit
Station Number Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
I

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

c

.1.1.1.~.1.1.-.~.-.1.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

i
.

INFORMATION - AUTOMATIC CALLBACK
TIMER SELECTION

RELEASE

1

i.

I This Memory Block determines the time allowed for an automatic callback before the request is automatically !
canceled.
1 .1.1.~.1.1.1.-.1.-.1.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.
1
l

Programming

5-99

2-, 3-, or 4-DIGIT STATION NUMBER
SELECTION

Data No.

1

2

03
.-_:,

TECH

B:A:C

./

USER

Go off-line.

2. Enter: Mode

l ICM

1. The Station Numbering Plan can be 2, 3, or 4
digits; however, only one plan can be used at a
time.

0 MIC

Sub-Mode ICM

l ICM

v
Data

2.

No.
(Dial Pad)
Title

Data No.

NOTES:

0 MIC

System
v

3.

ICM

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

System

After a change is made in this Memory Block, all
station numbers must be reassigned in Memory
Block 4-10, Station Number Assignment.

Setting Data

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change 3-digit to 2-digit, press CO/PBX
line key 1.

I

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-04, Call Arrival
Key Block Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Pmgramming

Memory
Block No.

Memory Block Name

l-l-46

Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment

l-l-47

Access Code (a-Digit) Assignment

4-10

c

Station Number Assignment

Required

4

1

.~.1,1.1.~.1.1.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.

i.

GENERAL INFORMATION
- 2-, 3-, or 40DIGIT
STATION NUMBER SELECTION

I This Memory Block determines the number of digits for station numbers.
i (000-999), or 4-digit (0000-9999) assignment is available.
.1.~.1.1.1.1~~.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~~~~_~~~~~~.

5-100

i.

Either 2-digit (00-99),

S-digit I
j

Programming

i.l,
/’

CALL ARRIVAL KEY BLOCK
ASSIGNMENT

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

04

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH

B:L:A

hJSER 1

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter: Mode

System

I

NOTES:

0 MIC

LKl

ICM

l

1. The Call Arrival Key feature requires system
software version 2.50 or higher.

v

Sub-Mode ICM

I

LK2

0 MIC
l

ICM

2. A maximum of 96 ports to be shared by station
ports (ESI, SLI and LLT) and Call Arrival Keys
are allowed in the system. If 32 station ports are
being used, 64 remain for use as Call Arrival
Keys.

‘I

Data No.

Data No.

3.

3.

If 30 Call Arrival Keys are required Line Keys
l-4 must be turned on.

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change the data option.
l

To change CAR 01-08
CO/PBX line key 2.

to CAB 09-16, press

Page 1
LKl
CAROl-08
LK5
CAR33-40

LK2
I
1 CARO9-16

I

LK3

1 CAR 17-24

LK6
I
1 CAR41-48

LK4
I
1 CAR25-32

LK7

LKS

CAR49-56

CARS’-64

Page 2

I

4.

LKl

I

LK2

I

LK3

CAR 65-72

CAR 73-80

CAR 81-88

LK5

LK6

LK7

I

LK4

I

LK8

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advances to Memory Block l-2-08, Specified
Station Access Code Assignment.

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

I

.1.1.1.1.1.1*1.~.-~-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.

GENERAL INFORMATION - CALL ARRIVAL KEY BLOCK ASSIGNMENT
i. This Memory Block specifies the number of Call Arrival Keys that can be used in the system.

!

1 .~.~.1.1.~.1.~.1.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

i

Programming

I

5-101

SPECIFIED

STATION ACCESS
ASSIGNMENT

CODE

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

08

PC Progrannmn g Guide

OPERATION:

l

1. Go off-line.
Enter: Mode

2.

System

Sub-Mode

1 LJsl 1

0
l

MIC
ICM

NOTES:
P. A specified station can be called either by lifting
the handset (or by pressing the SPKR key)
when Memory Block 4-23, Prime Line/Hot Line
Assignment, is assigned to ring a specified
station or from an outside party via the Auto
Attendant Feature and dialing an Access Code.

0 MIC
ICM

ICM

l

0
In

Data No.

8

Specified Statio?ial pad)
Access Code No.
o?-23
Tel__Port

l

Up to 24 stations can be assigned a specific
ringing assignment.

2. The Specified Access Code is assigned in
Memory Blocks l-l-46 or l-l-47, Access Code
(l-Digit/Z-Digit) Assignment.
3. Enter data using the dial pad.
l

To assign a Specified Station Access Code
(00-23) to Tel Port Number 01, enter Access
Code from the dial pad.

q
Dial pad q- q
++m

:

Tomove cursor.

:

To enter data.

:

To clear all data.

Setting data

:

Tel Port No. 01-96.

Specified Station Access Code

:

00 - 23

I

HOLD

l

l

4.

,

+

key

Press the TRF
displayed.

key, Tel Port No. 01 is
H Additional Programming

After entering Specified Station No. Access
Code, press the TRF key to advance to the
next Station No.

I

__
I
Memory
Block No. I

After entering all data, press the TRF key to
write the selected data and advance to Memory
Block l-Z-09-18, Absence Message l-10
Assignment.

I

Memory Block Name

Access Code (2-D@)

1
Required

I

I

Assignment

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

r

.~.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~~.~.~.~.~.~.

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SPECIFIED
ASSIGNMENT

STATION ACCESS

i This Memory Block assigns specific stations to be called using abbreviated dialing.
: assigned.

5-102

CODE

1
i

Up to 24 stations can be i
;

Programming

“.I
_*

Februarv 1998

ABSENCE

MESSAGE

l-10

ASSIGNMENT

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

09-18

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH B:D:A-

J

USER

S:H

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter: Mode

System

l-=-l

: ::

v
Sub-Mode ICM

I

LK2

0 MIC
l ICM

v

NOTE:
. Ten messages are available, the first six are
assigned at default.

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Setting Data (13 digits max.)

Data No.

Data
No.
3. Enter data using the dial pad.

+J,~-+:
Dialpad

I

HOLD

q

-m

key

To move cursor.
:

To enter setting data.

To clear all data when
the cursor is at the
Setting Data position.

Default

09

DND

10

MEETING

11

BUSINESS TRIP

12

NOT IN

13

WITH GUEST

14

OUT OF OFFICE

15
I

4. Enter the characters that are to be displayed.

Message

18

1

Not Specified

Refer to Section 7, Character Code Tables.
5. After entering all data for Memory Block
1-2-9-18, Absence Message l-10 Assignment,
press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 1-2-19, Intercom Ring
Pattern Selection.
6. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

..~.~.1.1.~.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-..
GENERAL INFORMATION
-ABSENCE MESSAGE l-10 ASSIGNMENT
i

i

. while in DND, and displays the message in the LCD (if equipped) at the calling station.

.

i This Memory Block programs various messages that can be set at a station LCD. ICM calls to that station, i

..~.l,l.l.l.~.l.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.*

Programming

5-103

INTERCOM

RING PATTERN

SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

ICM

Data No.

1

2

19

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

System

TECH

B:D:L

USER

0 MIC
ICM

System

l

0 MIC
ICM

Sub-Mode ICM

l

v

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Data No.

,n

I

Seying D;ta 8

Title

ICM PTN
B
1.9 :
_______--___________~~~~~~~~
TIME
DISPLAY

3.

I

2
Pattern

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.

TG

~~17

Tone
On

LK2

OS

1s

2s

3s

4s

5s

6s

:
:
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

:
.
.
.

.
.:
.
.

i
.
.

:

:

!

!

I

*

To change Pattern B to Pattern A, press
CO/‘l?BX line key 3.

l

Page 1
LKl

LK2

Tone Off

Tone On

LK5

LK6

PatternC

LK3
PaemA
LK7

1 PattemD

1 PattemE

....rr~
....
... ....w/.;<.;
@_
.,.. <..<.:.*
,,.,,
.*. ....:...:.:>h.
~~:
rl*l
LK8
I

1 PattemF

D

LK6

.

.

.

.

:

.

:

.

.

LKl

I

LK2

I

Pattern G

Pattern H

LK5

LK6

LK3

I

LK7

CO/PBX line keys

LK4

I

.

.

:
.

.
_

.
.

.
.

.

i

1

i-l

E

Page 2

I

Line
Key

LK8

@@$#$ Default
i ..A..:.

Next page.

1
4.

5.

c
i
;

FNC

1 key

:

Previous page.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-Z-20, Intercom Ring
Tone Selection.

n

Additiona1
Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

,1.1.~.~.1.1.1.1.~.1.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- INTERCOM

RING PATTERN

This Memory Block selects a Ring Pattern when ICM calls are made.
.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.-.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

5-104

SELECTION

;
.
d

Programming

INTERCOM

System

RING TONE SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

LKl

l

NOTES:
0 MIC
l ICM

Sub-Mode ICM
v

I

1. The available tones are shown below.

Tone A =
Tone B =
ToneC =
ToneD =
Tone E =
Tone F =
Tone G =
ToneH =

MLI

Data No.

(Dial Pad)
Setting
Data

Title

n-

I

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

I
A

2. 0:
ICM TONE
____________________~~~~~~~~
TIME
DISPLAY

3.

1 DataNo.

0 M.Ic
ICM

El

System

w

Data No.

ICM

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

1

(480/606):
(480/606):
(1024/1285)
(1024)
(500)
(1024/1285):
(600/‘700):
(1024):

Modulation (16 Hz)
Modulation (8 Hz)

Modulation (16 Hz)
Modulation ( 16 Hz)
Envelone 2 sec.

CO/PBX line key to

To change Tone A to Tone B, press CO/PBX
line key 2.

LK5

LK6

LK?

LKS

Tone E

Tone F

Tone G

Tone H

I

I

I

I

COlpBX Line keys

4. -Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-22, Call Forward
No Answer Timer Selection.
5.

n

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

r

.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- INTERCOM

RING TONE SELECTION

i
This Memory Block selects a ring tone for ICM calls.
L .~.1.1.1.1.-.~.1.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~*~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.
n

Programming

1

i
i

5-105

Electra Professional 12O&evel II/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER
SELECTION

Installation Service Manual

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

22

PC Programming

OPERATION:

-.-.
’ i,
.;

Guide

TECH B:I:B

1. Go off-line.
2.

0 MIC
ICM

System

Enter: Mode

NOTES:

l

v

1. In series 100 - 450 LKI - LK6 represented time
values 10,20,30,60,120,
and 24Oseconds.

0 Mlc
l ICM

Sub-Mode ICM
v

2. In series 500 or higher, the time values for Call
Forward No Answer are as shown, but the ACD
hunt time is 10, 20, 30, 60, 120, and 240 seconds
represented by LKl - LK6.

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Data No.
II
_
2

FWD

2:

NOANS

8s

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change 10 sec. to 20 sec., press CO/PBX
line key 2.

I

I

3Osec

1

I

60 sec.

~

COiFBXline keys

4.

1

I

.

TIME

3.

Setting
Data

Title

I
Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-23, System Call
Park Recall Time Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
l-l-46

Memory Block Name

Required

Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment

Class of Service (Station) Feature
4-17

Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment

4-42

Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay
Selection

,~.~.~.~.1.-.1.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.

! GENERAL INFORMATION - CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER SELECTION!
I This Memory Block specifies the time before incoming ICM calls or incoming CO/PBX lines are forwarded to 1
’ another station number when the called party does not answer.

1 .1.1.1.~.~.1.~.1~1.1.~.~~-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~~.~.

5-106

i

Programming

>.,

-,-:

SYSTEM

CALL PARK RECALL
SELECTION

TIME

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

23

,

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
TECH

B:I:L

USER

S:M

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter: Mode

0 MIC
ICM

System

l

Sub-Mode ICM

I

LK2

0 h!lIc
ICM

l

v

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Setting
Data No.

I
2

I

II
1.0

PARK
RECL
3:
_______________-____-------TIME

3.

Data

Title

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
a

To change 1 min. to
line key 3.

1.5

min., press CO/PBX

LK5

LK6

LK7

LKS

3 min.

6 min.

8 min.

10 min.

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-24, Intercom
Feature Access Code Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

~.~.-.1.1.1.~.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~

i
i

GENERAL

INFORMATION
- SYSTEM CALL PARK RECALL
TIME SELECTION

. This Memory Block specifies the time before the system recalls the user station when using Call Park.
L.~.l.r.l.~.l.~.~.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~

Programming

i
i
.

5-107

INTERCOM

FEATURE ACCESS
ASSIGNMENT

CODE

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

24

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

..2

USER

TECH B:G:D

1. Go off-line.
0
IvLlc
a ICM

System

2. Enter: Mode

‘I
0 MIC
l ICM

Sub-Mode KM
v

I

Data No.

2

NOTES:
1. Features can be assigned to more than one Dial
Number.
2. To enter * or # under Dial Numbers Selection,
press LNWSPD.

4

(Dial Pad)
Title

Data No.

1

I

Dial No. Setting Data

InnI
= 904

2 4:
FEA AC
(0)
______-_____________~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY
TIME

3. Use the dial pad to enter the Setting Data.
Setting Data:

000-007

q-t
Dial Pad q_ q
+-m

4.

Setting Data

9

41
: Tomovecursor.
:

I

To enter data.

1

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

q

Voice/Tone Switching

1

002

Step Call

003

Tone Override

004

Automatic Callback

005

Callback Request

006

Voice Over Originate
(Series 400)

007

Quick Transfer to Voice
Mail (Series 500)

Press the TRF key to write the data and
advance to the next Dial No.

5. After entering all data, press the TRF key to
write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block l-2-25, Internal Paging Alert
Tone Selection.
6.

001

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.

Memory Block Name

l-2-01

Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection

l-8-08

Class of Service (Station) Feature
Selection 2

l-8-26

Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt

4-17

Required

Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment

,.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~~~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~.~.~.~.,

i
i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- INTERCOM
ASSIGNMENT

FEATURE

. This Memory Block assigns the Access Code for Voice/Tone change or Step Call.

5-108

ACCESS

CODE

i
i
.

Programming

.-.

Installation Service Manual

Februarv 1998

Electra Professional 12OLevel n/Level XXAdvanced

INTERNAL PAGING ALERT TONE
SELECTION

System

ICM

Data No.

1

2

25

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH

B:F:G

USER

1. Go off-line.
System

2. Enter: Mode

Sub-Mode ICM

0

MIC

l

ICM

v

Data No.

In
2

5

(Dial Pad)

Sl?ttiIlg

Data No.

Title

Data

____________________--------

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

COLPBX line key to

To change Tone YS to Tone NO, press
C O/PBX line key 2.

I

COPBX

line keys

4. ‘Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-2-26, Delayed
Ringing Timer Assignment (ICM).
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming
Refer to Guide to Feature Programming in this manual.

r.1.1.~.1.1.1.1.~.1.~.~~-.~.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.,

;

GENERAL INFORMATION - INTERNAL PAGING ALERT TONE SELECTION

;

! This Memory Block determines whether or not a call alert tone is provided when Internal Paging is used.

Programming

5-109

DELAYED RINGING TIMER ASSIGNMENT
@CM)

System

1

ICM

1

I

2

1 DataNo.
I

26

li
/I
__

PC Program ming Guide
OPERATION:

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

TRCHi l3:D:O

IUSERI

NOTES:
system

I

LKl

0 MIC
ICM

1. This feature requires_ system software version
3.00 or higher.

l

Sub-Mode ICM
Data No.
(Dial Pad)

Data No.

Settine Data

Title

I

II
2

6:

DRING(1)

=

____________-_______~~~~~~~~
TIME

3.

10s

DISPLAY

Enter the data using the dial pad.
l

To change 10 seconds to 5 seconds, dial 05
from the dial pad.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-01, Bounce Protect
Time Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

H

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No. I

I

Memory Block Name

I

Required

I

4-37

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
(Day Mode)

4-33

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
(Night Mode)

I

.1.1.1.~.~.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

f GENERAL INFORMATION - DELAYED RINGING TIMER ASSIGNMENT (ICM) ;
IThisMemory Block assigns the delayed ringing timer for incoming internal calls.

5-110

.

Programming

BOUNCE PROTECT

TIME SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

SLT

Data No.

3

01

TECH B:B:D:A

Guide

USER

NOTES:

System

Sub-Mode

SLT

1

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

System

\

1. Bounce Protect Time should be equal to
Hookflash Start Time in Memory Block l-3-05,
Hookflash Start Time Section.

0 MIC
l ICM

LK3
v

I

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Setting Data Page No.

Data No.

3.

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change the data option.
To change 300 ms. to 700 ms., press COiPBX
line key 8 while on Page 1.

l

Page 1

500 ms.

400 ms.
Page 2
LKl

LK2

600ms.

LK3

1

700 ms.

1100ms.

800ms.

I
1

900ms.

I
1

1000 ms.

I
1

LK5

I

LK6

I

LK7

I

1200ms.

1300 ms.

I
COiFBX line keys

4.

1

1400 ms.

LK4
LKS
1500 ms.

:@$$*.$E+

:%*I
...... .,...,
:...:..Default
k,lzI.l

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-02, SLT Hookflash
Signal Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
W

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
I

1-3-05

Required

Memory Block Name
[Hookflash Start Time Selection

I

I

..1.~.1.~.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~..
GENERAL INFORMATION
- BOUNCE PROTECT TIME SELECTION
i

i

. Mail system.

.

i This Memory Block specifies the time before a valid hookflash is detected from a single-line telephone or Voice i

Programming

5-111

SLT HOOKFLASH

SIGNAL

System

SELECTION

1

1

SLT
3

1 DataNo.

I

02

I

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH

B:B:D:H

USER

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter: Mode

NOTES:

System

Sub-Mode

1-q

0

SLT

1. If HOLD is specified, the CO/PBX line is put on
Exclusive Hold.

MIC

l ICM

2.

v

In

Data No.

0

2

3. If FLASH is specified, a hookflash is sent to the
PBXKTX line when the hookswitch is pressed.

(Dial Pad)
Data No.

Title

Setting Data

3. Press the corresponding
change data option,
l

4.

If HOLD is selected, the PBXKTX line can be
sent an HF signal via Access Code 6# (default).

CO/PBX line key to

To change HOLD to FLASH, press CO/PBX
line key 2.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-03, First Digit PBR
Release Timer Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
R

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.

I
1

l-1-02
4-24

I

I

IHookflash ‘Time Selection

I

I

1SLT Hookflash Assignment

I

I

I

Memory Block Name

Required

,.l.~.~.l.~.l.~.~.l.~.~.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~
GENERAL INFORMATION
- SLT HOOKFLASH
i
i This Memory Block specifies whether a line is held intgnally,
, the line when an SLT user performs a hookflash.
*.l.l.~.-.~.r.l.~r~.-.~.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~

5-112

SIGNAL SELECTION

i

or if behind a PBX, a hookflash signal is sent to i

.

Programming

FIRST DIGIT PBR RELEASE
SELECTION

TIMER

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

SLT

Data No.

1

3

03

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

System

TECH B:B:D:F

I

USER

0 MIC

LKl

l ICM

v

Sub-Mode

SLT

I

0 MIC

LK3

l ICM

v

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Title

Data No.

Setting Data
IOff-Hook1
Dial tone is sent (PBR connected).

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.

(Default = 10 sec.)

CO/PBX line key to

Dial the fast digit,

To change 10 sec. to 20 sec., press COIPBX
line key 2.

l

The second digit.

The third digit.
I

I

5Osec

1

60sec.

1

I

cl
3

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-04, Dial 1 (DP)
Plooktlash Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional

\

I

Memory
Block No. I
4-95

released.

Programming

I

l-S-10

After timer elapse, PBR is

I

Required

Memory Block Name

IPBR Interdigit

Release Timer Selection

1DTMFYDP SLT Type Selection

I

1

I

1

..1.1.~.1.1.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i

_ FIRST DIGIT PBR RELEASE TIMER SELECTION

i This Memory Block specifies the time that a receiver circuit is connected when a DTMF type single-line

. telephone user goes off-hook and dials the first digit.

..l.l.l.l.~.l.l.l.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~

Programming

i
.

5-113

DIAL 1 (DP) HOOKFLASH

SELECTION

System

SLT

Data No.

1

3

04

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
TECH

B:B:D:B

USER

1. Go off-line.
System

2. Enter: Mode

I

LKl

0 MN.2
ICM

l

w

Sub-Mode

SLT

I

LK3

0 MIC
l ICM

v

Data No.

10141
(Dial Pad)

Title

Data No.

3.

Setting Data

Press the corresponding CO/pBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change YES to NO, press CO/PBX line
key 2.

I

COPBX lime keys
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-05, Hookflash
Start Time Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.

Memory Block Name

4-90

SLT Data Line Security Assignment

4-95

DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection

Required

d

,.1.1.1.~.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..
GENERAL INFORMATION
- DIAL 1 (DP) HOOKFLASH
i

i This Memory Block specifies whether or not dialing
. single-line telephone provides a hookflash signal.

SELECTION

.

..l.l~l.l.~.l.l.l.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-

5-114

i

1 during an intercom call or a CO/PBX call on a .DP i

Programming

.;
_

HOOKFLASH

START TIME SELECTION

System

SLT

Data No.

1

3

05

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH B:B:D:E

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

I

Sub-Mode SLT

0 MIC
a ICM

LKl

1. Performing a hookflash during a CO/PBX call
places the line on hold or sends a hookflash to the
CO/PBX.

0 MIC

LK3

l ICM

v

Data No.

I

0

5

2.

When a hookflash is 0.1 second or less, or 0.85
seconds or more, it is not considered a flash.

3.

Bounce Protect Time (l-3-01) and HF Start Time
should be equal.

(Dial Pad)
Title

Data No.

I

I
0

Setting Data

I ,

FLSH ST

5:

300

_____________^______~~~~~~~~

I

1

Example:

DISPLAY

TIME

3.

Page No.

r---III

USER

NOTES:

v

El

Guide

BP = 300 ms.
HFS = 300 ms.

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
To change 300 ms. to 400 ms., press CO/PBX
line key 7 while in Page 1.

l

LKl

LK2

LK3

LK4

500 ms.

550 ms.

600ms.

650 ms.

LK5

LK6

LK7

LK8

700ms.

750 ms.

800ms.

850 ms.

I

I
I
I

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-06, Hookflash End
Time Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Memory
Block No. I

Memory Block Name

l-3-01

Bounce Protect Time Selection

l-3-06

Hookflash

1Required 1
d

End Time Selkction

~.1.~.~.1.1.~.1.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.-..
GENERAL INFORMATION
- HOOKFLASH START TIME SELECTION
i

i
i This Memory Block specifies a minimum hookflash duration from a single-line telephone to receive second dial i
. tone.

..l.~.l.~.~.~.l.~.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.*

Programming

.

5-115

HOOKFLASH

END TIME SELECTION

Data No.

1

3

06

TECH B:B:D:D

1. Go off-line.
System

I

SLT

I

l

1.

Q MIC

LK3

l

USER

NOTES:

0 MIC
ICM

LKl
v

Sub-Mode

SLT

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

2. Enter: Mode

System

ICM

I

Refer to the table below for corresponding
display.
I
I

v

Data No.

0

6

In

(Dial Pad)
Page No.
Data No.

I

I

Setting Data

Title

I

nt

FLSHEND = 07
0 6:
____________________~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY
TIME

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

I
I

Hookflash Start Time + 0 ms.
CO/PBX line key to

To change 700 ms. to 400 ms., press CO/PBX
line key 5 while Page 1 is selected.

l

Page 1
LKl

LK2

I

HST+O

I

LK3

I

LK4

Hookflash Start Time + 100 ms.

I

CO/PBX line keys

Hookflash Start Time + 200 ms.
Hookflash Start Time + 300 ms.

03

Hookflash Start Time + 400 ms.

04

Hookflash Start Time + 500 ms.

05

Hookflash Start Time + 600 ms.

06

Hookflash Start Time + 700 ms.

07

Hookflash Start Time + 800 ms.

08

Hookflash Start Time + 900 ms.

I

09

Hookflash Start Time + 1000 ms.

I

10

Page 2
LKl

I

LK2

I

I

I

I

LK3

I

LK4

I

‘1

I

HST = Hookflash Start Time
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-07, Voice Mail
Digit Add Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Hookflash Start Time + 1100 ms.

11

Hookflash Start Time + 1200 ms.

12

Hookflash Start Time + 1300 ms.

I

13

Hookflash Start Time + 1400 ms.

I

14

Hookflash Start Time + 1500 ms.

I

15

n

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
l-3-05

r

01

I

~HST+l00ms.~HST+2OOms.~HST+3OOms.

HST = Hookflash Start Time
1
I

I

Data
Display

Setting Data

1

Memory Block Name

Required

HookflashStartTime Selection

4

.~.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- HOOKFLASH

END TIME SELECTION

r This Memory Block specifies a maximum duration from a single-line telephone to receive a second dial tone.

5-116

1
i

:

Programming

1

VOICE MAIL DIGIT ADD .ASSIGNMENT

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

Sub-Mode SLT

System

SLT

Data No.

1

3

07

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Februarv 1998

Electra Professional 12O/Level II /Level II Advanced

Installation Service Manual

TECH

I

LKl

I

LK3

A:G:A

+

Guide

USER

MIC

0

l ICM

0 MIC
l ICM

v

0
ul

Data No.,

7

(Dial Pad)
Data No.

3.

Setting Data

Title

Enter data using the dial pad.
Dial pad

Wlzl

To enter data.

1*1,H

>

To enter *, #, press the LNR/SPD
key first, then press * or #.
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-3-08, Voice
Mail DTMF Delay Timer Selection.

5. *Pressthe SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additicnal Programming

I Memory I
&lock No.
4-35

Memory Block Name

I

Required

I

I

1

Voice MaiUSLT Selection

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block assigns
. forwarded.

up

I

d

- VOICE MAIL DIGIT ADD ASSIGNMENT

to four digits in front of a station number sent to the Voice Mail when a call is i
.

..~.l.l.~.l.~.l.~.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..

Programming

5-117

VOICE MAIL DTMF DELAY TIMER
SELECTION

System

SLT

Data No.

1

3

08

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

TECH

A:G:C

USER

Go off-line.

1.

2. Enter: Mode

0 ME
ICM

System

l

v
Sub-Mode

0 MIC
ICM

SLT

l

v
0 8
ccl
(Dial Pad)

Data No.

Data No.

Title

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

SettingData

CO/PBX line key to

To change 1 sec. to 2 sec., press CO/PBX line
key 3.

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-09, Voice Mail
Disconnect Time Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

AdditionalProgramming

Memory
Block No. I

I

4-35

Memory Block Name

1ReqGecl]

1Voice MaiYSLTSelection

.~.1,1.~~1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.~.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

;

GENERAL INFORMATION - VOICE MAIL DTMF DELAY TIMER SELECTION

; This Memory Block specifies the delay time before DTMF tones are sent to the VMI ports.
.1.1.1.~.-.1.1.-.-.-.~.~.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

5-118

;

::

.
;

Programming

”

VOICE MAIL DISCONNECT
SELECTION

TIME

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

System

Sub-Mode SLT

SLT

Data No.

1

3

09

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

System

TECH

I
I

A:G:B

Guide

USER

0 MIC

LKl

l

LK3

ICM

1 gi

v

Data No.
Data No.

3.

Setting Data

Press the corresponding CO/J?BX line key to
change data option.
l

To change 1.5 sec. to 2.0 sec., press COIPBX
line key 4.

1

3.0sec.
I

I

I

I

I

5.0 sec.

m
::g$$>$#J

CO/PBX line keys

.:.:.:.:<$$A
.... Default
::::::::;.:.:.:.$..

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-3-10, Voice Mail
DTMF Duratiotinterdigit Time Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

H

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
4-35

I

i

Memory Block Name

I
1Voice MaiVSLT Selection

I

Required

I_

4

.1.1.1.1.1.1.~.~.1.1.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- VOICE MAIL DISCONNECT

TIME SELECTION

; This Memory Block specifies the timing of a disconnect signal sent to the connected equipment.

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.~.~.-.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.

Programming

:

i

5-119

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

VOICE MAIL DTMF DURATION/INTERDIGIT
TIME SELECTION

System
1

SLT

Data No.

3

10
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter: Mode

TECH

USER

1-q ,”Ez

System

v

Sub-Mode

A:G:D

. .

Guide

0 MIC

SLT

l ICM

w

III
1

Data No.

0

(Dial Pad)

Data No.

Setting Data

Title

n-

I
100/70

VMMF=
10:
____________________~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY

TIME

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

I

I

1

I

CO/PBX line keys

4.

CO/PBX line key to

$@&$
u

Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-4-00, Tandem
Transfer Automatic Disconnect Timer Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional Programming

Memory
Block No.
4-35

Memory Block Name
Voice MaiWLT Selection

Required
v

,.1.~.1.1.1.1.-.1.~.~.~.-.-.-.-.~.~.~.~.~.~*~.~.~.~.~.~.~.,

i
i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

_ VOICE MAIL DTMF DURATION~INTERDIGIT
TIME SELECTION

. This Memory Block specifies the DTMF duration and interdigit time for voice mail.

5-120

i
i
.

Programming

_:..

Transfer/A.A.

TANDEM TRANSFER AUTOMATIC
DISCONNECT TIMER SELECTION

PC Programmhg Guide

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
2.

Data No.

NOTES:

Enter: Mode

I

System

0 MIC

LKl

l

Sub-Mode l’ransfer1A.A. I]

ICM

,” g$

1. This Memory Block is used for DISA,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer, and Tie Line Tandem
features.

V
0
ul

Data No.

0

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
I

Title
I

1

I

settingData

AUTO DIS
____________________~~~~~~~~
TIME
DISPLAY
0

3.

0:

Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l

To change lhr. to 3 hr., press CO/PBX line
key 4.

I

I

I

I

I

I

.. .....?x Default
:::::::&pp.
m
z.X,’’ ,’

Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
sadvance to Memory
Block l-5-13,
Printer
Connected (Alarm) Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additianal

Programming

Memory
Block No.
l-5-13
Printer

Memory

Block Name

Connected (Alarm) Selection

Required
d

,.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SMDR PRINT FORMAT

i

i This Memory Block specifies whether or not ALL digits are to be printed. If ALL is specified, all digits are i
.
. printed. If MASK is specified, the last four digits are masked and XXXX is printed.
,.l.l.-.-.-.l.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

Programming

5-137

PRINTER

CONNECTED
SELECTION

System
1

(ALARM)

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

System

El

SMDWLCR

II

,” g!

III 1

3

(Dial Pad)
Title
Data No.
I
-l--l
I
13:
PRINTER
---------------------------DISPLAY
TIME

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
o

Data No.
13
Guide

USER

NOTES:

‘I
Data No.

A:B:A

0 MIC
l ICM

LKl
‘I

Sub-Mode

SMDRLCR
5

Setting Data

1.

Program for YFS when a printer

is connected.

2.

SMDR cannot be used if this Memory
programmed for NO or NON.

3.

Program this Memory Block only when the MIFF(S)-10 KTU or MIF-F(L)-10
KTU unit is
installed.

Block is

NO

CO/PBX

line key to

To change NO to YES, press COIPBX
key 3.

line

I
CO/-PBX he keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-5-14, Printer Line
Feed Control Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
SMDR Print Format
l-5-02
1-5-14
1Printer Line Feed Control Selection

Required

I

I

e.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PRINTER CONNECTED

(ALARM)

i This Memory Block should be programmed for YES when a printer is connected.
. from the system, an alarm sounds at stations connected to Ports 01 and 02.
..-.I.l.-.l.l.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

5-138

SELECTION

If the printer

is disconnected

Programming

i
i
.

x,

PRINTER

LINE FEED
SELECTION

System

CONTROL

TECH

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

I LKl

System
SMDWLCR

II

NOTES:

f Ez

1. Line Feed Control Assignment is valid only when
an MIF-F(S)-10
KTU or MIF-F(L)-10
KTU and
printer are installed and being used for SMDR.

m
1

USER

0 MIC
ICM

v

Data No.

A:B:B

l

v

Sub-Mode

Data No.
14

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:
1.

SMDRlLCR
5

1

4

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
I
I

Title

Setting Data

LINX FEED
1. 4:
---------------__----------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

YS

l

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

Example:
Settings
to specify the
communication
data output to the printer.

I-1

To change
key 2.

CO/PBX

line

key to

YES to NO, press COIPBX

line

07/03/92

I

I

I

I

09:OO

of

in effect.

08-05-12

00:X:32
102885167537000
12345678
l

I

Line feed control

format

OG 123
LCR

FWD234

09:OO 08-05-12 OG 123

00:15-

No Line feed control.

07/03/92

(No Limit)
I

. . . .c

CO/PBX line keys

.,,y

:.:

&$$&
Default
...g&.&.::::
B

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Digit Selection.

Block l-5-24, DISA ID Code

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
l-5-02
l-5-13

Programming
Memory

Block Name

SMDR Print Format
Printer Connected (Alarm)

Selection

Required

4

c ,-.-.1.1.-.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,
GENERAL
INFORMATION
- PRINTER
LINE FEED
i
; This Memory Block specifiesthe format of the data sent to the printer.
.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

CONTROL

SELECTION

i
;

5-139

DISA

ID CODE DIGIT

System
1

SELECTION

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECHlB:E:A

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

System

Mode

I

Sub-Mode

SMDlULCR

,” Eg

1. If either 2 or 4-digit is specified, Memory Block
l-9-OO,(DISA
ID Code Assignment,
must be
changed for DISA ID codes to work.

kL5.l
Setting

Title

No.

USER 1

NOTES:

II

(Dial

Guide

ICM

l

v
Data No.

Data No.
24

0 MIC

LKl
‘I

Data

SMDR/LCR
5

Pad)
Data

----------------------------

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

To change 3-digit
line key 3.

I

CO/PBX

4.

line

keys

CO/PBX
to 4-digit,

line

key to

press COPBX

$$$@j
Default
t #Z:::.:.:.:.:.x.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-5-25, SMDR Valid
Call Timer Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

c .-.-.1.1.-.1~1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL
INFORMATION

- DISA

i This Memory Block selects the number of digits for DISA ID
1.-.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~
n

5-140

ID CODE DIGIT

1

SELECTION

i
i

codes.

Programming

I:

Installation

Service Manual

Electra

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

SMDR VALID CALL TIMER ASSIGNMENT

System
1

OPERATION:

Enter:

TECH

System

Mode

SMDR/LCR
5

PC Programming

1. Go off-line.
2.

Februarv

II Advanced

I

A:B:E

1998

Data No.
25
Guide

USER

0 ME
ICM

LKl

l

v

Sub-Mode

SMDRLCR

II

1 gg
v

Data No.

kkl
(Dial Pad)

Title

Data No.

Setting Data

----------------------------

3.

Enter data using the dial pad.
l

Minimum

time assignment

is 000 sec.

l

Time assignment
can be set from
sec. -990 sec. in increments of 10.

000

Example:
To change 040 sec. to 090 sec.,
enter 09 from the dial pad.
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block
l-5-26,
SMDR
Incoming/Outgoing
Print Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional
Memory

Block No.
l-l-05
1-5-13

1

Programming
Memory

Block Name

Start Timer Selection
Printer Connected (Alarm)

Selection

Required
d
4

.1.-.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Memory Block assigns the minimum
1 .-.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
l

Programming

- SMDR VALID

:

CALL TIMER ASSIGNMENT

time before the SMDR outputs a record of an outgoing

CO/PBX call.

.
1

5-141

System
1

SMDR INCOMING/OUTGOING
PRINT SELECTION

SMDRILCR
5

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
26
Guide

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

System

I

Sub-Mode

SMDlULCR

II

LKl

0 Mlc
l

ICM

,” gi
v

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Title
Data No.
I
I
II
2 6:
PRINT
MOD
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

Setting Data
=

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

OUT

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change OUT to INC, press CO/PBX
key 3.

line

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-6-01, Attendant
Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
1-5-13

Programming
Memory
Printer

Block Name

Connected (Alarm)

Selection

Required
4

.I.l.-LI.l.-.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

GENERAL

f

i.

1

INFORMATION
- SMDR INCOMING/OUTGOING
PRINT SELECTION

i.

I This Memory Block specifies the type of call records to be output from the SMDR: OUT = print outgoing
’ records only, INC = print incoming call records only, ALL = print incoming and outgoing call records.
1 .1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-142

call 1

Programming

i

1x1>-

”

.

1

_I

1 il.__

L-

..-_a-...-

. .

q-r,,,

____,

I,

rm

----.

. .

1

..

System
1

ATTENDANT ADD-ON CONSOLE TO
TELEPHONE PORT ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

,.3-L-_----

DSS
6

PC Programming
TECH

Mode

System

I LK1
v

Sub-Mode

DSS

I LK6

0 MIC
. ICM

In0

B:B:E:B

_I ,.C.Y

Data No.
01
Guide

USER

NOTES:
1. The telephone to which an Attendant
Add-On
Console is connected must be specified by port
number.

Q MIC
a ICM

v

Data No.

1

1

2. A maximum of four Attendant
can be connected to a system.

(Dial Pad)

3.

Add-On

Consoles

A maximum of four Attendant
Add-On
can be connected to one telephone.

Consoles

----------------------------

3.

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:

- q ,q e
pad q - q

Dial

4.

Enter Tel port No. 01 on DSS 1.
:

To move cursor.

:

To enter data.

Press the TRF key to write the data.
l

DSS 2 is displayed.

5.

Change data using the dial pad.

6.

After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block l-6-03, DSS Call Voice/Tone
Signal Selection.

7.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additicmil

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment

Required
d

C.-.-.‘.-.-.‘.‘.‘.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.--.

i GENERAL
..

INFORMATION

! This Memory Block assigns an Attendant

Programming

-ATTENDANT ADD-ON CONSOLE TO TELEPHONE
PORT ASSIGNMENT
Add-On Console to a telephone

i
.
I

port number.

5-143

DSS CALL

VOICE/TONE
SELECTION

System

SIGNAL

PC Progr

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

DSS

TECH

m

(Dial
Data

No.

Settiie

Data

Voice/Tone Signaling
can also be switched
dialing 1 from a station.

2.

If Tone
Block,
unless
dialing

Pad)

by

Signaling is programmed
in this Memory
the called party cannot answer handsfree
the DSS station switches it to Voice by
1.

1

DISPLAY

To change VOICE
line key 1.

LK5

I
1I

1
I
CO/PBX

CO/PBX

LK3

LK4

LK7

LKS

I
line

line

key

to

to TONE, press COPBX

~~~~
::::::.s:.:<..~
.A....
. ....,. . >....A..
~~~~~~~
:.:.:.x.:.:.siAd..A. .,...
LK6
I

LKl
TO*

I

I

keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block l-6-05, Attendant
Add-On Console Key Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional
Refer

1’

USER

CALL

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

--,\
:j

Guide

Title

VOICE

---------------------------TIME

3.

3

I

I1
Q 3:

amming

1.
0 MIC
l ICM

LK6

0

03

NOTES:

v

Data No.

Data No.

6

B:B:E:C

0 MIC
. ICM

El LK1
I

DSS

1

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

..-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- DSS CALL

VOICE/TONE

i This Memory Block specifies which is to be used first, Voice or Tone signaling,
. an Attendant Add-On Console.
..l.l.-.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-144

SIGNAL

SELECTION

when calling

an extension

i
from i
.

Programming

-‘::

Installation

Service Manual

ATTENDANT

Electra Professional

12O/Level II /Level II Advanced

ADD-ON CONSOLE KEY
SELECTION

February

System

DSS

1

6

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECH

B:B:E:A

1998

Data No.
05

I

Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

DSS

0 MIC
l ICM

I LKl

0 MIC
l ICM

v
0

Data No..
DSSNo.
DataNo.
l-4
,nllllnii,
05:
1 I
---------------------------TIME

5

III

(Dial Pad)

- ..
“gr
01-60

sg;:.q

Ql=TELOl

P$f
I

1
Page 1
LKl
Vacant

DISPLAY

+m ‘;q Dial pad q - q

:

To move cursor.

:

To enter data.

1HOLD1 key

: ~~~~&hg

LK2
LK3
LK4
I
I
TELNo.
1 Internal
1 Internal
1
01-96
1Paging Zone A 1Paging Zone B
LK5
LK6
LK7
LKS
I
I
I
Internal
All Internal
External Zone External Zone
Paging Zone C Zone Paging
A
B
SPKR = Speaker ICM TEL = Intercom Telephone

TEL No. 01-96.
TIRECALL
1 FNC

key

:

Next page.

1 key

:

Previous page.

3. Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line key and
dial pad keys to change data option.

Page 2
LKl
External Zone
C
LK5
Transfer

LK2
All External
Zone Paging
LK6
Attendant
Station
outgoing
Lockout

Example: To change TEL 01 assigned to key 1 on
DSS 1 to External Speaker A:
l

Press COIPBX line key 6.

l

New data is displayed.

l

Press the TRF key.

l

No. 02-60 is displayed successively,
entering data for key 60 on DSS 4.

LK3
Message
Waiting
LK7
%a11 Arrival
Key

*%eri& 250 or higher.

COlpBX line keys

4.

5.
n

after

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block l-7-0,
External
Speaker Connection Selection.
Press the SPKRkey
Additional

Memory
Block No.
l-6-01
7-2

Programming

Page 3
LKl
*Live
Recording
Feature
LK5
I

LK4
Night Mode
Change
LK8

LK2
*Mail Box
Number

LK4

LK3

I

I
I

LK6

I

LK7

I

I

LK8

I

I

I

*Series 400 or higher.

to go back on-line.

Programming
Memory

Block Name

Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone
Port Assignment
Telephone Type Assignment

Required
d
v

Continued

on next page.

5-145

ATTENDANT

Functions
Attendant

ADD-ON CONSOLE
SELECTION
(continued)

can be assigned to
Add-On Consoles l-4.

keys

System
1

KEY

-,-.~_
01-60

on

Key

DSS No.

I

No.

Setting

01

I

52

Internal

53

All

c

Data

TEL

No. 01

Paging

Zone

C UNT

Zone

Paging

(INT

I.ntemal

54

ALL)

Vacant

55

Message

56

External

Waiting

Paging

(MSG)

Zone

A (EXT

A)

or

J
3.
4.

DSS Kev Number
5.

12345678

60

I

Transfer

(TRF)

Telephone number setting data for telephone sets is
determined by number of installed ESI-F(8)-21 KTUs.
Message Waiting and Attendant Station Outgoing
Lockout cannot be assigned on the same console.
DSS/CO lines must be programmed on DSS keys l-48
only.

6.
01-&S

Key

09+16

01-48:

17-24
2542

Number
Two-color
49-60:

LED (green
red LED only

and

red)

7.

3340
4148
4944
55-&o

NOTES:

2.

Data No.
05

Default

Functions to be urogrammed
1. Station No. 01-96
2. Internal Paging Zone A
3. Internal Paging Zone B
4. Internal Paging Zone C
5. Internal Paging Zone ALL
6. External Paging Zone A
7. External Paging Zone B
8. External Paging Zone C
9. External Zone Paging ALL
10. Message Waiting
11. Night Mode Switching
12. Trunk (01-64) [Series 200 or higher1
13. Transfer
14. Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
15. Call Arrival
Key (01-88)
[Series 250
higher]
16. Feature Access Key with Live Recording
17. Digital Voice Mail Mailbox number

1.

DSS
6

When TEL is assigned to a key with only a red LED, the 1
message function camot be confirmed.
When a function (e.g., Message or Paging) that does not
require a green LED is assigned to a two-color LED key, 8.
the green LED does not function.

Call Arrival Keys assigned on the console are used to
make DSS calls and for BLF indications. Calls cannot
be received at these keys. Assignment of Call Arrival
Keys requires system software version 2.50 or higher.
Feature Access Key with Live Recording has seven
features:
Feature No.
Feature
00
Record Start
Record Pause/Restart
ii;
Record Erase
03
Record Finish
04
Record Erase/Restart
05
Pager
06
Record Confirmation
Each function can be assigned by dialing the Feature
No. using the dial pad after pressing LKl on page3.
Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number can be entered
using two, three or four digits of the Mailbox number
on the dial pad.

.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

; GENERAL

INFORMATION

-ATTENDANT

iThis Memory Block assigns functions to the Attendant
.-.1.1.-.1.-~1.1.1.1,-,-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.

5-146

ADD-ON CONSOLE KEY SELECTION
Add-On Console keys.

:

i

Programming

t.,

EXTERNAL

SPEAKER CONNECTION
SELECTION

System

ESP

Data No.

1

7

02

b
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

ESP

I

USER

ICM

NOTES:

o MIC
ICM

LK7

En0

Data No.

l

2

(Dial

1. A maximum of three external
be connected to the system.

speaker zones can

SPEAKER CONNECTION

SELECTION

I

Pad)

Title

No.
-

r

ESP CONN

Q 2:
---------------------------TIME

3.

B:F:B

0 MIC

1 LK 1 1 l
v
v

Data
-

4

Guide

PC Programming

DISPLAY

Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding
ESP Zone.

to each

The LED indication changes to indicate the
data each time the CO/PBX line key is
pressed.

l

LK5

LK6

I

I

LK7

LK8

I

I

CO/PBX

4.

line

keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block l-7-03, External
Paging Alert Tone Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

.1.1~1.-.1.1.1.1.lel.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

! GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block specifies whether
.I.l.l.l.l.l.L.l.l~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.--

Programming

-EXTERNAL
or not external

speakers are connected to the system.

1
.

i

5-147

EXTERNAL

PAGING ALERT
SELECTION

System
1

TONE

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

ESP
7

Mode

System

ILKl(

Sub-Mode

ESP

I

B:F:A

7
Data No.
03
Guide

USER

,” Ei
Q MIC

Lx7

l

ICM

v

Data No.

Data

Title

No.

I

ILkI

I

(Dial

Pad)

Setting

Data

In

!! 3:

ESP TONE

YS

---------------------------TIME

3.

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change the data option.
l

CO/PBX

line key to to

To change YES to NO, press CO/PBX
key 2.

line

I

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block l-7-06, External
Paging Timeout Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

I

Memory
Block No. I

[

l-7-02

IExt

Memory
emal

Speaker

Block Name
Connection

Selection

I

Required

I

4

I
I

.r-.-.-.-.l.-.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block specifies whether
speakers).
. speakers/individual
..l.l.-.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-148

- EXTERNAL

PAGING

or not a Paging

Alert

ALERT

TONE

Tone is sent on External

SELECTION
Zone Paging

i
(all i
.

Programming

._
;

-1

Installation

Service Manual

EXTERNAL

Electra Professional

PAGING
SELECTION

12OLevel

II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced
System
1

TIMEOUT

ESP
7

PC Programming

OPERATION:

1998

Data No.
06
Guide

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

System

I LK1
v

Sub-Mode

ESP

I

LK7

ul

0

0 ME
l

ICM

0 ME
ICM

l

‘I

Data No.

Data

Title

No.

I

1

Setting

Data

ESP TIMER

5.0

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change the data option.
l

Pad)

I4

TIME

3.

(Dial

-

0 6:
----------------------------

6

COLPBX line key to to

To change 5.0 minutes
CO/PBX line key 5.

to 3.0 minutes,

press

I

COlpBX

4.

‘,

: #.
m

line keys

{ Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-7-07, External Ring
Relay Cycle Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

H

Additional

Programming

Memory
IBlock
No. I

Memory

l-2-00

Internal

Paging

l-7-02

External

Speaker

Block Name

Timeout
Connection

IRequired

I

Selection
Selection

d

~.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- EXTERNAL

i This Memory Block specifies the time allowed
. circuit.
..-.l.-.l.l*l.l.-.-.-.-.---.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

Programming

for External

PAGING

TIMEOUT

Page before timeout

SELECTION

i

and release of the paging i
.

5-149

Februarv

Electra

1998

EXTERNAL

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

RING RELAY CYCLE
SELECTION

Installation

System

ESP

Data No.

1

7

07

PC Programming Guide

OPERATION:

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Service Manual

Mode

System

0 MIC
. ICY

I LKl

NOTES:

v

Sub-Mode

ESP

I

1. An External
Tone Relay or the Night Chime
Relay must be assigned in Memory Block 2-08,
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment,
before the
tone is generated from JKl .

0 ME
l ICM

LK?
v
0

Data No.

7

In
Ext

Ring

(DialPad)

Relay
l-4
Data

n-

No.

Title

Setting

Q 7:
EXT
_----------------------------

RING

TIME

=

1

I

CYC

DISPLAY

s = seconds

3. Press the corresponding
change the data option.

CO/PBX

continuousI

line key to to
Cycle

To change Pattern
CO/PBX line key 2.

l

Data

I

r-4

3 to Pattern

I

I

OS

IS

2s

3s

4s

5s

6s

2, press

I

I

I

CO/FBX

4.

line

Default

keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to the next External Ring Cycle.

5. After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory
Block
l-3-01,
SLT or Automated
Attendant/ DISA to PBR Selection.
6.

H

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional

Programming

External

Speaker

Connection

Selection

c .1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

GENERAL

: This Memory

INFORMATION

- EXTERNAL

RING RELAY CYCLE SELECTION

Block assigns relay circuits one of five distinctive

ringing

.

control/intervals.

L .-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

5-150

:

Programming

SLT OR AUTOMATED ATTENDANT/DISA
PBR SELECTION

System
1

TO

PBR/Misc.
8

PC Programming
-

OPERATION:

--_~

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

TECH

1. Specify if PBR 1 (Channel 1 and 2 in the CPU
KTU) and 2 (Channel 3 and 4 in the CPU KTU)
are to be used for single-line telephones.

PBWMisc.

m
0

(Dial

3.

No.

Pad)

CO/PBX

line

key to

The LED indication changes to indicate the
data each time the CO/PBX line key is
pressed.

l

LKl

LK2

PBR

1

PBR

LK5

LK3

LK4

LK7

LK8

2

LK6

I

4.

2. If both line key 1 and line key 2 are assigned to
the Automated
Attendant/DISA
feature,
the
PBR-F(4)-11
KTU must be installed
in the
system if single-line telephones are used.

1

Title

Press the corresponding
change the data option.

USER

NOTES:

: ii?:

v

Data

Guide
1

F-1
v

Data No.

B:B:D:I

Data No.
01

I

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-B-02, PBR Receive
Automated
Level
Assignment
for
AttendantiDISA.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

c.1.-.1.1.-.1,-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
- SLT OR AUTOMATED ATTENDANT/DISA
i.

1
I

PBR SELECTION

I This Memory Block specifies whether the PBR circuits
’ telephones or the Automated AttendantJDISA.
1 .1.-.-.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

TO

in the CPU KTU

are to be used for single-line

i
j

5-151

PBR RECEIVE
LEVEL ASSIGNMENT
AUTOMATED
ATTENDANT/DISA

System
1

FOR

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

PBR/Misc.

LK~

I

Data No.

I

0

(Dial

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to the next PBR.

z

5.

After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block l-8-04, Time Display (12h24h)
Selection.

6.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Ez

2
Pad)

-

F-m-=%
PBR

1

=

NOTES:
05

DISPLAY

1.

The DTMF signal level from the calling party
when the Automated
Attendant
answers is
reduced for Public Switching Telephone Network
(PSTN) .
This Memory
Block specifies the
minimum detectable receiving level.

2.

Setting Data 15 is the most sensitive

PBR 1: 1st and 2nd channel in the CPU KTU
PBR 2: 3rd and 4th channel in the CPU KTU

Use the dial pad to change data option.
Setting Data
Receiving Level
- 32.4 dBm
00
01
-33.0 dBm
02
- 33.8 dBm
- 34.6 dBm
03
04
dBm
A...,....A
5..
‘:~.:.~.“:.:“:::::::::::~:~::~::::~~:~~;::~.:.:.:::,:.:
‘..“....,~...~.~.,.,.,.,.,.~,,
, -35.3 ...A.....
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
..‘.ss.:....~......
..A......A....A.... .... .........a... .............A...
....t.....5.....A.
:..nA +-06
-37.0 dBm
07
-38.0 dBm
08
-39.1 dBm
09
- 40.2 dBm
10
-41.5 dBm
11
-42.5 dBm
12
- 43.8 dBm
13
-45.1 dBm
14
-46.2 dBm
15
-47.5 dBm

n

Additional
Refer

‘;

.I :,;

Title

No.

0 2:
---------------------------TIME

3.

Guide

USER

settiig

PBR No.

Data:

A:I:B

I

Data No.
02

0 MIC
l ICM

v

Data
I

I

PBR/Misc.
R

setting.

Default (PBR 1 and 2)

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

C.l.-.-.l.l.l.-‘-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PBR RECEIVE

LEVEL

i
AUTOMATED
ATTENDANT/DISA
i. This Memory Block specifies the receiving level from a PBR at the Automated
b.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J
5-152

ASSIGNMENT

FOR

i

i. “Y
_

Attendant/DISA.

Programming

TIME

DISPLAY

(lW24h)

System
1

SELECTION

OPERATION:

PBRiMisc.
8

PC Programming

Data No.
04
Guide

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

0 ME
l ICM

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

PBR/Misc.

LKS

0

,” gz

v

Data No.

t!!!kl
(Dial

Data

No.

i

Title
1

P7

0 4:
----------------------------

1
12

TIME

3.

4.

DISP

DISPLAY

COrPBX

line key to to

To change 12 HR to 24 HR, press COLPBX
line key 2.

CO/&X

;

HOUR

Press the corresponding
change the data option.
l

Pad)

Setting

line

keys

y$@#,
IEI

Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-8-07, Class of Service
(Attendant) Feature Selection 1.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

ta Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

r.1.1.-.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

ps

GENERAL

INFORMATION

-TIME

DISPLAY

(12h/24h) SELECTION

Memory Block specifies either a 12-hour (12:OOAM - 1159 PM) or 24-hour (0O:OO - 23:59) time display.
.1.1.-.1.1.-.1.-.1.1.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~

Programming

7
1

5-153

System
1

CLASS OF SERVICE (ATTENDANT)
FEATURE SELECTION 1
Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

I

PBRMisc.

El
,

l

v
LK8
‘I

.

NOTES:

0 MIC

LKl

ICM

1. The system-wide
reset selection provides the
ability to reset the following: Timed Alarm, Call
Forward-All
Calls, Do Not Disturb, Customized
Message, and Callback Bequest.

z gz
1

Data No.

2.

The Password (Outgoing Restriction)
selection
provides the ability to cancel Station Lockout
and default password for another station.

3.

Sixteen classes (00-15)
of feature restriction
patterns
allow
a station
user to activate
particular features while restricting other s.

4.

At default, stations 100 and 101 are in class 00
and all other stations are in class 15.

(Dial Pad)
Page No.
(01-03)
I
I 01

Class No.
Data No.
Title
(00-15)
r
I
III
0 7:
CLS 1
co 0)
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

RECALL
1 ENC
COLED
Data

3.

4.

key
1 key

n

: Next page.

5. Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in
Memory Block 4-1’7, Station to Class of Service
Feature Assignment.

: Previous page.

OFF
Deny

0

ON
Page 01
LKl
I
Night Mode
switching

Allow

Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line key to
enter the data.
l
The LED indication changes to indicate the
data each time a COPBX line key is pressed.
l
To assign Night Mode per tenant as NO,
press CO/PBX line key 2 to turn CO/PBX
LED off.
Press the TRF key; data
displayed successively.

Data No.
07

PC Programming
Guide
(USERI
TECH(B:B:A:C

OPERATION:
1.

PBRlMisc.
8

of class 01-15

I

LK3
LK4
I
I
System Speed
Not Used
Dial
Programming
LK7
LK8
Automatic
Automated
Tnmk-ToAttendant I
TlUnk
DISA
Transfer
SetiReset
1 Set&set
1
Mode
I

LK2
I
1 Not Used

LK3
I
1 Not Used

I

LK5
Not Used

I

LK2
Night Mode
switching
Per Tenant
LK6
Not Used

I

Page 02

is

5. After entering data for Class 15, press TRF key
to write the data and advance to Memory Block
l-8-08,
Class of Service (Station)
Feature
Selection 2.
6.

n

I

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. I
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment

5-154

Page 03
LKl
Terminal

I

Required

I
1

LK4
Not Used

I
I

Programming

CLASS

OF SERVICE
(ATTENDANT)
SELECTION
1
(continued)

FEATURE

System
1

PBR/Misc.
8

Data No.
07

Classes 00-15 programmed
in this Memory Block are programmed
as feature restriction
classes. In
Telephone Mode, Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment, Data No. 17, specify any of the classes for
each telephone to assign the features that the user can or cannot activate.
Page 01
Function

I

LK3

Default
I Class 01-15

Night Mode Switching

(System-Wide)

Allow

Deny

Night Mode Switching

(Tenant Basis)

Allow

Deny

Allow

Deny

Not Used

N/A

N/A

Not Used

N/A

N/A

Not Used

N/A

N/A

Allow

Deny

Allow

Deny

System SpeedDial

Programming

Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Programming of Outgoing
LK8

Default
Class 00

Name

Automated

Transfer (Set/Reset) and
Numbers

AttendantJDISA

Mode (Set/Reset)

I

Page 02
Corresponding
CO/PBX Line Key
1

LKl

Function
Timed Alarm

Name

Default
Class 01-15

Allow

Deny

Allow

Deny

System-Wide Reset of Timed Alarm, Call Forward -All
Calls, Do Not Disturb, Customized Message, and Callback
Request

Deny

Deny

Cancel Station Lockout and Default Password for another
Station

Allow

DISA Password Cancel

Allow

DISA Password Confirmation

Allow

LK7

Automated
Basis

Allow

LK8

Forced Account Code Programming

l

l
l
l

(SetBeset) for Single Line Telephones

Default
Class 00

Call Forward-All Calls (Set/Reset) from Destination
Station
Call Forward CAR Keys
Call Forward All Call Set
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set

I
I

/

I
I

Attendant

Weekend Mode (Set/Reset) Tenant

Allow

Deny

Continued

Programming

I

on next page.

5-155

CLASS

OF SERVICE (ATTENDANT)
SELECTION
1
(continued)

FEATURE

System
1

PBR/Misc.
8

Data No.
07
” ‘-‘-J
.,2’

Classes 00-15 programmed
in this Memory Block are programmed
as feature restriction
classes. In
Telephone Mode, Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment,
Data No. 17, specify any of the classes for
each telephone to assign the features that the user can or cannot activate.
Page 03
Corresponding
COIPBX Line Key

Function

LKl

Terminal

LK2

Name

Exchange Mode Set (Series 700 or higher)

Default
Class 00

Default
Class 01-15

Allow

Deny

Not Used

N/A

N/A

Not Used

NIA

N/A

,.
LKS

,

.I.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.L.l,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

!
I
.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CLASS OF SERVICE
SELECTION
1

(ATTENDANT)

FEATURE

:
.

! This Memory Block allows or denies specific attendant-type
features for each Class of Service.
When !
1 individual stations are assigned to a Class of Service, the station user can access only those attendant features 1
9 specified as allow for that Class of Service.
1 .-.l~l.-.-.L.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-~-.-.
i

5-156

Programming

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel H/Level XXAdvanced
System
1

CLASS OF SERVICE (STATION)
FEATURE

SELECTION

2

Februarv
PBR/Misc.
8

1998

Data No.
08

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

NOTES:

Mode
1.
Sub-Mode

PBRMisc.

I[

E Ei
‘I

0
m

Data No.

8

2. At default, all stations are in Class 00.

(Dial Pad)
Data No.

I

1

Class No.
Title

II

(00-15)

fl 8:
CLS 2
(00)
----_----------------------DISPLAY
TIME

Sixteen classes (00-15)
of feature restriction
patterns
allow a station
user to activate
particular
features while restricting
the user
from other features,

3.

Page No.

(01-04)

n

Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in
Memory Block 4-17, Station to Class of Service
Feature Assignment.

I 01

3.

Press the corresponding
COIPBX line key to
change the data option.
l
The LED indication
changes to indicate
the data each time the CO/PBX line key is
pressed.
l
To assign CLASS 00, Voice/Tone Override,
press CO/PBX line key 8 to turn COIPBX
LED off or on.

4.

Press the TRF key; data for class 01-15
displayed successively.

is

5. After entering data for Class 15, press the
TRF key to write the selebted data and
advance to Memory Block l-8-09, Music On
Hold Pattern Selection.
6.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.

4-17

Programining
Memory

Block

Name

Required

Station to Class of Service Feature
Assimrnent

Continued

Programming

on nextpage.

5-157

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

CLASS

OF SERVICE
(STATION)
SELECTION2
(continued)

Page 01
LKl
Call Forward,
All Call, DND,
**Break Mode

LK2
‘Ibunk Queuing

Rejection of
Barge-In
(Called Party)

TimedAla17.u
For SLT

LK3
Automatic
Callback

12OLevel II&eve1

II Advanced
System
1

FEATURE

Installation
PBRlMisc.
8

Service Manual
Data No.
08
-?

LK4
Barge-In
(Calling Party)
I

Page 02

1 Busy/NoAns

1

set

I

I

hbsage

1

I

I

I

Set

1

I

Page 03

Line Preference

Page 04
I
LKl
l LCR Recall

LK5
l *Mamla1
Live Record
Activate

I

LK2
$DSS Key
Transfer
Operation
LK6
l * Auto
Live Record
Activate

I

LK3
**Caller ID

LK7
**+ BGM

I

LK4
**Caller ID
Number
Selection
LKS
l **Unsupervised
Conference

I

Page 05

C O/PBX line keys

f Series 300 or higher.
1 V2.16 and V2.60 or higher.
* V2.77C or higher.
** Series 400 or-higher.
*** Series 500 or higher.
* Series 600 or higher.
+ Series 700 or higher

Continued

5-158

on nextpage.

Programming

CLASS OF SERVICE
(STATION-)
SELECTION
2
(continued)

System
1

FEATURE

IPage 01

I

Corresponding
CO/PBX Line Key

I

Function

I

LKl

Set Call Forward -All Calls, Do Not Disturb
Mode(Series 466 or higher)

LK2

Trunk

LK3

Automatic

LK4

Barge-In Originate

LK5

(DND), Break

I

Default
Class 01-E

Allow

Deny

Allow

Deny

Deny

Deny

Barge-In Receive

Allow

Deny

LK6

Timed Alarm (SetiCancel)

Allow

Deny

LK7

Not Used

N/A

N/A

LK8

Voice Override (Series 400 or higher)/ Tone Override
Originate

Allow

Deny

Q.ueuing

Callback
on a CO/PBX Line

Function

Default
Class 00

Name

Default
Class 01-15

LKl

Absence Message

Allow

Deny

LK2

Callback Request Originate

Allow

Deny

LK3

Station Outgoing Lockout (Set/Cancel)

Allow

Deny

N/A

N/A

Call Forward Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer Set

Allow

Deny

VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase

Allow

Deny

N/A

NIA

Allow

Deny

Not Used

DISA Password Set

Page 03
Corresponding
CO/PBX Line Key

I

Default
Class 00

08

Deny

Not Used

I
I

Data No.

8

Allow

Page 02
corresponding
CO/PBX Line Key

I

I

Name

PBR/Misc.

Function

Default
Class 00

Name

LKl

Not Used

LK2

User Ringing Line Preference Set&set

LK3

Voice Override (Series 4000r higher)/Tone
On Receive

LK4

N/A

’ Default
’ Class 01-15
I

N/A

Allow

Deny

Allow

Deny

LCR Bypass (Trunk Groups 02 - 32)

Deny

Deny

LK5

Station Trunk-to-Trunk

Deny

Deny

LK6

Account Code Entry (Series 300 or higher)

Deny

Deny

LK7

Not Used

N/A

N/A

LK8

Call Alert Notification

Override/Camp

Transfer

(version 2.18 and 2.60 or higher)

I

Allow

I

Deny

I

4
I

I

Continued

Programming

on nextpage.

5-159

m

1998

Electra Professional

CLASS

OF SERVICE
(STATION)
SELECTION
2
(continued)

12O/Level D/Level

II Advanced

B-&a.llation

System
1

FEATURE

Service Manual

PBRlMisc.

Data No.

8

08

-->‘>
,’

Page 04
Corresponding
CO/PBX Line Key

Function

Default
Class 00

Name

Default
Class 01-15

LKI

LCR Recall (version 2.77C or higher)

Allow

Deny

LK2

DSS Key Transfer Operation
(Refer to Note 1 below.)

Deny

Deny

LK3

Caller ID (Series 450 or higher)

LK4

Caller ID Number Selection (Series 450 or higher)
(Refer to Note 2)

Deny

Deny

LK5

Manual Live Record Activate

Deny

Deny

LK6

Auto Live Record Activate (Series 400 or higher)
(LK 5 must also be on for automatic live recording)

Deny

Deny

LK7

BGM Selection ( Series 500 or higher)

Allow

Deny

I Unsupervised

LK8

Conference

Page 05
Corresponding
CO/PBX Line Key

I
LK5

(Series 300 or higher)

(Series 400 or higher)

( Series 500 or higher)

Function

Deny

I

Name

Deny-l

I

Default
Class 00

,

Default
Class 01-15

I

Deny

1~

I

Deny

I

LKl

I Forced Account

LK2

Group Listening

LK3

Station Relocation (Series 706 or higher)

Allow

Deny

LK4

Set Call Forward-OffPremise

Deny

Deny

N/A

N/A

-LK8

Code (Series 600 or higher)
Selection (Series 700 or higher)

(Series 700 or higher)

Not Used

-~Denrl
Deny

Note 1:

Operation applies to Feature Access/One-Touch keys and Attendant Add-On keys programmed
for DSS. The following applies on a call, after you press a DSS key and then go on-hook
DENY
= Call is not transferred
ALLOW
= Call is transferred

Note 2:

Caller ID Number Selection:
l
If set for Deny, the name is displayed
l

Note 3:

If set for Allow, the number

Call Forward-Off

if both name and number

is displayed

are received.

if both name and number

Premise is related to: Page 1 LKl

are received.

and Page 2 LK5.

r.1.1.-.1.1.1*1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CLASS OF SERVICE
SELECTION
2

(STATION)

FEATURE

i
.

! This Memory Block allows or denies specific station features for each Class of Service. When individual !
1 stations are assigned to a Class of Service, the station user can access only those features specified as Allow for 1
.
. that Class of Service.
LI.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

5-160

Programming

.,,,
_’

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

lZO/Level D/Level II Advanced

Februarv
PBRiMii.
8

System
1

MUSIC ON HOLD PATTERN
SELECTION

PC Programming
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

TECH

System

0 MIC
l ICM

I LKl

v

Sub-Mode

PBRJMisc.

0

I.

LK~

0
In

E Eg

I
3.

0

l

and

B = Melody Fair
C = Chime

A

CO/PBX

line

To change Pattern A to Pattern
CO/PBX line key 2.

I

Music On Hold can be provided to CO/PBX
intercom calls that are put on hold.

A = LetItBe

D=Chime

I

Press the corresponding
change data option.

USEB

(A-D) for Music On Hold
can be selected in this Memory Block.

Setting Data
=

Guide

:2. One of four melodies
9

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
Title
n-n
9:
MOH
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

Data No.
09

NOTES:

v

Data No,

B:C:A:D

1998

key

to

B, press

I

I
I

CO/PBX line keys

$2: f Default
l.iz.3

4. ‘Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-B-10, PBR Interdigit
Release Timer Selection.
5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

C.-.l.l.l.-.l.l~l.l~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.,
.

I

GENERAL

: This Memory

- MUSIC ON HOLD PATTERN

Block specifies the Music On Hold Pattern

L .1.1.1.1.1~1.1.1.1~1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

INFORMATION

Selection,

SELECTION

;
.
A

5-161

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

l2OILevel.IyLevel

II Advanced
System
1

PBR INTERDIGIT RELEASE TIMER
SELECTION

PBRIMisc.
8

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Installation

Service Manual
Data No.
10
A
Guide

NOTES:

Mode

0 MIC
l ICM

System

1. A DTMF Single Line Telephone connected to the
Level II and/or Level-II Advanced system must be
supported by PBR that receives DTMF signals.

v

Sub-Mode

PBR/Misc.
v

Data No.

I

IOff-hwkl
(Dial Pad)

Data No.
Title
n-n
10:
PBR
RELEAS
---------------------------DISPLAY
TIME

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

1oaec
(Default)

setting
Data

\

Dial tone is sent (PBR ccnuected).

M-iT~“~m

7s

Specified
Time:

CO/PBX

line

9

Dial the Grst digit.

7

The second digit.

5

The third digit.

7 sec.
(Default)

key to
Specified
Time:

To change 7.0 sec. to 5.0 sec., press CO/PBX
line key 3.

I

7sec.
(Default)

t

I
Ifthe PBR is not detected within
the specified time, PBR is

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-8-11, System Refresh
Timer Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR

n

Default

Additional

key to go back on-line.

Prcgramming

I

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. I
Fit Digit PBR Release Timer Selection
l-3-03
l-8-01
SLT or Automated AttendantlDISA
to
PBR Selection

I

Required

I

.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.

; GENERAL

INFORMATION

; This Memory Block specifies the interdigit
.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-,-.

5-162

- PBR INTERDIGIT

RELEASE TIMER SELECTION

release time for the PBR.

!
I
i

Programming

_,
-”

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

SYSTEM REFRESH
ASSIGNMENT

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

Februarv
PBR/Misc.
8

System
1

TIMER

1998

Data No.
11

L
TECH

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

ICM

l

PBRJMisc.

0

LKS

I

l

MIC
ICM

B:I:M

Guide

USER

NOTES:

0 MIC

LKl

I

v

Sub-Mode

7
PC Programming

OPERATION:

1.

The system automatically
refreshes itself during
idle periods based on the time specified in this
Memory Block.

v
Data No.

1

III

1

(Dial

Pad)

Setting
Data

Title

No.

I

Data

I

i-l,

11:
BEFRESH
---------------------------DISPLAY

TIME

3.

4H

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change 4 hr. to 8 hr., press CO/PBX line
key 3.

I
CO/PBX

Default

line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 1-8-12, VRS Message
Recording Time Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

r .-.-.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL
INFORMATION
- SYSTEM

i

REFRESH

TIMER

ASSIGNMENT

. This Memory Block assigns the System Refresh Time. (The system refreshes itself during idle periods.)
L .1.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.-~1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

;
i

5-163

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

VRS MESSAGE RECORDING
SELECTION

12O/Level II/Level

TIME

II Advanced

Installation

1

1 PBRAUisc.
8
I

1

&stem
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH

A:H:H

Service Manual

I DataNo.
I

12

1
!

Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

I

NOTES:

0 MIC

LKl

l

ICM

1.

v

Sub-Mode

PBRIMisc.

I

Data No.

LK~

VRS (Voice Recording Services) Channel 1 has a
maximum of 240 seconds for message recording.

z zz
l

ILkI
(Dial Pad)

12:
VRS
---------------------------TIME

3.

1 15s

Example:
Message length 15 sec. :
99
0
30 sec. :
1)
11
60 sec. :
,1 120 sec. :
,I

16

DISPLAY

I

I

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

x

CO/pBX

The number of messages that can be used in
VRS depends on the length of the particular
messages (240 sec. + Length of messages =
No. of messages).
16 messages
8 messages
4 messages
2 messages

line key to

To change 16 messages to 8 messages, press
CO/PBX line key 2.

(30.0 sec.)
*8

l

I-I

I

(120.0 sec.)
*2

(60.0 sec.)
*4

I

I

COlPBX line keys
R.T =
*
=

4.

RecordingTime
No. of messages

Use dial pad to enter VRS Channel
Dial Pad

q-q

l-8.

: To enter data.

5. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to the next VRS Channel.
6. After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block 1-8-13, VRS Message Function
Assignment.
7. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

,.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.l.L.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

;

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block specifies the length
, length of the messages.)
..I.I~I.I.-.I.-.I.II.I.I.I.-.-.-.I.I.-.I.I.I.I.I.-.I.I.-.-.d

5-164

- VRS MESSAGE RECORDING
and number

of messages.

(The number

TIME SELECTION

i

of messages depends on the i
.

Programming

’

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

VRS MESSAGE FUNCTION

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced
System
1

ASSIGNMENT

Februarv
1 PBRJMisc.
8
I

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH

A:H:G

1998

1 DataNo.
13
I
Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

0 MIC
ICM

El LKl

l

v

Sub-Mode

PBR/Misc.

I

0 MIC
ICM

LK8

l

v

Data No.

ul

1

3

(Dial Pad)

Meizage
Ol-is

VRS
Channel
Data No.

nn

I
Seek
Dab

Title
1 !

01 = NON

nI_

I 1

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

Page
No.

n

1.3:
VRS
---------------------------TIME

Page 2
LKl
LK2
Day Mode Auto Day Mode Auto
Attendant 1
Attendant 2
LK5
LK6
Day Mode Auto Day Mode Auto
Attendant 5
Attendant 6

CO/PBX

line

Page 3
LKl
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 1
LK5
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 5

key to

To change No Message to Voice Prompt
press CO/PBX line key 2.

1,

Page 1

I

;

4.

LK3
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 3
LK7
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 7

LK4
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 4,
LKS
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 8

Page 4
LKl
LK2
LK3
LK4
Weekend Mode Weekend Mode Weekend Mode Weekend Mode
Auto
Auto
Auto
--i Auto
Attendant 1
Attendant 2
Attendant 3
LK5
LK6
LK7
Weekend Mode Weekend Mode Weekend Mode Weekend Mode
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Attendant 5
Attendant 6
Attendant’7
Attendant 8 I

Use the dial pad to enter VRS Channel 1-8 and
Message No. 01-16. (Maximum of 16 messages
per channel when Message record time is 15 .O
sec.>

Dialpadq
5.

I

I
CO/PBX line keys

LK2
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 2
LK6
Night Mode
Auto
Attendant 6

LK3
LK4
Day Mode Auto Day Mode Autr
Attendant 3
Attendant 4
LKi’
LK8
Day Mode Auto Day Mode Auk
Attendant 7
Attendant 8

-

q

: To enter data.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block
l-8-15,
Tone
Assignment.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

6. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
e.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- VRS MESSAGE FUNCTION

ASSIGNMENT

i

i This Memory Block assigns the recorded voice prompt Automated
Attendant
Message type to the VRS i
. Message Block Division. Refer to Memory Block l-8-12, VRS Message Recording Time Selection,
.
L.-.l.l.-.l.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

Programming

5-165

TONE

System
1

ASSIGNMENT

OPERATION:
1.

TECH

Mode

I

(00)

3.

DT

=

A

I

1

DISPLAY

I

CO/PBX

line

key to

Item
No.
00
01
1

1
I

I
CO/FBX

4.

line

keys

Use the Dial pad to enter Table No. 00- 12.

5. Setting

./

Pad)

1

I

USER

The 2nd Dial Tone is used for DISA Dial Tone.

Press the corresponding
change data option.

Page

-,-‘,

Guide

NOTES:

l

(Dial

15:

B:D:N

0 mc
ICM

System

Data No.

----_----------------------TIME

Data No.
15

PC Programming

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

PBRfMisc.
8

I

Data:

Tone A-M

02
03

Tone

Default Table
LCD Indication

ICM Dial Tone
2nd Dial Tone
ISpecial Dial Tone

04

Busy Tone
Reorder/Error

05
06
07
08

(Howler Tone
Service Set Tone
ICM Ringback Tone
Tie/DID Ringback Tone

09
10

Call Waiting Tone
ILCRDial Tone

11
12

Tone Burst 1
Tone Burst 2

Tone

Default
(DT>
(2DT1

A
B

@PDT)1

C

(BT)
(ROT)

D
E

(H-WT)I F
(SST1
(RBTl)
(RBT2)

G
I
H

(CWT)

J

(SDT)]
(TBl)

K
G

(TB2)

K

6. Press the TRF key to advance to the next Table.
7. After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block 1-8-16, Voice Prompt to Tone
Assignment.
8. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
8

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

Continued

5-166

on nextpage.

Programming

i

1

I

Installation

Service Manual

Electra professional

12O/Level IULevel.II

Advanced

Februarv

1998

TONE ASSIGNMENT
(continued)

440/460
I
J

.ON: 1s
om2s

2 sec.
IL

440
6orPM

K

1 sec.
1-1

400

f

continuous
0.5

L

600

60 IPM

M

No Tone

continuous

A

0.5

r

1

C.l.l.-.l.l.e.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TONE ASSIGNMENT

; This Memory Block assigns each system tone to the flexible tables.
.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

i
i

5-167

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

lZO/Level

II/Level

VOICE PROMPT TO TONE ASSIGNMENT

1

OPERATION:

TECH A:H:I/J

Mode

System

I

Service Manual

8

I

PC Programming

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Installation

II Advanced

1 LKl

1

16

I

Guide

USER

‘?
I

0 ME
l

ICM

‘I

Sub-Mode

PBRJMisc.

l3ElLKBEZ
v

m

Data No.

1

(Dial
Data

No.

TE:1eTone

I

rir-ln

I

2; 6:
01:
----------------------------

DT

Settii

=

Pad)

Data

PRl

DISPLAY

TIME

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

6

I

COiPBX

line

key to

To change Voice Prompt 1 to Voice Prompt 2,
press CO/PBX line key 2.

I
CO/PBX

4.

line

Default

keys

Table No. 01:

Dial Tone

Table No. 02:

Call Waiting

Tone

Press the TRF key to write theaselected
and to advance to the next Table No.

5. After all data
TRF key to
advance
to
Programming

data

has been entered, press the
write the selected data and
Memory
Block
l-8-17,
PC
Password Assignment.

6. Press the SPKR key to go back o-line.

n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

..-.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- VOICE PROMPT TO TONE ASSIGNMENT

i This Memory Block assigns the voice prompt to each tone. A voice prompt can only be provided during Intern
. Dial Tone or Call Waiting Tone.

5-168

Programming

i

‘.
.’ ,;

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OLevel

D/Level II Advanced
System
1

PC PROGRAMMING
PASSWORD
ASSIGNMENT
.

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

PBRMisc.

TECH

0 MIC
l ICM

I

LKB

,” E!

v

Data No.

1. Programmin
a maximum
classes.

Setting Data
I

I
17:
(1)
---------------------------TIME

Class No. 1:
No. 2:
Setting Data:
Dial pad
dOLD

g from a Multiline
Terminal allows
of eight digits to be entered for both

PC Programming
allows only five digits to be
entered. If more than five digits are entered in
the memory block, PC Programming
recognizes
only the first five.

3.

Only digits can be entered.

DISPLAY

Technician Mode
End user Mode
O-9 (maximum eight digits)
: To enter data.

key:

: To clear data.

3.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to the next Class No.

4.

After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block 1-8-18, Site Name Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional

Guide

C:A:A

=

q-q

1

Data No.
17

2.

ILILI

Class No.

1998

NOTES:

(Dial Pad)

W

PBRJMisc.
8

PC Programming

..~.

.

Februsrv

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

!

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PC PROGRAMMING

PASSWORD ASSIGNMENT

lis Memory Block sets a system password that must be entered when using PC Programming.
I .1.1.-.-.-.1.1.1.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

:
i

5-169

Februarv

Electra Professional

1999

lZO/Level II/Level

System
1

SITE NAME ASSIGNMENT

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

0 MIC
ICM

El LKl

Sub-Mode

PBRMisc.
v

m
1

Data No.

DataNo.
18
Guide

NOTES:

l

v

Service Manual

P%R!lGse.
8

PC Programdug

OPERATION:
1.

Installation

II Advanced

1. When programmed,
directory
in the
performed.

this assignment
creates a
PC af%er a download
is

8

(Dial Pad)
Data No.

nn

I

Setting Data

Title

I

1 8:
SlTE
=
---------------------------DISPLAY
TIME

I

To clear data at cursor

Setting Data

:

Enter character (maximum of
eight characters)
using the
Character
Code Table
in
Section 7.

3.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block l-8-25, ACDAJCD
Group Agent Assignment.

4.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

C.l.l.l.l.l.-.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SITE NAME ASSIGNMENT

i This Memory Block indicates Level II and/or Level II Advanced
, using the PC Programming
sofiware to program the system.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-170

system name.

i

This system name is used whr

Programming

‘\;
._ ,.I..

ACDAJCD GROUP AGENT
ASSIGNMENT

1

&stem

I

1

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECH

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

System

I

Sub-ModePBBMisc.

0

LKl

l

(Dial
Setting

1 DataNo.
25
I

1

Guide

USER

NOTES:

v

I[

A:F:A

hm
ICM

1. The ACD/UCD feature
version 2.00 or higher.

,” Ez

Pad)

requires

system software

2.

The UCD feature requires
installation
MIF-F(U)-10
KTU.
The ACD feature
installation
of an MIF-F(A)-10
KTU.

3.

UCD and ACD cannot
system.

Data No.
Agent No.
(l-32)

1I PBR/Misc.
8
I

Data

be installed

of an
requires

in the same

3. Enter data using the dial pad.
Agent No. 1-32
Setting Data:
Agent Station Number
0 2 digit (00-99)
0 3 digit (000-999)
0 4 digit (0000-9999)
ACD/UCD
Group
Agent belongs.

Number

(00-9999)

(l-4)

to which

the

4. Press the TRF key to advance to the next Agent
No.

H

Additional

Programming

5. After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory Block l-8-26, Voice Mail Quick Transfer
Master Hunt Number.
6. Press the SPKR

key to go back on-line.

l-2-03

12-, 3-, or 4-Digit

Station

Number

Selection

,.1.-.1.-.1,1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

0ACDAJCD GROUP AGENT ASSIGNMENT

- This Memory Block specifies the Agent Extension Number and the ACDNCD
.gent belongs. Up to 32 Agents can be programmed in the ACDNCD
system.

Programming

Group Numbers

I

i

to which each i
.

_l..L__

,1_1--^-:

Electra

-

_-..

I.(n.-.,T.^..

Professional

.

..I.

__--

1201Level II/Level

I,.

m>

2.

Enter:

Mode

2_-.I

_.....

1

PBWMisc.
8

Data No.
26

PC Programming
Guide
TECHIAQF
IUSER I
0 MIC
l ICM

System

v
PBRJMisc.l\

Sub-Mode

.e--

Service Manual

I

OPERATION:
Go off-line.

T--L^.a-Li--L

Installation

System
1

VOICE MAIL QUICK TRANSFER
MASTER HUNT NUMBER
1.

___.....l

II Advanced

,” g:

- ..,

NOTES:
1. This feature requires
or higher.

system software

version 5.00

v
2

Data No.

In

6

(Dial Pad)

Data No.
Title
n2 6: VMMASTER
---------------------TIME

3.

_

Setting Data
I,
000
--m--s

DISPLAY

Enter data using the dial pad.
El.
Dialpad

Setting
Station
0
0
0

q

I#1
-m

: To move cursor.
: To enter data.

Data:
Number (00-9999)
2 digit (00-99)
3 digit (000-999)
4 digit (0000-9999)
n

Additional

Programming

Memory Block Name

4.

Press the TRF key to advance to write the
selected data and advance to Memory Block
Code
Length
l-8-27,
Forced
Account
Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Required

Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment
Access Code (S-IX&) Assignment
IAccess Code (3-Digit) Assignment
2-, 3-, or 4Digit Station Number Selectiou
1Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
Voice MaillSLT Selection
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
Assignment

I

I

,.-.-.r.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i GENERAL
.

INFORMATION

- VOICE MAIL
QUICK
NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

I. This Memory Block specifies the Voice Mail master number when operating
..l.Il.-.l.l.-.l.-.-.I.II.I.I.-.I.I.I.-.I.-.-.I.-.II.I.l.l.Il.r.

5-172

TRANSFER

MASTERi
..

Quick Transfer

to Voice Mail.

Programming

*Serviced

February1998

FORCED

System

ACCOUNT
CODE LENGTH
ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECH

1. Go off-line.
Enter:

2.

1 PBRJlWsc.

Mode

System

El

PBFUMisc.

Sub-Mode

0 MIC
ICM

LKl

v

I

Guide

USER’

NOTES:

l

LK8

1 DataNo.

1. This feature requires
or higher.

,” 2;

system software

version 6.00

v

m
2

Data No.

7

(Dial Pad)

Setting Data
I
lo DGT

Data No.
Title
I2 7: FORCED
---------------------------TIME

3.

DISPLAY

Enter data using the dial pad.

El, IEI
Dial pad a

Setting Data:

-

q

: To move cursor.
: To enter data.

1 - 13 Digits

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-l-00, Pause Time
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

I Memory
Block

No.

Programming
I

Memory

Block Name

1Required

1

~.ILI.l,l.l.l.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i GENERAL

INFORlMATION

- FORCED

“his Memory Block is used to assign the number
1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

ACCOUNT

CODE LENGTH

ASSIGNMENT

of digits (1 - 13) for the Forced Account Codes.

i
.
1

.

Programming

5-173

W.

. LICL

Februarv

1998

. ~. m...e

__...

THIS PAGE LEFT BUNK

5-174

.*rrn

____ ITT.

%ectra Professional
__Installationi%/nLevel II/Level

.

II Advance:

9..

.L.,.-2--

0...--?.

wm

Service Ma,nd

INTENTIONALLY

Programming

.

.

Tm

. .

-

_

.a

se

-1

.

-

n

.

.--1,c

l-,7

v-7

.

.

.

.v-

.

#.fim

February

Installatio_nd

System

DISA ID CODE ASSIGNMENT

1

DISA

1998

1 DataNo.

OPERATION:
PC Programming
1.

Guide

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Mode

0 MIC

System

ICM

l

NOTES:

v
Sub-Mode

DISA

I

0

LK9

l

MIC
ICM

1.

DISA ID Code Selection is performed in Memory
Block l-5-24, DISA ID Code Digit Selection.

2.

Different DISA ID Codes cannot be assigned to
the same ID Buffer Number.

3.

If Memory Block l-5-24, DISA ID Code Digit
Selection, is changed from 3 to 4 or 2 digits, each
ID buffer must be reassigned.

4.

Assign 000 (No Data) for stations that are not
installed or stations that are denied DISA access.

v

ul0

Data No.
IDBuffer

Data

(ot?~a

No.

(Dial
Title

Setting

0
Pad)

Data

I”,:,:“““,,,,,,;
----------------------------

3. Enter data using the dial pad.
Setting Data:

a-digit DISA ID Code: 00-99
(00 no data)
3-digit DISA ID Code: 000-999
(000 no data)
4-digit DISA ID Code: 0000-9999
(0000 no data)
: Tomovecursor.

Dial pad

4.

pg+J:

To enter data.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-g-02, DISA Password
Effect/invalid
Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional

Programming

Memory
Block
No.
l-5-24

Memory
DISA

ID Code

Dieit

Block

Name

Selection

c.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
- DISA ID CODE ASSIGNMENT

i. This

Memory Block specifies the DISA ID Code numbers.

L .1.1.1.1.1.1,1.1.1.1.-*-,-.-.-.-,-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

Required
d

1

i.
J
5-175

System
1

DISA PASSWORD EFFECT/INVALID
SELECTION
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Data No.
02

PC Programming
TECH

Mode

DISA
9

System

Guide

USER

0 MIC

LK1

I

B:E:C

>.:
/’

ICM

l

v

Sub-Mode

DISA

0 MIC
l ICM

LK9

I

v
0

Data No.

2

III

(Dial
ID Buffer
No.
(01-96)

Data
No.

Title

nnn

Setting

Pad)

Data

I

0 l!
02
----------------------------

PASWORD

TIME

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
To change
key 2.

l

YES

CO/PBX

key to

NO to YES, press CO/PBX

I

I

line

line

I

I

I
COlpBX

line

keys

Setting Data:
NO (LKl)
= DISA
Password
(Password is not required)
YES (LK2) = DISA Password
(Password
is required.
Assign
l-1-46-48)
4.

Invalid
in Effect
with MB

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-9-00, DISA ID Code
Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Progmmming

in this

manual.

,.‘.‘.‘.-.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i GENERAL

INFORMATION

- DISA PASSWORD EFFECT/INVALID

i This Memory Block assigns DISA Password as Invalid (LKl) or Effective
. calling party can use the DISA feature without a DISA Password.

(LK2).

If invalid

SELECTION
is assigned, the

b.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

5-176

Programming

i
l

I
.

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

Februarv

12OILevel H/Level II Advanced
System
1

CALL ARRIVAL KEY
NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

Data No.
01

CAR
10

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TBCH(B:L:C

1998

Guide

IUSEB 1

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

CAR

0 MIC
ICM

v
LK 10

El

0 MIC
l
ICM

‘I
m0

Data No.

1

(Dial Pad)

Setting Data
(Zdigit: 00-99)

3.

NOTES:

l

1. To display
Caller ID Indication
for normal
incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls, both
Caller ID Indication
and Ring assignment. must
be assigned
for the terminal
in System
Programming.
A maximum
of two multiline
terminals can be assigned system-wide to display
caller identification
for normal incoming CO calls
and CAR incoming
calls.
A third multiline
terminal
can be assigned to display
caller
identification
for normal incoming calls per-CO
line and for CAR incoming calls per-CAR, using
another Memory Block.

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:
To assign CAR Port Number 01 as
CAR No. 200, enter 200 using the
dial pad.
cm

,

q -m

Dialpad

ElCNF

q-

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter setting data.
:

key

NextCAR

No.

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-10-02, Call Arrival
Key Master Hunt Number Selection.
5.

n

Press the SPKR

Additional

key to go backon-line.

Programniing

Refer to bide

to Feature Programming

in this manual.

r .1.-.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,
GENERAL INFORMATION
- CALL ARRIVAL
i
iThis Memory Block specifies the Call Arrival
.-.1.1.-.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.

Programming

Key number.

KEY NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

;
.

i

5-177

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12OLevel

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

System
1

CAR
10

CALL ARRIVAL KEY MASTER HUNT
NUMBER SELECTION

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECHlB:L:D

Service Manual

I

Data No.
02

Guide

[USER 1

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

0 MIC
ICM

System

v
Sub-Mode

NOTES:

l

1.

0 MIC
ICM

CAR

l

This feature
or higher.

requires

system sohare

version 2.50

v
DataNo.
(Dial Pad)
CAB
Port No.
Data
(01-88)
Title
No.
I
1 I
i
01
I
02
: MASTER
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3. Prem the corresponding
change data option.
l

Setting Data
I
I
NO
I

CO/PBX

key

to

To change NO to YES, press COLPBX line
key 2.

I
COlpBX line keys

CNP

line

key

:

Default

Next CAR No.

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block l-10-03, Call
Arrival
Key
Hunt
Number
Forward
Assignment.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

C.l.l.-.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i
.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CALL ARRIVAL
SELECTION

! This Memory Block specifies the assignment

KEY MASTER HUNT NUMBER

of a Master Hunt Number

for a Call Arrival

Key.

L.-.-.l.-.-.l.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

5-178

Programming

i
.
I
.

-,

Installation

Electra

Service Manual

Professional

12OLevel II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
03

CAR
10

System
1

CALL ARRIVAL KEY HUNT NUMBER
FORWARD ASSIGNMENT

1998

Guide

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

I

0

LKl

l

ME
ICM

v

NOTES:
1. This feature requires
higher.

CAR

2. An ACD/UCD
the forwarding

system software version 2.50 or

Pilot number cannot be assigned as
station number.

Data No.
(Dial

Pad)

Setting
Data
Station
or CAR No.

3. Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:

To set CAR Port Number
01
forward to Tel 100, enter 100 using
the dial pad.

-B,

.

Dial pad

q-

II

m

q +:
141

Tomovecursor.
:

To enter data.

key

:

Tie clgsll
patwe
setting data position.

key

:

Next Tel. No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-10-04, Call Arrival
Key Port Name Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this

manual.

1.~I.I.I.11.I.I.-.I.I.-.I.I.-.I.I.I.I).I.I.I.-.I.-.-.-,-.I.I.,

i GENERAL INFORMATION
- CALL ARRIVAL KEY HUNT NUMBER FORWARD
ASSIGNMENT
s
I. This Memory Block specifies the Call Arrival Key Hunt Forward station number.

Programming

i
..

5-179

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level IL/Level II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

System
1

CAR
10

Data No.
04

CALL ARRIVAL KEY PORT NAME
ASSIGNMENT

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECHlB:L:B

:

Guide
../!

IUSER I

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

0 MIC
ICM

El LKl

l

v

Sub-Mode

CAR

I LK 10

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advances to Memory Block l-10-05, Call Arrival
Key to Call Appearance Block Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

0 MIC
ICM

l

v
Data No.

4.

ILkI
(Dial Pad)

CAR
PortNo.

Setting Data

Data

NOTES:

(Up to six digit&haract.ers)
I
I

FiGi
011
04:
---------------------------TIME

1. This feature requires
or higher.

>

<

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:

version 2.50

DISPLAY

2.
3.

system software

The Call Arrival
Key part name only
when the Call Arrival number is called.

appears

To assign DANE to CAR 01, enter
the characters.
(Refer to Section 7 - Character Code
Tables in this manual.>
After the 3-digit code is entered, the
character is displayed automatically.

Setting Data:
c-a
Dial pad
HOLD

II

Enter by Character

q +:
q-q
,

key
key

Code.

Tomovecursor.
:

To enter data.

:

TYe clear all data when
cursor IS at the
setting data position.

:

Next CARNo.
D

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

..1.-.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CALL ARRIVAL

KEY PORT NAME ASSIGNMENT

i This Memory Block specifies the Call Arrival Key Port name that is indicated
. when an internal call is made to the Call Arrival Key.
..l.l.-.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-..

5-180

on the multiline-terminal

i
LCD ’
’.

Programming

‘I

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

KEY TO CALL
BLOCK ASSIGNMENT

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

CAR
10

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Februarv

System
1

CALL ARRIVAL
APPEARANCE

II Advanced

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

CAR

El
I

Q MIC
ICM

LKl

v

0 M.Ic
l
ICM

DataNo.
05
Guide

NOTES:

l

LK 10

1998

I

1. This function
2.50 or higher.

requires

system

software

version

Data No.
(Dial Pad)

I

CAR
Port No.
(01-W
I
I
01
I

Data
Title
INo*
05

TIME

3.

II
:

I
CAP

DISPLAY

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:
To assign CAR Port Number 01 to
Call Appearance Block 01, enter 01
using the dial pad.

em ,q +
Dial pad q - 191
El key
CNF

4.

Call
Appeamnce
Block
(00 - 47)
I
c
NO00
1

: To movecursor.
: To enter setting data.
:

Next CAR No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-10-06, Caller ID
Display Assignment for Call Arrival Key.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

.1.1.-.1,1.1.1.1.1~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-~-.-.-.,

f

GENERAL

INFORMATION

.
! This Memory

Block assigns the Call Arrival

L .1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-,-.-.~.-.-.-.-.

Programming

- CALL ARRIVAL KEY TO CALL APPEARANCE
BLOCK ASSIGNMENT
Key to a Call Appearance

Block.

i.
I.
J

5-181

CALLER ID DISPLAY ASSIGNMENT
CALL ARRIVAL KEY

FOR

CAR
10

System
1

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH

A:J:B

Data No.
06
\

Guide

,.i

USER

1. Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Mode

System

0 MIC
l ICM

I LKl

NOTES:

w

Sub-Mode

CAR

I

LK 10

1. To display Caller Il? Indication
for normal
incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls, both
Caller ID Indication and Ring assignment must
be assigned
for the terminal
in System
ProgramminE.
A maximum
of two multiline
terminals can he assigned system-wide to display
caller identification
for normal incoming
CO
calls and CAR incoming calls (using Memory
Block l-l-78, Caller ID Display Assignment,
for
System Mode). A third multiline terminal can be
assigned to display caller identification
for CAR
incoming
calls per-CAB,
using this Memory
Block.

0 MIC
l ICM

v
In0

Data No.

6

(Dial Pad)
CAR
PortNo.
I
I
01
I

Data
No
I

I I
: CALLID

06

TIME

3.

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:
To assign CAR Port Number 01 to
Call Appearance Block 01, enter 01
using the dial pad.

q -+
q-q
,

Dial pad
I CNF
4.

Tel Port No.
(01 - 96)
I
I I
00

DISPLAY

-a

\

Title

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter setting data.
:

key

Next CAR No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-10-01, Call Arrival
Key Number Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR kev to go back on-line.

n

Additianal

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.

!GENERAL
I

INFORMATION

- CALLEE&

i This Memory Block assigns one multiline
i C&L
.1.1.-.1.-.-.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-182

terminal

ASSIGNMENT

FOR CALL

per CAR to display Caller ID Indication

ARRIVAL!

on incoming

I

CAR i
i

Programming

/
3

C

February

SIGNAL FORMAT

System
1

SELECTION

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECH

1. Gooff-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

I

DTI

I

Q MIC
l
ICM

LKl

v
LK

0

11

Data No.

I

TIME

3.

0

USER

2. The DTI-F(A)-20
KTU is supported
software version 3.00 or higher.

0

(Dial

Pad)

24

I

=

Guide

1. A DTI-F(
j-10 or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU must be
assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.

MIC
ICM

l

A:E:A-C:G

Data No.
00

NOTES:

‘I

i ---------------------------01 /OO:FRAbDS

DTI
11

1998

by system

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change data option.

CO/PBX

Line

key to

To change ESF to SF, press CO/PBX line key

l

1.
SF

=

ESF

=

Format
Superframe
Multiframe)
Extended Superframe Format
Multiframe)

(12
(24

I

COrPBX

4.

line

Default

keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block
l-U-01, Clear
Channel Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

I Memory
Block

No.

7-l

Programming
II
J Card

Memory

Block

Name

1 Required

1

I

Interface

Slot Assignment

I

I

..1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SIGNAL FORMAT SELECTION

i

i This Memory Block specifies the signal format of the Tl trunk connected to the system. The Signal
. used (12- or 24-Multiframe)
depends on the CSU/D mark equipment being used.
..l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~.

Programming

i
Format i
.

5-183

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

CLEAR CHANNEL

lZO/Level

SELECTION

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

I

I

Sswtem
1

I

Service Manual
1 DataNo.
~7~ 01

11

PC Programming

1
..

Guide

,;,-

USER

Mode

System

0 M.Ic
l ICM

Sub-Mode

DTI

0 MIC
l ICM

NOTES:
1. A DTI-F(
j-10 or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU must be
assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
2. The DTI-F(A)-20
KTU is supported
software version 3.00 or higher.

Data No.

by system

(Dial Pad)
DTIN~.
(01-03)

nni-In
I

01

/

Data
No.
01

Setting Data

Title
:

OBYTE

=

----------------------------

zcs

I

DISPLAY

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

CO/PBX

Line

key to

To change ZCS to BSZS, press CO/PBX
key 2.

line

I
CO/PBX linekeys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-11-02, Line Length
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional

Memory
Block No.
7-l

Programming
Memory

Block Name

Required

Card Interface Slot Assignment

1

.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
t

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CLEAR CHANNEL

SELECTION

.i This Memory Block specifies the clear channel ability. If the Zero Byte Time channel is available, the CLK-FI 11 Unit cannot extract a clock signal from the Tl trunk. The Tl trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to
: extract a clock signal for the CLK-F-11 Unit.

A

1 .1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-184

i
.
I
.
.

Programming

7:
,,I

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

LINE LENGTH SELECTION

II Advanced

System

1

1

I

OPERATION:

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

DTI

DTI
11

PC Programming
TECH

1. Gooff-line.
2.

Februarv

A:E:A-C:C

Q MIC
l ICM
v
0 Iac
l ICM
v

1 DataNo.
02
I
Guide

l&ER

NOTES:
1. A DTI-F(
j-10 or DTI-F(A)-20
KTU must be
assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
2.

Data No.

1998

The DTI-F(A)-20
KTU is supported
software version 3.00 or higher.

by-system

(Dial Pad)
DTINo.
(01-03)

Data
No.

,

Setting Data

Title

In-I

---------------------------TIME

3.

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change 0 - 131 Feet to 132 - 262 Feet, press
CO/PBX line key 2.

525 - 655
Feet (5)

Setting Data:
h
Line
LCD
Indication
Key

I

I

1 LK5

1

5

Description

1

I

525-m

I
COfPBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-U-03, Robbed Bit
Signaling Channel Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go backon-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
7-1

Programming
Memory

Block

Name

Required

Card Interface Slot Assignment

,.‘.‘.-.-.‘.‘.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~
i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

-LINE LENGTH SELECTION

i This Memory Block specihs
the line length between the CSU/D mark and the DTI KTU.
, equalization values of the detect signal in the DTI KTU.
L.-.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

Programming

i

This specifies the i
.

5-185

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

ROBBED BITSISSWNG

12OILevel II/Level .R Advanced

Installation

System
1

DTI
11

CHANNEL

OPERATION:

ServiceManual
Data No.
03

PC Programmh

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

DTI

assigned in the system to set this Memory
2. The DTI-F(A)-20

KTU

is supported

Block

by system

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
DTINo.

103:

01

I

Data
SIGNAL

TIME

DISPLAY

I

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

AB

To change CState
line key 2.

CO/PBX

Line

key tc

to 16-State, press COIPBX

I
WARNING
I
!
I This Memory Block should not be programme
1
I leave it at the default setting.
I
I
I Option LK2 [18State
(A, B, C, and D)] isI
I reserved for future use. Ifprogrammed,
it has no 1
I affect.

I
CO/PBX line keys

Default

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block
l-U-04,
DTI
Maintenance
Selection.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

..1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i GENERAL

INFORMATION

- ROBBED BIT SIGNALING

CHANNEL

i This Memory Block specifies the robbed bit signaling method (C&ate or IS-state)
. Format (ESF) is specified in Memory Block l-11-00, Signal Format Selection.
..I.L.I.I.-.I.I.I.I.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-*-.-.*

5-186

SELECTION

if Extended

Superframe

Programming

i
i
.

-.

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

l%O/Level II/Level II Advanced

SELECTION

System
1

DTI MAINTENANCE
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Februarv
DTI
11

PC Programming
TECH

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

DTI

(,,,

III
0

Data No.

Data No.
04

Guide

IUSER

0 MD.2
l ICM

NOTES:

0 MIC

1. A DTI-F( l-10 or DTI-F(A)-20
must be assigned
in the system to set this Memory Block.

l

w

A:E:A-C:D

1998

ICM

2. The DTI-F(A)-20
KTU is supported by system
1
software version 3.00 or higher.
/

4

(Dial Pad)
DTIN~.
(01-03)
nnnn
01 I

Data
No.
04

Setting Data

Title
:

LBK

= REMOTE

---------------------------TIME

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

I

DISPLAY

CO/PBX

Line

To change Remote
Loopback
to
Loopback, press CO/l?BX line key 2.

LK5

I

LK6

I

I
I

Local
I
WARNING
I
I This Memory Block should not be programmed;
I leave it at the default setting.

LK7

I

II

I

I
I

I
I

COPBX

I
I Option LK2 (Local Loopback) is reserved
I future use. If programmed, it has no affect.

1

I
for 1

I

Default

line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-11-05, Tl Channel
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additicmal

Memory
Block No.
7-1

Programming
Memory

Block

Name

Required

Card Interface Slot Assignment

c .1.-.1.-.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

key to

GENERAL

INFORMATION

;Thie Memory Block specifies the maintenance
.1.-.-.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.

- DTI MAINTENANCE
method:

SELECTION

Remote Loopback or Local Loopback.

1

i.
II

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

Tl CHANNEL

lPO/Level II/Level

SELECTION

1

System
1

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

System

I LKl

v

Sub-Mode

DTI

0 MIC
l ICM

,

Title

01 I 05 :
CHANEL
_--------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

I

1 DataNo.
05
I

(Dial Pad)
Fiit
, , Port No.,

USER

./

The DTI-F(A)-20
KTU is supported
software version 3.00 or higher.

Page 1
I

3. Use the Line keys to enter DTI channel numbers.

.-..
.‘i

Guide

1. A DTI-F( j-10 or DTI-F(A)-20
must be assigned
in the system to set this Memory Block.

Channel Numbers
line key.

I 01

I

NOTES:

2.

Data No.
Data
,Nq

DTI
11

1

A:E:A-C:A

0 MIC
l ICM

‘I

DTIN~.
,(ol-03;

Service Manual

PC Programming
TECH

Mode

Installation

II Advanced

(01-24)

correspond

by system

to CO/PBX

I
Channel

CO/PBX
Line
Key

No.

DTI
No. 1

DTI
No. 2

DTI
No. 3

01

01

25

49

I
08

I
08

.f
32

I
56

Page 2
I

I

I

I

I

IC

l

4.

The LED indication changes to indicate the
data each time the CO/PBX line key is
pressed.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-11-06, Signaling
Selection.

(,
Page 3
I

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
7-l
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Required

~.-.-.-r-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- Tl CHANNEL

SELECTION

i This Memory Block specifies the DTI channel numbers to be used. DTI Trunks
. channels, and DTI Trunk 3 has a maximum of 16 channels.

i

1 and 2 have a maximum

of 24 i
.

..-.-.-.-.-r-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-..

5-188

Programming

.,
.:

SIGNALING

System
1

SELECTION

OPERATION:

DTI
11

PC Programming

Data No.
06
Guide

1. Gooff-line.
2.

Enter:

0 MIC
ICM

I LKl

Mode

System

Sub-Mode

CO Line

NOTES:

l

A DTI-F(

0 MIC
l

v

0

must be assigned

ICM

2.

m

Data No.

I-10 or DTI-F(A)-20

The DTI-F(A)-20

KTU

is supported

by Bystem

6

(Dial Pad)
DTl NO. Sata
(01-03)
No.

Channel
No. setting Data

Title

,-In

nn

01
I 06 : TRNK
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

01 =

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

LS

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change Loop Start to Ground Start, press
COIPBX line key 2.

I

Default

COIPBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF
Channel No.

key to advance

to the next

5. After all data has been entered, press the TRF
key to write the selected data and advance to
Memory
Block
l-H-07,
DTI Trunk
Type
Assignment.
6.
n

Press the SPKR key to go backbn-line.
Add&ma1

Programming
Memory

l-11-07
7-l

Block Name

DTI Trunk Type Assignment
Card lutetiaa2 Slot Assignment

..-.-r-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-..

i
i This Memory
. Signaling.

Programming

GENERAL
Block spec*es

INFORMATION
the signaling

method:

- SIGNALING

SELECTION

Loop-Start

Signaling

Trunk

or Ground-Start

Trunk

5-189

i
i
.

Februarv

Electra Professional

1999

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

Syl3tem

DTI TRUNK TYPE ASSIGNMENT

Service Manual

DTI
11

1

Data No.

07

PC Programming

Guide

..A,
i

OPERATION:

1.

NOTES:

Gooff-line.

2. Enter:

Mode

t

0 MIC
l
ICM

SpStfSll

This function requires
3.00 or higher.

v

Sub-Mode

In
0

If the default setting is changed to E&M or DID,
the afEected trunks are automatically
reassigned
to Trunk Group 00. If trunks 00 - 08 are
affected, default line key assignment
for all
multiline
terminals
changes to Not Used and
must be reassigned.

7

f.Diil Pad)

,

I

Block
No.

Data

01
I 07:
TBK
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

l-6

nmmmgDat.a
A..

(1)

co
I

3. Press the corresponding

CO/PBX

line

4. Enter the next TRK No. using the dial pad, and

key to

select the corresponding
change data.

change data.
l

version

A DTI-F( l-10 or DTI-F(A)-20 must be assigned
in the system to set this Memory Block.

DTI

Data No.

DTINo.

system software

To change DTI Trunk Type from CO to DID,
press CO/PBX line key 3.

CO/PBX

line

key

to

5. Press the TRF key tc write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Format Selection.

Block

l-11-00,

Signal

6. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
m

AdditionalProgramming

Memory
I Block No. I

Memory

Block Name

CO/PBX line keys

Data

I

4-Channel
TRK No.

Unit

DTINo.l~DTINo.2~DTINo.3

4

13-16

5
6

17-20
21-24

37-40
41-44
45-48

61-64
N/A

1 N/A
I.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

c
i

. This Memory

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Block assigns the trunk type (CO/DID/E

& M Tie line) by 4-channel

1.1.-.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5.190

1

- DTI TRUNK TYPE ASSIGNMENT

i
;

unit.

Programming

.I

.n

.

.-

. .

Installation
,,,,,,

”

.

w*

.

-1

Service Manual

L..

n..

.

c

.

1.m-11

Electra Professional

.._-

,I,,

I

_-..

111

120/Level II/Level

L

1

m-L- ____--_1,.,.”

1

II Advanced
System
1

ACDAJCD GROUP PILOT NUMBER
ASSIGNMENT

ACDNCD
12

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
00
Guide

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

System

I

0

LKl

Sub-ModeACD/IJCD

v
ILK,”

Data No.

III0

l

M.Ic
ICM

g$

Setting Data
Data

(Pilot

Title

No.

No. max.

ACDAJCD
feature
softwareversion 2.00 software

1. The

requires
or higher.

2. The UCD feature requires
installation
MB?-F(U)-10
KTU.
The ACD feature
installation
of anMIF-F(A)-10
KTU.

0

(Dial Pad)
Group No.
(l-41

NOTES:

4 digits)

3. UCD and ACD cannot
system.

be installed

system
of an
requires

in the same

nnnn

9 11
00:
---------------------------TIME

PILOT

=

DISPLAY

3. Enter data using the dial pad.
+J,

q -)

Dial pad

p?J-pJ:

: Tomovecursor.
To enter data.

Setting Data:
Pilot No. (00-9999)
2-digit (00-99)
3-digit (000-999)
4-digit (0000-9999)

n

AdditionalPmgrai

Memory
Block No.

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance
to Memory
Block
l-12-01,
ACD/UCD
Group
Overflow
Destination
Assignment.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Memory

Block Name

l-1-46

Access

Code

(l-Digit)

Assignment

l-l-47

Access

Code

(S-Digit)

Assignment

Code

(3-Digit)

Assignnient

l-l-43

Access

l-2-03

2-, 3-, or 4-Digit

l-6-25

ACDNCD

Group

Agent

ACDNCD
Assignment

Group

Overflow

l-12-01

Station

Number

Required

Selection

Assignment
Destination

C.l.l.l.l.l.l.l,-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i GENERAL

INFORMATION

- ACD/UCD GROUP PILOT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

; This Memory Block specifies the Pilot Number
.1.1.1.1.1~-.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.

Programming

of each ACDRICD

Group where incoming

calls are terminated.

i
;

5-191

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

TECH

1, Go off-line.
Mode

System

Sub-Mode ACD/UCD

I LKl

0 MIC
0 ICM

F(

z gz
v

III
0

Data No.

..\i

/ :’

NOTES:
1. ACDIUCD
programmed

Group Pilot Numbers
cannot
as the overflow destination.
requires

be

system software

3.

The UCD feature requires installation
of an
MIF-F(U)-10
KTU.
The ACD feature requires
installation
of an MIF-F(A)-10
KTU.

4.

UCD and ACD cannot be installed
system.

Setting Data

Group No.

Glide

A:F:C

2. The ACDNCD
feature
version 2.00 or higher.

1

(Dial Pad)

)“ltib)

3.

Data No.
01

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Enter:

Service Manual

ACDNCD
12

System
1

ACDlUCD GROUP OVERFLOW
DESTINATION
ASSIGNMENT

2.

Installation

in the same

Enter data using the dial pad.

cm, q Dial pad

p-&m:

: Tomove

cursor.

To enter data.

Setting Data:
Station No. (00-9999)
2-digit (00-99)
3digit (000-999)
4-digit (0000-9999)

4.

5.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-12-02, ACDIUCD
Overflow Timer Selection.
Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Additional

l

Programming

I

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. I
l-l-46
Aaxss Code (l-Digit) Assignment
l-l-47
Access Code (P-Digit) Assignment
l-l-48
Aaxss Code (3-Digit) Assignment
l-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
l-8-25
ACDAJCD Group Agent Assignment

c.1.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
- ACDAJCD GROUP OVERFLOW
i
i This Memory Block specifies the station
’ routed when incoming calls overflow.
1 .-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

DESTINATION

ASSIGNMENT
or Station

Hunt

Group where the call of each ACDAJCD

1
I

Group is i
1

Programming

,I,

r

ACD/UCD

OVERFLOW TIMER
SELECTION

System
1

ACDNCD
12

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
02
Guide

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

m

Sub-Mode ACDiUCD

NOTES:

0 ME
l ICM

I LKl

System

1. ACDRJCD
Group Pilot Numbers
cannot
programmed as the overflow destination.

,” g:

2. The ACDAJCD feature
version 2.00 or higher.

v
Data No.

10121

(l-4)

_I

0

Data No.

nnn,
11

02:

---------------------------TIME

Title

system software

4.

60

UCD and ACD cannot
system.

be installed

in the same

DISPLAY

3. Press the i?orresponding
change data option.
l

Setting Data

OVFTMR=

requires

3. The UCD feature requires installation
of an
MIF-F(U)-10
KTU.
The ACD feature requires
installation
of an MIF-F(A)-10
KTU.

(Dial Pad)
Group No:

be

l

CO/PBX

line

key

to

To change 60 seconds to 10 seconds, press
COIPBX line key 2.

I
Default

COlpBX line keys

4.

F’ress the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block l-12-00, ACD/UCD
Group Pilot Number Assignment,

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature

Programming

in this manual.

..-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- ACDKJCD OVERFLOW

i This Memory Block specifies the maximum time a waiting ACDNCD
. before overflowing to a specified Station or Station Hunt Group.
‘.l.l.l.-.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

Programming

TIMER

call remains

SELECTION
at an ACD/UCD

i
Group i
.

5-193

._

THIS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY

LEFT

BLANK

-..
:

5-194

programming

TRUNK TO TENANT

ASSIGNMENT

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

PC Programming

Tenant

Mode

I

Data No.

l

ICM

I 01

Press the corresponding
change data option.

n

l

key to

: To move cursor.
: To enter data.

: Previous page.

OFF

NO
(Not Assigned)

Data

line

: Next page.

key

1 FNC 1 key
2%;

CO/PBX

: Next Tenant No.

1 key

RECALL

NOTES:

Page No.

Title
Data No.
I
r-l-n
00
I
01:
TM-TNT
-----_---------------------TIME
DISPLAY

(00-47)

1 CNF

I

1. If data is changed while the .system is busy,
DATA ENTRY is displayed at the programming
station until the system becomes idle.

(Dial Pad)

cm ,q e
Didpadq .-q

Guide

Q ME

LK2

MLI

Tenant No.

Data No.
01

jusml

(TECHIB:K:D

v

3.

e
-

Tenant
2

q ON
YES
(Assigned)

The LED indication changes to indicate the
data each time the COIFBX line key is
pressed.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block Z-05, Line Key
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional

Memory
Block No.
2-05
4-09

Pmgramming
Memory

Block Name

Required

Lime Key Selection
Telephone to Tenant Assignment

Continued

Programming

on nextpage.

5-195

TRUNK

TO TENANT

Tenant
2

ASSIGNMENT

(continued)

COPBX

Number

Page 01 ( COlpBX

05

06

(01-64)
01-08)

07

08

Page 05 ( CO/PBX 33-40)

1 1 37 1 38 1 39

1 40

Page 06 ( COiPBX 41-48)

Page 03 ( COlpBX

Page 07 ( CO/PBX 49-56)

17-24)

LK2

LK3

LK4

17

18

19

20

LK5

LK6

LK7

LK8

21

22

23

24

Page 04 ( CO/PBX 25-32)

29

1 30

I

1 31

1 32

I

Data No.
01

corresponds to CO/PBX line key.

Page 02 ( CO/PBX 09-16)

LKl

B

1

Page 08 (COIPBX 57-64)

1
1

CO/PBX line keys

C.I.I.C.I.-.I.I.I.I.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i; This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Memory Block specifies assignment
.1.-.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.

5-196

1

- TRUNK TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT

of COPBX

i

‘:

lines to each tenant.
i

~Ogramming

.’

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Pro&ssionall2O&evel

II/Level

OPERATION:
Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

PC Programming
TECHiB:K:B

Mode

Tenant

0 MIC
ICM

0 LK2

l

In0

Data No.

5

I

I

1

2.

Tenant-Wide Mode:
Memory Block 2-06, Line Key Selection for
Tenant Mode, permits assignment of any desired
feature to each of the COLPBX line keys. All the
telephones in a tenant are assigned the same
features.

3.

Telephone Mode:
Memory Block 4-12, Line Key Selection for
Telephone
Mode, permits assignment
of any
feature to each of the COIPBX line keys. Each
telephone can be assigned different features.

TEL

I

Guide

Mixed use of Tenant-Wide
Mode and Telephone
Mode in the system is permitted.

Setting Data

Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
l
To change Telephone Mode to Tenant-Wide
Mode, press CO/PBX line key 1.

I

Data No.’
05

1.

(Dial Pad)
Tenant No.
(00-47) Data No.
Title
r-l
n-n
00
I
05 : MODE
-------------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

IUSER

1998

NOTES:

v

3.

m
m

Tenant
2

LINE KEY SELECTION

1.

Februarv

II Advanced

I

I

Default

COIPBX line keys

[ CNF

1 key

: Next Tenant-No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block 2-06, Line Key
Selection for Tenant Mode.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

I

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. II
2-06
(Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
4-12
ILine Key Selectionfor Telephone Mode

I

Required

I

,.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block allows each tenant
, Tenant-Wide Mode or Telephone Mode.
L.-.l.l.l.-.-.I.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

Programming

to specify

- LINE KEY SELECTION
either

of the two CO/PBX

key

i
assignment

modes: i
.

5-197

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

LINE KEY SELE;FDIN

12O/Level B/Level

FOR TENANT

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Example:

Mode

Tenant

I

0 MIC
l
ICM

LK2

4.

v

In0

Data No.

Settine

Tenant
2

s
.

To, assign Trunk
line key 1.

Service Manual
Data No.
06
“\
/
)i’

Guide

Group 05 to CO/PBX

Press CO/PBX line key 7; TKGP is displayed.

5. Enter 05 (for RT 05) using the dial pad.

6

6.

(Dial Pad)
Line Key
Tenant No.
No.
(00;47)
Data (01;24)

Installation

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

11Advanced

setting
Da)a(%)

Press the TRF key; data of CO/l?BX
01-24 is displayed successively.

line keys

7. After entering data for CO/PBX line key 24,
press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 2-07, System Speed
Dial Display Assignment.

3,
---------------------------8.

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

CO/PBX

line

key to

I

t Call

Feature
AccesS

Appeara=

I
CO/PBX he keys

Cm,
Dial pad
Fl

a-)
El-B

key

Trunk Group

Route

Advance

t Series 250 or higher.
$ Series 450 or higher.
l Series 500 or higher.

Press the SPER key to go back on-line.

This Memory Block assigns the following functions
to each of the CO/pBX line keys on each telephone in
a tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block
2-05, Line Key Selection.
Functions:
l
Not specified (NON)
l
CO/PBXLine
(CO) 01-64
l
*CFW-BNA
0 * CFW - ALL
l
t Call Appearance (0 00 - 47 - 01-24
(Refer to Note below)
l
Feature Access (FA) 01-10
l
Trunk Group (TKGP) 01-32
l
Route Advance Block (ADV) 01-16
l
Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) 01-96
l
t Call Arrival Keys (CAR) 01-88
l
Microphone (MIC)
l
Headset (HSET)
0 9 Scroll Key
l
* DND/Break Mode
a * Log On/Off
l
* BGM On/Off

: Tomovecursor.

t Series 250 or higher.
% Series 450 or higher.
* Series 500 or higher.

: To enter data.
: Next Tenant No.
Note:
m

Each Call Appearance
Block may have a
maximum of 24 Call Appearance Keys.

Additional

Memory
Block No.
2-05

Programming
Memory

Block

Name

Lime Key Selection

4

Continued

5-198

Required

on nextpage.

Programming

I:

“

LINE

KEY SELECTION

FOR TENANT

MODE

I

(continued)
Line
I Key

1
2
3
4

I

I

Not Specified
co
* CFW - BNA
1*CFW-ALL
I

5

I

Setting Data 1

I

t

Call Appearance
Block (00-47)

I

IFeature

Access

Trunk Group
Route Advance
Secondary
Incoming
Extension

I I
9

10
11
12
13
14
15
1 16

I

NON
co
FW BNA

I

1

Call Arrival
Microphone
IHeadset

I

I

1

FA

1

TKGP
ADV
SIE
I
I

I

I * Log on/off
(*BGMOn/Off

N/A
01-64
N/A
N/A

I
I
CAR
MIC

I

Key

01-24
01-10

01-32
01-16
Telephone
Port No.
01-96
01-88
N/A
N/A

1 H SET
SCROLL
DND

1

1

LOG

1

N/A
N/A
N/A

1

BGM

1

N/A

I

I

I

I

-

-

1 DataNo.
I 06

I

NOTES:

Data 2

Call
Appearance
I

Key

$ Scroll Key
* DND On/Off

Setting

1 FW ALL
C
I

I

I

11 6
7
8

Inflation

Tenant
2

1.

Specify CO/PBX line for square system and
Call Appearance for call appearance system.

2.

Specify Call Appearance
as the call
appearance
(number of Call Appearance
Block numbers from Memory Block 4-43,
Station
to
Call
Appearance
Block
Assignment).

3.

A maximum of 56 station ports in the Level
II system and 96 station ports in the Level II
Advanced system are available to be shared
by the ESI, SLI, and LLT KTUs.

4. The Call Arrival
features require
2.50 or higher.

Key and Call Appearance
system software version

5. The Scroll Key is used for confirming
ID Number.

Caller

$ Series 450 or higher.
* Series 500 or higher.

,.l.l.l.-.l.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

FOR TENANT MODE

i

i This Memory Block allows the assignment of functions to each of the CO/PBX line keys on each telephone
. tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block 2-05, Line Key Selection.
L.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-

in a i
.

Programming

5-199

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- LINE KEY SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

Tenant

0 MIC
ICM

I LK2

Data No.

I

0

1. If Deny is specified, no display is presented
when a System Speed Dial call is originated.

7

(Dial Pad)

II

i

07 :
00
-L-------------------------TIME

SPD DSP

3.

I 01

Dial pad
RECALL

key

: Next Page

171

key

: Previous Page

171

key

: Next Tenant No.

,

copBx
Line
LED
Data

m
I

SMDR prints telephone

even

into groups and
confirmation
is

numbers.

DISPLAY

q
q

+C]

I

2. Divide the Speed Dial numbers
whether
specify, per-tenant,
allowed or denied.

Page No.

Title

Guide

NOTES:

l

v

Tenant No.
(oog
DEo.

DataNo.
07

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

-

Tenant
2

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL DISPLAY
ASSIGNMENT

-+

: Tomovecursor

- m

: To enter data

OFF q

Patzeol

ON

I Allowed

Deny

When System Speed Dial is 90 buffers.

I

rage 02

LK6

LK5

LK7

LK8

* Series 100-450.
3. The LED indication changes to indicate the data
each time the CO/pBX line key is pressed.
l
Press RECALL/
FNC key to turn pages.
l
After entering data for all pages, press the
TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 2-08, ECR Relay to
Tenant Assignment.
4. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

f-1

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. I
l-l-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
l-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
1Selection 1

Required

1

LK2

1

LK3

1

LK4

1

c

Page 02

I

LKl

Page 01

Programming

I
I

When System Speed Dial is 1000 buffers.

LKl

LK2

800-899

900-999

LK5

LK6

LK4

LK3
I

I

LK7

LK8

I

+
I

I

..1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SYSTEM SPEED DIAL DISPLAY

i This Memory Block specifies whether or not confirmation
. the System Speed Dial memory is allowed.
..l.l.l.l.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-..

5-200

of the Speed Dial numbers

ASSIGNMENT

;

and messages stored in i
.

Programming

Tenant
2

ECR RELAY TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

PC Programming
0 MIC
l ICM

Tenant

1. By assigning Night Chime to a Tenant, incoming
calls to the Tenant Group in Night Mode can be
answered using the Night Call Pickup Access
Code.

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Title
I

I

00 I

08:
----------------------1 TIME

I

1

3;. Press the corresponding
change data option.
4-m

, a

1

1 key

CIW

81

ToneBelay

1

2.

The relays are Fixed (nonprogrammable).

I
I

3.

Night Chime must be assigned for Night Call
Pickup to work. A relay may be assigned even if
no ECR-F-11 KTU is installed in the system.

BLYTEJNANT
DISPLAY

+

Guide

NOTES:

v

Tenant No.
‘oo-&)
Dgo.

Data No.
08

CO/PBX

line

key to

: Tomovecursor
: Next Tenant No.

ToneRelay

ToneRelay

ToneRelay

CO/PBX line keys

4. -Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 2-01, Trunk to Tenant
Assignment.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
l-7-07

Programming
Memory
External

Block Name

Required

Icing Belay Cycle Selection

C.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

GENERAL

: This Memory

INFORMATION

- ECR RELAY TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT

Block specifies Tenant Assignment

for External

Tone Ring/Night

Chime function.

!

I.

b.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

Programming

5-201

THIS

5-202

PAGE INTENTIONALLY

LEFT

BLANK

Programming

TELEPHONE NUMBER TO TRUNK OR
DIRECTORY NUMBER TO ISDN TRUNK
ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:
1.

CO/PBX
3

Data No.
00

PC Programming
TECH

B:C:B:I

Guide

USER

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

CO/PBX No.
,‘Ol-64;

Mode

Q ME
l ICM

NOTES:
1. If the Trunk is an ISDN trunk, data must be
assigned using the Directory
Number that is
provided by the local telco.
When assigning
phone numbers in the system, do not use the area
code; use only the 7-digit phone number.

Setting Data (13 digits max.)
1

t

0 11 _
---------------------------TIME

3.

I LK3

CO/PBX

DISPLAY

Enter data using the dial pad.
To program 214-751-7600, enter
214-751-7600 using the dial pad.

l

4-m)
Dial pad
LNRlSPD

‘F/
1 CNF

4.

q+
q-q

: Tomovecursor
: $03esztidata

key

:

key

:

1 key

-

)

- (Hyphen)

Space (Clear after hold)

: Next CO/PBX Line No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-02, Trunk Status
Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

‘

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

.1.-.-.1~1*1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

! GENERAL
.

INFORMATION

- TELEPHONE

NUMBER TO TRUNK ASSIGNMENT

!
.

! This Memory Block specifies telephone numbers for the CO/l?BX lines accommodated
so that the telephone !
I number of a seized COIPBX line is displayed on the LCD of the telephone when originating
or answering a I
i CO/PBX call. (13 digits maximum)
.1.-.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

Programming

5-203

CWPBX
3

TRUNK STATUS SELECTION
OPERATION:

w

PC Programming
TECH

B:C:B:K

Data No.
02
Guide

.,_

USER

,.’

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

CO/PBX

Mode

(1

.” z;
v

El
v
0

Data No.

In

2

(Dial Pad)
CO/PBX No.
(01-64

Data
No.

Setting Data

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

COIPBX

line

key to

To change OUT & IN to IN, press CO/PBX
line key 2.

I

$3.
m
9 ..

COIPBX line keys

I{

key

:

Default

NextCO/PBX

LineNo.

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-03, Trunk-to-Trunk
Group Assignment.
5.
n

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

..1.-.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block specifies whether
, termination
only.
..l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-204

a CO/PBX

- TRUNK STATUS SELECTION
line

is used for call origination

i

and termination

or i
.

Programming

-.

1

TRUNK-TOoTRUN
GROUP
ASSIGNMENT’

I

CO/PBX
3

1
I

w
w

1 DataNo.
03
I

PC Programming

OPER.ATION:
TECH

B:C:B:L

I
,

Guide

USER

1. Gooff-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

CO/PBX

I/

: g;
NOTES:

v

1. There are 32 Trunk
system.

El
v

m
0

Data No.

3

3.

Data
No.

Title

3.

By specitying the priority order, up to four routes
(Trunk Groups) can be selected in Memory Block
l-l-30, Route Advance Block Assignment.
Idle
CO lines are selected and seized in this sequence.

4.

If LCR is installed,
Local Trunks should be
assigned to Trunk Group 1. When a number is
dialed that bypasses LCR, the system accessss
Trunk Group 1 and dials the number.

Enter TRK GP 15 at CO 01, using the
dial pad.

Example:

+a

8 1#1+

Dial pad

q wq

II

4.

5.

key

:

Tomovecursor.

:

To enter data.

:

Next CO/pBX

:
:

NotSet
Trunk Group 01-32

to the

When an Access Code corresponding to a Trunk
Group is dialed, an idle CO line is selected
automatically
and seized from the same Trunk
Group (C.0 line of either same tenant or another
tenant can be seized).

Trunk Group
No. (01-32)

Enter data using the dial pad.

available

2.

(Dial Pad).
COPBX No.
(01-64)

Groups

Line No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block 3-04, Trunk-toTrunk Transfer Yes/No Selection.

n

Additional

Pmgramming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

C.-.l.l.l.l~l.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

: This Memory Block assigns a Trunk
L .1,1.-.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-~-.-.-.-.~

Programming

- TRUNK-TO-TRUNK

Group Number

(01-32)

GROUP ASSIGNMENT

to each CO/PBX line.

i
l
I

5-205

.
s

CO/PBX
3

TRUNK-TO-TRUNK
TRANSJFER YES/NO
SELECTION

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Data No.
04
. \.:!
2,i

Guide

1. Gooff-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

0 MIC
ICM

COLPBX

NOTES:

l

‘I

1. YES must be assigned for both trunks to be
connected via the Trunk-to-‘IYunk
Transfer or an
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer feature.

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
CO/PBX No. Data
y-64),
, No. , ,
75th
I
Ol/
04:TRF
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

tm

,

Dialpad
II
3.

q-

:

Tomovecursor.

a-m

:

Toenterdata.

:

Next CO/PBX Line No.

key

Enter data using the dial pad.
l

4.

Data
, Setting
,
,
4
NO

To change
key 2.

NO to YES, press CO/PBX

line

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-05, Trunk Incoming
Answer Mode Selection.

n

Additional

Programming

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

1.-.-.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION
- TRUNK-TO-TRUNK
YES/NO SELECTION

. This Memory Block specifies whether
b.l.lmo=l.-.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

5-206

or not to allow Trunk-to-Trunk

TRANSFER

i

Transfer.

Programming

uwauanon

w+Mce Manual

Electra rroress1ona1 lxu/LRveI

ULevel

u AdV8PCeQ

2.

Enter:

Mode

CO/PBX

TECH

II

B:C:B:J

133~

Data No.
05

PC Programming

OPERATION:
Go off-line.

-

CO/PBX
3

TRUNK INCOMING ANSWER MODE
SELECTION

1.

r'emuarv

Guide

USER

,” ;;
v

In0 5

Data No.

(Diil Pad)
CO/PBX NO. Data
No.
--(01-64
0 11
05
---------------------------TIME

3.

Setting Data

I

LK2

1 NO ASSIGN
TANDM

TRF

I

t

Normal

Automatic Trunk-toTrunk Transfer
I

I

DISPLAY

change
To
Attendant/DISA,

CO/FBX

line key to

Automated
Normal
to
press CO/PBX line key 3.

I

t

LKl

NO ASSIGN

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

1

I

I

I

Default

CO/PBX line keys

1 CNF 1 key

:

Next CO Port No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block 3-06, Automatic
Tandem Trunk Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

~.1.1.-.-.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i GENERAL

INFORMATION

0TRUNK INCOMING

i This Memory Block specifies the incoming
. Attendant,
or DISA) per-outside line.
..~.-*l.l.l.l.l.l.~.~.~.~.~.~.~*~.~.~.~.~.~.~*~.~.~,~.~.~..

Programming

ANSWER MODE SELECTION

answer mode (Automatic

Trunk-to-Trunk

Transfer,

i

Automated

i
.

5-207

AUTOMATIC

TANDEM

CO/PBX
3

TRUNK ASSIGNMENT

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECH

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

CO/PBX

Mode

I1

Data No.
06

e

Guide
_,’.>

USER

A:C:A

.” g;

El

v
Data No.
(Dial

(Incoming)
COlpBX
No.

Pad)

(Outgoing)
CO/PBX
No.
(01-64)

Data

Example

of Tandem Trunk

Automatic

Assignment:

Trunk-to-Trunk

Transfer

of incoming

CO1toCO8.

3.

Enter data using the dial pad.
cm

, B+

Dial pad pg+J
1 CNF

1 key

:

To movecursor.

:

To enter data.

:

Next CO/PBX Line No.

Incoming (CO 1)
CO/PBXNo.
= 01
Setting Data = 08

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-07, CO/PBX Ringing
Variation Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
3-04

Programming

Required

Memory Block Name
Trunk-to-Trunk

Transfer

Yes/No

Selection

g

c. .1.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~
GENERAL INFORMATION
- AUTOMATIC

I

i This Memory Block specifies the incoming
.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

TANDEM

trunk and transferring

TRUNK ASSIGNMENT

trunk for Trunk-to-Trunk

Transfer.

;
;
J

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

Februarv

12O/Level WLevel II Advanced

CO/PBX RINGING VARIATION
SEIiECTION

COPBX

-

3

w

PC Programming
OPERATION:

Enter:

CO/PBX

Mode

Guide

NOTES:

0 MIC
l ICM

Fj

1.

v
I

This Memory Block is not applicable if Telephone
is selected in Memory Block l-l-28, Distinctive
Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection.
l

v

2.

m
0

Data No.

DataNo.
07

USEB

1. Go off-line.
2.

1998

High, medium or low ringing
transferring calls.

tone follows when

7

(Diil Pad)
CO/PBX No. Data
(01-64)
-Ann

Title

--L----------L------_---------

Setting Data

DSTRING

=

M

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

I
I

4.

key

I
I

Default

CO/PBX line keys

1

I

I

I

CNF

line line key to

To change M to H, press COIPBX line key 3.

I
1

1

CO/pBX

:

Next CO/PBX LineNo.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-14, Tie/DID Line
Type Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
Additional

n

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
l-l-28
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO
Selection

Required

c .1.1.1.1.1~-.1,1,1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i;This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Memory Block specifies a ringing
.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

- CO/PBX RINGING

tone (Low, Medium,

VARIATION

SELECTION

or High) for each CO/PBX line.

i.
J

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level E/Level II Advanced

Installation

TIElDIDLINE

TYPE ASSIGNMENT

CO/PBX
3

s
B

OPERATION:

PC Program
TECH A:D:A:G

1.

Gooff-line.

2.

Enter:

CO/PBX

II

Data
NO.

14 :

TIME

3.

ZNDDIAL
DISPLAY

to the

following

1 - Second Dial Tone
2 - Immediate Start
3 - Delay Dial
4 - wink Start
2.

This Memory
lines.

3.

This Memory Block at&&s Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.]

4.

If a second dial tone is selected,
system provides the dial tone.

5.

If Immediate,
Delay, or Wink Start is selected,
the local system provides the dial tone.

Setting Data

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

,.’

USER

1. Line keys 1-4 correspond
methods of loop supervision:

(Dial Pad)

I

,_-._i
-j

mingGuide

,” gz

Data No.

nnn
0 lf

DataNo.
14

NOTES:

Mode

v

TiefDIDNo.
(01-64)

Service Manual

I

CO/PBX line line key to

To change 2d dial tone to Immediate,
CO/PBX line key 2.

Block does not apply to CO/PBX

the distance

press

I
COfPBX line keys

Default

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-15, Trunk DTMF
Duration5terdigit
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

I

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. I
3-92
ITrunk (Installed, DP/Dm)
Selection

I

I

1

1

Required

r .-.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.L.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TIE/DID

i; This Memory Block assigns the method of loop supervision to be used
.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-210

1

LINE TYPE ASSIGNMENT
for each Trunk

associated with a Tie line.

Programming

i
4
.

-.,

TRUNK DTMF DURATIONiINTERDIGIT
SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

PC Programming
B:C:B:D

Data No.
15
Guide

USER

NOTES:

Mode

CO/PBX

[LIc3)
v

Data No.

,” g;

1. When DTMF is selected for the CO line in
Memory
Block
3-92,
Trunk
Unstalled,
DP/DTMF) Selection, specify the time duration
between sending the DTMF signal and sending
the next signal.

ul

15

(Dial Pad)
CO/PBX No. Data
(01-64)
0 11
15
---------------------TIME

Setting Data

Title

-95-n

:

100/70
---em-

MF

key

2.

This is also used for Tie lines.

3.

This Memory Block affects Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line
change data option.
l
To change Digit DTMF Duration and Interdigit
Time - 70 ms. to D.T
and LT. to 60 ms., pressCO/PBX line

I=]

3

-

TECH

v

3.

I

,

OPERATION:
1.

CO/PBX

:

NextCO/PBX

key

to

100 ms.
- 70 ms.
key 1.

LineNo.

*D.D. = DTMF Digit Duration
I.T. = Interdigit Time
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block 3-16, Tie Line
Prepause Time Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additimal

Memory
Block No.
3-92

Programming
Memory
Trunk (Installed,

Block Name

Required

DPIDTMF) Selection

C.-.-.l.-.l.-.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TRUNK DTMF DURATIONflNTERDIGIT

i
SELECTION
i. This Memory Block specifies the tone duration and interdigit time
L.-.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.D.J
Programming

of DTMF signals.

i
i.

5-211

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

TIE LINE PREPAUSE TIME SELECTION

CO/PBX

s

3

-

OPERATION:

PC Programming

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

COA?BX

I[

Data No.

-nnnnn

Data
No.

NOTES:

‘I

1. Prepause
time
differs
acknowledgment
signaling
2.

1

0 II
16
_---------------------------

Setting
Data

Title
:

TIME

PYRE

0

,,’

Pad)

according
method.

to

the

This Memory Block affects Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.

Page
No.
I

1

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change 0 seconds to 5.0 seconds, press
CO/PBX line key 8.

l

key

:

Next page.

‘F/

key

:

Previous page.

[=I

key

:

Next CO/PBX LineNo.

RECALL

1

I

I
CO/PBX

4.

-.x‘,

Guide

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

Page

Data No.
16

USER

v

(Dial
No.

A:D:C:I

Service Manual

: z;

I

COrPBX
(01-64)

Installation

II Advanced

line

keys

I

:..
.,,.&.:’
Default
li!!!fY

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-17, Tie Line Answer
Detect Time Selection.

n

Additional

Progmmming

Refer to Guide
in this manual.

to Feature

Programming

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
..1.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

0TIE LINE PREPAUSE TIME SELECTION

i This Memory Block specifies the time (prepause)
. DTMF to the distant system.
..1.1.-.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

when the originating

i

side becomes able to send dial pulse or i
.

Programming

,i

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

lZO/Level II/Level

TIE LINE ANSWER DETECT TIME SELECTION

CO/PBX
3

OPERATION:

Enter:

TECH

CO/PBX

Mode

II

Data No.

I

3.

Setting
Data

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

:A

Guide

USER

NOTES:

‘I

1. Answering
a call may not be possible if the CO
answer detect time is too long.

1

7

2. This Memory Block atIe& Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.

Page
No.

CO/PBX

line

key

to

To change 520 ms. to 910 ms., press CO/PBX
line key 8.

RECALT, key

:

Next page.

‘F/

key

:

Previous page.

I1

key

:

Next CO/PBX Line No.

Page 2
LKl
1040 ms.
LK5
1560 ms.

LK2
1170 ms.

LK3
1300 ms.

LK4
1430ms.

LK6

LK7

LK6

1690 ms.

1820 nS

1950ms.

I
CO/PBX line keys

4.

A:D:C

Data No.
17
t

v

(Diil Pad)
Title

I

1993

,” :;

I

CO/PBX No. Data
(01-64) . No.

-

PC Programming

1. Go off-line.
2.

Februarv

II Advanced

&$&
m

Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-18, Tie Line Release
Detect Time Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

~.1.1,1.-.1,-.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TIE LINE ANSWER DETECT TIME SELECTION

i This Memory Block specifies the duration between the time when the receiving
. system answers (off-hook) and the time when it is recognized as an answer.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

Programming

120/Level

II/Level

i

II Advanced i
.

5-213

Februarv

Electra

1998

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

3

OPERATION:
Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

‘Mode

CO/PBX

I[

8

a.

(Dial Pad)
CO/PEX No. Data
(01-64)
No.

ennnr-7

Setting
Data

Title

0 11

I

l8 : RLS
520
--_-----------------c_______
TIME
DISPLAY

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

Page
No.
I

1

1

CO/PBX

line

b.

key to

c.

To change 520 ms. to 910 ms., press CO/PBX
line key 8.
key

:

Next page.

‘F[’

key

:

Previous page.

IFI

key

:

Next CO/PBX Line No.

RECALL

Page 2
I
LKl
1040ms.
LK5
1560ms.

I

I
I
I
1
I

LK2
1170mo.
LK6
1690 ms.

I
I
I
1

I

LK3
1300ms.
LK7
182Oms.

I
COLPBX Line Key

I
I

LK4
1430ms.
LK8
1950ms.

I

I
1

.- -..:..
.\
,/’

mingGuide

Specify distinguishing
circuit
on-hook, noise, &d
temporary
There are four probable situations
detection.

v
III 1

1

NOTES:

z z;
v

Data No.

1 DataNo.
18
I

w

I
PC Program

Service Manual

.

1 CO/PBX 1

TIE LINE RELEASE DETECT TIME
SELECTION

1.

Installation

release
from
interruption.
for CO release

Called side hangs up first.
The circuit is
considered to be released 92 ms. + specified
time after the other party disconnects the
call.
Called side hangs up second. The circuit is
considered to be released when the specified
time has elapsed after the other party hangs
UP.
Origina$ng
side hangs up first. The circuit
is considered to be released 92 1119. +
speci$d time after the other party hangs up.

d.

Originating
side hangs up second.
The
circuit is considered to be released when the
specified time has elapsed after the other
Party Ws
UP.
This Memory Block affects Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.

1
I

Default

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 3-19, Tie Line/CO/PBX
Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

PrO@WI.ImbJg

Refer to Guide ta Feature Programming
in this manual.

,.I.‘.‘.-*‘.-.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TIE LINE RELEASE DETECT TIME SELECTION

i

i This Memory Block specifies the duration between the time when the circuit disconnection is detected on the i
. Tie line on the distant system side or intrasystem side and the time when it is recognized as Tie line release.
.
..1~1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-214

Programming

.,

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

lZO/Level II/Level

TIE LINE/CO/PBX INCOMING SIGNAL DETECT
TIME SELECTION

II Advanced
CO/PBX

PC Programming

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

-

1

TECHjA:D:C:E

Mode

COiPBX

Fl

,” E-

1998

1 DataNo.
I
19

-

OPERATION:
1.

Februarv

I

Guide

USER 1

* In Wink Start method
Pace 1

v

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
COPBX No. Data
(01-64)
No.
nnnnn
/I

Title

Setting
Data

Page 2
LKl
LK2
LK3
LK4
I
I
104Oms. (08) I 1170ms. (09) I 1300ms. (10) I 1430ms. (11)
LK5
LK6
LK’7
LK8
I
I
I
1560ms. (12) I 1690ms. (13) I 182Oms. (14) I 195Oms. (15)

I

Page
No.

----------------------------

* In Delay method
Page 1

3.

Press the corresponding
CO/PBX line key to
change data option.
Example: In Wink Start method.
l
To change 390 ms. to 910 ms., press CO/PBX
line key 8.

1 me 1 key

:

Previous page.

1 CNF 1 key

:

Next CO/PBX Line No.

key

RECALL

4.

Press the
advance
Off-Guard
5. Press the

1Receiving

Pace 2
LKl
LK2
LK3
LK4
I
240ms. (081 I 270ms. (09) I 300ms. 110)
. , I 330ms. (111
.~ ,
LK5
LK6
LK7
LKS
360 ms. (12)
390 ms. (13)
420 ms. (14)
450 ms. (15)

I

:

Next page.

*IIlco1
Page 1

TRF key to write the selected data and
to Memory Block 3-20, Tie Line Loop
Time Selection.
SPKR key to go back on-line.

25Oms. (04) 1 300 ms. (05) 1 350ms. (06) I 400 ms. (07) 1

Side 1
I

1

Incoming

signal detection

DC loop
supervision

’
Time

k--4
Sending
acknowledgment

signal

1

Additional Programming
-I
Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
3-14
Tie/DID Line Type Assiment

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Page 2
LKl
LK2
450 ms. (08)
500 ms. (09)
LK5
LK6
1 65oms.(l2)
I 7OOms.(l3)

I

LK4
600 ms. (11)
LKS
8OOms.U5)

I

CO/PBX line keys
t

I
Required

NOTES:
1. For second dial tone method and immediate
method, the time is fixed at 30 ms.
2. This Memory Block affects Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.
1.1.1.1.1.1,1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.

- TIE LINEICOIPBX INCOMING
TIME SELECTION

i This Memory Block specifies the duration between the time when the incoming
i detected and the time when acknowledgment
signal is sent out.
.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.

Programming

I

LK3
550 ms. (10)
LK7
750ms.(l4)

I

n

!
I

I

SIGNAL DETECT
signal from another

1
!
I

system is i

i
5-215

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

TIE LINE LOOP OFF-GUARD
SELECTION

liO/Level

Installation

II&eve1 Il Advanced

s

COn?EX

TIME

PC Program
TECH

DataNo.
20

-

3

OPERATION:

Service Manual

A:D:C:F

mingGuide

!\,
F”

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

CO/pBX

Mode

pj

NOTES:

,” g;
v

1. Assign a loop off-guard time to eliminate
the
possibility of system malfunction
caused by noise
when going off-hook to answer a call from
another system on a Tie line call.

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
CO/PBXNo. Data
(01-64)
No.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

The system ignores any noise that
detected during
the time specified
Memory Block.

3.

This Memory Block affects Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.

Setting Page
Data
No.

Title

.

4.

To use the Hot Line function,
must be entered:

I.
:

-s--v

DISPLAY

3. Uee the dial pad to enter data.

or CO Line

one of the following

Station Number
Access Code -t Dial Number
l
Speed Dial Access Code + Speed Dial Buffer
Number
5. Up to 10 digits can be assigned.
l

cm,

I#I-w

: T~om;:

Dial pad

q-q

: To enter &a.

LNIUSPD

key

+ *

: *input

LNRlSPD

key

+ #

: # input

l

Example:
1. Hot Line

Setting Data:

0 - 9, *, #
TelNo.

k,

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-24, SLT Hookflash
Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additkmal

2.

----------------------------

PrimeLine
Tel No.
(01-96)
III

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

Data

Data
No.

Setting Data

---------------------------I”,:&,

8 = Tie Line Access Code

1

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- PRIME LINE/HOT

i; This Memory Block enables the user to access various features
.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
Programming

LINE ASSIGNMENT

when going off-hook.

1

i
i
5-261

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

SLT HOOKF’LASH

12O/Level II/Level

ASSIGNMENT

II Advanced

Installation

Telephone
4

m

Service Manual
DataNo.
24

PC Programming
TECHiB:B:D:G

OPERATION:

Guide

IUSER I

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

Telephone

0 MIC
ICM

LK4

I

NOTES:

l

1. This Memory Block affects only the single-line
telephone
station
assigned Prime
Line in
Memory
Block 4-23, Prime
Line/Hot
Line
Assignment.

v

m

Data No.

2

4

(Dial Pad)
Tel No.
(01-96)
-A-n

Title

Setting Data

0 II

I
3.

24 : SLT HK
--------------------c_______
DISPLAY
TIME

1
3.
I

HOLD
I

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

,2.
I

Data

CO/PBX

line

I

L

I

press

I

I

After the single-line telephone begins to dial out
9+ hookflash follows in Memory Block l-3-02,
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection.

key to

To change HOLD to DISC (Disconnect),
CO/PBX line key 2.

I

When Prime Line is assigned to a single-line
telephone, hookflash drops the CO and issues
KM dial tone if this Memory Block is set to
discomlect.

I

I

Default

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to writs the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-26, DISA ID Number
Station Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
l-3-02

Psogramming
Memory
SLT Hookflash

Block Name

Beqnired

Signal Selection

..1.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block specifies the single-line
.trunk.
..I.l.-.-.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-~-.-~-.o8~

5-262

- SLT HOOKFLASH

telephone

hooking

operation

ASSIGNMENT
to either HOLD

i

or disconnect

the i
.

Programming

-_
-.

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

DISA ID NUMBER

12O/Level II/Level

Telephone
4

STATION ASSIGNMENT

TECHIB:E:D

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

-

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Februarv

II Advanced

Telephone

I

1998

Data No.
26
Guide

IUSER I

0 MIC
l ICM

LK4
v

Data No.

ul

2

6

(Dial
Station
PortNo.
(01-96)
-l+r--l--l

Data
Title

011
26:
---------------------------TIME

3.

Pad)

Setting

Data

01
DISPLAY

Use the dial pad to enter data.
Assign DISA ID Buffer Number

l

(01-96).

cm, q +
Dial pad q - B

: To~~t~data.

1 CNF

: Next Station Port No.

4.

: Tomove

1 key

Press the TRF key to write
advance to Memory Block
Indication Selection.

the selected data and
4-28, Bilingual
LCD

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
Default
Station Port
Number

I

DISA ID Buffer
Number

01

01

.f

I

I

I

W

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this manual.

C.‘.-.‘.‘.-.-.‘.‘.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- DISA ID NUMBER STATION ASSIGNMENT

; This Memory Block assigns the DISA ID Buffer Number corresponding to the station port number.
! printout of the station number corresponds to the calling party who dialed the DISA ID number.
b.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

Programming

;

The SMDB i
.

5-263

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

BILINGUAL

LCD INDICATION

12O/Level H/Level II Advanced

Installation

Telephone
4

s

SELECTION

PC Programming
TECH

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Service Manual
Data No.
28
Guide

B:B:C:B

NOTES:

Mode

Telephone

0 MIC
l ICM

El LK4
w

.
1. English or Japanese can be displayed
of a multiline terminal.

on the LCD

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Tel No.
,(0’=96),

Data
, No.
28

0 II

,
:

Title

,

, , Setting , Data

LANGU

ENG

----------------L----------I

DISPLAY

TIME

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.

I

CO/PBX

key to

To change
ENG
(English)
to
(Japanese), press CO/PBX line key 1.

l

I
COlpBX line keys

4.

line

JAPA

Default

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-29, HFU Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Progmmming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

C.-.l.l.l.l.l,l.l.l,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.,

i;This

GENERAL

INFORJMATION

Memory Block specifies which language
.1.-.1.1.-.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-264

- BILINGUAL
(Japanese/English)

LCD INDICATION
is displayed

SELECTION

on the multiline-terminal

LCD.

Programming

i
;

-.
,-

Telephone

HFU SELECTION

4

PC Programming

OPERATION:

-

DataNo.

s

29

Guide

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

I LK 4
v

Q MIC
. ICM

Data No.
(Dial
Tel Port

No.

(01-96)

Pad)

Data
Title

No.

Setting

Data

COIPBX

line

-----_----------------------

3.

Press the -corresponding
change data option.
l

To change
key 2.

key to

NO to YES, press COIPBX

line

I
COPBX

line

NO = HamWee
YES = Handsfree

Default

keys

Unit not operational
Unit operational

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-30, Hold/Transfer
Recall Display Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR

n

Additional

key to go back on-line.

Propamming

Refer to Guide
in this manual.

to Feature

Programming

r .1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
i

. This Memory Block enables or disables the built-in
1 .1.1.-.1.1*1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-265
Programming

- HFU SELECTION

Handsfree Unit per station.

1

i
i

HOLD/TRANSFER
RECALL
SELECTION

Telephone

DISPLAY

4

-

Data No.

m

30

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
Enter:

2.

NOTES:
Telephone

Mode

1. The Hold Recall display appears on the bottom
line of the display if this Memory Block is
assigned for YES.

v
Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Tel No.
IOl-961,

Data
, No.

,

,

Title

, , Setting, Data

0 11
:HLD
DSP
30
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

2.

An LCD indication
of the CO line number
appears on the upper line of the display when a
recall occurs, regardless of this Memory Block
assignment.

YS

COIPBX

line

key

to

To change YS to NO, press CO/PBX line
key 2.

I
colPBx

Default

line keys

YES = LCD indication

available

LCD Example:
IfYes: RCL 01
From [loll
NO = LCD indication

is not available

LCD Example:
If No: RCL 01
Time Display
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block 4-31, Receiving
Internal/All
Call Page Selection.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming
in this manual.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.1,1.1*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

f GENERAL
l

This Memorv

INFORMATION

- HOLD/TRANSFER

Block enables or disables the Hold Recall indication

RECALL DISPLAY

SELECTION

.

on the LCD.

J

1 .1.1.-.1.1.1.-..-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-~-~

5-266

:

Programming

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

RECEIVING

INTERNAL/ALL
SELECTION

12OLevel II/Level

CALL PAGE

Februarv

II Advanced
Telephone
4

-

PC Programming
TECH B:B:B:G

OPERATION:

Data No.
31
Guide

USER T:H

NOTES:

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

1998

Mode

Internal Emergency All Call Page and Internal
Paging by Tenant Group overrides this Memory
Block. Refer to Memory Block l-l-46, Access

Telephone

Data No.
(Dial

Tel No.
[Oi-$361,
I

I

Data
,

,

NO.

,

nt1e

,

, Setting , Data
1

0 II 31 :
----------------------------

PAGING

YS

DISPLAY

TIME

I

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

Pad)

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change YES to NO, press COLPBX line
key 2.

LK5

I

LK6

I

LK?

I

LK8

I

CO/PBX

4.

Default

line keys

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-32, Trunk Digit
Restriction.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
m

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide
in this manual.

to Feature

Programming

,.-.l.l.l.-.-.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- RECEIVING INTERNAL/ALL
SELECTION

i. This Memory Block enables or disables receiving an Internal
b.l.l.-.l.-.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.

Programming

Zone or Internal

CALL PAGE

All Zone Page per station.

i

i
;

5-267

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12O/Level II/Level

Installation

II Advanced
Telephone
4

TRUNK DIGIT RESTRICTION

I

PC Programming
TECH

OPERATION:

B:B:B:L

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

El

Data No.

: Ez

I
3.

Data
No.

OlI
32
----------------L-----------

Guide

USER

1. Enter the digit that when dialed drops the call.

,

,
:

Title
DGREST

TIME

2.

Code Restriction
feature is used.

3.

Trunk
lines.

4.

Tie Line Code Restriction
must be assigned
before this feature works on Tie lines.

13121
(Dial

,

Da&No.
32

NOTES:
v

Tel No.
[Ol-961,

Service Manual

Pad)

, ,SettiWr
=

Digit

must be assigned

Restriction

applies

before this

to all COIPBX

00

DISPLAY

Enter data using the dial pad.
Setting Data

II

key

:

OO, Ol-99
digits (00 :
No Limit)

:

Next Tel. No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-33, Fax Indication
Station Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

W

Additional
Refer

Progmmming

to Section

6 -Code

Restriction

in this

chapter.

..1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TRUNK DIGIT RESTRICTION

i

i

i This Memory Block specifies, per station,
. outside line.
..l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-268

the maximum

number

of digits that can be dialed while

on any i
a

Programming

1.
,’>’

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

FAX INDICATION

Februarv

12OILevel II/Level II Advanced
Telephone
4

STATION ASSIGNMENT

m

1998

Data No.
33

PC Programming
Guide
USER

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Telephone

Mode

0 ME
ICM

LK4

I

l

NOTES:

v

En3

Data No.

1. The station number

of the Fax station must be
programmed
under a Feature
Access or a
One-Touch key on a multiline terminal.

3

(Dial Pad)
FaxPortNo.
(01-96)

~~~
No,

Title

Tel Port No.
(01-96)

----------------------------

3. Enter the data using the dial pad.

Telephone

Port No. :

Fax Port No.:

00 (Not Assigned)
01 - 96

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-34, Fax Indication
Networking
Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

I

i! This

GENERAL
Memory

INFORMATION

Block specifies which multiline

L .-.-.-.1.-.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

in this manual.

- FAX INDICATION
terminal

STATION ASSIGNMENT

displays the Fax indication.
J

5-269

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level K/Level

FAX INDIIUT~UT~OREING

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

3

In

4

(Dial Pad)
Dab

011
34:FAXNET
----_----------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

Data No.
34
Guide

1. This Memory Block must be programmed
when
requiring Fax messages over Tie/DID lines or the
Automated Attendant
with CO/PBX lines.

Fax Port No.
(01-96)

Title

n--n

s

l

v

Tel Port No.
(01-96)

Telephone
4

Service Manual

0 MIC
ICM

III LK4

Telephone

Data No.

Installation

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

IL Advanced

=

,oo

Use the dial pad to enter the data. .

00 (Not Assigned)
01 - 96 (Fax Port No.)

Setting Data:

cm
Dialpad

171

q

,

q+

-m

key

: Tomovecursor.
: Toenterdata.
: Next Tel. Port No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-35, Voice Mail/SLT
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

8

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

e.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- FAX INDICATION

NETWORKING

ASSIGNMENT

i This Memory Block specifies the station port that receives a Fax message over a Tie line network
. using - the Automated Attendant
feature with CO/PBX lines.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

5-270

i

or when i
.

Programming

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

VOICE MAILBLT

12OILevel II/Level

SELECTION

Februarv

II Advanced
Telephone
4

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

-

Data No.

-

35

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH

B:B:D:J

1998

Guide

USER

Telephone

Mode

The SLT Adapter

and the ADA (2) do not support

Data No.
2. A maximum

number

of 16 voice mail

ports is

Tel Port No. Data
Setting Data
0 II
35 :
------------------_--------TIME

3.

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

To change
key 2.

NO

VMAIL

CO/PBX

line

key to

NO to YES, press CO/PBX

line

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-36, Voice Prompt
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

I

in this manual.

*1.1.1.1.1.1.-.1,1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

This Memory
! ports.
n

GENERAL

Block specifies whether

L .1.1.-.-.1.1.-.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.

Programming

INFORMATION

- VOICE MAIL/SLT

SELECTION

or not a Voice Mail system is to be interfaced

i

with the system for SLT .
I
.

J

5-271

VOICE PROMPT

Telephone
4

SELECTION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

3

._ ; :,;’

0 MIC
ICM

I LK4

III

Data No.

Data No.
36

PC Programming
Guide
TECHIB:B:B:N
IU!~I~RIT:P

OPERATION:
1.

-

l

6

(Dial Pad)
Tel Port NO. Data
Setting Data

0 II
36 :
---------------------------TIME

3.

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

NO

PROMPT

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change NO to YES, press CO/PBX
key 2.

line

I
CO/PBX line keys

&$%,g Default
m

YES = Allow
NO = Deny
4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-37, Extension Line
Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode).

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

c .-,-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION

i. This Memory Block specifies whether to allow or deny the Voice
1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
5-272

1

- VOICE PROMPT SELECTION

i
;

Prompt feature per station.

Programming

..-.I

Installation

Electra Professional

Service Manual

EXTENSION

12OILevel II/Level

,Februarv 1998

II Advanced
Telephone
4

LINE KEY RING ASSIGNMENT
(DAY MODE)

-

Data Nd.
37

PC Progmuaming

OPERATION:

TECH B:B:C:I

Guide

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

0 MIC
e ICM

LK4

I

NOTES:

‘I

In
3

Data No.

1.
7

0 l/
37 :
---------------------------TIME

3.

Title

,I

.nn

EXT

Page

n,
I

DAY’

green.

2. This Memory
Block applies
only when a
Secondary Incoming Extension or a Call Arrival
Key is programmed for line key appearance.

(Dial Pad)
Tel Port No. Data
(01-W
No.

When Ring is set, the LED lights

3. The Call Arrival Key feature
software version 2.50 or higher.

01

requires

system

DISPLAY

Use the dial pad to enter data.
Next page.

1 FNC
II

1 key

:

Previous page.

key

:

Next Tel. No.
CO/PBX
Line LED

13

0

OFF

I

ON &reed

ON (red)

Data

No Ring

Immediate

SDelayed

Ring

Ring

Series

I
t

4.

LK5
21

I
I

LK6
22

I
I

I

LK7
23

LKS
24

I
I

I

300 or higher.

I
I

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block 4-38, Extension
Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode).

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide ta Feature Programming

in this manual.

.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
I

GENERAL

i

i This Memory Block specifies the ringing
; Call Arrival Key.
L.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.---.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

Programming

1

INFORMATION
- EXTENSION LINE KEY RING
ASSIGNMENT (DAY MODE)
assignment

on incoming

calls to a Secondary Incoming

i
Extension

or a i

i

5-273

Februarv

Electra Professional

1990

EXTENSION

12OlLevel II/Level

Installation

II Advanced
Telephone

LINE KEY RING ASSIGNMENT
(NIGHT MODE)

1

Service Manual

-

1 DataNo.

PC Programming

OPERATION:

TECH B:B:C:I

;;

Guide

,//

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

0 MIC
ICM

ElLK4

Telephone

Mode

NOTES:

l

w

Data No.

1. When Ring is set, th6LED

kkl

2. This Memory
Block applies
only when a
Secondary Incoming Extension or a Call Arrival
Key is programmed for line key appearance.

(Dial Pad)
Tel Port NO. Dab
(01-96)
No.

Title

lights green.

Page

3. The Call Arrival Key feature
software version 2.50 or higher.

j”,::,
----------------------------

requires

system

3. Use the dial pad to enter data.
key

:

Next page.

I[

key

:

Previous page.

I]

key

:

Next Tel No.

BECALL

n

Cl

0

COiPBX
Line LED

OFF

ON keen)

ON beds

Data

NORing

Immediate

$Delayed

R&if

=w

Series 300 or higher.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data
and advance to Memory Block 4-39, ADA (2)
Ring Mode Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

l

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Progmmming

r .1~1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
- EXTENSION LINE
i.

ASSIGNMENT

i This Memory Block specifies the ringing
’ or a Call Arrival Key.

assignment

in this manual.

1

KEY RING

i.

(NIGHT MODE)
on an incoming

L .1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

call to a Secondary

Incoming

Extension

I

i
Programming

<:

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

Fkbruarv

II Advanced
Telephone
4

ADA (2) RING MODE ASSIGNMENT

-

Data No.
39

PC Programming
OPERATION:
1.
2.

NOTES:

Mode

Telephone

0 MIC
l
ICM

I LK4

1.

No Ring:
Telephone.

2.

Station Number Ring: Only calls directed to the
multiline
terminal Station Number ring at the
single-line telephone.

v

Data No.

(3(41
(Dial Pad)

Tel Port No. Data
(01-96)
Title
r-l+lr-lr---l
:ADAB
0 11
39
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3.

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

No calls

ring

at the

single-line

Setting Data

3. All Ring: All calls that ring at the multiline
terminal also ring at the single-line telephone.

=

4.

STA

CO/PBX

line

key

A maximum
of 16 ADA(B)-W
can be installed in the system.

(BK)/(SW)

units

to

To change Station No. Ring to All Ring, press
CO/PBX line key 3.

I

1

I

I

I
CO/PBX line keys
CNP

Guide

USER

Go off-line.
Enter:

1998

key

J
I

Default

: Next Tel. Port No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block 4-40, LCR Class
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

r .1.1.1.1.1.-.1~-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-,-.-.-.,
GENERAL INFORMATION
- ADA (2) RING MODE ASSIGNMENT
i
! This Memory Block specifies the SLT to be connected to the ADA(B)-W

Programming

(BK)/(SW) Unit ringing

mode.

i

5-275

Februarv

1998

Professional

Electra

LCR CLASS

12O/Level II/Level

SELECTION

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Telephone

m

Data No.
a

A

PC Programming
TECH

OPERATION:

B:B:B:E

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

1

0 Ivm
ICM

LK4

l

v

Data No.

III4

1. LCR Class Selection
Tables as follows:
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class

0

(Dim1 Pad)
Tel Port No.

Dab
_---

:LCRCLS
0 II
40
---------------------------TIME
DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

I

USER

.-

T:O

.-.__
?,
:;
.-j

NOTES:

1. Go off-line.
2.

Guide

=

0

line

key to

No LCR
Use Area
Use Area
Use Area
Use Area
cannot

Code
Code
Code
Code

Table
Table
Table
Table

be assigned

to Area Code

1
2
3
4

2.

Stations
classes.

3.

An MIF-F(L)-10
KTU must be installed
system to support this feature.

I

COiPBX

0
1
2
3
4

corresponds

to multiple

LCR

in the

To change Class 0 to Class 1, press CO/PBX
line key 2.

Class4

I

I
CO/PBX line keys

Default

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block 4-41, SIECAR
Ringing Line Preference Selection.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

c. .1,1.1.-.-.1.1,1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.
GENERAL
INFORMATION
- LCR CLASS

1.

SELECTION

! This Memory Block specifies the LCR Class per-station.
The 12OILevel II/Level II Advanced system has four !
I Area Code Tables. Each LCR Class can be allowed different Trunk Group access, allowing priority levels for 1
. the station user.
1 .-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

i

5-276

Programming

..

SIE/CAR RINGING LINE PREF’ERENCE
SELECTION

4

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

1. This

3.

requires

system

software

version

2.

The Call Arrival Key feature requires
softwareversion
2.50 software or higher.

system

Da&,

Press the corresponding
change the data option.

COIPBX

line

key

to

.To change YES to NO, press CO/PBX line
key 1.

l

I CNF

key

:

Next Tel No.

I

Default

CO/PBX line keys

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data, and
advance
to
Memory
Block
4-42,
Call
Forward-Busy
Immediately/Delay
Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

function

1

(Dial Pad)
Tel Port No.

Guide

l

m
4

AdditionalPro@ammin.g

Refer to Guide ta Feature Programming

in this manual.

.1.1~1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
I

41

NOTES:

0 MIC
ICM

I LK4
v

Data No.

I

PC Programming
B:B:C:M
y

OPERATION:
1.

s

I

GENERAL

i.

INFORMATION

- SIEKAR RINGING
SELECTION

LINE PREFERENCE

1

i8

I This Memory Block specifies whether to allow or deny Ringing Line Preference (go off-hook or press SPKR) on 1
’ all telephones that are assigned Secondary Incoming Extensions and/or Call Arrival Keys.
i
1 .-,1.1.1,-.-.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.

Programming

5-277

Februaw

Electra Professional

1998

12OKevel IY.Kevel II Advanced

Installation

Telephone
4

I

CALL FORWARD-BUSY
IMMEDIATELY/DELAY
SELECTION

Service Manual
DataNo.
42
‘x

OPERATION:

.’

1. Goof&line.
Enter:

2.

Mode

v

m
4

Data No.

2

(Dial
TEL

Port

No.

Pad)

Requires system software version 2.00 or higher.

Data

(01-96)

Title

Setting

Data

-A-n
0

: BUSYFWD

42

11

YS.

DISPLAY

I

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
To change
key 1.

l

line

key to

YES to NO, press CO/PBX

I

I

CO/PBX

line

I

I

I

I

CO/PBX

I

CNF

4.

line

Defauit

keys

key

:

Next TEL No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-43, Station to Call
Appearance Block Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

Programming

Memory

Memory

Block No.
l-2-22

Call Forward

Block Name

No Answer

Timer

Required
Selection

,-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

!

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CALL FORWARD-BUSY
SELECTION

I
.
I This Memory Block specifies an immediate
’ station is set for Call Forward Busy.
1 ,I.l.-.l.-.-.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-278

forward

or delay forward

IMMEDIATELY/DELAY

for a Call Waiting

incoming

1

I
.
call if the I
i

Programming

Installation

Service

Electra Professional

Manual

12OILevel II/Level

Telephone
4

STATION TO CALL
APPEARANCE BLOCK ASSIGNMENT

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

System

1998

Data No.
43
Guide

USER
0

El LK4

l

MIC
ICM

NOTES:

v

Data No.

-

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Pebruarv

II Advanced

In4

3

(Dial

Pad)

1.

This feature requires
or higher.

system software

version 2.50

Call

3.

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:
To assign TEL Port Number 01 to
Call Appearance Block 01, enter 01
using the dial pad.
-m

,

q

Dialpad

I

CNF

q -t

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter setting data.

-m

: Next CAR No.

key

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block 4-44, Caller ID
Outgoing CO Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

.

n

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Rogramming

in this

manual.

e.1.1.-.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- STATION TO CALL APPEARANCE

i
BLOCK ASSIGNMENT
i. This Memory Block assigns a multiline terminal to a Call Appearance
L.l.-.l.l.I.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-*-.-~-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

Block.

i
i
;

5-279

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

CALLER ID OUTGOING

12O/Level II/Level

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

Installation

Telephone
4

I

CO SELECTION

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

II Advanced

TECHIA:

ul
4

I

TIME

USER

2’

The Caller ID Scroll Key is assigned using Memory
Blocks 2-06, Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode,
and 4-12, Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode.

3. This feature
or higher.

DISPLAY

requires

system software

version

4.50

Enter data using the dial pad.
Example:
To assign TEL Port Number 01 to
seize Trunk Group 01, enter 9 using
Access Code 9 is
the dial pad.
assigned using MB l-l-46,
Access
Code U-Digit) Assignment.
tm

CNF

Additional

q+
q Mq
,

Dial pad

n

Setting Data

:

r-----3.

2.
I

‘;..;

1. Setting Data is Access Code Assignment.
(Memory
Block l-l-46,47,48,
Access Code (1-Digit/2-Digit/3Digit) Assignment
ex: Dial 9 (101) --* Trunk Group
1.

4

(Dial Pad)

Data
No.

Guide

NOTES:

v

TEL
Port No.
(01-96)
I
1
01144

Data No.
44

0 MIC
l ICM

Telephone

Data No.

J:D

Service Manual

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter setting data.

key

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

,I.l.-.l.l.l.l.l.l.L.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
1

.

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CALLER ID OUTGOING

CO SELECTION

I. This Memory Block assigns the Trunk Group, Route Advanced Group, or Closed Numbering Group that is
1 seized for Caller ID Outgoing Calls. The Caller ID Scroll Key is used to access the Caller ID to be called.

i .1.-.-.-.1.-.-.-.1.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.
5-280

Programming

1
I
i

~_

i ,,.

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced
1 Telenhone
4

SLT DATA LINE SECURITY ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:

Februarv
1
I

PC Programming

Mode

Telephone

0 MIC
ICM

I LK4

Data No.

I

90

Guide

In9

1. If connecting SLTIVM, assign SLT NORMAL,
connecting FAX/Modem,
assign SLT DATA.

0

(Dial Pad)
Dab
No.

Title

If a multiline
terminal is assigned for data line
security,
Tone
Override
and
Call
Alert
Notification
tones are not heard from the
handset; however, the tone is still sent and heard
from the speaker when off-hook.

3.

Data Line Security denies a station from barging
in, even if Barge-In is allowed in Class of Service.
If this MB is set to SLT Data the Voice Override
Tone is not heard when doing a Voice Over Split.

4.
3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

COIPBX

To change SLT NORMAL
press CO/PBX line key 2.

line

key to

if

2.

Setting Data

----------------------------

l

I

DataN0.

NOTES:

l

v

Tel Port No.
(01-96)

I

USER

1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

-

1998

to SLT DATA,

I
COPBX

Default

line keys

: Next Tel. Port No.
4., Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory
Block 4-91, Telephone
Ringing Variation Selection.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

AdditionalPmgramming
Refer to Guide to Feature

1

in this manual.

.-.1.-,1.1.1.1,1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-,

i. This

.

Programming

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Memory Block specifies the Normal/Data

Programming

- SLT DATA LINE SECURITY ASSIGNMENT
position for single-line

telephones.

:
.
.

5-281

9

Telephone
4

TELEPHON~$ERiXN$NVARIATION

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Telephone

Mode

0 MIC
ICM

LK4

I

Guide

.’---./
;I :j

NOTES:

l

1. This Memory Block is applicable if Telephone is
selected in Memoti
Block l-l-28,
Distinctive
Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection.

Data No.
(Dial Pad)
Tel Port No. Dab
(01-96)
Title
n*nn
:RNGTONE=
0 II
21
_---------------_---________
DISPLAY
TIME

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

Data No.
91

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

-

2.

Setting Data

High, medium or low ringing
transferringcalls.

tone follows

when

RINGING

SELECTION

M

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change M to H, press COIPBX line key 3.

I

Default

CO/PBX line keys

1 CNF 1 key
4.

: Next Tel. No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block 4-92, Receiving
Volume Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

m

Additional

Memory
Block No.
l-l-28

Programming
Memory
Distinctive

Block

Name

Required

Ringing by Telephone or CO

.1.-.-.1.1.1,1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

! GENERAL

INFORMATION

- TELEPHONE

VARIATION

!

! Refer to Memory Block l-l-28, Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection. If Telephone is specified in !
1 this Memory Block, then each telephone in the system can be assigned a ringing tone frequency (Low, Medium, 1
. or High).
i
1 .-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-282

Programming

..,
;

RECEIVING

VOLUME

Telephone
4

SELECTION

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.
2.

Go off-line.
Enter:

Mode

Telephone

I

Multiline

terminakThe
volume (increased
by
F’NC + 2) is reset when you
ha% UP.

MA
Single-line

Tel Port No. Data
No.

+nn

--II

Title

Setting Data

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

To change DOWN
key 2.

CO/PBX

CNF

4.

key

key

to UP, press CO/PBX

Normal

to

terminaWhe
volume (increased
by
FNC + 2) is not reset when
you hang up.

Single-line

telephone:

The volume is up by 6 dB.

This Memory Block specifies one of the above two
modes.

line

3. This feature
calls.

I
COPBX

Multiline

line

telephone:

2. Receiving Volume Up

DOWN

0 11
92
:
RCV
--------------------________
TIME
DISPLAY

Guide

1. Receiving Volume Down

(Dial Pad)

(01-96)

Data No.
92

NOTES:

0 MIC
l
ICM

LK4
v

Data No.

-

applies

to internal

and external

Default

line keys

: Next Tel No.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-93, Internal
Zone
Paging Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
l-l-28
Distinctive Binging by Telephone or CO
Selection

Required

C.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i
i This Memory Block specifies whether the receiving
. call after hanging up.
b.D~l*l*9.l.-.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*9.9m~

Programming

- RECEIVING

VOLUME

volume is returned

SELECTION

i

to normal (down) or kept as is (up) on a i
.

5-283

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

INTERNAL

12OLevel II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

ZONE PAGING SELECTION
PC Programming

OPERATION:

USER

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

0 MIC

ElLK4

Telephone

1. Any of the following

9

Data No.

3

III

All Internal

(Dial Pad)
Tel Port No. Data
(01-96)
Title
r-l+l-n
93
:
ZONE
_--------------------------DISPLAY
TIME

Setting Data

0 11

NO

I

I

3. Press the corresponding
change data option.

CO/PBX

line

Guide

\
,/

T:I

NOTES:

ICM

l

v

l

Service Manual

key to

To change NO to Zone A, press COIPBX line
key 2.

three zones can be specified.

Zones: Paged by Dialing

Zone A: Paged by Dialing

52.

Zone B: Paged by Dialing

53.

Zone C: Paged by Dialing

54.

51

2. Telephones can be assigned to No Zone. An All
Internal
Zone (51) pages the telephone unless
assignment
of No Page Receive is assigned
Memory Block 4-31, Receiving Internal/All
Call
Page Selection.
3. All Internal
Terminals.

Zone Paging pages all idle Multiline

I

1
I

I

I
COlpBX

I
4.

CNF

line keys

l&@$
m

Default

: Next Tel. No.

key

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-94, 3-Minute Alarm
Selection.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

Memory
Block No.
1-1-28

Programming
Memory
Diitinctive
Selection

Block Name

Required

Ringing by Telephone or CO

c .1.1.1.1.1.1,1.1.1.1,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.
GENERAL INFORMATION
- INTERNAL
i

This Memory Block places stations into Internal
1 .1.-.1.1.1~1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.
n

5-284

ZONE PAGING SELECTION

Page Zones.

I
i

i

Programming

.,

3-MINUTE ALARM

SELECTION

Telephone
4

m

Data No.
94

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

Telephone

0

LK4

I

NOTES:

MIC
ICM

l

I 1. Approximately
a one-second warning
signal
sounds .every three minutes during
CO/PBX
calls.
2. The Alarm
Tone sounds only through
the
terminal speaker.

v

a

Data No.

Tel Port
(01-96)

No.

.nn

Data
No.

-n

0 11
94
---------------------------TIME

3.

:

Title

4

(Dial

Pad)

Setting

3mALM

3. If the built-in speakerphone
signal is not used.

Data

is used, the warning

NO

DISPLAY

Press the corresponding
change data option.
l

‘9

CO/PBX

line

key to

To change NO to YES, press CO/PBX
key 2.

line

I
COPBX

1

CNF

1 key

line

Default

keys

: Next Tel. No.

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 4-95, DTMF/DP SLT
Type Selection.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go backon-line.

B

Additional
Refer

Programming

to Guide

to Feature

Programming

in this manual.

C.I.l.l.l.-.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- 3-MINUTE ALARM

i This Memory Block specifies whether or not a warning
, an outgoing or incoming call per station.
L.-.l.l~-.l.-.l.-.-.-.-.~.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

Programming

signal tone is generated

SELECTION
at 3-minute

intervals

i

during i
.

5-285

Electra Professional 12O/LevelII/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

DTMF/DP

Installation Service Manual

Telephone
4

SLT TYPE SELECTION

s

Data No.
95
--.

1
A’I

PC Program ming Guide
USER

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
2. Enter:

Mode

0 MIC
ICM

I LK4

Telephone

v

9

Data No.

NOTES:

l

1. Both 1Opps or 2Opps are supported

5

III

I

(Dial Pad)
Tel Port No.
(01-96)

selection.

under the DP
I

Data
Title

-Ann

0 11
25
---------------------------TIME

SLT

Setting Data
=

MF

DISPLAY

3. Press the corresponding

COIPBX

line

key to

change data option.
l

To change DTMF
key 1.

I

to DP, press COIPBX line

I

I
I

Default

CO/PBX line keys

m

key

: Next Tel. No.

4. Press the TRF key twice to write the selected
data and advance
Data Line Security

to Memory
Assignment.

Block 4-90, SLT

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

e.l.l.l.l.l.l.L.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block specifies the type of single-line
, port.
1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-,~

5-286

- DTMF/DP
telephone

SLT TYPE SELECTION

i

that is connected to the system (DP or DTMF) per i
.

Programming

DIGIT ADD/DEL

FOR TIE LINE NETWORKING

Data No.
00

. Trunk Group
5

OPERATION:
1.

PC Programming

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

TrunkGroup

0

l

0 II
00:
---------------------------TIME

3.

NOTES:
1. This Memory Block applies only when two or
more systems are connected by Tie lines or when
the systems are connected by a DID line.

(Dial Pad)
Title

Data
, Setting
,
,

ADD/DEL

1 CNF 1 key

Setting Data
000
001-009
010
100-199
201
202
301-309
310
400-499
501-509
510
600-699
4.

If the call is intended for another system, the Tie
line is directed to resend the number.

4.

At default, DID lines are not assigned to a Trunk
Group.

5.

This Memory Block affects Tl Channels assigned
as Tie/DID lines. DTl-F(A)-20
KTU and system
software version 3.00 or higher are required.

go0

: To enter data.
: Next Trunk

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

3.

: To movecursor.

q

Dial pad m-

2. A call directed to the local system is connected to
an intercom line that is served by the system.

DISPLAY

, I#I+

USER

ICM

Enter data using the dial pad.
cm

A:D:B:A

Irl

Data No.
Trunk Group
Data
No.
,(Ol-32;
, No. , ,

TECH

0 ME

LK5

Guide

Group No.

No Addition or Deletion
[l]-[91 Addition
[O] Digit Addition
[OOI-1991 Addition
1 Digit Deletion
2 Digit Deletion
1 digit Delete and “1” - “9” Add
1 digit Delete and “0” Add
1 digit Delete and “00” - “99” Add
2 digit Delete and “1” - “9” Add
2 digit Delete and “0” Add
2 digit Delete and “00” - “99” Add

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance
to Memory
Block 5-01, Tie Line
Networking
Tandem Connection Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

=

Additional

Prcgmmming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
l-l-46
Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk
Group Assignment

Required

4

.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

!

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- DIGIT ADD/DEL

FOR TIE LINE NETWORKING

!

! This Memory Block specifies the number of digits to be added to and/or deleted from the telephone number sent !
1 from a distant system over Tie lines or from DID lines. The digits enable the system to determine whether a 1
* call is directed to itself (local) or another system (distant). Refer to the notes above.

1.1.-.1.-.1.1.1.1.-,1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.

Programming

i

5-287

TrunkGroup
5

TIE LINE NETWORKING TANDEM
CONNECTION ASSIGNMENT

e

Data No.
01

PC Programming

OPERATION:
TECH

A:D:B:B

-..

Guide

-2’.,

USER

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

TrunkGroup

0 MIC
ICM

I LK5

Trunk Group Number
CO/PBX line-key.

l

(01-32)

Page l(U)

corresponds

to

Page 3 (17)

MLI

Data No.

(Dial Pad)
1 05

(outgoing)
(Incoming)
Trunk Group

1 06

1 07 1 OS 1
I

COiFBX line keys
Page 4 (25)

Page 2 (09)

3. Press the corresponding
enter the data.
l

Press RECALL

+I

q+

line

key to

or FNC key to change page.
:

Tomovecursor.

key

:

Next page.

b[

key

:

Previous page.

II

key

:

Next Trunk

RECALL

,

CO/PBX

Group No.

4. After entering all data for all pages, press the
TRF key to write the selected data and advance
to Memory Block 5-02, &Digit Matching Table to
Trunk Group Assignment.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

NOTES:

I

1. Tandem connection
of Trunk Group-to-Trunk
Group must be specified separately.

n

I

Additional

Programming

I

I

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No.
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk
Group Assignment
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment

Required

I

.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

! GENERAL
.I

INFOR1MATION

-TIE LINE NETWORKING
ASSIGNMENT

TANDEM

CONNECTION

I This Memory Block specifies whether or not Trunk Groups connected to the system allow incoming
i Groups to be connected to outgoing Trunk Groups for tandem connections.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-288

Trunk

Programming

1
I.
!
1

.
..

&DIGIT

TrunkGroup
5

MATCHING TABLE TO TRUNK
GROUP ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION:

1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

TrunkGroup

0 ME
ICM

l

v

4.

v
ul0 2

After’ entering all data for all pages; press the
TRF key to write the selected data, and advance
to Memory Block 5-03, OCC Table to ‘Dunk
Group Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

El

Trunk Group
(OlN,“;Z)

Data No.
02

PC Programming
Guide
USER
I LK5

Data No.

w

(Dial Pad)
Data
No.

Title

Page No.

a”,::,
----------------------------

3.

Press the corresponding
enter the data option.

CO/pBX

line

Press the RECALL
pages.

or FNC

key to turn

l

em,

q +:

key to

Tomovecursor.
Nekt page.

-1

key

:

Previous page.

II

key

:

Next Trunk

Group No.

Default

di

n

Ad~~o~~fiogramm~g

Refer to Section 6 - Code Restriction

in this chapter.

C.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

GENERAL

i. This

Memory

INFORMATION

Block assigns each Trunk

- 8-DIGIT MATCHING
ASSIGNMENT
Group to the S-Digit Matching

TABLE TO TRUNK GROUP

i

Tables.

i.

b.-.-=-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

Programming

5-289

Februarv

Electra

1998

Professional

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

TruhkGroup
5

OCC TABLE TO TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT

Service Manual

m

Data No.
03

OPERATION:
1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

0 MIC
l ICM

I LK5

TrunkGroup

4. After entering all data for all pages, press the
TRF key to write the selected data,. and advance
to Memory Block 5-00, Digit Add/Del for Tie Line
Networking.

Data No.

5.

(Dial Pad)
rr”““N,o””
(01--32)

nn

Data
No.

Title

-II

.----------------------------

i
;
,s

PC Programming
Guide
USER

OCC-TRKG

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

Page No.
I

1

DISPLAY

3.

Press the corresponding
enter the data option.
Press the RECALL
pages.

l

+-a,

a+:

COIPBX

line

key to

or F’NC key to change

Tomovecursor.
Next page.

1 F-NC 1 key

:

Previous page.

IF]

:

Next Trunk

key

Group No.

Default

I

LKl
Table 00
LK5
Table 04

a-e 2
LKl
Table 08
I
LK5
Table 12

LK2
Table 01
LK6
Table 05
I

LK2
Table 09
LK6
Table 13

LK3
Table 02
LK7
Table 06
I

LK3
Table 10
LK7
Table 14

LK4
Table 03
LK8
Table 07
I

LK4
Table 11
LK8
Table 15

n

Additional

Programming

Refer to Section 6 -Code Restrictionin

this chapter.

.-.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

f
I

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- OCC TABLE TO TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT

; This Memory Block assigns each of the 16 OCC Tables to each Trunk Group.
.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

5-290

:
;

Programming

I.

Installation

Service Manual

TENANT

Electra Professional

1ZOILevel II/Level

MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT
OPERATION

Tenant

Data No.

6

2

-

TECH F3COPY

Mode

COPY

I

Sub-Mode

Tenant

&

1998

COPY

PC Programming

1. Gooff-line.
2. Enter:

Februarv

II Advanced

Guide

USER

0 MIC

LK6

l

ICM

EXAMPLE:
1. Enter the original Tenant No. Using the
dial pad, press 0 0.

Ise%=qData
~,----------------------------

2. Press the TRF key.

3. Enter the destination TNAT No. (00 47). Using the dial pad, press 0 5.
~dpad

q-

I HOLD

key

For example,

m

:

To enter data.

’

To clear all data when
placed at cursor position.

to copy data of Tenant

00 to Tenant

4.

05-07.
l

Enter original Tenant No. 00 using the dial
pad, and press the TRF key.

l

Enter Start
TRF key.

Tenant

Using the dial pad, press 0 7.

pGiy7-j
---------------------------

No. 05, and press the
5. Press the TRF key.

l

Enter End Tenant
key.

No. 07, and press the TRF

l

The upper line in the display returns
setting above to copy another Tenant.

to the

.I~l.l.l,-.L.l,-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.

I

i

GENERAL

; This Memory

INFORMATION

-TENANT

Block enables copying data from one tenant to another

.I,l.l.l,-.L.l.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.

Programming

1

MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT
tenant or multiple

consecutive

tenants.

i
i

5-291

CO LINE MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT

COIPBX
3

COPY

6
OPERATION:
1.

PC Programming
TECH

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Mode
Sub-Mode

COPY

I

COIPBX

F3-COPY

Data No.
-7

Guide

/

USER

0 MIC
ICM

LK6

l

v

II

EXAMPLE:

--

co
----------------------------

1.

4

DISPLAY

Dial pad

q- q
key

I HOLD

CO/PBX

No.

co
01
---------------------------:

To enter data.

’

To clear all data when
placed at cursor position.

2.

For example, to copy data
CO/PBXline
05-07:

of CO/PBX

Enter original CO/PBX Line
dial pad; press the TRF key.

Using

the

-4

LIME

I

Press the TRF key.

-+co
_------------------_--------3.

l

Enter the original
dial pad, press 01.

line 01 to

01 using the

Enter the destination CO/PBX No. (02 - 64).
Using the dial pad, press 0 5.

-+
---------------o------------

05--

co

Original
COIPBX No.

* COiPBX No.

4.

(01-64)

(01-64)
l

Enter the Start CO/PBX
TRF key.

No., and press the

l

Enter the End COIPBX
TRF key.

No., and press the

*
l

Using the dial pad, press 0 7.

--co

4

---------------o----____y___

5.

05 - 07

Press the TRF key.

Entry is not needed when copying to a
single CO/PBX number only.

The upper line in the display disappears,
leaving only the time display in the lower
line.

C.l.l.-.l.l.l*l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

’ This Memory Block enables
I, consecutive COIPBX lines.
L.l.-.l.l~l.-.l~l.l.-~-.-.-

copying

- CO LINE MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT

data from

one CO/PBX

line to another

CO/PBX

i

line or multiple

.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

Programming

i
.

.‘:

TELEPHONE

COPY

MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT

Telephone

Data No.

4

m

6
OPERATION:

1. Gooff-line.
2.

Enter:

TECH

Mode

COPY

0

LK6

Sub-Mode

Telephone

1

LK4

Original$EL$xt

Title
I

1

0
l

ME
ICM

I
--4

q
key

:

T~e~~hrdak.

’

To clear all data when
placed at cursor position.

For example, to copy data of telephone
telephone ports 20-30.
l

Tel No.

port

3.

10 to

PreB the TRF key.

-IlYME

_I

Enter the destination Tel Port No. (01 - 96).
Using the dial pad, press 20.
--

TEL

4

4.

20--

* Port No.

Using the dial pad, press 30.
--

TEL

4

---------------------------l

Enter the Start Tel. No., and press the TRF
key.

l

Enter
key.

l

I

4

01

Original

*

the dial

----------------------------

Enter original
telephone port number
using the dial pad; press the TRF key.

Port No.

Using

--

TEL

+TEL
----------------------------

-m

I

I

2.

Dialpad

m-COPY

1. Enter the original
pad, press 0 0.

1

;7

----------------------------

USER

EXAMPLE:

No.

TEL

Guide

PC ProgramrGng

5.

20 - 30

Press the TRF key.

the End Tel. No., and press the TRF

Entry is not needed when copying
single Tel. No. only.

to a

The upper line in the display disappears,
leaving only the time display in the lower
line.

,.1.-.1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

GENERAL

INFORMATION

-TELEPHONE

MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT

i

port to another

i
.

i

i This Memory Block enables copying data from one telephone
, consecutive telephone ports.

Programming

telephone

port or multiple

5-293

COPY

TRUNK GROUP MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT

Trunk

6

OPERATION:

Group
5

PC Programming

Data No.
m
x.

Guide

/

USER

1.

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Mode

0 MIC

El LK6

COPY

l

ICM

v

Sub-Mode

I

Title

Trunk Group

1 Lx5

1

EXAMPLE:

Original
Tykfg

No.

1.

n
--

TRKGP
-----_---------------------DISPLAY

+

Enter the original Trunk
dial pad; press 01-32.

Group using the

_---------------------------

Didpad
a- q
I HOLD

key

2.

:

To enter data.

’

To clear all data when
placed at cursor position.

Press the TRF key.
---------------------------/

For example, to copy data of Trunk Group 01 to
Trunk Groups 10-14.
l
Enter original Trunk Group number 01 using
the dial pad, and press the TRF key.
l

Enter Start Trunk

l

Enter End Trunk
TRF key.
*

l

Group Number

3.

Enter the Start Trunk Group No. (01 - 32).
Using the dial pad, press 10.
Xl

10.

----_---------------_______o

Group No. 14, and press the

Entry is not needed when
single Trunk Group number

copying
only.

to a

4.

Enter the End Trunk Group (01-32).
the dial pad, press 14.

5.

Press the TRF key.

Using

The upper line in the display disappears,
leaving only the time display in the lower
line.

,.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block enables copying
, consecutive Trunk Groups.
*.-.-.-.-.l.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-~.

5-294

-TRUNK
data

GROUP MODE COPY ASSIGNMENT

from one Trunk

Group

to another

Trunk

Group

or multiple

Programming

i
i
I

CARD

INTERFACE

OPERATION:

PC Programming
TECHIB:A:A/B

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

Page Upper Slot No.
,No.
,7-l”““:,
1
09 :
---------------------------01 :
1
2
u-u
Cabinet
I
No. hr;iio.
l-3
-

unit
Name

RECALL

m

Guide

IUSER I

l

I

Line Key

I

Setting Data

I

LCD
Indication

I

, , Port No. ,

I
‘i%e

.

Port No.

3. Enter data using the line key.

Dial pad

-

0 MIC
ICM

I LK7

COPY

v

em,

Slot
1

KTU
7

SLOT ASSIGNMENT

Page 2

q +:

Tomovecursor.
: To change lower Slot No.
and Cabinet No.
- 191
: Next page.
key

q

key

: Previous page.

Enter Slot No. .A using dial pad (9)
Enter Slot No. B using dial pad (0)
To assign upper Slot No. for DTI-F(
KTU, press the LNRlSPD
key.
4.

Page 3

I-lO/DTI-F(A)-20

Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to the next lower Slot No.

I
I

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

n

Additional

I

Programming

Memory
Memory Block Name
Block No. I
l-l-46
IAccess Code Cl-Digit) Assignment
3-03
ITrunk-to-Trunk
Group Assignment

ci

I

Required

I

IDTI-F&)-20
4
5
6
7
8

Im
BRT-F(4)-10
NON
NON
NON

KTU

I
I@
BRT

I

Continued

Programming

I

I

~

on nextpage.

5-295

Februarv

1998

CARD INTERFACE

Electra Professional
SLOT ASSIGNMENT

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Installation

KTU
7

(continued)

Service Manual

Slot
1

m
-Y
,J

NOTES:
1. KTU interface cards are assigned automatically
during initial power up.
2.

ES1 KTU with ports 01 and 02 can’t be changed.

3.

"1 c :

.

T:

v:
- :
*2 0:

x:
*3 0:
Space :

I

Port Number

of CO/PBX Line

Telephone Port Number (smallest
is displayed)
Voice Recording Service Package

number

No Display
When the KTU is assigned to a lower slot,
it can be assigned also to an upper slot in
the same manner.
When the KTU is assigned to a lower slot,
it cannot be assigned to another unit in an
upper slot.
Enabled
Disabled

If KTU system capacity is exceeded, ERROR is
displayed on the LCD, and using the TRF key to
write the data is not accepted.
4. DTI KTU must be assigned in both the upper and
lower slot. The DTI KTU is installed in slot 1 or
4 of the first and second KSU only.
5. When changing an interface slot assignment to a
different KTU, use the following procedure:
a. Remove the KTU installed in the slot.
b. Program slot for new KTU in this Memory
Block.
c. Install the new KTU.
6. COI-F(4)-30 and COI-F(S)-30 can be assigned in
slots l-8, but with Caller ID they must be
assigned in slots 1 - 4.

.-.l.l.-.l.ILI.l.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.

i; This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- CARD INTERFACE

Memory Block specifies the type of installed
.1.1.1.-.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-,---.-.

5-296

SLOT ASSIGNMENT

KTUs.

;
;

Programming

-’

TELEPHONE

mu

TYPE ASSIGNMENT

TEL
2

7

s

PC Programming

OPERATION:

Guide

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

KTU

II

NOTES:

: :;
1.

ES1
Port No.
(01 - 96)
I
I

I

seeing

Dab

=

TEL

3. A maximum of 55 SLT Adapters
in the system.

I

4.

3. To change data, press the corresponding
line key.

CO/PBX

To change Telephone to Attendant
Console, press CO/PBX line key 3.

Add-On

l

I CNF

: Next Tel Port No.

key

can be assigned

2. A maximum of four Attendant
can be installed in the system.

I

01

Only multiline
terminals
Ports 01 and 02.

Add-On

Consoles

can be installed

A maximum of 6 Digital Voice Mail ports can be
assigned in the system with Series 400 to Series
500.
A maximum of 8 Digital Voice Mail
available with Series 600 or higher.

5. When assigning SLT adapters
Mail
ports,
Memory
Block
reassigned also.
6.

to

LK7 (Digital Voice Mail)
software or higher.

7. Dterm Cordless Terminal

ports are

or Digital Voice
4-10 must be

requires

version

4.00

uses LK 2.

Default

CO/PBX line keys

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data, and
advance to the next Telephone Port No.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.
n

Additional

Programming

Refer tm Guide to Feature fiO~gamm~

in this manual.

e.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~

i
i This
.

GENERAL
Memory

5-297
Programming

INFORMATION

-TELEPHONE

TYPE ASSIGNMENT

Block specifies the type of device that is connected to an ES1 port.

i
iI

Februarv

Electra Professional

lBO/Level D&eve1 II Advanced

Installation

MIF (ACD) ASSIGNMENT

KTU
7

MIF
3

1998

PC Programming
OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

TECH

I LK7

KTU

0 ME
l

Service Manual
Da@ No.
00
Guide

B:A:E-H

NOTES:

ICM

1. MIF KTUs can be installed
only in the
ESF-SB-10 KSU in any of the following Interface
Slots:
OP, IFl/OPl

v
*

In the ESF-XB-10 KSU or the first ESF-XE-10
KSU installed, the following slots are available:
OPA, OPB, IFl/OPl

v
0
ul 0

- IF4/OP4

2. This Memory Block allows assignment
of the
MB? KTU(s) in order sequence.
Example:
Beginning with slot IF/OPl, the first
installed
MIF KTU is assigned 01
(regardless
of which
slot it is
installed in). The second MIF KTU is
assigned 02 (regardless of which slot
it is installed in).

(DiaiPad)
Data No.
Title
I
I
I
I
00
ACD
-------------------_-------DISPLAY

- IF4/OPS4

MIF = 00

3. MIF-F(A)-10 KTU and MB?-F(U)-10
be installed in the same system.

KTU cannot

3. Enter data using the dial pad.

-m, q
q

Dialpad

Setting Data

-B

:

+

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter data.

00, 01,02

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data and
advance to Memory Block 7-3-01, MIF (LCR)
Assignment.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

,.1.-.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-*-.-.-.-.-..

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- MIF (ACD) ASSIGNMENT

i

i This Memory Block enables the ACD function
, KTU.
..l.l.-.l.l.-.-.-.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

5-298

and allows the assignment

of KTU

order for an MB?-F(A)-10

Programming

i
i
.

.-

Installation

Februarv

Electra Professional

12O/Level II&eve1 II Advanced

MIF (LCR) ASSIGNMENT

KTU

MIF

7

3

Service Manual

PC Programming
OPERATION:
1.
2.

TECH

Go off-line.
Enter:

Mode

KTU

I

USER

- IF4/OP4

In the ESF-XB-10 KSU or the first ESF-XE-10
KSU installed, the following slots are available:

v
*
v

OPA, OPB, IFl/OPl

- IF4/OP4

1. This Memory Block allows assignment
of the
MIF KTUW in order sequence.
Example:
Beginning with slot AP/IF 1, the first
installed
MIF KTU is assigned 01
(regardless
of which
slot it is
installed in). The second MIF KTU is
assigned 02 (regardless of which slot
it is installed in).

ccl
1

(Dial Pad)

Data No.
I
I
01

Guide

1. MIF KTUs
can be installed
only in the
ESF-SB-10 KSU in any of the following Interface
Slots:
OP, IFl/OPl

0

Data No.
01

NOTES:

0 ME
l
ICM

LK?

B:A:F

1998

Title

1

I
LCR

MIF = 00

-------------------L--------

DISPLAY

3.

Enter data using the dial pad.

cm,
Dial pad

q+
q q

Setting Data

-

:

: Tomovecursor.
: Toenter

data.

00, 01,02

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data, and
advance to Memory Block 7-3-02, MIF (SMDR)
Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

~.1.1.1.-.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- MIF (LCR) ASSIGNMENT

i

’ This Memory Block enables the LCR function
! KTU.
.*l.l.l.-.-.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-*-.-.-.-.-..

Programming

and allows the assignment

of KTU order for an MIF-F(L)-10

i
i
.

KTU
7

MIF (SMDR) ASSIGNMENT

PC Programming

OPERATION:
1.

Go off-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

KTU

MIF
3

TECH

I

B:A:E

0 MIC
ICM

LK7

Data No.
02
. ._
!;

Guide

USER

/

NOTES:

l

MIF KTUs
can be installed
only in the
ESF-SB-10 KSU in any of the following Interface
Slots:
OP, IF l/OPl

In the ESF-XB-10 KSU or the first ESF-XE-10
KSU installed, the following slots are available:

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
I
I
02

OPA, OPB, IF l/OPl

Title
I

I

F@%

SMDR

MIF = 00

DISPLAY

I

Enter data using the dial pad.

cm, q -t
Dial pad q - q
Setting Data

:

- IF 4/OP4

This Memory Block allows assignment
of the
MB? KTUW in order sequence.
Example:
Beginning with slot AP/IF 1, the first
installed
MIF KTU is assigned 01
(regardless
of which
slot it is
installed in). The second MB? KTU is
assigned 02 (regardless of which slot
it is installed in).

---------------------------ITm
3.

- IF 4/OP4

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter data.

00, 01,02

4.

Press the TRF key to write the selected data, and
advance to Memory Block 7-3-00, MIF (ACD)
Assignment.

5.

Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

..1.1.1.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block enables the SMDR function
. KTU.
..l.l.l.l.-.l~-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

5-300

- MIF (SMDR) ASSIGNMENT

and allows the assignment

of KTU order for an MIF-F(S)-10

Programming

i
i
.

‘:
,,’

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

Februarv

II Advanced
MIF
3

KTU
7

MIF (UCD) ASSIGNMENT

PC Programming

OPERATION:

1998.

Data No.
03
Guide

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

KTU

I

0 Iac
ICM

LK7

NOTES:

l

1. MIF
KTUs
can be installed
only in the
ESF-SB-10 KSU in any of the following Interface
Slots:

ul
0

OP, IFl/OPl
3

In the ESF-XB-10 KSU or the fast ESF-XE-10
KSU installed, the following slots are available:

(Dial Pad)
Data No.
r
1
03

1
UCD

ITIME
3.

OPA, OPB, IFl/OPl

Title
I

F-7
MIF=OO
I

DISPLAY

Enter the slot number of installed
MIF-F(U)-10
KTU.

q+

cm,
Dialpad

q

3. MIF-F(A)-10
KTU and MIF-F(U)-10
be installed in the same system.

KTU cannot

: Tomovecursor.
: To enter data.

-m

, Setting Data

- IF4/OP4

2. This Memory Block allows assignment
of the
MIF KTUW in order sequence.
Beginning with slot AP/IF 1, the first
Example:
installed
MIF KTU is assigned 01
(regardless
of which
slot it is
installed in). The second M.IF KTU is
assigned 02 (regardless of which slot
it is installed in).

Enter data using the dial pad.
l

- IFlOP

:

00, O&O2

4. Press the TRF key to write the selected data, and
advance to Memory Block 7-3-04, MIF (Caller ID)
Assignment.
5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

,.l.-.-.-.1.-.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

i This Memory Block enables the UCD function
. KTU.
..1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

- MIF (UCD) ASSIGNMENT

and allows the assignment

of KTU order for an MIF-F(U)-10

i
i
.

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

MIF (CALLER

laOLevel

Installation

II&eve1 II Advanced
BTU
7

ID) ASSIGNMENT

MIF
3

PC Prog

OPERATION:

Service Manual
Data No.
04
. -*
:\

* g Guide

TECH(B:A:I

IUSEEl

./

1. Go off-line.
2.

Enter:

Mode

0 me
l ICM

I LK7

KTU

NOTES:
1. MIF KTUs can be installed
only in the Basic
KSU in any of the foIlowing Interface Slots:
IF, IF/OPl

v

m
0

- IF/OP4

In the ESF-XB-10 KSU or the fist ESF-XE-10
KSU installed, the following slots are available:

4

(Dial Pad)

IFA, IFB, IF/OPl
Data No.
I--

CLASS
---------------------------DISPLAY

3.

Setting Data

Title
Ml-F=

2. This Memory Block allows assignment
of the
MIF KTU(s) in order sequence.
Example:
Beginning with slot IF/OPl, the fist
installed MIF KTU is assigned 01
(regardless of the slot where it is
installed).
The second MIF KTU is
assigned 02 (regardless
of the slot
where it is installed).

00
I

Enter data using the dial pad.
l

Enter the slot number
MD?-F(C)-10 KTU.

- IF/OP4

3. This feature requires
4.50 or higher.

of installed

system

software

version

: Tomovecursor.
Dial pad

q-q

Setting Data
4.

: To enter data.

:

00, 01,02

Press the TRF key to write the selected data, and
advance to Memory Block 7-3-00, MIF (ACD)
Assignment.

5. Press the SPKR key to go back on-line.

,.-.‘.-.‘.‘.-.-.l.l*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- MIF (CALLER ID) ASSIGNMENT

i

and allows the assignment

i
.

i

i This Memory Block enables the Caller ID function
. KTU.
..-.1.-.1.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.*

5-302

of KTU order for an MIF-F(C)-10

Programming

ROM VERSION

I

CONFIRMATION

SDecial

I

8

OPERATION:

Enter:

Software
I

II

Special

Sub-Mode

ROM

Package

I
I
ROM

Name

--------c-------------------

:

v

0

Version

For slot C of expansion

*

0

~fO.h~rsion

Name

For another
Upper

---~pJ-

:

n

To move cursor.

El-El
Slot Number A

I-G-l :

Slot number B

:

l

/

Slot number C I

Type of unit, in the order of slot number and
ROM version, is displayed each time a CO/PBX
line key is pressed.

(4)

co1

=

01

I

Frame number, slot number, interface name, and
ROM Version are shown on the display.
There are three display patterns.
For basic frame (frame 1 or slot C) CPU:
:

SP60
----------------------------0C:CPU
1.

Frk2
l-3

Sl!Z!
C, l-8,
A,B

MMC=Ol
=l

*

-Unit

Name

GENERAL

i

This Memory

=

01
I

lJnit

Name

ROM

Version
01-15

I
Number

Block confirms

When both upper and lower slots are occupied
by COI, ESI, or SLI card, an 8-channel unit
[CO1 WI is displayed in lower slot.

Display of the order is as follows:
0
Frame 1
Slot c41+2--+8+A-+B
0
Frame2
Slot c-91+2--43+A+B
0
Frame3
Slot C&l-+2+8
l After the input of slot 8 of frame 3, press TRF
key; slot C of frame 1 is displayed.
l The upper
line in the display disappears,
leaving only the time display in the lower
line.

f..%CMpUVersion

INFORMATION

- ROM VERSION

the program version without

1.1,1.1.1.1~1.-.-.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.

Programming

1

.o

c .1,-.1.-.1~1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
n

(4)

Number

(tiy2)

:

tiei

No.

Version
01-15

I

Lower
Slot No.

No. l-3

El

0

Name

-

I-JU

09
:
---------------------------1 - 01
:

ROM
Unit

09
:
NON
--------------------_^_________
1 - 01
: co1
Frame

I

slot type:

Slot No.
9-16

,

Enter

frame:

@

1

0
- Unit

*

IUSERI

I
=l

SlkK!
C&B,

Guide

LKl

=Ol

MMC

-0C:CPU

FS
No. l-3

I

Q MIC
l
ICM

LK8

I

SP171

1.

I

TECH(F2dNFO

Mode

1 Data No. 1

1

PC Programming

1. Go off-line.
2.

ROM

removing

CONFIRMATION

the card from the KSU.

1

i
i
5-303

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional

12O/Level II/Level

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MEMORY CLEAR

II Advanced

Installation

Special
8

SPD-CLR-SYS
2

OPERATION:
1.

TECH

Mode

Special

0

LKS

I

l

SPD-CLR-SYS

B:H:C

USER

1-1

CO/PBX lines

11

I

I

I

I

co1

0

Enter

0

CO/pBX

co1

CLB
LIME

Use dial pad

I

co1

I

co1

the password

green

SYS
-----------------_----------

Guide

MIC
ICM

v

Sub-Mode

Data No.
I

PC Programming

Go off-line.

2. Enter:

Service Manual

line
each

using

LEDs

time

co1

co1

the

dial pad.

change

from

a password
co1

red to

is entered.

co1

SPD?
I

DISPLAY

I

q -q

:

Green

I

Green

I

Green

Bed

To enter password
All

Speed

Dial

numbers

a

The

upper

disappears,
display

are erased.
line
leaving

in the lower

in

the
only

display
the

time

line.

NOTES:
1. Areas to be erased:
A. Series loo-450

WARNING
Before performing
this procedure,
understand
completely
the meaning
and implications
of
erasing
all System Speed Dial buffers
in the
system.

l

In 100 code mode; Speed Dial numbers

00-89.

In 1000 code mode; Speed Dial numbers
000-999.
B. Series 500 or higher
l

l

In 100 code mode; Speed Dial numbers

l

In 1000 code mode; Speed Dial numbers
000-999.

00-79.

e.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.-,-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i. This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MEMORY

Memory Block clears all System Speed Dial programming
L.l.l.l.l.-.l.-.l.l.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.J

CLEAR

in the system.

i
.

Programming

,.’

Special
8

STATION SPEED DIAL MEMORY CLEAR
OPERATION:
1.

Gooff-line.

2.

Enter:

Mode

Special

Sub-Mode

SPD-CLR-STA

SPD-CLR-STA
3
PC Programming

1 LK3

1

TL;7

CO/PBX Lines
co1

l

0

8

CLR
TEL
SPD?
--------------------------DISPLAY

:

Guide

0 MIC
l
ICM

Enter Password

Dial
padq q

Data Na.
-

co1

Enter the password using the dial pad.
CO/PBX line LEDs change fmm red to
green each time a password is entered.
1 co1

1 co1

1 co1

2

1 co1

1 co1

1 co1

1 co1

9

co1

co1

co1

co1

Green

Red

I

I

Green

Green

co1

co1
I

Green

WARNING

co1

co1

z

Toenterpassword

co1

co1
I

Green

co1
I

Green

Green

All Speed Dial numbers are erased.
a
The upper line in,the display disappears,
leaving only the time display in the
lower line.

.1.-.-.-.1.1.-.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
f

i. This

GENERAL

INFORMATION

- STATION SPEED DIAL MEMORY CLEAR

Memory Block clears the Station Speed Dial memories
1 .1.1.1.1.1.-.1.1.-.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-.-.

Programming

of all programmed

Speed Dial numbers.

:

i
5-305

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced
Special
8

SECOND INITIALIZATION
OPERATION:

Installation
CO Line
8

PC Program

Enter:

Data No.
8800

mingGuide
USER

1. Gooff-lhe.
2.

Service Manual

Mode

System

I

Sub-Mode

COLine

I[

0 MIC
ICM

LK8

l

v
v

-1

Data No.

(Dial Pad)

h

Title

I

cPuRl3sm?
---------------------------DISPLAY

3.

n

Press the
process.

Additional

TRF

key;

I

begin

the

initialization

Progmmming

Refer to Guide to Feature Programming

in this manual.

e.-.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.,

i

GENERAL

INFORMATION

; This Memory Block initializes
all the system
. retained after the Second Initialization.

5-306

- SECOND INITIALIZATION

hardware.

All

system software

i

and user programming

is i
.

Programming

CLOCK/CALENDAR

SETTING

OPERATION:

Il-r- - I

Clock/Calendar
Setting

*

PC Programming
1 FNC

TECH

1

‘I

I %!?

I

I

I

-

Guide

USER

NOTES:

cl
9

1. This is a station
Attendant station.

(Dial Pad)
v

2. The ClockCalendar
Programming.

0#

operation
cannot

performed

by the

be set using

PC

(Dial Pad)

LME

-1l:OSAM
---------------------------DISPLAY

+J q -e
Dial pad mq

:

To move cursor.

:

To enter Time, Date,
Month, Year

weekdays.

l

Press the RECALL key while the cursor is at
the Day or Month to allow the user to scroll
through the selections.

l

All other items can be changed by moving the
cursor to the desired position and entering the
data using the dial pad.
(Refer to the example on the next page. 1

Continued

Programming

on nextpage.

CLOCK/CALENDAR

SETTING (continued~

EXAMPLE:
To change the time and date to 12:OO p.m. Sunday,
December 31,1992:

7. Press the RECALL key, and select DEC.

Al:OSAM

SUN
31
-----------------_----------

-----------C--------______L_

1.

Using the dial pad, press 12 0 0.

ITlME

DEC

1991

8.

Move the cursor to the 1991 position.

9.

Using the dial pad, press 9 2.

12:OOAM

----------------------------

I

2. Press the RECALL key.

SUN
31
-------L--------------------

----------------------------

DEC

1992

ti

3. Press the HOLD key.

01
----------------------------

10. Press the FNC key.

JAN

1991
I

4. Press the RECALL key, and select SUN.

SUN
----------------------------

5.

01

JAN

1991

Using the dial pad, press 3 1.

I
I

I

1991

Move the cursor to the 01 position.

SUN
01
----------------------------

6.

JAN

31

SUN
----------------------------

GENERAL

JAN

1991

I

1

INFORMATION

- CLOCK/CALENDAR

I

SETTING

I

;

;

: This Memory Block programs the year, month, day, hour, and minute,
1 .1.-.1.1.-.1~1.1.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.-.-~

5-308

and a.m. or p.m.

;

Programming

SECTJON

5

FUNCTIONTIMER

CHART
Function

Timer

Chart

I
Memory
Block

Timer
Pause Time Selection

l-l-00

t--

DP Interdigit

Time

Timing

1

Value

Definition
Minimum

I
Duration when no signal is being
I sent to a CO/PBX line.
Minimum interval between
dialing signals in DP dialing.

Default

MdlUlUII

1 sec.

3 sec.

3sec.

650/500 ms.

800/800 ms

800/800 ms.

l-l-02

Timing of a CO/PBX hookflash
from the RECALL key of a
Multiline
Terminal or a Single
Line Telephone to the CO/PBX
line.

20 ms.

600 ms.

5000 ms.
(5 sec.)

l-l-03

Specify the time before a held
CO/PBX line recalls the station
that put that line on hold.

25 sec.

25 sec.

No Limit

I

Start Timer Selection

l-l-05

Specify the time for after dialing
and the start of call duration
display and Talk Start Timer.

2 sec.

20 sec.

70 sec.

CO/PBX Incoming
Ringing Alarm Time
Selection

l-l-06

Specify the time from receiving
an incoming CO/PBX call until
the ringing tone changes to a
different ringing tone level if the
call is not answered.

10 sec.

No Limit

No Limit

Tie/DID Line Delay
Ringing Timer
Selection

l-l-07

Specify the delay interval
between the time a telephone
rings (accessed by a ringing call
in the Tie/DID) line and the time
other telephones start ringing.

10 sec.

No Limit

No Limit

Station
Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer
Selection

l-l-12

The time before a ring transferred
call recalls to the station that
transferred the call.

25 sec.

45 sec.

No Limit

Trunk Queuing
Timeout Selection

I

l-l-37

Specify the time queuing for a
CO/P BX line recalls before being
automatically
canceled.

10 sec.

10 sec.

60 sec.

CO/PBX Prepause
Timer Selection

l-l-57

Specify the pause time before
dialed digits are sent over a
CO/pBX line.

None

1 sec.

15 sec.

l-l-63

Specify the time for Exclusive
Hold Recall.

30 sec.

1lIliIl.

No Limit

l-l-64

Specify the time for a ring
transfer from DSS Console until
recall alarm is sent.

30 sec.

1 min.

1omiIl.

Hold Recall Timer
Selection
(Non-Exclusive Hold)

Attendant Add-On
Console Transfer/
Camp-On Recall
Timer Selection

Continu

Programming

! on nextpage.

5-309

Februarv

Electra Professional

1993

Memory

Timer

Block

I
First Delay
Announcement
Time Selection

1-1-71
Start

First to Second Delay
Announcement
Interval Time
Selection
Second Delay
Announcement
Repeat Interval Time
Selection
Delayed Ringing
Timer Assignment
(CO)

l-l-73

l-l-75

lZO/Level

II&eve1 II Advanced

Definition
I
Specify the time between
receiving an incoming CO call
and sending the First Delay
Announcement
to the caller.
Specify the time between the
First and Second Delay
Announcement.
Specify the time between
repeated Second Delay

T

Installation Service Manual

1

Timing Value
Miuimum
0 sec.

Default

Maximum

20 sec.

60 sec.

OS8C.

20 sec.

No Limit

OS@.

20 sec.

No Limit

0 sec.

15 sec.

Announcement.
l-l-77

Specify the time for delayed
I ringing on incoming outside line

99 sec.
No Limit

Automatic Callback
Release Timer
Selection
Call Forward No
Answer Timer
Selection
System Call Park
Recall Time Selection
DelayedRinging
Timer Assignment
(ICM)
Bounce Protect Time
Selection

5 min.

time before ICM or Trunk

240 sec.

30 sec.

1 min.

0 sec.
ringing

on internal

calls.
0 ma.

First Digit PBR
Release Timer
Selection
Hookflash
Selection

60 sec.

Start Time

100 ma.

850 ma.

one to receive a second dial
Hookflash
Selection

End Time

Voice Mail DTMF
Delay Timer
Selection
Voice Mail
Disconnect Time
Selection

I

l-3-08

l-3-09

from a Single Line Telephone to
receive a second dial tone. ( HST
= Hookflash Start Time.)
Specify the delay time before
DTMF tones are sent to the VMI
port.
Specify the sending time of a
disconnect signal that is sent to
the connected equipment.

HST+O
ma.

HST + 700
ma.

HST + 150C
ma.

0 sec.

1 sec.

8 sec.

.6 sec.

1.5 sec.

5 sec.

Continu

5-310

.on nextpage.

Programming

Timer

Memory
Block

Timing
Minimum

Voice Mail DTMF
DurationIInterdigit
Time Selection
Tandem Transfer
Automatic Disconnect
Timer Selection

Used to specify the DTMF
duration/interdigit
time for voice
mail.

70/60 ms.

Used to specify a maximum time
before automatic disconnect of a
Trunk-to-Trunk
transfer occurs.

30 mm.

Automated Attendant
First Digit PBR
Release Timer
Selection

Used to specify the PBR
connection time to the Automated
Attendant trunk to receive DTMF
signal from the calling party
before automatically
disconnecting.
Used to specify the time for a No
Answer at the transferred station
before the Automated Attendant
rings a predetermined
station.

Automated Attendant
Transfer Delayed
Ringing Time
Selection

l-4-02

Value

Definition
Default

Maximum

100/70 ms.

900/200 ms.

10 sec.

20 sec.

60 sec.

10 sec.

No Limit

No Limit

2 min.

4 min.

Automated Attendant
No Answer
Disconnect Time
Selection

Used to determine how long the
Automated Attendant rings a
station before dropping the call.

Automated Attendant
Answer Delay Time
Assignment

Assign the number of seconds
before the Automated Attendant
answers an incoming CO/PBX
call, when there is no answer.

0 sec.

4 sec.

99 sec.

SMDR Valid Call
Timer Assignment

Minimum duration of an outside
call before the system provides an
SMDR report. (Set from O-990
seconds in 10 second increments.)

0 sec.

40 sec.

990 sec.

External Paging
Timeout Selection

l-7-06

The time before an external
paging is automatically
disconnected.

30 sec.

5 min.

No Limit

PBR Interdigit
Release Timer
Selection

l-S-10

Specify the interdigit
for the PBR.

3 sec.

7 sec.

10 sec.

System Refresh
Timer Assignment

1-8-11

Assign the system refresh time.

No Refresh

4hT.

24 hrs.

Trunk DTMF
DurationIInterdigit
Selection

3-15

Specify the tone duration and
interdigit time of DTMF signals.
@myjessed as durationlinterdigit

70160 ms.

100/70 ms.

900/200 ms.

Tie Line Prepause
Time Selection

3-16

Specify the prepause time for
when the originating side can
send dial pulse or DTMF to a
distant system.

0 sec.

0 sec.

13 sec.

Tie Line Answer
Detect Time Selection

3-17

Specify the duration between the
time when the receiving system
answers and the time when it is
recognized as an answer,

0 ms.

520 111s.

1950 ms.

release time

Continue

Programming

on next page.

5-311

Timer

Memory
Block

Timing

Value

Definition
Minimum

Default

Maximum

Tie Line Release
Detect Time Selection

3-18

Specify the duration between the
circuit disconnection detection on
the Tie Line on the distant system
side and the time it is recognized
as Tie Line Release.

0 ms.

520 ms.

1950 ms.

Tie Line/CO/PBX
Incoming Signal
Detect Time Selection

3-19

Specify the time between the
detection of an incoming signal
from another 12O/Level II/Level II
Advanced system and the time
when acknowledgement
signal is
sent. (Expressed as Wink
Start/Delay/CO1 ms.)

o/o/50

520/120/200

1950/450/800

0 answer an incoming

Tie

sent to another system.
Tie Line Outgoing
Timeout Selection

Interdigit
Selection

Specify the maximum time
interval between the origination
of an outgoing call and, if dialing
is delayed, when the call is

Timeout

Signal Detect
Timeout Selection

5-312

Programming

Installation
SECTION

Electra Professional

Service Manual
6

Februarv

fZO/Level IL/Level If Advanced

1998

CODE RESTRICTION
6.1

General
The Electra Professional systems provide an advanced method of restricting
outgoing calls
based on the fast eight digits dialed. Code Restriction denies placement of outside calls
based on Trunk Groups and accommodates equal access to other commtm carriers (OCC).
This eliminates unauthorized
calls and configures system calling functions to provide cost
control.
System Programming
has 16 Code Restriction Classes. Class 00 is fixed and allows free
dialing. Class 15 is fixed and denies all outside calls. Classes 01-14 are programmable
in
system software, Stations are assigned per station to a Code Restriction Class. A separate
Day Mode and Night Mode station to Code Restriction Class assignment is available.

6.2

Default

Assignments

At default, all stations are assigned to Code Restriction
Mode, that allows free dialing.

Class 00 for both Day and Night

At default, the Code Restriction Classes are setup with the following restrictions to provide
the most common
Code Restriction
requirements
and simplify
Code Restriction
programming.
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class

01:
02:
03:
04:.
05-14:

Deny:
Deny:
Deny:
Deny:
Allow:

0 and 1 + calls
0 and 1 + calls
0 , 1 + , and 976 calls
1-t calls
911 calls only

Allow:
Allow:
Allow:

At default,

all OCC calls are denied for Code Restriction

At default,

System Speed Dial buffers override

At default,

Code Restriction

l-800 calls
l-800 calls
l-800 calls

Classes 01-14.

Code Restriction

Classes 01-14.

is not applied to Tie lines.

At default, when Station Lockout is set at a station, the station is outgoing
At default,
Note:

Programming

Digit Restriction

restricted.

is not assigned.

Refer to Section 6.5 - Code Restriction

Tables (Default

Values).

5-313

6.3

Memory

Blocks

The following

related Memory

Blocks are used when assigning

Code Restriction.

Title
Assignment

Trunk-to-Trunk

Group Assignment

Type selection

2-01

.........................................

Trunk-to-Tenant

Trunk

..................................

3-03

...............................................

3-91

PBXKTX

Access Code Assignment

I .................................

l-l-24

PBXKTX

Access Code Assignment

II

l-l-25

OCCTableAssignment
OCC Table to Trunk

................................

.............................................
Group Assignment

l-l-67

..............................

5-03

Table to OCC Table Assignment

&Digit

Matching

Table to Normal

Dial Assignment

...................

l-l-66

&Digit

Matching

Table to Trunk

Group Assignment

...................

5-02

..................................

S-Digit Matching

Table Assignment

8-Digit

Table to Class Assignment

Matching

Assignment

Tie Line Code Restriction
Code Restriction

by Tenant

..........................

Assignment

..................

(Day Mode)

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

(Night Mode)

to Tenant Assignment

Memory

Block

6.4.1

General

...............

...........................

Class Assignment

l-l-62
l-l-69

................................

Code Restriction

Telephone

l-l-18

........................

When Lockout is Set

l-l-61
l-l-65

.............................

by Class Selection

Class Assignment

Trunk Digit Restriction

l-l-60

.......................................

System Speed Dial Restriction
System Speed Dial Override

.....................

l-l-68

S-Digit Matching

Class Allow/Deny

6.4

Memory
Block

l-l-70
4-32

.......................

4-07

......................

4-08

....................................

4-09

Description

This section describes the function of the Memory Blocks directly related to Code
Restriction.
Some Memory Blocks from the previous list are not described here but
are included because of their effect on Code Restriction
(e.g., Trunk to Tenant
Assignment).
Code Restriction is based on Trunk Group and consideration
should
be given to this Memory Block because stations are assigned to a tenant, and
trunks are assigned to a Trunk Group.
6.4.2

OCC Assignment/Operation
OCC Table Assignment

(Memory

Block l-l-67)

This Memory Block allows an OCC Access Code (maximum of eight digits to be
assigned. System Programmin g has 16 OCC Tables (Ol- 16). Each Table can have
one OCC Access Code assigned.

5-314

Programming

Installation

Service Manual

Electra Professional

12OILevel II/Level

OCC Table to Trunk

Februarv

II Advanced

Group Assignment

1998

(Memory Block 5-03)

This Memory Block assigns Trunk Groups to the OCC Tables. Any combination
Trunk Groups can be assigned to the OCC Tables.
8-Digit Matching

Table to OCC Table Assignment

(Memory

of

Block l-l-68)

This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Table to the OCC Tables.
combination of 8-Digit Matching Tables can be assigned to the OCC Tables.

Any

OCC Operation
When a restricted station user dials an OCC Access Code, the system searches the
OCC Tables for a match. If no match is found, the user is allowed free dialing. If a
match is found, the system monitors the next eight digits dialed and searches the
8-Digit Matching Tables assigned to the OCC Table. The system searches only the
&Digit Matching
Tables assigned to the Code Restriction
Class the station is
assigned to and has the Trunk Group assigned to it for the in-use trunk the station
is on. If the interdigit
time of the dialing party exceeds 10 seconds while the
station user is dialing on an outside line, and the system is searching the assigned
tables, the system automatically
drops the call.
6.4.3

&Digit

Matching

Table Assignment/Operation

8-Digit

Matching

Table to Normal

Dial Assignment

(Memory

Block l-l-66)

This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Table to be Used or Unused for
non-OCC calls. If an 8-Digit Matching Table is assigned as Unused, the table is
used only for OCC calls. There are 16,8-D+@ Matching Tables (00-15) in System
Programming.
Each table is independently
assigned to be Used or Unused.
8-Digit Matching

Table to Trunk

Group Assignment

(Memory

Block 5-02)

This Memory Block assigns Trunk Groups to the 8-Digit Matching
combination of Trunk Groups can be assigned to the 8-Digit Matching
8-Digit

Matching

Table Assignment

Tables. Any
Tables.

(Memory Block l-1-60)

This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Tables. Each a-Digit Matching
To cover the many possible combinations
Table can have 16, S-digit entries.
(without listing each individual
number), code restriction letters can be used in
place of digits. The code restriction letters used and their numerical values are as
follows:

x=

O-9, *,and#

P = Oandl
N = 2-9
When 1X is entered in a table, and the table is assigned as a day table in the
&Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment, any 1+ any digit call is denied if the
table is used. Using X, P, and N accommodates several combinations with just one
entry.
Note:

Programming

The Trunk Access Code should not be placed in the &Digit
Table. Code Restriction starts after a trunk is seized.

Matching

5-315

8-Digit Matching

Table to Class Assignment

(Memory

Block l-1-61)

This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Tables to the Code Restriction
Classes. The 8-Digit Matching Tables are also assigned as Allow/Deny
Tables in
this Memory Block. Any combination of S-Digit Matching Tables (Allow, Deny, or
Not Used) can be assigned to Code Restriction Classes 01-14.
Classes 00 and 15
are fixed and are nonprogrammable.
Class Allow/Deny

Selection (Memory

Block l-l-65)

This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction
Classes (01-14) as Allow or
Deny. This assignment is used when there is no match or when there is an overlap
(duplicate numbers in tables with opposite Allow/Deny
assignments) of numbers
in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.
8-Digit Matching

Table Operations

The 8-Digit Matching Tables are used to restrict or allow OCC calls and non-OCC
calls. To understand the relationship
of the 8-Digit Matching Tables with OCC
calls, refer to Section 6.4.2 - OCC Assignment/Operation.
When a restricted station user makes a non-OCC call, the system monitors the
fast eight digits dialed and searches the 8-Digit Matching Tables assigned for
Used in Memory Block l-l-66,
8-Digit
Matching
Table to Normal
Dial
Assignment.
The system searches only the 8-Digit Matching Tables assigned to
the Code Restriction Class the station is assigned to and has the Trunk Group
assigned to it for the in-use trunk the station is on.
If a match is found, the system looks at the S-Digit Matching
Table to Class
Assignment for the Allow or Deny Assignment.
If the table is assigned as Allow,
the call is allowed. If the table is assigned as Deny, the call is denied.
If no match is found or a duplicate match is made with opposite Allow/Deny
assignments, the system looks at the class Allow/Deny Assignment.
If the class is
assigned as Allow, the call is allowed. If the Class is assigned as Deny, the call is
denied. If the interdigit
time of the dialing party exceeds 10 seconds while the
station user is dialing on an outside line, and the system is searching the assigned
tables, the system automatically
drops the call.
6.4.4

System Speed Dial Override

by Class Selection (Memory

Block l-l-62)

This Memory Block allows System Speed Dial buffers to override or not override
Code Restriction.
Each Code Restriction
Class (01-14) is assigned as Allow or
Deny.
6.4.5

Tie Line Code Restriction

Assignment

(Memory Block l-l-69)

This Memory Block assigns system-wide
calls made on Tie Line.
6.4.6

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

Code Restriction

to be used or not used for

When Lockout is Set (Memory

Block l-l-70)

This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction Class to be used when Station
Lockout (Outgoing) is set at a station, Station Lockout can be set by the Attendant
or from any station ifallowed in System Programming.

5-316

Programming

.. .-I-!
/’

6.4.7

6.4.8

Trunk Digit Restriction

Assignment

(Memory

Block 4-32)

This Memory Block specifies, per station, the maximum
be dialed while on any outside line.

number

Code Restriction

Block 4-07)

Class Assignment

(Day Mode) (Memory

This Memory Block specifies, per station, the Code Restriction
the system or stations assigned tenant is in the Day Mode.
6.4.9

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

(Night Mode) (Memory

Code Restriction
6.51

Tables

(Default

OCC Tables with Default

Class used when

Block 4-08)

This Memory Block specifies, per station, the Code Restriction
the system or stations assigned tenant is in the Night Mode.
6.5

of digits that csn

Class used when

Values)
Values

The following Memory Blocks are displayed:
OCC Table Assignment (l-l-67)
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-03)
S-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment

(l-l-68)

TABLE

01

TABLE

02

TABLE

03

TABLE

04

TABLE

05

TABLE

06

TABLE

07

TABLE

08

TABLE

09

TABLE

10

TABLE

11

TABLE

12

TABLE

13

TABLE

14

TABLE

15

TABLE

16

Memory Block (l-l-67)
Memory Block (5-03)
Memory Block (l-l-68)

Memory Block (l-1-67)
Memory

Block (5-03)

Memory Block U-1-68)

Memory Block U-1-67)
Memory Block (5-03)
Memory

Block (l-1-68)

Memory Block U-1-67)
Memory

Block (5-03)

Memory Block (l-l-68)
Note:

Programming

X = O-9, *, #
P = 0,l
N=2-9

5-317

Februarv

1998

Electra Professional
6.5.2

8-Digit

Matching

12Ohwel

.It&evel

Tables with Default

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual

Values

Tke following Memory Blocks are displayed:
S-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (l-l-66)
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (l-l-60).

TABLE00

TABLE

01

Memory Block (l-l-66)

Use Table ---I

Memory Block (5-02)

T.G. 01-32

Memory

Block (l-1-60)

00
1111111
01

I I I I I I L

02
lllllll

TABLE 02

TABLE

Use Table

I

00
$3

T.G. 01-32

I

03

Use Table

1

00

I I I I I I I

01

llllllI~

02

03
lllllII
04
lllllll
05
lllllll
06
llllllI
07
I I I I I I I
D8
lllllll
D9
lllllll
10
lllllll

12
13
ti

kid
14
15

Note:

X = O-9, *, #
P=O,l
N=2-9
(Continued

5-318

on nextpage.)

Programming

I

&Digit

Matching

Tables with default values:

The following Memory Blocks are displayed:
&Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment
&Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment
&Digit Matching Table Assignment Cl-l-60)

TABLE

TABLE 05

04

Memory

Block (l-l-66)

I

Use Table

I

Memory

Block (5-02)

1

T.G.Ol-32

1

Memory

Block (l-l-60)

Note:

I

Use Table
T.G. 01-32

TABLE

-7

(l-l-66)
(5-02)

06

TABLE

Use Table

Use Table

I

T.G. 01-32

T.G. 01-32

1

X = O-9, *, #
P=O,l
N=2-9

(Continued

Programming

07

on next page.)

5-319

&Digit Matching Tables with Default Values
The following Memory Blocks are displayed:
B-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment
&Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (l-l-60)

TABLE

08

TABLE 09

TABLE

(l-l-66)
(5-02)

10

TABLE

11

Memory Block (1-1-66)

Use Table

Use Table

Memory Block (5-02)

T.G. 01-32

T.G. 01-32

Memory Block (l-l-60)

00

0
lllllll

01
II11111

02
1111111~

03
II11111
04
lllllll

Note:

X = O-9, *, #
P=O,l
N=2-9
(Continued

5-320

on nextpage.)

Programming

&Digit

MatiSng

Tables with Default

7

The following Memory Blocks are displ;
&Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial
&Digit Matching Table to.Trunk Groq
8-Digit

Matching

TABLE

Table Assignment

12

TABLE

(l-

red:
Lssignment (l-1-66)
Pssignment (5-02)
-60)

13

TABLE

14

Memory

Block (l-l-66)

Use Table

Memory

Block (5-02)

T.G. 01-32

Memory

Block Cl-l-601

00
01
02

TABLE. 15

1x
1111111
I I I I I I I.
lllllll

03
lllllll,

04
lllllll

05
lllllll

06
lllllll

07
lllllll

08
lllllll

09
lllllll
10
lllllll

11
llllllI

12
lllllll

13
ci14

1111111
llll1lll

lP5 j ~1~~~~~
Note:

X = O-9, *, #
P = 0,l
N=2-9
(Continued

Programming

on next page.)

5-321

Februarv

1998

Electra

Professional

12OILevel II/Level

II Advanced

hstallation

Service Manual

B-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values
The following Memory Blocks are display&
B-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment (l-l-61)
Class Allow/Deny Selection (l-l-65)

Memory
Block
(l-1-61)

Note:

5-322

A = Allow
D = Deny
Blank = Not used

Programming

Code Restriction Algorithm

4

Class 01 - 14

Search the S-Digit Matching
Table From Table 00-15 After
Each Digit For the First 8 Digits
i
Search Only The S-Digit
Matching Tables Assigned To
Class Assignment M.B. 1-1-61

Allow User
To Dial Up To 6
More Digits
I

0

J

Search the OCC
4
Search Only the S-Digit
Matching Tables Assigned To
Normal Dial M.B. l-l-66
1

Continued

Programming

on next page.

5-323

Search Only The B-Digit
Matching Tables Assigned To
OCC Table M.B. l-l-58
+
Search Only the B-Digit
Matching Tables Assigned For
The Trunk Group Being Used
M.B. 5-TRF-02

Match Found

Match Found
Deny Table

1
I
;
I
f
I
I

(Note 1)

Match Found
Deny Table
(Note 1)

Disconnect
IssueError

I

No perfect Match Found or
Duplicate Match in Opposite Tables

5-324

Note 1:

Tables are assigned as Allow or Deny in the &Digit
Table to Class Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-61).

Matching

Note 2:

If the interdigit
time duration of the dialing party exceeds 10
seconds while the Code Restriction Tables are being searched, the
system automatically
drops the call.

Programming

SECTION

7

CHARACTER

CODE TABLES

These tables are used for some of the functions
Note: Codes

available

to the Electra Professional

systems.

166-221and250-252areused for Japanese characters only.
Character

i

F

L
M
N

I 070 I
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078

I

0

1 079

1

R

,

039

G

(

040

H

1

041
042

I

s

J
K

5
6
7
8
9
.

053
054
055
056
057
058

1

I

W

\

1 082 1

r

096

a

097

b

098

C

099

d

100
101

e

[T-p--l

n
0

Esl

P
Q

110
111
112
113

I

U

1 117

I

X

1 120

i 087 1

I 092 I

LEH
1
A

t

Code

093
094
095

Programming

Continued

on nextpage.

5-325

Februarv

I

o
r
.I
.
.

Ez 5r

I

12OLevel

SK-eve1 II Advanced

r

f

I

I
I

?-l207I
i
I2081

193

Sn&allationServiceManual

I

164

186
166

I

170
171
172
173

=L
I

Professional

162
162

168

f

5-326

I 16l

q
3
t

~

Me&a

1998

169

174

“I

17s

w

176

Programming

SECTION

8

DISPLAY
Abbreviations

L

ADD/DEL
AL
ALM
ANS
ANSWR
ASSGN
AUT
AUTANS
BLANK
BNCE
BTN
CAL
CANCLD
CKT
CNF
CL
CLD
CLR
CLS
CONN
DESG
DGT
DISP
DISTM
DIVERT
DLY
DP
DSS
DY
ESP
FWDG
FLSH
GUARD
H
HR
ICM

ABBREVLWIONS
in the display have the following

: Addition/Deletion
: All
: Alarm
: Answer
: Answer
: Assignment
: Automatic
: Autoanswer
: Service Class
: Bounce
: Button
: Call
: Canceled
: circuit
: Confknation
: Class
: CO Line Display
: Clear
: Class
: connection
i Designation
: Digit
: Display
: Disconnection Recognition
: Diversion
: Delay Signal Time
: DialPulse
: Direct Station Selection
: Day Mode
: External Speaker
: Forwarding
: Flash
: Outgoing Guard Time
: High
: Hour
: Intercom (Extension>

MDT
IN
INC
INDV
INTRPT
L

LCD
LN
LOOP
LNRSPD
M

Time

MF
MIN
MOH
MSTER
NBR
NT
OUT
OG TM
ov
PAD AT
PAD AR
PAD BT
PAD BR
PRE
PBR
PBX
PRNT
PTRN
PV
PVT
PWRFAIL
RCV
RCVR
RES

meanings:
: Immediate
: Incoming
: Incoming Signal Detection Time Assignment
: Individual
: Interruption
: Low
: Liquid Crystal Display
: Line
: Loop Off-Guard Assignment
: Last Number/Speed Dial
: Medium
: Manual
: Dual-Tone Multifrequency
(DTMF)
: Minimum
: Music On Hold
: Master
: Number
: Night Mode
: outgoing
: Outgoing Time Out Assignment
: Over
: PAD Pattern A Transmission Assignment
: PAD Pattern A Receiving Assignment
: PAD Pattern B Transmission Assignment
: PAD Pattern B Receiving Assignment
: Prepause Time Selection
: Push Button Signal Receiver
: Private Branch Exchange
,
:Print
: Pattern
: Tie Line
: Tie Line
: Power Failure
: Receiving
: Receiver
: Restriction

Continued

Programming

on nextpage.

5-327

Februarv

1998

RINGTONE
RLY
RNGTONE
RT
RTADV
RVS
SDT
SEND
SEL
SLT

5-328

Electra Professional

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Ringing Tone
Relay
Ringing Tone
Route
Route Advance Block
Reversal
Second Dial Tone Assignment
Transmission
Selection
Single Line Telephone

lZO/Level II/Level

SPD
ST
TEL
TERM
TMD
TRNS
TRK
TRK GP
WDSD

II Advanced

Installation

: Speed Dial
:stsrt
: Telephone
: Terminating
: Timer
: Timed
: Transfer
:Trunk
: Trunk Group
: Wink/Delay Signal Detection

Service Manual

Time Out

Programming

CHAPTER
6
GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER6

.

GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

1

INTRODUCTION

SECTION

2

GUIDE

TO FEATURE

AccountCodeEntry

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..o

6-1
6-1
6-l

.................................................................

6-l
6-2

................................................................................
Display ........................................................................

Alphanumeric
Ancillary

PROGRAMMING

..........................................................................

AccountCodeForcedWerifled
AllCallPage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~..

6-2

Device Connection

6-2

AnswerHold

..................................................................
.................................................................................

6-3

AnswerKey

.................................................................................

6-3

Assigned Night Answer
Attendant

(ANA)

6-3

................................................................
Console (Series 200 or Higher) ...............................................

Add-On

6-4

AttendantCampOn

..........................................................................

6-4

AttendantPositions

..........................................................................

6-4

Attendant

Station Outgoing

AttendantTransfer

Call Distribution

Background
Barge-In
Bilingual

........................................
.........................................................

Music Port Assignment

...........................................................
....................................................................................
LCD Indication

.....................................................................
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
.......................................................
Call Alert Notification
Call Appearance

6-7

CallerIDIndication

6-8
6-8
..............

6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9

(Series 200 or Higher)

..................................................

6-10

Keys (Series 250 or Higher)

...................................................

6-10

Keys (Series 250 or Higher)

Callback Request
Call Forward

6-7

............................................................................

..............................................................
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
...........................................................

Call Arrival

6-6

(ACD) (Series 200 or Higher)

AutomaticRelease
Automatic

6-5

..............................................................................

Redial

6-5
6-5

..........................................................................

AutomaticDay/NightModeSwitching

Automatic

..................

........................................................................

AutomaticCallback

AutomaticHold

.........................................

...........................................................................

AutomatedAttendant

Automatic

Lockout

.......................................................

............................................................................
.........................................................................

- All Calls

......................................................................

6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12

Februarv

Electra Profbssional

1993

Call Forward

- Busy/No Answer

Call Forward

- Off Premise

II Advanced

Installation

Service Manual
6-12

..............................................................

6-12

...................................................................

Call Park - System

..........................................................................

6-13

. -..y.

CalI PickupDirect

..........................................................................

6-13

,’

Call Pickup Group

..........................................................................

6-13

ClassofService

Display

Code Restriction
CO/PBX/Tie

6-14

Connection

6-15

...........................................................

Line Digit Restriction

6-15

..............................................................

6-15

........................................................................

Message

DataLineSecurity

6-15

..........................................................................

Delay Announcement

(Series 200 or Higher)

6-16

...................................................

6-16

............................................................................

DelayedRinging
DialOforAttendant
DigitInsertion

6-17

.........................................................................

6-17

..............................................................................

DigitalVoiceMail
Dialing

Direct Inward

System Access (DISA)

(DID)

6-18

.................................................................

System Access (DISA) without

Direct Inward

System Access (DXSA) with VRS Message

Termination

6-19

..........................................................

Direct Inward

Direct Inward

6-18

..........................................................................

Direct Inward

VRS Message

...............................

6-19

..................................

6-19
6-20

..................................................................

6-26

........................................................................

DirectPagingAccess

6-21

.....................................................................

Direct Station Selection

6-21

.........................................................................

DistinctiveRinging

6-21

.............................................................................

DoNotDisturb
DropKey

6-13

.....................................................................

............................................................................

Cordless Telephone
Customized

6-13

.............................................................................

Clock/Calendar

........

...........................................................................

6-22

DTI ........................................................................................

6-22

ElapsedCallTimer

6-22

.........................................................................

E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)

ExternalToneRinger
External

6-23

.....................................................................

Equal Access Accommodation

6-24

................................................................

6-24

.......................................................................

Zone Paging (Meet-Me)

6-24

.............................................................

6-25

.......................................................................

Fax Status Indication

FeatureAccess-UserProgrammable

ii

12O/Level II/Level

Flexible

Line Assignment

Flexible

Numbering

Flexible

Ringing Assignment

Plan

6-25

.........................................................

...................................................................

6-25

....................................................................

6-25
6-26

................................................................

Chapter

6 - Table of Contents

e’.,

FlexibleTimeouts

...........................................................................

FullHandsfreeOperation
GroupListening..

....................................................................
Via ADA(l)-W(BKY(SW)

Hold with Recall (Exclusive

and Non-Exclusive)

6-28

.............................................

6-28

................................................

6-28

.........................................................................

IncomingCallIdentification

6-29

..................................................................

Internal

Voice/Tone

Signaling

Internal

Zone Paging (Meet-Me)

6-29

................................................................

6-29

..............................................................

6-29

......................................................................................

Key Function/Multi-Function
Least Cost Routing
MessageWaiting
Multiple

Registration

(LCR)

6-30

....................................................

6-30

....................................................................

6-31

............................................................................

Trunk

Groups

MusicOnHold

6-31

......................................................................

6-31

..............................................................................

NightCallPickup
NightChime

6-31

...........................................................................

6-31

................................................................................

NightTransfer

6-32

..............................................................................

Off-HookRinging

6-32

...........................................................................

Off-Hook Voice Announcement

Terminal

Assignment

6-32

..........................................

6-32

............................................................................

PCProgramming

6-33

PooledLine(Outgoingf

......................................................................

6-33

PrimeLineAssignment

......................................................................

6-33

PrivateLines

...............................................................................

RecallKey

..................................................................................

Restriction

(Outgoing)

..........................................................

RingingLinePreference

.....................................................................

RouteAdvanceBlock

........................................................................

SecondaryIncomingExtension
SeizedTrunkNumberDisplay
StationRelocation

SLTAdaptor

Access

., ............

6-34
6-34
6-34

................................................................

6-35

................................................................

...........................................................................

SpeedDialStoredCharacters

6-34

6-35

................................................................................

SLTTimedAlarm

6-33

...............................................................

...........................................................................

Single Line Telephone

Chapter

Unit

6-28

....................................................................................

HowlerToneService

ISDN

6-28

...........................................................................

Headset Connection

HotLine

6-26

.................................................................

6-35
6-36
6-36
6-36
6-37

SpeedDialStation

..........................................................................

6-37

SpeedDialSystem

..........................................................................

6-37

6 - Table of Contents

. ..

111

.............................................

Station Hunting

Station Message Detail Recording

....................................................

Lockout

StationTransfer

............................................................................

...................................................................................

Synchronous
Tl Connection

TenantService
Three Minute

of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines

,,’

6-39

..................................................

6-40

.............................................................................
Reminder

6-38

6-39

...............................................................................

Tandem Switching

... ::

6-39

.......................................................................

Ringing

6-38

6-39

...........................................................................

Stored Hookflash

6-37
6-38

...................................................................

Station Outgoing

StepCall

6-40

.....................................................................

6-40

ToneOverride

..............................................................................

6-40

TrunkQueuing

.............................................................................

6-41

Trunk-to-Trunk

Transfer

Uniform

Call Distribution

Uniform

Numbering

....................................................................

6-41

(UCD) (Series 200 or Higher)

6-41

Network

Numbering

Network

(Closed Numbering

Uniform

Numbering

Network

(Open Numbering

Voice Mail Integration

VoicePrompt

Plan)
Plan)

6-42
..................................

6-42

...................................

6-44

.............................................................................

UnsupervisedConference

VoiceOverSplit

........................................

................................................................

Uniform

UniversalSlots

iv

(SMDR)

:. .............................

6-46

....................................................................

6-46

......................................................................

6-46

............................................................................

6-46

...............................................................................

6-47

Chapter

6 - Table of Contents

SECTION

1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides a guide or roadmap
or can be programmed for a feature.

of the Memory

SECTION

PROGRAMMING

2

GUIDE

TO FEATURE

Blocks associated with a feature

that are either required

This section lists several features and the associated Memory Blocks that must be programmed
Additional Memory Blocks that may affect use of the feature are also listed.
The * in front of the Memory Block Title
associated feature can be used.

indicates

The ** in front of the Memory Block Title indicates
the associated feature can be used.

ACCOUNT

CODE

that

this Memory

before the

Block must be programmed

before

ENTRY

Start Timer Selection

* Printer

Block must be programmed

that at least one Memory

Title

AccessCode

to use the feature.

Memory
Block

..............................................

cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

Connected

(Alarm)

Selection

...........................

l-1-46/47/48

B:I:C
B:G:AB/C

.................................

1-5-13

A:B:A

................................

l-5-25

A:B:E

l-S-08

B:B:A:D

SMDR Valid Call Timer Assignment
* Class of Service (Station)

l-l-05

PC
Menu
Item

Feature Selection

2 .........................

(P3, LK 6)
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

ACCOUNT

.......................

4-17

B:B:B:I

CODE FORCED/VERIFIED
Title

Memory
Block

**Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit)
Class of Service (Attendant)
* Class of Service (Station)

Assignment

...........................

Feature Selection

1 ......................

Feature Selection 2 .........................

l-1-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:G:AB/C

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

l-S-08

B:B:A:D

(P5, LK 1)
Forced Account

Code Length Assignment

............................

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Guide to Feature

Programming

.......................

l-8-27
4-17

B:M:A/B:M:B
B:B:B:I

6-l

ALL CALL

PAGE
Title

Memory
Block
............................

Access Code (l-, 2-, or S-Digit) Assignment
Internal

Paging Timeout

Internal

Paging Alert Tone Selection

External

Speaker Connection

External

Paging Alert Tone Selection

External

Page Timeout

Receiving

Internal/All

Internal

Selection

Selection

B:F:I

l-2-25

B:F:G

...............................

l-7-02

B:F:B

................................

l-7-03

B:F:A

l-7-06

B:F:H

.................................

....................................

Call Page Selection

............................

......................................

Speed Dial Number/Name

Display Selection

Number

to Trunk Assignment

ANCILLARY

LCD Indication

DEVICE

4-93

B:B:C:H

Selection

l-l-33
l-2-09-18

PC
Menu
Item
B:H:B
B:D:A-J

.............................

l-lo-04

.............................

3-00

B:C:B:I

4-18

B:B:B:J

4-28

B:B:C:B

..........................................
..................................

B:L:B

CONNECTION
Title

ADA(B) Ring Mode Assignment

6-2

..........................

...................................

Key Port Name Assignment

* Station Name Assignment
Bilingual

B:B:B:G

Memory
Block

Absence Message l-10 Assignment

* Telephone

4-31

DISPLAY
Title

Call Arrival

B:G:A/B/C

.1 l-2-00

Selection

Zone Paging Selection

ALPHANUMERIC

.................................

l-l-46147148

PC
Menu
Item

Memory
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:C:A

Guide to Feature

Programming

.:/\

ANSWER

HOLD
Title

Memory
Block

Hold Recall Timer Selection (Non-Exclusive
* Off-Hook

Ringing

Trunk to Tenant

....................

.........................................

Selection

.......................................

Assignment

* COLPBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)

* COE’BX Ring Assignment

(Night Mode)

ANSWER

Hold)

...............................
.............................

B:I:D

l-l-26

B:B:A:H

2-01

B:K:D

4-01

B:B:B:B

4-02

B:B:B:C

Memory
Block

Off-Hook Ringing

Selection

Trunk to Tenant

Assignment

DIT Assignment

...................

. . . . . . . . . . .

.................

. . . . . . . . . . .

.............................

ANA Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . .

............................

. . . . . . . . . . .

* CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)

* CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Night Mode)

ASSIGNED

l-l-03

KEY
Title

Ringing

PC
Menu
Item

Line Preference

NIGHT

Selection

ANSWER

.........

.............

.......

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

.........

l-l-26

.........

2-01

B:K:D

.........

3-42

B:C:B:H

.........

3-43

B:C:B:H

.........

4-01

B:B:B:B

.........

4-02

B:B:B:C

.........

4-11

B:B:C:K

Guide to Feature

. . . .. . .. . ... . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. ... . . . . .. .. ... . . .

Programming

B:B:A:H

(ANA)

Title

* ANA Assignment

PC
Menu
Item

Memory
Block
3-43

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:B:H

6-3

ATTENDANT

ADD-ON

CONSOLE

(SERIES

200 OR HIGHER)
Memory
Block

Title

* Attendant

Add-On Console to Telephone

* Attendant

Add-On Console Key Selection

CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)

CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Night

Line Key Selection for Telephone
Prime Line/Hot
Telephone

ATTENDANT

Mode)
Mode

Line Assignment

Type Assignment

l-6-01

B:B:E:B

l-6-05

B:B:E:A

...............................

4-01

B:B:B:B

..............................

4-02

B:B:B:C

...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

4-23

B:B:B:F

Port Assignment

..............

.............................

....................................

7-2

.........................................

B:A:D

CAMP-ON
Title

System Transfer/Camp-On

Memory
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l-l

Selection

PC
Menu
Item
1

B:B:A:I

Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l-64

B:I:I

Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Class of Service (Station)

Feature

SLT Data Line Security Assignment

ATTENDANT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

* Attendant

B:B:B:Q

POSITIONS
Title

Memory
Block

Add-On Console to Telephone

* Class of Service (Attendant)

Feature

* Station to Class of Service Feature

6-4

PC
Menu
Item

Port Assignment

..............

Selection

1 .......................

Assignment

........................

PC
Menu
Item

l-6-01

B:B:E:B

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

4-17

B:B:B:I

Guide to Feature Programming

.‘,;

ATTENDANT

STATION

OUTGOING

LOCKOUT

Tltle

Code Restriction
* Attendant

Memory
Block

Class Assignment

when Lockout

Add-On Console Key Selection

...............

l-l-70

l-6-05
4-07
4-08

............................

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

(Day Mode)

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

(Night Mode)

ATTENDANT

is Set

.......................
.....................

Memory
Block

* System Transfer/Camp-On

Selection

CO Transfer Ring Pattern

Selection

A:A:C

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-11

B:B:A:I

.. . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . .. .

1-l-13
(Series 400 or higher)

B:C:A:J

l-1-14
(Series 400 or higher)

B:C:A:K

. . . . . .. . . ... . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .

Add-On Console Key Assignment

. . . .. .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . .. .. .

l-l-64

B:I:I

l-6-05

B:B:E:A

ATTENDANT
Title

* Access Code (l-, 2-, or $-Digit)

Memory
Block
Assignment

. . . . ... . .. . .. . . . ... . . . . .. . .

Attendant

Transfer

Ring Pattern

Specified Station Access Code Assignment

.........................
...........................

Automated

Attendant

First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection

Automated

Attendant

Transfer

Automated

Attendant

No Answer Disconnect

Tandem Transfer

Delayed Ringing

SMDR Print Extension

Time Selection

Time Selection

Assignment

Automated

Attendant

PBR Timeout

Automated

Attendant

PBR Start Time Selection

* Automated

Attendant

Message Day/Night

Automated

Attendant

Message to Tenant Assignment

Automated

Attendant

Answer

Guide to Feature Programming

........
.......
..........

.................

Response Selection

...............

......................

Mode Selection

Delay Time Assignment

.............

.................
................

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-46/47/48
(Item 501)

Automated

A:A:B

Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On

Recall Timer Selection

AUTOMATED

B:B:E:A

. .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. .. .

.. . .. . . .. ... . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . . . .. .

CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection

Attendant

A:A:D

TRANSFER
Title

Attendant

PC
Menu
Item

B:G:A/B/C

l-l-54

A:I:N

l-2-08

B:G:G

l-4-01
l-4-02
l-4-03
l-4-04
l-4-08

A:I:J
A:I:M
A:I:I
A:C:D
A:I:L

l-4-09

A:I:K

l-4-11
1-4-12
1-4-13

A:I:E
A:I:G
A:I:A

6-5

Februarv

Electra Professional

1998

AUTOMATED

ATTENDANT

12O/Level II/Level

II Advanced

Memory
Block

Automated

Attendant

Message Access Code (l-Digit)

Assignment

.......

Automated

Attendant

Message Access Code (2-Digit)

Assignment

.....

Automated

Attendant

Message Repeat Selection

AttendanVDISA

PBR Receive Level Assignment
Class of Service (Attendant)

for Automated

Feature

VRS Message Recording

Time Selection

* Trunk Incoming
Automated

AttendantiDISA

Selection 2 ..........................

Assignment

..............................

..................................

...................................................
Answer Mode Selection

Attendant

Message to Trunk

CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)

CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Night Mode)

AUTOMATIC

..................

Selection 1 .......................

Feature

Tone Assignment

......................

to PBR Selection

Class of Service (Station)

* VRS Message Function

..............................

Intercom

1-4-14

A:I:C

: . 1-4-15

A:I:D

1-4-16

A:I:F

l-8-01

B:B:D:I

l-8-02

A:I:B

l-8-07
(Pg. 1 LK8
& Pg. 2 LK7)

B:B:A:C

l-8-08 (Pg. 2 LK 6)

B:B:A:D

1-8-12

A:H:H

1-8-13

A:H:G

1-8-15
(Table 1)

B:D:N
B:C:B:J

3-38

A:I:H

...............................

4-01

B:B:B:B

..............................

4-02

B:B:B:C

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Selection

.....................

CALLBACK

Callback
Feature

Release Timer

Selection

Access Code Assignment

Class of Service (Station)

6-6

........

PC
Menu
Imu

3-05

Title

Automatic

Service Manual

(continued)

Title

* SLT or Automated

Installation

Feature

..........................
............................

Selection 2 ..........................

l-2-02

B:I:A

l-2-24

B:G:D

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Guide to Feature

Programming

“\
,./’

AUTOMATIC

CALL

DISTRIBUTION

(ACD) (SERIES

200 OR HIGHER)

Title

Memory
Block

* Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit)

Assignment

* Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit)

Assignment

Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
Call Forward

No Answer

Timer Selection

Group Agent Assignment

* ACD/UCD

Group Pilot Number

ACD/UCD

Overflow

............................

Selection 2 .........................

* ACD/UCD

Group Overflow

...........................

....................................

Class of Service (Station ) Feature

ACD/UCD

...........................

................................

Assignment

Destination

Timer Selection

..........................

Assignment

..................

................................

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-46147140
(Items 031&z 032)

B:G:A/BlC

l-l-46147148
(Item 040)

B:G:A/B/C

l-l-76

B:B:A:B

l-2-22

B:I:B

l-8-08
(Pg. 1 LKl Series 400 or higher)
(Pg. 1 LK4 8.cLK 5)

B:B:A:D

l-8-25

A:F:A

l-12-00

A:F:B

l-12-01

A:F:C

l-12-02

A:F:D

* DIT Assignment

...................................................

3-42

B:C:B:H

* ANAAssignment

..................................................

3-43

B:C:B:H

4-12

B:B:C:I

Line Key Selection for Telephone

Mode

Card Interface

.....................................

Slot Assignment

MIF (ACD) Assignment
Note:

7-l
7-3-00

............................................

Refer to Delay Announcment

AUTOMATIC

..............................

DAY/NIGHT

MODE

Memory

SWITCHING
Memory
Block

* Automatic

Day/Night

Mode Switching

Automatic

Day/Night

Mode by Day of Week Selection

Time Assignment

.............
................

Feature Selection 1 .....................

CO/PBX Ring Assignment

(Day Mode)

CO/F’BX Ring Assignment

(Night Mode)

..............................
............................

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

(Day Mode)

Code Restriction

Class Assignment

(Night Mode)

Guide to Feature Programming

B:A:G

Blocks in this chapter.

Title

Class of Service (Attendant)

B:A:m

......................
....................

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-27

B:J:E/F

l-l-32

B:J:D

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

4-01

B:B:B:B

4-02

B:B:B:C

4-07

A:A:B

4-08

A:A:C

6-7

AUTOMATIC

HOLD
Title

Memory
Block

Hold Recall Timer Selection (Non-Exclusive
Attendant

Add-On Console to Telephone

Attendant

Add-On Console Key Assignment

.....................

Port Assignment

...........

..........................

..................................

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

AUTOMATIC

Hold)

...............................

Release Signal Detection

TRUNK-TO-TRUNK

Tandem Transfer

B:B:E:A

2-06

B:K:C

4-12

B:B:C:I

Time Selection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

PC
Menu
Item
B:J:A/B/C

Tandem Trunk

TRANSFER

Disconnect Timer Selection

A:C:C

l-4-05

A:C:B

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

3-04

B:C:B:M

..............................

3-05

B:C:B:J

...............................

3-06

A:C:A

3-40

B:C:B:B

Feature Selection

Transfer

* Trunk Incoming

Answer Mode Selection

Yes/No Selection

Assignment

...............

PC
Menu
Item

l-4-00

by Night Mode Selection

* Trunk-to-Trunk

Tandem Trunk

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:B:B

Memory
Block

Automatic

Class of Service (Attendant)

6-8

l-6-05

Memory
Block

Title

Automatic

B:B:E:B

RELEASE

AUTOMATIC

* Automatic

l-6-01

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l-04

Title

Automatic

B:I:D

Memory
Block

Redial Time Selection

AUTOMATIC

Automatic

l-l-03

REDIAL
Title

Automatic

.1.

PC
Menu
Item

....................

1 .......................
...........................

Release Signal Detection Time Selection

...................

Guide to Feature

Programming

“1:
,I

BACKGROUND

MUSIC PORT ASSIGNMENT
Memory
Block

Title

BGM Port Assignment (Series 500 or Higher)

... ......... ... ........ .

l-l-79

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:A:L

BARGE-IN
Memory
Block

Title

StartTimerSelection

..............................................

Private Line Assignment

...........................................

Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment

....................................

* Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 .........................
Trunk to Tenant Assignment

.......................................

SLT Data Line Security Assignment

BILINGUAL

.................................

l-l-05
1-1-29

PC
Menu
Item
B:I:C
B:C:A:H/I

l-l-76

B:B:A:B

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

2-01

B:K:D

4-90

B:B:B:Q

LCD INDICATION
Title

Memory
Block

Absence Message 1 - 10 Assignment

................................

Call Arrival Key Port Name Assignment
Station Name Assignment

.............................

..........................................

* Bilingual LCD Indication Selection ..................................

BUSY LAMP FIELD ON MULTILINE

1-2-09-U
l-lo-04

PC
Menu
Item
B:D:A-J
B&B

4-18

B:B:B:J

4-28

B:B:C:B

TERMINALS

Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-35

B:H:A

Line Key Selection .................................................

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .................................

2-06

B:K:C

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

Guide to Feature Programming

........................................

6-9

CALL ALERT NOTIFICATION

(SERIES 200 OR HIGHER)

Title

Memory
Block

Call Forward No Answer Timer Selection .............................
Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay
SLT Data Line Security Assignment

CALL APPEARANCE

.................

Selection

.................................

4-42

B:B:B:P

4-90

B:B:B:Q

KEYS (SERIES 250 OR HIGHER)
Title

* Line Key Selection

i ....

l-2-22

PC
Menu
Item
B:J.B

Memory
Block
2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

* Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

* Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment

4-43

B:B:B:O

CALL ARRIVAL

.................................................

PC
Menu
Item

.........................

KEYS (SERIES 250 OR HIGHER)
Title

Memory
Block

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
* Call Arrival Key Block Assignment

............................

..................................

Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection .............................
* Call Arrival Key Number Assignment

................................

l-l-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:G:A/B/C

l-2-04

B:L:A

l-6-05

B:B:E:A

l-10-01

B:L:C

l-10-02

B:L:D

l-10-03

B:L:E

l-10-04

B:L:B

l-10-05

B&F

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

* Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

* Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode) .....................

4-37

B:B:C:I

* Extension Line Key Ring Assignment  Feature Selection 2 .................
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

.......................

.,.......

PC
Menu
Item

l-2-24

B:G:D

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

4-17

B:B:B:I

CALLER ID INDICATION
Title

Memory
Block

**Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode .......................

l-l-78

* Class of Service (Station> Feature Selection 2 .........................

l-8-08
(P4, LK3 & LK4)

Caller ID Display Assignment for Call Arival Key

....................

PC
Menu
Item
A: J:A
B:B:A:D

l-lo-06

A: J:B
B:K:C
B:C:B:H

**DITAssignment

...................................................

2-06
3-42

**ANAAssignment

..................................................

3-43

B:C:B:H

3-44

A:J:C

4-01
4-02

B:B:B:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .................................

**Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line

......................

CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode) ...............................
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) .............................

B:B:B:C
B:B:C:I

....................

4-12
4-37

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode) ...................

4-38

B:B:C:I

Caller ID Outgoing CO Selection

4-44

A:J:D

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)

Card Interface Slot Assignment
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

....................................
.....................................

........................................

7-1
7-3-04

B:B:C:I

B:A:A/B
B:A:I

6-11

CALL FORWARD

-ALL CALLS
Title

Memory
Block

CO/PBX Call Forward - All Calls Selection ............................
Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

.............................

l-l-36
l-1-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:A:B
B:G:A/B/C

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .......................

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ..........................

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

4-17

B:B:B:I

Line Key Selection

.................................................

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

CALL FORWARD

........................

- BUSY/NO ANSWER
Title

AccessCode (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

Memory
Block
............................

l-1-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:G:A/BIC

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .......................

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ..........................

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Line Key Selection

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4- 17

B:B:B:I

CALL FORWARD

.................................................

........................

- OFF PREMISE
Title

Memory
Block

CO/PBX Call Forward - All Calls Selection ............................

l-l-36

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

l-1-46/47/48

............................

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:A:B
B:G:A/B/C

Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Timer Selection ...............

l-4-00

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .......................

l-8-07 (Pg, 2, LK2/LK3)

B:B:A:C

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ..........................

l-8-08 (Pg. 5, LK4)

B:B:A:D

Line Key Selection

2-05

B:K:B

2-06

B:K:C

3-04

B:C:B:M

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment ........................

4-17

B:B:B:I

.................................................

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................
* Trunk-to-Trunk

6-12

Transfer Yea/No Selection

...........................

A:C:C

Guide to Feature Programming

_. _
:
.’

InstaIlation Service Manual

Electra Profhsioual

Februarv 1998

lZO/Level II/Le+el II Advanced

CALL PARK - SYSTEM
Memory
Block

Title

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

...........................

System Call Pa.rk.RecaIl Time Selection ..............................

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-46/47/48

B:G:A/B/C

l-2-23

B:I:L

CALL PICKUP DIRECT
Title

Memory
Block

* AccessCode (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-46/47/48
(Item 042)

B:G:A/BfC!

CALL PICKUP GROUP
Memory
Block

Title

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Trunk to Tenant Assignment

...........................

.......................................

Telephone to Tenant Assignment

....................................

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-46147148

B:G:A/B/C

2-01

B:K:D

4-09

B:B:B:K

CLASS OF SERVICE
Memory
Block

Title

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-07

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-08

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

CLOCK/CALENDAR

.... ... ... .. .. ...... ...

,

B:B:A:C
B:B:A:D
B:B:B:I

DISPLAY
Title

* Time Display (12h/24h) Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note:

PC
Menu
Item

Memory
Block
l-8-04

PC
Menu
Item
B:I:J

The Clock/Calendar can only be set from Ports 01 and 02.

Guide to Feature Programming

6-13

CODE RESTRICTION
Title

Memory
Block

System Speed Dial Restriction

by Tenant

.............................

PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I ...............................

l-1-18

PC
Menu
Item
AA3!I

:. l-l-24

B:GzE

l-l-25

B:GzF

l-1-60

A:AzE

l-1-61

A:AzF

l-l-62

AzA:L

l-l-65

AZAZA

l-l-66

A:A:G

l-l-67

AXi3

l-l-68

A:A: J

l-l-69

AzA:N

Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set ...............

l-l-70

AAD

Trunk to Tenant Assignment

2-01

B:K:D

3-03

B:C:B:L

3-91

B:C:B:N

4-07

A:A:B

4-08

AAC

4-09

B:B:B:K

4-19

B:B:B:M

4-32

B:B:B:L

5-02

AA3

5-03

AZAZK

................................

PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
&Digit Matching Table Assignment

..................................

8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment

..........................

System Speed Dial Gverride by Class Assignment

.....................

.......................................

Class Allow/Deny Assignment

&Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment
OCC Table Assignment

.............................................

8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment

Trunk-to-Trunk

.....................

................................

........................................

Group Assignment

Trunk Type Selection

...................

..................................

...............................................

Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) ........................
* Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) ......................
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
Trunk Digit Restriction

....................................

.........................................

.............................................

&Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment

...................

..............................

Note: Refer to Section 6 (Code Restriction) in Chapter 2 for additional information,

6-14

Guide to Feature Programming

’ - -i)
.,,i

CO/PBX/TIE

LINE DIGIT RESTRICTION
Memory
Block

Title

Trunk Digit Restriction

.. ...... .. ... .............. ... ....... ..... ..

4-32

Note 1:

Refer to Section 6 (Code Restriction) in Chapter 2 for additional information.

Note 2

Refer to E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire) Memory Blocks in this chapter.

CORDLESS TELEPIIONE

B:B:B:L

CONNECTION

Title

ADA( 2) Ring Mode Assignment

CUSTOMIZED

PC
Menu
Item

Memory
Block
. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .

4-39

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:C:A

MESSAGE
Title

Absence Message 1 - 10 Assignment

Memory
Block
................................

1-2-09-H

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 .........................

l-8-08

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

.......................

PC
Menu
Item
B:D:A-J
B:B:A:D
B:B:B:I

DATA LINE SECURITY
Title

* SLT Data Line Security Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

Memory
Block
. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-90

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:B:Q

6-15

1998
Cdvanced
Feb

Installation

DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT

(SERIES ZOOOR HIGHER)

Title

Memory
Block

* Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

....................

........

l-1-46147148
(Item 501)

PC
Menu
Item

B:G:A/B/C

.......

l-1-71

A:H:C

.......

l-l-72

A:H:B

. . .......

l-l-73

A:H:D

Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection ................

.......

l-l-74

AzH:F

Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection ...

.......

l-l-75

AzH:E

VRS Message Recording Time Selection

.......

l-8-12

A:H:H

..........................

.......

l-8-13

A:H:G

...........................

.......

3-41

A:H:A

First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection

..............

First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection ..................
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection

* VRS Message Function Assignment
* Delay Announcement Assignment
Note 1:

......................

To record the Delay Announcements:
First Announcement - Dial Access Codes @et in Memory Blocks l-l-46,1-1-47 and/or l-l-48)
+ Diall+Dial3+Diall.
Second bouncement
- Dial Access Codes (Set in Memory Blocks l-l-46, l-l-47 and/or
l-l-48) + Dial 1 + Dial 3 + Dial 2.

Note 2

Requires MIF-F(A) or IvlIF-F(U) KTU before Memory Block can be programmed.

DELAYED

RINGING
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

* Delayed Ringing Timer Assignment (CO) .............................

l-l-77

B:C:C:E

Delayed Ringing Timer Assignment (ICM) ............................

l-2-26

B:D:O

COPBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)

...............................

4-01

B:B:B:B

CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) ..............................

4-02

B:B:B:C

Line Selection for Telephone Mode ...................................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode) .....................

4-37

B:B:C:I

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

4-38

B:B:C:I

6-16

...................

Guide to Feature Programming

-y
,’

DIALOFORATTENDANT
Memory
Block

Title

l-l-46

B:GA

. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .

l-2-08

BGG

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .

PC
Menu
Item

SpeciSed Station Access Code Assignment

.*.....................

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

B:B:B:I

DIGIT INSERTION
Memory
Block

Title

...........................

* AccessCode (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

* Network Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
* CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

............................

.................................

Group Assignment

Station Number Assignment

...................

........................................

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-46147148

B:G&B/C

l-l-49

A:DB:E

l-1-50

A:D:BE

3-03

B:C:B:L

4-10

B:A:D
Listed below is an

Befer to the diagram for an example of the Memory Blocks programmed for Digit Insertion.
explanation of the abbreviations used in the example.
Example:

Abbreviations:
AC
=
AccessCode
BLK
=
Block
=
Memory Block

Outside Numbers

I

I

Centrex
Central Office
4600 - 4620
I

4621-

MB l-l-47

4899
I

-

Electra
Professional
Level II &
Level II

Other
Centrex
Number

w

100 - 120
Calling
Outside Call:
Centrex Call:

Guide to Feature Programming

MB l-l-46
AC 9 = Item401

Dial 9 (System add a ‘9’)
46XX - 48XX

L

AC 46 = Item402
AC 47 = Item403
AC 48 = Item404
MB l-l-49
BLKOl =
BLK02 =
BLK 03 =
BLK04 =

101
101
101
101

MB l-1-50
BLK 01 =
BLK 02 =
BLK 03 =
BLK 04 =

Add9
Add46
Add47
Add48

6-17

DIGITAL

VOICE MAIL

Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection .........

..L .................

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ..........................

l-6-05

B:B:EZA

l-8-08
(P4, LK5 & LK6)

B:B:A:D

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

DITAssignment

3-42

B:C:B:H

3-43

B:C:B:H

3-45

A:GE

7-2

B:A:D

4-10

B:kD

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection .............................

4-14

B:B:B:D

Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Selection .....................

4-15

B:B:B:D

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

B:B:B:I

ANAAssignment

....................................................
..................................................

Live Recording Trunk Selection

.....................................

Telephone Type Assignment

.........................................

Station Number Assignment

........................................

DIRECT INWARD

DIALING

........................

(DID)

Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Tie/DID Line Delay Ringing Timer Selection ..........................

l-1-07

A:D:C:B

Tie/DID Line First Ring Pattern Selection

............................

l-l-34

AD:B:D

...........................

l-l-53

A:D:B:C

3-03

B:C:B:L

3-14

A:D:A:G

Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection .............................

3-21

A:D:C:L

Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection .............................

3-22

A:D:C:C

Tie Line Dial Tone Selection .........................................

3-27

A:D:A:E

Digit AddDelete for Tie Line Networking

5-00

A:D:B:A

7-l

B:A:A/B

Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
Trunk-to-Trunk

Group Assignment

Tie/DID Line Type Assignment

Card Interface Slot Assignment

6-18

..................................

......................................

.............................

......................................

Guide to Feature Programming

,I:

DIRECT INWARD
Direct Inward

SYSTEM ACCESS (DISAJ

System Access (DISA) without VRS Message
Title

Memory
Block

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-D@) Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .’. . . . . . .

Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response Selection

l-l-46/47/48
(Items 251,252 & 253)

PC
Menu
Item
B:G:A/B/C

... .. . ..

l-4-01

kI:J

..... ..... .. .. .

l-4-08

A:I:L

l-4-11

ALE

* Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection .............
Automated Attendant Message Access Code U-Digit) Assignment

......

l-4-14

AlIZ

Automated Attendant Message Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment

......

l-4-15

A:I:D

l-5-24

B:E:A

l-8-01

B:B:D:I

l-8-02

AI:B

DISA ID Code Digit Selection .......................................
* SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA

to PBR Selection ..................

PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA

........

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 ......................

l-8-07
(Pg. 2 LK5 & LK6)

B:B:A:C

Class of Service W&ion) Feature Selection 2 .........................

l-8-08 (Pg. 2 LK8)

B:B:A:D

DISA ID Code Assignment

l-9-00

B:E:B

l-9-02

B:E:C

..........................................

DISA Password Effect/Invalid Selection ..............................
* Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
DISA ID Number Station Assignment

Direct Inward

.............................
...............................

3-05

B:C:B:J

4-26

B:E:D

System Access (DISA) with VRS Message
Title

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
* Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

Memory
Block
...........................
. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-46/47/48
(Items 251,252 8z253)

B:G&B/C

l-1-46147148
(Item 501)

B:GA/B/C

........

l-4-01

A:I:J

. .... .. ....... .. .

l-4-04

A:C:D

. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .

l-4-08

A:I:L

Automated Attendant PBR Start Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-4-09

A:I:K

* Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-4-11

A:I:E

Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension Assignment
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response Selection

Automated Attendant Message to Tenant Assignment

. .... ... ........ .

l-4-12

AI:G

Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time Assignment

.. ... .. ....... . .

A:I:A
A:I:D

Automated Attendant Message Access Code (l-Digit) Assignment

......

l-4-13
l-4-14

Automated Attendant Message Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment

......

l-4-15

Guide to Feature Programming

A:I:C

6-19

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998
Direct Inward

Installation Service Manual

System Access (DISA) with VRS Message (continued)
Title

Memory
Block

Automated Attendant Message Repeat Selection
DISA ID Code Digit Selection

......................

........................................

* SLT or Automated AttendanUDISA to PBR Selection

..................

PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .......................
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ..........................
VRS Message Recordiug Time Selection
* VIU Message Function Assignment
ToneAssignment

..............................

..................................

...................................................

DISA ID Code Assignment
DISA Password Effecthvalid

..........................................
Selection

..............................

* Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection ..............................

........

PC
Menu
Item

l-4-16

A:kF

l-5-24

B:E:A

l-8-01

B:B:D:I

l-8-02

A:I:B

l-8-07
(Pg. 2 LK5 & LK6)

B:B:A:C

l-8-08
(Pg. 2 LK8)

B:B:A:D

l-8-12

A:H:H

l-8-13

A:H:G

l-8-15
(Table 2)

B:D:N

l-9-00

B:E:B

l-9-02

B:E:C

3-05

B:C:B:J

Automated Attendant Message to Trunk Selection .....................

3-38

A:I:H

DISA ID Number Station Assignment

4-26

B:E:D

DIRECT INWARD

................................

TERMINATION
Title

Memory
Block

Call Forward No Answer Timer Selection .............................
* DITAssignment
* ANAAssignment

.-syy.,
j

....................................................
..................................................

Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay

Selection

......................

l-2-22

PC
Menu
Item
B:I:B

3-42

B:C:B:H

3-43

B:C:B:H

4-42

B:B:B:P

DIRECT PAGING ACCESS
Title

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

Memory
Block
............................

l-l-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:G:A/B/C

Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection .............................

l-6-05

B:B:E:A

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

6-20

Gqide to Feature Programming

‘;

Installation Service Manual
DIRECT STATION

l3lectra ~ofbsionall2O/Level

II/Level B Advanced

Februarv 1998

SELECTION
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Attendant Add-on Console to Telephone Port Assignment ..............

l-6-01

BzB:EzB

DSS Call Voicemone SignaI Selection .................................

l-6-03

B:B:E:C

Attendant Add-on Console Key Selection .............................

l-6-05

B:B:E:A

Line Key Selection .................................................

2-05

B:K:B

2-06

B:K:C

4-12

B:B:C:I

7-2

B:kD

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode

.................................
..............................

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
Telephone Type Assignment

DISTINCTIVE

........................................

RINGING
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection .....................

l-1-06

Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection .....................

l-l-28

B:B:kE

CO Line First Ringing Pattern Selection

l-1-51

B:C:A:A

PBX Line First Ringing Pattern Selection ............................

l-l-52

B:C:kE

Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection ...........................

l-l-53

ADB:C

CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection ..................................

l-l-56

B:C:AC

Synchronous Ringing Selection

l-l-59

B:C:kG

3-07

B:C:B:C

.............................

.....................................

CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection

................................

B:I:F

DO NOT DISTURB
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 ......................

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

Class of Service Wation) Feature Selection 2 .........................

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

Guide to Feature Programming

.......................

B:B:B:I

6-21

DROP KEY
Tide

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Itcm

Z-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ...................................

Z-06

B:KzC

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Line Key Selection

.................................................

DTI
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

.............................................

l-11-00

A:E:A:G

............................................

l-11-01

AZEAZB

Line Length Selection ...............................................

l-11-02

A:E:A:C

Robbed Bit Signaling Channel Selection ..............................

l-11-03

AzE:A:E

DTI Maintenance Selection ..........................................

l-11-04

A:E:kD

Tl Channel Selection ...............................................

l-11-05

A:E:A:A

l-11-06

A:E:A:F

l-11-07

kE:kH

7-l

B:AAfB

SignalFormatSelection
Clear Channel Selection

SignalingSelection

.................................................

DTITrunkTypeAssignment
Card Interface Slot Assignment

ELAPSED

........................................
......................................

CALL TIMER
Title

StartTimer

Memory
Block

Selection ...............................................

l-1-05

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

Card Interface Slot Assignment

7-l

6-22

......................................

.

PC
Menu
Item
B:I:C
B:B:C:I
B:A:A/B

Guide to Feature Programming

x..\~
-’

E&M TIE LINES (4-WIRE)
Memory
Block

Title

Tie/DID Line Delay Riuging Timer Selection

.........................

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-07

kD:C:B

Tie/DID Line First Ring Pattern Selection .............................

l-l-34

A:DzB:D

Tie/DID Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection ...........................

l-l-53

A:D:B:C

l-l-69

A:A:N

3-03

B:C:B:L

...............................

Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

.................................

Group Assignment

Tie/DID Line Type Assignment ......................................
Trunk DTMF Durationhterdigit

Selection

Tie Line Prepause Time Selection

..........................

...................................

3-14

ADA:G

3-15

B:C:B:D

3-16

A:D:C:I

Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection

..............................

3-17

AD:C:A

Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection

..............................

3-18

kD;C:J

3-19

A:D:C:E

3-20

A:DC:F

............................

3-21

A:D:C:L

Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection ............................

3-22

A:D:C:C

3-23

ADC:H

Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection .......................

3-24

A:DC:D

Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout Selection .................

3-25

A:D:C:K

Tie Line Outgoing Guard Time Selection .............................

3-26

AD:C:G

3-27

A0A:E

3-28

A:D:A:F

3-29

AD:A:D

Tie Line Internal Receive Pad Selection ..............................

3-30

A:D:A:C

Tie Line External Transmit Pad Selection ............................

3-31

A:D:A:B

.............................

3-32

kD:kA

3-91

B:C:B:N

3-92

B:C:B:F

Tie Line CO/PBX Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection

..............

Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection ..............................
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection
Tie Line Outgoing Timeout Selection

Tie Line Dial Tone Selection

................................

........................................

Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection .....................................
Tie Line Internal Transmit Pad Selection

Tie Line External Receive Pad Selection
Trunk Type Selection

............................

..............................................

Trunk Unstalled DP/DTMF) Selection

Guide to Feature Programming

...............................

6-23

EQUAL ACCESS ACCOMMODATION
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-61

A:AF

l-l-67

AA:1

l-l-68

A:A:J

* Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) .......................

4-07

A:A:B

* Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) .....................

4-08

A:A:C

5-03

A:AzK

&Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment
OCCTableAssignment

.........................

8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment

OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment

EXTERNAL

.

...........................................
....................

.............................

TONE RINGER
Title

Memory
Block

External Ring Relay Cycle Selection
* ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment

EXTERNAL

l-7-07

................................

2-08

...................................

PC
Menu
Item
B:F:C-F
B:K:A

ZONE PAGING (MEET-ME)
Title

Access Code tl-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Attendant Add-On Console Key Assignment
Line Key Selection

Memory
Block
............................
...........

: ..............

l-l-46/47/48
l-6-05

PC
Menu
Item
B:G&B/C
B:B:E:A

2-05

B:KB

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

6-24

.................................................

Guide to Feature Frogramming

’ x.>
,,
~.

FAX STATUS INDICATION
Title

Memory
Block

Access Code (l-, 2, or 3-Digit) Assignment

...........................

l-l-461471436

PC
Menu
Item
‘B:G&B/C

Automated Attendaut Message Access Code U-Digit) Assignment

......

l-4-14

A:IC

Automated Attendaut Message Access Code (Z-Digit) Assignment

......

l-4-15

A:LD

Liue Key Selection .................................................

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .................................

2-06

B:KC

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

4-33

B:B:C:E

4-34

B:B:C:D

* Fax Indication Station Assignment

..................................

* Fax Indication Networking Assignment

FEATURE

..............................

ACCESS - USER PROGRAMMABLE
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Line Key Selection .................................................

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .................................

2-06

B:K:C

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

FLEXIBLE

LINE ASSIGNMENT
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Line Key Selection .................................................

2-05

B&B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .................................

2-06

B:KC

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

FLEXIBLE

NUMBERING

PLAN

Title

Memory
Block

Access Code (l-or 2-Digit) Assignment

...............................

2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Numbering Selection
* Station Number Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

........................

........................................

l-1-46147

PC
Menu
Item
B:GA:B

l-2-03

B:AC

4-10

B:A:D

6-25

FLEXIBLE

RINGING

ASSIGNMENT
Title

Memory
Block

* Off-Hook Ringing Selection ..........................................

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-26

B:B:AzH

l-l-28

B:B:A:E

CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection .................................

3-07

B:C:B:C

CO/PBX Ring (Day) Mode ...........................................

4-01

B:B:B:B

CO/PBX Ring (Night) Mode .........................................

4-02

B:B:B:C

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode) .....................

4-37

B:B:C:I

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

4-38

B:B:C:I

4-91

B:B:C:C

Distinctive Ring by Telephone or CO Selection

.........................

...................

Telephone Ringing Variation Selection ...............................

FLEXIBLE

-.>>
;,’
-”

TIMEOTJTS
Title

Pause Time Selection

Memory
Block

...............................................

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-00

B:C:C:D

l-1-01

B:C:C:B

l-1-02

B:C:C:C

Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold) ......................

l-1-03

B:I:D

StartTimerSelection

l-1-05

B:I:C

l-1-06

B:I:F

Tie/DID Line Delay Ringing Timer Selection ..........................

l-1-07

A:D:C:B

Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Timer Selection .....................

l-1-12

B:I:H

‘Irunk Queuing Timeout Selection

...................................

l-l-37

B:I:K

CO/PBX Prepause Timer Selection ...................................

l-l-57

B:C:C:A

Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)

l-l-63

B:I:E

Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On
Recall Timer Selection ..............................................

l-l-64

B:I:I

First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection

l-1-71

A:H:C

..........

l-l-73

A:H:D

Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection ...........

l-l-75

A:H:E

Internal Paging Timeout Selection ...................................

l-2-00

B:F:I

Automatic Callback Release Timer Selection ..........................

l-2-02

B:I:A

Call Forward No Answer Timer Selection .............................

l-2-22

B:I:B

System Call Park Recall Time Selection

l-2-23

B:I:L

..

Bounce Protect Time Selection .......................................

l-3-01

B:B:D:A

”

First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection ..............................

l-3-03

B:B:D:F

DP Interdigit Time Selection
Hookflash Time Selection

........................................

...........................................

...............................................

CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection

.....................

...............................

......................

First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection

6-26

..............................

Guide to Feature Programming

FLEXIBLE

TIMEOUTS

(continued)

Title

Memory
Block

Hookflash Start Time Selection

PC
Menu
Item

.....................................

l-3-05

B:B:D:E

......................................

l-3-06

B:B:D:D

Voice Mail DTMF Delay Timer Selection .............................

l-3-08

AzG:C

Voice Mail Discomect Time Selection ................................

l-3-09

A:GB

l-3-10

AZ&D

l-4-00

A:C:C

........

l-4-01

A:I:J

.......

l-4-02

A:LM

l-4-03

A:I:I

l-4-13

ALA

l-5-25

A:B:E

External Page Timeout Selection ....................................

l-7-06

B:F:H

PBR Interdigit Release Timer Selection ..............................

l-8-10

B:I:G

l-8-11

B:LM

Hookflash End Time Selection

Voice Mail DTMF Duratiotiterdigit

Time Selection

.................

Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Timer Selection

..............

Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Timer Selection
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection
Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect Time Selection
Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time Assignment
SMDR Valid Call Timer Assignment

Tie Line Prepause Time Selection

................

................................

..................................

System Refresh Timer Assignment
Trunk DTMF Durationbterdigit

..........

Selection

..........................

...................................

3-15

B:C:B:D

3-16

A:D:C:I

Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection

..............................

3-17

A:D:C:A

Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection

..............................

3-18

A:D:C:J

3-19

A:D:C:E

Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection ..............................

3-20

kD:C:F

Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection

............................

3-21

A:DC:L

Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection ............................

3-22

A:D:C:C

Tie Line Outgoing Timeout Selection

3-23

A:DC:H

Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection .......................

3-24

kD:C:D

Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout Selection .................

3-25

A:DC:K

Tie Line Outgoing Guard Time Selection .............................

3-26

A:D:C:G

Disconnect Recognition Time Selection

3-33

B:C:B:G

3-40

B:C:B:B

Tie Line CO/PBX Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection

..............

................................

..............................

Automatic Release Signal Detection Time Selection ...................

Guide to Feature Programming

6-27

FULL HANDSFREE

OPERATION
Title

* HFU Selection

Memory
Block

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

PC
Menu
Item

.- -.\,
j
,’

B:B:C:F

GROUP LISTENING

*

Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Class of Service @tation) Feature Selection 2

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Station to Class of Sertice Feature Assignment

HEADSET

CONNECTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

VIA ADA(l)-W(BK)/(SW)

UNIT

Title

Line Key Selection

B:B:B: 1

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

* Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

HOLD WITH RECALL

.................................................

(EXCLUSIVE

AND NON-EXCLUSIVE)

Title

Memory
Block

Hold Recall Timer Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-03

B:I:D

...............................

l-l-63

B:I:E

Hold/Transfer Recall Display Selection ...............................

4-30

B:B:C:G

Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)

....................

HOT LINE
Title

Memory
Block

Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment

6-28

............................

....................................

l-l-46/47/48
4-23

PC
Menu
Item
B:G:A/B/C
B:B:B:F

Guide to Feature Programming

‘-

HOWLER TONE SERVICE
Title

Tone Assignment

INCOMING

Memory
Block

... ... .. ..... ... .... ..... .. . .. .. . ... .. . .. .. .... . ..

Memory
Block

Telephone Number to Trunk Assignment

VOICE/TONE

........................

......................................

Station Name Assignment

PC
Menu
Item

.. ..

3-00

B:C:B:I

....

4-18

B:B:B: J

SIGNALING

Title

Memory
Block

Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection

...........................

DSS Call Voicemone Signal Selection ................................

INTERNAL

B:D:N

CALLIDENTIFICATION
Title

. INTERNAL

l-8-15

PC
Menu
Item

PC
Menu
Item

l-2-01

B:D:K

l-6-03

B:B:E:C

ZONE PAGING (MEET-ME)
Title

Iuternal Paging Timeout Selection
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection
Receiving Internal/All

Memory
Block
..................................
................................

Call Page Selection

...........................

* Internal Zone Paging Selection ......................................

Guide to Feature Programming

PC
Menu
Item

l-2-00

B:FzI

l-2-25

B:F:G

4-31

B:B:B:G

4-93

B:B:C:H

6-29

ISDN
Memory
Block

Title

* Telephone Number to Trunk and Directory Number Assignment *l

.....

3-00

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:B:I

l-1-80

AK&A

ISDN Line Internal Transmit Pad Selection ...........................

3-46

A:KkB

............................

3-47

A:K:A:C

..........................

3-48

kK:kD

ISDN Line External TransmitPak Selection ...........................

3-49

A:K:AzE

3-50

AZA:G

3-51

A:K:AzF

7-l

B:A:kB

ISDN nunk

DTMF Duration5nterdigit

Selection

ISDN Line Internal Receive Pad Selection
ISDN Line External Transmit Pad Selection
* ISDN Line SPID Assignment

.....................

.......................................

ISDN Line Ringing Pattern Selection
Card Interface Slot Assignment

................................

......................................

Caller ID
Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode .......................

l-l-78

A: J:A

Caller ID Display Assignment for Call Arrival Key ....................

l-10-06

A:J:B

Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line .......................

3-44

kJ:C

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8-08 (Pg. 4, LK3/LK4)

KEY FUNCTION/MULTI-FUNCTION

REGISTRATION

Title

Memory
Block

This function is set on the CPU-F( j-20 KTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
* DipSwitch(Switch3issettoMForKF)
** A First Initialization

6-30

B:B:A:D

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A

is required to change the switch status

. . . , . . . . . . . N/A

PC
Menu
Item
N/A
NIA
N/A

Guide to Feature Programming

LEAST COST ROUTING

(LCR)
Memow
Block

Title

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk
Trunks

Group Assignment

Selection

............

..................

...............................

* LCR Class Selection .................................
Card Interface Slot Assignment
MIF(LCR)Assignment

......................

..............................

PC
Menu
Item

..............

l-l-46/47/48

ISGAlB/C

...............

3-03

B:C:B:L

..............

3-91

B:C:B:N

..............

4-40

B:B:B:E

..............

7-l

B:B:A/B

..............

7-3-01

B:A:F

MESSAGE WAITING
Memory
Block

Title

Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MULTIPLE

l-06-05

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:E:A

TRUNK GROUPS
Title

Memory
Block

AccessCode (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

Group Assignment

...........................

.................................

l-l-46/47/48
3-03

PC
Menu
Item
B:G&B/C
B:C:B;L

MUSIC ON HOLD
Title

Memory
Block

Music On Hold Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-09

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:A:D

NIGHT CALL PICKUP
Title

Memory
Block

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

...........................

...................................

l-l-46/47/48
2-08

PC
Menu
Item
B:GA/B/C
B:K:A

6-31

NIGHT CHIME
Title

Memory
Block

* ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
Card Interface Slot Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-08
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,. . 7-l

PC
&lenu
Item
B:K:A
B:A:m

NIGHT TRANSFER
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection .............................

l-6-05

B:B:E:A

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .......................

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

2-01

B:KD

3-03

B:C:B:L

...............................

4-01

B:B:B:B

COPBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) ..............................

4-02

B:B:B:C

Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) ........................

4-07

A:A:B

Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) ......................

4-08

A:A:C

4-09

B:B:B:K

4-17

B:B:B:I

4-37

B:B:C:I

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

B:B:C:I

Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

........................................

Group Assignment

..................................

CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)

Telephone to Tenant Assignment

....................................

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

........................

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode) .....................
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

OFF-HOOK RINGING
Title

Memory
Block

Off-Hook Ringing Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l-26

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT

TERMINAL

Title

* Off-Hook Voice Announcement Terminal Assigument

6-32

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:AH

ASSIGNMENT
Memory
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:C:J

Guide to Feature Programming

.
:>
/

Ixdallation

Service Manual

Electra Profbssionall2O/Level

H/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

PC PROGRAMMING
Memory
Block

Title

. . .. ... ..... .... .......... . ..

l-8-17

C:A:A

..... .. .......... . ... ...... .. ............. . ..

l-B-18

Login Menu

PC Programming Password Assignment
Site Name Assignment

Card Interface Slot Assignment
MIF (LCRI Assignment

PC
Menu
Item

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*......

7-l

B:A:A/B

.............................................

7-3-01

B:AF

.. ............. . . .,.. ..... .. ....... ..... . ..

7-3-02

B:AE

MD? (SMDR) Assignment

POOLED LINE (OUTGOING)
Memory
Block

Title

PC
Menu
Item

Line Key Selection .................................................

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .................................

2-06

B:K:C

.................................

3-03

B:C:B:L

4-12

B:B:C:I

Trunk-to-Trunk

Group Assignment

* Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................

PRIME LINE ASSIGNMENT
Memory
Block

Title

Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

...........................

* Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment ....................................

PRIVATE

4-23

B:G&‘B/C
B:B:B:F

LINES
Title

**Private

l-1-46147148

PC
Menu
Item

Line Assignment

. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .

Guide to Feature Programming

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-29

B:C:AH/l

6-33

RECALL KEY
Title

** Hookflash Time Selection

RESTRICTION

Memow
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-1-02

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:C:C

(OUTGOING)
Title

* Trunk Outgoing Restriction

Memory
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:B:M

RINGING LINE PREFERENCE
Title

* Ringing Line Preference Selection

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

4-l 1

B:B:C:K

Class of Service @ation) Feature Selection 2 ..........................

l-8-08

B:B:AD

SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection ...........................

4-41

B:B:C:M

ROUTE ADVANCE

...................................

BLOCK
Title

* Route Advance Block Assignment

Memory
Block
....................................

Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
Line Key Selection

............................

l-1-30
l-l-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:A:F
B:GA/B/C

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:K:C

Trunk-to-Trunk

3-03

B:C:B:L

4-12

B:B:C:I

.................................................

Group Assignment

..................................

* Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...............................

6-34

Guide to Feature Programming

.. -T,
;!

Installation Service Manual
SCROLLING

Electra Professional 12O/Level II&eve1 II Advanced

Februarv 1998

DIRECTORIES
Memory
Block

Title

PC
Menu
Item

System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant .............................

l-1-18

B:K:E

Speed Dial Number/Name display Selection ..........................

l-l-33

B:HB

l-l-35

B:H:A

2-07

BKE

Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

........................................

System Speed Dial Display Assignment

SECONDARY

INCOMING

..............................

EXTENSION
Memory
Block

Title

PC
Menu
Item

Line Key Selection .........................................

.......

2-05

BKB

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .........................

.......

2-06

B:K:C

* Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ......................

.......

4-12

B:B:C:I

............

.......

4-37

B:B:C:I

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode) ...........

.......

4-38

B:B:C:I

SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection ..................

.......

4-41

B:B:C:M

Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)

SEIZED TRUNK NUMBER DISPLAY
MemoBlock

Title

* Telephone Number to Trunk Assignment

STATION

..... .. ........ .....,..... ..

3-00

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:B:I

RELOCATION
Title

* Access Code C-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

Memory
Block
...........................

I-1-46147140

PC
Menu
Item
B:G%B/C

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-07 (Pg. 3, LKl)

B:B:A:C

Class of Service @tation) Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-08 (Pg. 5, LK3)

B:B:A:D

4-17

B:B:B: 1

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

. . . . . . . , .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .

6-35

Febrww

1998

Electra Profdonal

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE

12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

Installation Service Mauual

ACCESS

Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Bounce Protect Time Selection .......................................

l-3-01

B:B:DzA

SLT Hookflash Sigxml Selection .......................................

l-3-02

B:B:D:H

First Digit PBRRelease Timer Selection ..............................

l-3-03

B:B:DzF

Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection ......................................

l-3-04

B:B:D:B

Hookflash Start Time Selection

......................................

l-3-05

B:B:DzE

.......................................

l-3-06

B:B:D:D

l-B-01

B:B:DzI

Hookflash End Time Selection

SLT or Automated AttendaWDISA

to PBR Selection

..................

3-42

B:C:B:H

3-43

B:C:B:H

...............................

4-01

B:B:B:B

CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) ..............................

4-02

B:B:B:C

Telephone to Tenant Assigkent

4-09

B:B:B:K

..........................................

4-18

B:B:B:J

.........................................

4-24

B:B:nH

Voice Mail/SLT Selection ............................................

4-35

B:B:DJ

SLT Data Line Security Assignment

4-90

B:B:B:Q

DITAssignment

....................................................

ANAAssignment

..................................................

CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)

Station Name Assignment
SLT Hookflash Assignment

....................................

DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection 4-95

.................................
B:B:DX!

SLT ADAPTER
Title

Memory
Block

Station Number Assignment

........................................

Telephone Type Assignment

.........................................

PC
Menu
Item

4-10

B&D

7-Z

B:AzD

SLT TIMED ALARM
Title

Access Code (l-, Z-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

Memory
Block
............................

l-l-46147148

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 .......................

l-8-07

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

6-36

........................

PC
Menu
Item
B:G&B/C
B:B:AzC
B:B:B:I

Guide to Feature Programming

-‘Y
-1,’

SPEED DIAL STORED CHARACTERS
Memory
Block

Title

PC
Menu
Item

Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection ..........................

l-l-33

B:H:B

Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

l-l-35

B:H:A

........................................

SPEED DIAL STATION
Memory
Block

Title

Speed Dial BufYer Allocation

.. .. ......... ... .. ..... ...... .. ....... ..

l-l-35

PC
Menu
Item
B:H:A

SPEED DIAL SYSTEM
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant .............................

l-1-18

B:K:E

Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection ..........................

l-l-33

B:H:B

Speed Dial Btier

l-l-35

B:H:A

.......................

l-l-62

AAL

Class of Service ~Attendant~ Feature Selection 1 ......................

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

System Speed Dial Display Assignment

2-07

B:K:E

4-17

B:B:B:I

Allocation

........................................

System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection

..............................

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

STATION

.......................

HUNTING
Title

* Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
**Intercom

Memory
Block
............................

4-14

B:B:B:D

.................

4-15

B:B:B:D

Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

PC
Menu
Item

6-37

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

S’i’ATION MESSAGE DETAIL

RECORDING

(SMDR)

Title

StartTimerSelection

Installation Service Manual

Memory
Block

...............................................

PC
Menu
Item

l-1-05

B:I:C

l-5-02

A:B:C

.................................

l-5-13

A:B:A

Printer Line Feed Control Selection

..................................

l-5-14

A:B:B

SMDR VaIid Call Timer Assignment

.................................

l-5-25

AB:E

l-5-26

AB:D

SMDRPrintFormat

...........................................

* Printer Connected (Alarm) Selection

SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
Card Interface Slot Assignment
MIF(LCR)Assignment

..& ..

............................

......................................

7-l

.............................................

MIF(SMDR~Assignment

...........................................

B:AAlB

7-3-01

B:A:F

7-3-02

B:A:E

STATION OUTGOING LOCKOUT
Title

Memory
Block

* AccessCode (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

............................

l-1-46147148

PC
Menu
Item
B:Gh’B/C

Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set ...............

l-1-70

AiA:D

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 ..........................

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

........................

B:B:B:I

STATION TRA.NSl%R
Title

System Transfer/Camp-On Selection

Memory
Block
......................

. . . . . . . . . . l-1-11

PC
Menu
Item
BzB:A:I

System Transfer/Camp-On Recall Timer Selection ..........

. ..*......

CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection

. . . . . . . . . . l-1-13
Series 400
or higher)

B:C:A:J

CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . l-1-14
(Series 400
or higher)

B:C:A:K

6-38

.......................

l-1-12

B:kH

Guide to Feature Programming

.- -..
)
/’

STEP CALL
Title

Memory
Block
Item

Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment

...........................

Class of Service Wation) Feature Selection 2 ..........................
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

.......................

l-2-24
l-8-08
4-17

B:&D
BB:kD
B:B:B:I

STORED HOOKFLASH
Title

Memory
Block

Hookflash Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SYNCHRONOUS

l-1-02

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:C:C

RINGING
Title

Memory
Block

Synchronous Ringing Selection

. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .

l-l-59

PC
Menu
Item
B:C:kG

Tl CONNECTION
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

............................................

l-11-00

A:E:A-C:G

Clear Channel Selection ............................................

l-11-01

AzE:A-CB

Line Length Selection

l-11-02

kE:A-C:C

l-11-03

AzEA-C:E

l-11-04

kE:A-C:D

Tl Channel Selection ...............................................

l-11-05

A:E:A-C:A

Signaling Selection

l-11-06

A:E:A-C:F

SignalFormatSelection

..............................................

Robbed Bit Signal Channel Selection
DTl Maintenance Selection

.........................................

................................................

Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

................................

.......................................

Group Assignment

Card Interface Slot Assignment

Guide to Feature Programming

.................................

.....................................

2-01

B:K:D

3-03

B:C:B:L

7-l

B:A:AlB

6-39

Februarv 1998
TANDEM

Electra Profedonal

SWITCHING

OF 4WIRE

12O/Level II/Level Il Advanced

Service Manual

E&M TIE LINES

Title

Memory
Block

Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-01

Note k

Refer to E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire).

Note 2~

Refer to Uniform Numbering Network (Closed or Opsn Plan).

TENANT

Installation

PC
Menu
Item

---.,
J

ADB:B

--

SERVICE
Title

Memory
Block

Automated Attendant Message to Tenant Assignment

l-4-12

A:LG

2-01

B:K:D

2-05

B:K:B

Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode ..................................

2-06

B:KC

System Speed Dial Display Assignment

2-0’7

B:K:E

Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Line Key Selection

.................

PC
Menu
Item

........................................

.................................................
...............................

ECR Relay tc Tenant Assignment

....................................

2-03

B:K:A

Telephone to Tenant Assignment

....................................

4-09

B:B:B:K

THREE MINUTE

REMINDER
Title

Memory
Block

3-Minute Alarm Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

PC
Menu
Item
B:B:C:L

TONE OVERRIDE
Title

Memory
Block

Class of Service (Station 1Feature Selection 2 .........................

l-8-08

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

4-17

6-40

........................

PC
Menu
Item
BzB:AzD
B:B:B:I

Guide to Feature Programming

TRUNK QUEUING
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-l-37

B:I:K

Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘. . . . . . .

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

TRUNK-TO-TRUNK

.... ......... ......... .

4-17

B:B:B:I

TRANSFER
Title

Memory
Block

PC
Menu
Item

............ ..

l-4-00

Ac:c

Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-07

B:B:A:C

* Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-8-08

B:B:A:D

* Trunk-to-Trunk

3-04

B:C:B:M

4-17

B:B:B:I

Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Timer Selection

Transfer Yes/No Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

UNIFORM

CALL DISTRIBUTION

. . . . . .. . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . .

@CD) (SERIES 200 OR HIGHER)

Title

Memory
Block

* Access Code (l-, 2, or 3-Digit) Assignment
* Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

...........................
...........................
’

Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment

....................................

Call Forward No Answer Timer Selection
Class of Service W&ion

............................

1Feature Selection 2 .........................

* ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment

................................

* ACDXJCD Group Pilot Number Assignment ..........................
ACDAJCD Group Overfiow Destination Assignment

..................

ACD/UCD Group Overflow Timer Selection ..........................

PC
Menu
Item

l-l-46/47/48
(Items 031/032)

B:G&B/C

l-l-46147/48
(Item 0401

B:G&B/C

l-l-76

B:B:A:B

l-2-22

B:I:B

l-8-08
(Pg.lLK4&LK5)
(Pg. 1 LKl Series 400 or higher)

B:B:A:D

l-8-25

A:F:A

l-12-00

A:F:B

l-12-01

A:F:C

l-12-02

A:F:D

* DIT Assignment

...................................................

3-42

B:C:B:H

* ANAAssignment

..................................................

3-43

B:C:B:H

Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ..............................

4-12

B:B:C:I

Card Interface Slot Assignment

7-l

Guide to Feature Programming

.....................................

B:A:A/B

6-41

MIF WCD) Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-03

Note:

Refer to Delay Announcement Memory Blocks in this chapter.

UNIFORM

NUMBERING

Uniform Numbering

NETWORK

Network (Closed Numbering

Plan)
Memory
Block

Title

* Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-D@) Assignment

............................

* Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
* CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

B:AH

Group Assignment

.............................

..................................

Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
Station Number Assignment

.................

...............................

........................................

Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment

.................

l-1-46147148

PC
Menu
Item
B:G&B/C

l-l-49

AD:B:E

l-1-50

A:D:B:E

3-03

B:C:B:L

3-92

B:C:B:F

4-10

B:AD

5-01

A:D:B:B

Refer to the diagram on the next page for an example of the Memory Blocks programmed for the Closed
Numbering Plan. Listed below is an explanation of the abbreviations used in the example.
Abbreviations:
AC = Access Codes
ACG = Access Item Code
BLK= Block
MB = Memory Block
LN=Line
TRK=Trunk
TG = Trunk Group
UD = Uniform Dial

6-42

Guide to Feature Programming

Example :

400 - 430
Calling
100 - 130
200 - 230
300 - 330

Calling
200 - 230
300 - 330
400 - 430

200 - 230
Callbg
100 - 130
300 - 330
400 - 430

300 - 330
Callilq
100 - 130
200 - 230
400 - 430

MB l-l-46

MB l-l-46

Ml3 l-l-46

MB 2El

AC 2 = Item401

AC 1 = Item401

AC 1 = Item401

Item36

= 4

100 - 130

AC 3 = Item402

AC 2 = Item001

AC 2 = Item402

Item60

= 1

AC 4 = Item403

AC 3 = Item402

AC 3 = Item001

Item61

= 2

AC 4 = Item403

AC 4 = Item 403

Item62

= 3

MB l-l-49

MB l-l-49

MB l-l-49

MB 2C6

BLK 01 = 102

BLK

01 = 102

BLK

01 = 102

BLK 02 = 102

BLK

BLK

02 = 102

uDo2=2

BLK 03 = 102

BLK

02 = 103
03 = 103

BLK

03 = 103

UDO3=2

MB l-1-50

MB l-1-50

MI3 l-1-50

uDo1=2

MB 2Cl

BLK 01 = Add2

BLK

01 = Add 1

BLK

01 = Add 1

BLK 02 = Aid3

BLK

02 = Add3

BLK

02 = Add 3

BLK 03 = Add4

BLK

03 = Add4

BLK

03 = Add4

MB 3-03

MB 3-03

MB 3-03

MB 2C3

TRK 09 = TG 02

TRK 09 = TG 02

TG 02 = ACG 2

TRKo9

=

TRKlO

= !EO2

TG 02

TRK 10 = TG 02

TRK 10 = TG 02

TRK 11 = .m 03

TRK 11 = TG 03

TRK 12 = TG 03

lRK

MB 4-10

MB 4-10

AllPhones

= 2XX

TRKlO=TGO2

12 = TG 03

AllPhones

MB 5-01

MB 5-01

MB 5-01

Default OK

Default OK

Default OK

Guide to Feature Programming

TRKO9=TGO2
’

= 3XX

6-43

Electra Professional 12O/Level B/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1993

Installation

Service Manual

Uniform Numbering Network (Open Numbering Plan)
Tltle

Memory
Block

* Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3Digit~ Assignment

............................

* Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
* CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
Trunk-to-Trunk

Group Assignment

.............................

..................................

Trunk Cnstalled, DP/DTMF) Selection
Station Number Assignment

...............................

........................................

Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment

*

..................

.................

l-l-46147l48

PC
Menu
ue~
B:GWB/C

l-l-49

AD:B:E

l-1-50

A:D:B:E

3-03

B:C:B:L

3-92

B:C:B:F

4-10

B:AD

5-01

A:D:B:B

Indicates the Memory Blocks that must be programmed before the Uniform Numbering Network feature can
be used.

Refer to the diagram on the next page for an example of the Memory Blocks programmed for the Open Numbering
Plan. Listed below is an explanation of the abbreviations used in the example.
Abbreviations:
AC = Access Codes
BLK = Block
MB = Memory Block
LN=Line
TBL = Table
TRK=Trunk
TG = Trunk Group

6-44

Guide to Feature Programming

-‘%.,
.;
;

!liiLLi
100 130
Calling
8 72 100 - 130
8 73 100 - 130
8 74 100 - 130

(System #74)

b?iystem #73)

(System #72)

@Ystem #71)

ti

ti

ti

100 130
Callinfq

100 130
Cdiig
8 71 100 - 130
8 73 100 - 130
8 74 100 - 130

100 130
Calling
8 71 100 - 130
8 72 100 - 130
8 73 100 - 130

8 71 100 - 130
8 72 100 - 130
8 74 100 - 130

MB l-l-46

MB l-l-46

MB l-l-46

MB l-l-46

AC 8 = Item000

AC 8 = Item 000

AC 8 = Item 000

AC 8 = Item 000

MB l-1-47

MB l-1-47

MB l-1-47

MB l-1-47

AC 71 = Item 062
AC 87 = Item 301

AC
AC
AC
AC
AC

AC
AC
AC
AC
AC

AC 74 = Item082
AC 87 = Item301

MB l-l-48

MB l-l-48

MB l-l-48

MB l-l-48

TBLl(#2)
= Item401
TBL 1 (# 3) = Item 402
TBLl(#4)
= Item403

TBL 1 (# 1) = Item 401
TBLl(#3)
= Item402
TBLl(#4)
= Item403

TBL 1 (# 1) = Item 401
TBL 1 (# 2) = Item 402
TBL 1 (# 4) = Item 403

TBLl(#
1) = Item401
TBL 1 (# 2) = Item 402
TBLl(#
3) = Item403

MB l-l-49

MB l-l-49

MB l-l-49

MB l-l-49

BLK 01 = 102
BLK 02 = 102
BLIS 03 = 102

BLK 01 = 102
BLK 02 = 103
BLK 03 = 103

BLK 01 = 102
BLK 02 = 102
BLK 03 = 103

BLK
BLK
BLK

MB l-1-50

MB l-1-50

MB l-1-50

MB l-1-50

BLK
BLK
BLK

BLK 01 = Add 71
BLK 02 = Add 73
BLK 03 = Add 74

BLK 01 = Add71
BLK 02 = Add 72
BLK 03 = Add 74

BLK
BLK
BLK

MB 3-03

MB 3-03

MB 3-03

MB 3-03

T!RKO9
TRKlO

TRKO9 = TG 02
TRK 10 = TG 02
TRKll
= TG 03
TRKl2
= TG 03

TRKO9
TRKlO
TRKll
TRKl2

MB 5-01

MB 5-01

MB 5-01

MB 5-01

Default

Default OK

Default OK

Default OK

01 = Add 72
02 = Add73
03 = Add 74

= TG 02
= TG 02

OK

Guide to Feature Programming

71
72
73
74
87

=
=
=
=
=

Item 401
Item 082
Item402
Item 403
Item 301

71
72
73
74
87

=
=
=
=
=

Item 401
Item402
Item 082
Item 403
Item 301

=
=
=
=

TG
TG
TG
TG

02
02
03
03

01 = 102
02 = 102
03 = 102

01 = Add71
02 = Add 72
03 = Add 73

TRKO9
TRKlO

= TG 02
= TG 02

6-45

UNIVERSAL

SLOTS
Title

Memory
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-l

CardInterfaceSlotAssignment

PC
Menu
Item
B:A:.&B

MIF (ACD) Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-00

B:A:G

MIF(LCR)Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-01

B:A:F

MIF(SMDR)Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-02

B:A:E

MIF WCD) Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-03

B:A:H

UNSUPERVISED

CONFERENCE

* Class of Service W&ion)

Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8-08

B:B:AzD:

VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Title

Memory
Block

* Access Code cl-, 2-, or 3-D&t) Assignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l-46/47/48

PC
Menu
Item
B:C?A/B/C

Bounce Protect Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-01

B:B:D:A

Hookflash Start Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-05

B:B:D:E

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-06

B:B:D:D

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-07

A:GzA

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-08

A:G:C

Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-09

A:G:B

Time Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-3-10

A:GzD

Hookflash End Time Selection

Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment

Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time Selection
Voice Mail DTMF Duratiodnterdigit

* Voice Mail/SLT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Number Assignment (Series 500) . . . . l-8-26

B:B:D:K
k&F

VOICE OVER SPLIT
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2-24 (Item 006)
Class of Service Wation) Feature Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8-08
(Pl, LK8 & P3, LK3)

6-46

B:GzD
B:B:A:D

Guide to Feature Rogramming

.. :,.
.F
‘/’

Installation Service Manual

Electra hofessional

12O/Level XI/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

VOICE PROMPT
Memory
Block

Title

* Access Code (l-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment

...........................

VRS Message Recording Time Selection ..............................
* VRS Message Function Assignment
Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment

.................................
...................................

**Voice Prompt Selection .............................................

Guide to Feature Programming

l-l-46147148
(Item 5011

PC
Menu
Item
B:GWB/C

l-8-12

A:HzH

l-8-13

kH:G

l-8-16

AzH:I:J

4-36

B:B:B:N

6-47

CHAPTER 7
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER

SECTION

1

INTRODUCTION

SECTION

2

POWER

SECTION

3

OPERATIONAL

General

3.2

BeforeInitialization

3.3

System Initialization

3.4

After Initialization

SECTION

4

SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

TABLE

OF CONTENTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

REQUIREMENTS

3.1

‘7

TEST

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-l
PROCEDURES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..............

7-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PROBLEM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
SOLVING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

LIST OF FLOWCHARTS

Al
A2

No Internal Dial Tone to any Multiline Terminal or SLT ...................................
No LED or Display Indications on any Multiline Terminal .................................

7-6
7-7

Cl

Radio Frequency Interference (RF11 ......................................................
No CO/PBX Ring or Intermittent CO/PBX Ring Problems ..................................

c2

CallDropping

........................................................................

7-10

c3

No Outside Dial Tone Access ...........................................................
CO/PBX Dialing Problem (Cannot Dial Out on CO) .......................................

7-11

Bl

c4
Dl

7-8
7-9

7-12

Multiline Terminal Function Problems ..................................................
Multiline Terminal Ringing Problems ...................................................

7-13
7-15

El

Multiline Terminal Dial Tone Access Problems ...........................................
No Dial Tone Access on SLT (Including LLTs) ............................................

E2

Ringing Problem on SLT or LLT

E3

7-18

Fl

No Dial Access to Features on SLT ......................................................
Low Volume Problems .................................................................

Gl

External Paging Problem

7-20

D2
D3

Hl

...........................................

..............................................................
SMDR Output Problems (No Call Accounting System) ....................................

7-14
7-16
.: ...........

7-17
7-19
7-21

LIST OF TABLES

7-l

VoltageMeasurement

7-2

IndexTableofFlowcharts

Chapter 7 - Table of Contents

..................................................................
...............................................................

7-2
7-5

i

CHAPTER 8
D term@CORDLESS TERMINAL

InstaIlation Service Manual

Electra ProfessionaI 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

CHAPTER

Febmarv 1998

8

Dt-@’ CORDLESS TERMINAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

1.1
1.2
SECTION

INTRODUCTION

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~......~..................................

8-l

General Information

. . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-l
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
2

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*

8-5

2.1

General

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

2.2

BaseUnit

2.3

Handset

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

SECTION

3

SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS

SECTION

4

PROPER

USE AND DISPOSAL

SECTION

5

INSTALLATION

5.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
OF BATTERIES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

5.2

Select the Installation Location ..........................................................
Connect the Telephone Cords ............................................................

8-8

5.3

Apply Power to the Base Unit

8-8

5.4

Attach or Remove the Belt Clip .........................................................
5.4.1 AttachtheBeltCliptotheHandset
...............................................

8-10

5.4.2 RemovetheBeItClipf+omtheHandset

8-10

5-5

8-8

...........................................................

8-10

............................................

Rechargeable Battery Pack

............................................................
5.5.1 Install the Battery Pack .........................................................

8-10

5.5.2 Charge the Handset Battery Pack .................................................
5.5.3 ChargeExtraBatteryPacks
......................................................

8-11

5.5.4 Low Battery Indicator
5.5.4.1

.......

.......................................

WhenYouAreNotonaCall

...........................................

5.5.4.2

8-10
8-11
..............

8-12
8-12

When You Are on a Call ...............................................
5.5.5 Clean the Battery Contacts .......................................................

8-12

5.6

Configure the Dkrm CordlessTerminal

8-13

5.7

Use Your Dkrm CordIess Terminal

..................................................

......................................................
5.7.1 Dkrm Cordless Terminal Handset Controls .........................................
5.7.1.1
5.7.1.2
5.7.1.3
5.7.1.4

Chapter 8 - Table of Contents

Handset Earpiece Volume .............................................
RingerSelect
.......................................................
Mute ................................................................
Out of Service Indicator ...............................................

8-12
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14

i

Electra Professional 12O/Level II/Level II Advanced

Februarv 1998

5.7.2 Answer a Call with the Dt-

Cordless Terminal

Make a Call

5.7.2.2

IftheHandsetisontheBaseUnit

5.7.2.3

IftheHandeetinnotontheBaseUnit

5.7.2.4

Dial a Stored Number

8-15

.....................................
..................................

8-15
8-16
8-16

................................................
............................................

8-16
8-16

5.7.3.2

ChainDialing

8-16

5.7.3.3

Last Number Redial ..................................................

Fixed Operations

.......................................................

Use Your Dt-

8-17
8-17

.................................................................

8-17

.........................................................
..........................................

.................................................................

5.9.2 EraseaStoredNumber
TROUBLE

8-17

............................................................

Cordless Te rminal Sped Dial8

5.9.1 StoreaNumber

8-17

....................................................................

5.8.3 SetupaConferenceCall

ii

8-15

Complete the Call with the Host Telepho.ne .............................

5.8.2 TransferaWl

SECTION 6

...........................

5.7.3.1

5.8.1 PlaceaCallOnHold

5.9

ServiceManual

.........................................................

5.7.2.1

5.7.3 AnsweraCallwiththeHoetTelephone

5.8

.........

Installation

8-18

..........................................................

SHOOTING

8-18
8-19

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.................

8-19

Chapter 8 - Table of Contents

. xj
.;
.--,

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 8- 1

Base Unit Controls and Fuuctions

Figure 8-2

Haudset Controls and Functions ..................................................

5-3

Figure 8-3

Supplying Power to the Base Unit

5-9

Figure 8-4

Placiug the Handset on the Base Unit

.............................................

5-9

Figure 8-5

Attaching the Belt Clip to the Haudset ...........................................

5-10

Figure 8-6

Installing the Battery Pack on the Handset .......................................

5-10

Figure 8-7

Sliding an Extra Battery Pack in the Spare Charger

5-11

Figure 8-8

Battery Contact Points

Chapter 8 - Table of Contents

................................................

................................................

...............................

.........................................................

5-2

5-13

. ..

Ill
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 843
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Has XFA                         : No
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:30 08:07:03-06:00
Producer                        : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0
Creation Date                   : 1999:11:11 11:28:06Z
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:30 08:07:03-06:00
Create Date                     : 1999:11:11 11:28:06Z
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:30 08:07:03-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu